t ay
phase weit ban
Ye any We
Ate (Oe
4 vt 1
eae & iy
ers uta
aha
ny RW ‘ ry UR, a) »
oe ‘ q
ier uN My ROY
oo
SANS ty 9 Ay ae ma Ny ha
Lat
’ Nt j
b Mae Cah) * hs a
‘ ay i
ee ey aka LATS i) NEARS
OARS : Hao an
ey HA nM Ti 4 Ah i iyi Bas
RRR SUN ah Ny! aad Nate nn »
Maly , OWN 4A FMT A OTK
y OM SOUR AUICN RU 4 eh hy
AAs
ae
echo
ai
ae ay as
Y NY WiLe Sy ” i Ph
* ee ii , sant
Avy ee
POON
vie
Wait a 19h
EM AL ie ie
oye va Ca att iw
' oN We " 4
sy a
mh i
ia yen
vi
Ra it i " aie
ea at
Vay Lig
ti ‘
e,
é SOP EEE EW NNNe!
Ga ENON Inv 3
Pea day bea a ald
+ ‘ “a
vase hae 4
4 he icy) thy:
HAD: tH
es DARREN su Ch
as
Tatung
‘x ah
Di Astiteat aay A a
ee clatic erates
Craprr se
‘ ns ; “ A
WAM S IE a Wha Lhot 7 ie. ,, ou
ato h ig ‘ yi eta
eit anal i Aci } ‘ Ea + rigs Sonne Ah vata t
pare Nihaed h ‘ i
De) a as wee eet 4K NOCN COR
i
NRO
wth Vida fa
be he
ate ‘ Y 4 cs
\ ihe
b ‘a at
euh) AY aay ri ee ane X. a SANG : ee
ae DaOne +e * ety!
on ‘i nae +)
Shien
oy ie
OOS (
Ny eNO ad
“ay PAY
Pal dette Bae
Ray
a WP ot
t r
v i
e
ns
axe
Tait on Re =e ;
i Gene 2 PRR a eee :
n
i
'
A
ae ‘ ‘
; ’
i
Mun Mia CE Yule
as ey
pee)
hae in
a a
fee ;
re
Pia
|
nth’
7 ee
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
VOLUME 46, 1956
NIAN INSTITUTION
SS NgTON 28. D.C.
PUBLISHED MONTHLY
BY THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mount Royat & GUILFORD AVEs.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
ACTUAL DATES OF PUBLICATION, VOLUME 46
No. 1, pp. 1-82, February 7, 1956
No. 2, pp. 33-68, March 8, 1956
No. 3, pp. 69-100, March 24, 1956
No. 4, pp. 101-136, May 7, 1956
No. 5, pp. 187-168, June 5, 1956
No. 6, pp. 169-200, July 24, 1956
No. 7, pp. 201-232, August 8, 1956
8,
No. pp. 233-268, September 12, 1956
No. 9, pp. 269-304, October 11, 1956
No. 10, pp. 305-336, November 6, 1956
No. 11, pp. 837-3872, December 10, 1956
No. 12, pp. 373-409, February 13, 1957
VOLUME 46 January 1956
NUMBER 1
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
Dae Ar
AWIHSON; as
Ga\8* “Ws
2) ¢y
(ere Or ere ae
ms \\ FEB 2 2
AN
ane ;
; Sr
ceeecere eccercetr
——————————
uc
Published Monthly by the
meso tN Get OVNS A CA DIEM Y, OF SCIENCES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: CHesteR H. Pacu, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RoNALD Bamrorp, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health
ImmMaNvurEL EsterMann, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof —In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3344 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges.—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the ProcrEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. ReHDER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. 8. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
SULSEnUp LON Rates tor Une JOURNAL —— ber ieale mere eee $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Voleieto vole l0sinel—notrayvailalplese ener: — _
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)........ 8.00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 45, inel.) available
for sale to libraries at $378.50.
Monoeraru No. 1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,” by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
InpEx to JouRNAL (vols. 1-40) and PRocEEDINGS.........................- $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (899-1911) complete: 9...) U5 2... eee $25.00
Single volumes; unbound. 2: 2.2 s sae ses seers ora iy ee ee 2.00
Sin@lemumberst cect ce eae ey ee, eee Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’? and
addressed to the Treasurer, H. 8. Rappieye#, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
D.C.
Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925.
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 46
January 1956
No. 1
EDITORIAL
THE woRK of an editor is not only to read
papers, accepting some and tactfully reject-
ing others, but also to improve the service
rendered to both readers and authors. My
previous editorial (June 1955) was addressed
primarily to readers. These remarks are
directed to authors.
The cost of publication, especially of
scientific material, has increased tremen-
dously in recent years. The Academy has
been spending a large part of its income to
subsidize publication of the results of scien-
tifie research, by paying direct printing ex-
penses and supplying reprints at less than
actual manufacturing cost. Early this year
a cost accounting resulted in raising the
price of reprints to approximately their cost.
A strong protest was raised, but our Ways
and Means Committee was already in action
and had made some progress. An arrange-
ment has now been completed whereby
papers can be reprinted at less cost, by
starting each paper on a new page. This will
sometimes threaten large blank spaces; but
your editor will endeavor to avoid this by
inserting quotations or other material. Such
extraneous matter will not appear in re-
prints. The new price schedule for reprints
is given on the inside front cover of this
issue.
Unfortunately, no rearrangement of lay-
out will reduce the printing cost of the
papers themselves. Many scientific journals
offer authors’ institutions the opportunity to
partially defray this cost by honoring page
charges. Publication of results is a vital part
of any research project, and publication cost
should be considered part of the research
cost. Organizations financing research should
not depend on private charity for dissemina-
tion of results. The Board of Managers of
the Academy has therefore established a
voluntary publication charge; it is hoped that
our local scientific institutions, both private
and governmental, will be able to honor this
charge and thereby further the interchange
of information among the various fields
represented by the Academy.
SIXTEEN YEARS AGO
The following item appeared in the July
1939 issue of this JOURNAL:
The 1148th meeting was held in the Cosmos
Club Auditorium, Saturday, March 11, 1939,
President Brickwedde presiding.
Program: RicHarp B. Roserrs, Department
of Terrestrial Magnetism of the Carnegie In-
stitution: The splitting of uranium and thorium
nuclei by neutrons.—Several years ago Fermi and
collaborators observed that artificial radioactivity
is induced when uranium is bombarded by
neutrons. Recently Hahn and Strassman have
shown by chemical methods that among the
radioactive elements produced are barium,
cerium, and lanthanum. This observation was
explained by Meitner and Frisch as a fission of
the uranium nucleus into two roughly equal
parts with approximately 200 million electron-
volts of energy released in the process. This
theory was soon confirmed by observing the
ionization produced by these heavy and highly
energetic particles. Neutrons were also found to
be emitted in this fission process and these
neutrons might conceivably lead to an exothermic
chain-reaction. However, it appears very prob-
able that separated isotopes of uranium in large
quantities would be necessary to sustain such a
chain-reaction.
FEB > {) 1956
2 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 46, No. 1
PHYSICS.—E ffect of defects on lattice vibrations, II: Localized vibration modes in a
linear diatomic chain.’ P. Mazur, E. W. Monrrouu, and R. B. Ports,? Uni-
versity of Maryland.
INTRODUCTION
The influence of defects or local dis-
turbances in otherwise regular media is a
subject of great current interest in physics.
The electrical properties of semiconductors
are mainly due to impurity levels from which
electrons can easily be excited into a con-
ducting state. The interaction of elementary
particles is the result of the manner in which
their existence disturbs the field of the
vacuum or ‘‘ether.”’
In a_ previous publication,’ hereafter
referred to as I, a discussion was given of
the effect of defects on the vibrations of
monatomic crystal lattices. Generally all
motions of a lattice can be expressed as
linear combinations of normal modes of
vibration. In a regular lattice these normal
or collective modes are plane waves. Gen-
erally normal modes of all frequencies in a
certain continuum band or range exist.
The lattice propagates driven oscillations
whose frequencies he in this band. But
frequencies which are outside of it are
damped out in a short distance. The higher
the frequency of such an oscillation the
shorter the distance required for a given
degree of damping. The motion of various
atoms contributes equally to the component
of a thermodynamic quantity (say free
energy or heat capacity) derived from a
particular mode.
It was shown that certain types of defects
in a crystal lattice give rise to localized
normal modes whose associated atomic
motions are concentrated in those atoms
that are near the defects. The corresponding
vibrational frequencies form a discrete set,
which is displaced out of the continuum of
frequencies of the perfect crystal. The atoms
that participate in localized modes are
responsible for more than their share of the
1This research was supported by the United
States Air Force through the Office of Scientific
Research of the Air Research and Development
Command.
2On leave from the University of Adelaide,
South Australia.
3 Monrrouu, E. W., and Ports, R. B., Phys.
Rev. 100: 525. 1955.
internal energy of the crystal. Hence the
region around the defect is equivalent to a
“hot spot” in the lattice. A localized mode
(either in the interior or on the surface of a
crystal) might catalyze physical and chemi-
cal processes which would not normally occur
at the existing temperature of the crystal.
Local surface defect modes might also excite
molecules adsorbed on the surface by having
a frequency almost equal to a vibrational
frequency of the adsorbed molecule.
It was also pointed out in I that attrac-
tions or repulsions occur between defects.
These are due to both the localized modes and
to the slight displacements which occur in
all the lattice frequencies. We shall show in
another paper that the pair theory of nu-
clear forces is essentially equivalent to the
continuum limit of the interaction between
two holes in a erystal lattice.
It is the purpose of the present paper to
discuss the effect of defects in a linear
alternating diatomic lattice. Although the
general method developed in I is used,
the diatomic lattice introduces several new
features such as the well-known splitting of
the frequency band into two bands, the
acoustical and the optical, separated by a
gap of forbidden frequency levels. It is
necessary to cover a wide range of masses
since in the alkali halides, for example, the
mass difference may vary from as little as 1
or 2 per cent to as great as a factor of 20.
Our results are analogous to those of
Saxon and Hutner* and Koster and Slater®
for localized wave functions and impurity
levels in semiconductors.
PERFECT LATTICE
Consider a chain of 4N + 1 particles of
masses either m or M arranged alternately
such that those at the ends are of mass m.
Let each particle be connected to its nearest
neighbor by a spring of stiffness y. The
equations giving the 4N — 1 normal modes
of longitudinal vibrations of the chain are
‘Saxon, D. S., and Hurner, R. A., Philips
Research Reports 4: 81. 1949.
> Koster, G. F., and Siatrer, J. C., Phys. Rev.
95: 1167. 1954.
JANUARY 1956
mea u(n)
+ y[u(n + 1) — 2u(n) + u(n — 1)] = 0
m= 0, +2, ---, QN — 2)
Mou(n)
+ yfu(n + 1) — 2u(n) + u(n — 1)| = 0
(2.1)
al, +3, ---, QN — 1)
u(2N) = u(—2N) = 0
i =
where w is the normal frequency and u(n)
the displacement of the nth particle from
its equilibrium position. We have postulated
the end particles to be fixed. The solutions
of these equations are
u;(n) = A sin (2N + n)e; n even
22)
uj(n) = Bsin (2QN + n)o; n odd
with
~; = jr/4N janinteger (2.3)
and
A is Qy — Mw _ 2 cos Pi (2.4)
B 27 COS 9; 2y — mo
There are 2N symmetric (1.e., u(—n) =
u(n)) modes with frequencies given by
MAZUR, MONTROLL, AND POTTS: LATTICE VIBRATIONS. II 3
i wow. =m+M
+(m? + M’? + 2mM cos 29;)°
; i (PG)
= [m + M + 2(mM)’ sin ¢;]’ (2.6)
+[m + M — 2(mM)* sin ol
where
i jn /A4N,
fe I,gose DN = 1, (Om)
Also there are 2N — 1 antisymmetric
(i.e. u(—n) = —u(n)) modes, with fre-
quencies given by (2.5) and (2.6) with
go; = jn/AN,
and in addition the frequency given by
REO 650 IV HD OR)
2) j 2 1
ee ) w= 2(m) for m<M (29)
ay; 7
or
Seni
e ) w, = 2(M)'. for m>M (2.10)
In the unusual terminology, the frequencies
gree J
I Ses Sa ey
AS ———--———-2 AS 2
OPTICAL
BAND
S 2W-/ S Nex
Ses a ee AS 2N
GAP
AS @N ee enera-=--
ACOUSTICAL
(7) m™<mM
(4) m>M
Fra. 1.—Normal frequency levels for the vibrations of a perfect alternating lattice, S = symmetric
modes; AS = antisymmetric modes.
+ JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
w? w
2g(m-+M) 2g(m+m)
mM nm
OPTICAL
BAND
245/m 2y/m
GAP
24/mM 2y5/m
ACOUSTICAL
BANO
3) Oo
(a) m<mM
Fic. 2.—Plot of w? versus defect mass m’ for frequencies that emerge from the bands
w, form the optical band and the w_ the
acoustical band (see Fig. 1). Note that in
both cases a level at the top of the optical
band, viz.,
JN}
(2M a, = 2m + a) ean
avi
and the level » = O at the bottom of the
acoustical band are missing.
ONE ISOTOPIC DEFECT
(a) Effect on the frequency levels
We now consider the effect of replacing
the central particle of mass m by one of
m’ = (1 — e)m. Four possibilities will be
considered since m’ may be greater or less
than m and m may be greater or less than M.
The only change in the fundamental equa-
tions (2.1) is that the equation for n = 0 is
replaced by
1 — e)mw u(0)
\ @ail))
an ylu(1) = 2u(0) + u(—1)} = 0)
The 2N — 1 antisymmetric modes of
the perfect lattice, since they force u(0) = 0,
are unchanged by the change in the mass of
VOL. 46, No. I
(6) m>M
the central particle. Hence the only altera-
tion is to the symmetric modes. This ob-
servation enables one to predict the effect of
the isotope on the frequency levels; for
noting that reduction of the mass increases
the frequencies and vice versa one can
predict that for m’ < m < M the top S
level will rise out of the optical band but
for the acoustical band the top S level
cannot rise above the AS level above it;
for m < M and m’ > m the S levels are
lowered and the bottom S level of the
optical band falls into the gap. For m > M
and m’ < m one level raises out of the
optical band and another from the acoustical
band and for m’ > m > M no levels come
out of the bands (see Fig. 2). These pre-
dictions are confirmed from the following
detailed analysis.
Since we are concerned only with the
symmetric modes we try for the solution of
(3.1)
u(n) = A, sin (2N ¥ n)e
Dy 604, Oy B)
2,
u(n) = B, sin (2N ¥ n)g Ce)
ey cs | LOR = i)
JANUARY 1956
Apart from the connecting equations we get,
as before,
(mwa _ 27) (Ma — 2y)
ee (3.3)
— 4y cos ¢ = 0
and the connecting equation with n = 0 is
(1 — e)mw’A, sin 2N¢
+ 7[2B, sin (2N — le
— 2A, sin 2N¢] = 0
(3.4)
or using (2.4)
[1 — e)mw — 2y\[Ma — 2y]
—4y’ sin (2N — 1)e cose = 0.
Use of (3.3) then gives the characteristic
equation
cot 2N¢e — « cosec 2¢ Ki (6) = 0 (3.5)
with
K.i(¢) = [M + m cos 2¢
(3.6)
+ (m’ + M’ + 2mM cos 2¢)'|/m
the solutions of which are to be inserted
into (3.3) to give the required frequencies.
It can be easily verified that for the special
MAZUR, MONTROLL, AND POTTS: LATTICE VIBRATIONS. II D
to that considered in I (see eq. A.8). The
solution of (3.5) can be investigated from
the graphs of cot 2N¢ and of
file, €) = € cosec 2g K,(¢). (3.7)
For the case m < M these graphs are
sketched in Fig. 3.
For m’ < m or € > O one intersection of
the f, curve with the cot 2N¢ curve is
“Jost”’ or is given by ¢ = ip and this corre-
sponds to the discrete frequency rising from
the top of the optical band. For m’ > m
or € < 0 the “intersection” ¢ = 7/2 + w
corresponds to the discrete frequency falling
into the gap from the optical band. This is
as illustrated in Fig. 2.
For the case m > WM the graphs are
sketched in Fig. 4. For m’ < m or € > 0
the intersection on f, at ¢ = 1 corresponds
to the discrete level emerging from the top
of the optical band and that of f_ at g =
a/2 + ip to the level emerging from the
top of the acoustical band. For m’ > m or
e < 0 there are no discrete levels; this is as
illustrated in Fig. 2.
(b) Evaluation of the discrete frequencies
The discrete frequencies can be calculated
for the limiting case N — o. For the inter-
case M = m the equation (3.5) reduces section ¢ = zy equation (3.5) becomes with
f+, E>0
th # na
5 TT/4N T
2
~ eae
f+, €<O f
Fic. 3—The graph of the function fi(¢,€) with m < M given by (8.7) and cot 2V¢. The intersections
give the solutions of (3.5).
6 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
\
N
N
NX
SS
~
~|_ f+, €>0
a
ee
fe) ea ee
Hata ae
f+, €<O
Vike
7
/
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 1
f-, €<0
sae ~_la
' SS =a 2
f-, €>0
Fia. 4.—The graph of the function f+(¢,€) with m > M given by (3.7) and cot 2N¢. The intersections
given the solutions of (3.5).
coth 2NYy — lasN > ~
m — e€ cosech 2¥[M + m cosh 2y
+ (m’ + M* + 2Mm cosh 2y)*| = 0 oe)
or
(1 + &*) sinh 2y — 2¢e cosh 2y
=2eM/m
(3.9)
For the level emerging from the top band
(1.e., for the cases m’ < m with m < M
orm > M)
eS) 2
——— W =
OY;
+ (m + M* + 2mM cosh 2y)?
= m+ m(e” sinh 2y — cosh 2p)
m+ M
(3.10)
which gives, on using (3.9),
=) oem Os aye
v
-{2M + [m1 + «’)
+ 42 (MW — m)}?}.
The special case IZ = m gives
(m/y)o = 4(1 — &) (3.12)
as obtained in I, (A.10). Also, for small ¢,
(3.11) gives
(3.11)
w = wi[l + (M/m)e + O(c] (3.13)
where w, is the top of the optical band
(see 2.11). This equation shows that as
€ — 0 or m’ — m, the discrete level returns
to the top of the band.
For the intersection ¢ = 7/2 + wa
similar analysis leads to the result
(2 2
(62) —
y
Te (en ie
; {2M — [m°(1 ae e) (3.14)
+ 4e2 (M? — m’)}*}.
This formula gives the frequency level which
falls into the gap from the top band when
m’ > m and m < M and the level which
rises into the gap from the bottom band
when m’ < m and m > M. For small e,
(3.14) gives
ico 2
ee
ays
-(m — M) & + O(e’)
so that as e > 0, (mM/y)w — 2M from
below if m < M and from above if m > M:
in the first case w = (2y/m)? is the bottom
of the optical band and in the second case
it is the top of the acoustical band.
A special case of some interest is when
2M + 2(M/m)
(3.15)
JANUARY 1956
e€—1 orm’ — 0. Then (8.11) and (3.14) give
(mM /y)o = (2M + 2M)(1 — &)*
im += M + 00 — e).
The top signs (corresponding to the fre-
quency emerging from the top of the
optical band) give w — ~ as ¢— 1 and the
bottom signs (for the frequencies in the gap)
= wo = M+ ™m.
ay
This value of w: is half that of w:, and also
the average of w for the bottom of the top
band and the top of the bottom band. This
result has an interesting interpretation for
the case m’ < m and m > M. As m’ > 0
one frequency — ~ (accounting for the
loss of one degree of freedom) and the
frequency given by (3.17) is a so-called
surface frequency. The effect of m’ — 0
is to reduce the lattice to two chains each
with one end fixed and the other free.
This problem is being considered in detail by
Wallis.”
In the case m < M and m’ > m the
limiting case ¢e = 1 — m’/m > —~& corre-
sponds to the central mass being infinite
and hence fixed, the lattice dividing into
(3.16)
(3.17)
® Wats, R. F., private communication.
“O53
‘05
ZAE
A (2 4/my?
04
03
MAZUR, MONTROLL, AND POTTS: LATTICE VIBRATIONS. II if
two separate lattices with fixed ends. From
(3.14), as €e — —«, w — (2y/M) which
corresponds to the top frequency of the
bottom band. Hence the level in the gap
falls from the bottom of the top band to
the top of the bottom band. The bottom S
level of the bottom band has meanwhile —
w = O accounting for the lost mode.
The frequency levels given by (3.11) and
(3.14) are plotted in Fig. 2.
ZERO-POINT ENERGIES
(a) Perfect lattice
The zero-point energy of the perfect lat-
tice with m < Mis
Ey = Sotho (4.1)
with w given by (2.6) and (2.9). Hence
ui = (m+ M)?{m + (m + M’)
ahr
2N—J
> fh = 4¢nmyd + my? 42)
Fai
. sin’(jr/8N)}’}
and in the limit as N — , Ey can be ex-
pressed in terms of an elliptic integral of
the second kind:
2 3 4
M/m
Fie. 5.—Self energy of an isotope plotted as a function of I/m for fixed m
8 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Ep
2 nn 8
INA(Qy/m)! = [1 aE (m/M)") —
a/4
[ (1 — 4(mM)?(m?+ M?)? (4.3)
0
-sin’ 6} dé.
(b) Self energy of an isotope
The change in zero point energy when the
central particle of mass m is replaced by an
‘Gsotope” of mass m’ can be calculated
using the method of contour integration
as discussed in I. The starting point is the
formula
AE _ 1 fy @d
thor Qn c o+ Wr dz
-In &,(z, €) dz
(4.4)
where from (3.6),
&,(z, €) = 1 — e tan 2Nz cosec 2z K(z)
= 1-4 ¢ tan 2Nz (4.5)
—(e/y) tan 2Nz cosec 22 wi. (z)
and C is the contour which is a rectangle
with corners -ia, 7/2 + ia. Since this
integral cannot be evaluated in closed form,
two extreme cases will be considered, firstly
when m M and secondly when m > M.
Gi) my M
In this case we assume M = m(1 + yn),
n small. For the contour C we can let a> «
so that the only contribution to the intergral
comes from the integration along the imagi-
nary axis, using w_(z) and ¢_(z, ©) giving
for large N.
NE —]
Tho, m(2m + 2M)!
a
{[m> + M? + 2Mm cosh 2t]' (4.6)
s—
where
,(t) = 1 — « tanh/
+ ¢ cosech 2¢[(m? + M’
+ 2Mm cosh 2)? — (M + m)]/m.
(4.7)
VOL. 46, No. 1
Using M = m(1 + 7), we obtain
[((m? + M? + 2Mm cosh 2t)? — (M+ m)}?
(2m + 2M)? (4.8)
= sinh 3¢ + O(n’)
and
In @,(¢) = In (1 — eé tanh 3?)
+en tanh 3 sech t(1 — e tanh 3f)~
+ O(n’). (4.9)
When these are inserted in (4.6) the term
without 7 gives precisely the result obtained
in I(4.15) for the monatomic lattice while
the term in 7 gives, after integration by
parts, the contribution
en [ ss tanh 2¢ dt
4n Jo cosh t — € sinh t™
This integration can be reduced to standard
integrals by writing
tanh 2¢
cosh t — € sinh t
(4.10)
2, sinh t — € cosh ¢
1+ = cosh 2¢ eu)
ze cosh t — € sinh |
and the final result is
Ce Ey = 2
shay
‘(m+ 2sin™ ©) + (8x) (1+ &)*
(4.12)
- en[2v/2 In (1 + V2) — V2 ex
SL = Sy 26 Oa e)| + O(n’)
(i) m > M
In this case we let M = &m, & small.
In the contour C we now eannot let a > «
but rather a — 0. In (4.4) we have to insert
w/o, = 1 — 3€ sin’ 2 + O(€/) (4.13)
w/o, = &sin 2[l — 11 + cos 2)]
+ 0) (4.14)
$.(z,€) = 1— e(1 + #) tan 2Nz cotz
+ O(€') (4.15)
JANUARY 1956
@_(z,e) = 1+ <(1 — &) tan 2Nztanz
-_ (2), Ga6)
For small a only the integration along the
horizontal sides of the rectangle C contribute
to the integral giving
ABE 1 [*’ > ose — 1a)
Yo, 2ni Jo zr Wr
. Gin &,(x — ia, e) — w(t + 1a) (4.17)
qx Or
d
aE In &,(x + 2a, €) dz.
In the limit of large NV
tan 2NiG@ == 7a) — 327 (4.18)
with considerable simplification of formulae
(4.15) and (4.16). In evaluating (4.17) for
the limiting case a — 0 two features are
important. Firstly to get the correct value
for AF the cases e > 0 and e < 0 have to
é
MAZUR, MONTROLL, AND POTTS: LATTICE VIBRATIONS. II 9)
be distinguished because in the first case
the discrete levels above both bands (corre-
sponding to 2; = a and z. = (1/2) + te)
have to be added while in the second case
there are no discrete levels which have to
be allowed for (c.f. Fig. 2b). The formulae
(3.11) and (3.14) give for the levels coming
out of the top and bottom bands respectively
w aes 4
ee 1 T 34 = 2) ap WO)
f= - ey - 30-28]
OL (4.20)
+ O(€).
The second important feature is that in
some of the integrals which arise, the
integration has to be performed before the
limit a — 0 is taken. A useful check on the
integrations is afforded by putting w = w,
so that the contour integral counts (the
number of levels in the band for the im-
perfect lattice) minus (the number of levels
ala @
8
.4 5G 8
= /{ — (msm)
Fra. 6.—Self energy of an isotope plotted as a function of ©
10 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
in the band for the perfect lattice). For
each band this is 0 or —1 according to
€ < QO ore > O. The final expression for the
self energy is
= e[-t+ta —@y"
2 L oe
He
(1/2 + sin | + TL = &)
3| 1 € 2)\-1 5
+e[t-£a-2 (4.21)
en a Qs 8) “Gy gia «|
2a
+ 0(€')
Two equations, (4.11) and (4.21), have
been derived giving the self energy of an
isotope, the first valid for m ~ M and the
second for m > M. With these two expres-
sions the complete range of values of MW
can be covered for ¢ as large as 0.7, the
connection between the two results im-
proving the smaller the value of e¢. For
example, for « = 0.2, (4.11) gives AF =
(const.) 0.980 for 7 = —0.64 or M = 0.36m,
whereas (4.21) gives, for the value — = 0.6
or the same value of WM = 0.36m, AH =
(const.) 0.980. As WM — «, AH — (const.)
{(m/m’)? — 1} which is merely the difference
in zero point energy between two oscillators
because the lattice degenerates into a series
of uncoupled oscillators.
In Fig. 5 the self energy is plotted as a
function of (J//m) for constant m, and in
Fig. 6 as a function of ¢ for various values
of M.
TWO ISOTOPIC DEFECTS
If two isotopes of mass m’ replace the
two particles of mass m at the positions
numbered +2/ then the characteristic equa-
tions are
cos 2Ne¢ cosec (2N — 2l)e
— 2¢ cos 2le cosec 2¢ Ki(y) = 0 (5.1)
sin 2N¢ cosee (2N — 2l)e
— 2e sin 2ly cosec 2g Ki(v) = 0. (G2)
As in the analysis given in I and in 4(b)
above, the energy of interaction V between
VOL. 46, No. 1
two isotopes 1s given by the contour integral
V bie 1 w(z) d
Sher, Write = wy, az
In Pi (z, €) dz (5.3)
with
viz) = 1 — &Ki() sm’ ON = Qe
[2 sin 4Nz sin’ z — e€ sin (2N — 2l)z
- sin (2N + 2))z Ki(z)f. (6.4)
As in (4.6) the contour integral reduces to
the single integral
Vinge =I
m(2m + 2M)!
. | (On? + M? + 2Mm cosh 28)? (5.5)
Jo
thoy,
— (m+ M)} = In y(t) dt
where
w@ =1— 2
{M + m cosh 2t
— (m? + M? + 2Mm cosh 2t)*}
exp. (—4lt)
m sinh 2t — {M + mcosh 2t
— (m? + M* + 2Mm cosh 2t)*}
(5.6)
We can obtain an expansion for V valid
for large distances by expanding the inte-
grand as a power series in ¢ and exp (—/f).
This yields
Vi _ —2(e’m’)(M m)? 1
a(M +m)? (8i)8
3em
il il
[i+ ea to(s)|
In the case m =
Vo —-2e 1 3¢€ ,)
tho, «© (16/1)? E tap G | (8)
in agreement with I (5.3b).
An important consequence of the result
(5.7) is that it proves that V is negative
or the interaction between the isotopes
attractive regardless of the relative magni-
tudes of m and J. In the more general case
tha,
©)
M this expression becomes
JANUARY 1956
of isotopes of masses (1 — €:)m and (1 — e2)m
the energy of interaction is proportional to
€€. and hence is repulsive if ¢; and & are of
opposite sign. Also if one isotope is of mass
(1 — «)M replacing a particle of mass MW
then in the equation (5.7) the factor em
becomes ¢V/. Thus for the interaction be-
tween two “M”’ isotopes, em’ is replaced by
(e:eM) and for the interaction between an
““m” and an ‘“‘7”’ isotope, the factor becomes
(eeomM).
CONCLUSION
In a perfect alternating lattice the normal
frequencies fall into two bands separated
by a gap. It has been shown in the present
work that, as for the monatomic lattice,
localized modes can occur with discrete
frequency levels out of the bands when the
lattice contains defects such as isotopes.
For the alternating lattice, four interesting
eases arise. When one of the lighter masses
“m”’ is replaced by an isotope ‘“‘m’’’, then
if m’ < m one level jumps out of the optical
band into the region above, whereas if
m’ > m one level jumps from the bottom
of the optical band into the gap between
the two bands. When one of the heavy
masses is replaced by a lighter isotope one
frequency jumps out of the top of the
acoustical band into the gap while at the
same time a second level jumps out of the
top of the optical band into the region
above. Finally, when one of the heavy
MAZUR, MONTROLL, AND POTTS: LATTICE VIBRATIONS. II 11
masses is replaced by a heavier isotope
then no frequencies emerge from the bands.
The defect level which rises out of the
top of the acoustical band into the gap is
of special interest. As the defect mass ap-
proaches zero the level approaches the
level at the center of the gap. This level
could be interpreted as due to a surface
mode.
The self energy of an isotope has been
computed, and the series solutions obtained,
one valid for m M and the other for
m >> M, together cover the whole range of
variation of the masses. The interaction
energy between two isotopes is proportional
to the inverse cube of the distance of separa-
tion and is attractive for two light or two
heavy isotopes and repulsive for a light
and a heavy isotope.
Although this paper has been concerned
with only the one-dimensional lattice, the
general features will be similar for the more
realistic three-dimensional lattice. Thus one
will expect surface modes, a phenomenon
not arising in monatomic lattices. Also
the attractive and repulsive character of
the forces between isotopes will be of special
interest in the two and three-dimensional
lattices; a particle of mass intermediate
between m and M will “appear” as a light
isotope to one set of masses but as a heavy
isotope to the others, depending on its
position. The detailed analysis of the two
and three-dimensional lattices will be given
in a following publication.
Citius emergit veritas ex errore quam ex confusione.—FRancis Bacon, Novwm Organwm.
12 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 46, No. 1
MATHEMATICS.—Numerical experiments in potential theory using orthonormal
functions. P. Davis and P. RasrnowitTz,! National Bureau of Standards.
EDITORIAL NOTE
In potential theory and vibration theory much
use is made of a complete set of orthonormal
solutions appropriate to the domain of the
problem. The solution of the particular boundary
value problem at hand is represented as a linear
combination (generally an infinite series) of these
orthonormal functions. One property of ortho-
normal expansions is that if the infinite series is
approximated by its first n terms, the least
square error fit is always obtained.
This approach is related to much work that
has been carried out in the last generation but
which has so far been limited to theoretical dis-
cussions and applications to geometrically
simple domains such as circles and rectangles.
In practical problems, different methods have
been preferred, e.g., relaxation techniques. The
numerical experiments described in the following
paper show that the advent of high-speed auto-
matic digital computing machines makes the
method of orthogonal functions feasible.
INTRODUCTION
We describe in this paper three computa-
tions that were carried out on the National
Bureau of Standards Eastern Automatic
Computer (SEAC) and which made use of
a multiple purpose orthonormalizing code
recently developed for this machine [ef.
Davis and Rabinowitz (/)]. These com-
putations can be described briefly as fol-
lows:
(a) Computation of the system of orthonormal
polynomials for a ‘‘bean shaped”? domain
(Fig. 1).
(6) Solution of a Dirichlet Problem for this
“bean shaped’’ domain.
(c) Computation of the system of orthonormal
polynomials for the square.
For the theory of orthonormal functions
as applied to problems in conformal map-
ping, boundary value problems, etc, the
reader is referred to Bergman [2], Szeg6 [3].
The orthonormalization code employed
possesses the following features and limita-
tions:
(1) Inner products of the type [ fg ds
(of
are replaced by an integration rule
1 Now at the Weitzmann Institute, Rehovot,
Israel.
[fos D wis (Pog Po)
(2) The orthonormalization itself is car-
ried out by the Gram-Schmidt process.
(3) The code is of single precision type.
That is, the computation is carried out with
44 binary digits (11+ decimal digits).
It will be useful to specify the ortho-
normalization process more precisely. Let n
vectors, f;, of dimension N, have com-
ponents Yi, Y2, °°: , Yin, ¥ — 1,2, --- ,n,
TABLE 1.—LEAST SQUARES SOLUTION FOR
DrirIicHLET PROBLEM FOR BEAN-SHAPED REGION
| eS Po| A
38 | ee 3 a> | 2a
Ay < fo) 5 fQ a
1 -000} .110}.01414) .76089|/—.0030 || Boundary Value =
2 |—.050) .108).01427) .72025|—.0031 e™cos y + log
3 |—.100) .115).01963) .66721|—.0032 {Ql — y)2+ 22]
4 |—.160) .150).02300| .55236)—.0034
5 |—.220) .205).03897| .40068|—.0032 || Least Square Har-
6 |—.320) .300|.02792) .17014/—.09006|| monic Polynomial
7 |—.400) .358).03324) .06949| .0044 1.0017261087
8 |—.500) .420).01483) .02006| .0069 || +-.997339446 Re (z)
8 |—.550) .436).01423) .04590) .0023 \|—1.991187716 Im (z)
10 |—.600) .430).01505) .12037|—.0042 ||+1. 48065453 Re (z2)
11 |—.644! .400).01483) .22850|—.0069 || —.00949996 Im (z?)
12 |—.660| .350).01420) .33248)—.0026 || +. 1889575 Re (Zz)
13 |—.655| .300).02881) .41180) .0014 || +.6236775 Im (23)
14 |—.635| .200/.03043) .56168) .0038 || —.355600 Re (z4)
15 |—.595|} .100/.03076) .70060) .0009 || +.024526 Im (2)
16 |—.552| .000).03311) .84177/—.0019 || —.11960 Re (25)
17 |—.500;—.105|.03175| .98915|—.0023 || —.28034 Im (z5)
18 |—.440|—.200|.01809/1.12198} .0001
19 |—.400)—.250).01998)1.19326) .0018
20 |—.350)—.300).01882|1.26792| .0029
21 |—.300|—.344|.03140)1.33734) .0027
22 |—.204|—.400|.03450/1.44504; .0000 || Discrepanciesat Points
23 |—.100|—. 436|.02846/1.54875/—.0025 Interior to Bean
24 -000|— . 448) .02831)1.64168|— .0017 x Discrepancy
25 - 100|— . 442).03860/1.73582) .0015 4 +.0009
26 230) — . 400} .02431/1.85882) .0037 56) —.0001
27 - 300} — . 350} .02059/1.91643) .0014 32, —.0007
28 | .353|—.300].03566)1.95563|— .0013 oil —.0013
29 - 430|— . 200) .03122)1.99206| — .0030 0.0 —.0017
30 -477|—.100}.02975/1.96611| .0004 —.1 —.0017
31 -510} .000).02846)1.89648) .0041 —.2 —.0015
32 -522| .100).01696/1.75623} .0030 =} —.0011
33 -520) . 160).02330)1. 63625) — . 0006 —.4 —.0010
34 -500) .240).02102/1. 41224) — 0057 oH) —.0014
35 -456) .300).01795)1. 14765] —.0038
36 | .400) .330/.01147) .91523) .0028
37 | .360) .337!.01762| .78912) .0058
38 | .300} .320).01648| .68785| .0054
39 | .250) .290).01901) .66231) .0027
40 | .200) .245).01901| .69067|—.0001
41 - 150) .200).01809) .72694|—.0017
42 | .100) .160).01677) .75642'—.0025
43 -050) .128/.01501) .77202|—.0028
JANUARY 1956
and let one additional vector f have com-
ponents yi, °°: , Yn.
Let
gd: = anfi
go = Anfi + Anfe
$3 = Gufi + Ayvfo + Assfs
where the vectors ¢; have components
21,22, °°° , 2in and are orthonormal in the
sense that
N
(¢:, ¢;) = ee Wr ik Zin = Oi.
The least square approximation to f is
given by
po Dy, (f, dudo: = > dk fx
k=1 k=1
where d; = yee Gi Pi) Ax; 5 J a IL, 2, 2925. 4s
a.; = 0, k < j. The discrepancy in this ap-
proximation is defined by
5=f- LU, dnlde
=f-Ddihe.
The input and output of the code may be
indicated diagramatically as follows:
Vector Input Vector Output
weights fi ja tp f og gt ohn 6
Wr Yu Ya Yni Yi ie 221 Zn 1
ONY
Wn Yin Y2n Ynn YN \(21n 22N Znn On
Q it @ O- —@ Qy1 21 Oni —dy
0 0 1 0 0 0 a22 An2 —do
0 O 0 0 0 0 O An3 —d3
nr . . . . n . . .
0 O 0 1 0 0 O Qnn —dn
The high-speed capacity of the code is given
by the inequality (n + N) < 150.
COMPLEX ORTHOGONAL POLYNOMIALS
Let B designate a simply connected region
lying in the complex z-plane whose boundary
C is rectifiable. Let w(z) designate a positive
and continuous weight function defined on
C (or on B + C). In the space of analytic
DAVIS AND RABINOWITZ: ORTHONORMAL FUNCTIONS 13
functions which are regular in B + C, we
may introduce the inner product,
2) (fa) = | feq@wl) as
C
and orthonormalize the powers 1, 2, 2,
z, -+: with respect to this inner product.
Designate the polynomials which arise in
this fashion by
(3) ONO) = Ne” ae 9° 83
Designate by ¢(z) the function which maps
the exterior of C conformally onto the
exterior of | w| = 1,¢(2) = 0, ¢/(0) = 1.
If z is exterior to C, we shall have
ce 0:
(nA Bel) — 4G
(5) ue e2 ee = Ie
where c is the transfinite diameter of C.
These results are independent of the weight
function w(z).
Let (z) map the interior of C conformally
onto the interior of | w| = 1. Let the weight
w(z) = 1, then
6) Lapa = Wevor
where LZ is the length of C. For details on
these matters and for some information as to
the rapidity of convergence see Szegd [3],
pp. 355-366.
ORTHOGONAL HARMONIC POLYNOMIALS
If the set of harmonic polynomials 1;
Re(z), Im(z); Re(z*), Im(z’) --- are ortho-
normalized with respect to the inner product
(f,.0) = | He, Dale, ») as;
(7) : ; :
ds = dx + dy,
there is obtained a system of orthonormal
harmonic polynomials p,(v, y) Which is
intimately related to the harmonic kernel
function, the Greens’ function, and other
potential theoretic domain functions for B.
See Bergman [2]. To determine a harmonic
function in B with boundary data f(x, y)
on C (the Dirichlet problem) we may write,
14 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
h(a, y)
_ Ss lf flu, v)pr(u, v) as| Dace y)
n=0 Cc
and each finite segment of (8) provides a
harmonic polynomial which fits the bound-
ary data best in the sense of least squares.
(8)
DIRICHLET PROBLEM FOR A BEAN-
SHAPED REGION
A bean shaped region (see Fig. 1) was
obtained from a free-hand drawing on co-
ordinate paper. The region itself is “‘defined”’
by means of 48 points on the contour (see
Table 1). These points are not distributed
equally on the boundary, but somewhat
more points were placed where the curvature
is greatest.
Although there are certain theoretical
difficulties which occur when non-convex
regions are employed, we were interested in
testing the process for a fairly intricate
region. Since the region was not specified
analytically no attempt was made to
incorporate into the weights w, (see eq.
(1)) a very exact line element ds or a very
exact rule of numerical integration. For this
region, weights w, were taken proportional
to the distance between the successive points
given on the contour. These are listed in
column 4 of Table 1.
As boundary value data, we used the
VoL. 46, No. 1
values of the harmonic function
(9) u(x, y) = Re(e? + log (2 — 2))
at the 43 points on the boundary. These
are listed in column 5 of Table 1. This
boundary data was approximated by linear
combinations of the 11 harmonic functions
1, Re(z), --- , Re(z’), Im(2’).
The input data for this problem was ac-
cordingly, w; = the weights of column 4,
Table 1, yx, = {22 (a + ty:)?,
(10) fr = Re(e™***” + log(a, + iy — 2)).
Column 6, Table 1 lists the discrepancy
between the specified values and computed
(least square) values along the contour.
It will be seen that the highest deviation is
0.0069. If one knew that this were the
greatest deviation over the whole contour
then the maximum principle for harmonic
functions would tell us that this is also the
greatest deviation in the interior. Un-
fortunately, it is impossible theoretically to
make such a conclusion, but one feels
that in the interior these deviations are also
of the same order of magnitude. We have
computed the deviations at ten points along
the real axis in the interior of the region
and have listed them in Table 1. These
results bear out this feeling.
? For a theoretical discussion of this point see,
ci KK. Payne and H. F. Weinberger [4] and Nehari
[5], [6].
Fic. 1.—Bean-shaped region used in computation
JANUARY 1956
ORTHOGONAL POLYNOMIALS FOR A BEAN-
SHAPED REGION
The input data here was as follows,
w; = the weights of Column 4, Table 1,
Yjr = (t + tyr)’, y = arbitrary. As part
of the output data we obtained the co-
efficients of the orthonormal polynomials,
and the values of each orthonormal poly-
nomial at each of the 43 points on the
contour. We obtained the orthonormal
polynomials up to and including those
of degree 21. For reasons which will be
explained presently, it is not felt. that the
polynomials of degree greater than 11 are of
great significance numerically.
TABLE 2.—DETERMINATION OF TRANSFINITE
DIAMETER OF BEAN-SHAPED REGION
n Rn/Rpxr
485511
913294
503448
.903615
506216
006834
. 908043
-507085
.907510
-505941
508073
SCO ONOMOMPWNrH ©
ps
pu(z)
Pro(Z)
ON THE BOUNDARY OF THE BEAN
TaBLE 3.—THE QUANTITY EVALUATED
Pt. No. | pu/pro | Pt. No, | pu/ Pio |
1 .882 23 .937
2 . 906 24 1.018
3 944 25 1.016
4 987 26 .968
5 .999 27 1.069
6 .983 28 .985
7 .992 29 .996
8 1.017 30 1.056
9 .993 3l .940
10 .980 32 1.050
11 1.019 33 1.026
12 .989 34 .976
13 .974 35 1.034
14 1.004 36 984
15 1.082 37 981
16 .994 38 1.029
17 943 39 1.057
18 1.089 40 1.083
19 1.040 41 981
20 .930 42 .928
21 . 962 43 .890
2, 1.067
DAVIS AND RABINOWITZ: ORTHONORMAL FUNCTIONS 15
Table 2 presents the ratios kn/kni1 for
Tie — Oe eel) ec cording tom)! these
ratios approach the transfinite diameter of
the region. The convergence of this sequence
is not too rapid, but the table suggests that
we have determined this constant to two
decimal places. We have computed these
ratios also for n = 11, --- , 20, but have not
tabulated them here. Their behavior is
steady for a while and then as n > 11, they
begin to increase rapidly towards one. This
is the result of two things. In the first
place, there is a considerable loss of sig-
nificance in the coefficients of high order due
to the fact that these values have to be
scaled down sufficiently so as to fit on the
machine. Secondly, since only crude integra-
tion rules were employed in computing
i 2"2" ds, the orthonormal polynomials
Cc
themselves tend more to those corresponding
to finite sum inner product as n approaches
the number of points on the contour.
According to (4), the ratio Pnsil2) tends
Prlé
to the exterior mapping function. We have
tested this out for = 10. The worst agree-
ment can be expected on the boundary of
the region, where a theoretical value of
|¢(z)| = 1, z€C, should be obtained.
Table 3 lists the values of | pu(z)/pro(z) |
on the contour C. A maximum error of
10% from the theoretical value of 1 was
obtained. The average error appears to be
about 5%. From the values of pio(z) on the
contour it was a fairly simple matter to
trace the variation in arg pio(z), 2 € C, and
to verify that all the zeros of pio(z) lie in B.
Thus, pu/pi is regular outside of B.
As might have been foreseen from the
behavior of the ratios ky41/k, for n > 11.
no improvement in the quantities
| Pn+t (2)/Dn (z) |
was observed for n > 11. We shall discuss
in a later paragraph how these shortcomings
‘an, In certain instances, be overcome.
We have not yet developed a code for the
rapid evaluation of the interior mapping
function through the use of (6) and so an
estimate of the quality of the convergence
of this formula cannot be given at the
present time.
16 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 46, No. 1
TaBLE 4.—ORTHONORMAL POLYNOMIALS FOR A SQUARE; SIDE = 1.4; Sum or GaussIAN WEIGHTS = 1.0
10000000000
1.2371791483 Z
1.4937246015 Z?
1.7603713248 Z%
2.2025044571 Z4 +0. 4230570561
2.6608221383 2° +0.7301295947 Z
3.220657584 Z® +1.1572896252 Z?
3.905515952 Z7 +1.7238789614 Z%
4.737815070 2% +2.4298575834 Z4
5.737742726 Z9 +3.3915415979 75
6.949286858 71° +4.645751758 Z°
8.416037589 Zl +6.274558086 Z?
10.19384526 Z +8 .381528538 2%
1234288234 Z +11.102777658 Z?
14.94442510 74 +14.597987726 Z1°
18.09361812 715 +19.073026420 711
.0188295964
0646244543 Z
. 2286090195 Z?
.§137415655 78
.9916706683 Z4
.7111406242 2%
2.782242918 Z®
+4 .339843064 Z7
+ .0261223727
+ .0433444223 Z
+ .0869122976 Z?
+ .1803740299 Z?
1G Eek |
ORTHOGONAL POLYNOMIALS FOR A SQUARE
For machine purposes, it is convenient
to have all distances from the boundary
to the origm <1, and so the side of the
square was taken to be a = 1.4. Since the
boundary of the square consists of ele-
mentary curves, it is not too difficult to
employ high accuracy integration formulas
in (1). In computing with the square, we
selected along each of the sides a 16 point
Gaussian integration formula. At the time of
computation, this was the highest Gaussian
formula available, though subsequently
Gaussian formulas of higher order were
computed. (See Davis and Rabinowitz [7]).
Inasmuch as the function z* = (a + iy)* is,
along either x = const. or y = const., a
polynomial in y or in x of degree k, this
Gaussian integration formula will produce
inner products which are completely ac-
curate, neglecting machine roundoff, up to
TABLE 5.—DETERMINATION OF TRANSFINITE
DIAMETER OF SQUARE; SIDE = 1.4
n Rn/Rn+
0 .808290377
1 828251169
2 848528137
3 .799258916
4 .827753357
5 .826173559
6 .824643305
Ul 824328492
8 .825728043
9 .825659214
10 .825719560
11 .825599896
12 825888555
13 .825918846
14 .825950067
the terms i 22" ds. No particular use of
(oj
the symmetries of the square was made
and the cyclic occurrence of many zero
coefficients in the orthonormal polynomials
served as a running check on the accuracy
of the process at the machine end of the job.
The orthonormal polynomials are listed in
Table 4. Table 5 lists the ratios k,/kn+1
which approach the transfinite diameter of
the square. The theoretical value for this
quantity [see Polya, Szegé (8), p. 252] is
1 2
~ 14 PQ _ 9 gogo38
Aq?
Thus, using orthonormal polynomials of
degree 15, we have secured this quantity to
three significant figures.
CONCLUDING REMARKS
The method of orthonormal functions for
the solution of problems in potential theory
is an attractive one from the point of high-
speed computing inasmuch as a single all
purpose code can, with suitable small
modifications, be made to cover a variety
of problems. The inputs for these problems
are especially easy to handle.
The accuracy that has been obtained in a
moderate amount (about 2 hours) of com-
puting time on SEAC is not great; about 2
decimal places. To obtain this, one would
make use of about 15 approximating func-
tions each of which is defined by its values
at about 50 points. In order to increase this
accuracy, we would need to increase simul-
taneously the number of orthonormal func-
tions employed and the number of points
at which each function is defined. From the
JANUARY 1956
machine point of view, this means that we
must employ double precision coding in
order to retain significance in the higher
harmonies. Accordingly, four place ac-
curacy might require about 24 hours of
computing time on SEAC.
The authors wish to thank the computa-
tion Laboratory of the National Bureau of
Standards for carrying out certain (hand)
computations necessary for the final prepara-
tion of this report.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
(1) Davis, P.,and Rasinowitz, P. A multiple pur-
pose orthonormalizing code and its uses. Journ.
DAVIS AND RABINOWITZ: ORTHONORMAL FUNCTIONS 17
Assoc. Computing Machinery, 1: 183-191.
1954.
(2) Beremans. The kernel function and conformal
mapping, New York, 1950.
(3) SzEGé, G., Orthogonal Polynomials, New York,
1938.
(4) Payne, L. E., and Wrinspercer, H. F. New
bounds in harmonic and biharmonic problems,
Jour. Math. and Physics 33: 291-307. 1955.
(5) Newari, Z., On the numerical computation of
mapping functions by orthogonalization, Proc.
Nat. Acad. Sci. 37: 369-372. 1951.
(6) Newari, Z. On the numerical solution of the
Dirichlet problem. (To appear.)
(7) Davis, P., and RapinowitTz, P. Abscissas and
weights for Gaussian quadratures of high
order. (To appear.)
(8) Pézya, G.,and SzuaG6, G. Isoperimetric inequali-
tues in mathematical physics, Princeton, 1951
NOTES AND NEWS
FELLOWS OF IRE ELECTED
The Washington Section of the Institute of
Radio Engineers announces the election of nine
members to the grade of Fellow. Presentation of
certificates will be made at the Washington Sec-
tion Annual Banquet by the President of IRE to:
ALEXANDER, S. N., National Bureau of Standards.
For contributions to the development and appli-
cation of digital computers.
Beutz, W. H., Carpr., USN (Ret.) For leadership
in improving the reliability of military elec-
tronic systems.
Cuark, A. B. (Deceased 14 Nov. 1955.) For early
development and leadership in the field of
telephonic transmission systems.
Corcoran, G. F., University of Maryland. For
contributions to electrical engineering educa-
tion and to the associated literature.
Davis, T. M., Naval Research Laboratory. For
contributions in the field of military radio
communication.
Dinetry, E. N., Jr., National Security Agency.
For contributions in the fields of electronic
guidance and detection systems.
Kaumus, H. P., Diamond Ordnance Fuze Labora-
tory. For contributions in the fields of electro-
mechanical devices and electronic measurement
instruments.
Paag, C. H., National Bureau of Standards. For
contributions to military electronic research
and development.
Rasinow, Jacos, Rabinow Engineering Co. For
contributions in the fields of electronic ordnance
and automatic control.
Special recognition will be given to Wilbur 8.
Hinman, Jr., Technical Director of the Diamond
Ordnance Fuze Laboratory, who is this year’s re-
cipient of the Harry Diamond Memorial Award
NEW MEMBER OF NATIONAL
RESEARCH COUNCIL
Ray P. Trrte, a member of the Photometry
and Colorimetry Section of the National Bureau
of Standards, has been appointed a member of
the National Research Council. He will represent
the Illuminating Engineering Society in the Divi-
sion of Engineering and Industrial Research for
a period of three years ending June 30, 1958.
Mr. Teele has gained international recognition
as a member of photometric fields. His work
covers the maintenance of the national photo-
metric units of luminous intensity (candlepower)
and luminous flux; developing and maintaining
standards of illumination and photometric bright-
ness; participating in the national and inter-
national standard comparisons; and evaluating
candlepowers of different colored lights by study-
ing the luminosity factors of the human eye.
Born in Washington, D. C., in 1903, Mr. Teele
came to the Bureau in 1923. He received his
bachelor of science degree in electrical engineering
from the University of Michigan in 1927, and his
master of science degree in physics from George
Washington University in 1929.
Author or coauthor of some 15 articles pub-
lished in his field of research, Mr. Teele also
holds a patent for a blackout automobile head-
light mask and another patent for a headlamp
for motor vehicles. He is a member of the Optical
Society of America, the Philosophical Society of
Washington, the Illuminating Engineering So-
ciety, the Washington Academy of Sciences, and
the American Association for the Advancement
of Science.
18 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 46, No. 1
ZOOLOGY —The ticks (Acarina: Ixodoidea) of the J. Klapperich Afghanistan
Expedition, 1952 and 1953. GEORGE ANASTOS, University of Maryland.
This report brings together the available
information on the ticks of Afghanistan and
extends to 14 the number of known species
from this country. None of the ticks recorded
from Afghanistan are endemic but also
occur in Iran, in India, and in the southern
part of the U.S.S.R. The records and
collections studied so far are too small and
often lacking in essential data to allow any
far-reaching conclusions to be drawn. Un-
doubtedly future collections will extend the
current list considerably since scarcely any
tick records are available for the extensive
wild fauna known from this country.
The earlier records of ticks in Afghanistan
were included only as incidental ones in
studies on the tick fauna of the surrounding
countries. Yakimov (1922) reported on the
Ixodidae in Russia and included one record
of Hyalomma aegyptium (Linné), 1758, from
Koscha on the Russo-Afghan frontier. In a
revision of the Indian Ixodidae Sharif (1928)
recorded males of Hyalomma aegyptium
dromedarii Koch, 1844 (probably H. drome-
darit Koch, 1844), on Hrinaceus megalotis
Blyth from Afghanistan and males of
Hyalomma_ syriacum Koch, 1844 (=H.
aegyptium (Linné), 1758), from Jugdulluk
on Testudo horsfieldi Gray. An undetermined
species of Ornithodoros was noted by
Avanesov (1938) in native dwellings in
North Afghanistan and Pavlovsky (1944)
later reported the occurrence of Ornithodoros
papillipes \irula, 1895 (=O. tholozani
(Laboulbéne and Mégnin, 1882). Pomerant-
zev (1946, 1950) recognized the occurrence
of H. dromedari and of H. aegyptiwm in
Afghanistan but was apparently citing the
records of Sharif.
In 1954 the author reported the results of
a collection from Afghanistan made by the
Third Danish Expedition to Central Asia.
In addition to Hyalomma aegyptium which
had been recorded previously the following
species were found to be new to Afghanistan:
Hyalomma excavatum (Koch, 1844, H.
schulzer Oleney, 1931, H. rufipes glabrum
Delpy, 1949, Dermacentor niveus Neumann,
1897, Ixodes redikorzevi emberizae Pomerant-
zev, 1950, Rhipicephalus sanguineus (La-
treille), 1806, and Haemaphysalis numidiana
Neumann, 1897 (=H. erinacei Pavesi, 1884).
In 1955 the author was fortunate to
receive another collection from Afghanistan
made by J. Klapperich, Bonn, Germany, in
1952 and 1953. This collection, though
small, contained four species new to Afghan-
istan: Argas persicus (Oken), 1818, Derma-
centor marginatus (Sulzer), 1776, Haemaphy-
salis sulcata (Can. and Fanz.), 1877/1878,
and Ixodes redikorzevi redikorzevi Olenev,
1927. It also expanded the range of four
species previously recorded from this area:
Dermacentor niveus Neumann, 1897, Hya-
lomma dromedari Koch, 1844, H. excavatum
Koch, 1844 and Rhipicephalus sanguineus
(Latreille), 1806. No host information was
given for the ticks in this collection.
REFERENCES
Anastos, G. The 3rd Danish Expedition to Central
Asia. Zoological Results 12. Ticks (Chelicerata)
from Afghanistan. Vid. Medd. Dansk Naturh.
Foren. 116: 169-174. 1954.
Avanesoy, G. A. Tick transmitted spirochetosis in
Afghanistan. Med. Paraz. Parazitar. Bolezni
7: 88-94. 1938.
Hooastraat, H. Notes on African Haemaphysalis
ticks. I. The Mediterranean-littoral hedgehog
parasite H. erinacei Pavesi, 1884 (Ixodoidea,
Ixodidae). Journ. Parasit. 41: 221-223. 1955.
Pavuovsky, E. N. Tick recurrent fever. Medgiz:
1-79. 1944.
PoMERANTZEV, B. I. Ticks, family Ixodidae. The
U.S.S.R. and adjoining countries. Opred.
Fauna §.8.8.R. Zool. Muz. Akad. Nauk.
Leningrad (26): 1-28. 1946.
———. Fauna of U.S.S.R. Arachnida. Acad. Sci.
U.S.S.R. 4: 1-224. 1950.
Suarir, M. A revision of the Indian Ixodidae with
special reference to the collection in the Indian
Museum. Rec. Indian Mus. 30: 217-344. 1928.
Yaximov, V. L. Contribution a Vétude des Ixodidés
de Russie. Bull. Soc. Path. Exot. 15: 41-46.
1922.
JANUARY 1956
ANASTOS: TICKS FROM AFGHANISTAN
COLLECTION DATA
19
Acc. No. Species Locality Date No.
EP-6 Argas persicus Kandahar 18-II-53 1 adult
DM-2 Dermacentor marginatus Do-Shak, Khinjan Valley, Hindu | 1-X-52 1 female
; Kush
DM-3 Dermacentor marginatus Larki, Sarekanda Valley, Badak- | 3-VIII-53 | 1 male
shan
DM-4 Dermacentor marginatus Walang, Salang Valley, Hindu | 29-IX-52 1 female
Kush
DM-5 Dermacentor marginatus Walang, Salang Valley, Hindu | 29-IX-52 1 male
Kush
DM-6 Dermacentor marginatus Sarekanda Mountain, Badakshan | 31-VII-53 | 3 females
DM-7 Dermacentor marginatus Sarekanda Mountain, Badakshan | 28-VII-53 | 1 male, 1
female
DM-8 Dermacentor marginatus Sarekanda Mountain, Badakshan | 29-VII-53 | 1 female
DN-2 Dermacentor niveus Sanglish Pass, Minjan Mountain, | 2-VIII-52 | 1 female
Badakshan
HSU-2 | Haemaphysalis sulcata Bashgul Valley, Nuristan 9-IV -53 1 female
HSU-3 | Haemaphysalis sulcata Bashgul Valley, Nuristan 8-IV -53 1 male
HSU-4 | Haemaphysalis sulcata Bashgul Valley, Nuristan 24-1V -53 1 male
HSU-5 | Haemaphysalis sulcata Pagman Mountain, 30 km. north- | 14-VI-53 1 female
west of Kabul
JD-1 Hyalomma dromedarii Bashgul Valley, Nuristan 11-IV-53 1 female
JD-2 Hyalomma dromedarii Kandahar-Kuna 22-1-53 2 females
JD-3 Hyalomma dromedarii Kandahar-Kuna 28-1-53 1 female
JD-4 Hyalomma dromedarii Kandahar 13-11-53 1 female
JD-5 Hyalomma dromedarii Vicinity of Kabul 20-III-53 | 1 female
JE-3 Hyalomma excavatum Kutiau, Nuristan 5-V-53 1 male
JE-4 Hyalomma excavatum Vicinity of Kabul 16-V-52 1 male
JE-5 Hyalomma excavatum Bashgul Valley, Nuristan 8-IV-53 1 male
JE-6 Hyalomma excavatum Bashgul Valley, Nuristan 24-IV-53 1 male
JE-7 Hyalomma excavatum Bashgul Valley, Nuristan 17-IV-53 1 male
IRR-1 | Ixodes redikorzevi redikor- | Pagman Mountain 6-VII-52 1 female
Zevt
RS-22 Rhipicephalus sanguineus | Bashgul Valley, Nuristan 12-V-53 1 male, 2
females
RS-23 Rhipicephalus sanguineus | Bashgul Valley, Nuristan 6-IV-53 1 male
RS-24 Rhipicephalus sanguineus | Jalabad, Nuristan 30-III-53 | 3 females
RS-25 Rhipicephalus sanguineus | Kandahar 22-11-53 1 female
RS-26 Rhipicephalus sanguineus | Kandahar 11-11-53 2 males, 3
females
RS-27 Rhipicephalus sanguineus | Kandahar 19-I1-53 1 male
RS-28 Rhipicephalus sanguineus | Kandahar 19-11-53 3 males, 6
females
RS-29 Rhipicephalus sanguineus | Kandahar 13-11-58 1 female
RS-30 Rhipicephalus sanguineus | Kandahar-Kuna 22-I-53 1 male
RS-31 Rhipicephalus sanguineus | Kandahar-Kuna 1-ITI-53 1 female
RS-32 Rhipicephalus sanguineus | Vicinity of Kabul 16-V -52 1 female
RS-33 Rhipicephalus sanguineus | Vicinity of Kabul 16-V I-52 1 male
RS-34 Rhipicephalus sanguineus | Kutiau 5-V-53 1 male, |
female
RS-35 Rhipicephalus sanguineus | Tchakaran, Wardush Valley | 1 female
20 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 46, No. 1
BIOCHEMISTRY .—Effect of cortisone acetate on production of liver and muscle gly-
cogen from C-14 labeled glycine and DL-alanine.! W. C. Hess and I. P. SHar-
FRAN, Georgetown University School of Medicine.
It is generally considered that the glycogen
formed in the liver of fasting rats, following
administration of adrenal cortical hormones,
is derived from protein (/—4). It has been
shown that cortisone acetate does not
increase the production of liver glycogen
after feeding glycine above the additive
effect of the individual actions of the two
compounds (5). However, cortisone acetate
does produce higher liver glycogen values
when DL-alanine is fed (6). The maximum
amounts of liver glycogen formed from
glycine and DIL-alanine, 2.6 percent in 16
hours and 3.3 percent in 6 hours, represent
conversions of 30 and 25 percent, re-
spectively, of the theoretical amounts of the
carbons of the 2 amino acids into glycogen.
Using glycine and DL-alanine containing
tagged carbon, several investigators have
reported that only 1 to 5 percent of the
isotope was present in the liver glycogen
(7-9). It would appear, therefore, that the
carbons of the formed glycogen do not
necessarily come from the amino acid fed,
at least as far as the particular tagged
carbons are concerned.
In a further study on the effect of cortisone
acetate on liver glycogen formation DL-
alanine and glycine tagged with C-14 in
carbons 1 or 2 have been employed to
determine whether there are differences in
the degree of glycogen incorporation of the
2 carbons before and after the administra-
tion of cortisone acetate.
Procedure for the administration of the
amino acid and estimation of liver glycogen
is the same as previously employed (5).
Rats, weighing 100 to 150 g, were fasted for
24 hours and then given either 500 mg of
tagged glycine or DL-alanine and sacrificed
at the end of 16 and 6 hours, respectively,
the periods of maximum glycogen pro-
duction for the 2 amino acids. The activity
of the labeled amino acids fed ranged from
1.0 to 1.5 X 10® counts per minute. Activity
1This work was supported, in part, by a con-
tract with the Atomic Energy Commission and
also by a grant from the Council on Chemistry
and Pharmacy of the American Medical Associa-
tion.
of aliquots of the isolated glycogen was de-
termined using a gas flow counter. In the
experiments with cortisone acetate 5 mg of
the hormone were given intramuscularly at
the end of the fasting period, and the glycine
or DL-alanine were fed 8 or 18 hours later,
so that, when the animals were sacrificed
at the expiration of 24 hours, the maximum
effects of the amino acid and the cortisone
acetate would be obtained. Muscle glycogen
was also determined on aliquots of the
gluteus maximus at the same time as liver
glycogen.
Results —Each experiment was conducted
upon 4 to 6 rats and average values and
standard deviations for each series are given
in Table 1. The percent of the administered
counts of the C-14 in the amino acids found
in the isolated liver glycogen is given in
column 2. The glycogen formed from glycine
1-C-14 accounted for 2 percent of the ad-
ministered counts, while 6.1 percent were
found when glycine 2-C-14 was fed. Barnet
and Wick (9) found 1.2 and 2.6 percent,
respectively, of the administered counts
from glycine 1-C-14 and 2-C-14 in the liver
glycogen. However, they found only 1.7
percent glycogen in the liver after 17 hours,
whereas our value at the end of 16 hours
was 2.6 percent. It might be noted that
Mackaye, Wick, and Carne (10) had
previously found 2.4 percent glycogen at
the end of 17 hours. The lower degree of
incorporation of the isotope reported by
Barnet and Wick (9) probably reflects the
smaller amount of glycogen formed. The
second carbon in DL-alanine yielded a
higher amount of the labeled carbon in the
glycogen than did the first carbon.
Since the glycogen formed accounts for 30
percent of the carbons of the glycine fed,
then if all the carbon in the glycogen comes
from glycine 30 percent of the counts should
have been present. The amount of labeled
carbon found in the glycogen accounts for
only 7 and 20 percent of the theoretical
amounts of the 1-C-14 and 2-C-14 glycines,
respectively. Similarly with DL-alanine
where the liver glycogen formed accounted
JANUARY 1956 HESS AND SHAFFRAN:
TasLe 1.—LIvER GLycoGEN FoLLowina INGEs-
TION OF CaRBON LABELED GLYCINE AND DL-AL-
ANINE WITH AND WITHOUT CORTISONE ACETATE
1 2 3 4* 5
Glycogen
ee Liver| Counts in} Total formed ree 100
wt | glycogen | glycogen| , 3 glycogen
acid
ercent
& Eee mg mg i KO
Glycine 1-C-
1 ae 4.2 | 2.0 + 0.4/105 + 10 1.9 + 0.4+
Glycine plus
CAR eo. 4.3 | 2.8 + 0.3/172 + 15) 90 + 15/1.6 + 0.5
Glycine 2-C-
TY eaten eerie 4.0 | 6.1+0.5) 99 +7 6.1 + 0.7
Glycine plus
CAG ses 4.4 | 8.8 + 0.7/170 + 15] 86 + 14/5.2 + 0.8
DL - Alanine
1-C-14...... 4.6 | 1.7 + 0.2/144 + 14 1.2 + 0.2
DL - Alanine
plus CA....} 5.1 | 3.3 + 0.4/270 + 19/173 + 8 /1.2 + 0.3
DL - Alanine
2-C-14......| 5.0 |10.7 + 1.1/160 + 14 6.6 + 0.9
DL - Alanine
plus CA....} 4.6 |19.7 + 1.8/266 + 20/179 + 10/7.4 + 1.3
* Column 4 is obtained by subtracting glycogen formed by
cortisone acetate alone in 24 hours, 1.9 percent, from column 3.
¢ Calculation of the t value of the difference for each pair
showed no significance.
tCA = Cortisone acetate.
TABLE 2.—MuscLE GuLycoGEN FOLLOWING INGES-
TION OF CARBON LABELED GLYCINE AND DL-AL-
ANINE WITH AND WITHOUT CoRTISONE ACETATE
Percent
Compound Rat we| CWC | Total | of count
amino acid
g percent mg
Wasting seen secieteetsrs asi 133 0.60 327
Fasting plus CA.......... 154 0.70 467
Glycine 1-C-14............| 187 0.62 341 0.5
Glycine plus CA......... 131 0.80 430 0.4
Glycine 2-C-14............ 135 0.59 330 0.6
Glycine plus CA......... 134 0.90 490 0.4
DL-Alanine 1-C-14....... 136 0.58 286 0.4
DL-Alanine plus CA..... 120 0.74 355 0.6
DL-Alanine 2-C-14....... 154 0.55 359 0.6
DL-Alanine plus CA..... 159 0.86 575 0.6
*CA = Cortisone acetate.
for 25 percent of the carbon in the amino
acid fed the counts in the liver glycogen
explained 7 and 43 percent of the theoretical
amounts for the 1-C-14 and 2-C-14 positions,
respectively.
When cortisone acetate was administered
prior to the amino acid the liver glycogen
formed represents the combined effects of
the two compounds. If the amount formed
by cortisone acetate alone in 24 hours, 1.9
LIVER AND
MUSCLE GLYCOGEN 21
percent (4), is subtracted from the total
amount produced the remainder may be
attributed to the amino acid. These values
are given in column 4. As previously noted
cortisone acetate depresses slightly the
amount of glycogen formed from glycine
while there is an increased glycogen pro-
duction from DL-alanine (5). The present
results are in accord with the previous ones.
The increase in glycogen formation from
DL-alanine induced by cortisone acetate
may result from the inhibition of glucose
utilization by cortisone suggested by Bout-
well and Chiang (//). Boutwell? has also
found that the administration of tagged
alanine together with cortisone acetate
produced an increase in the concentration
of the tagged carbon in blood glucose over
that produced by tagged alanine alone.
If the percent of the administered counts
from the C-14 incorporated into 100 mg of
glycogen is determined, column 5, to provide
a uniform basis for comparison, no signifi-
cant differences were found between the
‘results for each labeled amino acid with and
without cortisone acetate. In the experi-
ments with DL-alanine the cortisone was in
the animal for 18 hours prior to the ad-
ministration of the alanine, during which
period the liver formed glycogen (5) and the
period for the joint action was 6 hours;
never the less the results indicate an equal
dispersion of the labeled carbon in_ the
glycogen. It is conceivable that the amino
acids are converted into glucose that enters
the metabolic pool from which the liver
glycogen is synthesized. The glycogen
formed through the action of the cortisone
would come from the same pool as the extra
glycogen from the amino acid and conse-
quently contain the same percent of the
labeled carbon. Apparently cortisone acetate
does not influence the incorporation of the
carbons of the exogenous amino acids into
elycogen. The glycogen formed by cortisone
in the livers of fasting rats could come from
body protein (72) or as suggested by Kinsell
et al. (13) from body fat.
The results of the
muscle elycogen are given in Table 2. The
total glycogen is calculated from the
relationship of muscle mass to body weight
determinations of
2 Personal communication,
22 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
(14). While cortisone acetate did produce an
increase in muscle glycogen, as noted by
others (15), neither of the amino acids was
effective. On the average about 0.5 percent
of the administered counts were found in the
muscle glycogen and the administration of
cortisone acetate did not affect the value.
Summary.—Liver glycogen formed follow-
ing the feeding of glycine 1-C-14 or 2-C-14
to fasting white rats contained 2.0 and 6.1
percent of administered counts, respectively.
Similar experiments with DL-alanine 1-C-14
and 2-C-14 produced 1.8 and 10.7 percent
incorporation of the administered counts
respectively. When cortisone acetate was
injected prior to the amino acids the percent
incorporation of the labeled carbon in 100
mg of the glycogen was the same as in the
absence of the cortisone acetate. Cortisone
acetate produced an increase in muscle
elycogen; neither glycine nor DL-alanine
produced any change in glycogen content
either alone or in the presence of cortisone
acetate; less than 0.5 percent of the ad-
ministered isotopes were found in the muscle
elycogen.
vou. 46, No. 1
LITERATURE CITED
(1) Brirron, 8S. W., and Sitverre, H. Amer.
Journ. Physiol. 185: 657. 1954.
(2) Lone, C. N. H., Karzin, B., and Fry, E.
Endocrin. 26: 309. 1951.
(3) Lewis, R. A., Kunuman, D., DELBu, C.,
Koepr, G. F., and Tuorn, C. W. Endocrin.
27: 97. 1940.
(4) Locxrert, M. F., and Evans, M. M. Journ.
Endocrin. 7: 357. 1951.
(5) Hess, W. C., and SHAFFRAN, I. P. Proc. Soc.
Exp. Biol. Med. 88: 804. 1953.
—., Ibid. 86: 287. 1954.
(7) OusEN, N. S., Hemineway, A., and NieEr,
A. O. Journ. Biol. Chem. 148: 611. 1943.
(8) Gurin, S., Dettuva, A. M., and Witson,
D. W. Journ. Biol. Chem. 171: 101. 1947.
(9) Barnett, H. N., and Wick, A. N. Journ.
Biol. Chem. 185: 657. 1950.
(10) Macxaye, BE. M., Wick, A. N., and Carne,
H. O. Journ. Biol. Chem. 132: 613. 1940.
(11) Bourweui, R. K., and Curane, R. Arch.
Biochem. Biophys. 50: 461. 1954.
(12) Encen, F. L., Scurturr, S., and Pen7z, E. I.
Endocrin. 44: 458. 1949.
(13) Kinsey, L. W., Micnagts, G. D., Marcen,
S., Parrrivce, J. W., Bouine, L., and
Baucu, H. E. Journ. Clin. End. Metab.
14: 161. 1954.
(14) Donaupson, H. H. The rat. Mem. Wistar
Inst. no. 6. Philadelphia, 1924.
(15) Lronarp, S. L. Endocrin. 53: 226. 1953.
NOTES AND NEWS
NEW PUBLICATION ON COLORS
Publication of The ISCC-NBS method of desig-
nating colors and a dictionary of color names, by
Kenneth L. Kelly and Deane B. Judd, National
Bureau of Standards Circular 558, 158 pages,
has recently been announced by the Bureau.
The circular is designed to assist the scientist,
businessman, and layman to understand the dif-
ferent color vocabularies used in the many fields
of art, science, and industry. The dictionary
serves not only as a record of the meanings of
the 7,500 individual color names listed but also
enables anyone to translate from one color vocab-
ulary to another. For example, the dictionary
shows that griseo-viridis (biology) = serpentine
(fashion) = mint green (mass market), or in
ordinary language, a light green.
The terms by which this dictionary defines
color names are those of a refinement of the
method of designating colors outlined by the
Inter-Society Color Council (ISCC) and de-
veloped at the National Bureau of Standards.
The system applies not only to the colors of
drugs and chemicals, for which it was originally
developed, but to the colors of all opaque, clear,
cloudy, or fluorescent samples, whether viewed
by reflected or transmitted light, and to micro-
scopic structures.
The circular may be obtained from the United
States Government Printing Office at $2 a copy.
FORAMINIFERA CATALOG REISSUED
The Smithsonian Institution has recently
issued an offset reprint of Charles Davies Sher-
born’s An Index to the Genera and Species of the
Foraminifera. This monumental reference work,
long out of print, was originally published by the
Smithsonian in 1893 and 1896 in two parts. It
includes all species and genera of Foraminifera
published to 1889, giving both the original names
and any new combinations used by later authors,
as well as literature citations.
Systematic work on Foraminifera during the
past 40 years has received a tremendous impetus
from their economic value, especially that con-
cerned with the search for petroleum and more
recently with ecologic and paleoecologic studies.
Because of the daily increasing volume of pub-
lished material, it is difficult to keep abreast of
nomenclatural changes in current work. Recently,
Dr. Hans E. Thalmann of Stanford University
completed for publication an index of the Foram-
inifera from 1890 to 1950. This work continues
the earlier work by Sherborn, bringing it up to
date, but does not repeat the material of Sher-
born’s book. With the forthcoming publication
of Thalmann’s index and with the present reprint-
ing of Sherborn’s classic index, modern students
will have now available an invaluable tool in
their systematic work on the Foraminifera.
JANUARY 1956
PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 23
PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
1379TH MEETING, MAY 8, 1953
The Society was addressed by L. Marron, of
the National Bureau of Standards, on the sub-
ject Electron interferometry.
The early optics of electrons was geometrical
optics, the dynamic trajectories being analogous
to light rays. DeBroglie introduced the wave con-
cept of electron behavior in his famous disserta-
tion. The contrast between photon waves and
electron waves is due primarily to the fact that
the electron has a rest mass, hence a rest energy,
whereas the photon has mass only by virtue of
moving with the speed of light.
Experimental evidence of the wave-nature of
electrons was first given by the classical Davisson-
Germer electron diffraction experiment. In more
recent years, Fresnel diffraction has been ob-
served at the edges of objects in the electron
microscope.
Interference of light waves can be accidental,
as in oil-film effects, or Newton’s rings, or inten-
tional as in various interferometers. Inter-
ferometers may produce equivalent virtual
sources by wave-front splitting, as with two
slits or two mirrors, or amplitude splitting, as in
the half-silvered mirror of Michelson’s inter-
ferometer.
Similarly, accidental interference of electron
waves has been observed in thin crystal flakes,
and in blisters on iodine crystals. For an electron
interferometer, both wave-front and amplitude
splitting have been considered. A double slit
system turns out to have unreasonable dimen-
sions, so we turn to two mirror schemes. Un-
fortunately, electron mirrors are not available,
but we obtain a similar effect by the prismatic
action of diffraction gratings. The use of three
parallel gratings and suitable stops for the
unwanted beams will suffice. A fraction of the
incident beam goes straight through the first
grating, is deflected by the second and restored
to its original direction by the third grating.
Another fraction of the beam is deflected by the
first grating, restored in direction by the second,
and passed straight through by the third. These
two beams enter and emerge in the same direc-
tion, but jointly delineate a rhombus between
the gratings. The optical version of the arrange-
ment was studied by Carl Barus and lost in the
literature; it was set up and demonstrated to the
audience.
The electronic version has been built and
operated at the National Bureau of Standards.
The gratings were 100 angstrom thick gold erys-
tals, made by the epitaxial deposit of gold vapor
on the cleavage face of rocksalt crystals. The
interferometer can be used for measuring the
wavelengths of electrons, hence for determining
Planck’s constant.
Interference has been obtained with path
differences of as much as 6000 wavelengths,
despite the 200 wavelength limit predicted on the
basis of diffraction experiments. This raises an
interesting question as to the meaning of phase
velocity, a quantum mechanical unobservable.
It was also pointed out that free space is a dis-
persive medium for electron waves, since the
wavelength is related to the energy, hence to the
velocity.
1380TH MEETING, MAY 22, 1953
President Manan announced that there had
been a last-minute change of program, due to
the sudden illness of the scheduled speaker, that
two speakers were obtained on short notice from
the Naval Research Laboratory, and that the
Society was grateful for such fine cooperation.
The first speaker was RicHarp Tousry. His
subject was Rocket spectrographs for the sun in
short untraviolet and X-ray. Rockets are needed
for this work, because of the opacity of the
earth’s atmosphere. The lower wavelength limit
of balloon and mountain observations is 2860
angstroms. Some interesting problems in the use
and recovery of rocket-borne equipment were
explained.
Spectrograms taken at various altitudes were
shown, and the ozone density as a function of
altitude deduced from the changes of absorption.
Measurements down to 1900 A were made spec-
troscopically. At shorter wavelengths, the ther-
moluminescence properties of calcium sulfate and
manganous sulfate were employed. These phos-
phors are heated after recovery, and luminesce
in proportion to the amount of short-wave energy
they have absorbed.
Narrow wavelength bands were explored with
photon counters. Halogen filling reduces their
long wavelength response, and absorption win
dows reduce their short wavelength response,
24 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
leaving a band-pass characteristic. Soft X-rays
in the 5-10 A region were measured, and the
observed intensities were compatible with a cor-
onal temperature of one million degrees Kelvin.
The second speaker was JoHn P. HaGen,
Radio Observations of the Sun. He discussed radio
frequency measurements of the tenuous solar
atmosphere lying outside the photosphere. The
photosphere is transparent to visible radiation,
but not to radio frequencies. Such data yield
the temperature and pressure in the solar atmos-
phere.
Motion pictures of the 1952 Eclipse expedition
were shown. Eclipses are useful in this field be-
cause radio telescopes have poor angular resolu-
tion, hence the radial brightness distribution is
hard to measure. Effective resolution is obtained
during an eclipse by observing the radio fre-
quency intensity as a function of moon coverage
of the sun. Theory calls for limb brightening at
radio frequencies.
The 1952 expedition made measurements at
wavelengths of 8 mm, 3 cm, and 10 cm. In all
cases, limb brightening was observed, i.e., the
sun appears to be encircled by a bright ring.
From this it 1s deduced that the temperature
rises steeply in the chromosphere, has a plateau
in the corona, and then falls off. (Secretary’s ab-
stract.)
1381ST MEETING, OCTOBER 23, 1953
Ricuarp L. Perrirz, of the Naval Ordnance
Laboratory and Catholic University, was intro-
duced by the President and spoke on Random
processes and noise in semiconductors.
The subject of the lecture was divided into
two parts: (a) Discussion of the relationships
between random processes in different fields of
study, such as physics, biology, and economics;
(b) application of random process theories to
noise in semiconductors.
Some of the basic definitions of interesting
random processes were given. Reference was
made to average values, probability functions,
correlation coefficients, and power spectra. The
Markoff process was discussed, and the relation
between branching processes in biology and
atomic bomb problems indicated.
In a semiconductor the number of electrons
contained in a conduction band is random.
When a current is going through the semicon-
ductor a noise is produced due to the fluctuation
of the number of electrons. Noise studies permit
the measure of certain parameters of the semi-
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vob. 46, No. 1
conductors. The speaker described some experi-
mental methods used to determine the noise
spectrum. He discussed how the shape of the
noise spectrum is being related to the fluctuations
of lattice temperature and to the electron mobil-
ity in semiconductors.
1382D MEETING, NOVEMBER 6, 1953
James W. Davisson, of the Naval Research
Laboratory, was introduced by the Chairman
and spoke on Electrical breakdown wn crystals.
Most phenomena in crystal physics add sym-
metry to the crystal symmetry itself. In the
X-ray determination, the most important prob-
lem is to find out what is the symmetry of the
crystal. It turns out that electrical breakdown
phenomena, apart from crystal growth, are the
only ones which show symmetry of crystals under
all conditions. Electrical breakdown in crystals
generally leads to the formation of well-defined
paths. These lie in crystallographic directions
which depend upon the symmetry of the crystal,
the temperature, and the applied field. Both
negative and positive patterns vary with the
temperature. When one changes the polarity in
crystals which lack a center of symmetry, the
patterns are distinct and at no temperature come
together. Present theory, based upon anisotropic
electron scattering at the Brillouin zone borders,
explains some of the qualitative features of phe-
nomena. In metals, diamond, germanium, and
silicon, there is no polarization scattering but a
‘nonpolar’ scattering. Sulfur scattering does not
vary with temperature but presents still some
orienting influence. It looks as if, in sulfur, there
is a new type of asymmetrical scattering not de-
pending upon the Brillouin zone border. There
is, therefore, evidence that in addition to the
Brillouin zone effects there must be some other
source of asymmetrical scattering.
After a discussion on the subject of the lecture,
the meeting was adjourned for a social hour.
Twenty-one members attended the meeting un-
mindful of the snowstorm which fell on Wash-
ington with complete disrespect to the Weather
Bureau predictions.
1383D MEETING, NOVEMBER 20, 1953
SHIRLEIGH SILVERMAN, of the Johns Hopkins
University Applied Physics Laboratory was in-
troduced and assumed the chair for the technical
portion of the meeting.
The first speaker was JoHN Srronec, Johns
JANUARY 1956
Hopkins University. His subject was Interim re-
port on studies of infrared radiation from the moon
and the planets. Slides of the 8-14 micron infrared
spectra of Venus, Mars, and the moon were
shown, and surface temperatures deduced from
these data were given. The ingenious experi-
mental arrangement for comparing planetary
radiation with sky background and cancelling
effects of apparatus radiation, was explained.
One of the experimental results was that the
visually dark side of Venus is as warm as the
visually bright side, hence the day-night relation
being observed was sunset, rather than sunrise.
No carbon dioxide was observed on Venus, im-
plying that the observed stratosphere is above
the carbon dioxide layer. The atmospheric circu-
lation of Venus appears to be opposite to that of
Earth, for the poles of Venus were found to be
6° cooler than the equator, whereas an opposite
relationship is true on Earth (at high altitudes).
The earth’s atmospheric absorption was corrected
for by an ingenious scheme. The infrared radia-
tion from the moon can be computed in terms of
the moon’s temperature, in turn computed from
known solar constants. Comparison with the
observed lunar radiation yields the absorption in
the earth’s atmosphere.
The second talk was Line width and shape in
the Infrared, given by W.S. Benenict, of Johns
Hopkins University. This talk was centered on
the Lorentz law of collision broadening of spectral
lines. The predictions of this theory for line
peaks, troughs between lines, and extreme wings
of bands were discussed and compared with ex-
periment. The Lorentz law is good for CO,
except in the extreme wings, fair for CO except
in the wings and troughs, and no good at all for
HCl. The inadequacy for HCl is attributed to
polar intermolecular forces.
The final talk was Photo-ionization absorption
spectra of negatwe ions, by Lewis BRANSCOMB,
National Bureau of Standards. Negative ions
have a low binding energy of only 1 or 2 volts,
hence the photodetachment of the excess electron
involves infrared absorption. Most atoms do not
form negative ions; those that do such as hydro-
gen, usually have only one such state, hence do
not yield a line spectrum of absorption but only
a convergence limit of a continuous spectrum.
These ions are of interest as a possible mechanism
for storing electrons in the ionosphere. Experi-
mentally, the weak continuous absorption is al-
most impossible to observe. The speaker’s pro-
PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 25
cedure was to observe by electrical means the
detachment of electrons from a beam of known
ion current. The experiments on negative hydro-
gen ions check with theory; negative oxygen
ions are still being studied.
1384TH MEETING, DECEMBER 4, 1953
The Society was addressed by K. K. Darrow,
of the Bell Telephone Laboratories, on The Hall
effect. He quoted a statement by Maxwell that
the current distribution is Not affected by a
magnetic field. Mr. Hall did not believe this
statement, and devoted his doctoral thesis to an
experimental proof of its falsity.
An electric current flowing through a ribbon,
whose plane is perpendicular to a magnetic
field, tends to be deflected against one edge of
the ribbon, in the direction of the resulting
mechanical force on the conductor. This trans-
verse virtual displacement of the streamlines of
the current produces a compensating transverse
electric field to compensate the displacement
force. The vector resultant of the applied longi-
tudinal electric field that motivates the current
and the transverse electric field of the Hall effect,
makes an angle @ with the direction of the ribbon.
The transverse equipotential lines are therefore
also rotated through an angle 6. This angle @ is
expressible as a function of the magnetic field
and the charge mobility, or as a function of the
field, the current, and the number of free charge
carriers per unit volume. Hence the Hall effect
offers a means of measuring either mobility or
free charge carrier density.
If a trace of arsenic, atomic number 33, is
present in germanium, 32, there are excess elec-
trons available for conduction, even at low tem-
peratures. As the temperature is raised, more
and more of the arsenic atoms release their excess
electrons, and the conductivity is increased.
These effects are demonstrated by the sign and
magnitude of the Hall effect.
Conversely, if the impurity is gallium, 31, there
is a deficiency of electrons, and the Hall effect
yields the density of apparent positive charge
carriers, and shows the increase with tempera-
ture; these two types of semiconductor material
are known as n-type and p-type respectively.
At sufficiently high temperatures, pure germa-
nium becomes a so-called intrinsie semiconductor.
The thermal agitation releases valence electrons,
and supposedly equal numbers of negative charge
carriers and apparent positive charge carriers are
26 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
present. Hall effect measurements yield the ratio
of the two mobilities. (Secretary’s abstract.)
1385TH MEETING, DECEMBER 18, 1953
The Society was addressed by GkorGrE GAMOW
on The arithmetic of life. Living cells are composed
of two types of material: the body of the cell is
made of proteins, the small nucleus of various
nucleic acids, generally abbreviated DNA. The
chromosomes in the nucleus are decomposable
into six building blocks; sugars, phosphates, and
four complex bases. The chromosomes somehow
carry the information for the synthesis of the
cell proteins.
DNA comprises long chains of sugars cemented
together by phosphates. To each sugar is attached
one of the four bases. The bases can hook to each
other in certain pairings by hydrogen bonding,
thus allowing two suitable long sugar chains to
be adjoined. The resulting dual chain chromo-
some has a helical structure, with a pitch of one
turn to ten sugar molecules. Chromosome division
takes place by splitting of the string of hydrogen
bonds. After the splitting, each of the bases can
attach a replacement from solution, and even-
tually restore the whole chromosome. In an ex-
cited state, some of the otherwise forbidden
hydrogen bond pairings can occur. Under these
conditions, the newly grown half of a chromo-
some may contain a few errors. Under subsequent
division, this error is propagated and becomes
permanent. This may be the explanation of
mutations.
The proteins of the cell are decomposable into
twenty different amino acids, as building blocks.
It is interesting to note that although amino
acids have both laevo- and dextro- forms, only
the laevo-acids have been found in living organ-
isms. Protein molecules are made of long chains
of amino acid groups. The problem is to explain
how the long chromosome chains of four bases
control the manufacture of the long protein chains
of twenty blocks. Analysis of the allowable
combinations of four adjacent bases in the chro-
mosome chains, in light of the hydrogen bonding
rules, shows that exactly twenty different ‘‘dia-
monds” can oecur. The twenty amino acids fit
into these diamonds, pointing in toward the axis
of the spiral, and approaching sufficiently close
to each other to join and make protein. These
protein molecules can then be stripped from the
mold, so to speak. Further combinatorial analysis
shows that the twenty diamonds cannot follow
vou. 46, No. 1
each other in arbitrary order, but still represent
essentially a radix four system. The diamonds
can be segregated into six classes: the first class
contains four diamonds, each of which can be
followed by any of fourteen, including themselves.
The second class is similar. The third and fourth
classes are similar, but the combining number is
seven, rather than fourteen. The last two classes
can each combine with only seven, and in each
case this seven does not include the members of
the class itself. If we represent each of the twenty
diamonds by a letter we have 196 allowable pairs
of letters, and each of these pairs allows only four
choices of the succeeding pair. Trying to identify
the various letters with the twenty amino acids is
a complicated problem in cryptography. The
structure of insulin is a known chain of 29 amino
acids, hence represents an allowable message in
our code. So far, the code has not been broken.
(Secretary’s abstract.)
1386TH MEETING, JANUARY 15, 1954
This meeting of the Society was the occasion
of the retiring Presidential Address on Some newly
solved and some unsolved problems in optics, by
Arcute I. Manan, of the U. 8. Naval Ordnance
Laboratory. The address has been published in
this JouRNAL 44: 165-194. 1954.
1387TH MEBTING, JANUARY 29, 1954
The Society was addressed by JEROME
WoLKEN, director of the Biophysics Research
Laboratory of the Eye and Ear Hospital, Pitts-
burgh, Pa., on Cellular growth, structure, and func-
tion. The structure of cells was described, in
idealized form. A relatively new technique of
electron microscopy of cells was described. The
cell is first ‘fixed’? with Osmium Tetroxide; the
excess salt is then washed out with water, and a
plastic allowed to diffuse in. The cell can then be
sliced with a glass knife into slices of 0.03-0.05
microns thickness. One of the organisms illus-
trated by use of this technique was an interesting
protozoon known as Euglena gracilis. This organ-
ism contains both chlorophyll and a purely animal
pigment, hence can be considered as either ani-
mal or vegetable, or both. The fact that the
chloroplasts can grow within the Euglena cell is
shown by the fact that under suitable growth con-
ditions, the amount of chlorophyll per cell in-
creases with time. On the other hand, treating
the cells with streptomycin or holding them at
40° Celsius will knock out the chloroplasts, but
the cells will grow and divide at their normal rate.
JANUARY 1956
There are about five chloroplasts per cell, on
the average, and these plastids have a layer struc-
ture, about 20 ‘dark’ layers separated by
“light” layers. The light layers are mainly water
and protein, the dark layers contain fat protein,
and pigment, the pigment beimg chlorophyll in
this particular case. There are about 10° chloro-
phyll molecules per plastid. These molecules are
assumed to “‘sit’’ on the surface of a layer.
In a purely animal structure, the eye of the
perch, the cones and rods show a similar layered
or banded structure. The thickness of the bands
is about the same as those found in Euglena and
also in higher plants. The rod cells and cone cells
also show about the same number of pigment
molecules as did the plastids, even though these
animal structures are much larger than those of
Euglena. The apparent paradox is resolved by
the observation that the visual pigments, of less
molecular weight than chlorophyll, are attached
to very large protein molecules in about a one-to-
one ratio, whereas the chlorophyll molecules are
attached to small protein molecules, still in about
a one-to-one ratio. The larger animal proteins
lead to the larger banded structures. Thus it is
found that the dark bands in a wide range of cell
types contain approximately the same number of
proteim molecules, or rather, of protein-pigment
complexes. There is chemical evidence for the
existence of a protein-pigment macromolecule;
the pigments in isolated form exhibit different
chemical properties than do those in cells. (Secre-
tary’s abstract.)
1388TH MEBTING, FEBRUARY 12, 1954
The Society was addressed by Herman
Branson, of Howard University, on the topic
Information theory and the structure of protein
molecules. Shannon’s definition of imformation
was reviewed, with attention to its additive
properties. A table was displayed, giving the
channel capacities, in bits per second, of various
sensory organs, and the much slower information
accepting capacity of the human brain. Informa-
tion theory can be formally applied to the struc-
ture of proteins, considering the 20-odd amino
acid residues as alphabetic characters, and the
protein chains as words. Each possible orienta-
tion or other “complexion” of an amino residue
is considered to be a different letter. The amount
of information “stored”? in the molecule can be
taken as the difference in the Shannon entropy,
or uncertainty, of the particular amino chain in
PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 27
question, and the maximum uncertainty that a
chain of the same number of residues could have.
The uncertainty is the logarithm of the number
of possible “complexions”. In natural proteins,
the uncertainty is greater than 85 percent of its
maximum possible value, in most cases. This im-
plies little information storage. As the total num-
ber of residues, N, in the chain increases, the ratio
of the uncertainty to its mimimum possible value
appears to be a linear, increasing function of N.
(Secretary’s abstract.)
1389TH MEETING, FEBRUARY 26, 1954
The Society was addressed by E. O. Hutgurt,
of the Naval Research Laboratory, on the topic
Magnetic storms, aurora, ionosphere and zodiacal
light. Magnetic measurements have indicated
that the earth’s magnetic field behaves as if there
were a magnetic dipole at its center and a ring
current of about 10° amperes encircling the earth
in an east-west direction near the Equator. Dis-
turbances in the earth’s magnetic field may be
local or world wide, the latter being referred to as
magnetic storms. During a magnetic storm, the
earth’s field first increases, then it decreases below
its normal value, and finally after a recovery
period returns to its initial value. These disturb-
ances arise from outside the earth’s atmosphere
and are usually associated with sun spots.
A so-called “ultraviolet light theory” has been
proposed by Hulburt for explaining these mag-
netic storms. The theory suggests that the sun
bathes the earth in a sudden flare of ultraviolet
light. This ight increases the ionization in the
ionosphere with the result that the current in the
east-west direction increases also increasing the
earth’s magnetic field. The ionosphere however
is also heated so that an outward expansion fol-
lows. Because of the earth’s magnetic field at the
equator, these ions are forced into a west-east
current which brings about a decrease in the
earth’s magnetic field. This theory has had con-
siderable success in explaining many of these
phenomena.
Abnormal ionospheric activity is also closely
associated with magnetic storms, but due to a
lack of sufficient data and a complete evaluation
of existing data on a world wide basis, ionospheric
activity has not led to a better understanding of
magnetic storms. Statistical studies have been
started, but the work is unfinished.
Several corpuscular theories have also been
advocated for explaining magnetic storms. These
28 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY
theories assume that the sun projects streams of
particles of like or unlike signs toward the earth,
some of which enter the polar regions and produce
aurora while others are trapped by the earth’s
magnetic field and give rise to an increased east-
west current at the Equator and hence an increase
in the magnetic field. These theories then make
plausible the first increase in magnetic field dur-
ing a magnetic storm, but the explanations of the
other phases are admitted as purely speculative.
The zodiacal light and the ‘‘Gegenschein”’ were
also discussed briefly. According to the older
theories, both were explained in terms of the dust
theory. Recently, however, the zodiacal light has
been found to vary in brightness during a mag-
netic storm and this cannot be understood in
terms of the dust theory. To explain these mag-
netic variations of the zodiacal light, Hulburt
has extended his ultraviolet light theory by as-
suming that the atoms which reach the outer
regions of the ionosphere accumulate in an oblong
ring in the plane of the ecliptic which absorbs the
ultraviolet light and reemits part as visible light.
This light is the zodiacal light. The portion of the
ring away from the sun streams away due to light
pressure and when viewed on end becomes the
“Gegenschein.”’ Experiments to check these ideas
are not in agreement.
1390TH MEETING, MARCH 12, 1954
The Society was addressed by Herpert
FRIEDMAN, of the Naval Research Laboratory,
on Solar X-rays, extreme ultraviolet radiation, and
the ionosphere.
Experimental data on the penetration of solar
radiation into the atmosphere have been obtained
primarily from rocket-borne equipment. Rocket
flights reach the D, E, and F layers of the iono-
sphere. In the ultraviolet range, 1300 to 1700 A,
the main absorber is molecular oxygen, which is
dissociated by the radiation. The atmospheric
absorption possesses a deep window which passes
the Lyman alpha line of hydrogen at 1216 A. The
2000 to 2800 A range penetrates to about 30 kil-
ometer altitude, where it is strongly absorbed by
ozone. The Lyman alpha radiation penetrates to
about 70 kilometers, which is the deepest pene-
tration of any radiation below 1800 A.
Between 1000 and 2000 A, the spectrum is too
weak for diffraction grating observations in the
time available in a rocket flight. Intensity meas-
urements in this range are therefore made at spot
wavelengths with suitable photon counters.
OF SCIENCES VoL. 46, No. 1
These are essentially Geiger counters with photo-
sensitive cathodes, and special windows for fil-
ters. Such an ultraviolet counter was demon-
strated. A flashlight produced absolutely no
response, but the flame of a match yielded a
strong signal. It was also demonstrated that glass
is opaque to the ultraviolet to which this counter
responded. Various photoelectron thresholds
down to 1900 A are obtainable by the use of a
suitable cathode. Filling the counter with the
proper gas will suppress emission from the cath-
ode, and require photoionization of the gas for
response. Appropriate combinations of cathode,
gas, and window material make possible counters
responding to only a relatively narrow band of
wavelengths. A counter was demonstrated,
having a 1300 A threshold. Sapphire and lithium
fluoride windows were used. Sapphire gives a pass
band from 1050 to 1300 A, and allows measure-
ment of the Lyman alpha line intensity. Ninety
percent of the solar radiation in this wavelength
range, below 100 kilometers altitude, is Lyman
alpha. The D layer of the ionosphere is explain-
able by Lyman alpha absorptioe producing
ionization of Nitric Oxide.
For measurement of X-rays of approximately
10 to 20 Angstroms, beryllium and aluminium
windows are suitable. The major absorption of
10 to 100 A radiation is found to be in the region
from 100 to 120 kilometers altitude. The resultant
ionization is a reasonable source for the E layer.
Measured X-ray intensities fit the known ioniza-
tion density of the E layer.
The sun’s corona contains highly ionized
atoms, with as many as fourteen electrons re-
moved. Recombination of these atoms with free
electrons yields a continuous spectrum that is
characteristic of a temperature of 1,000,000°
Celsius. This supplies the 20 to 50 Angstrom
energy for producing the E layer. Helium II radia-
tion is strong at about 200 A and may contribute
to the F layer. The coronal green line is attributed
to Fe XIV, and is apparently a good indicator of
the solar X-ray output. (Secretary’s abstract.)
1391sT MEETING, MARCH 26, 1954
The twenty-third Joseph Henry Lecture was
delivered by Henry Marcenav, of Yale Uni-
versity. His paper Advantages and disadvantages
of a causal interpretation of quantum mechanics
was published in full in this JourNaL 44: 265-276.
1954.
JANUARY 1956 PROCEEDINGS:
1392p MEETING, APRIL 9, 1954
The Society was addressed by A. MrcHE.s, of
the University of Maryland and the University
of Amsterdam, on the subject Some aspects of
high-pressure molecular physics.
The classical Van der Waals picture of molecu-
lar interaction was reviewed, and its quantum
mechanical explanation in terms of the inter-
actions of electric charges. According to this
model, the electronic orbits must be distorted as
a substance is compressed, i.e., as the molecules
are forced to be closer together. For example, if
pv is strongly increased in an isothermal com-
pression, both the total energy and the kinetic
energy increase. Since the temperature is un-
changed, the additional kinetic energy must be
in the electronic orbits.
An interesting rough theory of high pressure
effects has been worked out assuming close packed
hydrogen atoms. Each electron is assumed to be
confined to a geometrical cell centered on its
proton. A computation of the electron kinetic
energy increase of 5000 cal/mole for a pressure
of 3000 atmospheres. This result is in approxi-
mate agreement with experimental values for a
number of gases. For sufficiently high pressure,
several hundred thousand atmospheres, the
electron energy would exceed the ionization po-
tential. Does this imply that hydrogen would
then behave like a metal?
A similar orbit distortion verification was per-
formed on germanium. A pressure of 3000 atmos.,
increases the gap between the full energy bands
and the conduction bands by 3 percent, as indi-
cated by conductivity measurements. These re-
sults are also shown by the shift in the edge of the
infrared absorption spectrum.
Electron orbit distortion also shows up directly
in polarizability. Measurements on carbon dioxide
show a peak at about the same density for which
the isothermal kinetic energy is a minimum.
Another interesting property is shown by the
behavior of the vibrational absorption of mole-
cules as the pressure is increased. The nitrogen
molecule, for example, has no polar moment and
its vibration is not optically active. Under 100
atmospheres pressure, the distortion produces a
polar moment, and a wavelength of 4.2 microns
is absorbed. In the case of hydrogen, the absorp-
tion coefficient varies as the square of the density.
If, however, the compression is produced by add-
ing argon instead of more hydrogen, the variation
is linear. These results are interpreted as a linear
PHILOSOPHICAL
SOCIETY 29
increase due to pressure distortion, and an addi-
tional density factor arising from the increased
collision rate when hydrogen alone is_ used.
(Secretary’s abstract.)
13938D MEETING, APRIL 23, 1954
The program was entitled “An Evening of
Crystal Growth” and consisted of a set of three
related lectures. Pau Eat, of the Naval Re-
search Laboratory, acted as organizer and chair-
man.
The first topic was The role of impurities in
crystal growth, discussed by SAMUEL ZERFOSS, of
NRL. Large single crystals are grown from solu-
tion, from a melt, or by a flame melting process.
Samples of these types were demonstrated. A
particularly large solution grown crystal of ADP
(ammonium dihydrophosphate) was exhibited
and discussed. A flat seed plate was used to start
the growth of a square bar, by extension of the
faces, but not the edges, of the seed. The first
step is to grow end-caps on the plate. This yields
foggy material, but develops the equilibrium end
shape, by growth along preferred planes, starting
from the corners of the seed. After the endcap is
developed, growth of clear crystal proceeds.
The addition of impurities to the solution
modifies the growth habit of crystals, changing
the preferred faces. Sometimes the modification
is beneficial, as in the case of sodium chloride.
This substance, in pure solution, grows too vigor-
ously, and makes a large cubical assembly of
many relatively small crystals having approxi-
mately the same orientation. The addition of
lead chloride inhibits the growth on certain
regions of the crystal’s surface, with the end re-
sult of a large, perfect, single crystal. The lead
chloride action is transient, for the resulting crys-
tal is free of lead chloride.
The flame fusion process, familiar as the source
of synthetic rubies ete., requires very pure raw
materials. The residual impurities gather on the
surface of the boule as a scum. This technique
has been modified at NRL to allow processing in
vacuo. The flame is replaced by a section of
carbon pipe, heated as an induction furnace.
The second topic was The role of dislocations in
crystal growth, presented by F. Hussarp Horn,
of the General Electric Co.
The growth rate of a crystal depends upon the
degree of supersaturation of the solution. The
relation is essentially linear in the supersaturation
range of 25-40 percent, and in this range seems
30 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY
adequately explained by theory. At lower con-
centrations, crystals still grow well, but the
theory breaks down.
It has been proposed that crystals grow readily
only on edges or other discontinuities, and not on
extensive perfectly flat faces. A screw dislocation
would give rise to a fault line upon which growth
could proceed. Analysis shows that growth on
the face of such a “cliff? would propagate the
cliff in a self-maintaining fashion, quasi-macro-
scopic feature of growth. Such spirals could also
be initiated by impurity specks, or other local
perturbations. Some fascinating color slides of
spiral growth patterns on calcium carbide crys-
tals were shown. (One of these could have been
suitable for a necktie design.) Time lapse motion
pictures, with a speed up factor of 64, convine-
ingly demonstrated this phenomenon in other
substances. It was concluded that the growth of
a single crystal to appreciable size requires the
presence of some type of imperfection.
The final speaker was Mr. Eerr, who used the
remaining few minutes to refute the arguments
of the previous speakers. His title was The role of
theories in crystal growth. Mr. Egli showed slides
of crystals that “obviously” did not grow by
spirals. Their growth was not controlled by im-
purities but by the lattice in keeping with class-
ical theory. The dislocation theory cannot be of
major importance, because these spirals occur on
the slowly growing faces, not on the fast ones.
The spiral growth phenomenon may explain the
existence of growth on faces that really shouldn’t
grow. In the case of ADP, the pyramid faces
grow rapidly, while the prism faces don’t grow.
No theory has yet been proposed that will ex-
plain this basic fact. The state of aggregation of
the molecules in solution may be involved.
(Secretary’s abstract.)
1394TH MEETING, MAY 7, 1954
The program for the meeting was entitled
“History and Traditions of the Philosophical
Society of Washington.” Four Past Presidents
were presented to the Society with a formal bow
both by the speaker and President ForBusH as
was the custom in earlier years.
The first speaker was L. H. Apams, who served
as President of the Society during 1929. Mr.
Adams spoke of the early history of the Society,
quoting quite frequently from W. J. Humphrey’s
paper The Philosophical Society of Washington
through a thousand meetings. The Society was
OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. |
founded on March 13, 1871. Joseph Henry was
its first president and continued to serve in this
office until his death in 1878. In the beginning,
the Society included all branches of science. With
the years, various groups split off and formed
independent societies. The first official publica-
tion of the Society was the Bulletin which was
published up to 1911. After that it was discon-
tinued and the present method adopted of pub-
lishing the Proceedings in the Journal of the
Washington Academy of Sciences. Some of the
early papers presented before the Society were:
Anomalies in sound signals, A. B. JOHNSON
Experiments on the photophone, A. G. BELL
Skin friction, A. F. Zaum
Solar radiation, C. G. Abbot
Mr. Adams’s membership in the Society dates
from 1910, at which time he presented a paper
before the Society. Mr. Adams told a few stories
and then gave some personal reminiscences con-
cerning various members whom he had known
over the years.
The second speaker was L. B. TuckERMAN,
who served as President during 1932. At the be-
ginning, Mr. Tuckerman stressed the importance
of the tradition of starting the meetings on time,
stating that the meeting had not started until
8:52 p.m. He also mentioned that over the years
the meetings could be described as reasonably
dignified. Examples of meetings were cited which
were not so dignified and yet which proved to be
equally interesting. Mr. Tuckerman then re-
called in chronological order all the past presi-
dents he had known, giving in each case the par-
ticular things which stood out in his memory
about each one. The first was Lyman Briggs who
was president in 1916. He mentioned what an
inspiration Mr. Briggs had been to all who knew
him. A few stories were also told about W. J.
Humphreys, the most interesting of which
centered about a pig which survived being struck
by a ball of ightning. Mr. Tuckerman also men-
tioned another tradition of the Society which is
falling by the wayside. This was described as the
“pinning back of the ears of the retiring presi-
dent’’, and of course refers to the frolic which is
staged at the expense of the retiring president
during the dinner staged in his honor. An example
of these procedings cited was that of the making
of a LiCl cocktail in honor of the retiring president
in 1940, R. E. Gibson. The making of this cock-
tail was first credited to Mr. Gibson. It was later
JANUARY 1956
learned that this cocktail had somewhat toxic
properties. Mr. Tuckerman stated, however,
that no serious complications developed, for none
of the members who attended that dinner are now
dead.
At the close of Mr. Tuckerman’s remarks, Mr.
MeNish asked permission from the chair to cross
examine the speaker on his statement of the time
of starting on the meeting. After consulting the
acting recording secretary, it was finally agreed
that Mr. Tuckerman had meant 8:22 p.m. instead
of 8:52 p.m.
The third speaker of the evening was H. L.
CurtTIs, who was president of the Society in 1931.
Mr. Curtis appeared in the formal attire of his
period in office, tails and all, and presented a pre-
pared address on The development of a subspecies
of the genus Homo, sapiens scientifica, who no
longer adorn themselves by wearing tails”. This
address has been published in full in this JourNaL
45: 131-132. 1955, and will not be discussed here.
The last speaker of the evening was F. G.
BRICKWEDDE, who served as President during
1939. Mr. Brickwedde discussed the subject The
History and development of the Joseph Henry and
Christmas lecture committees. During the presi-
dency of H. L. Curtis in 1931, the income of the
Society began exceeding the expenses, so a com-
mittee was appointed to determine how the
Society might further serve the interests of its
members. This committee made the recommenda-
tion that a lecture be given each year in some
field of research by scientists outside the Wash-
ington area. These lectures were not started with
the idea of honoring Joseph Henry, but it was
natural that this should follow, for 1931 was the
centenial of the discovery of induction with which
Joseph Henry was so closely associated. The first
Joseph Henry Lecture Committee was composed
of L. H. Adams, C. G. Abbot, and R. E. Gibson.
The first Joseph Henry Lecturer was Joseph
Ames, president of the Johns Hopkins Univer-
sity, and the lecture itself was devoted to the life
work of Joseph Henry. Mr. Brickwedde then re-
viewed for the membership some of the outstand-
ing contributions of Joseph Henry. The names of
several of the following lecturers and their sub-
jects were also mentioned.
Again in 1952, the Society found its income
still increasing in spite of the fact that its dues
per member were still fixed at $3. At this time
Mr. MeNish, the President, appointed another
committee to determine how these funds might
PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 31
best be placed in the service of the Society. This
committee consisting of A. Stone, L. Marton, and
M. L. Henderson recommended the establishing
of two demonstration lectures to be given for
young people in the age range fourteen to twenty
one. The first Christmas Lecture committee con-
sisted of L. Marton, A. Stone, L. A. Wood, and
A. I. Mahan. The first Christmas Lecturer was
Edwin H. Land, of the Polaroid Corporation,
who gave a demonstration lecture on T'wo- and
three-dimensional color photographs. Last year
these lectures were given by R. M. Sutton, of
Haverford College, who spoke on The world we
see and The world we don’t see.
Several other Past Presidents and members of
the Society made additional remarks. Some of
these were Lyman Briggs, E. C. Crittenden, and
W. G. Brombacher. At the close of the meeting,
15 past presidents assembled in front of the
membership.
1395TH MEETING, MAY 21, 1954
The Society was addressed on Quantum limita-
tion to vision by ALBERT Rose, of the David
Sarnoff Research Center, RCA. The well-known
decrease in spatial and tonal resolution of the
eye with decrease of light intensity is due pri-
marily not to physiological factors but to effects
of quantum physics. At low levels of illumina-
tion, there are just not enough photons reaching
the eye to convey the desired detailed informa-
tion. This quantum effect is not obvious, for there
is no noticeable “granularity” to the perceived
light.
Classical vision theory utilizes the bleaching of
visual purple to generate nerve impulses. Quan-
titative studies have been made using flicker
effect and dark adaptation. Adaptation to the
dark results in an apparent sensitivity imcrease
of about 10,000 to 1. This has been interpreted
to mean that under the conditions of high illumi-
nation, 99.99 percent of the visual purple is
bleached. This would imply that only 0.01 per-
cent (or possibly 0.1 percent) of the incoming
photons can be utilized, but it can be demon-
strated that practically 100 percent must be
utilized for use to see as much as we do!
A slide was shown illustrating a test pattern of
various size gray and black dots photographed in
such a manner that each individual photon re-
corded as a white spot. The smaller the spot, or
the less its contrast with the background, the
more photons are needed to show its presence.
32 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
In the case of a regular lattice array of spots and
incident photons, a single photon is sufficient to
show a dot (by being absent from the pattern of
reflected photons). If the spot has a reflection co-
efficient of 949, at least 10 photons are needed to
make the minimum detectable difference of one
photon between the dot and the background. For
1 percent contrast, 100 photons are needed, etc.
This illustrates the quantum limitation to tonal
discrimination.
If the array of incident photons is random,
many more are needed to detect a dot—.e., to
make it obvious that a group is missing in the
reflected illumination. It is found experimentally
that a set of about 25 close neighbors must be
missing from a random pattern to make it ap-
parent that there is a “hole” in the pattern. For
the 10 percent contrast gray dot to be detected,
then, it would require an illumination density
such that some 2500 photons were incident upon
the dot; the 1 percent contrast dot would require
250,000 incident photons. This ‘‘square law”’ in-
crease follows from statistical reasoning.
Under room illumination of 10 foot-candles,
about 4 x 10!® photons are incident on each
square foot each second. Allowing for the area of
the iris, and the tenth-second integrating time of
the eye leaves about 10” photons available to the
entire retina for one observation. This boils down
to 10,000 per receptor, which from above is too
few to detect an image of 1 percent contrast.
Hence for this contrast, the quantum effect would
limit resolution before receptor size would. This
argument is independent of the mechanism of
vision.
For a 10 percent contrast image of 1 to 2
minutes of are extension, there are just enough
photons available if 1 percent of them are used.
For weak light, 145 of the incident photons must
be used to account for what we actually see. That
is, in weak light, the utilization efficiency is about
ten times what it is in good light. This allows only
90 percent of the visual purple to be bleached
under good illumination, leaving a factor of a
thousand in apparent sensitivity still to be ex-
plained.
The speaker suggested that there may be a
built-in amplifying system between the retina
and the nerve fibers. This is needed because the
nerve impulses are more energetic than the re-
ceived light. On this basis, dark adaptation is due
mainly to an Automatic Gain Control in the
VOL. 46, No. 1
amplifying system. The lag in adaptation can be
explained by the time constant of the AGC
system.
The lecture was concluded with some slides
showing the image of a girl under illuminations
ranging from 10~° foot-lamberts to 107? foot
lamberts. The granularity was quite evident at
the lower levels of illumination, and the dis
tinguishability of the image varied with level in
a startling manner. (Secretary’s abstract.)
1396TH MEBTING, JUNE 4, 1954
The Society was addressed by Raymonp J.
SEEGER, of the National Science Foundation.
His subject was On natural Philosophy.
The meaning of ‘natural philosophy” has
changed considerably in recent generations, as
has indeed the meaning of plain “philosophy.”
The speaker traced three eras of relationship
between science and philosophy.
The first period, the age of speculative science,
was typified by Plato and Aristotle. Quoting
liberally from the Greek and Latin classics, Mr.
Seeger illustrated his point that during this
period philosophy and science were intermingled
and indistinguishable.
The second period, the age of national science,
saw the lives of St. Thomas Aquinas and
Immanuel Kant. It was Aquinas who first dis-
tinguished between philosophy and _ science.
Earlier writers had treated science as a part of
their philosophy, not as a study ini itself. Kant
attempted to divorce science completely from
philosophy, rather than to have it as a special
branch of philosophy.
The third period is characterized as the age of
experiential science, with philosophy completely
missing from the picture. Physical principles are
accepted on the basis of logical compatibility and
experimental verification, rather than an appeal
to being understandable. ‘““Meaning”’ is ignored.
Science absorbed metaphysics, whereas Descartes
had science subordinate to metaphysics.
The speaker went on to present scattered
aspects of his own viewpoint, or his philosophy
about philosophy. He commented briefly on
Margenau’s work, and asked rhetorical questions,
about “‘real”’ mass in relativity. He summed up
some of the problems by quoting “The common
sense of today is the uncommon science of
yesterday.” (Secretary’s abstract.)
Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences
PPEESUACTU ae oxox. dete sis eis sive oes caer Maraaret Pittman, National Institutes of Health
AP OSUETILAELECEam ciara dials: sre ee aiets isieiaisy Sees RaupH E. Gipson, Applied Physics Laboratory
SOPRA Us poate UDO DOG GH GOD ECT Coenen Hetnz Specut, National Institutes of Health
PUT EUSUTEN To. 6 62 5 <6 Howarp S. Rappuirye, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey (Retired)
JA RRTATOS 6G aleic a COTES Gee acre crear Joun A. STEVENSON, Plant Industry Station
Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications
Harrap A. Renper, U.S. National Museum
Vice-Presidents Representing the Affiliated Societies:
Philosophical Society of Washington..:.......-......-+------ Lawrence A. Woop
Anthropological Society of Washington....................... FRANK M. SETzLER
Biolorical) Society, of Washington... .4---.054-76>- 5-05 44- HERBERT G. DIEGNAN
Chemical Society of Washington.................... Pee Nee Wiuui1am W. Watton
Pntomological Society of Washington. .).5.¢-2--ss-++seesss 40650506" F. W. Poos
NationallGeographicisociety-s---n cee eee eee eee ALEXANDER WETMORE
Geological Society of Washington....................-.-005. Epwin T. McKnicur
Medical Society of the District of Columbia................... FREDERICK O. Cor
ColumbiavElistoricaluSocietynnassace anit ieee GILBERT GROSVENOR
Botanical Society of Washington................:-s-0++--s-0:: S. L. EmMswELuer
Washington Section, Society of American Foresters.......... Grorce F. Gravatr
Washington Society of Engineers....................... HERBERT GROVE a Dense,
Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers...... A. Scorr
Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers........ i 8. Din
Helminthological Society ofeWashingtonese a3: eee JOHN S. ANDREWS
Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists....... Luoyp A. BURKEY
Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers...... Fioyp W. Houau
Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers................ H. G. Dorsty
District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers..D. E. Parsons
District of Columbia Section, Society Experimental Biology and Medicine
W. C. Hzss
Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals............ Tuomas G. DiaeEs
Washington Section, International Association for Dental Research
Rosert M. STEPHAN
Washington Section, Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences.......F. N. FRENKIEL
District of Columbia Branch, American Meteorological Society
Francis W. REICHELDERFER
Elected Members of the Board of Managers:
PROM AIUAT Yel QOGi tel) ike ac ais yee slecere audit 4 scpesnete M. A. Mason, R. J. SEEGER
SRG MUA UAT VL O5 75 ors oe Success sicineedeberre ce eed, lois oe A. T. McPuerson, A. B. GuRNEY
PROM AN UAT Vel OOSie 6 ac. gach as oer e am se ays ets Hee W. W. Rusey, J. R. SWALLEN
SOOT OLOMVMGNAGENSs cach. js ssa4- 42h ase: All the above officers plus the Senior Editor
LECCIRG GY LUCID = mera coxa oe OOO cee ee out Re ENE oo AOE [See front cover]
Harecutiwe Committee... 2... 5...csencnceceeuee: M. Pitrman (chairman), R. E. Gipson,
H. Specut, H. S. Rappierye, J. R. SwALLeN
Committee on Membership.... Roger W. Curtis (chairman), Joon W. ALDRICH, GEORGE
Anastos, Haroun T. Cook, Josep J. Fanny, Francois N, FRENKIEL, PETER KING,
Gorpvon M. Kunz, Louris R. Maxwe.u, Ftorence M. Mrars, Curtis W. SaBRosky,
BENJAMIN SCHWARTZ, Bancrort W. SITTERLY, WILLIE W. SmitH, HarRY WEXLER
Committee on Meetings...... ArNoLp H. Scort (chairman), Harry 8. Berntron, Harry
Bortuwick, Herspert G. Detagnan, Wayne C. Haut, Apert M. STONE
COTE OF. WIGROGPRGHOS..000000669255000000385000000 G. ArtHUR CoopErR (chairman)
FRomanianyelOoOmeee ence eins eee G. ArrHurR Cooprr, James I. HorrmMan
PROM ANU Arye VOD Ta coco ccerties fee hase oe es Haratp A. Reaper, Wiuui1AmM A. DayToN
RoOpanuanyol G58). somes aces eee sees os Dean B. Cowiz, JosepH P. HE. Morrisoyr
Committee on Awards of Scientific Achievement. .. FREDERICK W. Poos (general chairman)
For Biological Sciences..... Sara EK. Branuam (chairman), JoHN 8. ANDREWS,
James M. Hunptey, R. A. St. Grores, Bernice G. Scuusert, W. R. WepEL
For Engineering Sciences...... Horace M. Trent (chairman), JosepH M. CALDWELL,
. Ditu, T. J. Hickey, T. J. Kintran, Gorpon W. McBrips, EH. R. Priore
For Physical Sciences...... Bensamin L. SNAVELY (chairman), Howarp W. Bonn,
Scorr E. Forsusu, Marearet D. Foster, M. E. Freeman, J. K. Taytor
For Teaching of Science....Monroz H. Martin (chairman), Krrta C. JoHNSOoN,
Louse H. MarsHatt, Martin A. Mason, Howarp B. Owrns
Committee on Grants-in-aid for Research.............. FRANCIS O. Rice (chairman),
HERMAN Branson, CHarues K. TRUBBLOOD
Committee on Policy and Planning.. Ba é _E. C. Ortrrenpen (chairman)
MowanuanyslOSGeae tere een ae: lB, (Ol CRITTENDEN, ALEXANDER WETMORE
PR OVD ANUATY 9D (ects nen evoccd od sme sega aeons JOHN E. Grar, Rayrmonp J. SEEGER
Io) dinar Is, cose vapsoboeouease Francis M. DEFANDORF, Frank M. SErzLer
Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent..ARcHIBALD T. McPuerson (chairman)
Moranuamyal 956i cracsiacertensen.-ra sets che crea a es Harotp EB. Finury, J. H. McMILtLten
Iho) dimen IG disco sonnasoouaenaaane neers L. Epwin Yocum, Wruitram J. YOUDEN
PLOW anu anys Cosy eases ree wate id eriseacieeria ears: A. T. McPuerson, W. T. Reap
Committee on Science Education.... RAYMOND J. SrEGER (chairman), RONALD BAMFORD,
R. Percy Barnes, Wauuace R. Bropn, Leonarp CarmicuagnL, Hueu L. Drypen,
Reaina FLANNERY, Rauew EF. Grsson, Froyp W. Hover, Martin A. Mason,
Grorce D. Rock, Wiiu1am W. Rusey, Wriuram H. Seprety, Watpo L. Scumirr,
. Van Evera, Wiuiram E. WRATHER, Francis E. JoHNsTon
Representative on Council of PAN AWTAL SS seas ain eicas (olay ctcie avers ean SIM os Ry eres Watson Davis
Committee of Auditors...FRaNcts E. Jounsron, (chairman), S. D. Cottins, W. C. Hess
Committee of Tellers.. Ratpn P. Trrrsuer (chairman), E. G. Hamper, J. G. THompson
CONTENTS
Editorials. & e406) 2o6- Pk bee ee ee ee 1
Puysics.—Effect of defects on lattice vibrations, II: Localized vibra-
tion modes in a linear diatomic chain. P. Mazur, E. W. MontTrRo.1,
and Ri. B. Ports «2.4.0.4 25228 be6 ooh ck nee Se eee 2
MatTuematics.—Numerical experiments in potential theory using ortho-
normal functions. P. Davis and P. RABINOWITZ......-..--9emee 12
Zootocy.—The ticks (Acarina: Ixodoidea) of the J. Klapperich Afghan-
istan Expedition, 1952 and 1953. GrorcGE ANASTOS............. 18
BIocHEMISTRY.—FEffect of cortisone acetate on production of liver and
muscle glycogen from C-14 labeled glycine and DL-alanine. W. C.
Huss and I. P. SHAFFRAN ......0..0:..05+ ee 08 oe 20
ProceeEpiNGs: Philosophical Society of Washington................... 23
Notes: and. Newsi.c:...<.#: 25 oaaess sh eee ae a ee eee oe ee Le ae 22
VOLUME 46 February 1956 NUMBER 2
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
Published Monthly by the
meres HiNGTON ACADEMY OF So: GC oL Be N © Bes
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: Cuester H. Paes, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RoNaLD BaMForp, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonp, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL ESTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
‘tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
_written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3344 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges.—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the ProcerpinGs should be sent to Haratp A. Reaper, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subscription hates for the JOURNAD.—ber Year... 452.2554) eee $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ — —
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)........ 8.00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 45, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $378.50.
Monoerapru No. 1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
INDEX to JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS.......................... $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete............................. $25.00
Singlevolumes;mnbound:. 722227 cviepsatoe nee rns are oe ee eee 2.00
Single mumbers's:.7 2 26 cons ater cre Se ae eas oe ee Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’’ and
addressed to the Treasurer, H. 8. Rappieye, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
1D); ©
Changes of Address.
to the Secretary.
Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925.
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 46
February 1956
No. 2
GEOPHYSICS.—Possibilities and significance of high-speed computing in meteor-
ology.~FraNGcotis N. FRENKIEL, Applied Physics Laboratory, The Johns
Hopkins University.
These comments refer to the impressions from
a conference on the significance and possibili-
ties of high-speed computing in meteorology
and oceanography that was organized under
the sponsorship of the National Science Foun-
dation and which met in May 1954 al the Uni-
versity of California in Los Angeles.?
Meteorological research is or at least
should be of great interest not only to mete-
orologists but also to physicists, applied
mathematicians, astrophysicists, and other
scientists. Many important developments in
meteorology were brought about through
active cooperation between various disci-
plines. Modern research is often done by
applying to a problem theoretical and ex-
perimental methods developed by various
branches of science. Recognizing these facts,
the main purpose of the Los Angeles confer-
ence was therefore to bring together mete-
orologists, oceanographers, mathematicians,
and physicists in a round-table discussion on
the possibilities as well as the limitations of
high-speed computing in meteorology and
oceanography. Several participants prepared
1 Presented at the Tenth General Assembly of
the International Union of Geodesy and Geophys-
ics. Reprinted, by permission from the Scventific
Proceedings of the International Association of
Meteorology, Rome, 1954. London (Butterworths),
1955. Some references to the discussions included
in the Proceedings are omitted in the present
paper.
2The participants included F. L. Alt, J.
Bjerknes, L. M. K. Boelter, J. Charney, C. Eckart,
R. Fjgrtoft, G. Forsythe, F. N. Frenkiel, M. R.
Hestenes, E. W. Hewson, J. Holmboe, J. Kampé
de Fériet, J. Kaplan, W. W. Kellogg, V. O.
Knudsen, G. P. Kuiper, J. W. Mauchly, W. H.
Munk, J. Namias, M. Neiburger, i. Palmén, H.
A. Panofsky, E. R. Piore, G. W. Platzman, R. R.
Revelle, R. J. Seeger, Z. Sekera, J. Smagorinsky,
H. K. Stephenson, H. J. Stewart, J. J. Stoker, O.
G. Sutton, S. Syono, P. D. Thompson, J. von
Neumann, and H. Wexler.
in advance some comments on various mete-
orological problems which already are or may
be investigated using high-speed computing
techniques. These comments helped in lead-
ing to an extensive discussion of the applica-
tions of numerical methods in meteorology
and to an exchange of ideas between the forty
or so scientists representing the various dis-
ciplines.
Most of the discussion of meteorological
problems was concerned with the motions of
the atmosphere. The fundamental laws of
air motions are based on theoretical and ex-
perimental information available from fluid
dynamics studies and are applied with much
success whenever the flow conditions are
relatively simple, as is often the case in
physics and engineering. However, in most
meteorological problems, the fluid motions
are extremely complex and the application
of even relatively simplified laws of hydro-
dynamics would require long computations.
The meteorologists have, therefore, of neces-
sity, been forced to build a discipline, based
partly on existing physical laws and partly
on insight into atmospheric phenomena
gained from long experience. While the art
of meteorology was thus being continually
improved, important advances were being
made in fluid dynamics and in pertinent
mathematical techniques. High-speed com-
puting techniques came into being and their
development opened new possibilities. With
this newly acquired knowledge and facilities,
a more scientific approach to problems of
atmospheric motions could again be at-
tempted. Electronic computing machines can
now, within a reasonable time and without
requiring thousands of human operators,
34 JOURNAL OF THE
apply such laws to many complicated mete-
orological problems.
Numerical weather forecast, using high-
speed computing equipment, is already an
object of extensive studies, particularly in
the United States, the United Kingdom, and
Sweden. From known meteorological condi-
tions over the United States, for example,
the general flow pattern can already be de-
termined, one or two days ahead, for a large
part of the country. Comparisons between
the numerically determined charts and those
observed one or two days later appear to be
encouraging. With further scientific develop-
ment, predictions of large scale flow patterns,
located correctly to within, say, 200 miles,
will be made soon on a routine basis.
The use of electronic computers has al-
ready made great contributions to many
fields of science and technology. However,
their importance to meteorology is particu-
larly significant. In such problems as weather
prediction, the meteorologist does not have
the time or the means to apply all those laws
of fluid motion which are well known. He
therefore makes a general diagnosis of the
meteorological situation and determines on
its basis his forecast. There is, in such a pre-
diction, some guessing in which experience is
necessary and where some luck is helpful. No
two human forecasters will reach absolutely
the same conclusions. Unlike the human fore-
caster, the electronic computing machine is
completely objective; it will not guess, but it
will give results corresponding to the physi-
cal laws used as a basis for the numerical
forecast. An incorrect forecast will indicate
to the meteorologist that his instructions or
data to the machine should be improved.
Thus a quantitative comparison between the
effects of various possible improvements on
the numerical weather predictions will be of
great value. One should, however, not lose
sight of the fact that an electronic comput-
ing machine does not have its own intelli-
gence. Its lack of intelligence is responsible
for its objectivity which in turn limits the
ability of the machine to making relatively
simple operations according to a program
prepared by human operators. It is only the
speed with which the machine performs these
computations and the volume of the numeri-
cal information it can memorize which make
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 46, No. 2
it valuable to a meteorologist. Each numert-
cal weather forecast must be followed by a
critical interpretation of the results by a
synoptic meteorologist who using it as a
basis, and taking into account the humidity
and temperature distributions, will prepare
the physical weather forecast. The final
weather prediction will largely depend on the
experience and ability of the synoptic mete-
orologist. A part of his work will, however,
be done using methods developed in exact
sciences. One can see a certain similarity be-
tween meteorology and medicine; the elec-
tronic computing machine playing the role
of such modern medical methods as, say, the
determination of sedimentation rates. The
diagnosis of a physician, like the diagnosis of
a synoptic meteorologist will greatly improve
if he uses all the available scientific tools.
The contribution of high-speed com-
puting techniques to weather forecasting
consists primarily in making possible the nu-
merical solution of some fundamental equa-
tions of fluid dynamics which have been
known for many years. However, the theo-
retical foundations of numerical forecasting
also depend on recent contributions to the
mathematical representation of atmospheric
motions and to numerical analysis. There
are, also, some recent advances in fluid dy-
namics which may, with the help of high-
speed computing techniques, contribute to
a better understanding of atmospheric mo-
tions. I am referring to the statistical theory
of turbulence and to the related applications
of probability theory. Theoretical and exper-
imental studies of turbulence may be useful
in showing where such an approach to mete-
orology will be of practical value.
The recent development of the statistical
theory of turbulence has been influenced by
the possibility of comparing the theoretical
results to experimental measurements in
wind tunnels. Most of these measurements
were made with hot-wire anemometers with
which velocity fluctuations reaching fre-
quencies of ten thousand cycles per second
can be observed. The nature of the turbulent
fluctuations is determined by eliminating,
with appropriate electronic equipment, the
mean wind velocity and expressing the tur-
bulence characteristics by such statistical
quantities as correlation coefficients, spectra
FEBRUARY 1956 FRENKIEL: HIGH-SPEED COMPUTING IN METEOROLOGY 35
of turbulence and turbulence intensities.
This electronic equipment operates, in fact,
like a specialized analog computing machine
determining statistical characteristics of the
fluctuating wind velocity. The mean wind-
tunnel velocity is well defined, and the fluc-
tuations of the instantaneous velocity corre-
spond to a scale of eddy sizes of the order of
one centimeter or smaller. When the mean
wind velocity is of at least 1 meter per sec-
ond, the frequency of turbulent fluctuations
is of 100 cycles per second or more. In an
analog computing operation, a several second
sample record is used which is sufficiently
large compared to the magnitude of the fluc-
tuation periods to give meaningful statistical
results.
The turbulent energy of the atmosphere
includes a certain amount of energy corre-
sponding to eddies of the same range of mag-
nitudes as those of wind-tunnel turbulence.
It also includes eddies of several centimeters
or meters observed with micrometeorological
instruments as well as larger size fluctuations
recorded in most meteorological stations on
manographs. Eddies of a magnitude of many
kilometers and cyclonic motions observed on
synoptic charts may be included in the defi-
nition of the turbulent energy of the atmos-
phere. The spectrum of atmospheric turbu-
lence will therefore cover a very large range
of eddies. One must have, therefore, a suff-
cient amount of data on fluctuating wind
velocities to be able to compute statistically
meaningful averages. Electronic computing
machines make such computations possible
and enable us to apply some of the methods
of the statistical theory of turbulence to
atmospheric problems.
The main importance of the modern theory
of turbulence is, however, its contribution to
the understanding of such physical processes
as the transfer of turbulent energy from large
scale motion to smaller scale fluctuations and
the decay of turbulence. The equations
describing these physical processes are based
on the laws of fluid dynamics and are known
at least in some simple cases of turbulent
fields. The use of the statistical description
of the turbulent fluctuations is justified here
by the fact that it brings these physical
processes into focus and is not a means for
concealing our ignorance of these processes.
The study of the relation between large-
scale flow patterns and the smaller-scale
phenomena, which are our local weather,
must be based on a better knowledge of at-
mospheric turbulence. This knowledge can
be acquired from extensive atmospheric
data obtained under various meteorological
and geographic conditions. However, the
enormous amount of available data and
their extreme complexity make it practically
impossible for a meteorologist to digest them
and to grasp fully their significance. A large
number of already available measurements,
therefore, remain unexploited; other signifi-
cant meteorological data are not even col-
lected because of the labor and time which
would be required to analyze them. High-
speed computing techniques now make
possible the analysis of these data in a
reasonable time.
As we have mentioned before, in a wind
tunnel it is rather easy to define a constant
mean wind velocity and the turbulent veloc-
ity fluctuations which depart from this mean.
The averaging process 1s much more difficult
in the case of atmospheric turbulence. The
definition of a “mean” wind velocity will
essentially depend on the scale at which we
wish to observe the meteorological motions.
There will also be some mathematical diffi-
culties in defining appropriate averages using
the experimental data but in this regard one
can obtain valuable results from studies of
atmospheric spectra of turbulence.
The largest scale at which one can study
the atmosphere is the planetary scale. Here
the main difficulty is that we cannot observe
the Earth’s atmosphere as a whole. One may
hope that in the future meteorological ob-
servations from rockets and artificial satel-
lites may be practicable but at present we
have a general view of the atmospheric mo-
tions only for our sun and for such planets as
Jupiter, Saturn, Mars, and Venus, where
some cloud motions or dust storms can be
seen. The view from this great
brings out the large scale motions and aver-
ages out the smaller scale spatial fluetua-
tions. To have an even more complete under-
standing of the planetary circulation one
must also bring out the large-scale time
trends of the flow patterns by averaging out
distance
36 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
the smaller time scale fluctuations. This can
be attempted for our own atmosphere by
determining an average chart from a large
number of synoptic charts. The knowledge
and understanding of the planetary circula-
tion are of importance to long-range weather
forecasting. In such forecasting the problem
is indeed not to determine the location of
individual fronts and cyclones but to predict
the general trends of atmospheric behaviors
over an entire hemisphere. High-speed com-
puting techniques will be of essential impor-
tance to such studies of long-range weather
forecasting. We may, however, emphasize
again the need for understanding the energy
transfer from large scale motions to smaller
scale fluctuations to which we have referred
when discussing the spectrum of atmospheric
turbulence. The relation between the general
planetary circulation and the large scale
“turbulent motions’? represented on the
individual synoptic charts must also be a
subject of a study based on modern fluid
dynamic concepts.
Let me at this place digress to quote from
the writings of one of the first meteorologists,
Aristotle. In his book Meteorologica, he
writes: “‘Some people, wishing to be clever,
say that all the winds are one, on the ground
that the air which moves is in fact one and
the same whole, and only seems to differ,
without differing in reality, because of the
various places from which the current comes
on different occasions; which is like suppos-
ing that all rivers are but one river. The
unscientific views of ordinary people are
preferable to scientific theories of this sort”
(froman English translation by H. D. P. Lee).
As you see, already 23 centuries ago there
was some disagreement about the way one
should look on the atmosphere. Aristotle’s
comments projected to our times may have
some relation to the statistical considerations
of atmospheric motions. It is in fact easy to
disagree about the importance of a statistical
approach since under the same heading many
quite different viewpoints are often included.
The use of statistical methods is no doubt of
particular importance in meteorological
studies. To bring out the planetary circu-
lation, a statistical analysis of the data can
be used to eliminate all small spatial or
temporal weather fluctuations. Statistical
analysis can again be used to study these fluc-
voL. 46, No. 2
tuations and determine a spectrum of atmos-
pheric turbulence or a correlation curve. The
significance of the shape of a spectrum of
turbulence or a correlation curve would be
based on the physical processes which they
appear to represent. In many statistical
problems, correlation coefficients are meas-
ured and in some of them their value does
not add much to the understanding of the
physical processes. One can compute a
correlation coefficient expressing quantita-
tively the correctness of a weather forecast.
Information theory is providing other meth-
ods for such a quantitative study which will
also be of value. In many micrometeorologi-
cal studies one is often concerned with an-
other aspect of a statistical approach in
which a correlation curve is significant when
it has a connection with the underlying
physical process.
Atmospheric pollution of an industrial
area has now become a major problem in
many communities. Such areas face the
problem of reducing the degree of contami-
nation without detriment to many of those
human activities that produce it and that
are necessary to the well-being of the popu-
lation. Here again high-speed computing
techniques will make possible the application
of the laws of physics to the solution of a
large part of the problem. The same tech-
niques appear to be of interest to other
problems related to turbulent diffusion.
Serious consideration is also being given to
research on evaporation as well as some
problems of sand storms which are of such
a great interest to the arid zones studies.
The development and _ trajectories of
tropical cyclones are the object of several
studies to which high-speed computing will
be very valuable. In this problem one has to
solve a system of non-linear equations with
certain initial and boundary conditions
which involve so many complicated nu-
merical calculations that only electronic
computing machines will be able to give prac-
tical results. Numerical forecast of the mete-
orological conditions leading to disastrous
floods has been proven to be possible. These
and other meteorological problems are of
major importance in certain areas and their
further study awaits the scientific develop-
ments now made possible with the assistance
of high-speed computing techniques.
FEBRUARY 1956 FRENKIEL: HIGH-SPEED COMPUTING IN METEOROLOGY 37
Since there are so many applications for
high-speed computing in meteorology, one
may ask the question of what is the status
of electronic computing machines at present.
A large number of electronic digital com-
puters are now in operation and are used to
solve meteorological problems. In the Wash-
ington area there is now a numerical com-
puting center especially devoted to numerical
weather forecast. This center located in Suit-
land, Md., is jointly sponsored by the Air
Force, the Navy, and the Weather Bureau.
Most of the meteorological problems and
particularly numerical weather forecasting
require digital computers of a rather large
capacity with a large number of vacuum
tubes and complicated electrical circuits.
The size and cost of such computers with
their relatively large power supplies and
cooling systems often limits their avail-
ability to many meteorological organiza-
tions. There are, however, smaller com-
puting machines which may be of great
value to the study of several meteorological
problems. I should also like to call attention
to the possibility of using transistors in
place of vacuum tubes in digital computers.
A transistor is of about one tenth of the
size of a vacuum tube and requires about
one twentieth of its power supply. Although
the use of transistors in digital computers
is at present at an experimental stage one can
expect that it will soon become practical.
The installation of the electrical circuitry
can also be considerably simplified by using
printed circuits. Digital computers with
transistors and printed circuits will require
smaller power supplies, little or no cooling,
and much less space. As a result they will
no doubt become less expensive and more
accessible to a larger number of meteorologi-
cal organizations.
One cannot talk about the status of high-
speed computing machines without thinking
about the processing of data and of the
instructions to the machine. I have referred
before to the large amount of numerical
data which can be analyzed by a digital
computing machine. However, the speed
with which it performs its operations is often
limited by the speed with which the data can
be put into the machine. Numerical weather
forecasting is particularly concerned with
devising techniques for an efficient process-
ing of data to the machine and of the result-
ing numerical forecast back to the mete-
orologist.
In conclusion, let me summarize my main
impressions from the discussions at the Los
Angeles conference. I feel that a closer con-
tact between meteorologists, physicists,
mathematicians, and other scientists will be
very profitable to the development of Mete-
orology as a science. High-speed computing
techniques have an important role in such
a development; their impact will no doubt
be felt in several fields of meteorological re-
search. I have the impression that numerical
forecasting will influence synoptic mete-
orology in a very special way, for I believe
that what is coming forward is a great devel-
opment of a modern synoptic meteorology
which will connect the synoptic studies to
the numerical weather forecast methods. I
have already referred to the fact that follow-
ing a numerical forecast a synoptic mete-
orologist will have to prepare a physical
weather forecast. But of main importance
to synoptic meteorology seems to be that,
in the future, numerical forecast will be
used to construct general weather patterns
from which one will be able to determine a
weather forecast located correctly within,
say, a space scale of 200 miles. These pat-
terns will form a framework which modern
synoptic meteorologists, each in his own
local area, will complete at an even smaller
scale taking into account the atmospheric
processes particular to his area. More cor-
rect predictions of local weather conditions
can be expected to follow such methods. To
reach such results it is not necessary to have
in each meteorological organization an
electronic digital computer nor is it sufficient
to have such computers in some meteorologi-
‘al organizations. What is more important
is a proper net of data processing equipment
and above all a sufficiently large number of
modern synoptic meteorologists whose un-
derstanding of atmospheric processes will
make possible correct predictions of local
weather conditions for each area of the size
of a county or a city.
38 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 46, No. 2
MATHEMATICS.—Commutators of A and A*.1 T. Karo, American University,
and O. Taussky, National Bureau of Standards.
EDITORIAL NOTE
The commutator (A, B) = AB — BA where
A and B represent matrices or other not neces-
sarily commuting operators has played an
important role in quantum mechanics. The non-
vanishing of the commutator of canonically con-
jugate operators is the root of the Heisenberg un-
certainty principle.
One infers that commutability is not “purely
mathematical,’ but of metamathematical inter-
est. Developments in the theory of higher order
commutators may some day find application in
physics.
A normal n X n matrix A is one which
commutes with A*, the transposed com-
plex conjugate of A. Four proofs are given
here for the fact (Theorems 1 and 2) shown
previously by C. R. Putnam [1] that the
relation
A(AA* — A*A) — (AA* — A*A)A = 0
already implies that A is normal. Two of
these proofs do not use the characteristic
roots of the matrix and can therefore be
used for more general cases. Another of
these proofs is generalized for bounded
operators in Hilbert space. For unbounded
operators the fact ceases to be true as is
shown by the matrix
0 0
be OQ.
OQ “2 0
OR OMENS
Denoting AB — BA by (A, B) it is shown
that the above theorem when combined
with another result of C. R. Putnam, (see
[2]), imphes the following more general
theorem: for a non normal matrix A the
commutators (A, A*) and (A, (A, A*)) do
not commute.
Finally, the case n = 2 is examined. It is
shown that the commutator
(EG G2)
1 This work has been supported (in part) by the
Office of Naval Research.
is proportional to (A, A*). If (A, (4,
(A, A*) ---)) is called the nth order com-
mutator if 2 — 1 brackets ( ) are used,
it is shown that the fourth order commuta-
tor vanishes if A has a double characteris-
tic root, otherwise no commutator of order
>4 vanishes for a not normal 2 X 2 matrix.
Theorem 1. Let A be a finite matrix with
elements in a formally real field or in a field
with an involution a — a, for which >> aid: =
Oimplies a; = 0. Let (A, (A, A*)) = 0. Then
(ALA) = OF
First proof. This theorem follows from the
following more general one.
Theorem 1’. Let A and C be finite matrices
satisfy Te the conditions of Theorem F Then
GrA= O) = O0impies GO
Proof vo; Uheorem ha kuteoe— ule. @)
and assume (A, B) = 0. Consider trace B*B.
We obtam trace B*B = traces (GA —
AG*)B) = trace C*AB —stracewAlGebn—
trace C*4B — trace C*BA = 0. Hence
trace B*B = 0 which implies that all ele-
ments of B are 0.
Theorem 1’ further implies that for non
normal matrices A all “alternating”? com-
mutators
AAs 4, 2)
CE (Ch (ZL Zt )))))) © <
Z0
Second proof. From Lemma 2 of Jacobson
[4], it follows that AA* — A*A is nilpotent.
Since this commutator is hermitian it is
actually the zero matrix. For, let By = 0
for B hermitian. If r = 2 the vanishing of
the elements of the principal diagonal of B?
implies already that B = O for the type of
field considered. If r > 2 use the relation
Br+s = 0 where s > 0 andr + s is a power
of 2. It follows again that B = 0.
Theorem 2. Let A be a finite matrix with
» This theorem can be applied to matrices whose
elements are polynomials with real coefficients of
several indeterminates, e.g., group matrices (see
[3]). This note arose in connection with the study
of such matrices. In [3] groups with normal group
matrices were characterized. Theorem 1 shows
that they coincide with groups of which the 3rd
order commutator of the group matrix vanishes.
This can also be shown directly by group theoret-
ical methods.
FeBRuary 1956
complex numbers as elements. Then
(4, Gy a) S O
mipiues (CA, A*) = 0.
First proof. The following two results are
used:
1. Two matrices A
quasi-commutative if?
and B are called
(A, (A, B)) = (B, (A, B)) = 0.
Such a pair of matrices have property P,
i.e., they can be transformed to upper tri-
angular form simultaneously by a unitary
similarity transformation.
2. If A and A* have property P then A
is normal (see [7]).
It is clear that (A, (A, A*)) = 0 implies
quasi-commutativity for A and A*. Hence
Theorem 2 follows.‘
Second proof. Since B = (A, A*) is her-
mitian it can be transformed to diagonal
form by a unitary similarity transformation.
Since the relations B = (A, A*) and
(A, B) = O are unchanged under a simul-
taneous transformation of A, A* and B by
the same unitary matrix, we may assume
that B is already in diagonal form.
Suppose now that B # 0. Then we may
assume that there is an integer m (0 <
m < n) such that the first m diagonal ele-
ments of B are equal to some X # 0 while
the other diagonal elements are different
from X. Then (A, B) = O implies that A has
only zeros for all (2, k) elements with 7 S
m <k ork = m < 2. Let Ao be the
m X m matrix composed of the first m
rows and columns of A, and By similarly
defined. Then B = (A, A*) implies By =
(A,, Aj). This gives a contradiction, for,
while the trace of (Ay, A#) is zero, that of
By is equal to mA # 0.
Theorem 3. Let A be a2 X 2 matrix with
complex numbers as elements and with char-
acteristic roots \1 , dx. Then
(A, (A, (A, A*))) = Qi — 22)?(A, A*).
3 See [5], [6].
‘This proof can, roughly speaking, be looked
upon as the finite dimensional analogue of
Putnam’s proof. The concept of quasi-commuta-
tivity for operators was also studied by Halmos
[8] and Kaplansky; see [9], [10].
KATO AND TAUSSKY: COMMUTATORS OF A AND A* 39
Proof.’ This theorem follows from the more
general identity concerning any pair A, B
of 2 X 2 matrices which can be verified by
actual computation:
(A, (A, (A, B))) = [Grace A)? — 4 det A]
(Al, 18).
We now show how the second proof of
Theorem 2 can be generalized to hounded
operators.
Theorem 4. Let A be a bounded linear
operator defined everywhere in a Hilbert space,
and let A* be its adjoint. Then
(A, (A, AU) = ©
implies (A, A*) = 0.
Proof. B = AA* — A*A is a bounded,
self-adjoint operator. Let B = dd Ey,
be its spectral representation. Let Nt, be
the range of the projection J — EF) , where
dh > 0. Then (A, B) = O implies that
reduces both A and A*.6 Let A, and A* be
the parts of A and A* on Nt respectively.
It is easily seen that Ax is equal to (A,)*. We
have (A, , Ax) = By, where B, is the part
of Bon I, . Hence A,AX — AXA, => ATH>O
by construction where J, 1s the identity
operator in Nt. Let x be any vector. It
follows that || Ay x ||? S || Axa |? — A || x
< (|| Ax |2 — X) || a ||? where || Ax || is the
bound of Ax . This would lead to the con-
tradiction || A, ||? S || Ax |? — » < |] Ax
|| Ay |]? unless 9 is zero-dimensional. Thus
we have proved that J — FE, = 0 or FE, =
I for \ > 0. Similarly we can show that #, =
0 for \ < 0. This completes the proof of
1B =
Theorem 2 and Theorem 4 can be general-
ized by using the following theorem of C. R.
Putnam (see [2]):
Let A be a bounded matrix and B be a
bounded normal matrix. If (A, B) = C and
U3, OC) = Owoea C= ©.
Using this theorem for B = (A, A*) and
Theorems 2 and 4, we obtain:
Theorem 5. For a bounded matrix A in
Hilbert space the commutators (A, A*) and
(A, (A, A*)) commute cf and only if A ts nor-
mal.
D)
2
5K. Goldberg assisted us in this proof. See
also [11].
6 See [12], pp. 25 and 33.
40 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 46, No. 2
REFERENCES
1] Purnam, C. R. On the spectra of commutators.
Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 5: 929-931. 1954.
[2] Purnam, C. R. On normal operators in Hilbert
space. Amer. Journ. Math. 73: 357-362. 1951.
[3] Taussxy, O. A note on group matrices. Proc.
Amer. Math. Soc. 6: 984-986. 1955.
4] Jacospson, N. Rational methods in the theory
of Lie algebras. Ann. Math. 36: 875-881.
1935.
[5] McCoy, N. H. On quasi-commutative matrices.
Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 36: 327-380. 1934.
6] Drazin, M. P., Duncry, J. W., and GRUEN-
BERG, K. W. Some theorems on commutative
matrices. Journ. London Math. Soc. 26:
221-228. 1951.
(7) Horrman, A. J. and Taussky, O. A charac-
terization of normal matrices. Journ. Res.
Nat. Bur. Standards 52: 17-19. 1954.
[8] Hatmos, P. Commutators of operators II.
Amer. Journ. Math. 76: 191-198. 1954.
(9] Vipav, I. Uber eine Vermutung von Kaplansky.
Math. Zeitschr. 62: 330. 1955.
[10] Kapnansxky, I. Review of [9]. Math. Rev. 16:
1125. 1955.
[11] Rory, W. E. On k-commutative matrices.
Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 39: 483-495. 1936.
[12] Naey, B. v.Sz. Spektraldarstellung linearer
Transformationen des Hilbertschen Rawmes.
Berlin, 1942.
— EE
MISCELLANY
Your Editor’s mail included the following
letter on a problem of general interest. The
appended news items on the subject indicate
encouraging progress.
A SOLUTION TO THE ‘SCIENTIST PROBLEM”
Since so much alarmed attention is being given
to the present and future shortage of really good
science teachers and, ergo, of trained scientists,
this solution might be presented: a rotating
supply of teachers recruited from competent
scientists now working in government, industry,
and the Armed Forces.
This might be organized on a one- or two-year
“sabbatical leave” basis with the present em-
ployer and/or Federal Government and/or
foundations continuing that part of the scientist’s
normal salary and expenses which the public-
school system or college is unable to pay. If a man
qualified to teach some phase of science is in-
ducted into the Armed Forces, he could serve
as a teacher under this plan in lieu of military
service.
Since every scientist, however competent,
would not necessarily be equipped to teach his
or her subject, probably a brief period of orienta-
tion in planning, psychology, and course require-
ments would be necessary before entering the
school system. This could be given in the form of
short seminars at colleges or at central cities,
by teachers “borrowed” from colleges.
Figures might be cited on the number of
scientists in various fields who could contribute
to such a plan. It would be intersting if state-
ments could be quoted from leaders in govern-
ment, industry, and the Armed Forces on the
practical possibilities of the idea; also from educa-
tional leaders on the plan’s apparent advantages
(such as the value of instruction from expert
“practicing” scientists and the drawing power
science courses would have under such teachers),
and from scientists on their willingness to partici-
pate in such a plan, their recognition of the
seriousness and immediacy of the problem, and
their present inability or reluctance to teach
because of the financial (and, possibly, profes-
sional status) sacrifice now involved.
Opinions might be gathered concerning under
what agency this could best be organized (govern-
ment? one of the foundations?) and where such
teaching influence is most important (high school,
college, or combination of both?).
SHIRLEY Moore
810 Langley Drive
Silver Spring, Md.
TRAINING PROGRAM FOR SCIENCE AND
MATHEMATICS TEACHERS IN
SECONDARY SCHOOLS
The National Academy of Sciences-National
Research Council in cooperation with the Ameri-
can Association for the Advancement of Science
and with the encouragement of major groups in
business and industry is setting up a supple-
mentary training program for science and mathe-
matics teachers in secondary schools. This group
Fepruary 1956
is considered the most important segment of the
American educational system, because largely
upon them depends the interest and preparation
of today’s students who may be tomorrow’s
scientists, engineers, and technicians. :
Arlington County, Va., is being used as a model
for a pilot study on ways and means of improving
the caliber of science and mathematics teaching
in public schools. Other school systems in the
Washington area have been invited to participate.
School boards, parent-teachers associations, and
civic groups are cooperating to raise a scholarship
fund which will enable teachers to take graduate-
level courses and familiarize themselves with
both the fundamentals and recent developments
in Sciences.
Another aspect of the plan provides qualified
teachers with opportunities for summer employ-
ment in local scientific and engineering organiza-
tions in both industry and government.
On October 27, representatives of The George
Washington University, University of Maryland,
University of Virginia, American University,
Georgetown University, Catholic University,
Howard University, and District of Columbia
Teachers’ College met at the Academy-Research
Council to develop a joint program of special
KNIGHT: NEW FAMILIES OF GASTROPODA 4]
courses in mathematics, physics, chemistry, and
biology for the summer of 1956. A committee on
the improvement of science and mathematics
teaching, composed of representatives of the
participating universities, is being formed to help
coordinate the plans for this cooperative effort.
Responsibility for the general supervision of
the entire program will be assigned by the
Academy-Research Council to a special board
representing all areas of science, mathematics
and engineering.
Shell Companies Foundation, Inc., has initi-
ated a program of Shell Merit Fellowships for
High School Science and Mathematics Teachers.
Under the program, Shell will underwrite
seminars for 60 teachers each summer. The
study program will include graduate-level classes,
lectures by outstanding scientists, and visits to
research laboratories industrial facilities.
Cornell and Stanford Universities will operate
the seminars.
Recipients of these fellowships will receive
travel allowance, living expenses, tuition and
fees, plus $500 to compensate other potential
and
summer earnings.
ee
PALEONTOLOGY .—WNew families of Gastropoda. J. BRookrs Kniaut, Smith-
sonian Institution.
The writer is senior author of a manu-
script for those portions of Parts I and J of
the Treatise on invertebrate paleontology that
deal with the Monoplacophora and with the
Paleozoic Gastropoda. The junior authors
are Dr. Roger L. Batten and Dr. Ellis L.
Yochelson. It was found that a not incon-
siderable number of new taxa in the familial
group were needed. Although exceptions
have been made, it is thought that the 7’rea-
tise is not an appropriate place for the pub-
hieation of the names of new taxa. Likewise
the authors feel that names published with
more than two authors place an unnecessary
burden on posterity and should be avoided
if possible. If new names were published in
the Treatise it would have been necessary to
cite Knight, Batten, and Yochelson as au-
thors, unless recourse was had to the always
clumsy and often confusing expedient of cit-
ing authorship for individual names of new
taxa different from that of the paper as a
whole.
These considerations have led the joint
authors to agree that the senior author,
Knight, publish the new taxa of most of the
familial group in advance of the appearance
of the Treatise. Since the full systematic
treatment and full diagnoses of these taxa
will appear within the year and since diag-
noses are not requisite for validity of familial
names, though recommended (Follett, 1955,
p. 5 [88, 42]), they are omitted here.
Certain other names for new families, new
genera, and new species will also be pub-
lished separately in advance of the T'reatis«
by the junior authors and by two others, Dr.
Stephen S. Winters and Dr. Arthur J. Bou-
42 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
cot, both of whom have papers in preparation
containing taxa important to the Treatise.
In the following list names ending in -acea
apply to superfamilies, in -idae to families,
in -inae to subfamilies, and in -ides to tribes.
Familial name Type genus
Agnesia IKKoninck, 1883.
Archinacella Ulrich and Sco-
field, 1897.
Agnesiinae
Archinacellidae
Coelozoninae |
Coelozonides {
Elasmonematidae
Euphemitinae
Gyronematinae
Hypseloconidae
Coelozone Perner, 1907.
Elasmonena Fischer, 1885.
Euphemites Warthin, 1930.
Gyronema Ulrich, 1897.
Hypseloconus Berkey, 1898.
Liospirinae Liospira Ulrich and Scofield,
1897.
Luciellidae Luciella Woninck, 1883.
Meekospiridae Meekospira Ulrich, 1897.
Knightitinae Knightites Moore, 1941.
Neilsoniinae Neilsonia Thomas, 1940.
Ophiletinae Ophileta Vanuxem, 1842.
D . «
Palaeotrochacea | Palaeotrochus Hall, 1879.
Palaeotrochidae
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 46, No. 2
Familial name
Pelagiellacea
Pelagiellidae
Phanerotremati-
dae
Plagiothyridae
Planitrochidae
Planozonides
Platyschismatinae
Progalerinae
Rhaphischismati-
dae
Ruedemanniinae
Tropidodiscinae
Type genus
Pelagiella Matthew, 1895.
Phanerotrema Fischer, 1885.
Plagiothyra Whidborne, 1892.
Planitrochus Perner, 1903.
Planozone Perner, 1907.
Platyschisma M’Coy, 1844.
Progalerus Holzapfel, 1895.
Rhaphischisma Knight, 1936.
Ruwedemannia Foerste, 1914.
Tropidodiscus Meek and Wor-
then, 1866.
Tubina Owen, 1859.
Turbonellina Konineck, 1881.
Tubinidae
Turbonellininae
REFERENCE
Fouuterr, W. Ll. An wnofficial interpretation of the
International Rules of Zoological Nomenclature
as amended by the X IIT International Congress
of Zoology. Paris 1948 and by the XIV Inter-
national Congress of Zoology Copenhagen, 1953.
Society of Systematic Zoology, 1955.
PALEONTOLOGY .—Some new pleurotomarian gastropods from the Permian of
west Texas. Roger L. Barren, University of Wisconsin. (Communicated by
John B. Reeside, Jr.)
Five new genera and two new families of
upper Paleozoic gastropods have thus far
been recognized by the writer during a study
of Permian pleurotomarians from west Texas
and New Mexico. The purpose of this pres-
ent paper is to make available the resulting
new names for the forthcoming Treatise on
invertebrate paleontology, since no new names
can be included in that work. The new genera
and families will be treated and illustrated in
greater detail in a paper to appear shortly.
PORTLOCKIELLIDAE Batten, n. fam.
Description.—Characterized by dominant, usu-
ally rather coarse spiral ornament and a sele-
nizone low on the whorls; shell shape ranging from
globose to turreted; ornament on parietal surface
resorbed or covered by a very thin inductura.
Tapinotomaria Batten, n. gen.
Type species —Tapinotomaria rugosa Batten,
n. sp.
Description.—Turbiniform — pleurotomarians
with rounded to steplike whorls and dominant
spiral ornament separated by concave interspaces;
collabral ornament forms rounded to elongated
nodes at intersections with spiral ornament;
selenizone defined by a thread with a spiral cord
above this thread and commonly with a gap be-
tween the cord and the next cord above it; slit
shallow.
Tapinotomaria rugosa Batten, n. sp.
Holotype —U.S.N.M. no. 125281, U.S.N.M.
Locality 702d, Leonard formation, Glass Moun-
tains, Texas.
Description.—Whorl profile even and convex to
selenizone; spiral and collabral ornament form
nodes varying in degree of emphasis; 4 to 6 spiral
cords above the selenizone and 4 to 14 spiral
cords on the base.
PHYMATOPLEURIDAEB Batten, n. fam.
Description.—Discoid to moderately high
spired, highly ornamented pleurotomarians with
a selenizone located at or slightly above the
periphery; the outer whorl face vertical or sloping
and may be narrow compared to upper whorl
surface; selenizone convex to concave and usually
strongly bordered; there may be basal sinuses;
ornament in the parietal lip resorbed.
Fepruary 1956 BATTEN: NEW
Callitomaria Batten, n. gen.
Type species —Callitomaria stanislavi Batten,
n. sp.
Description.—Turreted pleurotomarians with
dominant spiral ornament and step-like whorls,
moderately wide selenizone situated about mid-
way on an almost vertical outer whorl face; outer
whorl face generally narrower than upper whorl
surface; a spiral thread or cord present between
suture and upper selenizone margin and one just
above selenizone margin; collabral ornament
variable in development from suture to base; shal-
low slit; thin shell.
Callitomaria stanislavi Batten, n. sp.
Holotype —A.M.N.H. no. 27953, A.M.N.H.
Locality 512, Getaway formation, Guadalupe
Mountains, Texas.
Description.—Collabral ornament coarse and
variable, may be very strong forming nodes
above selenizone or on base only or both; spiral
elements equally well developed above and below
selenizone.
Discotomaria Batten, n. gen.
Type species —Discotomaria basisulcata Batten,
n. sp.
Description.—Discoid to low spired_ pleuro-
tomarians with a concave selenizone depressed
beneath the surface of an almost vertical outer
whorl face; upper whorl surface concave with
dominant collabral cords; upper edge of outer
whorl face unornamented or with nodes and
threads; outer whorl face concave, ornamented by
collabral elements except for selenizone and a
narrow trough just beneath the selenizone; labral
sinus complex and moderately deep and slit nar-
row; trough on outer edge of base with sinus;
columellar lip with sinus at upper end.
Discotomaria basisulcata Batten, n. sp.
Holotype —U.S.N.M. no. 125280, U.S.N.M.
locality 702, Leonard formation, Glass Moun-
tains, Texas.
Description.—Early whorls are flat and unorna-
mented; upper whorl surface with very strong
collabral cords that form strong nodes at upper
edge of outer whorl face; a flat collabrally orna-
mented shelf forms upper surface of the large,
rounded and reticulate lower edge of outer whorl
face.
PLEUROTOMARIAN GASTROPODS 43
Family EoroMarripaE Wenz, 1938
Subfamily Eoromariinak Wenz, 1938
Tribe PrycHoMPHALIDES Wenz, 1938
Description.—Turbiniform to trochiform pleu-
rotomarians with dominant collabral ornament
and the selenizone situated on the periphery or
slightly above it; pronounced cords restricted to
a few species only; depth of the slit is variable;
selenizone margin complex consisting of several
components in some species closely or widely
spaced, the lower selenizone margin tending to be
wider and more complex.
Shwedagonia Batten, n. gen.
Type species.—Shwedagonia elegans Batten,
n. sp.
Description.—Characterized by a very deep,
narrow slit extending about eight-tenths of a
whorl in depth; selenizone located just above a
shallow trough above the periphery; shell shape
varies from straight-sided to concave-sided;
dominant collabral ornament, usually more pro-
nounced above the selenizone; a flat area just
under selenizone bordered below by a turned up
margin similar to the upper margin of selenizone;
base is smooth to coarsely ornamented; umbilicus
wide and with deep sutures.
Shwedagonia elegans Batten, n. sp.
Holotype —U.S.N.M. no. 125279, U.S.N.M.
Locality 703b, Leonard formation, Glass Moun-
tains, Texas.
Description.—Well developed collabral orna-
ment usually more strongly developed above
selenizone; spiral ornament consists of fine
threads both above and below selenizone; shell
shape extremely variable, ranging from very low
spired concave sided to moderately high spired
straight sided.
Eirlysia Batten, n. gen.
Type species—EKirlysia exquisita Batten, n. sp.
Description.—Globose trochiform to moder-
ately spired pleurotomarians with a relatively
wide selenizone just above periphery; whorls in-
flated and smooth to selenizone; collabral orna-
ment may be dominant above selenizone but
spiral ornament frequently present and weakly
developed; slit shallow, selenizone defined by two
sharp cords, which may be composed of multiple
44 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
elements; a trough is usually developed just below
selenizone, lower edge of outer whorl face a cord
separating it from flat to flatly rounded base;
parietal inductura thin; narrowly to widely
phaneromphalus; reflexed columellar lip.
Eirylsia exquisita Batten, n. sp.
Holotype —U.S.N.M. no. 125282, Princeton
vou. 46, No. 2
University locality 3, Bone Spring formation,
Sierra Diablo, Texas.
Description.—Relatively low spired forms with
globose whorls; dominant collabral cords from
suture to selenizone; selenizone relatively wide
and selenizone margins sharply defined; spiral
threads are visible both above and below sele-
nizone; lower edge of outer whorl face is sharply
defined; narrowly phaneromphalus.
PALEONTOLOGY .—New Permian gastropod genera from eastern Arizona. STEVEN
S. Winters, Florida State University. (Communicated by J. Brookes Knight.)
The following generic names and diagnoses
are published so that they might be available
for the Treatise on invertebrate paleontology,
part I. Full discussion with illustrations will
be forthcoming at some later date as part of
a stratigraphic-paleontological study of the
Permian in eastern Arizona. The three new
genera, Apachella, Cibecuia, and Kinishbia,
are based on silicified material collected
from the Fort Apache limestone (Permian)
in eastern Arizona on the Fort Apache In-
dian Reservation.
Family PLEUROTOMARIIDAE Swainson, 1840
Apachella Winters, n. gen.
Type species —Apachella transhirata Winters,
n. sp.
Description —Small, moderately high spired
turbiniform, less commonly pupiform gastropods
with wide, steeply sloping selenizone and flatly
rounded, anomphalous, or narrowly phanerom-
phalous base; initial whorl planospirally coiled;
selenizone above peripheral carina flat to concave,
generated by a wide slit of moderate depth;
aperature ovate to circular; outer lip trending
obliquely backward to slit, then with slight
forward convexity to nearly vertical columellar
lip; parietal inductura thin; parietal tooth in some
species extends down from top of aperture; upper
whorl profile in some species modified by sub-
sutural shoulder, various revolving carinae and
lirae common to all species; transverse orna-
mentation, when present, limited to upper whorl
surface.
Apachella translirata Winters, n. sp.
Holotype —A.M.N.H. no. 27999/1: 1.
Description.—Turbiniform gastropods with
well-developed subsutural shoulder; initial whorl
planospirally coiled; whorl profile below sub-
sutural shoulder sloping outward to steeply
sloping selenizone carine, then turning to vertical,
concave flank, which rounds smoothly into flatly
rounded, minutely phaneromphalous base; shal-
low sinus; columellar lip slightly reflexed; orna-
ment 9 to 10 strong, revolving carinae on base
bordering selenizone and well-developed trans-
verse, rounded and closely spaced lirae on sub-
sutural shoulder; first three whorls without
ornamentation.
Family Murcuisonirpar Koken, 1896?
Cibecuia Winters, n. gen.
Type species.
n. sp.
Description —Small, high-spired, many-whorled
conical gastropods with wide, flat selenizone
located about midway between upper suture
and peripheral keel marking basal angulation;
first four whorls smooth; base flatly rounded,
anomphalous; outer lip thin, with sinus culmi-
nating in notch of unknown depth at midwhorl
face; outer lip curves backward with forward
convexity above selenizone; below selenizone
curves gently forward with forward convexity to
keel and across base to thick inner lip, smoothly
concave outward; parietal inductura thin or
absent; ornament parallel grooves bordering
selenizone, with peripheral keel and revolving
lirae on base; transverse nodes when present on
upper whorl face only.
Cibecuia cedarensis Winters,
Cibecuia cedarensis Winters, n. sp.
Holotype.—A.M.N.H. no. 28007 /2: 1.
Description—Small, high-spired, many-whorled,
conical gastropods with straight, gently ta-
pered silhouette; sutures incised and impressed
below peripheral, keeled angulation separates
FEBRUARY 1956 YOCHELSON: NEW
whorl face from flatly rounded, slightly extended,
anomphalous base; outer lip thin, with sinus
culminating in notch of unknown depth at mid-
whorl face generating a wide, flat selenizone; re-
volving ornament of a pair of grooves delimiting
selenizone, a faintly noded peripheral keel and 3
or 4 lirae on base; transverse ornament rounded
nodes on upper part of whorl face beyond fourth
whorl extending downward with slight backward
obliquity.
Family LoxoNEMATIDAE Koken, 1889
Kinishbia Winters, n. gen.
Type species.—K inishbia nodosa Winters, n. sp.
Description —Small to medium, high-spired,
many-whorled conical gastropods with smooth
extended base and narrow umbilicus; outer lip
thin, columellar lip thick and nearly vertical,
PERMIAN GASTROPOD 45
parietal lip nearly horizontal; shallow anterior
notch; earlier whorls developing concave profile
of tapered spire; strongly developed, rounded
transverse costae on upper whorl face of all but
first four smooth whorls.
Kinishbia nodosa Winters, n. sp.
Holotype —A.M.N.H. no. 28011/1: 1.
Description.—Gastropods with whorl profile
convex or gently shouldered in upper half, flat
and sloping slightly inward in lower half to slight
keel separating whorl face from smoothly
rounded, somewhat flattened base; outer lip thin
with broad, very gentle sinus on flank, crossing
base with slight forward convexity to shallow
anterior notch; inductura absent; pleural angle
varying from 22° to 31°; ornament of transverse
costae on upper whor!l face and at keel.
PALEONTOLOGY .—Labridens, a new Permian gastropod.' Exuis L. YOCHELSON
U.S. Geological Survey. (Communicated by James 8. Williams.)
Examination of the large collections of
fossils from the Permian of western Texas in
the U. S. National Museum has revealed a
new genus of gastropods. The gastropod,
here named Labridens, has one unusual char-
acter that distinguishes the genus and sug-
gests some interesting implications as to
phylogeny.
Labridens is similar to genera placed in the
Subulitacea in possessing a siphonal notch
and folds on the inner lip and is referred to
that superfamily. Labridens differs from
other subulitaceans and from other Paleozoic
gastropods in possessing a lira on the inner
surface of the outer lip. As the shell grew,
this lira moved forward and formed a spiral
ridge inside of the shell.
Lirae and elaborate thickening on the in-
ner surface of the outer lip and throughout
the shell are important characteristics of the
Nerinacea. This group is common in the
Jurassic and Cretaceous, but is unknown
elsewhere in the geologic record. Although
the shell form of many nerinacean genera 1s
different from that of Labridens, a few gen-
era, for example Brouzetia Cossmann, ap-
proach it. Most nerinaceans have a short
canal and at least one columellar fold.
1 Publication authorized by the Director, U.S.
Geological Survey.
The available evidence does not necessar-
ily indicate relationship of the Nerinacea
with the Subulitacea, but it is suggestive.
Should further evidence of relationships be-
tween the Subulitacea and Nerinacea be
found, certain major changes in phyletic
interpretation will be required, as the Neri-
nacea are presently classed in the order Mes-
ogastropoda (subclass Prosobranchia) by
Wenz (1938, p. 46), and the Subulitacea are
classed in the order Archaeogastropoda by
Wenz, (1938, p. 44) and in the order Neo-
gastropoda by Knight (1944, p. 477).
Class GASTROPODA
Order N®oGasTROPoDA
Superfamily SuBULITACEA
Family SUBULITIDAE
Labridens Yochelson, n.
gen.
Type species—Labridens shupei, Yochelson,
n. sp.
Diagnosis —Turbinate with a
strong lira on inner surface of outer lip and one or
more columellar plications; whorl profile simple,
with gently inflated whorls; without ornament; a
strong, sharp lira developed on the inner surface
of outer lip; inner lip with basal notch, probably
gastropods
functional as a siphon, and one or more folds
above.
46 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Labridens shupei Yochelson, n. sp.
Description Moderately high-spired, turbi-
nate, anomphalous gastropods with two folds on
inner lip and a lira on ner surface of the outer
lip; earliest whorls not certainly known, but
probably simple and smooth; suture shallow, but
distinct; outer whorl surface flattened, very
gently inflated between sutures; surface smooth,
ornamented only by exceedingly obscure growth
lines; base of columella with a siphonal notch;
inner lip with a distinct groove for a short distance
above siphonal fold, limited above by a fold ex-
tending outward as a flange, the lip above this
flange with a wide, shallow groove in turn limited
by a second, less distinct, plication, the inner lip
above this plication being gently convex above to
juncture with outer lip; ner surface of outer lip
bearing a low, strong lira approximately across
from higher plication on imner lip.
A B
Fic. 1.—Labridens shupet, n. sp.: a, Apertural
view showing folds of inner lip and lirae on inner
surface of outer lip; b, adapertural view. The tip
of the siphonal fold has been broken so that it
appears as a notch. X3.
VoL. 46, No. 2
Discussion.—The outer lip is broken back on all
specimens examined but the revolving ridge is
fully developed at a point probably no more than
one-eighth of a whorl behind the unbroken
aperture. The upper plication on the inner lip is
obscure near the aperture, but is somewhat more
distinct one-half whorl back. Examination of
broken specimens indicates that the ridge on the
outer lip is not resorbed; similar observation
could not be made on the columellar plications.
Labridens shupei is known from a dozen speci-
mens found at three localities in the upper part
of the Leonard and lower part of the Word forma-
tions of the Glass Mountains. The holotype
(U.S.N.M. no. 119556) and an unfigured paratype
(U.S.N.M. no. 119557) were collected at U. 8.
National Museum locality 703. This locality is in
a platy limestone in the first limestone member
of the Word formation, near the top of a slope
half a mile southwest of road forks just northeast
of the old Word Ranch House, Hess Canyon
quadrangle, Brewster County, Tex.
The species is named for Nelson W. Shupe,
U. 38. Geological Survey, Paleontology and
Stratigraphy Branch, who for many years has
contributed superb photographs of fossils to the
reports of Geological Survey paleontologists.
REFERENCES
Knteut, J. Brookes. Paleozoic gastropods, revised
by J. Brookes Knight, with the cooperation of
Josiah Bridge. In ‘Index Fossils of North
America,’? pp. 437-479, pls. 174-196. New
York, 1944.
Wenz, WitHetm. Handbuch der Paldozoologie
(Herausgegeben v. Schindewolf), Bd. 6,
rastropoda, Teil 1, Allgemeiner Teil und
Prosobranchia (pars). Berlin, 1988.
PALEONTOLOGY .—Gyrospira, a new genus of bellerophontid (Gastropoda) from
Bolwia.! A. J. Boucor, U. 8. Geological Survey. (Communicated by G. Arthur
Cooper.)
Class GASTROPODA
Order ARCHAEOGASTROPODA
Family BELLEROPHONTIDAE
Subfamily CARINAROPSINAE
Gyrospira Boucot, n. gen.
Type species—Gyrospira tourteloti Boucot, n.
gen. and n. sp.
Diagnosis —Widely disjunct bellerophontid
Gastropoda; aperture flaring widely both pos-
1 Publication authorized by the Director, U. 8.
Geological Survey.
teriorly and laterally, lacking apertural plate, but
bearing median carina internally on posterior face;
revolving ornament lacking; possessing median
carina, the locus of deep slit.
Comparison.—Genus has flaring aperture,
phaneromphalous spire, and posterior, internal
carina that characterize members of the
Carinaropsinae.
Carinaropsis is most closely related to Gy-
rospira, but the former is more closely coiled.
Gyrospira is more openly coiled and lacks the re-
volving ornament that characterizes both Bu-
canopsis and Phragmosphaera. Gyrospira has less
|
Fesruary 1956 BOUCOT: NEW GENUS
lateral flarmg of the aperture and it lacks the
apertural plate of Phragmosphaera. Phragmo-
sphaera lacks the internal carina characteristic
of Gyrospira. Sphaenosphaera possesses an in-
cipient apertural plate and is also more closely
coiled than Gyrospira.
Gyrospira tourteloti Boucot, n. sp.
Figs. 1-5
Description —Medium-sized, openly coiled,
widely phaneromphalous, spiral gastropod with
wide flaring of posterior and anterior portions of
aperture, deep slit in anterior lip culminating in
carina; slit about one-third of whorl in depth.
Whorl profile on either side of median carina
steep, convex over lateral slopes and rounded in
open umbilicus; surface with obscure collabral un-
dulations; nucleus and first whorl barely in con-
tact; apertural margin with no anterior flaring
but flaring widely posteriorly and moderately on
lateral portions of the aperture; posterior median
carina on interior of shell (this carina not caused
by impression of earlier whorl as whorl is free);
ornamentation of undulating concentric growth
lines which interrupt otherwise smooth surface of
shell; shell moderately thick, its structure un-
known.
Occurrence.—The following locality description
was provided by H. A. Tourtelot: Measured
stratigraphic section (bed 8) beginning at Cha-
corillo farm and extending nearly a kilometer to
the west. Chacorillo farm is about 6 kilometers
north of Kilometer 65 of the Potosi-Sucre road;
Kilometer 65 is about 15 kilometers east by road
from the village of Betanzos, which is 50 kilo-
meters from Potosi, Province of General de
Saavedra, Department of Potosi, Bolivia. This
locality is U.S.G.S. Silurian and Devonian catalog
% 3137. Addition material was collected from
nearby float (U.S.G.S. Silurian and Devonian
catalog no. 3139).
The specimens are preserved as casts and molds
in rusty weathering, brown sandstone.
Geologic range.—Carinaropsids have a known
range of Middle Ordovician to Devonian. Prof.
Harry Whittington, of Harvard University, who
kindly examined the associated trilobites, reports
(comm. 1955) the presence of Leiostegina inex-
pectons, which suggests to him a correlation with
beds of Caradoe age (Black River and Trenton).
Dr. David Nicol, of the U.S. National Museum
(written communication, 1955), considers that
the associated pelecypod material indicates a
Middle Devonian age based on the presence of
Parallelodon, Modiomorpha, Ctenodonta, and
Grammysia. The one fragmentary brachiopod
present in the material indicates a post Early
Ordovician age.
Inasmuch as the trilobites of early Paleozoic
age are better known than the pelecypods it
OF BELLEROPHONTID
47
Fries. 1-5.—Gyrospira tourteloti Boucot, n. gen.
and n. sp.
1, Latex impression of exterior (holotype)
(X1). Note the widely disjunct coiling and the
posteriorly flaring aperture, and the obscure col-
labral undulations. U.S.N.M. no. 125457.
2, Latex impression of interior (X1). Note the
prominent ridge on the posterior portion of the
aperture. U.S.N.M. no. 125458A.
3, Latex impression of exterior (X2). Note the
nucleus in contact with the first whorl. U.S.N.M.
no. 125458C.
4, Latex impression of exterior (holotype)
(X1) (dorsal view). Note the prominent median
carina on the anterior margin. U.S.N.M. no.
125457.
5, Latex impression of anterior margin and
slit (<2). Note the deep slit and raised selenizone.
U.S.N.M. no. 125458B.
seems to the writer that a Middle Ordovician age
is the most reliable assignment that can be made
under the circumstances.
Holotype —U.S.N.M. no. 125457.
Figured paratypes—U.S.N.M. nos. 125458
A-C. Unjfigured paratypes.—U.S.N.M._ nos.
125459, 125460 (U.S.G.S. Silurian and Devonian
catalog no. 3139).
48 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 46, No. 2
ENTOMOLOGY .—Gall midges associated with cones of western forest trees (Diptera:
Itonididae). Ricuarp H. Foorr, Entomology Research Branch, United States
Department of Agriculture.
For a number of years, personnel of the
former Bureau of Entomology and Plant
Quarantine, now of the U.S. Forest Service,
U.S. Department of Agriculture, have been
studying all phases of the biology and
control of forest insects. An extensive col-
lection of gall midges, together with as-
sociated biological data, has accumuluated
during this investigation and has recently
been made available to me. The present
paper provides names and descriptions for a
number of species occurring in cones and
seeds of western conifers; their biological
characteristics will be published in a forth-
coming manual of the insects associated
with these trees in western United States.
Throughout the work I have omitted
morphological descriptions of immature
stages. Almost without exception, larvae in
this collection were so poorly mounted that
detailed examination under a compound
microscope was not possible. Even in those
few cases in which most larval characters
were visible, I have preferred to postpone
publication of descriptions until concepts of
species differences in the larval stage have
been clarified. Associations of larva and
adults have been made largely on the basis
of the available biological information, aided
in a few cases by incomplete morphological
details.
I wish to thank F. P. Keen, California
Forest and Range Experiment Station, for
making this collection of gall midges avail-
able to me and for encouraging my efforts.
IT am also grateful to Dr. A. Earl Pritchard,
University of California, for making pre-
liminary identifications of a number of the
species included herein.
Specimens deposited in the U.S. National
Museum are indicated below by the initials
USNM,; those in the California Insect Sur-
vey at Berkeley by CIS.
Genus Riibsaamenia Kieffer
Riibsaamenia Kieffer, 1894, Ann. Soc. Ent. France
63: 333 (type, Asynapta pectoralis Winnertz; by
original designation) ; 1913, Gen. Ins., fase. 152:
278; Felt, 1911, Journ. New York Ent. Soc. 19:
40; 1916, New York State Mus. Bull. 180: 129;
1925, New York State Mus. Bull. 257: 140.
To my knowledge no previous mention of the
occurrence of this genus in North America has
been made. The species assigned to it may be
recognized by the presence of the base of vein Cu,
(this vein obsolete basally in the closely related
North American genus Holoneurus) and by the
long slender recurved abdomen, which separates
it from the North American genera Asynapta and
Clinorhytis. Riibsaamenia runs to Porricondyla in
Pritchard’s (1953) key to California genera of
Porricondylini; it may be separated from that
genus by the recurved abdomen and by the fact
that vein Cu; is present to the base of the wing.
It is represented in the United States by the single
species described below.
Riibsaamenia keeni, n. sp.
Fig. 1, a-g
Male—Head as wide as high from anterior
view, eye bridge about 12 facets wide. Scape of
antenna subtriangular, length about 2.5 times
width at apex; pedicel roughly rectangular, 0.7 as
wide as apex of scape, not narrowed apically;
flagellum with 12 to 24 segments, those of the
smallest individuals with the fewest segments,
segments decreasing in length from base to tip,
apical segment 1.5 times as long as subapical and
narrowed to a blunt point at apex; fifth flagellar
segment (fig. 1g) 2.0 times as long as wide; stem
with subapical expansion, equal in length to node,
which is as wide as long, slightly narrower at base
than at tip; circumfilum a simple, tightly fitting
ring encircling node at proximal third. Palpus
(Fig. lc) of four segments, proportions 1:1.2:2.1:3
(average of type series); second segment
widest, third and fourth successively narrower;
setae longer than width of third. Wing (Fig. 16)
2.3 times as long as wide; membrane with fine
microtrichia; R; ending in costa at basal 0.4; Rs
nearly parallel with costa; R; bending posteriorly
to meet and terminate costa at or very slightly
before wing tip; M3,4 visible from wing base to
margin; Cu, terminating at middle of posterior
margin of wing. Hind femur slightly longer than
tibia; first tarsal segment with a short, blunt
apicolateral projection on all legs; proportions of
FEBRUARY 1956
hind tarsal segments 1:8.3:4.6:2.6:1.4 (average
of type series) ; fore, mid, and hind claws (Fig. 1d)
each with a long basal tooth; each pulvillus very
slightly shorter, equal to, or slightly longer than
claw. Terminalia (Fig. la) longer than wide
(viewed dorsally); length of basistyle about 2.3
times its greatest width, with an inner apical lobe
obscured in some mounts by the dististyle; inner
surface of lobe covered by a patch of short,
slender spines; dististyle 2.0 times as long as wide
at base, bluntly rounded distally, with an even,
dense row of blunt, stout spines along distal third
or fourth of inner margin, this comb terminated
by two heavy, blunt teeth at apex. Tenth sternite
and tenth tergite bilobed, the former distinctly
shorter than the latter and less deeply incised at
center line; aedeagus truncate, with a shallow
central notch and a small projection on distal
margin midway between central incisure and
lateral margin; proximally, aedeagus with a
curved arm on each side connecting with the
basistyle, and a slender median arm tapering to
a sharp point, on each side of which there is con-
nected an irregular, sac-shaped structure.
Female —Head, eye bridge, scape, and pedicel
as in male. Flagellum with 10 to 26 segments, the
smallest mdividuals with the fewest segments;
first flagellar segment longest, remaining segments
decreasing in length from base to tip, apical seg-
ment somewhat elongated and narrowed to blunt
apical point. Fifth flagellar segment (Fig. If)
with node 1.3 times as long as wide; stem short,
0.25 as long as node; circumfilum a simple, tightly
fitting ring as in male, encircling middle of node.
Palpus of four segments, proportions 1:1.3:
2.6:3.3 (average of type series), similar in general
appearance to that of male. Wing and legs as in
male. Terminal abdominal segment (Fig. le) with
paired, elongate appendages, each about 2.5 to
3.0 times as long as wide; in addition, a flat,
bilobed plate nearly covering basal half of each
appendage and attached thereto, similar in shape
to tenth sternite of male; a sclerotized internal
spermatheca with paired lateral arms also present.
Holotype— &%, Butte County, Calif, 29-IX to
7-X, 1953, Calif. Div. Forestry, reared from cones
of Abtes magnifica, Hopkins no. 32738e. U.S.N.M.
no. 63027.
Paratypes.—7 0%, 14992, same data as
holotype, Hopkins nos. 32737, 32737e and
32737h. 397 %,32 2 (CIS); remainder (USNM).
Additional material examined.—CaLirorNia:
247, 449 9, 38 larvae; Crescent City, Gas-
FOOTE: GALL MIDGES 49
quets, General Grant National Park, Kyburz,
McKinney Creek, Mono National Forest,
Sequoia National Park, Mount Shasta City,
Six Rivers National Forest, Yosemite National
Park. CoLtorapo: 2 @ @, 18 larvae; Cheyenne
Mountain, N. Cheyenne Canyon, Manitou, Wil-
hams Canyon. New Muxico: 3 @%; Pecos
Mountains. OREGON: 65 7%, 61 2 2, 50 larvae;
Ashland, near Lamb’s Mine (Ashland), Clover
Creek, Colestin, Jenny Creek, La Pine, Netart’s
Beach, Palmerlee’s Ranch, Waldo. Taken from
cones of Abies concolor, A. grandis, A. magnifica
shastensis, Picea englemanni, P. contorta var.
latifolia, Pinus jeffreyt, P. lambertiana, P. pon-
derosa, P. ponderosa var. scopulorum, Pseudotsuga
menziestt, and P. sp. from February 17 to No-
vember 26, 1913-1954.
Discussion.—This species may be distinguished
from all other members of the Porricondylini by
the generic characters given above, and by the
characteristic features of the male terminalia
(Fig. 1a).
Holoneurus strobilophilus, n. sp.
Fig. 2, a-d, g
Male.—Head as wide as high from anterior
view, eye bridge 8 to 10 facets wide. Scape of
antenna subtriangular, length about equal to
width at apex; pedicel subglobular, as wide as
long and about 0.7 as wide as apex of scape;
flagellum of 21 or 22 segments, which decrease
only very slightly in length and width from base
to apex; terminal segment longer than subtermi-
nal, with the apical nipple; fifth flagellar segment
(Fig. 29) with a proximal node 1.2 times as long
as greatest width and a distal stem 0.7 as long
as node; circumfilum a simple, closely fitting ring
encircling node at proximal third. Palpus (Fig. 2c)
of four segments, proportions 1:1.4:2.4:3.38
(holotype only), second segment widest, third and
fourth progressively narrower, setae short and
scattered. Wing (Fig. 2b) 2.3 times as long as
wide, R; ending in costa at basal 0.4; Ry nearly
parallel with costa and appearing to be a con-
tinuation of R;; R; bending posteriorly to meet
and terminate costa slightly before wing tip; WWsy.
straight except at extreme apex, visible to base of
wing; Cuz curved to meet posterior wing margin at
basal 0.45 of wing. Hind femur slightly longer
than tibia; proportions of hind tarsal segments
1:8.0:5.0:2.5:1.2 (one leg of holotype only);
fore, mid and hind claws each with a long basal
tooth; each pulvillus about 0.5 as long as claw.
Terminalia (Fig. 2a) slightly longer than wide
50 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 46, No. 2
10s Jot
ih ee
Figs. 1-5.—1, Rubsaamenia keent, n.sp.; 2, Holoneurus strobilophilus, n. sp.; 3, Dasyneura abiesemia, n.
sp.; 4, Phytophaga car poghaga, Tripp, male terminalia; 5, Janetiella siskiyou Felt, male terminalia. (a,
male terminalia; b, wing; c, male palpus; d, hind claw, ‘male: e, terminal segments of female ovipositor;
f, fifth flagellar segment, female; g, fifth flagellar segment, "male. Abbreviations: 10t = tenth tergite;
10s = tenth tergite; ae = aedeagus; st = style.)
Fepruary 1956 FOOTE: GALL MIDGES 51
7 Fies. 6-9.—6, Contarinia oregonensis, n. sp.; 7, Mycodiplosis conicola, n. sp.; 8, Mycodiplosis coryloides:
n. sp. 9, Lestodiplosis taxiconis, n. sp.; (a, male terminalia; b, wing; c, male palpus; d, hind claw, male;
e, terminal segments of female ovipositor; f, fifth flagellar segment, female; g, fifth flagellar segment,
male. Abbreviations: 10t = tenth tergite; 10s = tenth sternite; st = style.)
OZ JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
(viewed dorsally); length of basistyle about 2.0
times its greatest width, with a rounded inner
apical lobe and a truncate apical lobe ventral to
it, both lobes noticeably more densely haired
than basistyle itself; length of dististyle 2.1 times
its greatest width, outer margin with a heavy sub-
terminal seta, inner margin straight, an apical
comb of many even, short spines and two or three
longer stouter spines more widely spaced; style
short, slender, rodlike; an irregularly shaped
structure lying beneath and to one side of style, as
if turned on its side as a result of slide mounting;
tenth sternite bilobed, each lobe about as wide
at base as high; tenth tergite bilobed, each lobe
about 1.5 times as long as wide at base.
Female —Unknown.
Holotype-—¢&%, Butte County, Calif., 29-IX to
7-X, 1953, Calif. Div. Forestry, reared from cones
of Abies magnifica, Hopkins no. 32737. U.S.N.M.
no. 63028.
Paratypes—4%%, same data as holotype.
2% paratypes (CIS), remainder (USNM).
Additional material examined.—CaAtIFOoRNIA:
67%, Sequoia National Park. OrnGon: 10,
Colestin. From cones of Abies concolor, August 22
to September 24, 1914.
Discussion.—Felt (1915) keys the North
American species of Holoneurus principally by the
use of color characters. The comparatively long
distal narrowed portion of the fifth flagellar seg-
ment will separate H. strobilophilus from the only
two species, multinodus Felt and photophilus
Felt, possessing over 20 flagellar segments. The
terminal armature of the dististyle (Fig. 2a) will
further distinguish this species from others in the
genus. The genus is not included in Pritchard’s
(1953) key; it runs to Porricondyla there, from
which it may readily be distinguished by its
simple vein Cup.
Dasyneura abiesemia, n. sp.
Fig. 3, a-g
Male.—Head suboval (viewed anteriorly),
widest slightly below the center; eye bridge about
eight facets wide. Scape of antenna nearly square
in outline, very slightly longer than wide; pedicel
similar in shape and very shghtly smaller than
scape; flagellum of undetermined number of seg-
ments, some of the distal ones lost, but those that
are present not decreasing noticeably in length or
width from base to apex of flagellum; first two
flagellar segments completely fused; fifth flagellar
segment (Fig. 3g) with proximal node 1.2 times
vou. 46, No. 2
as long as wide; distal stem 0.9 as long as node;
circumfilum consisting of one irregular ring en-
circling node on basal third and another nearly at
apex, these two rings connected on opposite sides
of node by short extensions of the rings; the seg-
ment rather lopsided, with stem emerging more or
less from one side of node apex, the circumfilum
on the opposite side loosely applied to the seg-
ment and extending some distance away from its
surface. Palpus (Fig. 3c) of four segments, propor-
tions 1.0:1.5:1.9:2.2 (one palp only), proximal
segment widest, other segments progressively
narrower. Wing (Fig. 3b) 2.5 times as long as
wide; Ri close to costa and joining it at basal
third, the entire area between costa and R: some-
what darker than remainder of wing; Rs nearly
straight, bending posteriorly only very slightly at
outer fourth to meet and terminate costa dis-
tinctly proximad of wing tip, Ms;4 not visible in
slide mounts; Cu straight, branched distinctly
apicad of juncture of Ri with costa; Cu; as long
as Cu, nearly straight; Cus curved posteriorly and
ending at middle of posterior margin of wing.
Legs thickly set with narrow, pointed scales;
hind tarsal segments shrunken in all slide mounts
so that proportions are not measurable; claws
(Fig. 3d) not bent at right angles; fore, mid and
hind claws each with a long, narrow ventral tooth
which is 1.5 to 1.75 times as long as claw. Termi-
nalia (Fig. 3a) wider than long (viewed dorsally);
basistyle 2.0 times as long as wide, with a promi-
nent inner apical, broadly rounded prominence
and a more proximal shoulder in which a dark-
ened, ringlke structure appears; length of disti-
style 4.0 times greatest width, narrowing gradu-
ally distally and tipped with a narrow, sclerotized
plate which appears as spur in slide mounts; style
widest at middle, narrowing slightly to a rounded-
truncate tip distally and narrowing more strongly
toward the base, which is provided with a foot-
shaped expansion; style surrounded ventrally and
laterally by a deeply incised plate with three
short terminal appendages on each side; tenth
sternite consisting of two extremely narrow,
widely separated lobes, only one of which is
shown in the figure; tenth tergite completely
filling the space between inner borders of basi-
style and about as long as these, the incision
deeper than one-half the length of plate, each
lobe gently, then more abruptly tapered on inner
margin to a narrow, rounded point.
Female.—Head, eye bridge, scape, pedicel and
first two flagellar segments as in male. Flagellum
Fespruary 1956
of 14 segments, the second segment the longest,
the more distal segments becoming slightly nar-
rower; fifth flagellar segment (Fig. 3f) 1.4 times
as long as wide, with inconspicuous stem, circum-
filum as in male. Wing, legs, claws, and pulvilli as
in male, proportions of hind tarsal segments
1.0:8.0:4.2:2.4:1.3 (average of type series). Ovi-
positor (Fig. 3e) retractile, at least twice as long
as abdomen when fully extended, termimated by
a single lobe of variable shape about 6.0 times as
long as wide.
Holotype—c&, Palmerlee’s Ranch, Oreg.,
8-IX-1915, P. D. Sergent and J. E. Patterson,
bred from cones of Abies magnifica shastensis,
Hopkins no. 14200c. U.S.N.M. no. 63029.
Paratypes—3 07%, 42 2, same data as holo-
type. One &, 22 @ (CIS), remainder (USNM).
Additional material examined.—CaiFoRNIA:
50, 392, 56 larvae; Butte County, Crescent
City, General Grant National Park, McKinney
Creek, Sequoia National Park. OREGON: 300,
119° 2, 7 larvae; Applegate River, Ashland,
Colestin. Taken from cones of Abies concolor, A.
grandis, A. magnifica, and A. magnifica shastensis,
July 18 to October 7, 1914-1953.
Discussion.—Pritchard (1953) states that
three species of Dasyneura occur in California; D.
abiesemia, the fourth, is the only one forming gall
pockets in seeds and cone scales of Abzes in Cali-
fornia forests. In Felt’s (1915) key to United
States species, it falls within the series having a
nearly straight vein R; and 14 flagellar segments;
within this group it is the only species in which
the female has a nearly sessile, subglobular fifth
flagellar segment, and in which the proportions of
the palpal segments are as shown in Fig. 3c.
Phytophaga carpophaga Tripp
Fig. 4
Phytophaga carpophaga Tripp, 1955, Can. Ent. 87:
261.
A comparison of males collected as shown in the
“Material examined” section below with a male
paratype of carpophaga sent to the National
Museum by the Canadian Department of Agri-
culture leaves no doubt that carpophaga is repre-
sented on the west coast. Most of Tripp’s ma-
terial is from Ontario and was collected from
white spruce, Picea glauca.
I am including an illustration (Fig. 4) of the
male terminalia of this species drawn from a
Colorado specimen, since Tripp’s photograph
FOOTE: GALL MIDGES 53
omits certain details which may eventually be-
come important for the separation of carpophaga
from other members of the genus.
Material examined.—Cauirornia: 90%,
22 2, Crescent City. CoLorapo: 770,22 9,3
larvae, Glenwood Springs, Manitou, Mountain
View. Taken from cones of Picea englemanni and
P. sitchensis, August 17 to October 25, 1913-
1916.
Janetiella siskiyou Felt
Fig. 5
Janetiella siskiyou Felt, 1917, Journ. New York
Ent. Soe. 25: 194; Pritchard, 1953, Bull. Cali-
fornia Ins. Survey 2(2): 139.
Felt originally described larvae and females
from the Siskiyou National Forest in California;
his description of the females is based primarily
on color characters, but since this midge appears
to be quite host-specific for seeds of Chaemo-
cyparis, there appears to be no need to repeat
Felt’s information or to add to it here.
A description of the terminalia is given below.
Unfortunately, the single male available to me
had been hardened in alcohol for such a long
period of time that the regular mounting method
obscured much of the detail; remaining parts of
this specimen were nearly destroyed in the
mount. No recently collected material was avail-
able for this study.
Male.—Terminalia (Fig. 5) stout, slightly
longer than wide (dorsal view). Basistyle with
overall width equal to overall length, entire
proximal margin and almost entire inner margin
with broad sclerotized bands, a lobe at inner apex
with a band of sclerotization at its own inner
edge, and a narrowly pointed lobe attached to
inner margin at widest portion of basistyle;
length of dististyle about 2.1 times greatest
width, both inner and outer margins gently
curved from base to join each other at apex, here
provided with a single sharp, stout tooth; style
bluntly rounded distally and proximally, its
center portion obscured in the mount, proximal
portion with a subtriangular plate ending
proximally in a broadened expansion resembling
an arrow-head; tenth sternite bilobed, a deep in-
cisure separating the broadly pointed lobes;
tenth tergite with two medially expanded lobes
which are lightly sclerotized on their inner
margins and separated by a cleft, the bottom of
which is not visible in the mount.
Material examined.—Oregon:
54 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Siskiyou National Forest, Waldo. Taken from
cones of Chaemocyparis lawsoniana March 28,
1919, and August 15, 1914.
Contarinia oregonensis, n. sp.
TER, (hy lO, Gly art, (S
Male.—Head 1.2 times as high as wide from
anterior view; eye bridge 12 to 14 facets wide.
Scape of antenna subtriangular, length equal to
distal width; pedicel subglobular, length equal to
greatest width, 0.6 to 0.7 as wide as apex of
scape; flagellum of 12 segments, the first two
fused, their point of junction indicated by a
narrow hyaline area, remaining segments approxi-
mately equal in size, terminal segment with
distal stem reduced to a short nipple; fifth
flagellar segment (Fig. 6g) with two nodes, the
proximal one 0.8 as long as the distal; length of
proximal stem 1.1 times proximal node; length
of distal stem equal to that of distal node; two
series of circumfila, one on each node, the loops
of that on proximal node attaining middle of
distal node, those of distal node attaining middle
of proximal node of succeeding segment. Palpus
of four segments, proportions 1.0:1.5:2.5:2.8
(holotype only), the second segment widest,
third and fourth successively narrower; with
sparse, scattered setae longer than width of
second segment. Wing (Fig. 6b) 2.5 times as long
as wide; R, entering costa at basal 0.4; R; curving
posteriorly at distal third to meet and terminate
costa only very slightly before wing tip, with a
cross vein at basal 0.12 extending halfway to Ri
and ending midway between the two veins; Cu
straight; Cui gently curved throughout its entire
length; Cus terminating in posterior border of
wing just apicad of point of origin. Legs long;
hind femur 1.1 times as long as tibia; proportions
of hind tarsal segments not recognizable because
of damage to specimens; fore, mid, and hind claws
(Fig. 6d) simple, each shorter than the pulvillus.
Terminalia (Fig. 6a) wider than long (viewed
dorsally); length of basistyle 1.4 times its greatest
width! with a dark, thickened sclerotized area at
center of inner margin, no inner lobe present;
length of dististyle 3.5 times its greatest width,
with an inner, subterminal notch. Style 3.5 times
as long as wide, bluntly poimted apically, with
two ill-defined membranes nearly attaining tip of
style and lying in a different position in each
mount; tenth tergite bilobed, width of each lobe
1 Tn flattened-out holotype; other males in type
series have shriveled basistyles.
VoL. 46, No. 2
at base about equal to length; tenth sternite
bilobed, with central incisure slightly deeper than
that of tenth tergite, length of each lobe about
1.2 times proximal width; style and tergites ter-
minating at approximately the same level.
Female.—Head, eye bridge, scape, pedicel and
palpus similar to those of male. Flagellum of 12
subequal segments; first two segments fused, with
a narrow hyaline area in some specimens indi-
cating the juncture; fifth flagellar segment (Fig.
6f) with proximal node 2.0 times as long as
wide; distal stem 0.5 as long as node; two irregular
circumfila encircling node and connected at
opposite sides of node as shown. Wing and legs
as in male. Ovipositor (Fig. 6e) retractile, about
0.6 as long as abdomen, terminating in a lightly
sclerotized lobe which is the side view of the
scissorslike terminus of ovipositors usually found
in this genus.
Holotype —o&%, Mistletoe, Oreg., 25-VIII-1916,
P. D. Sergent and J. E. Patterson, reared from
cones of Pseudotsuga menziesii, Hopkins no.
14280e. U.S.N.M. no. 63030.
Paratypes.—8 ¢ #, 102 2, same data as holo-
type. Three #0, 59 2 paratypes (CIS), re-
mainder (USNM).
Additional material examined —47%, 42 2,
same data as holotype. (USNM). These badly
damaged specimens have little value for com-
parative purposes.
Discussion.—Felt (1917) employs the color of
live specimens and antennal characters for the
separation of males but does not attempt to key
females. This is the only species of Contarima
known to occur in the Western United States,
and the only United States species associated
with conifers. Antennal and palpal characters of
Contarinia oregonensis closely resemble those of
C. perfoliata Felt and C. agrimoniae Felt; char-
acters of the male terminalia (Fig. 6a) will dis-
tinguish oregonensis from the other two. The
genus, although previously recorded from Cal-
fornia, will run in Pritchard’s (1953) key to
Thecodiplosis, but may be distinguished by the
invagination of the wing margin at the termina-
tion of vein R;.
Mycodiplosis conicola, n. sp.
Fig. 7, a-g
Male.—Head suboval from anterior view,
widest slightly below center; eye bridge 8 to 10
facets wide. Scape of antenna subtriangular,
length equal to greatest width; pedicel subglobu-
lar, as long as wide, the same width as scape;
FEBRUARY 1956
flagellum of 12 segments, the first two completely
fused with only a narrow subhyaline area indi-
cating the junction, the remaining segments about
the same length as the fifth but with narrower
stems, twelfth segment with a long terminal
nipple; fifth flagellar segment (Fig. 7g) with two
nodes, the proximal one 1.1 times as wide as
long, the distal one 1.7 times as long as wide
and 1.7 times as long as proximal node; proximal
stem equal in length to proximal node; distal
stem 0.9 as long as distal node; three circumfila,
the proximal on proximal node, its loops attaining
basal half of proximal stem, middle at base of
distal node, its loops attaining basal 0.6 of its
node, the distal on distal portion of node, its
loops attaining basal two-thirds of distal stem.
Palpus (Fig. 7c) of four segments; proportions
of segments 1.0:1.5:2.1:2.5 (one palp of holo-
type), first segment 1.5 times as long as wide,
remaining segments successively narrower. Wing
(Fig. 7b) 2.6 times as long as wide; Ri ending in
costa at basal 0.4; two sensory pores very close
to the juncture as in figure; R; nearly straight
but bent gently at distal fourth to meet and
terminate costa at wing tip; Ms,, obsolete
basally but visible to posterior margin of wing;
Cu branching at level of junction of Ri with
costa; Cu; slightly curved, shorter than Cu; Cus
curved sharply at base and bent at nearly right
angles to horizontal axis of wing. Each leg covered
by very narrow scales which are longer and
darker at ends of tibiae and tarsal seg-
ments 1 to 4; proportions of hind tarsal segments
1.0:6.5:4.0:3.0:1.8 (average of two legs on one
paratype); four, mid, and hind claws (Fig. 7d)
each bent sharply near base, nearly straight
beyond, with a long delicate ventral tooth before
the bend; each pulvillus 0.5 as long as claw.
Terminalia (Fig. 7a) wider than long (viewed
dorsally); basistyle stout, length 1.7 times
greatest width; dististyle rather stout, length
3.0 times greatest width, basal third of outer
margin bulging with a darker area as shown,
apical third somewhat darkened and with a
single tooth; style triangular, connected at base
with inner surface of basistyle by a triangular
extension, this continuous with a lateral footlike
piece without a distinct termination in the
mounts; style terminating proximally in two
narrow Tenth sternite and tenth
tergite about equal in length, both only very
slightly shorter than style; tenth sternite truncate
with rounded
extensions.
corners and very shallowly
FOOTE: GALL MIDGES 5d
emarginate; tenth tergite deeply emarginate, the
resulting lobes about 1.7 times as long as width
at base.
Female —Head, eye bridge, palpus, scape and
pedicel as in male. Flagellum of 12 segments, the
first two fused as in male, the distal segments
becoming successively shorter with shorter stems,
apical segment 2.0 times as long as wide, narrow-
ing from distal half outward to rounded point;
fifth flagellar segment (Fig. 7f) with proximal
lobe 2.1 times as long as wide; distal stem 0.2
as long as proximal node; circumfila of two
closely adhering rings, the basal encircling the
node at basal 0.4, the distal at the extreme tip
of node, the two rings connected on opposite
sides of the segment. Wing and legs as in male.
Ovipositor (Fig. 7e) about 1.5 times as long as
abdomen, retractile, terminated by simple
paired lobes.
Holotype — #, Butte County, Calif., 29-IX to
7-X, 1953, coll. Calif. Div. Forestry, reared from
cones of Abies magnifica, Hopkins no. 32737.
U.S.N.M. no. 63031.
Paratypes—l10%%, 292 92, same data as
holotype. 507%, 522 (CIS), remainder
(USNM).
Additional material excamined.—Oregon: 22 2;
Ashland, Colestin. Reared from cones of Abies
concolor, August 22 to October 23, 1914.
Discussion.—M ycodiplosis conicola is closely
related by morphological characters to M. al-
ternata Felt and M. hudsoni Felt, both of which
have been recorded only from eastern United
States, the former on Podophyllwm and the latter
on Acer. M. conicola and M. coryloides are the
only species associated with the cones of western
forest trees; conicola may be distinguished from
coryloides by the shape of the proximal portion
of the style and by the longer narrowed portions
of the flagellar segments. See also discussion of
coryloides, p. 56.
Mycodiplosis coryloides, n. sp.
Fig. 8, a-e, g
Male.—Shape of head from anterior view and
width of eye bridge not visible in mounts avail-
able. Scape of antenna only very slightly longer
than wide, widest slightly beyond the middle;
pedicel subglobular, greatest width about 0.7
ereatest width of scape; flagellum with terminal
segments missing in all specimens, the segments
not appreciably narrowed or shortened toward
distal end of flagellum, first two flagellar segments
56 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY
fused, without a trace of a division between;
fifth flagellar segment (Fig. 8g) with two nodes,
the proximal one 0.8 as long as greatest width,
which is at about middle; proximal stem 0.4
as long as proximal node; distal node 1.1 times
as long as wide and 1.4 times as long as proximal
node; distal stem 0.6 as long as distal node; three
circumfila, one on proximal node and two on
distal, the proximal one with loops attaining basal
half of proximal stem, middle one with loops at-
taining apical two-thirds of distal node, distal
one with loops barely exceeding apex of distal
stem. Palpus (Fig. 8c) of four segments, propor-
tions 1.0:2.2:3.0:3.8 (average of type series),
first segment about as long as wide, second
widest, third and fourth successively narrower.
Wing (Fig. 8b) 2.2 times as long as wide; R;
ending in costa at basal 0.4 with a single sensory
pore just before the junction; R; nearly straight,
bending slightly at distal fourth to meet and
terminate costa at wing tip or just beyond;
M314 obsolete basally, visible only from branching
of Cu to near posterior margin of wing; Cu
straight, branching at about the level of Ri-costa
junction; Cu, slightly curved, shorter than Cu;
Cu. curved and ending in posterior margin
slightly beyond point of origin. Leg scales so
narrow as to be almost hairlike; hind femur
slightly longer than tibia; proportions of hind
tarsal segments 1.0:7.3:4.2:3.0:1.8 (average of
type series); claw (Fig. 8d) on each leg bent
sharply near the base, nearly straight beyond;
fore, mid and hind claws each with an incon-
spicuous ventral basal tooth; pulvillus 0.6 as
long as claw. Terminalia (Fig. 8a) wider than
long (viewed dorsally); basistyle stout, length
-2.0 times greatest width, with a diagonal strip of
sclerotization at base; dististyle 0.6 as long as
basistyle, length 4.0 times greatest width, curved
and somewhat tapered to tip, with a distal tooth
as in illustration; style stout, narrow at extreme
base but widening rapidly on basal fourth or
third, where it forms lateral triangular arms at-
taching to inner margin of basistyle, gradually
narrowing on distal fourth to a blunt, rounded
tip; tenth sternite rounded-truncate distally with
the mere suggestion of a median invagination;
tenth tergite bilobed, the incisure attaining the
base of the lateral arms of the style, each lobe
rounded apically.
Female.—Head, palpus, scape and pedicel as
in male. Flagellum of 12 segments, the first two
fused without any indication of a division, seg-
OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 2
ments becoming slightly shorter toward apex of
flagellum, the terminal segment 2.0 times as long
as wide, narrowed to a point from distal half out-
ward; fifth flagellar segment with proximal node
2.1 times as long as wide; distal stem 0.1 as long
as node; two closely adhering circumfila in the
form of irregular rings which are connected to
each other at opposite sides of the segment. Wings
and legs as in male. Ovipositor (Fig. 8e) fleshy,
retractile, length not measurable in available
specimens, terminated by simple paired lobes.
Holotype—o&, Butte County, Calif., 29-IX to
7-X, 1958, Calif. Div. Forestry, reared from
cones of Abies concolor, Hopkins no. 32738f.
U.S.N.M. no. 63082.
Paratypes—3 0 #, 52 2 same data as holo-
type. One &*, 22 2 paratypes (CIS), remainder
(USNM).
Additional material examined.—Ca.iFoRNIA ;
1%, 22 9; Plumas National Forest (Quincy).
OREGON: 1%; Jenny Creek. From cones of
Abies magnifica and Pseudotsuga menziesii, Octo-
ber to November 26, 1930-1938.
Discussion.—The two new M ycodiplosis species
discussed here, conicola and coryloides, are very
closely related and are the only species of the
genus associated with cones of Western forest
trees. M. coryloides may be distinguished from
conicola by the narrower style and the more
slender dististyle, and from Mycodiplosis coryli
Felt, to which it is also closely related, by the
longer claws and wider style flanges. Adults of
several species of this genus have been reared
from mycophagous larvae, but it is not known
whether the mycophagous habit is common to
the genus as a whole.
Lestodiplosis taxiconis, n. sp.
Fig. 9, a-d, f, g
Male.—Head nearly round from anterior view;
eye bridge 9 to 10 facets wide. Scape of antenna
1.25 times as long as wide, slightly narrower at
base than at apex; pedicel subglobular, slightly
wider than long, rounded at apex; flagellum of
unknown number of segments, the first two com-
pletely fused, appearing as a single segment with
four nodes; remaining segments progressively
shorter, apical segment narrowed and rounded
at apex; fifth flagellar segment (Fig. 9g) with
two nodes, the proximal 0.55 as long as wide
and separated from distal node by a stem 1.5
times as long as proximal node; distal node as
long as wide at greatest width, also somewhat
Fepruary 1956
flask-shaped; distal stem equal in length to
distal node; proximal node with a single circum-
filum, loops of which nearly attain base of distal
node; distal node with two circumfila, the proxi-
mal one very close to base of node and with loops
nearly attaining greatest width of node; distal
one situated very close to distal margin of node
and with loops nearly attaining apex of distal
stem. Palpus (Fig. 9c) of four segments propor-
tious 1.0:2.6:2.6:3.1 (average of type series);
first segment subsquare in outline, second and
third slightly wider, fourth suboval and only
very slightly wider than second and third. Wing
(Fig. 9b) without markings, about two times as
long as wide; R; ending in costa at basal 0.4; the
suggestion of a crossvein, not distinctly connected
with Ri, present near base of R;; R; nearly
straight for most of its length, meeting and
terminating costa at wing tip; Cu_ straight,
forked at outer 0.4; Cu; gently curved; Cup like-
wise gently curved and terminating in posterior
margin of wing just apicad of termination of Ri.
Legs densely covered by very narrow scales;
hind femur slightly longer than tibia; proportions
of hind tarsal segments 1.0:5.6:2.4:1.3:1.0 (aver-
age of type series); fore, mid and hind claws
(Fig. 9d) simple, not sharply curved; each pul-
villus 0.8 as long as claw. Terminalia (Fig. 9a)
longer than wide (viewed dorsally); basistyle
slender, length nearly three times greatest width,
with a distinct shoulder on inner dorsal margin
at the middle; dististyle 0.5 as long as basistyle,
4.5 times as long as greatest width, swollen on
basal fourth, remainder slender, slightly curved
inwardly, only very slightly enlarged distally and
with a distal slit; style nearly as long as basistyle,
narrow proximally and expanding to its greatest
width at proximal fourth where it is provided
with inconspicuous lateral projections, thence
gradually narrowing to tip which is very slightly
expanded and truncate; tenth tergite bilobed, the
bottom of the incision almost square, each lobe
1.5 times as long as wide and evenly rounded at
tip; tenth sternite slightly shorter than tergite
and considerably shorter than style, rounded at
tip (not divided into lobes).
Female.—Head, eye bridge, palpus, scape, and
pedicel as in male. Flagellar segments with single
nodes, the first two completely fused; fifth flagel-
FOOTE: GALL MIDGES 57
lar segment with length of node 1.6 times the
greatest width; distal stem 0.9 as long as node;
circumfila not distinguishable in the poorly
mounted specimen. Wing as in male. Hind tarsal
segments missing; terminal abdominal segments
fleshy; ovipositor not retractile.
Holotype—%, Colestin, Oreg., 30-VI-1914,
J. E. Patterson, reared from cones of Pseudotsuga
taxifolia, Hopkins no. 12535g. U.S.N.M. no.
63033.
Paratypes._4% 3%, same data as holotype;
2 (CIS), remainder (USNM). Eleven #27,
399, near Lamb’s Mine, Ashland, Oreg.,
17-11-1915, F. P. Keen and P. D. Sergent, reared
from cones of Pseudotsuga menziesii, Hopkins no.
13209e-3 through e-8; 64 #, 1 2 (CIS) remainder
(USNM).
Additional material examined.—1 3%, 1 2, same
data as Hopkins nos. 13209e-3 through e-8
(CIS). These specimens are badly damaged and
have little value for comparative purposes.
Discussion —Males of Lestodiplosis taxiconis
may be distinguished at once from all other
North American species of Lestodiplosis by the
relatively short, narrowed portions (length 2.5
times width vs. length 3.5 times width) of the
fifth flagellar segment, and by the fact that this
species is associated with cones of Western forest
trees.
Felt’s (1921) key to the North American
species of Lestodiplosis, based almost entirely on
color and characters of the male antennae, is
almost impossible to use for alcoholic or slide-
mounted material. The genus needs extensive
revision. Pritchard (1953) does not list the
genus as occurring in California. In his key,
Lestodiplosis runs to Retinodiplosis or to Itonida,
from which it may be separated by the presence
of a lobe on the inner surface of the basistyle
(Fig. 9a).
REFERENCES
Fer, lo. P. A study of gall midges IIT. New York
State Mus. Bull. 180: 127-288. 1915.
A study of gall midges VI. New York State
Mus. Bull. 202: 76-205. 1917.
. A study of gall midges VII. New York
State Mus. Bull. 281-232: 81-240. 1921.
PrircuarD, A. EH. The gall midges of California.
Bull. California Ins. Survey 2(2): [125]-150.
1953.
58 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 46, No. 2
HERPETOLOGY —The herpetofauna of Harford County, Maryland. CuyprE F.
Reep, Baltimore, Md. (Communicated by Doris M. Cochran.)
One of the most varied geographical areas
in Maryland is Harford County. It is
bounded on the east by Susquehanna River,
on the southeast by Chesapeake Bay, and on
the west and south by Little Gunpowder
River. To the north there is no definite geo-
graphic boundary with Pennsylvania. The
largest inland streams are Deer Creek, Broad
Creek, Rock Run, and Bynum Run.
The lower southeast eighth of the county
is below the Fall Line, thus providing coastal
situations along lower Susquehanna River,
Chesapeake Bay, and Bush River. The Little
Gunpowder runs along the western and
southern boundary of Harford County, sep-
arating it from Baltimore County. Many
deep rocky ravines are exposed along its
course, down to the Fall Line, where the river
flattens out into a tidal river, like Bush River
and the lower Susquehanna River. Deer
Creek also exposes extensive rock formations
in the northern and central portions of the
county, especially near The Rocks, near Kal-
mia, and below Darlington, where Deer
Creek enters the Susquehanna River just
below Conowingo Dam. Most of the rock
formations in Harford County are acidic in
nature, there being a few calcareous regions
in the southwest portion of the county. These
areas afford a variety of habitats for amphib-
ians and reptiles, thus accounting for the
large number of species found in the county.
Some of the areas in Harford County have
been quite extensively studied. The most
frequented area is the Broad Creek area
where there is a Boy Scout Camp. Other
areas well studied are the regions of The
Rocks, Conowingo, Lapidum along the Sus-
quehanna from Conowingo to Havre de
Grace along the rocky slopes, the region
about Aberdeen, and the regions about Bel
Air, Churchville, Kalmia, Webster, Hickory,
Fallston, Whiteford, Jarrettsville, Shaws-
ville, Norrisville, Edgewood, and Magnolia.
The distribution of the species of plants
and animals to be found in Harford County
follows the geographical boundaries very
closely. Species that are typically of Pied-
mont distribution are: Diadophis punctatus
edwardsu, Lampropeltis triangulum triangu-
lum, Natrix septemvittata, Clemmys insculpta,
and Clemmys muhlenbergii; species that are
typically coastal reaching up into Harford
County are: Humeces fasciatus, Humeces lati-
ceps (2), Carphophis amoena amoena, Opheo-
drys aestivus, Lampropeltis getulus getulus,
Storeria dekayi, and Sternotherus odoratus;
the other species are found in both regions.
Many of the following records are addi-
tions or new records to the herpetofauna of
Harford County. Since several of these rec-
ords are additions to McCauley’s The rep-
tiles of Maryland, 1945, the following anno-
tated list of species is presented. All records
and annotated specimens have been collected
by the author unless otherwise noted. The
collection numbers refer to specimens in the
herpetological collections of the author. A
total of 43 species are listed from Harford
County, 18 of these species are either new
records or extend the known range of the
species in this county.
1. Diemictylus viridescens viridescens (Rafin-
esque): Newr or Rep Err. The Rocks (in
meadow pools, May 1954); Broad Creek (in
swamp 2 miles north of Broad Creek Camp);
Rock Run (in swamp and edge of stream, spring
1953); Churchville (eft stage).
2. Desmognathus fuscus fuscus (Green): Dusky
SALAMANDER. The Rocks, Rock Ridge Road
(April 10, 1954, *789-791); Broad Creek (com-
mon under rocks along streams, May 12, 1953,
#127); Lapidum (April 25, 1953, 129-130;
April 9, 1953, * 146-154); Shures Landing below
Conowingo Dam (September 20, 1953, * 18-24;
March 20, 1954, *569-572); Susquehanna River
at Schweers Landing (April 9, 1953, ¥* 186-192);
Deer Creek near Darlington (April 9, 1953,
#273); Kalmia (in a spring, May 1955).
3. Plethodon cinereus cinereus (Green): Woop
SALAMANDER; RED-BACK SALAMANDER (red and
black phases). Broad Creek (common under rocks
and logs); Deer Creek at Route 1, north of
Bel Air (Oct. 15, 1954, *995-1007); Deer Creek
near Darlington (September 20, 1953, 28-35,
85; April 19, 1954, *144; April 9, 1953, *267-
272); along Rock Run near Susquehanna River at
Schweers Landing (April 9, 1953, * 166-185, 193-
202); Lapidum (April 9, 1953, 647-650; April
25, 1953, *99-102); Deer Creek at Susquehanna
River (April 25, 1953, ¥155-165; summer 1953,
FEBRUARY 1956
¥ 131-139); Shures Landing below Conowingo
Dam (March 20, 1954, *524-527).
4. Plethodon glutinosus glutinosus (Green):
Stimy SALAMANDER. Deer Creek near Darlington
under rocks on hillsides (April 9, 1953, * 103-108;
274-275; September 20, 1953, 26; April 25,
1953, ¥ 114-125, including Deer Creek at Susque-
hanna River); Deer Creek at Route 1, north of
Bel Ai (October 15, 1954, 977-978); Broad
Creek. Many of the specimens from the Deer
Creek and Susquehanna River areas have no
spots; they are solid black.
5. Pseudotriton ruber ruber (Sonnini): Rep
SALAMANDER. Rock Run near Schweers Landing
(April 25, 1953, #112-113); Broad Creek (in old
spring house near swamp; under logs); Dublin;
Deer Creek near Darlington (April 19, 1953,
145); Shures Landing below Conowingo Dam;
The Rocks (in spring house, April 1954); Edge-
wood; Churchville (in old well).
6. Hurycea bislineata bislineata (Green): Two-
LINED SALAMANDER. Broad Creek (May 12, 1953,
#128, edge of streams); Shures Landing below
Conowingo Dam (April 9, 1953, * 126; Septem-
ber 20, 1953, #17); Susquehanna River near
Schweers Landing (common); Rock Run.
7. Eurycea longicauda longicauda (Green):
LONG-TAILED SALAMANDER. Shures Landing be-
low Conowingo in seepage (September 20, 1953,
¥ 14-16); Broad Creek (in spring house).
8. Bufo terrestris americanus Holbrook: AMER-
1cAN Toap. Broad Creek; Bush River; Church-
ville; Havre de Grace (common in all localities) ;
Lapidum.
9. Bufo woodhousii fowleri Hinckley: FowLEr’s
Toap. Churchville; Broad Creek; Lapidum.
10. Acris gryllus crepitans Baird: CrickrrT
Frog. Rock Run; Broad Creek; Churchville (fre-
quent); along Susquehanna River in canal,
Conowingo to Havre de Grace.
11. Hyla crucifer crucifer Wied: Sprine
Peeper. Havre de Grace; Churchville; Broad
Creek; woods, 2 miles north of Havre de Grace
(October 6, 1955, * 1024).
12. Hyla versicolor versicolor LeConte: Common
Tree Froc. Broad Creek.
13. Rana catesbeiana Shaw: Butt Frog. Bush
River (in swamps); Havre de Grace; Aberdeen;
Broad Creek (in swamps near camp); Hickory
north of Bel Air.
14. Rana clamitans Latreille: Gremn Froa.
Churchville (April 25, 1953, *501); Broad Creek;
Bel Air; Hickory; Susquehanna River near Glen
Cove (May 12, 1953, *284).
REED: HERPETOFAUNA OF HARFORD COUNTY 59
15. Rana sylvatica LeConte: Woop Froa.
Deer Creek at Darlington (September 20, 1953,
¥ 25); Shures Landing below Conowingo Dam
(March 20, 1954, *567); Broad Creek (in nearby
swampy areas); Deer Creek at Susquehanna
River; Schweers Landing along Susquehanna
River (October 6, 1955, #1025).
16. Rana pipiens Schreber: Lroparp Frog.
Chruchville (April 25, 1953, 502-503); Broad
Creek; Bel Air.
17. Rana palustris LeConte: PickmrREL FrRoG.
Broad Creek; woods along Route 1 at Deer Creek
(October 6, 1955, #1023); Lapidum (October 6,
1955, * 1027).
18. Chelydra serpentina serpentina (Linnaeus):
SNAPPING TurrLe. Havre de Grace; Webster;
Edgewood; Deer Creek near Kalmia (April 30,
1955, 980); Broad Creek, in Broad Creek Lake
(seen up to 30 pounds; many juveniles caught in
streams leading to lake); The Rocks; Church-
ville (frequent in ponds and swamps).
19. Clemmys guttata (Schneider): Sporrep
TurtLe. Broad Creek (behind dam, in swamp
next to creek, 5 collected); Bush River; Darling-
ton; along Susquehanna River near Conowingo
Dam.
20. Clemmys muhlenbergi (Schoepff): MuHLEN-
BERG’s TurTLE. Broad Creek, in swampy area
near pipe drain at Broad Creek Scout Camp (4
collected in three years). New to Harford County.
21. Clemmys insculpta (LeConte): Woop
Tutte. Roberts Island; Broad Creek (below dam,
2 collected along creek); Havre de Grace (USNM
14582).
22. Terrapene carolina carolina (Linnaeus):
Box Turrir. Havre de Grace; Webster; Aber-
deen; Emmorton; Bel Air; The Rocks; Broad
Creek; Rock Run.
23. Sternotherus orodatus Latreille: Musk
Turtie. Along Little Gunpowder River, in
Harford County, near Fork.
24. Chrysemys picta picta (Schneider): PAINTED
Turtie. Havre de Grace; along Susquehanna
River near Darlington; Conowingo Dam; Broad
Creek (around lake and in streams); Aberdeen;
Churchville. New to Harford County.
25. Graptemys geographica (LeSueur): Map
Turrue. Havre de Grace (USNM 17833); Sus-
quehanna River at Darlington (Roger Conant).
26. Kinosternon subrubrum subrubrwm (lacé-
péde): Mup Turtie. Bush River (CMP 8035).
27. Sceloporus undulatus hyacinthinus (Green):
NorrHern Fence Swirr. The Rocks (RHM);
Broad Creek (collected near nature lodge). Ex-
60 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
tending the range north and east in Harford
County in Maryland.
28. Humeces fasciatus (Linnaeus): FIvE-LINED
Skink. Bush River (CMP 8379); Broad Creek
(seen near rocks where copperheads stay; col-
lected by nature lodge). Extending range north-
ward about 20 miles to Pennsylvania line.
29. Natrix septemvittata (Say): QUEEN SNAKE.
Along Susquehanna River above Havre de
Grace; near Edgewood; Broad Creek (frequent
along streams on overhanging branches);
Schweers Landing along Susquehanna River
(ZSP 385); Van Bibber (USNM 36087). Extend-
ing range northward along Susquehanna River to
Pennsylvania Line.
30. Natrix sipedon sipedon (Linnaeus): Com-
MON WarTpR Snaké. The Rocks, along Deer
Creek; Havre de Grace; Dublin; Carsens Run;
Churchville; Broad Creek (common along streams
and on overhanging branches).
31. Thamnophis sauritus sawritus (Linnaeus):
Rippon Snake. Near Aberdeen; Broad Creek
(some observed with part of tail missing); The
Rocks (2 specimens observed and let go, July
1954); Bush River (CMP 8374); Edgewood
Arsenal (MNHS); The Rocks (RHM). Extending
range north and east to Susquehanna River near
Pennsylvania line.
32. Thamnophis sirtalis sirtalis (Linnaeus):
GarTER SNAKE. Shures Landing below Cono-
wingo Dam (March 20, 1954, 565); Broad
Creek; Havre de Grace; The Rocks; Churchville.
Extending range north and east to Pennsylvania
line.
33. Haldea valeriae valeriae Baird and Girard:
Eastern Grounp Snake. Broad Creek (under
old plant stalk, embedded in ground); Prospect;
north of Bradshaw, along Little Gunpowder.
New to Harford County.
34. Heterodon platyrhinos platyrhinos Latreille:
HoG-NosED SNAKE. Broad Creek (5 collected in
year, near fence posts and in dead logs); near
Magnolia (DOR, May 1952); Aberdeen (Robert
Duppstatt). Extending range north and east to
Pennsylvania line.
35. Diadophis punctatus edwardsi (Merrem):
RING-NECKED SNAKE. Deer Creek at Susque-
hanna near Darlington (September 20, 1953,
% 27); Broad Creek (under rotted logs and flat
rocks). New to Harford County.
36. Storeria dekayi (Holbrook): DrKay’s
Snake. Churchville. New to Harford County.
37. Opheodrys aestivus (Linnaeus): RouGH
GREEN Snake. Aberdeen (climbing over shrubs).
New to Harford County.
38. Carphophis amoenus amoenus (Say): WoRM
SNAKE. Conowingo; Broad Creek. New to Har-
ford County.
39. Coluber constrictor constrictor (Linnaeus):
Brack Snake, Buack Racer. Broad Creek; Deer
Creek at Susquehanna River (Spring 1953, in
woods). New to Harford County.
40. Elaphe obsoleta obsoleta (Say): PrLor
Buack Snake. Broad Creek; Churchville; along
Little Gunpowder River; Bel Air; The Rocks.
New to Harford County.
41. Lampropeltis doliata triangulum (Lacé-
pede): Mink Snake. Havre de Grace (USNM
9284); Broad Creek (collected in ruins of old
building). Extending range northward to Penn-
sylvania line.
42. Lampropeltis getulus getulus (Linnaeus):
Eastern Kine Snake. Along Little Gunpowder
River, northwest of Fallston; near Aberdeen
(Robert Duppstatt). Extending range well into
Harford County.
43. Ancistrodon contortrix mokeson (Daudin):
CopprpreRHEAD. The Rocks (on boulders sunning,
1946); Kalmia (1954); Broad Creek (on rocky
ledges below dam; some killed at camp site above
lake); Deer Creek (Fowler, 1925); near Darling-
ton; on rocky ledges along Susquehanna River
just above Havre de Grace. Widens the range in
Harford County.
Although the following species of amphib-
ians have not been collected in Harford
County, to the best of my knowledge, they
do occur just below the Conowingo Dam on
the Cecil County side of the Susquehanna
River. Since they all show aquatic or semi-
aquatic tendencies, there is no reason why
they might not be found in Harford County.
Ambystoma maculatus (Shaw): Low ground be-
tween the Octoraro River and Port Deposit,
# 38-41, March 18, 1953; just below Conowingo
Dam, *48, September 20, 1953.
Ambystoma opacum (Gravenhorst): Under logs
just below Conowingo Dam, #47, September 20,
1953; low woods between Octoraro River and
Port Deposit, *37 and 37a, March 18, 1953.
Hemidactylium scutatum (Schlegel): Under
logs just below Conowingo Dam, *46, September
20, 1953.
Cryptobranchus alleganiensis (Daudin): Col-
lected in the Octoraro River many years ago;
common farther north in the Susquehanna River
and its tributaries in Pennsylvania.
vou. 46, No. 2
FEBRUARY 1956
SHOEMAKER: AMPHIPODS FROM DRY TORTUGAS 61
ZOOLOGY —A new genus and two new species of amphipods from Dry Tortugas,
Florida. CLARENCE R. SHormMaker, U.S. National Museum.
While collecting in the shallow water
around Loggerhead Key, Dry Tortugas, in
1926, I discovered some small amphipods
living among the coral sand and rocks. These
proved to be a new genus, herein named
Hoplopheonoides.
A number of amphipods found clinging to
the exterior of a large spider crab taken by
Dr. Waldo L. Schmitt south of Tortugas in
August 1931, have been found to be a new
symbiotic species of Stenothoe.
Family AMPHILOCHIDAE
Hoplopheonoides, n. gen.
Antennae short, subequal in length, flagella
much shorter than their peduncles, accessory
flagellum absent. Eye rather small. Mandible,
molar well developed, cutting edge well toothed,
spine row of several spines, palp absent. Maxilla
1, inner plate narrow and rather long, outer plate
with 9-11 spines, palp 1-jomted. Maxilla 2 both
plates narrow, inner the shorter. Maxillipeds
normal. Coxal plates 1 and 2 rudimentary, 3 and
4 very large. Gnathopods 1 and 2 subchelate.
Peraeopods 1 and 2 slender; peraeopods 3 and 4,
slender with second joint linear; peraeopod 5,
slender with second joint slightly expanded.
Metasome segments normal. Urosome segment 1
long, with a high dorsal crest or lamella; urosome
segments 2 and 3 very short and not coalesced.
Uropods normal. Telson horizontal and entire.
Hoplopheonoides obesa, n. sp.
Fig. 1
Male.—Head as long as the first two body seg-
ments combined. The specimens examined having
been in alcohol for a considerable time, the eyes
were distorted so that thei correct outline could
not be determined. Antenna 1, peduncle rather
stout, the joints decreasing consecutively in
length; flagellum, a little longer than the last
peduncular joint, the first joint being as long as
the succeeding four joints combined. Antenna 2 a
little shorter than 1 and comparatively slender;
fourth joint a little longer than the fifth; flagellum
as long as the fifth peduncular joint and com-
posed of one long joint and four short joints.
Upper lip bilobed. Mandible without palp; molar
well developed; cutting edge rather broad and
well toothed; spine row of six or seven spines, as
well as could be determined. Maxilla 1, inner
plate narrow and rather long and apparently
without setae; outer plate with nine or eleven
spines; palp 1 jomted and bearing distal spines.
Maxilla 2, both plates narrow and slightly curved,
inner plate the shorter, and each bearing one
apical seta. Maxilliped, inner plate longer than
the outer and reaching forward nearly as far;
outer plate reaching nearly to the end of the first
joint of palp; second joint of palp short and
widened distally; third joint with a narrow distal
lobe reaching nearly to the middle of the fourth
joint.
Gnathopods 1 and 2 slender. Gnathopod 1
shorter than 2; second joint not quite as long as
the fifth and sixth combined; fifth joint with
lower lobe produced forward beneath the sixth;
sixth joint over twice as long as wide, palm trans-
verse and rather deeply incised; seventh joint
slender, curved, much longer than the palm and
bearing minute spinules on inner margin. Gnatho-
pod 2 second joint longer than the fifth and sixth
combined; fifth joint a little longer than the sixth;
sixth jomt expanding slightly distally, palm
transverse, concave, having a small tooth near the
seventh joint, and defined by a tooth bearing two
spines; seventh joint slender, strongly curved, ex-
tending a little beyond the palm and armed on
the inner margin with five spinules and a small
forward-pointing tooth. Peraeopods 1 and 2
slender, alike, and about equal in length. Peraeo-
pods 3 and 4 alike, but 3 the shorter (Fig. 1a).
Peraeopod 5 about as long as 3, second joint
slightly expanded but not produced below. The
fourth joint of all peraeopods slightly expanded
and very little produced below. The seventh joint
of all peraeopods slender and little curved.
Coxal plates 1 and 2 rudimentary and nearly
hidden by the greatly expanded coxal plate 3.
Coxal plate 4 greatly expanded and reaching back
to the end of coxal plate 5.
The body of the animal viewed from above
widens rather abruptly toward the fourth seg-
ment which is the widest and which bulges out
laterally over the central coxal plates. The body
then tapers off to the posterior end which is very
narrow.
Metasome segments evenly rounding below
and without angles. Urosome segment 1 about
62 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
three times longer than segments 2 and 3 com-
bined, and expanded dorsally into a thin vertical
crest or lamella which is produced behind over
segments 2 and 3. Urosome segments 2 and 3 very
short, and apparently not coalesced. Uropods de-
creasing in length consecutively, all biramous, the
outer ramus being the shorter. The upper margins
VOL. 46, No. 2
of all rami bearing very fine, closely set spinules.
Telson entire, with lateral margins converging to
a narrow apex, and reaching nearly to the end of
the peduncle of uropod 3. Length 2.5 mm.
Female.—Those specimens which are believed
to be females are like the males, and are of the
same size.
Fic. 1.—Hoplopheonoides obesa, n. gen. and n. sp., male: a, Front part of animal; b, antenna 1;
c, antenna 2; d, left maxilliped; e, end of gnathopod 1; f, end of gnathopod 2; g, hind part of animal.
Fespruary 1956 SHOEMAKER: AMPHIPODS FROM DRY TORTUGAS 63
Fie. 2.—Stenothoe symbiotica, n. sp., male: a, Front part of animal; 0, left maxilla 2; ¢, left
maxilla 2 of another specimen; d, end of gnathopod 2; e, peraeopod 3; f, end of| peraeopod 3 enlarged;
g, peraeopod 4; h, peraeopod 5; 7, metasome; j, telson.
64 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Type.—A male, U. 8S. Nat. Mus. no. 96465,
taken off the northern end of Loggerhead Key,
Tortugas, Fla., in 15 feet of water, among sand,
rocks, and marine growths, August 4, 1926, by
Clarence R. Shoemaker.
Remarks.—This amphipod possesses characters
belonging to several of the genera of the Am-
philochidae, but the combination of these charac-
ters does not agree with that of any of the estab-
lished genera of the family; it, therefore, appears
necessary to create a new genus to receive it.
In life the animal is heavily mottled with
greenish brown, yellowish green, and white, which
give it an effective protective colormg for its
native habitat amongst the coralline sands and
rocks.
Specimens of this species were taken at a
number of localities in the shallow water around
Loggerhead Key.
Stenothoe symbiotica, n. sp.
Fig. 2
Male.—Head with lateral lobe angular, but not
acutely so. Eye rather large, nearly round, and
light straw color in alcohol. Antenna 1 a little
longer than 2, penduncular joints decreasing in
length consecutively; flagellum nearly twice as
long as the peduncle, and composed of about 19
or 20 joints. Antenna 2, fourth and fifth joints
equal in length; flagellum longer than the
peduncle, and composed of about 16 joints.
Right mandible, cutting edge broad, with five
coarse teeth; accessory plate broad with very
finely toothed edge, spine row of about 12 spines;
palp absent, but indicated by a small, pointed,
conical protuberance. Left mandible, cutting edge
broad with more and much finer teethn in tha
right mandible; accessory plate broad with coarser
teeth than in right plate. Maxilla 1, inner lobe
small with one seta; outer lobe with six spine
teeth; palp 2-jointed, the rounding distal margin
and inner margin with spines. Maxilla 2, mner
lobe absent; outer lobe bearing seven spines.
Mazxilliped, inner lobes very small, but separate;
outer lobes entirely absent. Inner distal end of the
third joint of the palp and the inner margin of the
fourth joint bearing a brush of fine setae.
Gnathopods 1 and 2 very much alike, but 2
much the larger. Gnathopod 2, second joint not
much expanded and as long as the fifth and sixth
joints combined; fifth jomt a little over half the
vou. 46, No. 2
length of the sixth, and with prominent lower
lobe; sixth jomt about one-third longer than wide,
widest in the middle; palm very oblique, slightly
concave, provided throughout with very short
spinules, without defining angle, and merging into
the joint by a broadly rounding curve which bears
a row of seven stout spines; seventh joint stout,
curved and bearing a row of fine spinules on inner
margin.
Peraeopods 1 and 2 slender and alike, fourth
joint little expanded; sixth joint longer than
fifth, expanded distally, and provided on the
oblique distal end with two rows of stout spines,
thus, with the opposing seventh joint, forming a
subchelate clasping organ. Peraeopods 4 and 5,
second joint moderately expanded, and the third
to seventh joints like those of peraeopod 3. Coxal
plates 2 and 4 broadly expanded and much deeper
than their body segments. Metasome segment 1
evenly rounding below. Metasome segments 2 and
3 slightly produced below, but not sharply so.
Uropod 1 extending a little farther back than 2.
Uropod 3 extending a little farther than 2 and
about as far as 1. All uropods with very few small
spines. Uropod 3, peduncle not quite as long as
first jomt of ramus, which is longer than the
second joint and bears one or two central and
several distal spines on upper margin. Telson not
reaching the end of the peduncle of uropod 3,
lateral margins each bearing one spinule and
converging to the narrow rounding apex. Length
about 7 mm.
Female.—The female is very much like the
male. The antennae are a little shorter. The
coxal plates are not so deep. The gnathopods are
smaller and weaker, but structurally the same as
those of the male. The female is a little smaller
than the male.
Type-—A male, U. S. Nat. Mus. no. 96464,
taken from the exterior of a large spider crab
caught in 50 fathoms south of Loggerhead Key,
Tortugas, Fla., August 7, 1931, by Waldo L.
Schmitt. A considerable number of these amphi-
pods were taken from the crab, where they were
apparently living symbiotically. Several speci-
mens were taken in an otter trawl at Tortugas. A
single specimen was taken by the steamer
Albatross December 12, 1919, in an otter trawl, in
62-110 fathoms, at station 20037 cff South
Carolina.
Fespruary 1956
NOTES AND NEWS 65
NOTES AND NEWS
SIX DISTRICT AREA SCIENTISTS
RECEIVE ACADEMY AWARDS
The Board of Managers of the Washington
Academy of Sciences announce the 1955 winners
of the awards given annually to scientists under
40 years of age in recognition of distinguished
scientific achievements in the Biological, Engi-
neering, and Physical Sciences, and to a sec-
ondary-school teacher for excellency in Teaching
of Science. The selections were made by a com-
mittee of 25 leading scientists in the various
fields represented.
The President of the Academy, Dr. MarcGarnr
Pittman, of the National Institutes of Health,
presented the awards at the Annual Dinner
Meeting of the Academy, held on January 19,
1956, at the Kennedy-Warren.
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES
Dr. Cuirrorp Evans and Dr. Barry J.
Mereerrs, of the Smithsonian Institution,
a husband-wife team, were selected to receive
jointly an award in the Biological Sciences in
recognition of their outstanding contributions to
the prehistory and human ecology of Lowland
South America. They were pioneers in archeology
in the Amazon area. They lived and worked
in the rain forests where no one previously had
been willing to work, and there uncovered evi-
dence that has necessitated drastic revision of
previously held views of native culture in north-
eastern South America. Their field work has
been in Peru, Lower Amazon, British Guiana
among the Wai Wai Indians, and in coastal
Heuador.
Dr. Evans was born in Dallas, Tex., and
received his Ph.D. from Columbia University in
1950. He joined the staff of the Smithsonian
Institution in 1951 as associate curator, Division
of Archeology, U. 8S. National Museum.
Dr. Meggers was born in Washington, D. C.,
and received her Ph.D. from Columbia Uni-
versity in 1952. Since 1954 she has been an
honorary research associate at the Smithsonian
Institution.
Lt. Col. Ropprr Travs, formerly chief of the
Department of Entomology of the Walter Reed
Army Institute of Research and now command-
ing officer of the U. S. Army Medical Research
Unit in Malaya, was selected for a Biological
Science Award in recognition of his outstanding
work on ectoparasites, fleas and mites. He made
outstanding contributions during World War II
to the control of mite-borne scrub typhus in the
Malaya area and during the Korean War to the
control of hemorrhagic fever. Hemorrhagic fever,
the greatest scourge of that area, is now almost a
medical curiosity.
Dr. Traub was born in New York, N. Y., and
received his Ph.D. from the University of Illinois
in 1947. He has been with the United States
Army since 1948.
ENGINEERING SCIENCES
EK. Artaur Bonney, of the Johns Hopkins
University Applied Physics Laboratory, Silver
Spring, Md., was selected for the Engineering
Science Award for his outstanding contributions
in the field of supersonic aerodynamics. He has
played a leading role in elucidating the problems
of interactions among the wings, body, and tails
of a supersonic missile. Specifically, his analysis
and wind-tunnel tests have led to a fairly com-
plete understanding of the aerodynamic and
aeroelastic effects of a structure in regions of
flow ranging from subsonic to high Mach num-
bers. His work has fundamental application in
the design of air-borne missiles and rockets.
Mr. Bonney was born in Waltham, Mass. He
received his master of science degree from New
York University in 1942. He has been at the
Applied Physics Laboratory since 1945.
PHYSICAL SCIENCES
Dr. TrrrevtL Lesuir Hitu, of the Naval
Medical Research Institute, Bethesda, Md., was
selected for the Physical Science Award in
recognition of his outstanding contributions to
physical and biological chemistry. He has made
significant advancements in the statistical
mechanics of the behavior of assemblies of
particles, molecules, and atoms and in the
applications of statistical mechanics to problems
of general chemistry, for example; the behavior
of molecules at interfaces (gas bubbles in liquids,
gases adsorbed on charcoal, ete.). His study of
electrical properties of molecules has contributed
to the understanding of the chemical behavior of
cells, one example of which is muscle contraction.
Dr. Hill received his Ph.D. from the Uni-
versity of California m 1942. He has been on the
66 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
staff of the Naval Medical Research Institute
since 1948.
TEACHING OF SCIENCE
Heten Nate Coopmr (Mrs. C. L.), of Be-
thesda, Md., was selected for the Teaching of
Science Award for her distinction in fostering
ability and enriching the perspective in mathe-
matics. She has been an effective teacher for a
number of years. Mathematics is presented so
skillfully that even the slower learners are not
scared away from mathematics while the faster
learners are challenged to do extra work. Her
students have won science fair prizes. She has
helped many students decide on an engineering
or mathematical career by constantly stressing
the need for mathematicians and engineers. She
is also active in teacher association projects.
Mrs. Cooper received her A.B. from West
Virginia University. She has taught in the
Montgomery County Schools since 1946 and in
North Bethesda Junior High School since
September 1955.
NEW DIRECTOR OF NAVAL RESEARCH
Dr. Oscar THroporr Marzke, associate
director of research for materials at the Naval
Research Laboratory, has been appointed di-
rector of research at NRL. He succeeds Dr.
Epwarp O. Hutsurt, who has retired from
Civil Service to become the senior scientist for
the United States National Committee for the
International Geophysical Year of the National
Academy of Sciences.
A native of Lansing, Mich., Dr. Marzke re-
ceived his B.Sc. degree in 1929 from Michigan
State College and his Sc.D. degree in Metallurgy
in 1932 from the Massachusetts Institute of
Technology; he was a Swett scholar. During
part of the time he was taking his postgraduate
work he served at NRL as a laboratory tech-
nician.
From 1933 to 1946, Dr. Marzke was a metal-
lurgist with the American Steel and Wire Co.,
domg both research and plant metallurgical
work, his last position with the company being
that of works metallurgist at the Waukegan,
Ill., plant beginning in 1942. He joined the Naval
Research Laboratory in 1946 as superintendent
of the Metallurgy Division and became the first
associate director of research for materials in
1954. During the period 1951-53, he was also
head of the Metallurgy Branch of the Office
of Naval Research and was Development Co-
ordinator for ONR from January to August
1955.
Dr. Marzke is a member of the American
Society for Metals, the American Institute of
Mining and Metallurgical Engineers, the Ameri-
can Welding Society, Tau Beta Pi, the Research
Society of America, the British Institute of
Metals, the British Iron and Steel Institute, and
the Washington Academy of Sciences.
ELECTRON TUBE INFORMATION SERVICE
The National Bureau of Standards has
established a tube information service for ac-
cumulating and disseminating technical data on
both domestic and foreign radio tubes. At the
present time nearly 10,000 cards, filed by tube
type number, are appropriately referenced to
manufacturers’ source material. In addition,
about 10 percent of these cards, selected mainly
from the high-use miniature and subminiature
types, have been coded on punched cards for
mechanical sorting.
With this unique service, it is possible to find
(1) information about any particular tube, (2)
all tube types whose electrical characteristics,
bulb sizes, or base configurations fall within
particular ranges, and (3) domestic tubes that
can be substituted for unavailable foreign tubes.
Recently, junction diodes and transistors have
been added to the Bureau’s program. The pro-
gram began about seven years ago as a service to
NBS personnel. It has since been extended to all
scientists and engineers in Government and in-
dustry who have legitimate requests. This con-
tinuing service is being carried out by C. P.
Marsden and J. M. Moffitt of the Bureau’s
electron tube laboratory.
The NBS tube information service was
established to meet the ever-increasing number
of requests for information that was not readily
available on little-known tubes or tubes of
foreign manufacture. As the service grew, it in-
cluded more and more detailed information on
larger numbers of tubes. Recently the Bureau
has begun punched-card coding for automatic
selection in order to process requests more
rapidly. The goals of the service are to include the
latest technical data on all domestic and foreign
tube types and to have all such information
coded.
The service includes all such data on electron
tubes and semiconductor devices as electrical
vou. 46, No. 2
Fespruary 1956
characteristics, bulb size and base configurations,
ambient operating conditions, and where possible,
construction details. The main source of this in-
formation is the manufacturer’s brochure or
handbook. While the major companies auto-
matically furnish the information through their
distribution lists, numerous new and _ small
companies must be queried directly whenever
preliminary information on their products is
gathered from advertisements, articles, and
brochures. Special attention to these scattered
sources has been required to maintain current
the file on crystal diodes and transistors. The
NBS files include products of about 80 domestic
and 15 foreign manufacturers. In general, foreign
data have been limited to Western European
sources.
So far the Bureau has received requests for
tube information mainly from other Government
agencies, the military services, foreign govern-
ments, and local private industries. Most of the
inquiries have been for information about the
electrical characteristics of a particular tube type
or the selection of a domestic tube for replace-
ment in foreign equipment. Although this sort of
request is easily met, questions on cathode
operating temperature or contact potentials must
be answered in general terms because these
quantities vary with the manufacturer. Queries
on tube types with specified electrical, mechan-
ical, or geometric characteristics are usually
answered by a combination of machine card
sorting and reference research. Clearly, only
general information can be coded on punched
cards; after machine selection of several tubes
that meet the specifications of the inquiry,
reference research is required to supply the more
specific information. In general, coding is on the
basis of operating voltages, transconductance,
etc.; and the tube types machine-selected are
those within the ranges specified by the inquiry.
While the coding on punched cards has been
completed only for the miniature and
miniature tubes with bulb sizes up to T61%, the
Bureau plans to proceed as rapidly as possible
with the coding of all other tube types. The
semiconductor devices are being coded as soon as
the information becomes available.
The Bureau’s service is open to all who have
legitimate requests. Inquiries may be made by
telephone if desired. However, they should con-
tain as much factual information as possible to
expedite the reference research and should in-
sub-
NOTES AND NEWS 67
clude background information where appro-
priate. The service cannot undertake to answer
queries on tube applications in circuits; complex
or highly detailed questions that may require
laboratory research can be answered only on the
basis of data available. Address inquiries to
C. P. Marsden, chief, Electron Tubes Section,
National Bureau of Standards, Washington
25, D.C.
DR. CURTIS CELEBRATES 80TH BIRTHDAY
Dr. Harvey L. Curtis, one-time member of
the staff of the National Bureau of Standards
and still an active physicist, was honored by his
junior NBS colleagues on the occasion of his
80th birthday on December 14.
Dr. Curtis, who is internationally known for
his work in absolute electrical measurements, was
presented with a bound volume of letters from
many of his former scientific associates con-
gratulating him on his birthday.
Until his retirement in 1946, Dr. Curtis was
chief of the Bureau’s Inductance and Capacitance
Section, a part of the Electricity Division.
In this capacity Dr. Curtis supervised the
maintenance and continued development of the
national standards of reference for determining
the two basic electrical quantities, inductance
and capacitance. His work on the measurement
of current and resistance in absolute units brought
him into contact with renowned scientists in
other national laboratories and made him an
appropriate NBS representative at the Inter-
national Electrical Congress at Paris in 1932.
In addition to the basic work on absolute
electrical measurements, he inaugurated funda-
mental researches on the properties of dielec-
trics, particularly rubber and petroleum. During
World Wars I and II, he directed extensive
programs in ballistic research for the Navy.
Since his retirement Dr. Curtis has maintained
an active association with the Bureau, coming
to his desk almost daily. His continued interest
in ballistics is shown by the publication in 1948
of a paper entitled ‘An Instrument for the
Rapid Production of a Decimal Series of Po-
tentials and its Application to Ballistics Measure-
ments,” of which he was coauthor with Howard
S. Roberts. He also published a paper in 1950 on
the “Determination of Curvature by an Osculom-
eter.’ His continued interest in absolute
trical measurements led to publication in 1949 of
a paper on that subject in the Scientific Monthly.
elec-
68 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF
He has long been concerned with science
education, and his retirement permitted him to
prepare, after a lapse of over 40 years, a_his-
torical paper on the establishment of accredited
graduate courses at the National Bureau of
Standards. This paper was published in this
JouRNAL in 1949. In 1906, the year before Dr.
Curtis joined its staff, the Bureau had established
a system of courses at the graduate level—the
first such courses in government. Dr. Curtis was
soon asked to serve as chairman of the com-
mittee which arranged this curriculum. His
studies as a postgraduate student at NBS
helped qualify him for his own doctorate.
Since retiring, Dr. Curtis founded a unique
organization, ‘‘The Fossils.” These retired
Government workers hold weekly meetings for
fellowship and for discussions of subjects of
mutual interest. They also make trips to places
of historical and National interest around
Washington.
Dr. Curtis was born December 14, 1875, on a
farm near Lansing, Mich. He received his
bachelor of philosophy degree from the Uni-
versity of Michigan in 1900 and his master of
arts degree in 1903. He became a physics in-
structor at the Michigan Agriculatural College
in 1903 and held the post of assistant professor
there until he jomed the National Bureau of
Standards in 1907. He took his doctorate at the
University of Michigan in 1910. In 1915, after
demonstrating his ability for making electrical
measurements with high precision, Dr. Curtis
was appointed a section chief to direct part of the
Bureau’s electrical work. He continued to serve
as a section chief until his retirement.
During his active career he gave generously of
his spare time to scientific societies. He has served
as president of the Philsophical Society of
Washington and of the Washington Academy of
Sciences and was chairman of the Washington
section of the American Institute of Electrical
Engineers. He is an honorary member of the
American Society for Testing Materials, having
served as chairman of Committee D-9 on Elec-
trical Insulating Materials and as chairman of
American Standards Association Technical
Committee C-59 which is sponsored by ASTM.
As a Fellow of the American Institute of Elec-
trical Engineers, he was active in the National
Affairs of that organization and also the American
Physical Society. Dr. Curtis was made an
SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 2
honorary Phi Beta Kappa when the chapter was
established at the University of Michigan in
1930. He is at present hard at work on his
memoirs.
Dr. Herseert FRrispMANN, curator of the
Division of Birds, U. $8. National Museum,
Smithsonian Institution, has been awarded the
1955 Leidy medal of the Academy of Natural
Sciences of Philadelphia. The medal is awarded
every three years for the best publication,
exploration, discovery, or research in the natural
sciences in such particular branches thereof as
may be designated.
Dr. Friedmann is being honored for his re-
search in ornithology, his study of the biology of
parasitic birds, the monographic works he has
published dealing with them, and the discovery
of wax digestion by honey guides. His study of
these small birds, which lead men and animals to
nests of bees, may provide a new means of
attacking the tubercle bacillus.
It may be noted that Dr. Friedmann is the
author of the first number in the Academy’s
monograph series, The Parasitic Cuckoos of
Africa.
Ouiver H Gis has been appointed visiting
professor of physics at Southern Illinois Uni-
versity for the academic year 1955-56. From 1922
until his retirement in 1948, Gish was on the
staff of the department of terrestrial magnetism
of the Carnegie Institution of Washington,
first as physicist and later as chief of the section
of terrestrial electricity and as assistant director
of the department. Since his retirement, he has
been part-time consulting physicist to the
U. 8. Air Force and the U. S. Navy Mine De-
fense Laboratory.
R. N. Dorrscu, associate professor of bac-
teriology at the University of Maryland, has been
appointed a 1956 fellow of the John Simon
Guggenheim Foundation at the Rowett Re-
search Institute, Bucksburn, Aberdeenshire,
Scotland. He will work with A. E. Oxford on some
aspects of rumen microbiology.
SHIRLEIGH SILVPRMAN, of the Applied Physics
Laboratory, Johns Hopkins University, has
taken a year’s leave, effective November 1, to
serve as director of the Physical Sciences Di-
vision, Office of Naval Research.
F 4
By i iG
n i
i
tis
0
‘ i Lim
)
i
ee,
wy ;
fiat
1
1‘ /
CONTENTS
Gropuysics.— Possibilities and significance of high-speed computing in
meteorology. /HRANGOIS=N).. PRENKTED.......).)-. 22 eee
MatTHematics.—Commutators of A and A*. T. Kato and O. Taussky.
PaLEONTOLOGY.—New families of Gastropoda. J. BRookrs KNIGHT... .
PALEONTOLOGY.—Some new pleurotomarian gastropods from the Permian
of west Texas. RoGrr I). BATTEN... 02......... 22 sae
PaLEOoNTOLOGY.—New Permian gastropod genera from eastern Arizona.
STEVENS. WINTERS: 2: 0.0.05.-. 00000-00853 35 rr
PALEONTOLOGY.—Labridens, a new Permian gastropod. Eiuis L. YocHEL-
PALEONTOLOGY.—Gyrospira, a new genus of bellerophontid (Gastropoda)
from. Bolivia: A.J: Boucot. .2). 2 4.0.2<.4..).) >) eee
ENnToMoLoGy.—Gall midges associated with cones of western forest trees
(Diptera: Itonididae). RicuArp He Foorn,.- 2... -..) eee
Herpretotogy.—The herpetofauna of Harford County, Maryland.
ChyDE EF. RBED: «.. 2.00 Jen eae 6 ee ee os be eee
Zootocy.—A new genus and two new species of amphipods from Dry
Tortugas, Florida. CLARENCE R. SHOEMAKER
Page
Miscellany; Notesrand News: 2-29..90008— eee er ose. 40, 65
Db, 13
DuUwWwZs
VOLUME 46 March 1956 NUMBER 3
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
Published Monthly by the
oe S H/INGTON AC A D-E M\Y OF SCIENCES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: Curster H. Paces, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RoNaLD Bamrorp, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL EXSTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (8) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3314 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges.—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the ProcrEpinGs should be sent to Haratp A. ReHpER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
SUbscrepioneatesmor thew OURNAU—=DeTyieala ree ees seen $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10) incl’—not available*...~............ = —
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)........ 8.00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JourRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 45, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $378.50.
Monoarapu No. 1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
INDEX to JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PRocEEDINGS........................-- $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete............................. $25.00
SAS VOI, WAOOUING!. 2 ca cconncccoccusccssosconsonseooueneenuacnunau: 2.00
Sin gle;nuUMDersteeees cree een eer ee ea er eee ee Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences”? and
edoressed to the Treasurer, H. 8. Rappieys, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
1D); ©.
Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925.
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 46
Marcu 1956
No. 3
PHYSICS.—The basis for standards for radiation protection.! LAURISTON S. TAYLOR,
National Bureau of Standards.
In the broad sense, radiation protection
is a problem that will touch the lives of most
of us more and more as time goes on, whether
it be in connection with nondestructive
testing, with radiology, or with the pro-
duction of nuclear power. The uses of radi-
ation-producing machines and the use of
radioactive materials will undoubtedly in-
crease as time goes on, and radiation as such
will become an increasingly important part
of our national economy. It will also become
a part of our political economy because,
with the widespread uses of radiation, there
is an increasing tendency to endeavor to
control its hazards through legislative means.
Legislation can be good or bad; whether it
is one or the other will depend to a consid-
erable extent upon the action and interest
of our scientific and technical organizations.
Today, radiation rules, laws, and regula-
tions are being developed rapidly. With
any law or regulation, restriction is apt to
follow. This can be harmful if such restric-
tions are allowed to interfere materially with
the normal progress of science and industry.
These problems will undoubtedly come to
your attention more and more. I want to
emphasize the importance of keeping a close
watch on these developments, and when
necessary, being willing to devote some of
your time and energy to assure that regula-
tions are sensible, useful, and yet at the same
time nonrestrictive.
The term “radiation-protection stand-
ards” is used somewhat loosely, and yet at
the same time there is probably very little
1This paper is the substance of the Lester
Honor Lecture, delivered before the Society for
Non-Destructive Testing and published in full in
the journal of that Society. Their permission to
Reprint this part is acknowledged with apprecia-
10n.
69
real uncertainty as to the broad meaning
of the term. One normally thinks of a stand-
ard as being something rather firm, rather
well understood, inflexible, accurately
known, and reproducible. When a standard
is mentioned one immediately thinks of
something like the standard meter-bar,
carefully locked away in a vault and re-
sistant to the changes of time; or of some
accurately measurable quantity, such as the
ohm or volt.
However, in the field of radiation pro-
tection standards, there are many unknowns
and many uncertainties. They involve a
great many assumptions that may have to
be changed from time to time. In fact, it
would not be oversimplifying the case to
state that our protection standards are
essentially protection goals or objectives.
Where it is possible to develop numbers to
assign to some of the standards, these num-
bers are really more in the nature of a means
to achieve some goal than the goal itself.
Even the goal itself is difficult of definition.
It is primarily to determine the limits of
radiation exposure to which the individual,
or whole population, can be exposed without
encountering risks incommensurate with the
benefits to be expected from its use. Stand-
ards of safety go back directly to the indi-
vidual who will be exposed to radiation.
For this it is necessary to determine how
much radiation he can absorb without injury
to himself or to his progeny. Knowing the
complication of the human being as an or-
ganic structure, and the great difference in
sensitivity between individuals, it is very
easy to see why such a determination im-
mediately becomes an extremely difficult
problem. To point up the difficulties, it may
be helpful to review rather briefly some of
AUG 1 4 1085
70 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
the early background and philosophy leading
to the development of standards of radiation
protection. Much has been written on this
subject and therefore only the high spots
will be touched upon (/, 2, 3, 4).
Radiation was recognized as a potential
hazard to health soon after its discovery.
Serious efforts to understand and curtail
radiation exposure to individuals were not
begun seriously until the 1920’s. One should
bear in mind that it was not until 1928 that
the world had a uniform and acceptable unit
of radiation dose, namely the roentgen. Con-
sequently, radiation-protection efforts and
protection standards were, of necessity, on
a purely qualitative basis. Until 1928, most
radiation treatments were expressed in terms
of fractions of erythema dose—the amount
of radiation that would cause a defined red-
dening of the skin. This in itself was a very
uncertain factor, since it depended upon the
energy of the radiation, the time over which
it was delivered, the size of the irradiated
field, and the amount of backscattering, not
to mention the individual’s idiosynerasy with
regard to radiation sensitivity. It was not
until the mid-thirties that stray radiation
exposure was measured quantitatively, mak-
ing it possible to put radiation-protection
standards on a reasonably firm quantitative
basis. Interestingly enough, later efforts
proved that these early standards were not
grossly wrong.
The first protection standards, if such they
could be called, were in terms of thicknesses
of lead that were required to be interposed
between a radiation source and an individual
to assure his safety (5). Graded thicknesses
of lead were recommended on the basis of
the voltage applied across the X-ray tube.
No account was taken of the hardness of the
radiation, distance factors, origin and history
of the scattered radiation, time of exposure,
etc. The standard barriers were based on
supposedly “average” conditions. The fol-
lowing of this principle of protection, while
a substantial achievement, nevertheless re-
sulted at times either in underprotection or
costly overprotection.
One could venture the suggestion that if
there is any basic standard of radiation pro-
tection it would be what is now referred to
as the maximum permissible dose, or maxi-
mum permissible exposure of an individual.
VOL. 46, NO. 3 °
By maximum permissible exposure is meant
the amount of radiation to which the whole
body of an individual can be subjected over
the period of his adult lifetime, without pro-
ducing in that individual any detectable
harmful effects (6). For the occupational
exposure of an individual to radiation, such
a standard might be adequate, but as ex-
plained below in more detail, there should
be an additional basic standard relating to
the average exposure of the entire popula-
tion; for genetic reasons.
Parenthetically, it should be remarked
that the old term ‘“‘tolerance dose’ that
prevailed for many years is a complete mis-
nomer. There is no such thing as a ‘‘tolerable
dose of radiation.’”” No radiation effects,
other than for the treatment of disease, are
known to be beneficial to man. Any radiation
exposure received by man must be accepted
as harmful. Therefore, the objective should be
to keep man’s exposure as low as possible and
yet at the same time, not discontinue the use of
radiation altogether.
The big problem is to obtain some quanti-
tative idea as to the amounts of radiation
that can harm the human being.
As already mentioned, early permissible
exposures were expressed in terms of the
erythema. This followed as a result of a very
few observations on a very few people who
had been overexposed to radiation, under
conditions where there was some crude idea
as to the amount of radiation involved (7).
As a result of this, numerous proposals were
made, and for a time served a useful pur-
pose. For example, Mutscheller proposed as
a ‘tolerance dose,” 14 99 of an erythema dose
in 30 days (8). Others reduced this to 4090
of an erythema dose in 3 days. Sievert inde-
pendently proposed 149 of an erythema dose
per year (9), which was not appreciably
different from Mutscheller’s value.
Various attempts were made to place the
erythema dose on a sound physical basis.
Glocker and Kaupp (1/0) described a toler-
ance dose as that radiation level which
would give just barely visible fluorescence
observable in a completely darkened room
by dark-adapted eyes. They also described
it as barely visible blackening of a “‘dupli-
tized” X-ray film after an exposure to radi-
ation of one hour. Mutscheller’s formula, a
simple but very inaccurate one for com-
Marcu 1956
puting erythema doses, was developed for
a given distance from the X-ray tube for the
direct beam. The number of erythema doses
was given by the number of milhampere
minutes, divided by 25 times the square of
the distance.
Knowing as much as we do now about
radiation, these standards look pathetic
indeed and yet they marked important mile-
stones leading to our more accurate under-
standing of the problem. When one realizes
that, on the basis of today’s knowledge, an
erythema dose under given conditions may
vary from 270 to 1,000 roentgens over a
range of 100 to 1,000 kilovolts, some visuali-
zation of the vast uncertainties in the early
work might be had (//).
By the early 30’s such works as just men-
tioned were correlated and reconciled by the
free use of safety factors—or just factors.
Germany proposed the first quantitative
expression of a permissible dose measured
in roentgens, arriving at a figure of 10~°
roentgen per second as their so-called toler-
ance level of radiation. In 1934 it was possi-
ble, for the first time, for the International
Commission on Radiological Protection to
express permissible exposure in terms of
roentgens (1/2). The value then chosen was
249 roentgen per day. In the United States
in 1936 a somewhat lower level, namely,
149 roentgen per day was adopted (1/3).
This lower value was in part a result of the
belief that there was not an adequate safety
factor in the international recommendations.
It will be noted that the permissible ex-
posures mentioned above were integrated
over varying lengths of time, ranging over a
period of 1 second to one year. Although
precise information on radiation recovery is
lacking, it is undoubtedly true that a given
dose of some roentgens received in a period
of a few minutes is probably more harmful
to the individual than the same dose distrib-
uted evenly over a year’s period of time.
Therefore, while the various proposals for
permissible exposure appear to reduce nu-
merically to the same quantity, they were
not, in fact, biologically equivalent.
Additionally, there is a serious adminis-
trative problem involved, when one com-
pares the integration of a dose given over a
few seconds or over a year. For example,
according to the early German proposals,
od
TAYLOR: RADIATION PROTECTION 71
if at any time an individual is exposed to
more than 10~° roentgens in any one second,
he would have exceeded his permissible dose
rate even though this might only occur once
in a year. This, of course, 1s nonsense. On
the other hand, the problem of integrating
a dose over a year’s time could also present
serious difficulties, depending upon the par-
ticular technique used. A person might be
heavily overexposed during an early period
in a year, yet this might not be detected
until it was too late. It was through consid-
eration of such reasons as these, that inte-
gration over a period of one day was adopted
in the mid-thirties.
In 1946 the National Committee on Radia-
tion undertook an intensive review of the
whole problem of permissible dose. This
review was instigated by the fact that, dur-
ing the Manhattan District days, a tremen-
dous amount of experimental and biological
research had been carried out for the pur-
pose of assuring safety to radiation workers;
new biological data had become available.
It was quickly realized that the value of
149 roentgen per day, as used in this coun-
try, provided only marginal protection.
There was increasing evidence leading the
committee to believe that the value should
be lowered. At the same time it was decided
to review the question of the period over
which the dose would be integrated. For
technical, as well as administrative reasons,
it appeared that integration over one day
was unnecessarily restrictive. Integration
over about 1 month appeared to be more
reasonable and a compromise was finally
reached at one week. The committee arrived
at the recommendation of 349 roentgen per
week as the permissible whole-body exposure
to gamma rays and moderate and medium
energy X-rays. This value has since been
adopted internationally (/6).
It might be pointed out that integration
over a week still presents an occasional
source of administrative difficulties, par-
ticularly in large nuclear industry operations.
In such operations the situation occasionally
arises Where a person may be exposed to more
than his weekly allowance, and yet would
not receive any serious additional exposure
for many weeks thereafter. It seemed im-
proper to penalize either the worker or the
work because of such occasional over-
72 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
exposure. Therefore, a modified standard
was recommended to take care of such
situations.
According to this, under special circum-
stances, a person’s exposure may be inte-
grated over a period of 13 weeks (or 14 of
year) during which period he may be allowed
a total exposure equal to that which might
have been received at the normal maximum
rate for 10 weeks. Thus the 13-week inte-
gration carries with it a penalty of about
23 percent. In other words, if a person re-
ceives his total dose for the longer period all
at once, his permissible dose for that period
is only 193 of what it would otherwise be.
There is little quantitative foundation for
this concept, other than the general belief,
as already mentioned, that a dose distributed
over some appreciable time is less harmful
than the same dose taken all at once.
Thus far the problem of radiation exposure
to the individual has been considered only
under essentially occupational conditions.
There are a number of other conditions that
have to be considered. These will be enu-
merated briefly and some of them will be
taken up in more detail later. Radiation
effects on human beings may be more or less
significant depending upon many factors.
For example, there is increasing evidence
that irreversible genetic damage may result
from exposure of the gonads to any amount
of radiation. All such exposure is cumulative.
This implies that an exposure that may not
produce any harm to the individual him-
self, may be passed on through the genetic
chain to the descendants of this individual.
It is impossible to neglect the possibility
that such damage may occur.
It also appears that individuals are more
susceptible to radiation damage during their
embryonic stage. For this reason it is con-
sidered advisable to restrict as far as possible
the exposure of pregnant women, especially
during the first few months of pregnancy.
Exposure of children under 18 years of age
should also be held to a minimum, although
there is no positive evidence that they are
more susceptible to radiation damage than
an adult. On the other hand, the permissible
exposure for adults takes into consideration
the possible genetic damage during their
lifetime prior to the conception of their
children. To allow children under 18 to re-
vou. 46, No. 3
ceive the same exposure would start them
at a disadvantage were they later to go into
radiation work and then to receive the maxi-
mum permissible exposure.
As far as a potential parent is concerned,
the important period of his life with regard
to radiation exposure is that time up to the
conception of his last child. On the average
this would not be higher than the age of 45
years. For this reason the permissible ex-
posure to persons over 45 years of age may
be doubled. This might provide some degree
of flexibility in certain industrial operations,
but some say that the differentiation of
people under 45 and over 45 years of age is
an administrative headache.
An additional problem, and one that will
be dwelt upon in more detail later, concerns
the exposure of large population groups.
Take for example, a large city supplied by a
single source of water. If this water becomes
contaminated by radioactive waste, a very
large number of people might receive a
small but continuing dose of radiation. De-
pending upon the nature of this contamina-
tion, the radiation might reach the gonads.
In this situation a small genetic damage
might result to a large number of people
where the possibility of crossbreeding is
large. This could be deleterious to the well-
being of a considerable number of people.
Hence standards for the protection of a large
population group may have to be substan-
tially different from these for a relatively
small number of radiation workers, each
receiving individually higher doses of radia-
tion.
Thus far the discussion has dealt, in the
main, with the standards of protection from
sources outside of the body. When the radia-
tion sources get into the body the problem
is vastly more complicated and the overall
difficulty of reaching our standards is much
greater. Here again the basic protection
standard relates back to the maximum per-
missible dose of 349 roentgen per day. How-
ever, in the case of internal emitters, one
must consider the particular organ, or organs,
that may be sensitive to the radiation. This
involves an intimate knowledge of what
happens to every chemical element, once
it is inside the body. For example, certain
elements such as radium, plutonium, and
strontium are what is known as bone seekers.
Marce# -1956
By one means or another a fraction of the
material entering the body eventually ends
up firmly fixed in the bone where it can create
damage. Another material, such as iodine,
will tend to concentrate in the thyroid. Gen-
erally speaking, there are definite organs in
the body which are more susceptible than
others to radiation damage, both because of
the nature of the organ and the tendency for
that organ to concentrate radioactive
material.
Depending upon the nature of the mate-
rial, and its means of entry into the body,
varying fractions will be eliminated by nor-
mal processes, while the remainder is taken
up by the body organs. It is necessary to
determine these relative proportions. The
degree of damage to an organ by a given
quantity of radioactive material also de-
pends upon the biological half-life which in
turn includes the physical half-life of the
material. By biological half-life is meant
the time that it takes to reduce the quantity
of the material in the body to one-half of
its initial value through the process of body
elimination and radioactive decay. Thus an
isotope that has a short half-life, and is also
quickly eliminated from the body, is rela-
tively non-hazardous. Such an isotope is
sodium-24. On the other hand radium and
plutonium are both elements having ex-
tremely long half-lives, and at the same time
a low elimination rate, together with a
tendency to concentrate in the bone. The
former (sodium-24) is relatively non-hazard-
ous, whereas the latter are very hazardous.
In arriving at permissible exposure levels
for radioactive elements within the body,
the following factors, among others, have to
be taken into consideration.
1. Quantity of radioactive material taken into
the body.
2. Initial body retention.
3. Fraction of material going from blood to
critical body tissues.
4. Radiosensitivity of tissue.
5. Size of the critical organ.
6. Essentiality of the critical organ to proper
function of the body.
7. Biological half-life.
8. Physical half-life.
9. Energy of the radiation produced by the
isotope.
10. Specific ionization and the attenuation of that
energy in tissue.
TAYLOR: RADIATION PROTECTION 73
Once all the biological and physical factors
are known, it is then possible to work back-
wards to determine the concentrations of
radioactive material in air or in water that
may be taken into the body without resulting
in damage to the critical organ or tissue. By
this means it has been possible to develop a
series of values for the maximum permissible
concentrations for radioactive isotopes in air
and in water, which can be described as
standards of radioactivity level. Such levels
for about 100 radioactive isotopes have been
worked out and agreed upon by the National
Committee on Radiation Protection and
have since been adopted internationally (14).
A shghtly different problem, resulting in
a different series of standards, develops when
one considers the possibility of a single or
occasional intake of radioactive material
during a lifetime, and where little or no other
exposure to radiation has been received. For
these circumstances, very much _ larger
quantities of radioactive material may be
taken into the body without serious harm.
For situations of this nature, it is possible to
group the radioactive elements into four
categories that are representative of their
single-dose hazard. The elements may be
placed in these categories depending on the
amount of safe single dose of say 1, 10, 100,
or 1,000 microcuries (15).
This has also been found to be a conven-
ient grouping for legislative purposes. Since
there is obviously little point in trying to
control and regulate a quantity of radio-
active material that is not harmful if taken
in its entirety, there is no reason why it
should not be exempted from control. Un-
restricted use of the established quantities
should be allowed in accordance with the
groupings just mentioned.
Standards necessary for the control of the
disposal of radioactive wastes, present still
a different problem. Having once decided
what would be a safe permissible concen-
tration in air and water, the next problem is
to determine the conditions under which
such concentrations may occur, in situations
where the air or water may be taken into the
human system.
An additional complication arises, because
of the possibility that radioactive wastes may
by some means or another enter into our
74 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
food chain. For example, radioactive wastes
discharged into the air or river may be taken
up and concentrated by animal or plant life
and eventually get back into the human
system by way of the food supply. In spite
of the extensive studies made of this prob-
lem, it is still necessary to provide very sub-
stantial safety factors with regard to the
permissible amounts of radioactive material
that may be discharged into the public do-
main. It must also be borne in mind that
once radioactive material has been dumped
outside of a controlled area, its future from
there on is largely beyond the control of man.
To allow for such uncertainties, permissible
concentrations of radioactive wastes are not
allowed to exceed 149 of those allowed for
continuous occupational exposure (/5, 16).
This probably represents a very conserva-
tive standard of protection, except under
the most exceptional circumstances. It is, of
course, the single exceptional circumstance
that dictates caution.
Additionally, for regulatory purposes it
is necessary to establish standards of con-
tamination that will apply under conditions
that can be subject both to the control of the
user and to inspection by an_ enforcing
agency. This may at times lead to seemingly
harsh requirements but from a legal or regu-
latory point of view, one does not see any
easy way of avoiding the situation.
For example, in one early proposed regula-
tion it was specified that the radiation level
at any point outside of an installation could
not exceed 30 milliroentgens per week, or
lo of the level that is allowed for continous
occupational exposure for 25 years of a per-
son’s hfetime. The argument here is reason-
able to the extent that the point of discharge
is the last point at which the installation can
control its discharge. Once the material is
outside the installation, it is beyond their
control and probably even beyond the ability
of an inspection agency to evaluate. The
possibility exists, however remotely, that
by some quirk the material may become
dangerously concentrated at some point in
the chain of events leading to human con-
sumption.
It is for such reasons that standards for
radioactive contamination in uncontrolled
areas, namely the public domain, must not
be allowed to exceed 149 the maximum per-
vou. 46, No. 3°
missible amounts for continuous exposure.
This applies particularly to situations where
large population groups may be exposed to
radioactive contamination under conditions
which are completely and totally beyond
their control (or for that matter any control).
The situation is somewhat ameliorated in the
recommendations of the National Com-
mittee on Radiation Protection by allowing
such population exposures to be integrated
over a year instead of a week (6, 74).
Thus far the discussion has covered a
whole series of standards for radiation pro-
tection, namely, protection of the whole body
or parts of the body from external radiation
sources, protection for occupational workers,
continuing exposure to radiation either in-
ternally or externally, protection of individ-
uals against large single interna! doses of
radiation, protection of large populations,
standards for animal and vegetable life, for
persons over 45 and under 45 years of age,
for persons under 18 years of age, and for
pregnant women. It is very clear from this
sketchy outline that the problem is not a
simple one and it is further clear that the
standards discussed here must be subject to
change—and probably frequent change. Ra-
diation is unquestionably here to stay with
us, and it is important that we learn how to
use it under conditions which are both safe
and economical. The price for unnecessary
safety is high, but this is the price that will
have to be paid until the problem is better
understood.
There is however, one large outstanding
problem in standards of radiation protection.
that has only been touched upon, namely,
the genetic problem and the exposure of
large population groups. This problem di-
rectly influences our whole philosophy with
regard to radiation protection, in that the
genetic effects of low-level exposures of a
large fraction of the population may be the
prime determining factor in deciding upon
the permissible dose for all persons. As al-
ready indicated, the chief consideration up
to this point has been in deciding upon the
maximum permissible dose of radiation to
the individual.
The current maximum level of permissible
exposure for the individual rests on the
philosophy that exposure at this level
throughout his adult lifetime is believed un-
Marcy 1956
likely to cause him detectable bodily injury
at any time during his lifetime. Based on
this major premise, the present permissible
exposure levels are acceptable both from the
plant and the individual’s viewpoint. They
do not appear to involve an unreasonable
working risk. Such levels are, however, also
based on the additional premise that only a
small portion of the world population will be
so exposed up to the close of the reproductive
lifetime of any individual.
On the other hand, where large population
groups may be exposed, the preservation
of the genetic balance of the population may
require that the exposure per individual,
averaged over the whole population, be lim-
ited to only a very small fraction of the indi-
vidual occupational exposure. Up to the pres-
ent, most of the pertinent data is from animal
rather than human experiment, yet we are
forced to tentatively accept the animal data
and apply it to man.
For purposes of discussion, consider Mul-
ler’s statement that an exposure of 80 roent-
gens to the gonads would double the natural
mutation rate and that such exposure re-
peated generation after generation might
seriously upset the genetic equilibrium (7).
Presumably this would be genetically un-
acceptable in view of the doubly-heavy
genetic load thrust upon the unexposed
population, and in view of the present trends
in reproductive practices. Muller suggests a
maxilum exposure per individual per repro-
ductive lifetime of 20 roentgens, again aver-
aged over the whole population. This would
result in an increase in the mutation rate of
only 25 percent. Other authorities have
arrived at figures as low as 3 roentgens as a
permissible average ‘‘lifetime’’ exposure.
Either figure is much lower than the pres-
ently accepted individual occupational ex-
posure limit which may be as high as about
400 roentgens in a lifetime.
If we are to adhere to the 20 roentgens
averaged for the whole population, not more
than 5 percent of the people could be per-
mitted to receive a full occupational exposure
of 400 roentgens to the gonads. For the
United States this would be some eight mil-
lion persons—a figure unlikely to be attained
for many years to come. One should also
consider that most radiation workers do not
receive exposures over periods as long as 25
TAYLOR: RADIATION PROTECTION 75
years, and that in fact only a very small num-
ber receive more than about one-third of the
permissible exposure. On the other hand,
there must be added to this, the medical and
diagnostic exposures wherein radiation may
reach the gonads.
Before facing the problem of determining
how much additional radiation may be re-
ceived by nonoccupational population
groups, it is essential to make a careful evalu-
ation of existing exposure patterns. Since the
prime consideration will be genetic effects,
such exposure evaluation should be limited
to the gonads of persons before the close of
their reproductive lifetime.
Concurrent with such a study should be
certain sociological investigations. Repro-
duction habits will play an important role,
and these will vary markedly depending
upon such factors as race, education, inbreed-
ing within certain geographic limits, etc. In
averaging the exposure of population groups,
erroneous results might be obtained by equal
weighting of, say, the population of New
York City and the population of the rest of
the state, of which a considerable portion is
rural.
Since the size, distribution, and nature of
a population group may influence the pat-
tern of crossbreeding, it may be worthwhile,
even within a single country such as the
United States, to consider very different
average expcsures for different parts of the
country. Such differentiation might present
almost impossible administrative problems
because of population movements, yet there
are relatively large and different population
groups between which crossbreeding is neg-
ligible. This same consideration, however,
will be likely to necessitate lowering of av-
erage exposures 1n some areas where inbreed-
ing is high within a population group that
remains somewhat static in location. There
will undoubtedly be special problems of this
sort in certain areas and it might be worth-
while to treat them specially, rather than
inflict unnecessarily low permissible expo-
sures over the country as a whole. Analysis
of individual situations, while costly to per-
form, may nevertheless be sound economy
in the end.
We have to face the high probability of an
enormous growth im the uses of nuclear
energy. It is doubtful whether anyone can
76 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
accurately predict this for the next 20 or
100 years. Looking backward, the enormous
changes in our civilization brought about by
technological advances in the past four or
five generations, indicate the futility of
planning ahead in detail for a similar range
of time. This does not imply, however, that
we should stand passively by and let nature
take its course. There is much that can be
done in preparation for the future.
As the invention of the internal combus-
tion engine revolutionized the world’s econ-
omy, so may we expect controlled nuclear
energy’ to do so again. The engine has
brought vast improvements into our material
way of life. One wonders, had it been antici-
pated in 1910 that the engine would be re-
sponsible in less than half a century for the
deaths of over a million people on United
States highways alone, if there would have
been a hue and ery to curtail its further use.
In spite of the fact that we somehow accept
this carnage, we might have been able to hold
it down had the problem been attacked while
automobiles were in their infancy. But who
in 1910 could have predicted today’s auto-
mobile industry?
With nuclear energy the situation is even
more complicated—and vastly different. We
know a great deal about its potential hazards
and to some extent how to cope with them.
In addition, we have some time in which to
solve the special problems. However rapid
the growth in the use of nuclear energy, there
is still some leeway that will allow us to pro-
ceed with technological developments before
we outrun our practical limits in the methods
of protection. The greatest and most serious
limitation is that imposed upon us by genetic
considerations. Our most substantial advan-
ces in knowledge of genetics have been with-
in the past two or three decades—a very short
time. The results of this knowledge have been
a major consideration in the discussions lead-
ing to our present concepts of permissible
dose, yet we have avoided any attempts to
rigorously define the genetic limitations. (It
is presumed that, to be safe, the geneticists,
from whom we get our information, assume
the most pessimistic conditions.)
At some time, but probably not within
the immediate future, man will be faced with
making an inescapable decision. At what
point may the advantages of atomic energy
VoL. 46, No. 3 "
be offset by the disadvantages to the future
man? And who will have the abundant wis-
dom to recognize that pomt and do some-
thing about it? Will it be known, in time for
such a decision, just what radiation may do
to man’s future? I believe that at some point
a decision involving an educated gamble with
man’s future will have to be made, and
history of the past indicates that such a de-
cision may be made on the less—rather than
the more—conservative side. That decision
does not need to be made tomorrow or prob-
ably for some years. In the meantime, our
present pace can be continued with relatively:
little risk. But in that same meantime, wei
should start to condition our thinking for a
change in philosophy with regard to radia-
tion exposure. On the basis of today’s knowl-'
edge of ourselves, we may be expected to
show a willingness to accept more rather than
less radiation exposure insofar as its effects
10 or 20 generations hence may be felt.
In this same time, we should also devote
our every energy to keeping radiation expo-
sure of persons to the minimum compatible
with reasonable progress and good sense.
Through education and the dissemination of
wisely chosen information, much can be done
to improve the present situation in matters
of radiation protection, without at the same
time fettering a source of great benefit to
mankind. The better the ordinary job of pro-
tection is done today, the longer is the fate-
ful decision on man’s future postponed.
REFERENCES
(1) Stonn, R. 8. The concept of a maximum per-
missible exposure. Radiology 58: 639-661.
1952.
(2) Stonrn, R. 8S. Paper No. 89, Proceedings of
the International Conference on Peaceful
Uses of Atomic Energy. 1955.
(3) Kays, G. W. C. Roentgenology. New York,
1928.
(4) Taytor, Lauriston 8. Education in radiation
protection. Amer. Journ. Roentgenology,
Radium Therapy and Nuclear Med. 73
(2). Feb. 1955.
(5) Recommendations of International Commission
on X-ray and Radium Protection. 1928.
(6) Permissible dose from external sources of
ionizing radiation. NBS Handbook 59.
(7) Barcuay, A. E., and Cox, 8. Radiation risks
of the roentgenologist; attempt to measure
quantity of roentgen rays used in diagnosis
and to assess dangers. Amer. Journ. Roent-
genol. and Rad. Therapy 19: 551-561. 1928.
MARCH 1956
(8) MurscHEetier, A. Physical standards of pro-
tection against roentgen-ray dangers. Amer.
Journ. Roentgenol. and Rad. Therapy 13:
65-70. 1925.
(9) Srevert, R. M. Hinig Untersuchungen viber
Vorrichtungen zum schutz gegen Réntgen-
strahlen. Acta Radiol. 4: 51-75, 1925.
(10) Guockrer, R., and Kaupp, E. Uber den
Strahlenschultz und die Toleranzdoses.
Strahlentherapie 20: 144-152. 1925.
(11) GuasseR, Quimspy, TaYLor, and WEATHER-
wax. Physical foundations of radiology,
ed. 2, table 44, p. 407. New York, 1952.
(12) International recommendations for X-ray and
radium protection. Radiology 23: 682. 1934.
PANORAMIC X-RAY MACHINE 17
(13) X-Ray protection. NBS Handbook 20.
(14) Maximum permissible amounts of radio-
isotopes in the human body and maximum
permissible concentrations in air and water.
NBS Handbook 52.
(15) The regulation of radiation exposure by legisla-
tive means. NBS Handbook 61.
(16) Recommendations of the International Com-
mission on Radiation Protection, 1953.
Supplement No. 6, British Journ. Radi-
ology. 1955.
(17) Muuumr, H. J. The manner of dependence of the
“nermissible dose’’ of radiation on the
amount of genetic damage. Acta Radiol. 41:
6-20. 1954.
a
NBS-AF PANORAMIC X-RAY MACHINE
Research at the National Bureau of Standards
has produced an X-ray machine that rapidly
takes a single panoramic X-ray picture of the
entire dental arch. Developed by the Bureau in
cooperation with the U. S. Air Force Dental
Service and the USAF School of Aviation Medi-
cine, the panoramic X-ray machine should be
particularly useful to the armed forces in making
full-mouth dental X-ray surveys of inductees on
entering and leaving the service. It will save much
of the time required by present techniques, in
which up to 14 small films are exposed separately
for a full-mouth survey. The device should find
application wherever large numbers of people
are examined for dental defects, and its principles
can be applied to radiography of other parts of
the body.
In the NBS-AF panoramic machine, the film
is placed outside the patient’s mouth and is
exposed by passing a narrow beam of X-rays
through his head from the rear. A panoramic
X-ray picture of all the teeth and associated struc-
tures is obtained on a single 5 x 10-inch film in
about 40 seconds. Thus the problem of handling
many small film packets during exposure and
processing is eliminated. At the same time more
comprehensive radiographs are produced, giving
more general diagnostic information than do
conventional full-mouth X-ray surveys.
For several years investigators in both the
United States! and Finland? have been seeking
to develop a rapid, practicable method for making
1U.S8. Patent 2476776, issued to H. Smathers.
2 Panographic radiography, by R. J. NELSEN
and J. W. Kumputa, Journ. Dent. Res. 31: 158.
April 1952.
3 Pantomography in theory and use, by Y. V.
PaaTEerRO, Acta Radiologica 41: 321. 1954.
panoramic X-rays of the entire dental arch.
However, the procedures that have been tried
have been rather cumbersome—they required
rotation of the patient or fitting films inside the
mouth. Because of the large number of full-
mouth surveys that must be made of: military
personnel, particularly at induction stations, a
rapid, dependable method was needed to replace
conventional radiographic techniques. Funds for
research in this field were therefore provided by
the Air Force. As a result, a more flexible and
simple panoramic machine was developed by Col.
D. C. Hudson, NBS guest worker from the
U. S. Air Force Dental Service, and J. W.
Kumpula of the Bureau staff, with the. coopera-
tion of members of the NBS electronic instru-
mentation laboratory.
In this machine, an X-ray source and film
holding device follow semicircular paths on op-
posite sides of the patient’s head. The film holder
travels in front of the patient, the X-ray: source
behind him. Movement of source and film is so
coordinated that only those structures of the
dental arch desired in the finished film are sharply
projected while other overlying structures are not.
The X-ray source and film holder are sus-
pended from opposite ends of a horizontal arm
that rotates about a central vertical axis. A
narrow beam of X-rays emerges from a slit in
the exit cone of the X-ray source, passes through
the subject’s head, and enters a corresponding
slit in the film holder just beyond his teeth.
Meanwhile, the film, in a carrier within the
holder, travels horizontally in a direction opposite
to that of the holder and at such a rate that an
X-ray shadow of each successive tooth falls on
successive areas of the film.
78 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
re
VOL. 46, NO. 3
Fig. 1.—Typical X-ray photograph of the human dental arch produced by the NBS-AF panoramic
X-ray machine. Parts of the nasal sinuses and other bony structures of the head can also be observed.
This radiograph was made on a wax phantom head. The strip in the center normally carries the patient’s
name and date.
To avoid unwanted X-ray shadows from
overlying bony structures, the X-ray beam is
made to enter the patient’s head largely through
the soft tissue between the vertebral column and
the bone of the jaw—frst from one side, the
from the other. As the system rotates, the axis of
rotation of the X-ray beam is in this soft tissue,
which is much more transparent to X-rays than
are the harder structures. Thus, since the X-ray
beam is in constant motion, shadows cast by
intervening bone and other tissue between the
point of entry and the dental arch move across
the film too rapidly to obscure detail in the ex-
posure. Asa result, clearer lateral jaw radiographs
can be obtained than with conventional
techniques.
A simple mechanical system automatically
varies the rate of film travel to conform to the
size and shape of the human dental arch. This
device consists of a cable wound about a cam
which is curved in the shape of an average dental
arch. The free ends of the cable are connected
through pulleys to the film carrier. As the hori-
zontal arm rotates at constant speed, the film
moves at a rate determined by the curvature of
the cam surface at the point where the cable is
leaving the cam. The cam is fixed at the axis of
rotation, while an electric motor rotates the arm
supporting the X-ray source and film holder. A
central panel controls the motor as well as X-ray
voltage and current.
The first model of the panoramic X-ray ma-
chine is now undergoing performance studies.
In this model the patient sits in a dental chair
beneath the rotating arm and is positioned by
means of a chin support pivoted from a stationary
point on the machine. The chin support serves to
steady the head and to place the dental struc-
tures in the proper position for best projection
onto the moving film. Future models may be so
constructed that the subject need not sit but
may be radiographed in a standing position.
This will further reduce the time needed for a
dental survey.
With the cooperation of the Naval Medical
Research Institute, a study’ was made of the
radiation levels produced by the panoramic
X-ray machine at points in and about a phantom
head constructed of tissue-equivalent wax molded
upon an adult human skull. By the use of small
ionization chambers—about 30 mm®* in volume—
it was found that the panoramic device produces
lower radiation levels than the conventional 14-
film intraoral technique
sponding points. The reduction in radiation
received by the patient is due to the small area
produces at corre-
covered by the beam of X-rays during panoramic
exposure and the fact that no overlapping occurs.
4 Ionization chambers for radiation data during
dental x-ray exposure, by D.C. Hupson and J. W.
Kumputa, Armed Forces Med. Journ. 6: 11381.
August 1955.
Marcu 1956
ROSEN: SPACE FLIGHT 79
ENGINEERING.—The influence of space flight on engineering and science.! MILTON
W. Rosen, Naval Research Laboratory. (Communicated by C. H. Page.)
Within the past few years many scientists
have predicted seriously and confidently that
human beings from the earth would, in the
foreseeable future, travel to the moon and
the nearer planets. The ranks of those who
would dispute this prospect are diminishing
rapidly. Although much of the progress is
still guarded by military necessity, space
flight is emerging as an activity in its own
right—one that can command the efforts of
many engineers and scientists.
Tn the United States the exploration of the
upper atmosphere, the frontier to space, is a
vigorous and continuing activity. Pilots of
rocket aircraft have experienced conditions
approximating those in free space, if only for
afew minutes. The effect of space flight upon
the human organism is being investigated—
the U.S. Air Force maintains a Department
of Space Medicine.
There is an international organization de-
voted to the promotion of space travel and
there are space flight societies in 23 countries.
Numerous journals exist wholly or in part
for the publication of papers on astronautics
and its allied fields—notable among these
for the quality of its articles is the Journal
of the British Interplanetary Society.
I shall try here to explain how the present
state of affairs came about and also to fore-
cast what might be the future influence of
man’s effort to travel in outer space.
The ancients, except for a few rare indi-
viduals with greater insight, conceived of the
world as an enclosure; they stood upon the
earth at the bottom and gazed upward at
a blue ceiling upon which a multitude of
lights, a few great and many small, seemed
to move under the influence of an unseen
hand. The atmosphere filled this enclosure
and it was believed that if man had wings
he could fly to the ceiling and determine
the source of the lights. If a few philosophers
guessed more nearly at the truth, certainly
the average man had no better conception
of the universe than the fanciful picture just
described. There could be no valid idea of
1A lecture delivered before the Washington
Society of Engineers, November 16, 1955.
space flight until Copernicus, Kepler, and
Galileo placed the earth in its true relation
to the universe and at the same time gave
dimensions to space.
When at last the moon and the planets
were found to be material bodies not unlike
our earth, it was possible to ponder whether
the immense separating distances could be
traversed by man or any man-made device.
The situation was made even more discour-
aging when, in 1686, Newton (7) defined
the nature and the magnitude of gravita-
tional attraction. If previously there had
been some fanciful hope of visiting celestial
bodies, now surely it appeared that man
was destined to remain forever a prisoner
of his own planet. In view of the great dis-
tances, it seemed unlikely that the atmos-
phere could extend through interplanetary
space, and any suspicion that it might was
laid to rest when Torricelli’s barometer was
carried to a mountaintop and taken aloft
by the early balloonists.
Although Newton brought man face-to-
face with one formidable aspect of the prob-
lem, namely gravity, he also provided, in
his three laws of motion, the key that would
unlock the door to space. The fundamental
equation of rocket action in free space and
hence of space flight:
M
Va = Cs om, 5
4 Bie
where V = velocity of rocket at end of
burning
C = velocity of exhaust jet
M, = initial mass of rocket
M, = mass of rocket at end of burn-
ing
is derived by integrating Newton’s third law
of motion. Nevertheless, more than two
centuries would pass before anyone per-
formed the integration or realized that the
simplest embodiment of Newton's third
law, a rocket, is the only machine capable
of propelling itself im a vacuum.
While science gave no solution, and, in-
deed, many scientists despaired of finding
one, the dream of travel to celestial bodies
80 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
was kept alive in fiction. One of the earlier
references to rockets for propelling a space
ship is found in the writings of Cyrano de
Bergerac (2), but it is doubtful that Cyrano
understood the rocket’s essential role. Per-
haps the most famous novel about space
travel is Jules Verne’s From the Earth to
the Moon (3). Although Verne had expert sci-
entific advice, he chose an impossible means
of projecting his space ship—it was fired
from a long cannon sunk in the ground.
Probably Verne knew that no human could
survive the acceleration of his projectile and
that the projectile itself would disintegrate
under the tremendous forces imparted to it.
Yet, millions of readers believed his story;
many thought it had actually been accom-
plished—so great was his art—and he
created a myth that had to be destroyed
before any scientific progress could be
achieved. In his novel The first men in the
moon H. G. Wells (4) felt no necessity for
scientific rigor, and he conjured up a grav-
ity-defying substance which he called “‘cayv-
Ona
By the beginning of the twentieth century
the physical sciences had advanced to the
point where it was inevitable that someone
would develop a valid theory of rocket ac-
tion and would apply the theory to the
problem of escape from the earth. The task
was accomplished by three men working
independently in three different countries.
The three had much in common—they were
teachers, one at a small university, the other
two in secondary schools.? Hach one pon-
dered the problem for many years before
committing his findings to publication. But
what is most important, all three were mo-
tivated by the desire to explore interplane-
tary space and presented their findings with
conviction, even though they were regarded
by most of their contemporaries as prophetic
dreamers. The men and their works are now
well known. They are:
ZIoLKOVSKY—The exploration of cosmic space by
reaction machines, 1903.
Gopparp—A method of reaching extreme alti-
tudes, 1919.
OxsEertH—The rocket into interplanetary space,
1923.
2One, Oberth, became a teacher after his
fundamental work had been completed.
VOL. 46, No. 3
Any one of these three publications, had it
been widely read and accepted, would have
sufficed to lay the groundwork for space
travel, because each man clearly understood
and asserted the following fundamental
concepts:
1. That escape from the earth is possible
by the application of a moderate accelera-
tion over a substantial period of time—at
least several minutes.
2. That such acceleration can be pro-
duced in a vacuum by a rocket.
3. That the rocket must (a) have high
thermal efficiency (i.e., high velocity of the
ejected matter) and (b) consist mainly of
propellant material (i.e. have a high ratio
of fuel weight to total weight).
4. That high thermal efficiency would be
obtained most readily from the chemical
combustion of liquid fuels.
Ziolkovsky (5) started by examining Jules
Verne’s cannon and also the balloon as a
means of reaching very high altitudes. Both
approaches died quickly under mathemati-
cal analysis. He proceeded next to the
rocket and developed the fundamental
equation previously noted. Realizing that
energetic fuels were required, he determined
from thermochemical] calculations the heat
release of various liquid combinations. When
he computed the velocity that could be at-
tained, in theory at least, he realized it
was sufficient for escape from the earth.
Goddard (6), alone of the three, pro-
ceeded from experiment to theory. Using
smokeless powder in a heavy-walled steel
combustion chamber he produced a_ jeu
velocity of almost 8,000 feet per second,
a sevenfold improvement over ordinary
rockets and the highest velocity of matter
attained up to that time outside of electrical
discharge tubes. Also, he proved by tests in
a vacuum that a rocket does not produce
its force by pushing on the air behind it,
a fact he knew from basic physics, but that
he felt had to be demonstrated. He observed
correctly that the jet velocity was greater
in a vacuum, but he attributed it errone-
ously to more efficient ignition. Although
Goddard did not turn to liquid fuels until
after his basic paper was published, he
achieved the first flight of a liquid rocket,
an event that took place on March 16
Marcu 1956 ROSEN:
1926. Goddard (7) continued his experi-
ments for more than two decades during
which time he developed, in rudimentary
form, almost every component of modern
rocketry. Not one of his components would
be considered reliable by present-day stand-
ards; realizing the prodigious task he had
set out to accomplish, he would repeatedly
add a new component before perfecting the
previous one. In retrospect, it appears that
Goddard was attempting, single-handed, to
encompass the entire field of liquid-rocket
development, a task that would eventually
tax the abilities of thousands of engineers
and scientists.
Oberth (8), in his treatise, gave the most
complete theoretical analysis and carried it
farther into the realm of space travel than
either of the others. He stated at the outset
the four propositions he would attempt to
prove:
1. Considering the present state of science
and technology, it is possible to build ma-
chines that could rise beyond the atmos-
phere.
2. After further development these ma-
chines will be able to attain such velocities
that, left undisturbed in the depths of outer
space, they will not fall back to the earth
and will even be able to leave the zone of
terrestrial attraction.
3. These machines could be constructed
so as to transport human beings, probably
without damage to their health.
4. Under certain economic conditions the
construction of such machines might be
profitable.
Oberth began by developing the theory
of the liquid-rocket and describing its con-
struction. He proceeded to discuss applica-
tions of the rocket, first as a high-altitude
sounding vehicle, then as an earth satellite,
and finally as a space-ship for interplane-
tary travel. He developed the concept. of
synergic (minimum energy) ascent trajec-
tories. Without doubt, almost every later
book on space flight owes much to Oberth’s
encompassing study.
Whereas the first quarter of this century
provided the theoretical background for
space flight, the second 25 years may be
viewed as the period of experimental prepa-
ration. It saw the liquid-fueled rocket de-
SPACE FLIGHT 81
velop as a practical engine for the propulsion
of aircraft and guided missiles. Many fuels
and oxidizers were explored—a few saw
widespread use. An assortment of auxiliary
hardware—pumps, turbines, valves, and
regulators—was developed to feed and con-
trol the rocket motor. The steering of a
large rocket vehicle was mastered by means
of gyroscopes and jet controls. Great prog-
ress was made in the aerodynamics of
supersonic flight, in structural design, and
in the use of high temperature materials.
Of the early experimenters three groups
were most noteworthy. The work of God-
dard as an individual has been referred to
previously. In Germany the Verein fiir
Raumschiffahrt, fired by Oberth’s monu-
mental work, undertook to develop a small
workable rocket called, appropriately, mini-
mum-rakete (Mirak—for short) (9). In the
course of several years they made hundreds
of static firings and numerous brief flights.
The American Interplanetary Society drew
its inspiration largely from abroad, so se-
cretive was Goddard about his experiments.
Indeed, when in May 1933, the Society fi-
nally achieved a first liquid-rocket flight,
they were unaware that Goddard had pro-
gressed far beyond his first flight seven
years before. It is unfortunate that the
British Interplanetary Society was pre-
vented from experimenting with rockets,
a situation frequently lamented by its
founder, Philip Cleator (10).
The V-2, whose development started in
the middle of this period, was the largest
single engineering advance in the field of
rocketry. By applying thousands of engi-
neers and scientists in a concerted effort,
the German government was able in six
years to transform the liquid-fueled rocket
from a small, sputtering vehicle, capable of
ascending a few hundred feet, into a giant
projectile with a range of 200 miles and a
velocity of one mile per second. The V-2
was a material embodiment of Oberth’s ideas
and, although he conceived the liquid rocket
as a vehicle for space travel, he also foresaw
its possible use as a bombardment weapon.
Actually, he hoped that the rocket missile
would be a deterrent to rather than a tool
of war.
After the war the major activity leading
82 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
to space flight took place in the United
States in the form of upper-air research with
instruments carried in rockets. In a con-
tinuing program, scientists from govern-
ment laboratories and universities explored
the upper atmosphere using at first captured
V-2 rockets and later, as they became avail-
able, Aerobees and Vikings. Both Viking
and Aerobee were designed specifically for
probing the atmosphere in the region be-
tween 50 and 150 miles above the earth. A
few of the more important accomplishments
of this program are noted. Knowledge of
the pressure, temperature, density, and ionic
content of the atmosphere has been extended
up to 135 miles by direct measurements.
The solar spectrum has been recorded in
the far ultraviolet. X-rays have been de-
tected in solar radiation and their role in
the formation of the ionosphere has been
postulated. The number and the mass dis-
tribution of primary cosmic rays have been
recorded in emulsions carried aloft in rock-
ets. Small animals, monkeys and mice, were
sent aloft and their physiological reactions
observed during a period of weightlessness.
For nine years man had been exploring the
frontier of space as a prelude to flight be-
yond the atmosphere.
It is always tempting to draw parallels
and it might appear, at first glance, that
the advance toward space flight parallels
the progress of aviation, with the latter pre-
ceding in time. The same elements of prog-
ress are evident in both fields, but one can
not fail to note the differences and contrasts.
Although much theoretical work had been
done on fluid mechanics and experiments
performed in wind tunnels and with gliders,
there was at the time of the first mechanical
flight no adequate theory to explain the lift
of a winged vehicle (/7). We knew that the
Wright brothers’ plane flew, but we could
not explain why or how it flew. By con-
trast, the motion of a rocket, as we have
seen before, was well understood before
Goddard’s first flight attempt. This is no
paradox—it is apparent that the mathe-
matical treatment of flight within the at-
mosphere is much more difficult than the
analysis of flight in free space.
In both fields there was a period when
development was nourished mainly by ama-
VOL. 46, No. 3
teurs; In aviation it was the first decade of
this century, for rocketry the late twenties
and early thirties. In both cases the advance
was given great impetus by a war; the first
World War for aviation, the second for
rocketry. But I doubt if there is in the his-
tory of aviation any single step forward
comparable in magnitude to the creation of
the V-2. Aviation has been characterized by
gradual, steady development, fostered to a
large extent by its economic returns as well
as its military advantages. There have been
several significant milestones; one of the
most noteworthy was the development by
Major Whittle and others of the turbojet
engine, which in the short space of a dozen
years has completely displaced the piston-
driven propeller in high speed military air-
craft and may soon dominate the field of
commercial aviation.
In pursuing this rather loose parallelism
I have tried to estimate what period in the
history of aviation corresponds to the pres-
ent status of space flight. It seems to me
that we are now at a point roughly corre-
sponding to the period before Lindbergh’s
historic flight across the Atlantic. The sig-
nificant event we are awaiting is the first
orbital fight of a manned earth satellite.
In both cases, at the time being considered,
the vehicle had been developed to a reason-
able degree of reliability and many flights
of shorter range and duration had been
made. But again, there is a significant dif-
ference. Aviation has always implied manned
flight—in rocketry most of the progress
thus far has been made in unmanned, auto-
matically-controlled vehicles. Our technol-
ogy has advanced to the point where we
need not risk human life in experimental
rocket-flights—on the road to space, instru-
ments will always go first and will point the
way for men to follow.
Prior to establishing the first manned
satellite two important techniques will have
to be mastered. First, there will be a period
of experimentation with unmanned, instru-
mented satellites during which time prob-
lems of propulsion, staging, and navigational
control will be worked out. The environ-
mental hazards—cosmic radiation, meteors,
solar heat (and the absence of it), and
possibly weightlessness—can be evaluated.
Marcu 1956 ROSEN:
Worldwide realization that this first prob-
lem is being attacked vigorously came
when, on July 29, 1955, President Eisen-
hower announced that the United States
would launch small instrumented satellites
during the International Geophysical Year
(1957-1958). By their statements in sup-
port of the President’s announcement, many
noted scientists attested to the feasibility
SPACE FLIGHT 83
technology necessary to achieve manned
flight in space and those required to exploit
it can be readily delineated. But a more
important result will, I believe, be the im-
pact of space flight upon scientific thought
and education.
In America today we are faced with a
serious shortage of engineers and scientists
even though the demand is great and the
, 0 3 49 ; ‘
and usefulness of the instrumented satellite..S\‘temuneration 1s ample, Almost every pro-
It is significant, also, that the United States spective technical graduate of our univer-
invited international cooperation and offered
to make its scientific findings available to
all nations.
The second problem is the one of safe
return to the earth’s surface. The relative
speed of roughly five miles per second be-
tween the orbiting vehicle and the earth’s
surface must be brought to zero. Obviously,
this will be done by allowing the satellite to
transfer its energy to the atmosphere. But
this process must be controlled with great
precision, lest the satellite absorb too much
of the energy in the form of heat. Much
will be learned by observing the return of
instrumented satellites, but the final pre-
paratory steps will probably involve manned
flights at gradually increasing re-entry
speeds.
I have placed Lindbergh’s flight and the
first manned satellite in juxtaposition be-
cause one has and the other will, I believe,
so excite the world’s imagination that fu-
ture progress will be greatly accelerated.
One can not say when the desired event will
take place—much hard work remains to be
done—but it is not uncommon for scientific
sities is showered with offers of employ-
ment and our newspapers and magazines
are filled with advertisements for men with
technical training. The most appalling as-
pect of this situation is that it is likely to
continue for many years. A recent survey
shows that the study of physics in our pub-
lic high schools has been declining for more
than half a century. Whereas in 1895 more
than 95 percent of high-school graduates
had taken a course in physies, by 1952 only
21 percent of graduates had ever studied it
(72). For many years the increase in high-
school enrollment more than offset the de-
crease of specialization in physics, but now
the waning interest 1s taking its toll. Today
only about half of the public schools offer
a course in physics, and a quarter of these
have no laboratory facilities. There is a
critical shortage of science teachers, due in
part to the attractions of industry, but more
so to the lower status and wages accorded
the teaching profession. But these factors
can be remedied with sufficient effort—a
deeper and more serious cause is the lack of
interest on the part of our youth. Why do
achievements to precede their predicted ar- they turn away from a career in science?
rival. The mechanical components, engines’
of sufficient power and controls of requisite
precision, are within sight. If it is argued
that the human hazards are great and, at
present, poorly understood, let it be remem-
bered that the first orbital flight need only
be brief—a matter of several hours. In this
respect the ordeal may be less prolonged
than Lindbergh’s flight, but certainly no less
demanding upon the pilot’s judgment and
courage.
We have seen that although space flight
is yet to be achieved, its prospect has had,
in the last fifty years, an appreciable influ-
ence upon science. The greater influence by
far hes in the future. The advances in our
We can only grope for the answer. Perhaps
they sense, better than their elders, that
too much of our scientific talent is engaged
in the unproductive task of developing
weapons for war. Is there much inspiration
to devote one’s life to this end, especially
when we are rapidly approaching the bor-
derline of total destruction?
I believe that space flight might serve in
no small measure to turn men’s minds to-
ward a more appealing scientific goal. As
the exploits of Cabot, Drake, and Davis
inspired many generations of Englishmen to
turn to the sea, so may the first astronauts
reawaken our youth to the romance of sci-
entific exploration.
84 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 46, No. 3
REFERENCES
(1) Newton, Issac. Philosophiae .naturalis (7) Gopparp, R. H. Rocket development. New
principia mathematica. 1687. York, 1948.
(2) Cyrano DE Berrcerac. Voyage dans la (8) OBpertTH, H. Wege 2ztir Ramuschiffahrt.
lune. 1649. 1929.
(3) VeRNE, JuLEs. De la terre a la lune. 1865.
(4) Wetus, H. G. The first men in the moon.
1901.
(5) ZiouKovsky, K. E. Collected Works. 1938.
(6) Gopparp, R. H. A Method of Reaching
Extreme Altitudes. Smithsonian Miscel-
laneous Collections. 1919.
(9) Ley, W. Rockets, missiles, and space travel.
New York, 1951.
(10) Curator, P. E. Into space.
(11) von KArmdn, T. Aerodynamics.
University, 1954.
(12) Ketuy, W. C. Physics in the public high
schools. Physics Today, March 1955.
London, 1953.
Cornell
a
NATIONAL ACADEMY MEDAL AWARDED TO DR. WATTS
The James Craig Watson Medal of the Na-
tional Academy of Sciences has been awarded to
Dr. Chester B. Watts (WAS), of the United
States Naval Observatory, in recognition of his
outstanding contributions to astronomical re-
search. The Medal will be presented to Dr. Watts
during the Annual Meeting of the Academy to be
held in Washington, April 23-25, 1956.
Dr. Watts, who is director of the Six-Inch
Transit Circle Division of the Naval Observatory,
has been engaged during the greater part of his
45 years at the Observatory in determining po-
sitions of the sun, moon, planets, and stars. Such
measurements provide the basic data for the
study of the motions of celestial bodies both
within the outside the solar system. Since 1934
Dr. Watts has been chiefly responsible for the
Six-Inch Transit Circle. With a judicious com-
bination of mechanical, optical, photographic and
electronic techniques, he has brought the instru-
ment to a higher state of perfection than any
other of its kind. He recently designed and super-
vised the construction of a new Nine-Inch
Transit Circle at the Observatory. In spite of his
skill in perfecting his instruments, Dr. Watts re-
mained dissatisfied with the precision of his
measurements, which are based on observations
of the edge of the moon’s disk. The edge that we
see is always irregular because of the high moun-
tains and low valleys on the moon’s surface. Also,
a slightly different aspect of the edge of the moon
is seen from time to time. These factors have
limited the precision with which measurements
could be made. About 11 years ago, Dr. Watts
undertook to survey that part of the moon’s
surface (comprising some 18 percent) that pre-
sents itself on the edge of the moon, and to make
this survey of a surface some quarter of a million
miles away accurate to within about 50 feet. His
survey is now virtually complete. The work re-
quired some thousands photographs of the moon,
the invention and construction of an automatic
photoelectric machine for tracing the profile of
each photograph and drawing it on a strip of
paper 30 feet long, the design and construction
of analogue computers for analyzing the profiles
and translating them into numerical form, the
devising of means for integrating the profiles into
a representation of the surface of the moon in the
vicinity of the edge, and finally the development
of the most readily usable form for publication of
the results. The completed work will be published
shortly.
The Watson Medal was established in 1874 by
the bequest of James Craig Watson, a member of
the Academy and Director of the Washburn
Observatory of the University of Wisconsin. He
provided in his will that the medal should be
awarded “‘to any person in any country who shall
make any astronomical discovery or produce any
astronomical work worthy of special reward as
contributing to our science.”
Sa eeREe
Ts there any thing whereof it may be said, See, this is new? tt hath been already of old time,
which was before us.—Ecclesiastes 1:10
Marcu 1956
MACOMBER: PUFFERFISH TOXIN 85
BIOCHEMISTRY .—An observation on pufferfish toxin.! RopertT D. MAcomBER,
School of Tropical and Preventive Medicine, College of Medical Evangelists,
Loma Linda, Calif. (Communicated by Bruce W. Halstead.)
Many workers have observed that the
skin of pufferfish contains a considerable
amount of toxin. Tani (Teikoku Tosho Ka-
bushiki Kaisha 2 (3): 1-103. 1945) reported
that some skin samples extracted and as-
sayed contained as much as 20 percent of
the total toxicity of the fish. Routine screen-
ing tests in our laboratory have also demon-
strated puffer skin extracts to be strongly
positive.
MATERIALS AND METHODS
With the foregoing facts in mind, it was
suggested that the water used in thawing
frozen puffer specimens for preservation be
assayed. A mouse was injected intraperi-
toneally with 1 cc of the water used to
thaw a frozen Japanese puffer, Fugu par-
dalis (Temminck and Schlegel). It was
found that the water contained sufficient
toxin to kill a mouse in about 5 minutes.
After this chance observation, the experi-
ment was set up as follows: From another
frozen pufferfish of the same species, samples
of flesh, liver, gonad, and skin weighing 7
grams each were assayed to determine the
toxicity of various parts of the fish. For the
assay, the samples were homogenized in a
Waring blender with 2 ce distilled water
being added per gram of samples; the skin
sample being tough and leathery, was cut
in small pieces with the shears prior to ho-
mogenizing. Samples were then centrifuged
20 minutes at 2,000 rpm and the superna-
tant liquid decanted for injection of mice,
following the procedure routinely used by
Halstead (Copeia (1): 1-11. 1954.)
The skin extract assayed 3.4 mouse units
of toxin per gram of sample. (A mouse unit,
as recommended by H. Sommer and K. F.
Meyer, Arch. Path. 24 (5): 568-570, 1987,
in their work on paralytic shellfish poison
has been adopted for fish bioassays. The
mouse unit is defined as the amount of toxin
1 This investigation was supported in part by a
research grant awarded to Dr. Bruce W. Halstead
from the Division of Research grants, National
Institutes of Health, Public Health Service, grant
No. RG-(2366)C5.
required to kill a 20-gram mouse in 15 min-
utes.) From data on the other samples, it
was estimated that the skin contained
roughly 14 percent of the total toxicity of
the fish.
For the second part of the experiment
another sample of skin weighing 7 grams
was then removed from the fish from an
area adjacent to that of the first sample.
This second sample was washed thoroughly
on the exterior surface with methyl alcohol.
A cotton swab wet with the solvent was
used to remove all traces of mucus and the
skin was scraped lightly with a razor blade.
The alcohol wash and scrapings were com-
bined and evaporated to dryness under
vacuum. The residue was made up to a
volume of 14 ce with distilled water for
assay and the residue insoluble in water was
not removed. The skin, free from all signs
of mucus on the exterior surface, was ex-
tracted with water and assayed.
RESULTS
The skin extract showed toxic symptoms
in the mice but they all recovered. The
water suspension of the residue from the
alcohol wash assayed 3.05 mouse units of
toxin per gram of skin sample. The alcohol
wash solution, then, contained approxi-
mately 90 percent of the amount of toxin
that had been present in the homogenized
sample of skin extracted with water.
The results are tabulated as follows:
Water extract of skin......3.4 MU/gm of sample
Alcohol wash of exterior
skin surface.............3.05 MU/gm of sample
Water extract of skin sample pre-
viously washed with alcohol to
remove mucus....................Weakly toxic
SUMMARY
The major portion of the toxin present in
the skin of the Japanese puffer, Fugu par-
dalis (Temminck and Schlegel), appears to
be in the superficial layers of the skin or
sufficiently near the surface to be removed
with solvent wash.
86 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES EF VOL. 46, No. 3
BOTANY.—An evaluation of Benjaminia Martius ex Benjamin.
LyMANn B. Suir,
U.S. National Museum, and J. Murg¢a Pirss, Instituto Agronémico do Norte,
Belém do Para, Brazil.
Among the aquatic plants that float on
the still waters of the lakes in the campo
regions, there is a small species of the family
Serophulariaceae which is rather common,
especially in the campos of Braganga in
northeastern Par&é and in the Brazilian
territory of Amapa. Its roots are buried in
the soil, while its stems spread over the
water and bear pale rose corollas, the whole
plant being entangled in a mat of other
aquaties like Pontederta, Salvinia, and
Cabomba. In the process of identifying this
species as Bacopa reflera (Benth.) Edwall,
we were struck by its close resemblance to
the genera Benjaminia and Naiadothriz,
which supposedly belong to different families.
To clear the title of this species it was
necessary to evaluate both genera, and the
situation was so confused that it seems
worth while to record our findings here.
The genus Benjaminia Martius ex Ben-
jamin was validly published in the Flora
Brasiliensis (10: 255. 1847) with a single
species, B. utriculariiformis Martius ex
Benjamin, based on a single collection,
Gardner 4847. Under it as a synonym was
listed ““Quinquelobus Benj. Mss.”
In the same year Benjamin published
Quinquelobus (Linnaea 20: 316. 1847) with
this note immediately after the name:
“(Benjam. in Mart. et Endl. Fl. Bras.
Fam. Utric. adhuc ined.).’’ The note would
indicate that Quinquelobus was the earlier
name and subsequent authors, notably
Beck (Engler & Prantl, Die Nat. Pflanzen-
fam. IV. 3b: 123. 1895) and Dalla Torre
and Harms (Genera Siphonogamarum 586.
1906), evidently have jumped to this
conclusion without further investigation.
The evidence of priority is just as strong for
Benjaminia, but the whole question of
priority is irrelevant because the first
publication of Quinquelobus is invalid. There
is no description of the genus itself as re-
quired by Article 48 of the International
Code of Botanical Nomenclature of 1952,
nor can it be considered valid as a monotype
according to Article 50 because it is based
on four species. The four species are also
invalid according to Article 51 because they
were published in an invalid genus, al-
though all but the first have descriptions.
A year after the publication of Benjaminia
and Quinquelobus, Bentham (London Journ.
Bot. 7: 567. 1848) pointed out that Ben-
jaminia not only did not belong to the
Utriculariae (Lentibulariaceae) but was
identical with his Herpestes reflera of the
Scrophulariaceae. Furthermore, it was based
on the same collection, Gardner 4347. He
also indicated that the four species under
Quinquelobus belonged to three different
genera of Scrophulariaceae.
Bentham’s identification of Benjaminia
has been reenforced recently by Prof. G.
Erdtman, who informs us that there is no
apparent similarity between its pollen and
those in the Lentibulariaceae, but that there
is a resemblance to certain types in the
Scrophulariaceae.
Owing to the later misconceptions of
Beck and Dalla Torre and Harms, the
clarification of Bentham was overlooked by
recent authors. Thus Pennell in making
Naiadothrix as a segregate from Bacopa
(Mem. Torrey Bot. Club 16: 105. 1920)
transferred Herpestis refleca Bentham to it
without realizing that Benjaminia was
already available. Consequently, anyone
who believes that this taxon is a distinct
genus must make the appropriate combina-
tions under Benjaminia. We are not taking
this action because we agree with Pennell’s
final stand in reducing all segregates to
Bacopa in the broadest sense (Proc. Acad.
Nat. Sei. Philadelphia 98: 83-98. 1946). Our
findings may be summarized briefly thus:
le deded
Bacopa Aubl. (1775) Section Chaetodiscus Sub-
section Naiadothrix (Pennell) Pennell,
Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 98:
98. 1946.
Benjamimia Mart. ex Benj. in Mart. Fl. Bras.
10: 255. 1847.
Quinquelobus Benjamin, Linnaea 20: 316.
1847, nomen invalidum.
Naiadothrix Pennell, Mem. Torrey Bot. Club
16: 105. 1920.
Marca 1956 ANDERSON:
SAONE GROUP OF TETON
SIOUX 87
ETHNOLOGY .—An investigation of the early bands of the Saone group of Teton Sioux.
Although little, if any, investigation has
been made into the condition of the Saone
bands of the Teton Sioux during the years
shortly before and after the beginning of
the 19th century, two sources are available,
which provide an excellent foundation for
such a study. These are the statistical tables
prepared by Lewis and Clark and printed
in the American State Papers, Indian A ffairs,
volume 1,! and Tabeaw’s Narrative of Liosel’s
Expedition to the Upper Missouri, edited by
Anne H. Abel.2 The term Saone was used
extensively on the Upper Missouri during
the period 1800-1850, when referring to the
five tribes of northern Tetons, the Minne-
conjous, Sans Ares, Two Kettles, Hunk-
papas, and Blackfeet Sioux.
Lewis and Clark and Tabeau were on the
Upper Missouri in 1803 and 1804, recording
data on the Saones at a time when these
tribes were beginning the process of their
development into distinct political struc-
tures. Some, like the Minneconjous, had
already assumed the stature of a separate
tribe containing three subbands, while others
like the Two Kettles and Blackfeet can not
be recognized as such, and only conjectures
can be made regarding their stage of devel-
opment at that time. The products of such
an investigation are many. In some cases,
enough facts are available to permit definite
conclusions to be formed, while other situa-
tions merely invite strong suppositions, and
still others result in unanswerable and frus-
trating puzzles. Yet, the positive products
greatly outweigh the negative, for in pro-
viding a clearer understanding of the begin-
nings, customs, and structures of these Teton
tribes, we are far better able to evaluate
many of their actions in later periods of
their history.
The origin and meaning of the name Saone
is not definitely known, for during the 1880’s
when the missionaries were making their in-
quiries concerning the Teton bands, the
name had then gone out of common usage,
1 Pp. 712-715. This information can also be
found in the Original journals of the Lewis and
Clark expedition, 1804-1806, edited by Reuben G.
Thwaites, 6: 97-99. New York, 1905.
* Norman, Okla., 1939, pp. 108, 104.
Harry AnpERSON, St. Albans, N. Y. (Communicated by John C. Ewers.)
and little reliable information could be ob-
tained from the Sioux regarding its mean-
ing.’ The first known use of the name was
by Truteau, who recorded in his journal
that a Sioux band called ‘‘Chahony”’ was
expected to arrive at the Arikara village late
in the summer of 1795 for the purpose of
trade.t The best study to date on Saone
origins, based upon the available sources,
can be found in Hyde’s history of the Og-
lalas. It is his conclusion that the name was
given originally to the northern Teton group
by the southern Tetons, the Oglalas and
Brules, and in some manner referred ‘‘shoot-
ing in the trees’’, or living and hunting in
wooded areas.°
Both Lewis and Clark and Tabeau list
the bands of the Minneconjous separately
rather than including them under the gen-
eral heading of Saones. This is significant in
view of the fact that other material on
Teton bands prepared during the 1800—
1850 period classified the Minneconjous as
Saones. The earliest of these, the reports
and treaties submitted by the Atkinson-
O’Fallon Commission of 1825, lumped the
Minneconjous together with the tribes now
commonly known as the Sans Arcs and Two
Kettles, and had the chiefs of these three
groups sign a single treaty.® In 1840S. R.
Riggs, the Sioux missionary, visited Fort
Pierre and recorded much valuable infor-
mation regarding the Tetons obtained from
the fur traders. Riggs also classified the
Minneconjous as ‘‘Sanoni.”? From this and
other information, it clearly appears that
the Minneconjous were a part of the Saone
group, but at the time of the writings of
3See the History of the expedition wnder the
command of Lewis and Clark, edited by Elliott
Coues, 1: 101. New York, 1893.
4 Journal of Jean Baptiste Truteau among the
Arikara Indians in 1795, South Dakota Hist. Coll.
7: 473.
> Hyps, Grorae fl.
Norman, Okla., 1937.
6 The Atkinson-O’Fallon report can be found
in House Document no. 117, 19th Congress, Ist
Session; the signers of the Saone treaty in the
Statutes at Large, 7: 254.
7Riegs, STerHan R. Jowrnal of a tour from
Lac-Qui-parle to the Missouri River. South
Dakota Hist. Coll. 18: 340.
Red Cloud’s Folk: 12-13.
88 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Lewis and Clark and Tabeau, they were so
numerically superior to the other Saone
bodies that they were given a separate
listing.®
A second significant factor appears after
a careful examination of the Minneconjou
material; of the three bands which made up
the tribe around 1800, none can be recog-
nized in the Minneconjou tribal circle ob-
tained by J. Owen Dorsey some 80 years
later.°
THE MINNECONJOUS
Lewis and Clark Tabeau
Min-na-kine-az-zo Minican-hojou
Wan-nee-wack-a-ta-o-ne-lar Tacohiropapais
Tar-co-eh-parh Waniwacteonilla
The first group, the Min-na-kine-az-zo of
Lewis and Clark, or the Minican-hojou of
Tabeau, is undoubtedly the parent body of
this tribe, the Original or True Minnecon-
jou band. According to the explorer’s list,
the chief of this band was Wock-ke-a-chauk-
in-dish-kah or Thunder Ring (wakinyan,
thunder and cangleshka, a hoop or wheel,
something round). An explanation to an
entry in the High Hawk winter count!® con-
firms that the Minneconjous had a promi-
nent head man named Thunder Ring shortly
before the end of the 18th century. Because
of his leadership over the parent band, he
is named by Lewis and Clark as being the
head chief of the Minneconjous.
Unfortunately, no detailed list of Sioux
bands is available for the period between
Lewis and Clark’s and that of Thaddeus
Culbertson’s, dated 1850.'! By the author’s
own admission, the Culbertson list is not
complete, and no mention is made on it of
the True Minneconjous. However, the ma-
terial collected by F. V. Hayden in 1859-
60” reveals that this band was still very
SLewis and Clark gave the Minneconjous 100
lodges, 250 warriors, and 750 people, and the com-
bined Saone groups, 120 lodges, 300 warriors, and
900 inhabitants.
° Dorsey, J. Owen. Siouan sociology, 15th
Ann. Rep. Bur. Amer. Ethnol.: 220. 1897.
10 Curtis, E. 8. The North American Indian
3: 168. New York, 1907-1930.
1 CULBERTSON, THADDEUS, Journal of an ex-
pedition to the Mauvaises Terres and the Upper
Missouri in 1850, Bur. Amer. Ethnol. Bull. 147:
135, 136. 1952.
2 Haypen, F. V. Contributions to the ethnog-
raphy and philology of the Indian tribes of the
Missouri Valley: 375, 376. Philadelphia, 1862.
VOL. 46, NO. 3
active, and also supplies a valuable clue as
to the reason it was not found on the Dorsey
list of 1880. The Hayden information states
that the True Minneconjou chief was ‘“The
Elk That Whistles Running,” another
name for the powerful old Minneconjou
chief, Lame Deer. One of the most hostile
of the Sioux leaders during the Sioux War
of 1876, Lame Deer’s band took part in all
the fighting against the United States troops
during that conflict. A report from the hos-
tile Sioux camp near Slim Buttes in Sep-
tember, 1876, identifies portions of the Min-
neconjous in the camp as those of the
“Grandmother” band led by Fast Bull.“
The use of the term ‘“‘grandmother”’ is diffi-
cult to explain, unless it referred to the
parent group of the Minneconjous. There
would be little basis for a contention that
this “Grandmother” band and the True
Minneconjous were one and the same were
it not known that the “Grandmother’s”
chief, Fast Bull, was Lame Deer’s son.
Actually Lame Deer was still the bands’
chief, but during the hostilities, the war
leaders, or head soldiers such as Fast Bull,
were afforded more notoriety than the older
council chiefs.
During the winter of 1876-77 the Sioux
were hard pressed by the Army, and nearly
all of the hostiles surrendered or fled to
Canada with Sitting Bull. Lame Deer’s
band was the only group that attempted
to continue to roam freely in the Powder
river country of Montana. On May 7, 1877,
troops under Colonel Nelson A. Miles at-
tacked and destroyed the True Minnecon-
jou camp on the upper reaches of the Rose-
bud. Lame Deer was among those who were
killed.!° Survivors of the camp, led by Fast
Bull, straggled into Red Cloud Ageney in
September and surrendered. During the fol-
lowing year many of the surrendered hos-
tiles became dissatisfied with their existence
at the Sioux agencies and sought refuge in
Canada. Large numbers fled from the Red
13 Other places it is written ‘‘The Elk That
Bellows Walking,’’ but the meaning intended is
probably Noisy Walking Elk.
4 Lt. Col. George P. Buell to the Assistant
Adjutant General, General Terry’s Column in the
field, September 9, 1876, Record Copy of Letters
Sent, Post at Cheyenne River Agency, Records
of the War Department, National Archives.
15 Report of the Secretary of War for 1877: 498.
Marca 1956
Cloud and Spotted Tail groups during the
relocation of those agencies on the Missouri
during the late fall of 1877.!° Numerous
small groups left at other times. The defi-
nitely hostile attitude of the True Minne-
conjous would make it almost a certainty
that the survivors of that band were among
those who joined Sitting Bull north of the
border. When the Sioux returned from their
Canadian exile in 1881 and were sent back
to their respective agencies a year later, the
True Minneconjous had ceased to exist as a
distinct band. Apparently lacking the strong
leadership of the Lame Deer type, the re-
mainder of the camp had either become ab-
sorbed by the other Minneconjou bands, or
had followed relatives and friends into the
camps of the Oglalas and Hunkpapas while
in Canada.
Examination of the material available
dealing with the second band on the Lewis
and Clark list, the Wan-nee-wack-a-ta-o-ne-
lar (Tabeau lists it third, as Waniwacteo-
nilla) reveals that by 1880 it was no longer
a Minneconjou band, and as a group was
nearly extinct because of its wild and hostile
activities. Although the name is difficult to
translate because of the differences in the
Sioux words of 1800 and those of more
recent vintage,!” this band is the one men-
tioned intermittently throughout Sioux his-
tory as the Broken Arrows. It had its origins
among the Minneconjous, later became part
of the Brules, and finally is last mentioned
as living with the Oglalas on the Pine Ridge
reservation.
The Broken Arrows remained with the
Minneconjous until at least the mid 1830’s.
The Atkinson-O’Fallon expedition met the
camp near the Missouri in 1825. One mem-
ber of the party recorded in his journal that
this band was “‘not well looked upon by the
other bands of Sioux, being considered
rather refractory and ungovernable.’ On
the treaty negotiated by the Atkinson-
O’Fallon party with the Saone group, which
16 HypE, op. cit.: 299-301.
17 The Dorsey material (1884) calls the band
Wan-nawega, Broken Arrows. This is phonetically
very different from the band’s early identity. See
also footnote 22.
8 Journal of the Atkindon-O’Fallon Expedition,
edited by Russell Reid and Clell Gannon, North
Dakota Hist. Quart. 4(1): 21. Oct. 1929.
ANDERSON: SAONE GROUP OF TETON SIOUX 89
included the Minneconjous, one of the
signers was a leading warrior of the Broken
Arrow camp, Chante Wahneecha, or No
Heart. This was the name given to the chief
of the Broken Arrows by Lewis and Clark,
but since the warriors leaders were invari-
ably younger men, Atkinson and O’Fallon’s
No Heart was probably the son of the Lewis
and Clark chief. Several years later, George
Catlin was on the Upper Missouri and
painted a number of portraits of prominent
Sioux around Fort Pierre, including two
Broken Arrow leaders, Shonka, the Dog,
and No Heart.!°
It was not long after Catlin’s visit that
Broken Arrows appear to have migrated,
perhaps forcibly, from the Missouri to join
the Brules living between the White river
and the Platte. Actually the evidence points
to a split in the band, with the majority
joining the Brules and only a small number
staying with the Minneconjous. The No
Heart family, definitely identified as Broken
Arrows, remained on the Missouri and were
known as leaders of the Minneconjous up
through the reservation period.?? Culbert-
son’s band list of 1850 does not refer to the
Broken Arrows among the Minneconjous,
19 CaTLIn, GEorGE. Illustrations on the manners,
customs, and conditions of the North American
Indian, 1: 223; 2: 190, 192. Catlin’s description of
Shonka fits into the general pattern of remarks we
have concerning the whole Broken Arrow band:
“an ill-natured and surley man—despised by the
chiefs of every other band .. .’’? While Catlin was
at Fort Pierre, Shonka shot and killed a noted
warrior of the Hunkpapa tribe, Little Bear, and
had to flee to the Black Hills to escape the venge-
ance of the dead man’s relatives. Although Catlin
distinguishes between Shonka’s band, the Caz-a-
zhee-ta (Bad Arrow Points), and No Heart’s
Wah-nee-watch-to-nee-nah (Broken Arrows), we
know from later evidence that both men were
leaders in the same camp. This is only another
instance of the artist’s careless distortion of the
Teton band names, a situation which makes his
material difficult to work with.
20 The Black Hills treaty of 1876 was signed for
the Minneconjous by a No Heart and an ‘‘Old
Man No Heart.’? The latter could have been
Catlin’s chief, for his son was born in 1844. The
younger No Heart was often referred to as Little
No Heart to distinguish him from his father.
Little in this case alluded to age rather than size.
High Hawk, who was a Brule, recorded in his
winter count that in 1888 there was a fight among
the members of the Broken Arrow band. This may
have been the date of the separation between the
Shonka and No Heart portions of the camp, or
perhaps refers only to an incident among Shonka’s
people after they had joined the Brules.
90 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
but does list a “Bad Arms” band among
the Brules. Rufas B. Sage located the Broken
Arrows on the Platte prior to the date of
Culbertson’s information,?! and the name
“Bad Arms” (referring to weapons-arrows,
rather than body extremities) cannot be
associated with any group belonging to the
Brules proper. Hayden’s list of 1859, im some
ways more complete than Culberton’s,
alters the Brule’s Broken Arrows to the
“Band with Poor Guns or Bows.” This
source also places a group among the Min-
neconjous translated very vaguely as ‘‘The
Band That Kills No People.” At first glance
this does not appear to be the old No Heart
portion of the Broken Arrows, but exami-
nation of the Sioux word, Waktonila, from
which Hayden gets the name reveals that
it is an incomplete form of the name re-
corded by Lewis and Clark and Tabeau,
Wan-nee-wack-a-ta-o-ne-lar or Waniwacteo-
nilla.”?
After the date of Hayden’s information
there is little mention made of the Broken
Arrows.” They were known to have been in
the hostile camp in the Powder river country
in 1866 which supplied the warriors for the
siege of Fort Phil Kearney, the Fetterman
fight, and the other actions comprising the
Red Cloud War.** When J. Owen Dorsey
made his inquiries for his study of the Teton
bands, none of his informants mentioned
the Broken Arrows as being a Brule group.
In fact, even his early information on the
21 Sacre, Ruras B. Wild scenes in Kansas and
Nebraska: 68. Philadelphia, 1855.
*2 Catlin’s phonetic vocabulary (1832) has arrow
as wonhee. The exact translation of waktonila is
not known, but at one time it apparently referred
to something broken. By coincidence there is a
more modern Teton word sounding somewhat
similar; wa-cin-ko-ke-la, meaning easily made
angry. From what we know of the Broken Arrows
this could be one general description of them.
_. * During the early 1850’s the Oglala and Brule
Sioux on the Platte were involved in several
brushes with troops stationed at Fort Laramie.
These events, which led to Gen. W. 8. Harney’s
campaign against the Sioux in 1855 and 1856,
included the firing upon a military skiff crossing
the Platte in 1853 and the so-called Grattan ‘‘mas-
sacre’’ a year later. In both instances, official
reports state that a wild band of Minneconjou
troublemakers, otherwise unidentified, were in
some way responsible for the hostilities. There is
every reason to assume that these troublemakers
were the Broken Arrow camp.
24 See the Col. Henry B. Carrington papers in
Senate Document no. 32, 50th Congress, Ist
Session, p. 29.
VoL. 46, No. 3
Minneconjou groups omitted the Broken
Arrows. However, Dorsey made subsequent
inquiries among the Minneconjous and was
told by a member of the No Heart family
that the Broken Arrows belonged in the
Minneconjou tribal circle, but at that time
(1884) they were nearly extinct.?? From this
it appears that there was a camp of Broken
Arrows still in existence, but 1t was not liv-
ing with the other Minneconjou bands at-
tached to the Cheyenne River Agency. No
Heart knew of the camp while the other
Minneconjou informants did not, probably
because of the old ties his family had with it.
Fortunately, Phillip Wells, a long-time
Army scout, interpreter, and Indian service
employee, recorded before his death, a num-
ber of his experiences among the Sioux.?®
One of these supplies us with enough infor-
mation to locate the remnants of the Broken
Arrow camp. In 1892, when Wells was an
agency farmer on the Pine Ridge reserva-
tion, the so-called Two Sticks Raid took
place which culminated in the killing of
several cowboys in the Pine Ridge beef
camp. Wells wrote that the Two Sticks
camp was the last of the old Broken Arrow
band. He said the Broken Arrows had al-
ways been a renegade group, containing
many a Sioux who had been disgraced in his
own band and was invited by the Broken
Arrows to join them. They ignored tribal
law, custom, and religious beliefs.
According to the Wells manuscript, the
people in the Two Sticks camp claimed the
earliest Broken Arrow chief which they
could remember was Shonka, the Dog. This
was the headman whose portrait Catlin
painted at Fort Pierre in 1832. It was
shortly after Catlin’s visit that the Broken
Arrows split up, with one portion leaving
the Missouri. The Two Sticks camp was the
remains of this group. Their memory of
Shonka as their chief strongly suggests that
it was his following in the band that left,
or was driven out by the Minneconjou
25 DorRsEY, op. cit.: 220.
26 The Wells material is owned by his daughter,
Miss Flora Wells, of Pine Ridge, S. Dak., who
recently lent it to George E. Hyde. My informa-
tion on the Broken Arrow references comes from
correspondence with Hyde. Some Wells accounts
were published in 1948 in North Dakota Hist.
15(2-4), but these omitted some of the more im-
portant Broken Arrow material.
Marcu 1956
leaders, and migrated to the White river
country of the Brules. No Heart, the other
Broken Arrow leader identified by Catlin,
remained near the Missouri, and he and his
small following were absorbed by the other
Minneconjou camps.
The remaining band on the Minneconjou
lists, the Tar-co-eh-parh or Tacohiropapais
is not mentioned in any of the available
sources written after the date of the Lewis
and Clark report. They either ceased to
exist as a distinct band, or were known
down through later chapters of Sioux his-
tory under another name. While the scat-
tered and inconclusive evidence affords no
concrete proof for such a contention, it is
believed that the Tacoropas did not dissolve
as a tribal band, but became more familiarly
known as the Oohenompa or Two Kettle
Tetons.
The earliest mention of the Tacoropas
was recorded by Jean Baptiste Truteau in a
portion of his journal kept while residing in
the Arikara village during the summer of
1795. In June of that year two men from
the Tacoropa camp brought a warning that
three ‘‘villages” of Sioux were assembling a
force of 500 warriors for an attack upon the
Arikara village. Later on, in July of the same
summer, the entire Tacoropa camp, said by
Truteau to number ‘80 huts’’, came on a
trading trip to the Arikaras.”” Truteau’s evi-
dence shows that these Tacoropas were
friendly with the Arikaras at a time when
very few of the other Teton bands were on
good terms with that tribe. This fact is im-
portant in attempting to connect them with
the later-day Two Kettles, for it is known
that the Two Kettles were the friendliest of
the Teton tribes, often managing to maintain
amicable relations with other tribes, and the
whites as well, with whom the Tetons were
then at war. In addition, the Two Kettles
also undertook several attempts at farming
on their own prior to the reservation days.
Their agricultural knowledge and training
could easily have come from their association
with the Arikaras, who depended upon the
raising of crops for a good part of their food
supply.
Truteau’s statement that the Tacoropa
village numbered 80 lodges seems to be an
27 TRUTBAU, op. cit.: 454, 473.
ANDERSON: SAONE GROUP OF TETON SIOUX 91
error, for ten years later, Lewis and Clark
gave the entire Minneconjou tribe only 100
lodges. Whether the latter figure includes the
Tacoropa camp is not clear. The explorers
failed to record the name of this band’s chief
(they had such information for every other
Sioux band), and this gives rise to a suspicion
that their information regarding these people
was very vague. The figures of Truteau and
Lewis and Clark can perhaps be reconciled
by the suggestion that it was the entire Min-
neconjou tribe, and not just the Tacoropas
that visited the Arikara village on July 20,
1795. The name Minneconjou, meaning
“those who plant by the water’ indicates
that this tribe was at one time agriculturally
inclined. Some tribal traditions say that the
water near which they planted was the Mis-
souri, perhaps under the guidance of the Ari-
kara. But, why then didn’t Truteau write
Minneconjous instead of Tacoropas?
In the midst of all these suppositions and
conjectures regarding the Minneconjous, Ta-
coropas, and Two Kettles, one known fact
stands out which clearly links them together.
Four Bears, a Two Kettle leader of the reser-
vation period, related to EK. S. Curtis, when
the latter was collecting material for his work
on the Sioux, a tribal tradition which Curtis
used as an explanation for one of the entrys
in the High Hawk winter count.?> High
Hawk, and the Baptiste Good winter counts
as well,” recorded that in 1791 ‘“‘The White
Men Came and Carried the Flag Around the
Nation’. The Four Bears account related
that when the Sioux were living ‘“‘in the
eastern forest”’, a party of whites came to a
large camp of Minneconjous, Two Kettles
and Sans Ares, and pursuaded four of the
chiefs to return with them to the white set-
tlements.
Four Bears was born in 1834, and_ his
grandfather, Two Lance, was among the
chiefs who were selected to make the trip.
Thunder Ring, listed by Lewis and Clark as
chief of the True Minneconjou band, also
went with the white party. The fact that
this event took place in the spring (‘the time
of greening grass’’), plus the reference to the
“eastern forest’? indicates that the Minne-
conjou-T'wo Kettle-Sans Are camp was at-
* CuRTIS, op. cit.: 168.
210th Ann. Rep. Bur. Amer.
1893.
Ethnol.: 310,
92 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
tending one of the annual trading fairs held
on the upper reaches of the St. Peter or
Minnesota river.*° In addition to the various
groups of Sioux, the Tetons from the Mis-
souri, the Minnesota bands, and the Yank-
tons from the Des Moines River, these fairs
were regularly attended by British fur trad-
ers from Canada. The traders, in taking the
chiefs to their posts and presenting them
with medals and other gifts, were trying to
retain the allegiance of the western Indians
after the close of the Revolutionary War.
The trip was evidently a long one, for the
Teton chiefs did not return to their people
until the following winter.
Combining the evidence contained in the
Four Bears account with the known condi-
tions of the time regarding the Sioux trading
fairs and the activities of the British among
the western Indians, it certainly appears
that the tradition could be dated anytime
between 1785 and 1795. The year of the win-
ter count entry, 1791, is as good a selection
as any.
The important fact to be noted here is that
Two Kettle tradition, handed down to the
time of Four Bears, discloses that in 1791
elements of that band roamed together with
the future Minneconjou and Sans Ares
groups in one large Saone camp. By 1803 the
Minneconjous had emerged into a distinct
tribe, containing three subbands, while the
Sans Ares as well were a recognizable group
on the Tabeau and Lewis and Clark lists. It
does not seem too unreasonable to suggest
that the Two Kettle portion of the old Saone
camp was still with the Minneconjous as the
mysterious sub-band of that tribe called the
Tacoropas. We are able to follow the prog-
ress of the other two Minneconjou bands,
the true Minneconjous and the Broken Ar-
rows, through subsequent pages of Sioux
history, but after 1803 the Tacoropas disap-
peared, and almost corresponding with their
disappearance came the advent of this new
group, the Two Kettles.
THE SAONES
Lewis and Clark
Sah-one
Tack-chan-de-see-char
Sah-o-ne-Hont-a-par-par
Tabeau
Tatchindi-chidja
Hitasiptchone
Hont-papas
30 Hyp, op. cit.: 21. For this period, Hyde has
located the Sioux trading fairs on the headwaters
of the Minnesota river.
VoL. 46, No. 3’
The group easiest to identify are the Hont-
papas or Sah-o-ne-Hont-a-par-par, which
clearly were the later-day Hunkpapa Sioux,
the wild and warlike people made famous by
the leadership of Sitting Bull. Lewis and
Clark reveal that their chief was Long Dog
(Shark-ka-has-car—Shunka, dog, hanska,
long), a name borne by one of the more hos-
tile Hunkpapa chiefs during the 1870’s.*! At
the time of the explorers’ visit, the Hunkpa-
pas are said to have roamed on both sides of
the Missouri to the north of the Minnecon-
jous located on the Cheyenne river.® On the
west side of the Missouri this would place
them in the region of the Moreau, Cannon-
ball, and Heart rivers, which at that time
was claimed by the Arikaras. It is suspected
that the Hunkpapas spent most of their time
east of the Missouri, crossing the river only
to hunt buffalo and to trade with (and steal
from) the Arikaras. It was not until some 20
years later, when the power of the Arikaras
was broken by a combination of disease,
Sioux hostility, and their own stupidity, that
the Hunkpapas could move across the Mis-
souri and lay any sort of substantial claim to
the lands west of the river.
Tabeau’s second Saone band, Hitasipt-
chone (Itazipcho to modern ethnologists),
is far better known by its French translation,
Sans Ares. It is a combination of the Sioux
words ztazipa, meaning bow and cho, an ab-
breviation of chodan, or without. For some
unknown reason this name did not appear
on the Lewis and Clark list. Perhaps it was
not commonly used and the band was known
by another name. After examining Tabeau’s
first band, Tatchindi-chidja, and Lewis and
Clark’s Tack-chan-se-see-char, it would seem
that these names also refer to the group even-
tually to become known as the Sans Arcs.
Lewis and Clark received much of their orig-
inal information regarding the Sioux from
Tabeau, and were able to check and rear-
range it on the basis of material obtained
from Hugh Heney, a Sioux trader, and from
other informants at the Mandan village. It
is very possible that Heney told them that
the Sans Arcs were better known as the
Tack-chan-de-see-char band, thus account-
31 Report of the Secretary of War for 1876:
481, 483.
82 THWAITES, op. cit.:97, 98.
33 TABEAU, op. cit.: 101, 102.
Marcu 1956 ANDERSON:
ing for the omission of Tabeau’s Hitasipt-
chone from their list.
While the meaning of the name Tatchindi-
chidje (Tack-chan-de-see-char) is not per-
fectly clear, it is fairly obvious that it refers
in some manner to the weapon, the bow.
This, however, is not the only reason for be-
lieving that this band was the fore-runner of
the later-day Sans Arcs. Again the name of
the band’s chief as supplied by Lewis and
Clark aids in its identification. They write it
as War-mun-de-o-pe-in-do-tar, the best
translation of which may be Red Tailed War
Eagle. There was a leading chief of the Sans
Ares by this name during the 1850’s and
’60’s. He signed the Sans Ares treaty of 1865
and his name was then written almost ex-
actly the same phonetically as was Lewis and
Clark’s chief.*4
There are three possible translations of the
band name, Tack-chan-de-see-char or Tat-
chindi-chidja. The first, and not necessarily
the best, would be ‘“‘bows from the heart-
wood of the willow’’: tack (tat) from 77'AZ-
ipa or bow, chan-de (chandi) from chante or
heart, and see-char (chidja) from the ending
of choh-wan-zhi-cha meaning willow. A sec-
ond choice, somewhat similar to the first,
can be obtained by substituting the word
schicha meaning bad, for see-char or chidja.
This would result in something like “bad
bows from the heartwood”’. The third possi-
bility would be ‘‘a bow, the back of which is
overlaid with sinew”’. Here the work takan,
meaning the sinews taken from the backs of
deer and buffalo and used extensively in
making bows, would be combined with ztaz-
ipa (bow) to form Ta-kan-i-ta-zi-pa.
Regardless of what the true translation
may be, one thing is evident from the inclu-
sion of this name on both the Saone band
lists; that the name Itazipcho (without
bows) signifying the Sans Are Sioux had its
origin not too many years before the first
Teton contact with the whites on the Mis-
sourl. It certainly appears that Tack-chan-
de-see-char (Tatchindi-chidja), whatever its
exact meaning, was the earliest of the names
31 The first signer for the Sans Ares at Fort
Sully on October 20, 1865, was Wah-mun-dee-o-
pee-doo-tah, or The War Eagle with the Red Tail.
Wahmundee or Wambili, eagle or war eagle, and
duta or luta, red. Actually luta means scarlet, but
it was commonly translated as red.
SAONE GROUP
OF TETON SIOUX 93
applied to what we know today as the Sans
Ares. Of the five tribes making up the Saone
faction, the Sans Arcs grew to be the third
largest (after the Minneconjous and Hunk-
papas) and were certainly living among the
Tetons on the Missouri at the time of the
visits by Tabeau and Lewis and Clark. Un-
less perhaps they were recognized by the
sub-heading Sah-one by Lewis and Clark,
the Tack-chan-de-see-char group can be the
only name on their list which refers to the
Sans Ares. As has been mentioned, perhaps
the Hitasiptchone included on Tabeau’s list
along with the Tatchindi-chidja was another,
newer name for the band and was imitted
from the Lewis and Clark list upon consulta-
tion with Heney or someone else. It also may
be that the Hitasiptchone was an offshoot of
the parent Tatchindichidja group, for al-
ready the Tetons or Bois Brules had four
subbands and the Minneconjous three. The
fact that this offshoot grew and prospered
while the parent group, the Tatchindi-chidja,
disappeared from any later references is not
unusual. Examination of the Muinneconjou
band lists obtained in the 1880’s fails to dis-
close the parent group of that tribe, the True
Minneconjous, which was listed by both Ta-
beau and Lewis and Clark.
There remains then only one name on the
two lists which thus far has not been identi-
fied, the Sah-one sub-group of Lewis and
Clark. It is impossible to even guess with any
degree of accuracy what this name made ref-
erence to. There are two Teton tribes, the
Two Kettles and the Blackfeet Sioux, that
are not mentioned in any recognizable way
by Lewis and Clark, and it may be that one
of these is the Sah-one band. It is felt, how-
ever, that the Two Kettles were more closely
associated with the Minneconjous and pos-
sibly, at that date, were the mysterious Ta-
coropa band. It also does not seem likely that
the Blackfeet were the group referred to by
Lewis and Clark, for Tabeau provides a clue
which strongly suggests that the Blackfeet
were then part of the Yankton tribe. On his
list, under the heading of ‘The Yinctons of
the South” living on the James river, is a
band called Seascapé, a name almost identi-
eal to Sihasapa or Blackfoot (stha, foot and
sapa, black). It is known that the Blackfeet
were the last of the Teton tribes to cross the
94 JOURNAL OF
Missouri, for even as late as 1825, the Atkin-
son-O’Fallon treaty commission met them
on the east bank of the river, while the other
Teton groups, including the Hunkpapas,
were all treated with on the west bank.*® The
35 The Commission’s report states that the
Saones were divided into two groups which roamed
on both sides of the Missouri. One group,
the Minneconjous, Sans Arcs, and Two Kettles,
signed a treaty at the mouth of the Teton (Bad)
river on July 12, 1825, and were the Saones who
generally inhabited the country west of the Mis-
souri. On July 12, the Commission concluded a
THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 3
delayed arrival of the Blackfeet in the re-
gions west of the Missouri could very well
have been caused by the time-consuming
break with their old ties among the Yank-
tons and a gradual movement northward up
the Missouri to where they contacted the
Hunkpapas and crossed westward.
treaty with the Saones of ‘‘Fire Heart’s band”’ at
Camp Hidden creek. This was on the east bank.
Fire Heart’s band were the Blackfeet-Sioux. The
Fire Heart family were long-time leaders of that
tribe.
OO
NEW BOOK ON AQUARIUM FISHES YIELDS DISTRIBUTION DATA
There are 40,000 kinds of fishes—species and
subspecies—in the world. This is the most recent
estimate of Dr. Leonard P. Schultz, Smithsonian
Institution curator of fishes. The fishes can be
divided roughly into inhabitants of eight world
zones, by far the richest of which is the tropical
Indo-Pacific area. This is the region extending
from the head of the Red Sea to Easter Island.
Within this region are found approximately
9,000 species.
The number of kinds in other regions, as esti-
mated by Dr. Schultz, is as follows: Australia,
1,500; North America, 4,500; South America,
6,500; Africa, 6,500; deep seas all over the world
which have their own characteristic forms of
fish life, 2,500; Europe, Asia, and India, 6,500;
various island groups, 3,000.
These estimates are contained in a Handbook
of Tropical Aquarium Fishes suitable for the
home aquarium written by Dr. Schultz in co-
operation with Herbert R. Axelrod. However,
among all these fishes fewer than 500 kinds are
common in aquaria.
All over the world, Dr. Schultz points out,
fishes have evolved into a remarkably diverse
group to fit various habitats and to follow various
ways of life. Some fly, but not like birds; others
leap, walk, and burrow as well as swim. Some
swim as fast as a locomotive—60 miles an hour
for the swordfish, 50 for the bonito, 44 for the
tuna. Some, like the bass, hardly can speed up
beyond about 12 miles an hour.
Some of their varied ways of life are shown
by the bettas and the paradisefish, both of which
blow bubble nests at the water surface where they
cradle their eggs and babies. Others, like the male
of the black-chinned mouthbreeder, incubate
the eggs and young in the mouth. More remark-
able is the seahorse, the male of which has a
pouch, much like that of a kangaroo, where the
eges are placed by the female and where they are
incubated for a few weeks before birth occurs.
Dr. Schultz has carried on special studies of
fish flight on South Pacific marine flyingfishes.
“Anatomically,” he says, “flyingfishes do not
possess muscles that could possibly help the
fins to flap like the wings of birds. Instead the
fins are used as glider wings. Although some of the
oceanic flyingfishes can sail for over 30 seconds
at about 35 miles an hour, the freshwater flying-
fishes of South America can sail only a few yards.
These little aquarium fishes are thin as a wafer
and shaped like a hatchet.”
Walking, Dr. Schultz points out, is well de-
veloped among some fishes. The lower rays of
one of the fins are separated from one another
and are controlled by special muscles so that
they propel the fish along the bottom in a fashion
very similar to the walking of a mammal on land.
The fish that can “walk’’ best on land is a com-
mon aquarium fish, the walking or climbing perch,
but it does not have the separate fin rays. It
does have an extra air chamber above the gills
that aids it in staying alive for several hours out
of water. This walking perch has been known to
travel at least 300 feet over dry land, in a space
of 30 minutes in going from one pool to another.
Nearly all fishes, Dr. Schultz says, are well
equipped with special sense organs to acquaint
them with their immediate environment. Con-
nected with a highly developed sense of touch is
the so-called “lateral line,’’ which enables a fish
to detect low frequency vibrations in the water,
such as would be set up by the movements of
another fish. In sharks, for example, this is so
highly developed that they can tell whether the
movements are made by a healthy or an injured
fish.
CONTENTS
Page
Puysics.—The basis for standards for radiation protection. LAURISTON
S. TAYLOR} 2. gio hs sop isiierea pee Cate ee aan 69
ENGINEERING.—The influence of space flight on engineering and science.
Miron WROSEN : oc. oc .0 0 8. Ongena 2. oe 79
BIOCHEMISTRY—An observation on pufferfish toxin. RosBertr OD.
MEACOMBER eis c.58 felis + bi was 1 bE akin neaeee eee eee 85
Botany—An evaluation of Benjaminia Martius ex Benjamin. Lyman
Bo Smirn and! J. MurcA PIRES. .--2.5:.+-45.-¢->--+ 4) 0ee 86
ErHnoLtoGy.—An investigation of the early bands of the Saone group of
Teton Sioux. HARRY ANDERSON. ..°22.-4...----...2 2 eee 87
ENTOMOLOGY.—Studies in Panama Culicoides (Diptera: Heleidae), VI:
The hylas group of the subgenus Hoffmania. Wiiuis W. WirtH and
PRANKLIN S. BLANTON:.;. ©... (0080.00 2-4 one a). 0200 95
Notes and News o> -rcsj 5 a mete cee Seat ein no ee eect 77, 84, 94, 99
eS rT sn
¥ 73
SB O26. 7 2
= - . -
— ~~ . oe, —
VOLUME 46 April 1956 NUMBER 4
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
Published Monthly by the
iV ASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Hditor: CaesteR H. Pace, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RoNALD BamMrorD, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL ESTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL Is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNaAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof —In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 33}4 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional Patines are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges——Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the PRocEEDINGS should be sent to Haraup A. ReHpeR, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
subscription lates for the JOURNAD.——bher Cale eee eee ee ele eee $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ —
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10. 00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22 incl. (21 numbers per vol.) . son ho) 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JourRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 45, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $378.50.
Monoararu No.1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
INDEX to JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS.........................-- $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete..........................4-- $25.00
Singlesvolumes unbound) s-2en se acces aaa eee eee 2.00
Singlemnumbershiees meee yet ee eee tae ee ee Pee ac ae Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences”? and
addressed to the Treasurer, H. S. Raprneyrn, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
D.C.
Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925.
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 46
Aprit 1956
No. 4
PALEONTOLOGY .—A late Triassic terebratellacean from Peru Francis G.
STEHLI, California Institute of Technology. (Communicated by D. H. Dunkle.)
The brachiopod fauna of the present
oceans consists predominantly of representa-
tives of the Terebratuloidea. In this group
the relation of the soft parts to the skeleton
is relatively well known. For this reason
they offer the most promising group within
the Brachiopoda for purposes of evolutionary
study. An excellent study (Cloud, 1942) of
the basal terebratuloid stocks and _ their
initial radiation during the late Silurian and
Devonian furnishes a foundation for further
work. In connection with studies undertaken
for the Treatise on invertebrate paleontology
the writer has completed a revision of
Mississippian, Pennsylvanian, and Permian
terebratuloids (unpublished). In combina-
tion these two studies reveal with reasonable
clarity the major course of terebratuloid
evolution during the Paleozoic.
Studies of recent forms have been carried
back through the Tertiary (Thompson, 1927,
and others), and many living genera are
known to extend into the Cretaceous and
some perhaps into the Jurassic as well. The
main gap in our knowledge of terebratuloid
phylogeny may be seen therefore to fall in
the Triassic-Jurassic interval. As it happens
it is during this interval, particularly the
Triassic portion, that great innovations
appear. Chief among these is the origin of
the dominant modern superfamily, the
Terebratellacea.
The recognition of Mesozoic terebratel-
laceans 1s frequently difficult. This difficulty
arises principally in distinguishing them
from other groups having long adult loops.
The basic feature permitting separation of
the terebratellaceans from these other
' California Institute of Technology, Division
of the Geological Sciences, Contribution No. 768.
101
groups is the metamorphosis of the loop
during ontogeny and its intimate relation
to the median septum. More or less complete
ontogenetic series are therefore necessary
for confident recognition.
The earliest definitely known terebratel-
lacean reported in the literature appears to
be Hamptonina of the Middle Jurassic.
Particular importance therefore attaches to
an undoubted terebratellacean species re-
cently recognized in a collection of silicified
material from the late Triassic of Peru. The
importance of this form as the earliest known
member of the superfamily and its evolu-
tionary significance has prompted the
description which is presented below.
PRESENT MATERIAL
The species here in question is represented by
at least twenty fragmentary silicified specimens.
They have been freed of the matrix by acid
etching. The fragments present abundant
internal detail, but the external form of the
shell is incompletely known. All specimens are
believed to represent juvenile individuals because
of the immature beak characters displayed and
the presumably incompletely metamorphosed
loop. All individuals are of about the same size
and suggest that a high degree of sorting was
effected during their transportation to the burial
site. Because it appears undesirable to me to
propose a name for immature specimens which
cannot now be identified with any adult, the
await
naming when more complete material becomes
species is merely described and may
available.
All specimens were obtained from lot 7+ of the
Jenks collection of Peruvian Triassic from the
Cerro de Pasco region. They are housed in the
American Museum of Natural History in New
WAY 7 A 1956
102
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 46, No. 4
Fries. 1-6.—An unnamed late Triassic terebratulloid brachiopod: 1, Interior of a fragmentary bra-
chial valve showing the heavy median septum and the medially sessile cardinal plate with which it is
connected; 2, interior of a fragmentary pedicle valve showing the open delthyrium and the dental
plates; 3, interior of fragmentary pedicle valve showing the open, perhaps juvenile nature of the del-
thyrium; 4, more or less complete specimen showing the loop in place; 5, lateral view of the same speci-
men; 6, brachial interior of the same specimen.
York City. The strata from which lot 74 was
collected have been dated on the basis of other
fossils as late Triassic (Haas, 1953) and are part
of the Pucara group.
DESCRIPTION
Shells small, the most complete specimen is
7.5 mm long, 7 mm wide, and appears to have
been about 4 mm in thickness. The outline is
slightly ovate; the pedicle valve is longitudinally
and transversely convex; no fold or sulcus appears
to be present, pedicle beak nearly straight;
pedicle foramen unrestricted by deltidial plates,
so that the delthyrium is open, and not trans-
gressing on the apex of the beak. Brachial valve
longitudinally and in general transversely convex
but seemingly developing a shallow sulcus ante-
riorly.
Pedicle interior with short strong dental
plates and a low myophragm dividing the
muscle field and extending from the anterior
Fic. 7.—Profile of reconstructed
partly
individual.
Fie. 8.—Diagrammatie reconstruction of the
loop.
margin of the rostral cavity to about midlength,
muscle scars poorly impressed. Brachial interior
with the cardinal plate medially concave and
supported by a low, broad septum which extends
anteriorly past midlength to a union with the
loop; crura arising from the inner margins of the
socket plates; crural points small; main bands
extend forward in an essentially centronelliform
fashion and unite with the median septum and
the remainder of the loop; recurving band con-
sisting of two more or less vertically disposed
plates which are concave inward and united at
the apex of each concave surface; each plate
arises from the median septum with which it is
broadly joined by becoming gradually free at the
lower margin; above their union with each other
the two plates diverge only to be united posteri-
orly by a narrow transverse band which is not,
Aprint 1956
unfortunately, preserved in any specimen; the
anterior extremities of the recurved band extend
much farther forward than the main bands and
bear spines as does the lateral margin of the
main band; the positions of the muscle insertions
cannot be determined.
DISCUSSION
The stage of loop development seen in this
form does not closely resemble any stage in the
development of the three major types distin-
guished by Elhott (1953) among modern forms.
It most nearly approaches, however, the early
stages of dallinid loop development. It seems
probable that this form, if it can truly be referred
to any modern family, should be placed in the
Dallinidae. The principal basis for this conclusion
is the general resemblance of the loop to that of
the adult loop of the Cretaceous genus Aingena.
If these specimens are, as they seem to be,
juveniles, this may account for the difficulty
STEHLI: A LATE TRIASSIC TEREBRATELLACEAN
103
encountered in relating them to preexisting forms.
Should they actually represent adults, the prob-
lem is even more difficult, for they do not closely
resemble any known Paleozoic or Triassic genus.
One possibility is that neoteny, an important
feature in terebratuloid evolution, has intervened,
obscuring relationships. Probably little more can
be determined of the true relationships of this
form until a comprehensive study of Triassic
forms is carried out.
REFERENCES
Croup, P. E. Terebratuloid Brachiopoda of the
Silurian and Devonian. Geol. Soc. Amer. Spec.
Pap. 38. 1942.
Exuurort, G. F. Brachial development and evolution
in terebratelloid brachiopods. Biol. Reviews
28: 261-279. 1953.
Haas, O. Mesozoic invertebrate faunas of Peru.
Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. 101: 1953.
Tuompson, J. A. Brachiopod morphology and
genera. New Zealand Board Sci. and Art,
Manual 7. 1927.
———— SE
BIOLOGICAL STUDIES AT POINT BARROW
The Eskimo birth rate is increased as much as
threefold when the Arctic people eat “white man’s
food”’ instead of their traditional pure-animal
diet of whale, fish, and seal. This is the observa-
tion of Prof. G. E. MacGinitie, of the California
Institute of Technology, in a report recently pub-
lished by the Smithsonian Institution on his
biological investigations at the Navy’s Arctic
Research Laboratory at Point Barrow, on
Alaska’s Arctic coast.
“When hunting was the only means of sub-
sistence,”’ he writes, ‘Eskimo women became
pregnant only once in several years, but with the
new diet they bear a baby about every year.
What will happen when outside support is shut
off is an important and serious problem. Some
few fathers are training their boys in hunting
and other Eskimo skills, but most of them are
content to let the future take care of itself. The
situation is fast becoming a problem difficult of
solution.”’
Of primary importance in the old Eskimo cul-
ture, Professor MacGinitie points out, is the bow-
head whale. ‘Several,’ he says, ‘‘are taken in the
spring of each year and the flesh is stored under-
ground in cellars where it remains edible for three
or four years. The whales feed on euphasiids,
mysids, pteropods, and copepods, which are so
abundant that the great blue whale can attain a
weight of 60 tons in two years. Baleen whales
probably lead the easiest life of any mammal.
These enormous creatures have only to swim
slowly through water, which has about the same
specific gravity as themselves, opening and clos-
ing their mouths and swallowing food. To an
Eskimo the most delectable food is whale muktuk,
which consists of whale skin with about an inch
of underlying blubber. After freezing, the muktuk
is cut into small pieces and eaten raw. It has a
nutty flavor and is really quite good.
“Perhaps next in importance in the native
economy is the bearded seal. This marine animal,
which reaches a weight of 500 to 600 pounds,
feeds almost entirely on amphipods, using its
whiskers for sweeping them from the underside
of the ice. The teeth are very small and are of
little use for holding or masticating food.
“In winter these seals are hunted in offshore
leads. They float when shot, and so can be taken
easily. In summer they are hunted in boats.
Then they sink when shot and, if not immediately
harpooned, are lost. On one summer hunt on
which I accompanied my two boatmen, eleven
seals were shot and seven were lost.”
104
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 46, No. 4
PALEOBOTANY .—New items in Cretaceous and Tertiary floras of the western
United States. RoLanp W. Brown, U.S. Geological Survey.
The fossil plant collections in the United
States National Museum continue to
enlarge as deposits are made by U. 38.
Geological Survey expeditions and by gifts
from private individuals and_ institutions.
Some of these increments come from
localities and formations already known and
exploited; but others are from strata not
yet named and, therefore, contribute toward
the dating of the strata as well as to a
clearer concept of the species the plants
represent. Rather than postpone their
description to an uncertain time when
monographic studies might be published
they are presented now for such significance
as they may have.
GLEICHENIACEAE
Gleichenites repenningi Brown, n. sp.
Fig. 14
Frond forked three times, but no arrested buds
at the forks as in normal species of Gleichenia.
Ultimate pinnules narrow, entire, rounded at the
tips and separate almost to the rachis. Venation
relatively simple, usually once but sometimes
twice forked. No fruiting specimens found.
Although the general appearance of the frond
and the venation of the pinnules suggest that the
affinity of this fern is with the Gleicheniaceae, the
assignment must be considered tentative.
The species is named for Charles A. Repenning,
of the U. S. Geological Survey, who discovered
the locality.
Occurrence—In the Mesaverde group (Upper
Cretaceous) at Black Mountain, about 40 miles
southeast of Kayenta, Ariz. Collected by R. W.
Brown et al., 1955.
ScHIZAEACEAE
Schizaeopsis dentata Brown, n. sp.
Fig. 13
Frond deeply incised, almost digitate, showing
a kind of repeated dichotomy, the ultimate
divisions narrow, but the tips not seen. Margin
inconspicuously and remotely dentate. Venation
forked, with a vein running into each marginal
tooth. No fruiting structures found.
The reference of this fern to the Schizaeaceae
must be regarded as tentative. In some features
it may be compared with the living Schizaea
elegans (Vahl) Swartz, of the American Tropics,
and the epiphytic Platyceriwm alcicorne Desvaux,
of East Africa. Neither of these, however, has
marginal teeth. In the latter respect Dzpteris
conjugata Reinwardt of the East Indies, is
somewhat comparable, but the main venation is
more open and has numerous prominent cross-
connections, which are absent in the fossil.
Perhaps the most striking resemblance of this
fern is to specimens called Pseudogingko bohemica
Velenovsky and Viniklar (1926, p. 8, pl. 5, figs.
1-15) from the Upper Cretaceous of Bohemia.
The latter, however, lacks marginal teeth. That
the present specimen and P. bohemica represent
gymnosperms may well be questioned. Such
uncertainty about even the higher rank allocation
of fossils illustrates the frustration to which
paleontologists are sometimes subject when
definite clues are lacking.
Occurrence.—In the Mesaverde group (Upper
Cretaceous) at Black Mountain, about 40 miles
southeast of Kayenta, Ariz. Collected by R. W.
Brown et al., 1955.
LEGUMINOSAE
Bauhinia wyomingana Brown, n. sp.
Fig. 1
Upper half of a leaf, evidently originally at
least 10 cm long, deeply incised making a rounded
sinus and two lobes. Only the top of the midrib
present. Secondary veins strong, curving upward
in the direction of the margin, the uppermost pair
entering the apical lobes.
No pods were found with this leaf, but large
pods, not yet identified, have been found at
about the same stratigraphic level at neigh-
boring localities in Wyoming, where, however,
no leaves recognizable as those of Bauhinia
occur. The deep sinus and bilobed feature of this
leaf, together with the venational details, leave
no doubt about its identification. It is the first
species of Bauhinia to be reported from the
Paleocene strata of the western States. One
doubtful species, B. pseudocotyledon Cockerell,
was described from the Oligocene lake beds at
Florissant, Colorado. Several species have been
identified in the Cretaceous and Eocene deposits
of the Atlantic and Gulf coasts.
This leaf resembles those of several living spe-
cies, of which there are about 150. They include
Aprit 1956 BROWN: CRETACEOUS AND TERTIARY FLORAS 105
LENORE
nll
aves SS
S < BIXIwTs
EMEA
4 A.
x Wi
y)
14 Wa,
Fie. 1.— Bauhinia wyomingana Brown, n. sp. Fia. 2.—Antholithes wellsi Brown, n.sp. Koelreuteria
annosa Brown, n. sp. Fras. 4, 5, 6.—Caesalpinia pacifica (Knowlton) Brown, n. comb. Fires. 7, 8, 9.—
Caesalpinia pecorae Brown, n. sp. Fras. 10, 11.—Counterparts of Atlanthus eureka Brown, n. sp. Fre. 12.
—Ailanthus lesquereuxi Cockerell. Fra. 13.—Schizaeopsis dentata Brown, n.sp. Fig. 14—Gletchenites
repenning’ Brown, n. sp. All figures natural size.
106
trees, shrubs, and vines, closely allied to the
redbuds, Cercis, and are found in the tropics and
subtropics around the world. Some species have
been introduced successfully as showy orna-
mentals in southern Florida and southern Cali-
fornia. Bauhinia wyomingana, therefore, adds a
bit of further evidence to that of palms, bread-
fruit, figs, and others, indicating warm climatic
conditions in early Paleocene time in parts of
the Rocky Mountain region.
Occurrence.—In lower lignitic strata of the
Fort Union formation (Paleocene), sec. 14, T.
57 N., R. 85 W., 214 miles northwest of Monarch,
Wyo. Collected by T. E. Wilhard, 1907.
Caesalpinia pacifica (Knowlton) Brown, n. comb.
Figs. 4, 5, 6
Quercus pacifica Knowlton, U. 8. Geological
Survey 20th Ann. Rept., pt. 3, p. 48, pl. 1, figs.
9, 10, 1900.
Asymmetric leaflets, 4 to 8 cm long with short,
glandular, cross-wrinkled petioles. Apex in
general rounded, only exceptionally emarginate.
Base rounded. Secondary veins numerous,
regular, with short intersecondaries and some
reticulation. The lowermost basal secondary
noticeably thickened.
This species differs from Caesalpinia pecorae
chiefly in having leaflets with rounded rather
than emarginate apexes. Otherwise, the resem-
blance is so striking as to suggest very close
affinity or even identity. It is significant that
both species are from formations regarded
reliably as being not older than middle Eocene in
age.
I have also collected this species from an
Eocene sequence exposed in cuts along the
Southern Pacific Railroad one to two miles
north of Comstock, Oreg. Sanborn (1937), al-
though reporting two species of Lonchocarpus
from large collections at the same locality, has
no other legumes and especially nothing def-
initely comparable to Caesalpinia pacifica.
Occurrence.—Knowlton’s specimens from yel-
lowish sandstone, NE 14 sec. 16, T. 388., R. 1 E.,
about 5 miles north of Ashland, Oreg. Collected
by J.S. Diller, 1898. Figs. 4, 5, 6, from an Eocene
lignitic sequence near the Hansen coal mine,
SW 14 sec. 3, T. 37 S., R. 1 W., about 4 miles
northeast of Medford, Oreg. Collected by R. W.
Brown et al., 1940.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 4
Caesalpinia pecorae Brown, n. sp.
Figs. 7, 8, 9
Asymmetric leaflets, 3 to 4 em. long, with
short, glandular, cross-wrinkled petioles. Apex in
general emarginate, only exceptionally rounded.
Base rounded. Secondary veins numerous,
regular, with short intersecondaries and some
reticulation.
Emarginate leaflets, such as these, occur in
many species of living and fossil legumes, notably
in Acacia, Cassia, Eysenhardtia, Mimosa,
Pithecellobium, Robinia, and Sophora. Assignment
of them to a given genus must, therefore, be
considered tentative until confirmatory evidence
like pods and seeds is found at the same localities.
In the meantime Caesalpinia is perhaps as good a
label as any. The genus has about 30 living
species distributed in the tropics and subtropics
around the world.
The species is named for William T. Pecora,
of the U. S. Geological Survey, to honor his
leadership, friendliness, and cooperation in
solving the stratigraphic and _ paleontologic
problems of the Bearpaw Mountains, Montana.
Occurrence.—Figs. 7, 9. In the upper strata of
the Green River formation (middle Eocene) on
the east side of the Bonanza to Watson road,
2.2 miles north of Watson, Utah. Collected by
R. W. Brown, 1941. Fig. 8. In tuffaceous middle
Kocene strata, SE 144 NW 14 sec. 11, T. 28 N.
R. 14 E., in the western foothills of Centennial
Mountain, Bearpaw Mountains, Mont. Collected
by R. W. Brown et al., 1954.
SIMARUBACEAE
Ailanthus eureka Brown, n. sp.
Figs. 10, 11
Leaflet notably asymmetric, lanceolate, 4 cm
long and 8 mm wide. Apex long attenuate. Lower
half of rounded base with one prominent glandu-
lar tooth, the margin otherwise entire. Secondary
veins more or less straight to the area near the
margin where they curve upward to join the
the secondary above. Few short intersecondaries
present. Petiole 2 mm long.
This leaflet, so far as I am aware from perusal
of the literature, is the first unequivocal fossil
foliage of Azlanthus to be reported. Its finding
marks the end of a long search. Hitherto, the
assignment of leaflets to the same species as well
recognized seeds from the same localities has left
much to be desired in that none of the leaflets so
assigned has clearly shown the characteristic
Aprit 1956
basal, glandular teeth (Brown, 1940, p. 351; 1946,
p. 350). All the features of this leaflet, however,
but particularly the glandular tooth, are con-
sonant with those seen in most species of living
Ailanthus, the one exception being A. excelsa
Roxburgh, which has toothed leaflets without
glands.
No samaras were found with this leaflet. Its
associates, however, are species of leaves and
fish like those found in the middle Eocene Green
River formation in Colorado, Utah, and Wyo-
ming, thereby attesting its Eocene age. On the
other hand, the beautiful samaras of Azilanthus
lesquereuxt Cockereil (Fig. 12) from the Green
River formation at Fossil, Wyoming, although
found with many other species of leaves, fruits,
and seeds, are not accompanied by leaflets clearly
assignable to Azlanthus. As the samaras of
Ailanthus found in many western Tertiary
deposits from the Eocene to the Miocene epochs
are very similar in features, they cannot well be
distinguished as separate species; but a number
of such species have been described. The question
now arises: Should the present leaflet be called
A. lesquereuxi or should it be a new species? I
choose the latter alternative, pending the finding
of samaras at the same locality, or the finding of
similar leaflets in the Green River formation, that
may show its true relationship to A. lesquereuat.
The leaflet is relatively small as compared with
those of living species. Perhaps it is abnormal and
not typical of its species. The finding of recog-
nizable Ailanthus leaflets in the Green River and
other Tertiary floras is, therefore, an eventuality
earnestly hoped for.
Why are these leaflets rare in the fossil record?
I can suggest in reply only the implications
hinted at in my observation of the leaves of
Ailanthus altissima (Miller) Swingle, the common
Asiatic tree-of-heaven, planted or escaped in
many parts of the north temperate zone. When
the large compound leaves fall they disintegrate
quickly, the leaflets remaining intact for only a
few days. On the ground they become fragile and
crumble easily. Unless, therefore, such leaflets
fortunately fall into water and are speedily
buried in bottom sands and muds, there is little
chance that they will be preserved as fossil
specimens.
Species of Atlanthus in the Tertiary record of
the western States, like those of Cercidiphyllum,
Ginkgo, Keteleeria, Koelreuteria, Metasequoia,
Pseudolarix, and many others, indicate a former
BROWN: CRETACEOUS AND TERTIARY FLORAS
107
widespread distribution in the North Temperate
zone of entities whose remaining relatives are
now restricted to indigenous Asiatic floras. The
presence of any one of these in a fossil flora from
the American west prompts an inspection of the
living Asiatic flora for possible matches to other
specimens seemingly unidentifiable in terms of
local or neighboring species.
Occurrence.—In_ tuffaceous middle Eocene
strata, SE 144 NW 14 sec. 11, T. 28 N., R14 E.,
in the western foothills of Centennial Mountain,
Bearpaw Mountains, Mont. Collected by R. W.
Brown et al., 1954.
SAPINDACEAE
Koelreuteria annosa Brown, n. sp.
Fig. 3
Capsular valve, 2.7 cm long and 1.8 em wide.
Elliptic in outline, with apex missing. Peduncle
5 mm long. Venation relatively simple, with a few
forks and anastomoses.
No foliage assignable to Koelreuteria was
found with this characteristic capsule. In size it
is somewhat smaller than that of K. nigricans
(Lesquereux) Brown (Brown, 1946, p. 350) from
the middle Eocene Green River formation, to
which, on account of its geographic contiguity,
it might have been closely related. K. annosa,
however, is from lignitic strata near the top of
the Fort Union formation (Paleocene) northeast
of Point of Rocks, Wyo.
Several species of Koelreuteria have been
recorded from the Tertiary rocks of the western
States, but this is the first from the Paleocene
series. It belongs with a group of species of
other genera whose living descendants or relatives
are now restricted to Asiatic habitats. One species,
K. paniculata Laxmann, the so-called goldrain-
tree, an exotic to the parks of the United States,
makes a showy display with its mass of golden
flowers and its Chinese lanternlike seed pods.
Occurrence.—In the upper lignitic strata of the
Fort Union formation (Paleocene), NW 14 SW
14 sec. 36, T. 21 N., R. 100 W., about 7 miles
northeast of Point of Rocks, Wyo. Collected by
William P. Severn, 1954.
UNCERTAIN
Antholithes wellsi Brown, n. sp.
Fig. 2
AFFINITY
Five-parted calyx or corolla, the parts united
at the base. Diameter 2 em. Central area de-
pressed to form a shallow cup. No evidence of
stamens or pistils.
108
Although numerous leaves were found asso-
ciated with these flowers, no definite suggestion
of relationship or identity has developed from
their study.
The species is named for Francis G. Wells,
of the U. 8S. Geological Survey, to honor his
long labors in elucidating the geology of Oregon.
Occurrence.—In an Eocene lgnitic sequence
near the Hansen coal mine, SW !4 sec. 3, T.
37 S., R. 1 W., about 4 miles northeast of Med-
ford, Oreg. Collected by R. W. Brown, 1954.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 4
REFERENCES
Brown, Rotanp W. New species and changes of
name in some American fossil floras. Journ.
Washington Acad. Sci. 30: 344-356. 1940.
. Alterations in some fossil and living floras.
Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 36: 344-355.
1946.
Sanporn, Eruent I. The Comstock flora of west
central Oregon. Carnegie Inst. Washington
Publ. 465: 1-28. 1937.
VELENOVSKY, J., and VINIKLAR, L. Flora Cretacea
Bohemiae. Rozpr. Geol. Ustavu Ceskosl.
Repub. no. 1. 1926.
oS
DR. JOHN G. THOMPSON RETIRES
Dr. John G. Thompson, chief of the Metallurgy
Division of the National Bureau of Standards,
has retired after more than 35 years of Govern-
ment service.
Born in Eau Claire, Wis., in 1894, Dr. Thomp-
son attended Cornell University, receiving his
bachelor of chemistry degree in 1915 and his
doctor of philosophy in 1921. His association
with the National Bureau of Standards began in
1921 when he became a member of the Chemistry
Division. From 1924 to 1929 he was employed as
a chemist and metallurgist at the Fixed Nitrogen
Laboratory of the Department of Agriculture on
problems in connection with the synthesis of
ammonia. He returned to the National Bureau
of Standards in 1929 as a research associate for
the Cerro de Pasco Copper Corporation and the
following year was appointed chief of the Chem-
ical Metallurgy Section. He was appointed
chief of the Metallurgy Division in 1946.
Dr. Thompson has made outstanding contri-
butions in fields of research pertaining to the
preparation of pure metals, the evaluation of
their properties, gases in metals, special refrac-
tories, corrosion, and powder metallurgy, and is
the author of more than 35 technical publications.
The results of his studies of bismuth and bismuth
alloys paved the way for industrial development
of fusible alloys containing bismuth. Dr. Thomp-
son was instrumental in developing a process
that involved chemical purification of an iron
salt and its subsequent conversion into oxide,
sponge, and melted ingots. By the use of this
process, he was successful in 19388 in producing
an iron of 99.99 percent purity, the highest
established purity to that time in this country or
abroad. His book The Metal—Iron (co-authored
with H. E. Cleaves) is an exceptionally valuable
reference and was the basic volume of the series
of monographs on alloys of iron sponsored by the
Engineering Foundation. He was successful in
extending the slip-casting process to the prepara-
tion of thin-wall crucibles of alumina, beryllia,
and other special refractories that lacked the
property of plasticity. Slip-cast beryllia crucibles
were used in preparing the ‘“‘super-pure”’ ingots
of iron. The results of his work served as the basis
for the production of slip-cast crucibles of special
refractories by other laboratories.
Dr. Thompson was the leader of an inter-
national cooperative study that established the
accuracy of the vacuum-fusion method for deter-
mining oxygen in the plain carbon steels, either
as aluminum-killed, silicon-killed, or rimmed.
He recommended procedures for obtaining opti-
mum results by this method and subsequently
extended its usefulness for determining oxygen in
alloy steels. The vacuum-fusion method is now
extensively used, not only as a tool for research
but commercially, as the ‘‘standard” for deter-
mining the oxygen content of steels and other
metals. During World War II he conducted re-
searches on beryllium-aluminum alloys under the
auspices of the War Metallurgy Committee; this
work received an award from the Office of Scien-
tific Research and Development. His study of
the metallurgy of beryllium and uranium for the
Manhattan Project was also recognized by an
award from the War Department.
Since World War II Dr. Thompson has been
honored by service as a Presidential appointment
member of Annual Assay Commission for 1950,
U.S. Mint, Philadelphia; member of the Ma-
terials Advisory Board of the National Research
Council; member of Advisory Committee on Re-
vision of New York State Industrial Code No. 21;
chairman, Washington Chapter, American So-
ciety for Metals; and conferee, First World
Metallurgical Congress, 1951. He has served on
many technical committees of various engineering
societies. He is an active member of the American
Society for Metals, American Institute of Mining
and Metallurgical Engineers, American Society
for Testing Materials, National Association of
Corrosion Engineers, British Iron and Steel
Institute, British Institute of Metals, wasHING-
TON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, Sigma Xi, and the
Cosmos Club.
Aprit 1956
SOHNS: CALAMOCHLOA;: A MEXICAN
GRASS 109
BOTANY —Calamochloa: A Mexican grass. ERNest R. Souns, U. 8. National
Museum. (Communicated by Agnes Chase.)
The genus Calamochloa was described by
Fournier (1877). His brief description was
based on the single collection by the French
mineralogist Pierre Virlet d’Aoust, no. 1461,
from San Luis Potosi, Mexico, without pre-
cise locality. Other than the type specimen
in the Paris Museum and a fragment and
photograph brought to the U. S. National
Herbarium in 1922 by Mrs. Chase, the genus
remained unknown from 1877 to 1954, when
I collected it at three stations in the Sierra
de Guadaledzar, between Charco Blanco,
Aguaje de Garcia and the Minas de San Ra-
fael (Figs. 18, 19), on Cretaceous limestone
outcrops.
The original description of the genus by
Fournier (1877) was very brief, as follows
[translated]:
Glumes subequal, the lower shorter; flowers 3,
of which 2 are pilose around the base, the summit
less so; lemma 5-lobed, lateral and intermediate
lobes subulate, palea 2-toothed, panicle ovate,
influorescence 4-5 spicate.
The glumes of this genus have the same struc-
ture as several of those in the Chlorideae, notably
those of the section Heterostega of the genus
Atheropogon, but the location of the lemma with
respect to the rachis removes the genus from the
Chlorideae. The hairs of the rachis and its ap-
pearance, suggests Calamagrostis, among [the
species of] which one would, at first view, try to
place Calamochloa filifolia.
The short description of the genus, quoted
in the second and third paragraph, was used
again by Fournier (1886). In this work he
described C. filifolia as follows [translated]:
Culms strict, sheaths striate, glabrous; ligule
pilose; blades linear, glaucous, convolute; panicle
ovate and terminal; glumes subequal, the upper
broadly mucronate, median nerve prominent;
lemma 5-lobed [as in] Polyschistidis, palea trun-
cate, plicate, obscurely 2-dentate, 14 shorter, base
and margin villous.
The rather inadequate description and the
fact that the species was represented only by
the type specimen, consisting of the upper
portions of two or three culms and _ their
pistillate inflorescences, led to uncertainty
about the genus and its tribal affiliation.
Hackel (1887, 1890) put the genus in the
tribe Festuceae, subtribe Pappophoreae.
Bews (1929) keys the genus in the Festu-
ceae, lists the author and the single species
in Mexico. Rozhevits (1937) included the
genus in the tribe Pappophoreae along with
Scleropogon, Cathestecum, Enneapogon and
other genera. Conzatti (1946) put the genus
in the tribe Chlorideae between the genera
Tripogon and Levtochloa. The origin of the
generic name is given in addition to the
known information about the genus. Pilger
(1954) placed the genus in the tribe Festu-
ceae, subtribe Festucinae with the notation,
“Doubtful genus,” and in the tribe Aveneae,
subtribe Aveninae with the statement:
“Genus of doubtful position.”
After a study of the type material and the
specimens collected in the Sierra de Guadal-
cazar, it is concluded that the genus belongs
in the tribe Pappophoreae (Rozhevits (1937)
and Hubbard (1934)).
Calamochloa Fournier—Emended. Plants di-
oecious. Staminate spikelets 3-5 flowered, the
rachilla glabrous and not disarticulating between
the florets; glumes about equal in length, 2.8-4.1
mm long, 3-awned, the awns short; palea as
long as the lemma or slightly shorter; stamens
3, large, well-developed; pistil rudimentary;
lodicules 2, membranaceous. Pistillate spikelets
mostly 3-flowered; rachilla disarticulating tardily,
the florets usually falling together; glumes about
equal, 3.5-7 mm long, 1-nerved, glabrous except
slightly scaberulous on the keel toward the tip
and over the back; lemma (first floret) to 7 mm
long, pilose on the margins and on each side of
the median nerve from about 1 mm above the
base to the base of the central awn, 3-awned, the
awns prominent, subulate and diverging at
maturity; callus pilose; palea as long as the
lemma or very slightly shorter; pistil well-de-
veloped; stamens 3, rudimentary; lodicules 2,
membranaceous. Tufted perennials forming
tough clumps in dry soil, with long, flat blades
which become flexuous and involute on drying.
Inflorescences spreading in anthesis, later be-
coming narrow and compact. Name presumably
from kalamos, cane and chloa, grass.
Calamochloa filifolia -Emended.
Staminate plants: Perennial, densely tufted, the
old bases persistent, 80-100 em tall; culms from
Fournier
Le
iz
ita —
LEA
<Q
Fres. 1-8.—Calamochloa filifolia Fournier: 1, Habit sketch of pistillate plant, X 19; 2, Pit, with
portion of blade and sheath (median longitudinal section); 3, spikelet (from type specimen, Virlet, no.
1461); 4, lower floret (from type specimen, Virlet, no. 1461); 5, lower floret; 6, palea with rachilla joint
and pistil; 7, pistil and stamens of lower floret; 8, pistil, stamens and lodicules of second floret. (Figs.
2-8, X 7; all figures, except 3 and 4, drawn from Sohns, nos. 1352 and 1506.)
110
111
SOHNS: CALAMOCHLOA: A MEXICAN GRASS
APRIL 1956
Ss are 2
Ny
NESS
TS
AS
iS
N
Scale /
1:1000000 _,
/
/, oa
’ San Luis Potosi y
Fias. 9-20.—Calamochloa filifolia Fournier: 9, Inflorescence of staminate plant, X '6; 10, ligule with
portion of blade and sheath (median longitudinal section); 11, spikelet; 72, second and third florets;
13, first floret with rachilla joint; 14, first glume; 15, second glume; 16, lemma of first floret; 17, palea;
18, stamens, rudimentary pistil and lodicules of first floret; 19, outline map of northern Mexico; 20,
approximate locality of C. filifolia (marked by an ‘‘x’’ in a circle). (Figs. 10-18, X 7; drawn from Sohns,
no. 1406; fig. 20 based on 1938 edition of a map of the State of San Luis Potosi prepared by the Direccion
de Geografia Meterologia e Hidrologia, Mexico.)
112
slightly short pubescent to densely pubescent
and short appressed pilose below the nodes;
blades 10-36 cm long, flat in living specimens,
involute when dry, antrorsely scabrous on both
surfaces; sheaths glabrous, longer than the
internodes; ligule a ciliate rim, 0.7-1 mm long,
pilose on the margins near the junction of the
blade and sheath, auricles sometimes present as
a straight upward prolongation of the margin of
the sheath; inflorescence 7-20 cm long, axis and
branches pubescent, branches spreading in
anthesis, contracted later, short pubescent in the
axils; spikelets 5 to 9 mm long, 3-5-flowered,
spreading slightly at maturity; rachilla joints
short pilose below the floret (base of callus and
rachilla joint), otherwise glabrous; first glume
2.8-3.4 mm long, glabrous, 1-nerved, the median
nerve often projecting beyond the tip 0.1-0.2
mm; second glume 2.8-4.1 mm long, otherwise
as the first glume; lemma of the first floret 5-5.5
mm long, glabrous, 3-awned from below the
summit, the awns 1-2 mm long and slightly
exceeding the lemma, antrorsely scabrous; palea
as long as the lemma or slighty shorter, with a
slight membranous wing on each keel; lodicules 2,
membranaceous; stamens 3, pollen grains large
and well-developed; pistil rudimentary, 0.2-0.5
mm long.
Pistillate plants: Perennial, cespitose, form-
ing hard persistent clumps, 40-100 cm tall;
blades 18 to 40 cm long, flat, flexuous, becoming
involute and curled when dry, antrorsely scabrous
on both surfaces; culms finely pubescent and short
appressed-pilose, especially at the nodes; sheaths
glabrescent, longer than the imternodes, some-
times with an auricle, especially on the lower
sheaths; ligule a ciliate rim 0.8 to 1 mm long;
hairs abundant at the margins of the ligule on the
collar, up to 2.6 mm long; inflorescence 8-21 cm
long, axis pubescent, branches spreading at
anthesis, later appressed, pubescent and _ short-
pilose; panicle branches short-pilose in the axils;
spikelets mostly 10-12 mm long, 3-flowered, the
uppermost rudimentary; rachilla joints short and
glabrous; first glume 3.5-6.5 mm long, 1-nerved,
scaberulous on the keel toward the tip and over
the back; second glume 4.7-7 mm long, other-
wise like the first glume; lemma of the first floret
about 7 mm long, pilose on the margins and on
each side of the median nerve from about 1 mm
above the base to the base of the diverging cen-
tral awn; 3-awned, the awns subulate, antrorsely
scabrous and diverging at maturity; palea as long
as or slightly shorter than the lemma; lodicules 2,
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 4
membranaceous; stamens 3, 0.2-0.3 mm long,
apparently non-functional; pistil well-developed;
stigmata plumose. Mature caryopses were not
found,
The emended description is based on
these specimens in the U. 8. National Her-
barium:
San Luis Porosf (staminate plants): In the
Sierra de Guadalc4zar between Charco Blanco
and Aguaje de Garcia; alt. 1100-1600 m; Septem-
ber 20, 1954, Sohns 1340 and 1352a; September
24, 1954, Sohns 1460a. On the northeastern slopes
of hills near Aguaje de Garcia in the Sierra de
Guadaledzar; alt. 1800 m; October 1, 1954,
Sohns 1487 and 1498. Near the Minas de San
Rafael in the Sierra de Guadaledzar; alt. 1900-
2100 m; October 3, 1954, Sohns 1506a.
San Luis Porosf (pistillate plants): In the
Sierra de Guadaledzar between Charco Blanco
and Aguaje de Garcia; alt. 1100-1600 m; Septem-
ber 20, 1954, Sohns 1352; September 24, 1954,
Sohns 1460. On the northeastern slopes of hills
near Aguaje de Garcia in the Sierra de Guadal-
cAzar; alt. 1800 m; October 1, 1954, Sohns 1488.
Near the Minas de San Rafael in the Sierra de
Guadalcdzar; alt. 1900-2100 m; October 3,
1954, Sohns 1506.
SUMMARY
Calamochloa filifolia Fournier, a rare genus
of one species is redescribed and illustrated.
The species, collected in the Sierra de Gua-
dalcazar after a lapse of 77 years, is dioeci-
ous and apparently a highly restricted en-
demic. The genus belongs in the tribe
Pappophoreae.
LITERATURE CITED
Brews, J. W. The world’s grasses: 106, 168. Lon-
don, 1929.
Conzatti, C. Flora taxonica Mexicana 1: 279,
292. 1946.
Fournier, E. Calamochloa, nov. gen. Bull.
Soc. Bot. France 24: 178. 1877.
Mexicanas plantas, pt. 2: 102. Ex
Typographeo Republicae, Parisiis, 1886.
HackeL, E. Gramineae (echte Griser). Die
natiirlichen Pflanzenfamilien 2: 62, 65. 1887.
-. The true grasses: 136, 156. [Translated
from Die natiirlichen Pflanzenfamilien by F.
Lamson-Scribner and E. A. Southworth.]
New York, 1890.
Husparp, C. E. Gramineae, in Hutchinson, J.
The families of flowering plants 2: 208. 19384.
Pincer, R. Das System der Gramineae. Bot.
Jahrb. 76: 305, 322. 1954.
Rozuevits, R. Yu. Grasses: 414, 416. Moscow, 1937.
Ey
ApRIL 1956 SMITH: SOUTH
AMERICAN
PLANTS 113
BOTANY .—Studies of South American plants, XVI. A. C. Smiru, U.S. National
Museum.
A recent collection of plants made in
Peru and Ecuador by Dr. Werner Rauh,
Botanisches Institut, Heidelberg, and _ his
associate Dr. Gerhard Hirsch, has disclosed
three species of the family Vacciniaceae
not previously described. The material upon
which the following descriptions are based is
deposited in the U. 8S. National Herbarium.
Sphyrosperum venustum, sp. nov.
Frutex gracilis terrestris ad 50 cm _ altus,
ramulis glabris elongatis 1.5-3 mm _ diametro
basis versus foliorum valde confertorum conspicue
incrassatis; stipulis pro genere egregiis binis
intrapetiolaribus filiformibus 2-4 mm longis mox
caducis; petiolis inconspicuis haud 1 mm longis
canaliculatis glabris; laminis in sicco papyraceis
fusco-viridibus forsan in vivo carnosis, elliptico-
obovatis, 12-16 mm longis, 4-7 mm latis, basi
obtusis, apice rotundatis, margine incrassatis
leviter recurvatis, Juventute ubique minute
puberulis mox glabratis, costa et nervis in sicco
utrinque paullo elevatis inconspicuis, nervis
secundariis utrinsecus saepe 3 adscendentibus,
rete venularum obscuro immerso; inflorescentia
axillari 1-flora quam foliis breviore, rhachi
subnulla, bracteis sub floribus paucis, 2 intimis
lanceolatis circiter 1 mm longis acutis obscure
ciliolatis, pedicellis haud 0.5 mm longis superne
incrassatis apicem versus obscure glanduloso-
pilosis (pilis fuscis ad 0.2 mm longis); calyce
pilis paucis obscuris limbo et loborum margine
exceptis glabro sub anthesi circiter 3 mm longo
et 2 mm diametro, tubo cupuliformi obscure
10-gono circiter 1 xX 1 mm limbo suberecto
papyraceo 5-lobato, lobis deltoideis acutis
circiter 1 mm longis et latis, sinibus rotundatis;
disco annulari-pulvinato glabro; corolla glabra
tenuiter carnosa cylindrico-urceolata sub anthesi
circiter 8 mm longa et medium versus 3 mm
diametro, basi valde contracta, lobis 5 deltoideis
acutis circiter 1 mm longis; staminibus 5 quam
corolla paullo brevioribus, filamentis ligulatis
circiter 2.5 mm longis supra medium gradatim
angustatis et superne intus minute pilosis, extus
glabris, antheris circiter 4.8 mm longis; thecis
longitudine tubulos subaequentibus basi rotun-
datis, tubulis gracilibus per rimas ovales circiter
1 mm longas dehiscentibus; stylo gracili corollam
fere aequante, stigmate minuto.
Type in the U. 8S. National Herbarium, no.
2180834, collected between Chimborazo and
Guaranda, Province of Bolfvar, Ecuador, alt.
3,000 m, in upper zone of the “‘ceja de la
montana,” September 20, 1954, by W. Rauh &
G. Hirsch (no. 388).
The graceful species here described is remark-
ably isolated, but Sphyrospermum seems to be
the best generic position for it. The crowded
leaves, the branchlets conspicuously swollen at
the leaf bases, and the peculiar filiform stipules
are striking characteristics. The small, elliptic-
obovate, rounded leaf blades and the solitary
subsessile flowers with only five stamens further
separate the new species from its congeners. The
reduced number of stamens occurs elsewhere in
Sphyrospermum, as well as in the related genera
Themistoclesia and FEleutherostemon, but no
species with this character are suggestive of
S. venustum.
Ceratostema callistum, sp. nov.
Frutex epiphyticus 30-50 cm altus, ramis
tubere magno ad 20 cm diametro enatis, ramulis
subteretibus copiose canescente-hispidulis (pilis
gracilibus 1-2 mm longis eglandulosis ad apices
ramulorum cum pilis graciliter clavatis glan-
dulosis aequilongis intermixtis); stipulis intra-
petiolaribus binis e basi incrassata subulatis
3-5 mm longis ut ramulis hispidulis; petiolis
incrassatis rugulosis 4-5 mm _ longis _pariter
hispidulis; foliorum laminis subcoriaceis in
sicco brunneo-viridibus ovatis, 6-9 cm longis,
3.5-5 em latis, basi cordatis, in acuminem
callosum 1—1.5 em. longum gradatim angustatis,
margine planis paullo incrassatis, supra molliter
pilosis (pilis haud 0.3 mm longis) ac etiam
parciore glanduloso-pilosis (pilis ad 0.8 mm
longis) demum glabrescentibus, subtus pariter
pilosis sed pilis longioribus (ad 1 mm) et per-
sistentibus, pinnatinerviis, costa supra leviter
impressa subtus elevata, nervis — lateralibus
utrinsecus plerumque 38 inconspiculs curvatis
subplanis, nervis intimis cum costa 1-2 em
concurrentibus, rete venularum immerso; inflo-
rescentiis apices ramulorum versus axillaribus
racemosis ut videtur 4-8-floris breviter peduncu-
latis, rhachi pedicellisque pilis debilibus pallidis
0.4-0.8 mm _ longis molliter pubescentibus ac
etiam pilis anguste clavatis glandulosis aequi-
114
longis parciore ornatis, rhachi subtereti ad 5 cm
longa; bracteis sub floribus papyraceis lanceolatis
5-8 mm longus extus ut pedicellis pubescentibus
intus glabris, pedicellis sub anthesi 10-18 mm
longis cum calyce articulatis medium versus
bibracteolatis, bracteolis bracteis similibus; calyce
sub anthesi 22-25 mm longo apice circiter 15 mm
diametro ubique ut pedicellis glanduloso- et
eglanduloso-pilosis sed pilis brevioribus, tubo
cupiliformi circiter 5 mm longo et diametro, limbo
suberecto papyraceo reticulato-nervato profunde
5-lobato, lobis lanceolatis 14-17 mm longis; disco
cupuliformi glabro crenulato-marginato; corolla
tenuiter carnosa cylindrica circiter 45 mm longa
et basim versus 6 mm diametro, superne paullo
angustata, extus ut calyce molliter pilosa sed
tantum superne glandulosa, intus glabra,
profunde 5-lobata, lobis subulato-lanceolatis
circiter 10-12 mm longis; staminibus 10 sub
anthesi leviter exsertis, filamentis membranaceis
glabris circiter 7 mm longis in tubum cohaeren-
tibus, antheris circiter 40 mm longis thecis
conspicue granulatis circiter 11 mm longis basi
mucronulatis et incurvatis, tubulis circiter
29 mm longis gracillimis (superne haud 0.15 mm
diametro) per poros ovales subapicales circiter
1 mm longos dehiscentibus; stylo _ filiformi
leviter exserto, stigmate minuto.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no.
2180858, collected near the Hacienda Taulis,
near Chiclayo, Valle Rfo Safia, Department of
Lambayeque, Peru, alt. 2,500 m, October 13,
1954, by W. Rauh & G. Hirsch (no. 2186).
Dr. Rauh states that there is a beautiful forest
composed chiefly of Podocarpus near the Hacienda
Taulis, this being the only substantial wooded
section in the entire region. The new species is a
frequent epiphyte here, its branches arising
from a large tuber up to 20 cm in diameter. The
corolla is said to be carmine-red without and
greenish within.
This very distinct species of Ceratostema,
compared with my recent key to the 16 known
species (in Mem. New York Bot. Gard. 8: 57.
1952), is seen to be closely related only to
C. peruvianum Gmel. and C. pensile (A. C. Sm.)
A. C. Sm., from both of which it is at once
distinguished by its narrowly lanceolate calyx
lobes. From C. peruvianum the new species
further differs in its more copious and often
glandular indument, its less deeply cordate leaf
blades, which are acuminate rather than obtuse
at apex, and in its terete rather than costate
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 4
calyx tube. Our plant is obviously distinct from
C. pensile in its more copious foliar indument
and in its narrowly lanceolate rather than
broadly ovate inflorescence bracts and bracteoles.
Ceratostema callistum is the only species of
the genus positively known to occur in Peru,
although it is probable that some of the Ecua-
dorian species actually extend southward.
Thibaudia rauhii, sp. nov.
Frutex 0.3-1 m altus ut videtur epiphyticus et
tubere magno enatus, ramulis subteretibus
gracilibus apices versus 1.5-2 mm _ diametro,
partibus juvenilibus copiose pilosis (pilis albidis
circiter 1 mm _ longis) mox glabrescentibus;
stipulis intrapetiolaribus subulatis circiter 2 mm
longis pilosis evanescentibus; petiolis leviter
canaliculatis 3-3.5 mm longis ut ramulis pub-
escentibus, laminis subcoriaceis in sicco viridibus
oblongo-ovatis, 3-4 cm longis 1.3-1.7 em latis,
basi anguste rotundatis, apice obtusis, margine
integris anguste recurvatis, utrinque molliter
pilosis (pilis albis 0.3-0.8 mm _ longis supra
evanescentibus subtus persistentibus) ac etiam
subtus parce nigro-glanduloso-pilosis, costa
supra leviter impressa subtus prominente, nervis
secundariis utrinsecus plerumque 2 adscendenti-
bus utrinque inconspicue elevatis, rete venularum
immerso; inflorescentia subfasciculata 2—4-flora
pilis albis 0.5-1 mm longis ubique copiose
molliter pilosa, basi bracteis paucis deltoideo-
lanceolatis ad 3.5 mm _ longis circumdata;
pedicellis teretibus sub anthesi 6-9 mm _ longis
basim versus bibracteolatis, bracteolis lanceolatis
circiter 5 mm longis caducis; calyce sub anthesi
7-7.5 mm longo et apice diametro, tubo cupuli-
formi circiter 3 mm longo et diametro, limbo
erecto-patente quam tubo manifeste longiore
5-lobato, lobis late deltoideis circiter 1 mm
longis acutis; disco annulari-pulvinato glabro;
corolla rubra tenuiter carnosa subeylindrica
sub anthesi 15-16 mm. longa et medium versus
circiter 6 mm diametro, extus praeter basim
versus copiose pilosa, intus glabra, lobis breviter
deltoideis obtusis; staminibus 10 circiter 10 mm
longis, filamentis glabris in tubum circiter 3 mm
longum laxe connatis, antheris circiter 8 mm
longis, loculis basi incurvatis, tubulis gracilibus
2.5-3 mm longis (quam thecis brevioribus),
rimis elongatis; stylo quam corolla breviore,
stigmate parvo peltato. :
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no.
2180848, collected in the valley of the Rfo
Aprit 1956
Marecapata, near Cuzco, Department of Cuzco,
Peru, alt. 2,800 m, May 22, 1954, in “‘ceja de la
montana,” by W. Rauh & G. Hirsch (no. 1329).
The new species is closely related only to
T. regularis A. C. Sm., of southern Peru, and
T. densiflora (Herzog) A. C. Sm., of Bolivia.
NOTES AND NEWS
115
It differs from both of these in its somewhat
smaller and inconspicuously nerved leaf blades,
which are rounded at base and obtuse at apex,
and in its subfasciculate few-flowered inflor-
escences, with short pedicels, comparatively large
and copiously pilose corollas, and longer stamens.
NOTES AND NEWS
ROGER G. BATES RECEIVES HILLEBRAND
; AWARD
The 1955 Hillebrand Award was given to
Roger G. Bates (WAS), of the National Bureau of
Standards. The citation is for his studies of the
thermodynamic properties of electrolytic solu-
tions and standardization of the pH scale.
The Hillebrand Award was established in 1925
in honor of William F. Hillebrand, chief chemist
of the National Bureau of Standards from 1908
to 1925. Dr. Hillebrand was an authority on
analytical chemistry and famous for the
development of systematic methods for the
complete analysis of rocks and ores. The award
is made each year to a member of the Chemical
Society of Washington who has made a notable
and original contribution to chemistry during
the preceding five years.
FURTHER NOTES ON TEACHER TRAINING
A new and unique program to assist secondary
schools in science teaching has been announced
by the Oak Ridge Institute of Nuclear Studies,
Oak Ridge, Tenn. The program, which is jointly
sponsored by the National Science Foundation
and the U. S. Atomic Energy Commission, and
administered by the Institute, will enable a
selected group of high-school teachers to undergo a
three-month course of training in Oak Ridge and
then spend nine months in traveling about the
country giving lecture demonstrations in science
classes at individual high schools. The results
of this experiment will be used by the NSF for
program planning and for considering future
support of this method of attack on increasing
the number of highly able young people in
science and engineering.
The program is the latest of several developed
by ORINS to stimulate interest in science and
science education as a means to help in meeting
the steadily increasing demand for scientifically
trained personnel in all fields of research and
development. The Institute is a nonprofit
educational corporation owned by 34 Southern
universities, operating under direct contract
with the AEC.
The new teaching program, which is ad-
ministered by the ORINS University Relations
Division, will operate generally as follows:
A group of eight to ten secondary-school
science teachers will be selected on a national
basis by ORINS with the recommendation and
advice of a selection committee which will
include, among others, high-school teachers and
administrators. Beginning with the summer of
this year, this group will receive leaves of absence
from their respective schools for the academic
year only, returning to their normal teaching
positions in September of 1957.
The Oak Ridge program will begin with the
group’s participation in a four-week institute to
be held at the ORINS Special Training Division
in Oak Ridge. This institute, similar to one held
in the summer of 1955 under NSF sponsorship,
is designed to provide its participants with
up-to-date reviews of scientific developments,
classical and modern, stressing that science
should be taught as a whole, rather than as a
series of highly specialized and unrelated tech-
nologies. Both lecture and laboratory work will
be included in the curriculum; the topics to be
covered include classical and modern physics,
chemistry,
experiments, science-teaching and
radioisotope techniques. A number of outstanding
authorities in various fields of physical science
will assist the ORINS staff in presenting the
institute, which will include other secondary-
the total
matehmatics, engineering, science
methods,
science teachers, to bring
enrollment to 48.
school
116
During the four weeks following the institute,
which will end early in July, the selected group
will participate in a program designed to acquaint
its members with modern laboratory techniques
and experiments. This period will include visits
to specific laboratories, work with demonstration
equipment, supervised self-training, and some
practice teaching.
The third phase of the program will send
the teachers “‘on the road.’’ Each one will be
provided with a station wagon and demonstration
equipment consisting of easily transportable
classroom aids in physics and chemistry. Until
the end of May 1957 the teachers will spend their
working days visiting high schools in the areas
assigned to them, giving classroom demonstration
lectures at the sophomore-junior level. It is
anticipated that each teacher will spend one week
at a single high school, where he may give two to
three lectures per day three to five days during
the school week. The teacher might also be
available for consultation with other science
teachers or school administrators.
It is estimated that the total number of high
schools reached by this program in one academic
year will be between 200 and 250.
A particularly pleasant feature of the program
will be the assignment of each teacher to a
district where he may use his home town as a base
of operations, thus enabling him to spend his
week ends and possibly many evenings with his
family. The touring portion of the program will
end late in May 1957. From then until June 15,
the teachers will prepare individual reports on
the program and will participate in an evaluation
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 46, No. 4 .
study. It is also planned that, at the conclusion of
the program, the demonstration equipment will
be presented to the science departments of the
high schools whose representatives participated
in the program.
During the academic year, the touring teachers
will receive a stipend at least equal to their regular
teaching salaries. In addition, it is planned to
provide a travel allowance to cover expenses
while the various schools are being visited. The
stipends and travel expenses will be paid by
the NSF.
The traveling-teacher program, in common
with other programs of the Oak Ridge Institute of
Nuclear Studies, is designed to help overcome the
distressing disparity between the nation’s need
for well-trained science teachers and scientifically
trained personnel and the present and future
supply of such personnel as indicated by enrol-
ments in science courses in our universities,
colleges, and secondary schools. The urgent need
for implementing our present science-education
programs has been strongly stressed in recent
speeches by Lewis L. Strauss, chairman of the
U. 8S. Atomic Energy Commission, Dr. Alan T.
Waterman, director of the National Science
Foundation, and other outstanding leaders in
research and education. It is hoped that the new
program will act as an educational ‘chain
reaction” to stimulate interest in all phases of
science on the part of our nation’s high-school
students, and at the same time provide an
ever-increasing supply of science teachers
capable of supplying up-to-the-minute informa-
tion in science to their pupils.
It is also true that man sees more of the things themselves when he sees more
of their origin; for their origin is a part of them and indeed the most important
part of them. Thus they become more extraordinary by being explained. He
has more wonder at them but less fear of them; for a thing is really wonderful
when it rs significant and not when it is insignificant—G. K. CHESTERTON,
St. Francis of Assist.
|
Aprit 1956
HOBBS: A NEW
CRAYFISH 117
ZOOLOGY .—A new crayfish of the genus Procambarus from South Carolina
(Decapoda: Astacidae). Horton H. Hosss, Jr., Samuel Miller Biological
Laboratories, University of Virginia
The first specimen of the species described
here was collected on February 4, 1934, by
L. M. Mace from near Barnwell, Barnwell
County, S. C. Since that time a number of
attempts have been made to secure a series
of specimens on which to base the description
of the species as well as to ascertain the
extent of its range. These attempts have
met with only slight success, for at the
present there are but 118 specimens available
from seven localities. On the basis of these
collections it may be said that Procambarus
echinatus occurs in the Salkehatchie River
and in the headwater streams of the Edisto
River in Bamberg, Barnwell, and Aiken
Counties, 8. C.
The closest relative of Procambarus
echinatus appears to be Procambarus dupratzi
Penn (1953: 1), which is reported to occur in
eastern Texas and western Louisiana. These
occupy, respectively, the most eastern and
western limits of the range of the Spiculifer
Group, and with Procambarus natchitochae
Penn (1953: 5), the range of which appears
to be confined to southern Arkansas and
northern Louisiana, probably represent more
nearly the ancestral stock of the group than
do the remaining species. Consequently, it
appears that the more ‘‘primitive’’ members
are occupying the periphery of the range
of the group.
Because at present Dr. George H. Penn is
conducting a study of speciation in the
Spiculifer Group, no attempt is made to
summarize the ranges of the other species:
P. spiculifer (LeConte, 1856: 401), P.
versutus (Hagen, 1870: 51), P. vioscai Penn
(1946: 27), P. penni Hobbs (1951: 273),
RP. suttkusi Hobbs (1953a: 173), and P.
raneyt Hobbs (1953b: 412).
I wish to acknowledge with thanks the
kindness of Dr. Penn in lending me two lots of
specimens from the Tulane Collection and of
Dr. G. Robert Lunz, Jr., formerly of the
Charleston Museum, who lent me the first
specimen of this new species I had seen.
Also I express my appreciation to the
following who have aided me in securing
. (Communicated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.)
specimens of this new species: Dr. R. D.
Suttkus, Dr. W. R. West, E. A. Crawford,
and T. R. Bello.
Procambarus echinatus,! n. sp.
Diagnosis.—Rostrum with lateral spines;
acumen spiculiform and constituting 41.6—52.0
percent of the total length of the rostrum;
postorbital ridges terminating in spines; sub-
orbital angle absent; lateral surface of carapace
with two or more spines present just caudad to
cervical groove; areola 2.5-4.2 times longer than
broad and constituting 21.3-27.4 percent of
entire length of carapace. Simple hooks present
on ischiopodites of third and fourth pereiopods
that extend proximad of distal end of respective
basipodites, neither of the latter of which bears
an opposable tubercle. First pleopod of first form
male (Figs. 1, 5) terminating in four parts:
mesial process subspiculiform with only the tip
corneous; cephalic process corneous, slender and
lying laterad of the central projection; caudal
element represented by a_ truncate poorly
defined caudal knob from which arises the
subacute, scalelike, corneous caudal process;
central projection, the most conspicuous of the
terminal elements corneous, subacute and
directed at an angle of about 70° to the main shaft
of the appendage. Annulus ventralis (Fig. 12),
slightly movable and partially concealed by the
underhanging multituberculate sternum lying
immediately cephalad of it, more than twice as
long as broad; a transverse cephalically situated
ridge is interrupted by a longitudinal median
furrow which continues caudally as the sinuous
sinus almost to the midcaudal margin of the
annulus; the fossa lies near the median line
immediately caudad of the transverse ridge.
Holotypic male, form I.—Body — subovate,
slightly compressed laterally; abdomen shorter
than carapace (59.2-64.0 mm). Height and
width of carapace subequal in region of caudo-
dorsal margin of cervical groove (30.0-29.5 mm).
Areola relatively broad and short, about 4.2
times as long as wide with nine fine punctations
' Echinatus, Latin, set with prickles, prickly.
Chosen because of the well-developed spines on
the carapace and cheliped of this species.
118
in narrowest part. Cephalic section of carapace
about 2.5 times as long as areola (length of areola
about 28.3 percent of entire length of carapace).
Rostrum long with acumen extending beyond
peduncle of antennule, excavate; sides convex
and terminating at base of acumen in acute
cephalolaterally directed spines. Acumen longer
than half the remainder of rostrum (10.1 mm).
Margins of rostrum not swollen or conspicuously
elevated. Upper surface with a few minute
punctations. Subrostral ridges poorly developed
and not evident in dorsal aspect.
Postorbital ridges prominent, tuberculate,
grooved dorsolaterad, and terminating cephalad
in acute spines. Suborbital angle absent; branchio-
stegal spine well developed. Each side of carapace
with a row of seven to nine tubercles and spines
immediately caudad of cervical groove; upper
surface of carapace punctate and lateral surface
very strongly granulate.
Cephalic section of telson with two spines in
each caudolateral corner. Epistome with a
small cephalomedian spine (see fig. 3).
Antennules of the usual form with a strong
acute spine present on ventral side of basal
segment.
Antennae broken (see description of allotype
and morphotype). Antennal scale long, mod-
erately broad; widest slightly proximad of
midlength; outer distal margin with a moderately
strong spine.
Chela somewhat depressed with the palm
somewhat inflated; outer margin of hand slightly
concave at base of immovable finger. Hand
entirely tuberculate. Inner margin of palm
with a row of eight tubercles; a row of four
tubercles immediately above this row and a
single tubercle below it near distal end; a mod-
erately prominent knoblike tubercle present on
lower surface of palm at base of dactyl. Opposable
margin of dactyl with a row of 20 knoblike
tubercles, fourth from base largest but not
forming a distinct emargination; upper surface
of dactyl with no distinct longitudinal ridge but
with tubercles proximad and setiferous puncta-
tions distad; mesial margin of dactyl with a
row of 10 tubercles that diminish in size distally;
lower surface of dactyl similar to upper surface.
Opposable margin of immovable finger deeply
concave with an upper row of 19 tubercles, the
fifth from base largest, and a distal lower row of
six of which the second from base is largest;
minute denticles between the tubercles of each
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, NO. 4
row and between the two rows; upper surface of
immovable finger with a distinct submedian
longitudinal ridge flanked proximally by tubercles
and distally by setiferous punctations; lateral
surface of immovable finger convex (i.e., distal
two-thirds of finger bent mesiad) with tubercles
along basal one-third, and distal two thirds
with a row of setiferous punctations; lower
surface of finger similar to upper surface.
Carpus of first right pereiopod with a broad
longitudinal depression flanked on each side by
tubercles in poorly defined rows; submedian
furrow interrupted distally by a small tubercle
near distal margin of podomere. Mesial surface
with one large submedian tubercle with a few
smaller ones at base and one large one on upper
distal margin; below the large submedian
tubercle just mentioned are four somewhat
smaller ones; lower distal margin with the
usual two large tubercles with a row of three
small ones proximad of the more mesial tubercle;
lateral surface with punctations and a few
scattered tubercles.
Merus of first right pereiopod with a few
small tubercles and _ scattered punctations
on lateral surface; upper surface with tubercles
along entire length, except near distal extremity,
with two of the more distal ones larger than
the others; mesial surface with a few tubercles
distally and somewhat excavate along middle
three-fifths, producing a longitudinal furrow
near lower margin. Lower surface with two
rows of spikelike tubercles, an outer one of 5
and an inner one of 13; two or three additional
small tubercles present between and to the
sides of these two rows.
Ischiopodite of first right pereiopod with a
row of four tubercles continuing from the lower
mesial row on merus.
Basipodite of first right pereiopod without
tubercles.
Coxopodite of first right pereiopod with no
cephalically projecting spine but with a small
caudally projecting one on caudomesial angle.
Hooks present on ischiopodites of third and
fourth pereiopods; hooks simple and extend
proximad of distal end of their respective
basipodites; basipodites bear no opposable
tubercles. Coxopodites of fourth and fifth
pereiopods with caudomesial projections: that on
fourth knoblike, that on fifth more compressed
and more sharply defined.
First pleopod reaching coxopodite of third
Aprit 1956 HOBBS: A NEW CRAYFISH 119
Fies. 1-17.—Procambarus echinatus, n. sp. (pubescence removed from all structures illustrated) :
1, Mesial view of distal portion of first pleopod of holotype; 2, mesial view of distal portion of first
pleopod of morphotype; 3, epistome of holotype; 4, lateral view of distal portion of first pleopod of
morphotype; 5, lateral view of distal portion of first pleopod of holotype; 6, mesial view of first pleopod
of holotype; 7, mesial view of first pleopod of morphotype; 8, basipodites and ischiopodites of third and
fourth pereiopods of holotype; 9, lateral view of first pleopod of morphotype; 10, lateral view of first
pleopod of holotype; 11, mesial view of distal portion of first pleopod of first form male from Aiken
County, S.C.; 12, annulus ventralis of allotype; 13, lateral view of distal portion of first pleopod of
first form male from Aiken County, S8.C.; 14, lateral view of carapace of holotype; 15, dorsal view of
carapace of holotype; 16, distal podomeres of cheliped of holotype; 17, antennal scale of holotype.
120
pereiopod when abdomen is flexed. Tip termi-
nating in four distinct parts (Figs. 1, 5). Mesial
process spiculiform and directed caudodistad.
Cephalic process, lying laterad of central projec-
tion, acute, corneous, and directed caudodistad.
Caudal element represented only by the small
corneous, laterally compressed caudal process.
Central projection prominent, corneous and
directed caudodistad similarly as the cephalic
process.
Allotypic female.—Differs from the holotype in
the following respects: Each side of carapace
with a row of seven or ten tubercles and spines;
antenna extends caudad to last abdominal
segment; row of tubercles on palm above marginal
row consists of six; opposable margin of dactyl
with a row of 14 tubercles, fourth from base
largest; mesial margin of dactyl with a row of
11 tubercles; opposable margin of immovable
finger with a row of 11 tubercles, third from base
largest, and entire finger only slightly bent
mesiad; fewer tubercles present on carpus of
chela but major ones situated as in holotype;
mesial row of tubercles on lower surface of
merus with only 12 tubercles.
Annulus ventralis partially obscured in ventral
aspect by multituberculate prominences which
extend caudad from sternum immediately
cephalad of annulus. Annulus spindle shaped with
the greatest length in the transverse axis;
cephalic half with an irregular transverse ridge,
and caudal half with a median prominence; sinus
originates near median line on caudal surface of
cephalic ridge and forms a simuous line which
extends caudad almost to midcaudal margin of
annulus (see Fig. 12).
Morphotypic male, form II.—Differs from the
holotype or allotype in the following respects:
Antenna extends caudad almost to caudal margin
of telson; opposable margin of dactyl with
16 tubercles; opposable margin of immovable
finger with an upper row of 17 tubercles and a
lower distal one of four; ischiopodite of first
pereiopod with three or four tubercles; secondary
sexual characters as in holotype but much
reduced in size.
First pleopod with all processes represented,
although none corneous, and while less well
defined are all similarly situated as in holotype
but directed more caudad (see Figs. 2, 4).
Measurements.—As follows (in millimeters) :
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 4
Morpho-
Holotype | Allotype Ge
Carapace—height 30 24.8 25.7
width PA 25.2 26.0
length 64.0 54.5 54.9
Areola—length 18.1 14.5 15.0
width 4.3 4.4 4.2
Rostrum—length 22.5 19.2 19.3
width 9.9 8.5 8.5
Right chela—
length of inner margin of 21.4 9.7 13.0
palm
width of palm 21.0 9.7 1227,
length of outer margin of 59.5 29.0 37.0
hand
length of dactyl 32.1 16.3 20.7
Type locality —Salkehatchie River, 1.9 miles
south of Barnwell, Barnwell County, S. C., on
State Highway 3. Here the stream varies from
10 to 100 feet across with a sand and mud bottom.
The water is dark brown, with little silt suspen-
sion, and in many places flows with a moderate
current through dense growths of Vallisneria and
Saururus cernuus. My specimens were taken
after dark resting on eel grass in the swifter
reaches of the stream and on submerged roots
near the surface of the water.
Disposition of types——The holotypic male,
the allotypic female, and the morphotypic
male are deposited in the United States National
Museum (nos. 99180, 99181, 99182, respectively).
The following paratypes are retained in my
personal collection at the University of Virginia:
9-349-7a—type locality (19), W. R. West
and H.H.H., coll.; 4-1955-6a—type locality
1 ¢@, 4 juv. &o', 1 Juv. 9), HE. A’ Crawford)
T. R. Bello and H.H.H., coll.; 9-349-6a—Georges
Creek, 9 miles southeast of Barnwell on State
Highway 64 (1@Il, 3 juv. 2 9), W. R. West
and H.H.H., coll.
Specimens examined.—In addition to the types
mentioned above, the following specimens from
the Edisto River system in Aiken County, S. C.,
are available: 6-749-2—trib. s. fork of Edisto
River, 11.2 mi. n. of Aiken (1c'II), R. D. Suttkus,
coll.; 8-1952-2a—creek, 10.7 mi. n. of Aiken on
U.S. Rt. 1 Go@ II, 139 9, 3 juv. oo, 4 juv.
292), H.H.H., coll.; 4-1955-4a—Bridge Creek,
10.6 mi. n. of Aiken on U.S. Rt. 1 (I, 49 QI,
8992, 13 juv. oo, 12 juv. 99), EH. A. C., T. R.
B., and H. H. H., coll.; 4-1955-5, south fork of
Edisto River, 12.3 mi. n. of Aiken on U.S. Rt. 1
(Ce Cy Al jaye Ce), MeN Oe, Abels, eynel Isl jel Jat.
9-1355-la, same as preceding (ld'I, 32 @II,
3829, 2 juv. io%, 4 juv. 9-9), H.H.H., coll.;
4-1955-3a—Shaws Creek, 16.1 mi. sw. of Wagener
AprIL 1956
on St. Rt. 215 (4 juv. oc’, 1 juv. 2) E.A.C.,
T.R.B., H.H.H., coll.; Tulane University (T.U.)
3311-17.5 mi. s. of Batesburg on St. Rt. 391 IAI,
8 juv. do’, 4 juv. 22), G. H. Penn and J. B.
Black, coll.; T.U. 3312—5.7 mi. ne. of Aiken on
St. Hy. 391 (II, 32 9, 1 juv. o’, 4 juv. 9 9),
G.H.P. and J.B.B., coll.
Color notes—Carapace olive-green dorsad,
fading ventrally into creamy white with ridges
edged in black. In addition to the ground color
of carapace the cephalic region is marked by a
broad distinctly U-shaped black yolk following
the contour of the cervical groove; however,
base of U not continous but broken between
attachments of mandibular muscle. Thoracic
portion of carapace with a similarly disposed and
broken U-shaped black marking—the broken
portion occurring at caudal end of areola.
Abdominal segments greenish with caudal
portion bright blue bearing reddish-purple and
vivid red markings. Chela reddish black with
white tubercles; distal portion of fingers red but
fading at the extreme distal ends into the yellow
corneous spines.
Variations—While there are a considerable
number of variations from specimen to specimen,
none of these, including ratios of body parts,
has been demonstrated to be correlated with
any of the several local populations represented.
Indeed, there is almost as much variation
between individuals collected from the type
locality as there are between any one of them and
specimens taken elsewhere. Only in the number
of spines along the cervical groove and in minor
details of the first pleopod of the male may
specimens from the Edisto drainage be dis-
tinguished from those from the Salkehatchie.
Specimens from the latter all have from three to
five spines on each side of the carapace, whereas
HOBBS: A NEW CRAYFISH
121
those from the Edisto usually have only two,
although as many as four are present on one
side of two of the specimens examined. There
are so few first form males available, one from
the Salkehatchie and two from the Edisto, that
it is not known how much variation does exist;
for this reason the first pleopod of specimens from
both drainage systems are figured (cf. Figs. 1
and 11; 5 and 18).
Relationships.—Procambarus echinatus has its
closest affinities with Procambarus dupratzi
(Penn) but may readily be distinguished from
the latter by the absence of a carina on the
rostrum and by the form of the caudal element of
the first pleopod of the first-form male.
LITERATURE CITED
Hacen, Hermann A. Monograph of the North
American Astacidae. Illus. Cat. Mus. Comp.
Zool., Harvard College (3): 1-109, 11 pls.
1870.
Hosss, Horton H., Jr. A new crayfish of the genus
Procambarus from Louisiana, with a key to the
species of the Spiculifer Group. Journ. Wash-
ington Acad. Sci. 41 (8) :; 272-276, 11 figs. 1951.
. A new crayfish of the genus Procambarus
from Alabama and Florida. Proc. Biol. Soc.
Washington 66: 173-178, 10 figs. 1953a.
. On the ranges of certain crayfishes of the
Spiculifer Group of the genus Procambarus,
with the description of a new species (Decapeda:
Astacidae). Journ. Washington Acad. Sci.
43 (12): 412-417, 12 figs. 1 map. 19538b.
LeConteE, JoHN. Descriptions of new species of
Astacus from Georgia. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.
Philadelphia 7: 400-402. 1856.
PENN, GEORGE HENRY. A new crawfish of the genus
Procambarus from Louisiana. Journ. Wash-
ington Acad. Sci. 36 (1): 27-29, 1 fig. 1946.
. Two new crawfishes of the genus Procam-
barus from Texas, Louisiana, and Arkansas
(Decapoda, Astacidae). Amer. Mus. Nov.
(1636) : 1-10, 19 figs. 1953.
EEE
Accurate and minute measurement seems to the non-scientific imagination
a less lofty and dignified work than looking for something new. But nearly all
the grandest discoveries of science have been but the rewards of accurate measure-
ment and patient long-continued labor in the minute sifting of numerical re-
sults —Lorp Keuvyin, Report of the British Association for the Advancement
of Science 41: 91. 1871.
122
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 4
ZOOLOGY —A new entoniscid (Crustacea: Isopoda) from the Pacific coast. LEONARD
Muscatine, University of California, Berkeley. (Communicated by Fenner
A. Chace, Jr.)
The occurrence on the American west
coast of an entoniscid isopod has been
recognized for some time, although the only
known printed reference is that of Menzies
and Miller in Light et al. (1954), p. 141.
There they report that ‘‘a genus closely
related to Portunion” is parasitic on
Hemigrapsus oregonensis in the San Fran-
cisco Bay region. On the basis of the
systematic arrangement of the 11 known
genera of the family which is included in the
work of Shiino (1942) on the Entoniscidae
of Japan, the form mentioned by Menzies
and Miller has been established as a member
of the genus Portunion and, further, has
been found to be an undescribed species.
The description below follows the ter-
minology of Shiino throughout.
This problem was suggested to me by
Dr. Cadet Hand, of the Department of
Zoology, University of California, Berkeley,
and I am grateful to him for much kind
advice and criticism.
Genus Portunion Giard and Bonnier, 1886
Female with two ventral and a pair of antero-
dorsal ovarian processes. Marsupium complete;
ascendant lamellae of first pair of odstegites
entirely covered by second pair. First four
abdominal segments have folded pleural lamellae.
Male cephalon fused with, or distinct from, first
thoracic segment. Abdomen bears ventromedian
hooks. Sixth peraeopod of epicaridium neither
prehensile nor longer than others; propodus
with simple process at its tip and rudimentary
daetylus. (From Shiino.)
Portunion conformis, n. sp.
Female (Fig. 1A, B, E): From hood to tip of
posterior medioventral ovarian process ca.
15 mm long; abdomen ca. 8 mm long in the
largest specimen. Marsupium, when full of
ova, yellowish; full of epicaridian larvae, brown
to dark brown; ovary whitish to yellow; abdomen
white. Exopodite of maxilliped broad, surface
wrinkled, edges frilled and thicker than central
portion; coxopodite egg-shaped, smaller than
exopodite; endopodite lamellar, lying beneath
the coxopodite with medial border exposed.
Cephalon a pair of spheres separate from the
thorax. Two pairs of antennae inserted on
the cephalon dorsal to the maxillipeds in the
form of parallel ridges; the external antenna
slightly smaller than the internal. Dorsal ovarian
processes arise from middle of thorax and
incline anteriorly; of the two ventral processes,
the anterior is shorter and arises vertically
from the thorax, forming a right angle with
the posterior which projects backwards except
in gravid females where the processes are some-
what displaced. Thorax cylindrical, bearing
five pairs of odstegites (Fig. 1B); first pair
inserted under maxillipeds and each divided
into ascendant, transverse and recurrent lamellae
(Fig. 1E); ascendant lamellae project anteriorly
over the cephalon and continuous with the
transverse lamellae which curve laterally;
both somewhat thickened and supported by a
vein at their inner margin; recurrent lamellae
extend posteriorly the length of the thorax
and curve around the posterior ventral ovarian
process; these lamellae relatively thin and
supported by a vein running down the center
with numerous branches to the outer margins.
The second pair of odstegites curves anteriorly
over the cephalon, covering the first pair and
forming the hood; members of this pair meet on
median ventral line forming a conspicuous
inpocketing, but do not fuse. The three remaining
pairs of odstegites inserted laterally on the
thorax and closely applied to the host membrane;
they overlap medially in young specimens and
may overlap one another longitudinally without
fusing, thereby remaining easily distinguishable;
fifth pair slightly larger than third and. fourth
owing to an antero-posterior elongation of the
distal border. In mature specimens, all odstegites
meet their fellow on the opposite side, enclosing
the recurrent lamellae of the first pair, and
forming the brood pouch. The lateral protuber-
ances of the thorax are irregularly-shaped
bodies which occur in pairs (Fig. 1B); the
larger usually spherical while the smaller is
curved or peduncular. The second to fifth
peraeopoda mentioned by Shiino and earlier
authors are difficult to discern in this species.
Aprit 1956 MUSCATINE: A NEW ENTONISCID 123
4
F
4 uM.
Fia. 1.—Portunion conformis, n. sp.: A, 2 with thorax enclosed in host membrane; B, young @ with
host membrane removed; C, @ abdomen; D, dorsal view of mature co; , odstegite I. (Abbreviations:
al ascendant lamella, an antenna, avp anterior medio-ventral ovarian process, ¢ cephalon, dep dorsal
ovarian process, mp odstegite, mx maxilliped, pg pygidium, pl pleural lamella, pep posterior medio-
ventral ovarian process, rl recurrent lamella, ¢/ transverse lamella, 2 lateral protuberance of thorax.)
124 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 4
They seem to be represented by thickenings seventh peraeopod described by Shiino in >
of the anterior border of the last three odstegites P. flavidus. The abdomen bears five pairs of
and the peduncular member of the lateral pleural lamellae (Fig. 1A, B); the first pair
protuberance of the thorax; of these the latter much larger than the remaining pairs and with a
is most conspicuous and corresponds to the highly crispate margin; the rest become pro-
Fig. 2.—Portunion conformis, n. sp.: A, & peraeopod IV; B-E, epicaridium (B, paraeopod I; C, peraeo-
pod VI; D, antenna; E, antennule); F-J, cryptoniscium (F, antenna; G, antennule; H, pleopod; I,
peraeopod I; J, peraeopod VII).
Aprin 1956
gressively smaller from front to back and the
complexity of the marginal folds lessens; the
fifth is a simple triangular lamella. The pleopoda
uniramous and overlap their members on
opposite sides. The pygidium small, bifurcated
and curved slightly ventrally. The third abdomi-
nal segment often bulges on its dorsal surface,
indicating the position of the heart.
Male (Fig. 1C, D): 1.1 mm long and at fourth
thoracic segment 0.3 mm wide with scattered
brown to dark brown pigment patches. Cephalon
fused with first thoracic segment but distinguish-
able ventrally and laterally. Antennules rounded
bosses bearing many small setae. Antennae
absent. Oral cone bears styliform mandibles.
Latera] parts of thoracic segments slightly
attenuated except last segment which has a
truncate margin. Coxal plates well developed and
projecting laterally. Peraeopoda 5-jointed; carpo-
propodus and dactylus clad with rows of spinules;
distal margin of carpopropodus bears blunt
processes (Fig. 2A). Ventral spines on first three
abdominal segments hooklike with pointed tip
(Fig. 1C); that of fourth reduced; other segments
lacking spines. Bifid ends of last segment straight,
inclined ventrally at tips and more or less
smooth (Fig. 1C, D).
Epicaridium (Fig. 2B—E): 0.26 mm long and
0.11 mm wide. First five peraeopoda 6-jointed
with propodus bearing a short process at lateral
end of distal margin and merus with small
seta on its external margin (Fig. 2B). Sixth
peraeopoda with dactylus straight and sur-
mounted by a crown of long setae; propodus ends
in a short pointed process (Fig. 2C).
Cryptoniscium (Fig. 2F—J): 0.5 mm long and
0.16 mm wide. Body wider anteriorly than
posteriorly. General pigmentation brown in
scattered patches; eye pigments darker than
other pigments and well defined. Antenna
6-jointed, basal three parts larger than distal
three; third bears three short hairs and sixth ends
in a bundle of long hairs (Fig. 2F). Antennule
4-jomted; second joint with short setae on
anterior margin; third narrower and_ bearing
three bundles of short hairs, the outer two
bundles arising from jointed tubercles; fourth
still narrower, surmounted by two rami, each of
which ends in long hairs (Fig. 2G). Peraeopoda
6-jointed (Fig. 21); last peraeopod more slender
than others, merus with long spine continuous
with its distal margin (Fig. 2J). Exopodite of
MUSCATINE: A NEW ENTONISCID
125
pleopod bears four long setae and one short
seta (Fig. 2H).
Distribution and habitat: Taken from Berkeley
Yacht Harbor and Bay Farm Island on San
Francisco Bay, Calif., and Drake’s Lagoon,
Marin County, Calif., where they are parasitic on
Hemigrapsus oregonensis.
Type locality: Berkeley Yacht Harbor, Berk-
eley, Calif.
Types: The following specimens have been
deposited in the United States National Museum:
(1) Holotype, 1 adult female, U.S.N.M. no.
99177; (2) allotype, 1 adult male, U.S.N.M.
no. 99178; (8) paratypes, 6 females, U.S.N.M.
no. 99179.
Discussion: 372 crabs were examined from
which 85 female entoniscids were obtained.
These apparently included all stages of develop-
ment. The frequency of infection is shown in the
accompanying table.
3g z
BS 25 t
2| a 2 3 52 Locality
° Ss ‘a Saal
eet |) | | er |
August 16 fof 50 4 54 7.4 | Berkeley Yacht
1955 ©) 8} 0 8} 0 Harbor
August 23 fol 61 | 12 | 73 | 16.4 | Berkeley Yacht
1955 g 3 al 4 | 25.0 Harbor
August 31 On 50.| 5 | 55] 9.1] Berkeley Yacht
1955 2 8 1 9 | 11.1 Harbor
September 6 | 22 6 | 28 | 21.4 | Drake’s Lagoon
1955 9 LP e2 7 190 LORS,
November 3 | @ 12) 12) 24 | 50.0 | Berkeley Yacht
1955 Q 1} 16) 17 | 94.1 Harbor
December 8 fof 41 | 12 | 53 | 22.6 |} Bay Farm Island
1955 2 10 8 18 | 44.1
TOTALS o | 236 | 51 | 287 | 17.7
2 57 | 28 | 85 | 32
fof
and
OP 5293) 19 est" | p21e 2
Simultaneous infection of a single host by
more than one parasite occurred often. Where
four were found in one host, they were all of the
“asticot”’ stage. In cases where two parasites
infected a single host, they were both mature and
often gravid. Of the six male entoniscids ex-
amined, all were found on the females, either
on the pleural lamellae, in the dorsal groove
of the thorax, or on the abdomen in the mid-
ventral line. In no cases were females accompanied
by more than one male. Cryptoniscan larvae
occurred frequently on females of all stages.
Unlike such cases as the infection of Pinnotheres
126
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, NO. 4 —
P. maenadis P. kossmanni P. flavidus P. conformis
Female Ventral pro- | Both processes | Anterior di- |Anterior verti- | Anterior vertical
cesses directed rected for- caltothorax,| to thorax, pos-
backward wards, the posterior di- terior directed
posterior rected back- backward
backward ward
Male Cephalon Distinct from | Distinct from | Fused with Ist | Fused with Ist
thorax thorax thoracic seg- thoracic —seg-
ment ment
Antenna Present ? Absent Absent
Abdominal In segments | In segments | In’ segments | In segments I-IlV
hooks LIV LIV LIl
Epicaridium | Dactylus of | Setose ? Not setose Setose
peraeopod
pisum by the entoniscid Pinnotherion vermiforme
Giard and Bonnier as reported by Atkins (1933),
where the thinness of the host’s carapace reveals
the presence of the parasite, the new species
cannot be detected by external signs. The infected
hosts appear perfectly normal and the presence
of a parasite can only be determined by dissection.
The adult parasite is usually found on its
side in the visceral cavity of the host. The body is
V-shaped, head and thorax pointing anteriorly
forming one arm, and the abdomen the other.
The hepatic tissues of the host surround the head
and abdomen of the parasite while the junction of
thorax and abdomen lies under the alimentary
canal.
Of the five species of Portuwnion previously
described, P. moniezii Giard and P. salvatoris
Kossman are poorly defined. However, P.
conformis, the new species, has short, straight,
ventral ovarian processes which distinguishes it
from P. salvatoris. The greatly developed first
pair of odstegites of the new species distin-
guishes it from P.moniezii. It differs from the three
remaining species as shown in the table above.
The species P. flavidus is commonly found
infecting Pachygrapsus crassipes in Japan. This
crab is a prominent member of the American
west coast intertidal fauna and one might
expect to find P. flavidus here. However, ex-
amination of 22 specimens of P. crassipes has
failed to disclose any entoniscids.
LITERATURE CITED
AtTKINS, D. Pinnotherion vermiforme Giard and
Bonnier, an entoniscid infecting Pinnotheres
pisum. Proc. Zool. Soc. London 1933: 319-63.
1933.
Giarp, A., and Bonnizr, J. Sur le genre Entione
Kossmann. C. R. Acad. Sci. 103: 645-47. 1886.
Menazins, R. J., and Miuuer, M. A., in Lienr et al.
Intertidal invertebrates of the central California
coast: 141. University of California Press,
1954.
Suno, 8. M. On the parasitic isopods of the family
Entoniscidae, especially those found in the
vicinity of Seto. Mem. Coll. Sci. Kyoto Im-
perial Univ. ser. B, 17: 37-76. 1942.
ere ee
Experiment is the interpreter of nature. Expervments never deceive. It 1s our
judgment which sometimes deceives itself because it expects results which expert-
ment refuses. We must consult experiment, varying the circumstances, until we
have deduced general rules, for experiment alone can furnish reliable rules—
LEONARDO DA VINCI.
ApriIL 1956
JONES: A NEW ANNELID FROM SAN FRANCISCO BAY
127
ZOOLOGY .—Cossura pygodactylata, a new annelid from San Francisco Bay
(Polychaeta: Cirratulidae). MeérepirH L. Jones, University of California,
Berkeley. (Communicated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.)
In the course of sampling the benthic
fauna off Point Richmond, San Francisco
Bay. Calif. (Jones, 1954), numerous speci-
mens of a polychaete worm of the family
Cirratulidae were found. At the outset they
were tentatively identified as Cossura
longocirrata Webster and Benedict, but
subsequent examination revealed characters
differing sufficiently from the _ original
description to justify setting up a new
species for these worms.
Webster and Benedict (1887) erected the
genus Cossura for the single species C.
longocirrata from Eastport, Maine. Of their
specimens only one was complete, the
remainder apparently being anterior por-
tions. Eliason (1920) found specimens
which he tentatively identified as C.
longocirrata in the Wresund, Denmark. He
noted minor differences in the shape of the
prostomium and the dimensions of the
unpaired cirrus. In the following year,
Thulin (1921) confirmed Eliason’s identifica-
tion and gave a detailed description of the
species, based on well-preserved specimens
from the Mresund. Mrs. E. Wesenburg-Lund
(personal communication) has identified
C. longocirrata in collections from the North
Atlantic and from the coast of Chile.
Cossura has been reported from the
Pacific coast of North America several times.
Hartman (1952) identified C. longocirrata in
collections from the Los Angeles—Long
Beach area, and Reish and Winter (1954)
recorded the same species from Alamitos
Bay, California. Hartman (1954) in a
checklist of the annelids of San Francisco
Bay, listed ‘“‘Cosswra nr. longicirrata’”’ and
credited the author (M. J.) with its col-
lection. In the preliminary results of her
study of the benthos of the San Pedro Basin,
Hartman (1955) reported specimens of
Cossura sp. and has recently described this
as a new species, Cossura candida (Hartman,
1955a). It should be noted that in the
description of C. candida, Hartman has
included the ‘‘Cossura nr. longicirrata
(sic) .. .”’ of her San Francisco Bay checklist
in the synonymy and distribution record of
C. candida. Actually “C. nr. longicirrata”’ is
the species to be described here and C.
candida is not known to occur in San
Francisco Bay.
Family CrrraATuLIDAE
Cossura Webster Benedict,
Cossura pygodactylata, n. sp.
Fig. 1, A-F
Cossura longocirrata Jones, 1954, pp. 36, 37, 48, 83,
et al.
Cossura nr. longicirrata Hartman, 1954, pp. 11, 15.
Cossura nr. longicirrata (sic) Hartman, 1955a,
pp. 44 and 45 (in synonymy and distribution
record of Cossura candida).
The specimens under consideration were
collected from mud off Point Richmond, San
Francisco Bay, Calif., at depths of 3, 5, and
30 feet below mean lower low water, and were
most numerous at the lowest depth. Approxi-
mately 100 specimens were obtained; of these,
15 were entire, the remainder having fragmented
when preserved with 10 percent formalin.
Several observations of living, intact animals
were also made.
Preserved, whole, mature specimens of
Cossura pygodactylata are 6 to 7 mm in length
and about 0.3 mm wide at the 14th (widest)
setiger. The number of segments varies from
43 to 56.
Contrary to the observations of Eliason
(1920) and Thulin (1921) on C. longocirrata,
C. pygodactylata appears to secrete no well-defined
tube. The living animal secretes mucus along the
body, to which material (fecal pellets, debris)
may adhere, giving the impression of a very
loosely constructed tube.
The body is composed of three general regions.
The anterior region extends to the 17th-19th
setiger and the segmental length is 80-100 micra;
the setae occur in bundles at the anterior edge
of each segment. The midregion extends back to
about 12-20 segments from the pygidium and
segmental length is 280-840 micra; the setae are
centrally located on each segment. The posterior
region consists of 12-20 segments and_ the
segmental length is 100-120 micra; the setae are
centrally placed on each segment. Character-
Genus and 1887
istically, fragmentation occurs just posterior
to the beginning of the midregion.
There are no defined parapodia. The setae
appear to arise from depressed areas on the body
surface, and the bulging of the body surface
anterior and posterior to these areas may give
the impression of parapodia, with pre- and
postsetal lobes (Figs. 1b, 1d, le). A ring of
thickened tissue surrounds each area of setal
insertion (Fig. 1c, TR).
Setae are all simple and vary from capillary
to narrowly limbate. They are inserted in two
vertical series; the anterior series are composed
of coarser setae which are directed from per-
pendicular to the body axis to slightly posterior
of perpendicular; the posterior series consist of
slightly finer setae which are swept posteriorly.
The prostomium is conical and devoid of
appendages (Fig. 1a), and no sense organs such as
eyespots or Thulin’s (1921, p. 4) “‘knopfen-
formiges Organ’ (button-shaped organ) have
been observed. Near its base the prostomium
bears a transverse furrow (Fig. la, PF), which,
as both Eliason and Thulin have observed in
C. longocirrata, gives a misleading impression
that the basal portion is an achaetous segment.
In both cleared whole mounts and frontal sections
it is seen that the longitudinal muscle bundles
are inserted at this point. It seems probable that
the furrow is produced as these muscles contract
at fixation. The peristomial segment has neither
setae nor appendages. The next segment, the Ist
setiger, bears a bundle of about six setae on
either side. These are nearly perpendicular
to the body axis, and their tips are slightly
curved posteriorly. The 2d setiger bears a single
dorsal median cirrus at its posterior border.
The cirrus remains attached throughout
preservation and subsequent washing, but the
tip is easily broken off. In one case, a preserved
fragmented specimen of 21 segments (3 mm)
possessed a cirrus 14 mm in length. Near its
point of attachment the cirrus is constricted
slightly; it then enlarges to its maximum diameter
at the level of the 9th setiger and tapers gradually
to its free end. In preserved specimens the
cirrus shows a central core of muscle fibers
running throughout its length, and the surface
epithelium is circularly wrinkled as if it were
sapable of extreme extension when living. In life
the cirrus trails close to the dorsal surface
of the body.
The 2d to 6th setigers carry approximately 12
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, NO. 4
setae on either side (Fig. 1b), and all setae, to the
6th setiger, appear to arise with no indication of
noto- and neurosetal bundles. The dorsal setae of
these anterior setigers project laterally (most of
them are in the anterior series), while the more
ventral ones tend to be inclined posteriorly (the
posterior series). Further along the body, the
dorsal setae become recurved and the ventral
setae become more recurved until they are
almost parallel to the body surface (Fig. 1c). At
about the 7th to 8th setiger, it is possible to
differentiate noto- and neurosetal bundles and
the number of setae increases to 16-18 per side
(Fig. 1d). This number and disposition continue
through the remainder of the anterior region to
about the 17th to 19th setiger.
The midregion is characterized by longer
segments and, in the case of ovigerous females, by
the presence of many large eggs. The setae in
this region arise in the middle of each segment
and are slightly recurved. There are from 4 to 6
notosetae and a like number of neurosetae in
this region (Fig. le).
In the posterior region the number of setae
is gradually reduced from 4-6 in each bundle to
2 notosetae and 2 neurosetae on each side in
the segments just preceding the pygidium. In
the posterior region, the setae are directed
more and more anteriorly as the anal segment
is approached. In preserved material, the
segments of the ovigerous and following region
take on a moniliform appearence, which has
not been observed in living material.
The eggs are oval and up to 140 micra long
by 100 micra wide. A single segment may
contain as many as forty eggs. All specimens
large enough to be considered mature and
which had not fragmented anterior to the
ovigerous region, contained eggs. Unequivocal
males have not been observed.
The pygidium or anal segment (Fig. 1f) is
cleft in the dorso-ventral plane to form two
lateral lobes (AL). It has three long cirri (PC)
up to 0.7 mm in length (approximately as long
as the last 10 segments). Two of these are
inserted dorsolaterally on the outer surface of
the anal lobes; the 8rd is inserted ventrally,
where the lobes join. Along the margin of each
anal lobe are 6-10 fingerlike processes approxi-
mately 0.1 mm long (PP). No mention of these
is made by either Webster and Benedict (1887) or
Thulin (1921) in their descriptions of C. longo-
cirrata, or by Hartman (1955a) in her description
ApRIL 1956 JONES: A NEW ANNELID FROM SAN FRANCISCO BAY 129
Fie. 1.—Cossura pygodactylata, n. sp.: a, Dorsal view of the anterior end of the animal; b, 5th right
setiger in anterior view (setae appear bent or hooked in the figures to indicate their curving posteriorly) ;
c, 5th right setiger in dorsolateral view, dotted areas show the position of the setal bundles of the 4th
and 6th setigers; d, 9th left setiger in anterior view; e, 25th right setiger in anterior view; /, lateral view
of the pygidium. Figures lc, 1d, le, and If are to the same scale as Ib. (Abbreviations are as follows;
AL—anal lobe; DC—dorsal cirrus; PC—pygidial cirrus; PF—prostomial furrow; PP—pygidial proc-
esses; and TR—thickened ring of tissue.)
130
of C. candida. These processes are the most
obvious character separating the new species
from the other species of Cossura, and the new
specific name is based on their presence. In
living animals it has been observed that these
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
pygidial processes are not retractile.
Unfortunately, only 2 specimens were observed
with the
apparently
proboscis
has
4-8
everted.
finger-shaped
The
proboscis
processes
directed anteriorly, and they appear to be
similar to those shown by Thulin (1921, Fig. 2)
for C. longocirrata.
A table comparing the described species of
Cossura is presented. It is based on the work of
Webster and Benedict (1887), Eliason (1920),
Thulin (1921), Hartman (1955a), and the
present description.
‘ (es C.
longocirrata pygodactylata candida
Taosertion of 2d setiger 2d setiger 3d setiger
cirrus
Pygidial pro- Absent 6-10 on each | Absent
cesses anal lobe
Length 6-12 mm 6-7 mm 7-10 mm
Width 0.35-0.8 mm 0.3 mm 0.5-0.7 mm
Number of seg- | 50-70 43-56 50-75
ments
Sense organs Present | Absent Nuchal organs
on prosto- present at
mium sides of pro-
stomium.!
Number of 8-18 8-18 12-16
setae per seg-
ment
Character of Thin, rather None Present on
tube long, mem- some.!
branous
Depth where 6-120 feet 3-30 feet 36-2640 feet
found
Distribution Eastport, San Fran- Southern Cali-
Maine; Mre- cisco Bay, fornia.
sund, Den- Calif.
mark;
North At-
lantic; coast
of Chile.
1 According to personal communication from Dr. Olga Hart-
man.
The
(U.S.N.M.
holotype
no.
27609)
and
of Cossura pygodactylata
the paratypes
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 4
(U.S.N.M. no. 27610) have been deposited
with the U.S. National Museum.
The author is indebted to Dr. Cadet Hand,
of the Department of Zoology, University of
California, Berkeley, to Dr. Olga Hartman, of
the Allan Hancock Foundation, University of
Southern California, and to Mrs. Elise Wesenburg-
Lund, of the Zoological Museum, Copenhagen,
Denmark, for their kind advice and criticism.
LITERATURE CITED
Euiason, Anp. Biologisch-faunistische Unter-
suchungen aus dem Oresund. V. Polychaeta.
Lunds Univ. Arsskr., nN. F., Avd. 2, 16(6):
1-103. 18 figs., 1 map. 1920.
Hartman, OuGa. Appendix IV in ‘‘Los Angeles-
Long Beach Harbor Pollution Survey.”
Los Angeles Regional Water Pollution Control
Board (No. 4), Los Angeles, Calif., p. 41.
1952.
——. The marine annelids of San Francisco Bay
and its environs, California. Allan Hancock
Found. Occ. Pap. 15: 1-20. 1954.
. Quantitative survey of the benthos of San
Pedro Basin, southern California. Part I.
Preliminary results. Allan Hancock Pacific
Exped. 19(1): 1-185, 2 charts, 7 pls. 1955.
. Endemism in the North Pacific Ocean, with
emphasis on the distribution of marine annelids,
and description of new or little known species.
In “‘Essays in the Natural Sciences in Honor of
Captain Allan Hancock,” pp. 39-60, 4 pls.
1955a.
Jones, Merepitra L. The Richmond shoreline sur-
vey. State of California, Department of Public
Health. Report of the Department of Fish and
Game, Project No. 54-2-3, pp. 1-84, 5 figs.
1954.
Retsu, D. J., and WintER, H. A. The ecology of
Alamitos Bay, California, with special reference
to pollution. California Fish and Game. 40(2):
105-121, 1 fig. 1954.
Tuuuin, Gustav. Biologisch-faunistische Unter-
suchungen aus dem Oresund. Uber Cossura
longocirrata Webster and Benedict und riber die
Rohren von Disoma multisetosum Oersted.
Lunds Univ. Arsskr., n.F., Avd. 2, 17(10):
1-14, 17 figs. 1921.
Wesster, H. E., and Benepicr, J. KE. The Anne-
lida Chaetopoda from Eastport, Maine. Rept.
U. 8. Comm. Fish. for 1885, pp. 707-755, 8
pls. 1887.
Aprit 1956
COCKRUM—TWO NEW LONG-TAILED POCKET MICE
131
MAMMALOGY.—Two new long-tailed pocket mice (Perognathus formosus) from
Arizona. E. LeENDELL Cockrum, University of Arizona. (Communicated by
Charles O. Handley, Jr.)
In the summer of 1953 I spent some time
in Washington, D. C., studying the mammals
from Arizona in the collections of the
United States National Museum (including
the Biological Surveys collection). Long-
tailed pocket mice occur, in Arizona,
only in the Arizona ‘‘strip,” that is, the area
north and west of the Colorado River.
Attempts to determine the subspecific
status of the specimens in the Biological
Surveys collection revealed the presence of
two heretofore unnamed subspecies. The
following descriptions were, in part, prepared
at that time.
In December 1953 I visited the Museum
of Vertebrate Zoology, at the University of
California, Berkeley, California. In this
collection are a number of long-tailed
pocket mice from Arizona. Discussion with
Dr. Seth B. Benson revealed that, on the
basis of the specimens in that collection,
he had recognized the presence of the
two unnamed subspecies. Dr. Benson has
kindly given me permission to publish the
descriptions, incorporating the data available
from the specimens in his care.
Grateful acknowledgement is made to the
National Science Foundation for a research
grant (G-333, Investigations of the Mam-
mals of Arizona) for financial assistance;
to Drs. Remington Kellogg, David Johnson,
and Henry Setzer, of the U. 8. National
Museum; to Dr. John W. Aldrich and
Miss Viola Schantz, of the U. S. Fish and
Wildlife Service; and to Drs. Alden Miller
and Seth Benson, of the Museum of Zoology
at Berkeley for permission to examine the
material in the collections under their care as
well as for their personal kindnesses.
Perognathus formosus domisaxensis,! n. subsp.
Type.—Adult female, skin and skull, U.S.N.M.
no. 249006, Biological Surveys collection; from
~ Houserock Valley, 15 miles west of [the Navajo]
' bridge, Coconino County, Ariz., collected
August 6, 1929, by Vernon Bailey, original
number 10758.
1 From domus, house, and saxwm, rock, as this
subspecies is known from Houserock Valley.
Distribution.—Insofar as is now known, this
subspecies occurs in Arizona west of the Colorado
River, north of the Kaibab Plateau, south of the
Paria Plateau, and east of the Kanab Plateau.
Diagnostic characters and comparisons.—A
small-sized race of Perognathus formosus. Similar
to P. f. formosus in general color but much
smaller in size (see measurements). The occipito-
nasal length, the frontonasal length, the length
of the bullae, and the basilar length are all
less than in P. f. formosus or P. f. mohavensis.
The auditory bullae are least inflated in P. f.
domisaxensis, but the inflation of the brain
case is, proportionally, about as in P. f. formosus.
Color—Basal portions of hair near Gray
(Gull Gray)?; subterminal band close to Light
Buff; terminal portion of hairs tipped with
dusky. The color of subterminal portion dominates
the color of the dorsal surface.
Measurements—Type: Total length, 185; tail
vertebrae, 111; hind foot, 24; ear, 11. Two
topotypes, 1 male and 1 female, respectively,
184, 175; 105, 100; 23, 23; 11, 11. Skull (type,
followed by measurements of 1 male and 1
female topotype): Occipitonasal length, 25.3
(00.0, 24.9); frontonasal length, 16.9 (00.0, 16.8);
mastoidal breadth, 13.6 (13.6, 13.5); length of
bulla, 8.7 (8.6, 8.2); interorbital constriction,
6.6 (6.4, 6.5); alveolar length upper tooth row,
3.8 (3.6, 3.7); length of interparietal, 3.7 (3.4, 3.4);
width of interparietal, 6.4 (6.1, 6.0); basilar
length, 18.1 (17.9, 17.5).
Remarks.—Two of the three specimens from
the type locality show considerable rosaceous
staining. This strain is evident on the usually
white hairs of the venter as well as on the dorsal
surface. As a result these appear to be much
lighter and brighter.
Specimens examined.—Total, 32, distributed as
follows: 6 mi. se. of Fredonia, 1, BS; Houserock
Valley, 15 mi. w. of Bridge, 3 (BS); Soap Creek,
15 mi. sw. Lees Ferry, 1 (BS); 2 mi. w. of Lees
Ferry (BS); 3,250 ft., 11 (MVZ); 6 mi. w. of Grand
Canyon Bridge, Marble Canyon, 3,800 ft., 18
(MVZ).
2 Capitalized color terms after Ridgway, Color
standards and color nomenclature, 1912.
132
Perognathus formosus melanocaudus, n. subsp.
Type.—Adult female, skin and skull, U.S.N.M.
no. 262918, Biological Surveys collection; from
the lower end of Toroweap Valley (Rim of
Grand Canyon), Mohave County, Ariz.; collected
July 30, 1937, by Luther C. Goldman, original
number 341.
Distribution —In so far as is now known,
this subspecies is restricted to the region of the
type locality.
Diagnostic characters and comparisons.—A
dark-colored race of Perognathus formosus
(similar to P. f. formosus in general size (see
measurements) but auditory bullae and brain
case more inflated and interorbital region more
constricted; distinctly darker in general dorsal
coloration including dorsal part of tail. These
same conditions are evident when comparisons
are made with P. f. mohavensis and P. f.
domisaxensis.
Color—Basal portions of hairs near Gray
(Dark Dull Gray), Gray (Gull Gray) in P.
formosus formosus and P. f. domisaxensis;
subterminal band close to Pinkish Buff is quite
narrow; terminal portion of hairs tipped with
black. The basal and terminal colors dominate
the color of the dorsal surface.
Measurements.—Type: Total length, 190; tail
vertebrae, 111; hind foot, 25. Two adult female
topotypes, as follows: 198, 188; 104, 108; 24, 24.
Skull (type and two adult female topotypes)
Occipitonasal length, 26.7 (26.5, 26.2); fronto-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 46, No. 4
nasal length, 18.3 (18.1, 17.7); mastoidal breadth,
14.4 (13.9, 14.4); length of bulla, 9.0 (8.9, 8.8);
interorbital constriction, 6.4 (6.3, 6.7); alveolar
length upper cheek teeth, 3.8 (3.9, 3.8); length of
interparietal, 3.7 (3.9, 3.8); width of interparietal,
6.0 (6.1, 6.3); basilar length, 18.2 (18.5, 17.8).
Remarks.—The series of animals in the
Biological Survey collection from the Toroweap
Valley all show signs of molting. Further, most
of the animals were young when taken. However,
the young are much darker than those of similar
age and pelage condition from all other localities
represented.
Specimens from four miles north of Wolf Hole
and 12 miles north of Wolf Hole, here referred to
P. f. formosus, are intergrades between P. f.
melanocaudus and P. f. formosus. This is demon-
strated by the intermediate nature of the inflation
of the auditory bullae, inflation of the braincase,
interorbital width, and pelage color.
Specimens examined.—Total, 52, as follows:
Lower end of Toroweap Valley, 16, BS; Lower
end of Toroweap Valley, 4200 ft., 36, MVZ.
Comparative material—Perognathus formosus
formosus: Urau: St. George, 17 (BS). Arizona:
4 mi. n. of Wolfe Hole, 1 (BS); 6 mi. n. of Wolfe
Hole, 4,900 ft., 4 (MVZ); 10 mi. n. of Wolf Hole,
3,800 ft., 10 (MVZ); 12 mi. n. of Wolf Hole, 3,500
ft., on road to St. George, Utah, 17 (BS). Perog-
mathus formosus mohavensis: Arizona: Near
mouth Beaverdam Creek, 1,500 ft., just above
Little field, 1 (BS); Grand Wash, 1,800 ft., 8 mi.
s. of Pakoon Spring, 1 (BS). CaLrrornia: Oro
Grande, 37 (BS).
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
1397TH MEETING, OCTOBER 8, 1954
WILLIAM SHocKLEY, of the Bell Telephone
Laboratories, spoke on Transistor physics.
Transistor physics is the modern name for that
branch of solid-state physics that treats semi-
conductors. The particular material discussed
was germanium; its four valence electrons cause
it to crystallize in the same structure as diamond.
The perfect lattice of pure germanium is analo-
gous to a vacuum; various defects act like free
particles in a vacuum. The six known imper-
fections that contribute to the semiconductor
behavior are:
(1) An excess electron.
(2) A “‘hole,’’ or missing electron.
(8) Deathnium, which may be an atom of copper
or nickel, or simply a structure defect. Deathnium
is a generic name for centers which catalyze hole-
electron pair generation and recombinations.
(4) A donor atom, which acts like a bound or
anchored ‘“‘hole.’’
(5) An acceptor atom, which is a bound negative
charge, creating a freely moving ‘‘hole.”’
(6) A trap, which is a bound charge in a low
dielectric constant crystal, and therefore tends to
attract and hold free charges.
The apparent motion of a hole in an applied
electric field is produced by the motion of an
electron that fills the hole, and leaves a new one
Aprit 1956
elsewhere. Surprisingly, the mobility of holes
is almost as great as the mobility of electrons.
Semiconductors exhibit photoconductivity.
Incoming photons release valence electrons,
making the crystal conducting until the elec-
trons recombine with holes. The density of
deathnium recombination centers in such that
this induced conductivity decays with a half-life
in the range of 1 microsecond to 1 milli-
second.
If an impurity having 5 valence electrons is
present, it donates a free electron, and the donor
atom becomes positively charged but held in
position in the lattice. The donor atom is therefore
a bound hole. Since the conductivity is due to
free electrons, or negative charges, such impure
germanium is called n-type. Conversely, an
impurity such as Gallium, with three valence
electrons, in an acceptor. The gallium atom
becomes a bound negative charge and contributes
a free hole, making p-type germanium.
In the case of a relatively low dielectric con-
stant crystal such as silicon, the bound negative
acceptor atom acts as a trap for holes. Under
photon bombardment hole-electron pairs are
created, and the holes are trapped, leaving free
electrons for conductivity. With the photon
source removed, this conductivity persists until
the holes escape the traps and recombine with
the electrons at deathnium centers. The time
constant of this conductivity decay ranges from
several seconds to a minute.
The melt-grown process for making P-N
junctions was described. The internal potential
field that maintains equilibrium was explained
graphically. Application of an external field to
increase to very small current or large current
respectively, yielding a rectifier action. [llumina-
tion of the n-type region generates hole-electron
pairs; the holes slide down the potential hill to the
p-type region, making this more positive. Such
a system acts like a battery, and in fact has been
made as a solar battery with a conversion effi-
ciency of greater than 5 percent.
This junction discussion was extended to the
case of the n-p-n ‘‘sandwich”’ transistor. The
potential curve in this case resembles a dam, and
illustrates vividly how gain is obtained. In the
water analog, raising the reservoir bottom slightly
yields a large increase in the water-wheel power
available. Such n-p-n transistors can operate
say as audio oscillators, at the fantastically low
PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
133,
power input of one microwatt. This is approx-
imately the average power expended by a com-
mon dog flea jumping up 50 cm, once every 10
seconds! (Secretary’s abstract.)
1398TH MEETING, OCTOBER 22, 1954
The Society was addressed by 8. A. ScHaar,
of the University of California, on the subject
Aerodynamics at very high altitudes.
At sufficiently high altitudes, the air is a
rarefied gas. For aerodynamic purposes, a gas is
definitely rarefied when the mean free path of its
molecules is greater than 1 percent of some
significant parameter of the flow field, such as the
boundary layer thickness, the shock wave
thickness, or the missile size. Under such condi-
tions, aerodynamics becomes a problem in
molecular dynamics. The design of a supersonic
wind tunnel operating at a pressure of 104
atmospheres was described, and the experimental
techniques and results discussed. Such a low
air density makes Schlieren photos impossible,
and so a new technique was used to make the
flow pattern visible. Air or nitrogen ions are
introduced upstream; a variable intensity after-
glow develops in the flow and provides a self-
luminous pattern.
Simple theory indicates that the maximum
temperature reached by the nose of a missile
should be the adiabatic molecule stopping tem-
perature, the temperature corresponding to the
impact velocities of the molecules. It was ob-
served, however, that for sufficiently thin air,
higher temperatures were reached. This molec-
ular impact heating makes possible an interest-
ing new probe. The probe is a very fine wire,
much less than a mean free path in diameter, so
that it cannot affect the flow. The impact heat-
ing increases the resistance of the wire. This is
the converse of the cooling of a hot wire used
in ordinary wind tunnels. Such a wire was used
to probe the internal structure of a shock wave.
Navier-Stokes theory says that a shock wave
should be three or four mean free paths thick.
The behavior is different for monatomic and
diatomic gases. Diatomic gases possess rotational
degrees of freedom, that may or may not come
into equilibrium with the translational kinetic
energy during the time the molecules are in the
shock wave. If the equilibrium is slow in being
established, a gas behaves as though it is mona-
tomic. Expansion of a monatomic gas is friction-
134
less; if the rotational states get into equilibrium,
there is a frictional effect which is quantitatively
introduced by a bulk viscosity constant. Experi-
ments up to speeds of Mach 4 show shock waves
that fit almost too well with the Navier-Stokes
theory including bulk viscosity. It is concluded
that this theory is adequate, and that rotational
equilibrium is established quickly, in air. (Secre-
tary’s abstract.)
1399TH MEETING, NOVEMBER 5, 1954
The Society was addressed by 8. F. Srneer, of
the University of Maryland, on the topic The age
of meteorites.
One hundred and fifty years ago, it was not
generally believed that meteorites existed. It was
in 1803 that a proof was presented to the French
Academy that meteorites are of extra-terrestrial
origin.
Meteorites are of two types, with some mixed
samples, METAL meteorites consist primarily of
iron, with up to 20 percent of nickel. SToNnrE
meteorites are primarily silicates, and appear to
be the slag that collected on the surface when
the large mass of molten material solidified—the
mass that later broke up into meteorites. About
one ton per day is the earth’s total accretion rate.
Most meteorites are small, but there is a 60 ton
metal one.in South Africa.
Meteorites are probably parts of asteroids, or
small planets. The first evidence of this comes
from their low impact velocities, characteristic
of nearly circular orbits around the sun. On the
other hand, meteors have very high velocities,
approximating solar escape velocity, so are
probably parts of comets. Indeed, meteor showers
often coincide with comet approaches. Con-
versely, if meteorites were from outside the
solar system, their impact speeds would probably
burn them up in the earth’s atmosphere.
Cutting, polishing, and etching meteorites
reveals beautiful crystalline structure patterns,
known as Widmanstaetten figures. These
patterns can be reproduced in the laboratory by
slow cooling of an iron-nickel melt; the patterns
thus produced, however, show smaller crystals.
It is concluded that meteorites were once liquid,
and cooled very slowly under high pressure.
Such conditions would be found in the interiors
of small planets, of say 500 miles diameter. The
structure of iron meteorites also shows definite
evidence of shock wave passage, suggesting the
break-up of such a planet. The silicate meteorites
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 4
would then be pieces of the slag that became the
crust of the planet.
Attempts have been made to date the solidifi-
cation of meteorites by measuring the concen-
trations of U-238 and helium. U-288 has a decay
half-life of 414 billion years; a typical meteoritic
concentration in a 1-gram sample is 10-8 grams of
uranium, and 107-° ce of helium, referred to
normal temperature and pressure. This method,
with its attendant delicate helium determination,
was developed by Paneth. As to the possibility
that most of the helium had leaked out, Paneth
eliminated this by heating meteorites to 1,000°,
and finding that although helium leaked badly
from stone, only 5 percent was driven out from
iron meteorites.
One thoroughly tested meteorite had an
apparent age of 8 billion years by this method,
about twice the age of the universe! And a cor-
rection for assumed helium leakage would 1n-
CREASE this figure! A suggestion made some years
ago that cosmic ray bombardment had produced
the apparent excess helium had been discarded,
because the estimated yield was too low. This
thought was revived by Singer in view of the
modern knowledge of pi-mesons, etc. Both
primary photons and secondary mesons knock
alpha particles out of the iron nucleus, thereby
producing helium. Theoretical calculations yield
a curve for helium yield vs. depth from the sur-
face, with a broad peak some 2-15 cm in. Even
more useful is the prediction of one atom of He-3
for every two of He-4 produced, an isotope ratio
over a million times larger than in the earth’s
atmosphere. The ‘‘8-billion year” meteorite has
31 per cent of its helium in the He-3 form, hence
practically all its helium is of cosmic-ray origin,
and the age data are meaningless. Meteorites
exhibiting a lower percentage of He-3 can be
evaluated by subtracting the 2-to-1 correction,
and dating by the remaining radiogenic helium.
On the other hand, if we assume that the
average cosmic ray intensity seen by a meteorite
in its flight has been sensibly constant, we can
consider the meteorite as an integrating cosmic
ray exposure meter and compute the duration
of its exposure. Unfortunately, the corrected
radiogenic age estimate runs around 100 million
years for a number of specimens but their
apparent exposure time has been 300 million
years, hence a new paradox has replaced the old
one. :
A new hypothesis has been put forward. It
Apri 1956
states that the radiogenic helium: leaks out
badly, because the Uranium is concentrated on
grain boundaries, and the cosmic helium does
not leak out. This is compatible with Paneth’s
experiment, for his helium leakage test was on a
specimen that later was found to contain only
cosmic helium, judging from the 31 per cent
He-3 content. A crucial test would be to find a
specimen having about half cosmic and_ half
radiogenic helium, and heat it. If the hypoth-
esis is correct, the He-3 to He-4 ratio should
increase.
It now appears feasible to measure the radio-
genic Pb-206 and ordinary Pb-204 contents, and
date by this means. This should yield the time
of solidification, whereas the cosmic helium
measurements should yield the time of break-up.
(Secretary’s abstract.)
1400TH MEETING, NOVEMBER 19, 1954
Lesuin 8. G. Kovasznay, of Johns Hopkins
University, spoke on Image processing by electro-
optical techniques.
A picture can be regarded as the representation
in the plane of a function of two independent
variables. A transformation of the independent
variables corresponds to a distortion. Operators
on the function correspond to a process. By the
application of electro-optical scanning techniques
to a picture the elements are converted into
electrical quantities and can be subjected to
various operator functions. The speaker’s work
in this field was not induced by any considera-
tions of television but rather by a desire to
understand more about the mechanism of vision.
The corresponding study of the mechanism of
hearing has been greatly aided by the application
of electronic circuits which suppress certain
frequencies or make other distortions of the
original sound. In the visual case electro-optical
scanning was chosen because it is much more
flexible than photography. A still more sophisti-
cated approach would be to make use of a com-
puter, which could then perform any desired
set of operations on the elements of a picture.
The system devised by Mr. Kovasznay has
been brought to experimental realization under
his direction at the National Bureau of Standards.
One requirement called homogeneity limits the
operator functions which may be used. A second
requirement called isotropy prevents the tele-
vision-type of scanning from being used. To
overcome this difficulty a special system of saw-
PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
135
tooth waves of slightly different frequencies is
used in scanning. The result is that a given
point is scanned first along a line making a 45°
angle with the frame, then along a line at right
angles to the first, then along the first line in the
opposite sense and finally along the second line
in the opposite sense.
Electric circuits produce first and second
derivatives of the function represented by the
picture. The difference between the function and
its second derivative is a deblurring operator
which can be used to sharpen the contrast in
photographs. Examples were shown where this
has been accomplished, including an X-ray
photograph of the heart. Outline drawings can
be produced from photographs by using the
first derivative alone. The derivative is rectified
and applied to a trigger circuit to obtain lines
to constant intensity.
The system can also be used in the study of
operators and filters in 2-dimensional arrange-
ments. A considerable number of possible
applications were outlined. (Secretary’s abstract.)
1401sT MEETING, DECEMBER 3, 1954
Francois N. Frenkiezt, of the Johns
Hopkins University Applied Physics Laboratory,
addressed the Society on Atmospheric pollution.
The five basic factors are:
(1) Production of pollutants.
(2) Emission.
(3) Transfer by atmosphere.
(4) Chemical changes en route.
(5) Deposition from atmosphere.
The paper discussed some details of the third
factor: the fluid dynamics and meteorology of
pollution. The complicated fluid motion of the
atmosphere requires so many iterative applica-
tions of complicated equations that more artistic
means are needed, partly science and_ partly
intuition or art. Electronic computers, however,
allow a brute force attack.
Atmospheric pollution can be responsible for
much suffering. One week of London smog in
1952 increased the weekly death rate from 1,000
to 2,500, mostly in circulatory and respiratory
diseases. The recent Los Angeles and Pasadena
smog fortunately had no such result, but might
at another time.
The pattern of smoke from chimneys can be
averaged over a long time to obtain its mean
concentration distribution and is generally ellip-
136 JOURNAL OF THE
tical. Each smog puff from each chimney moves
with the wind and_ disperses. Eventually an
equilibrium condition is reached at some distance
from the sources.
The wind at Los Angeles reverses direction
between 5:30 a.m., and 9:30 a.m., and thereafter
shifts gradually with a fairly consistent pattern.
Considerable numerical integration of wind
velocity data yields the effects produced by an
assumed distribution of sources. The Los Angeles
area is a half bowl, bounded by mountains. The
sea breeze blows into the open side of the bowl.
A temperature inversion stops upward diffusion
and currents, thereby putting an effective lid on
the bowl, trapping and concentrating pollutants.
Computations have been made, using what
wind velocity and smog diffusion data were
available, and assuming various sources, such as
a point source at Long Beach or automobiles in
Los Angeles. The resulting concentration con-
tours were shown, and agreed roughly with
observed smog conditions. The effect of oxidiza-
tion of hydrocarbons by solar radiation was
added, and the resulting distribution also shown.
The rough agreement of these computations
with reality indicate that a calculation with
much more data would be valid and _ useful.
Such computations can be made in a reasonable
time by using electronic computing machines.
Fast computation should be useful for predicting
an approach to the danger level, and indicate
which sources should be shut down until condi-
tions change. Computation should also be useful
in planning the development of a region, as to
which parts are safest for industrial zoning, for
example. (Secretary’s abstract.)
1402D MEETING, DECEMBER 17, 1954
Joun P. Haaan, of the Naval Research Lab-
oratory, spoke on Radio sources and the structure
of the galaxy.
The material presented was based on studies
of the radio spectrum of the heavens carried out
at the Naval Research Laboratory with the 50-
foot ‘‘Radio-telescope.”” Such studies depend
largely upon the known properties of the hydro-
gen atom in radiation and absorption. Radio
reception has supplemented ordinary telescopic
observation, as for example in the neighborhood
of Cassiopiea, where Mt. Wilson found diffuse
WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES — VOL. 46, No. 4
luminous clouds of hydrogen after their existence
had been detected by radio waves.
As is well known, our galaxy is pervaded with
hydrogen atoms in various degrees of dispersal,
varying from one atom per ce in the more diffuse
parts of the galaxy arms to 100 atoms per cc in
the hydrogen clouds and to very much higher
figures in the stars themselves. The neutral
hydrogen atom in this diffuse state absorbs and
emits a radiation of about 21 cm wavelength
(1,420.405 Mc). Both emission and absorption,
of course, show appropriate doppler shifts with
respect to an observer on earth. Studies were also
made of the continuous spectrum at 21, 9.4, and
3.15 cm.
In addition to the line radiation there is a con-
tinuous background radiation, often called “white
noise”’ (essentially independent of frequency, for
not too wide bands), and also a number of ‘“‘ob-
jects” that are much brighter than the diffuse
hydrogen and that are at a temperature of tens
of thousands of degrees. These sources seem to
lie with few exceptions on the galactic equator.
The diffuse hydrogen of the cold clouds has an
effective temperature of about 100° K.
By analysing the radio spectrum in the neigh-
borhood of the radio line as a function of both
frequency and direction (i.e., Right Ascension
and Declination), it is possible to win much infor-
mation on the distribution of the hydrogen in the
absorbing clouds that lie between a discrete radio
source and the observer. In the case of Cassiopeia,
absorption lines are seen corresponding to at
least three clouds: one of which lies in the second
arm of our galaxy and the other two in the first
arm. The radio source itself lies at least in the
second arm and probably beyond it. By using
this technique the galaxy can be mapped in terms
of such measurement, showing the hydrogen
clouds and their relative velocities. Such mapping
shows that the hydrogen is not loosely and un-
relatedly distributed in the arms of the galaxy,
but has many denser ‘‘cells” of 5-6 parsecs in
diameter. The center of the galaxy, 8,000 parsecs
away, displays a complicated absorption spec-
trum which was exhibited and discussed.
Further increases in resolving power depend
upon larger diameter radio-mirrors, and it is
hoped that when and if such mirrors are built it
will prove possible to extend this type of spec-
trum analysis to lines from other elements,
notably deuterium. (Secretary’s abstract.)
CONTENTS
Page
PaLEONTOLoGY.—A late Triassic terebratellacean from Peru. FRANCcIS
Ges STAI oy 5%. 6 ES Ses es ode eo oe CO 101
PALEOBOTANY.—New items in Cretaceous and Tertiary floras of the
western United States. RoLanp W. BRowN.................... 104
Botany.—Calamochloa: A Mexican grass. ERNEST R. SOHNS......... 109
Borany.—Studies in South American plants, XVI. A. C. SMITH..... 113
Zoo.tocy.—A new crayfish of the genus Procambarus from South Carolina
(Decapoda: Astacidae). Horton H. Hopss, Jr................. 117
ZooLocy.—A new entoniscid (Crustacea: Isopoda) from the Pacific coast.
LEONARD) MUSCATINE)... .2-o..¢ei00 54 ol Ts bs. 122
ZooLoacy.—Cossura pygodactylata, a new annelid from San Francisco Bay
(Polychaeta: Cirratulidae). Merepita L. Jonus................ 127
Mammatocy.—Two new long-tailed pocket mice (Perognathus formosus)
from Arizona. E. Lenprnn CockRUM................)...)2 eee 131
PROcEEDINGS: Philosophical Society of Washington.................. 132
INotesand! N@wsi.): Sie Sikgee eee sana cee en 103, 108, 115
ui
hse
¥ 4%
VOLUME 46 May 1956 NUMBER 5
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
ceereeeeecrercere
SS
Published Monthly by the
mae ft ENG TON A CAD EM Y..OF SCIENCES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: CursterR H. Pace, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RoNaALD BAMForD, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL EsTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 33144 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges.—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. wine these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the PrRocrEDINGS should be sent to Haraup A. ReHpER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subscruptionsiates for the JOURNATA——bereyeCa lynne see ninenetete er eeeeee $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ — —
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, inel. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)........ 8.00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 45, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $378.50.
Monoeraru No. 1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’? by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
INDEX to JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS.......................... $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete............................. $25.00
Single-volumesssunbound ree ae seis ses ei ee eee eee 2.00
Singlesmumbersy sare hac cee ce cee na ea rar eee ee Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’’ and
addressed to the Treasurer, H. 8. Rappieye, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
D.C.
Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925.
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 46
May 1956
No. 5
CHEMICAL ENGINEERING.—Joule-Thomson coefficients for Freon-12.! RICHARD
A. SCHMIDTKE. (Communicated by C. H. Page.)
The increasing demand in recent years
for mechanical refrigeration because of its
application to domestic refrigerators, air
conditioning, and food and _ industrial
processing has led to the development of
new refrigerants. In order to make proper
engineering use of these new compounds an
accurate knowledge of their thermodynamic
behavior is necessary. The purpose of the
present investigation of the Joule-Thomson
effect in Freon-12 is to add to the experi-
mental data regarding its thermodynamic
behavior.
Freon-12 (dichlorodifluoromethane) was
selected for study because of its importance
in engineering application. Buffington, Gil-
key, and their coworkers (/, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6)
have prepared tables of thermodynamic
properties for Freon-12 by the use of pres-
sure-volume-temperature data together with
specific heat determinations. The Joule-
Thomson coefficients reported here are use-
ful in the superheated region for verification
of the previously published properties and
as additional data relating to the behavior
of Freon-12.
The experimental work was done in the
Thermodynamics Laboratory of the Me-
chanical Engineering Department, Illinois
Institute of Technology. The range of the
data is: pressure, 15 psia to 50 psia; tem-
perature, 100°F. to 300°F.
The Joule-Thomson experiment has been
discussed in the literature many times since
1852, when Joule and Thomson (7) first
reported their work. Although the thermo-
dynamic theory is well known, the basis
for the experimental work will be given.
The definition of the Joule-Thomson coef-
ficient, 4, 1s
1 Received March 138, 1956.
le
)
»)
uw = (dt/dp)n (1)
where the subscript h refers to partial dif-
ferentiation at constant enthalpy. The par-
ticular experimental method employed,
called the radial flow porous plug method,
has been used by other investigators such
as Budenholzer and his coworkers (8, 9, 10,
11, 12). It is based on the assumption that
uF (AT /Ap)n (2)
is sufficiently accurate provided the finite
increments are kept small enough. The
requirement that the enthalpy remain con-
stant is best achieved by a steady flow proc-
ess. If the First Law of Thermodynamics is
applied to the steady flow process of a unit
mass of substance between cross sections |
and 2 along the flow path, the following
equation results:
Zi/J + V2/2gJ + Qe
= Zo/ J + hi» + V2/LgJ + W 2/ J
Now a process which occurs with no change
of elevation, no change of velocity, no ex-
ternal work, and no heat exchange with the
surroundings would be one of constant en-
thalpy. The experimental apparatus was
designed to meet these conditions and to
permit measurement of the pressure and
temperature increments as well as the pres-
sure and temperature level of the process.
The general arrangement of the apparatus
is shown schematically in Fig. 1. The com-
pressor is a 4-cylinder reciprocating ma-
chine of about 2.7 cubie feet per minute
capacity. The volume chambers served to
damp out pressure fluctuations. The heating
coils were each of '4-inch diameter copper
tubing about 7 feet long immersed in a
7
JUN 2 7 1956
MOTOR AND
COMPRESSOR
OIL
SEPARATOR
VOLUME
CHAMBER
DEHYDRATOR HEAT
EXCHANGER
CONTROL
VALVES
CONSTANT
TEMPERATURE
BATH
HEATING
COIL
PLUG
CHAMBER
HEATING
COIL
Fie. 1.—General layout
corn oil, controlled temperature bath to
bring the gas to the proper temperature.
The heat exchanger, a small water-cooled
shell-and-tube type, is used for protecting
the compressor from too high operating
temperature. The valves shown are for flow
control and for controlling the pressure
drops in the plug chamber.
The plug chamber shown in cross section
in Fig. 2 is the most important part of the
apparatus as all the measurements are
made there. A steel chamber with highly
polished inner surfaces and aluminum foil
radiation shields at E, F, and I prevent
radiant heat exchange. The porous plug
through which the gas flows is a modified
microporous porcelain filter candle such
as used for biological filtering. This thimble
shaped plug is 1 inch in diameter and has
an effective flow length of 3 inches. In
order to satisfy the conditions stated in
connection with equation 3, the chamber
was placed horizontally to have constant
elevation, the large flow area assures very
small velocities, and no external work is
done from one side of the plug to the other.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF
SCIENCES VOL. 46, NO. &
The heat exchange is kept very small by the
controlled bath (held to 0.1°F), the radia-
tion shielding, and asbestos insulation
within the plug chamber.
The pressure drop was measured by a
mercury-in-steel manometer, which was
read electrically and calibrated so that the
pressure difference (measured at points
C and D of plug chamber) could be de-
termined to 0.05 psi. At the usual pressure
drop of 17.9 psi used in the experiments,
this amounted to an uncertainty of 0.3 per-
cent. The copper-constantan three junction
thermopile used to measure the temperature
drop was calibrated at the ice point, steam
point, and sodium-bromide transition point.
This permitted the determination of the
temperature drop to 0.01°F, which at the
worst experimental case of a 1° drop amounts
to 1 percent. The upstream pressure and
temperature were measured to establish
the state of conditions. The pressure was
a
Gl) VA
\
\
iN
. .
. TTR
ye LA
AYZZZ2
Fie. 2.—Plug chamber
May 1956
TaBLe 1—JouLEe-THOMSON COEFFICIENTS FOR
FREON-12
| JouLE-THOMSON COEFFICIENT, u (F/psi)
TEMPERATURE (°F) |
p 15 psia | p 25 psia | p 35 psia | p 50 psia
100 | 0.144 | 0.194 | 0.213 | 0.229
120 | 0.125 | 0.173 | 0.193 0.211
140 | 0.112 | 0.158 0.181 0.198
160 0.100 0.146 0.169 | 0.188
|
| |
180 0.092 | 0.138 | 0.162 | 0.183
200 0.088 | 0.133 | 0.157 0.177
220 | 0.086 | 0.128 | 0.152 0.173
240 ' 0.084 | 0.124 0.147 0.170
260 | 0.082 | 0.120 | 0.143 0.168
280 | 0.080 | 0.117 | 0.139 | 0.164
300 0.077 | 0.112 0.135 0. 160
TaBLE 2.—SpectFic VOLUME OF FREON-12 at 15
Psta
os SPECIFIC VOLUME SPECIFIC VOLUME
Haar (ft?/Ib) (ft/lb)
Author Buffington and Gilkey
100 3.266 3.266
120 3.387 3.388
140 3.507 3.510
160 3.627 3.632
180 3.745 3.755
200 3.866 3.877
220 3.985 3.998
240 4.106 4.120
260 4.225
280 4.344
300 4.464
measured, depending upon its magnitude,
with either a 0-60 psi or a 0-300 psi Bour-
don tube gage. These gages were of excellent
quality and were carefully calibrated against
a dead-weight gage tester. The pressure
could be determined to 0.1 psi, which at the
worst conditions of 15 psia, amounts to
0.7 percent. The upstream temperature
was measured with a carefully calibrated
(ice, steam, sodium-bromide points) copper-
constantan thermocouple. Therefore the
upstream temperature was determined to
0.01°F, which at 100°F results in an uncer-
tainty of 0.01 percent. Emf measurements
were made with a Leeds and Northrop
type K-2 potentiometer, Eppley Standard
cell, and a Leeds and Northrop type E
galvanometer.
The calculated uncertainty in the values
of u is 0.0006 F/psi, or less than 1 percent.
SCHMIDTKE: JOULE-THOMSON COEFFICIENTS FOR FREON-12
139
However, owing to the slow drifts in the
pressure and temperature levels reported
by most other investigators of Joule-Thom-
son coefficients—see, for example, Roebuck
(13, 14)—and also the possibility of heat
leakage, it is estimated that the over-all
accuracy of the values of uw is about 4 per-
cent.
The results are shown graphically in Fig.
3, which was plotted from the original data.
Fig. 4 was obtained by cross-plotting from
the smoothed curves of Fig. 3.
To check the values of » found in this
work, the specific volume and the compres-
sibility factor were computed and com-
pared with the directly measured quantities
of Buffington and Gilkey (6). The specific
volume was determined from the equation
vf T = w/To + [[ (WOE) i ©
where vo and 7 represent at an arbitrary
state on the isobar of integration. The
isobar was chosen at 15 psia and the refer-
ence temperature at 100°F. The isobaric
heat capacity was compiled from the equa-
tion of Buffington and Fleisher (4) and the
tables of Buffington and Gilkey (6) give
vo = 3.266 ft?/lb. Table 2 shows the com-
parison of computed and directly measured
values of specific volume.
The compressibility factor is defined by
the equation
— / 1) [x
CG = sry IRell (5)
TABLE 3.—COMPRESSIBILITY FACTORS FOR
Frron-12 av 15 Pstra
COMPRESSIBILITY COMPRESSIBILITY
a ea Factor _ Factor
7 Author Buffington and Gilkey
100 0.987 | 0.987
120 0.988 0.989
140 0.989 0.990
160 0.990 0.991
180 0.991 0.993
200 0.991 | 0.994
220 0.992 | 0.995
240 0.992 0.996
260 0.993
280 0.993
300 0.994
140 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES — VOL. 46, No. 5
(F/psia)
ZA
0.000
0,000
100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280
TEMPERATURE (F)
Fic. 3.—Joule-Thomson coefficient vs. temperature
ees ee |
o
2 a a i a
a ee eee oe
~ 0.160 L a
ceases. -
ee ae aan
aes
ia 300 F
0.050
Bae
fo) 25 3
10 15 2
PRESSURE (psia)
Fia. 4.—Joule-Thomson coefficient vs. pressure
May 1956 SCHMIDTKE: JOULE-THOMSON
It is related to the Joule-Thomson coeffi-
cient in the following:
T
Ca | [puC,/R,T'] aT, (6)
To
where Cy and 7’) represent the compressi-
bility factor and temperature at an ar-
bitrary base state on the isobar of integra-
tion. The comparative results are given in
Table 3.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The author wishes to express his gratitude
to Dr. R. G. Owens and Dr. R. A. Buden-
holzer for their aid and encouragement in
this work.
NOMENCLATURE
Symbol Definition Units
C Compressibility factor
Cy Isobaric heat capacity Btu/lb F
g Acceleration of gravity ft/sec?
h Enthalpy Btu/Ib
J Mechanical equivalent of ft lb/Btu
heat
Dp Pressure lb/ft? or psi
Rg Gas constant ft lb/lb R
T Temperature R
V Velocity ft/sec
v Specific volume ft®/Ib
W Work ft lb/Ib
Z Elevation ft
mm Joule-Thomson coefficient F ft?/lb or F/psi
A Finite difference
REFERENCES
(1) Burrineton, R. M., and Giikry, W. K.
Thermodynamic properties of dichlorodi-
fluworomethane, a new refrigerant: I, The
equation of state of superheated vapor. Ind.
and Eng. Chem. 23: 1931.
GILKEY, W. K., GrRAND, F. W., and Brxter,
M. E. Thermodynamic properties of dichloro-
difluoromethane, a new refrigerant: IT,
Vapor pressure. Ind. and Eng. Chem. 23:
1931.
(2)
COEFFICIENTS FOR FREON-12Z 141
(3) Dicuowsky, F. R., and Gruxry, W. K. Ther-
modynamic properties of dichlorodifluoro-
methane, a new refrigerant: III, Critical
constants and orthoboric densities. Ind. and
Eng. Chem. 23: 1931.
Burrinaton, R. M., and Fiersumr, J. Ther-
modynamic properties of dichlorodifluoro-
methane, a new refrigerant: IV, Specific heat
of liquid and vapor, and latent heat of vapor-
ization. Ind. and Eng. Chem. 23: 1931.
Burrineron, R. M., and Grikny, W. K.
Thermodynamic properties of dishlorodi-
fluoromethane, a new refrigerant: V, Corre-
lation, checks, and derived quantities. Ind.
and Eng. Chem. 23: 1931.
Burrineton, R. M., and Griukny, W. K.
Thermodynamic properties of dichlorodi-
fluoromethane (F-12). Amer. Soc. Refrig.
Eng. Cire. no. 12. 1931.
Jounn, J. P., and THomson, W. On the thermal
effects of fluids in motion. Mathematical and
Physical Papers (Thomson) 1.
BupENHOLZER, R. A. Joule-Thomson coeffi-
cient of methane. Doctoral Thesis, Cali-
fornia Institute of Technology. 1939.
Bupennouzer, R. A., Sace, B. H., and
Lacny, W. N. Phase equilibria in hydro-
carbon systems. Joule-Thomson coefficient
of methane. Ind. and Eng. Chem. 31: 1939.
BupENHOLZER, R. A., Sacn, B. H., and
Lacry, W. N. Phase equilibria in hydro-
carbon systems. Joule-Thomson coefficient
of gaseous maxtures of methane and ethane.
Ind. and Engl Chem. 31: 1939.
BupENHOLZER, R. A., Sace, B. H., and
Lacny, W. N. Phase equilibria in hydro-
carbon systems. Joule-Thomson coefficients
for gaseous mixtures of methane and n-butane.
Ind. and Eng. Chem. 32: 1940.
BuDENHOLZER, R. A., Botkin, D. G., SaGeE,
B. F., and Lacry, W. N. Phase equilibria
in hydrocarbon systems. Joule-Thomson co-
efficients in the methane-propane system. Ind.
and Eng. Chem. 34: 1942.
Roersuck, J. R. The Joule-Thomson effect in
air. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci. 60:
1925.
Rorsuck, J. R. The Joule-Thomson effect in
air. Second paper. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts
and Sci. 64: 1930.
(4)
(6)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
The progress of science is as orderly and determinate as the movement of the
planets, the solar systems, and the celestial firmaments. It is regulated by laws
as exact and irresistible as those of astronomy, optics, and chemistry.
S. Brown (1843).
142
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, NO. 5
ENTOMOLOGY .—Three new Neotropical flea beetles. Doris H. Buakn, Arling-
ton, Va.
Three Neotropical flea beetles of similar
color pattern and representing three different
genera are herewith described. All belong to
obscure and little-known genera and had
not been definitely placed in the U. 8.
National Museum collection. Two of them
were with Diabrotica pulchella (Jacq. DuVal),
a drawing of which is included (Fig. 3).
Jacquelin DuVal originally described this
as a Phyllobrotica (it is still listed as such in
Blackwelder’s Checklist), possibly because
its color pattern resembled that of the
well-known European beetle Phyllobrotica
quadrimaculata (Linnaeus).
Pseudogona subcostata, n. sp.
Fig. 4
About 6 mm in length, elongate oval, shining,
very finely and obsoletely punctate, pale yellow,
with the head and breast black, and on the
elytra a wide basal and a preapical black band,
the basal band having two elongate yellow spots
near the suture. Antennae pale with joints 7 and 8
deeper brown and joints 9 to 11 paler yellow.
Head entirely dark, the interocular space
one-half width of head, eyes prominent and
large, occiput rounded, polished, and with a few
fine punctures and two larger punctures on each
side near the eye connected by a faint groove;
frontal tubercles well marked, interantennal area
narrowly produced into a carina extending down
to labrum. Antennae not half the length of the
beetle, third joint a little shorter than fourth,
and fourth a little shorter than fifth, remainder
subequal and gradually becoming a very little
shorter. The basal six joints yellow, 7 and 8
brown, 9 to 11 paler yellow. Prothorax entirely
pale, minutely punctate, about one-third wider
than long, smoothly convex, without depressions,
with a rounded margin, the frontal angles not
wide as in Disonycha, or obliquely cut as in
Systena, but small; the basal angles with a small
tooth. Scutellum small and entirely dark.
Elytra broader in apical half, not very convex,
without depressions, shining, and with numerous
fine costae, not extending the entire length and
between these, rows of fine confused punctures;
pale yellow with a piceous black wide basal band
not extending to the middle of the elytra or to
the margins, and having on each elytron an
elongate pale spot near the scutellum, a piceous
band also behind the middle, the apex pale. Body
beneath pale except the black breast, legs pale.
Anterior coxal cavities closed, posterior femora
enlarged, tibiae on hind feet spurred, claws
appendiculate. Length 6.4 mm; width 3 mm.
Type, female, U.S.N.M. no. 63136, collected by
Schild and Burgdorf at Tucurrique, Costa Rica.
Remarks——H. S$. Barber has labeled this
“Not a Diabrotica [which it strikingly resembles
and with which it was placed] but a female
Halticid, ?Pseudogona panamensis var. Jac.”
Jacoby’s description of P. panamensis, however,
differs in that there are three dark elytral fasciae
instead of two, as well as different punctation.
In P. militaris Jacoby from Panama, the basal
joints of the antennae are all black and the
elytra have a shallow transverse depression
below the base and are opaque and not shiny.
In Jacoby’s description of P. pallida (also from
Tucurrique, Costa Rica, the type locality of the
present species) the color pattern is quite
different, and the tibiae and tarsi are more or
less black. In none of the species is there any
mention of the faint elytral costation so apparent
in the present species.
It is curious that although these species are all
listed in the Zoological Record, Heikertinger
in the Junk Catalogue omits four species of
Pseudogona, and Blackwelder in his Checklist
omits two species of this same genus. Jacoby
described all six species that have comprised the
genus up to the present, namely: P. panamensis,
chiriquensis, argentinensis, discoidalis, militaris,
and pallida. He characterized the genus as being
similar to Systena but with differently shaped
antennae and with the thorax having no groove.
He stated that it differs from Oxygona in having
a narrower, subquadrate thorax.
Nephrica macrops, n. sp.
Fig. 2
About 6 mm in length, ovate, moderately
shiny, pale yellow with the upper half of head
and mouthparts, the antennae, tibiae and tarsi
dark, the elytra pale with a broad basal band
and another below the middle not quite extending
May 1956 BLAKE: THREE NEW NEOTROPICAL FLEA BEETLES 14
Bm
1Pseudodisonycha Turquinensis 3 Diabrotica pulchella JaceDvVal [Cuba]
2. Nephrica macrops 4. Pseudogona subcostata
Frias. 1-4.—Neotropical flea beetles
144 JOURNAL OF THE
to the apex, these bands dark witha metallic blue
lustre. Eves elongate and emarginate.
Head with large elongate eyes, somewhat
emarginate on the inner side but not so markedly
as in N. tinornata Jacoby, and on the vertex
separated by one-third the width of the head;
on either side near the eye a large puncture or
fovea, and from this a line of fine punctures
extending down to the clearly marked frontal
tubercles, the upper part of the head otherwise
polished and piceous in color; cara produced
and extending down the front, the lower front
pale with the mouthparts brownish. Antennae
not half the length of the beetle, deep brown
except the two basal joints which are paler, third
joint not as long as fourth, joints 4, 5, and 6
broad, the following joints becoming gradually
thinner. Prothorax twice as wide as long with wide
explanate margin and broadly rounded anterior
angles, not very convex, shining, impunctate,
pale yellow. Scutellum dark. Elytra broad, with
wide explanate margin, shining, impunctate,
pale yellow with a wide dark basal band and an
equally wide band below the middle not reaching
the apex, these bands having a dark blue metallic
lustre, the margin being always pale. Body
beneath entirely pale, the femora pale reddish
brown, tibiae and tarsi deepening to piceous;
the hind tibiae grooved, the anterior and middle
tibiae with a sharp ridge in the middle of a
shallow channel. Hind tibiae with a spur.
Claws appendiculate. Length 6.2 mm; width
3.2 mm.
Type, male, U.S.N.M. no. 63137, collected
‘fn banana trash from Panama.”
Remarks.—Jacoby’s description of N. boliviana
agrees with this except that in his beetle the
undersurface is entirely dark and the elytral
markings are metallic green. This is the second
species of the genus to be described from north of
South America, the other, NV. inornata Jacoby,
also from Panama, being entirely pale with
kidney shaped eyes.
Pseudodisonycha turquinensis, n. sp.
Fig. 1
About 6 mm in length, oblong oval, shining,
nearly impunctate, pale yellow, the head,
WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, NO. 5
antennae, legs, except the basal half of femora,
black, a deep blue wide transverse band at base
of elytra and another equally wide below the
middle, not reaching the apex.
Head with interocular space more than half
its width, a large fovea on each side of vertex
near eye with a few finer punctures about it;
frontal tubercles bulging; a somewhat produced
carina between antennal sockets extending down
the short lower front; head entirely dark except
for the pale labrum and the pale neck beneath
the mouthparts. Antennae black, stout, third
joint shorter than fourth, which is longest,
remainder subequal and a little shorter than
fourth. Prothorax not twice as broad as long
with rounded sides and narrow margin; a small
tooth at apical and basal angles; disk moderately
convex with a slight median basal depression;
entirely pale yellow. Scutellum pale yellow.
Elytra with prominent humeri and deep intra-
humeral sulcus, shining, very finely and not
densely punctate; a wide deep blue band at base
and also one below the middle, the latter not
reaching the apex. Body beneath pale with the
basal half of all femora pale, shining, a few pale
hairs on the abdomen, coxal cavities open. Hind
femora not as much thickened as in Oedionychus;
a spur on hind tibiae; claws appendiculate.
Length 6.4 mm; width 3 mm.
Type, female, U.S.N.M. no. 63188, collected by
8. C. Bruner and C. H. Ballou on Pico Turquino,
altitude 4,000-5,000 feet, Oriente Province,
Cuba, July 20, 1922.
Remarks.—Because the markings resemble so
much those of Diabrotica pulchella (Jacq. Du Val),
this beetle was long concealed in the collection
with that species. It is difficult to place in a
genus. The hind femora while not greatly
enlarged nevertheless are those of an alticid.
The tibiae with the ridge on the upper side and
the spur at the end, and the head with the fovea
near the eye so characteristic of Disonycha, place
it near that genus. The thorax, however, is not so
broad as in Disonycha and does not have the wide
anterior angles. There is unfortunately no
genus Pseudodisonycha Blake.
May 1956
SOMMERMAN: NEW SPECIES
OF RHYOPSOCUS 145
ENTOMOLOGY .—Two new species of Rhyopsocus (Psocoptera) from the U.S. A..,
with notes on the bionomics of one household species. KATHRYN M. SOMMERMAN,
Arctic Health Research Center, Public Health Service, Anchorage, Alaska.
(Communicated by A. B. Gurney.)
The genus Rhyopsocus is currently placed
in the family Psoquillidae according to
Pearman’s classification, 1936, or in Tro-
giidae following the classification of Roesler,
1944. If we assume that Rhyopsocus, Deip-
nopsocus, and Rhyopsocopsis are subgeneric
categories in the genus Rhyopsocus, only
one species of this genus is known to occur
in the United States, R. (Deipnopsocus)
tecanus (Banks 1930) described from
Brownsville, Tex. A second species, R.
eclipticus Hagen, 1876, questionably from
this country, was collected on Kerguelen
Island in October 1874. The following com-
ment is quoted from the original descrip-
tion: ‘The only specimen noticed during
the stay of the Transit Party at Kerguelen
was captured October 17, in-doors, and was
mounted in balsam on a slide. Shortly
before its capture some instrument boxes,
brought from Washington and containing a
quantity of packing straw, had been un-
packed in the same room; a circumstance
rendering the habitat of the insect very
doubtful at the time. J. H. K.”’ Hagen
states that the antennae of this specimen
were broken, one having eight basal seg-
ments and the other twelve, while an apical
section of fourteen segments lay near by on
the slide. It seems quite probable that the
apical part was broken off the 8-segmented
base instead of the 12-segmented one as he
assumed.
The characteristics possessed by the spe-
cies of this genus are: head short and ob-
lique, labial palps 2-segmented, antennae
22-segmented, peg like sense organ on inner
side of second segment of maxillary palp,
Wig. 1, lacinia bifid, Fig. 2, ocelli usually
completely developed in macropterous
forms; wings variable in length, forewings
rounded apically and possessing stout setae
on veins and margin, usually a closed discal
cell bounded by R and M and their deriva-
tives (cell sometimes absent, especially in
brachypterous forms), Cu usually shorter
than Cue, in hind wing M not branched;
tarsi 3-segmented, claws without preapical
tooth, Fig. 3; paraprocts each with a mesad
anal spine.
Two species of this genus came to my
attention while collecting in the Southeast-
ern States, one of which was taken indoors in
small numbers in my house at Orlando,
Fla. The latter was living year-round on the
bedroom walls, the only walls covered with
a water-base paint, in association with a
species of the Liposcelis bostrychophilus
complex and L. entomophilus (Enderlein,
1907). This species is of no apparent eco-
nomic importance but because a study of
some of the household psocids was being
made at that time, preliminary observa-
tions were made on this one too. Unfor-
tunately it was necessary to move before a
detailed study of the bionomics could be
made so the information is incomplete.
I am indebted to Mr. J. V. Pearman for
comparisons and comments regarding these
two species and Fhyopsocopsis peregrinus
Pearman, 1929, and Detpnopsocus disparilis
Pearman, 1931. Dr. P. J. Darlington ex-
amined the types of eclipticus and texanus
and supplied information in answer to my
questions. On learning that this paper was
in preparation, Dr. A. B. Gurney kindly
contributed for study the specimen he had
collected in Texas. To each I extend my
sincere thanks.
I have not seen specimens of the other
species in this genus, and so my comments
are based on the original descriptions and
on observations made by others. These two
new species apparently most closely resemble
R. eclipticus, but the sex of the type of the
latter is not known to me. Brachypterous
individuals of these two new species are
usually smaller than the macropterous
forms and lighter in color. If such is gener-
ally true of the species in this genus, then
these two species are smaller than eel? pticus,
the brachypterous form of which is larger
than the macropterous forms of these two
new species. Regardless of the sex of the
146
type of D. spheciophilus Enderlein, 1903, a
Peruvian species, available information
indicates that it differs from these two in
several ways, the most noticeable being:
color pattern, absence of setae along the
margin of the anal lobe, and presence of
rows of scales along the wing margin. Al-
though there is some question concerning
the presence of scales on the wings of texanus
it is likely that the presence of the white
hair on the head and legs of this species
distinguishes it from these two.
Rhyopsocus bentonae, n. sp.
Figs. 1-12
Length of alcoholic specimens 1.15 to 1.6 mm
including wings. Head and thorax of macrop-
terous forms dark brown, antennae, legs and
dorsal parts of terminalia light brown, abdomen
pale yellow. Corresponding parts of brachyp-
terous forms light golden brown to buff, with
abdomen likewise pale yellow. Wing membrane
almost hyaline, with a slight fumose tinge. There
is considerable variation in wing venation, some
veins having extra branches which may anas-
tomose, but in general venation is as shown in
Fig. 8.
Dorsal, posterolateral margin of male termi-
nalia with two stout, curved, bluntly pointed
and sparsely setose prongs; ventral surface of
terminalia with a broad, thin, tail-fin-like flap
(hypandrium?) which is a bit asymmetrical,
Figs. 6, 11, 12.
Dorsal, anterior margin of female terminalia
medianly expanded to form a quadrangular
plate bearing a non-pigmented spot; anterior
lateral limits of terminalia densely pigmented,
much darker than lateral and apical margins of
egg-guide; anterior margin of faintly pigmented
subgenital plate convex, Figs. 4, 9, 10.
Holotype, macropterous male, Orlando, Fla.,
October 1953, ex culture, K. M. Sommerman.
Allotype, same data. These are deposited in
my collection. Paratypes, four specimens, a
macropterous and brachypterous male and
female, all same data as above, deposited in each
of the collections of the following institutions or
individuals: USNM, INHS, MCZ, P. J. Chap-
man, E. L. Mockford, and J. V. Pearman, and
ten of each of the four kinds of individuals in my
collection. The following additional distribution
records are available, all from Florida: Daytona
Beach, Nov. 2, 1941, ex dry palm leaves, A. H.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, NO. 5
Sommerman, o&, 2; Englewood, May 22, 1952,
ex Flame vine, A. H. 8S. &@; same, but March
13, 1953, #, 3 2; Orlando, Oct. 1953, ex cultures
(original specimens from bedroom walls), many
specimens, both sexes, nymphs of all instars,
eges on cotton; same, but July 7, 1954, 67, 2°,
4N; Orlando, Feb. 15, 1954, ex bedroom walls,
KE IMES Soh oro ANE
I take pleasure in naming this species after
Jimmie Benton, who kindly furnished the mate-
rials for construction of the rearmg racks. Her
active interest in the rearing project concerning
the household species was, indeed, stimulating
and encouraging.
Rhyopsocus phillipsae, n. sp.
Figs. 13-17
Length of alcoholic specimens 1.1 to 1.6 mm
including wings. Overall color similar to ben-
tonae. Wings of macropterous forms, Fig. 13,
with a more sharply defined, angulated anal
lobe, much like that of peregrinus.
Dorsal, posterolateral margin of male termi-
nalia with two thin, broad, rounded lobes; ventral
surface of terminalia with exposed, median
hooklike projection on anterior margin, Figs.
GML
Dorsal, anterior margin of female terminalia
medianly with slight expansion cephalad, or if
pronounced, more rounded than bentonae; ante-
rior lateral limits of terminalia faintly pigmented,
much lghter than lateral and apical margins of
egg-guide; anterior margin of lightly pigmented
subgenital plate concave, Figs. 14, 15.
Holotype, brachypterous male, Valdosta, Ga.,
State College Campus, Apr. 23, 1955, ex bamboo
sheaths, Sommerman and Phillips. Allotype,
macropterous, same data. These are deposited
in my collection. Paratypes, a brachypterous
male and female, same data, deposited in USNM,
brachypterous female, same data but ex ground
cover, deposited in my collection. The following
additional distribution records are available:
Myakka §. Pk., Fla., June 7, 1952, ex Spanish
moss, K. M. Sommerman, 37, 2; Hayesville,
N. C., Aug. 25, 1954, ex Boxwood, W. E. Snow,
2, 2N; same, but Oct. 26, 4o, 109, 5N;
90 miles west of Orange, Tex., Oct. 8, 1951,
beating trees, A. B. Gurney, &.
It is a privilege to name this species after
Grace R. Phillips, who helped collect the type
material and who has contributed other interest-
ing specimens and records to my collection.
May 1956
BIONOMIC NOTES
The following preliminary notes on the bio-
nomics of R. bentcnae were obtained from speci-
mens reared under somewhat unnatural condi-
tions. This rearing technique was used with good
results for R. bentonae and these other household
species: Psoquilla marginepunctata Hagen, 1865,
Psocatropos lachlani Ribaga, 1899, HEctcpsccus
sp., and several species of Liposcelis. Some difh-
culty was encountered with the first instars of
P. lachlani. The equipment consisted of small
glass tubes 30 mm long by 9 mm in diameter,
which had been cut from dental tubes. These
were placed in half-inch wire mesh (hardware
cloth) racks with screen bottoms, which were
stacked in a quadrangular aquarium containing
a little water below the racks. The aquarium
was covered by a plastic tray with rounded
corners which allowed an interchange of air and
moisture, and the whole was kept at uncon-
trolled room temperature which fluctuated daily
during September to mid-October when these
preliminary observations on development were
made, the extremes being 71° and 85°F.
The food was composed of the following in-
2
DORSAL
FIGS. 4-8 AND I3 TO SCALE,
DORSAL 15
oN Q TERMINALIA
K I3 WINGS
M
SOMMERMAN: NEW SPECIES OF RHYOPSOCUS
10 KEP SS
Q TERMINALIA
VENTRAL
FIGS. 1-12 RHYOPSOCUS BENTONAE, N. SP.
VENTRAL
FIGS. 13-17 RAHYOPSOCUS PHILLIPSAE, N.SP.
147
gredients (the recipe furnished enough medium
to coat the ends of 200-300 corks): One teaspoon
of dry solids, consisting of equal parts by volume
of dried yeast, dehydrated mashed potato,
starch and dehydrated skim milk, was added to
one teaspoon of water and mixed well. Some of
this mixture was smeared on the small end of
each cork. The corks were put in a covered pan
on a hot plate and heated until the medium was a
pale brown. They were then stored in jars in the
refrigerator.
A cork containing the food was inserted in
one end of a rearing tube, the psocids introduced
and a thin cotton plug put in the other end. The
tubes were then placed in the rearing racks. The
medium softened in the moist atmosphere and
the psocids ate it as well as the mold that grew
on it. Eventually some tubes became infested
with mites and the psocids retreated to the cotton
plugs. Consequently food consumption was re-
duced and often either the psocids or the mites
injured the psocid eggs. If a dead psocid were
left in a vial containing more than one psocid,
it was eaten by the others.
R. bentcnae was an extremely active species,
'
DORSAL
do TERMINALIA SSE
VENTRAL
FIGS. 9-12 AND 14-17 ENLARGED TO SCALE, ALL SETAE OMITTED
Se Yo .
16 ———
DORSAL
& TERMINALIA
ANSE
Re
VENTRAL
148
often darting rapidly and making unexpected
starts and stops. The courtship approaches were
usually made by the male while rapidly vibrat-
ing his wings, which were held in a vertical
position. If the female were in a receptive mood
she would sometimes flit her wings in a vertical
position for a fraction of a second, several times
before mating. Occasionally the two psocids
approached each other and rubbed palps but
such antics were kept to a minimum or dis-
pensed with entirely. Then the male approached
the female head-on with his wings held verti-
cally, quickly turned around and backed under
the female as she raised her body to allow him
to slip under her from the front. He curled the
tip of his abdomen up and behind hers and when
the genitalia were joined the male sidestepped
180° with the ventral side of the body twisted
on the longitudinal axis at about 40° so that
usually some of his tarsi were not on the sub-
strate. Copulation lasted an hour on the average
(eight timed matings varying from 41 to 73
minutes), and during this time there were pro-
longed rhythmic contractions of the abdomen of
the male. Apparently a considerable amount of
fluid was forced into the female abdomen because
the dorsal prongs of the male terminalia and the
ventral tail-fin-like flap eventually took a viselike
grip on the female terminalia as her abdomen
became considerably swollen. Toward the end of
the copulation period the female sometimes
walked around dragging the male behind. Al-
most immediately after separation the male
deposited on the substrate a transparent, slightly
curved (upward) carrot-shaped sac, which was
drawn to a fine tip at the posterior end. The sac
usually contained only a small amount of a
transparent fluid at the anterior end. To my
knowledge this is the first recording of the de-
position of a copulatory sac by the male psocids
after mating. Apparently it is not uncommon, in
one group of psocids at least, becavse I have
observed the same procedure immediately after
each mating of Pscquilla marginepunctata and
Psocatropos lachlani. Often the males turned
around and ate part or all of the sac, or some-
times the females ate it. The approximate
measurements of the sacs were 0.39 by 0.09
mm,; these measurements were made through
the glass tubes. Fig. 7 was sketched from memory
according to averaged measurements. Appar-
ently the psocids have preferences as the female
sometimes resisted the approaches of the male
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, NO. 5
and butted him with her antennae, and usually
by the next day the antennae of the male were
broken off to stubs if he were still alive. Occa-
sionally on the following day the male was dead
and partly consumed, but these ‘“fights-to-the-
finish’? were not observed. However, one such
resistant female was placed with another male
and mating occurred shortly thereafter.
Mating occurred more than once. Two pairs
were observed mating again 31 days after the
first tume. In one instance a male and female of
bentonae were kept isolated from each other, but
in the company of a P. marginepunctata individual
of the opposite sex. Both sexes of marginepunc-
tata made courting advances upon the opposite
sexes of bentonae but their efforts were ignored.
The two sexes of bentonae were put in the same
tube for a short time on the 5th, 7th, 11th, and
20th days and each time mating occurred and a
sac was deposited by the male. Limited data
suggest that fertilized eggs may be deposited
for a period of about two weeks at the most,
after mating.
Information regarding length of the preoviposi-
tion period is lacking, but 9 pairs ranging in adult
age from 3 to 6 days mated immediately when
paired off. Seven of the 9 females deposited eggs
the following day while the other two did not
oviposit until 7 days later.
The eggs were deposited singly with little or
no pre- or post-ceremonial activity. They were
bare, not covered with excrement or silk, and
there seemed to be a tendency to place them in
depressions. They were most often laid on the
cotton plug or on the food, but only rarely on
the surface of the glass tubes. If mating had not
occurred a reduced number of non-fertile eggs
was deposited but they turned yellow and
shriveled. The egg totals were recorded for 9
females from mid-October to late December when
the temperatures fluctuated between 60° and
80° F. The average number laid was 74, with a
maximum of 101. Under the more favorable
conditions 5-7 eggs were laid each day, which
suggests that perhaps as many as 400 eggs could
be deposited by one female under optimum
conditions.
The eggs, Fig. 5, are somewhat boat-shaped
with a wrinkled chorion which has a distinct
center ridge dorsally with an indication of two
lateral ridges at the anterior end, each bearing
four or more little tubercles. About four days
after oviposition the eggs darkened. As they
May 1956
approached maturity the eyes and also the egg
burster, which was stretched across the front of
the head could be seen through the shell. At
hatching the nymph was ventral side up, with
the head at the anterior end of the egg. Hatching
occurred 8-10 days after oviposition. Air was
swallowed at both eclosion and molting, a prac-
tice common among psocids.
The following information on development
was obtained from group rearings since the eggs
laid each day were allowed to hatch in the vial
where oviposition occurred. Only the parents
and, later, the newly emerged adults were trans-
ferred to a fresh vial each day; consequently the
young from each daily ‘“‘brood” grew up to-
gether. Although molts and instars could be re-
corded, one had to assume that the molting
sequence was always the same as development
progressed, but such is probably not the case.
Most of the eggs hatched without any trouble
and it was only after the continued absence of a
male that non-fertile eggs were deposited.
The various observations on the nymphal
stadia were based on a minimum of 17 and a
maximum of 78 individuals. The average dura-
tion of the nymphal stage was 19.5 days, the
first stadium being 2-5 days, usually 3. The
duration of each of the second, third, fourth and
fifth stadia ranged from 2-3 days and the sixth
stadium was a little longer, 3-5 days, with an
average of 4.
Based on observations from early October to
January of nine mated pairs, the duration of the
adult stage averaged 64 days for the females and
69 for the males with maximum periods of 86
and 89 days respectively. The sex ratio was 1:1.
If males were present oviposition continued until
SOMMERMAN: NEW SPECIES OF RHYOPSOCUS
149
a few days before death of the female, assuming
that the few females under observation died of
natural causes.
SUMMARY
Two new species of Rhyopsocus are described,
and salient features illustrated for both R. ben-
tenae and phillipsae. A rearing technique for
household species is explained and notes on the
bionomics of bentonae are given as determined
from individuals reared under these somewhat
unnatural conditions. Courting and mating are
described, and the deposition on the substrate of
an almost empty transparent sac by the male
immediately after mating is noted. The life cycle
is completed in a little more than a month, the
duration of the egg stage being about 9 days and
the nymphal period 20 days. The females laid
an average of 74 eggs and adult life lasted
approximately two months.
LITERATURE CITED
Banks, N. New neuropteroid insects from the
United States. Psyche 37(38) : 223, figs. 1-2. 1930.
ENDERLEIN, G. Zur Kenntniss amerikanischer
Psociden. Zool. Jahrb. Syst. 18: 358-860, figs.
4-8. 1903.
Hacen, H. A. Contributions to the natural history
of Kerguelen Island. Pseudoneuroptera. U.S.
Nat. Mus. Bull. 3: 52-57. 1876.
PrEARMAN, J. V. New species of Psocoptera from
warehouses. Ent. Monthly Mag. 65: 107-109,
figs. 8a & b. 1929.
More Psocoptera from warehouses. Ent.
Monthly Mag. 67: 96-97, fig. 2. 1931.
The taxonomy of the Psocoptera: Prelimi-
nary sketch. Proc. Roy. Ent. Soc. London (B)
5(3): 58-62. 1936.
Roresuter, R. Die Gattungen der Copeognathen.
Stett. Ent. Zeit. 105: 117-156. 1944.
Even 2f we resolve all matter into one kind, that kind will need explaining,
and so on for ever and ever deeper and deeper into the pit at whose bottom truth
lies, without ever reaching it, for the pit is boltomless.—O. H®avisipn.
150
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 5
MALACOLOGY — Mollusca dredged by the Orea off the Santa Barbara Islands,
California, in 1951. S. StmuuMAN Berry, Redlands, Calif. (Communicated by
Harald A. Rehder.)
Through the kindness of Dr. Carl L.
Hubbs, of the Scripps Institution of Ocea-
nography, there was recently placed in my
hands a collection of mollusks taken by
himself, J. W. Sefton, and others, working
from Mr. Sefton’s research vessel, the Orca,
off the Santa Barbara Islands, Calif., in
the summer of 1951. Mollusca were not the
items principally sought by this expedition,
and since the collections were obtained in
one of the more important areas in the
Californian province where few precise
studies in this field have been made it is
most fortunate that in the press of the other
important pursuits so many of them were
eventually salvaged. By reason of our in-
adequate knowledge of the area the result-
ing list gains a significance quite out of
proportion to the size of the collection.
It is of further interest in that it includes a
number of infrequently reported or little-
known species, several of which constitute
important extensions of range. In the first
part of the paper each station from which
mollusks have been submitted is cited in
turn, and an annotated list of the species
obtained is appended. These include dredge
hauls from seven stations having recorded
depths from 11 to 58 fathoms. The richest
of these was H51-254, in 46 to 58 fathoms,
north of Anacapa Island, whence no less
than 59 species are here recorded. The
second part of the report covers the formal
descriptions of the three species obtained
which are recognized as new.
The author is happy to express his appre-
ciation of the kindness of both Mr. Sefton
and Dr. Hubbs in supplying the material
studied. The assistance of Ellis Rich, of the
College of Medical Evangelists, Loma Linda,
Calif., who made the photographs used in
the accompanying illustrations, is likewise
gratefully acknowledged.
ANNOTATED LIST
Stations H51 240 and 241 (pipe-dredge), 11 to 20
fathoms, lat. 34°01’45” to 34°02’20-35” N., long.
119°41'40” to 119°42’07-22” W., off Pelican Bay,
Santa Cruz Island, June 29, 1951.
Lima hemphilli Hertlein and Strong: 3 adoles-
cents.
Cardium (Trachycardium)
Conrad: 1 juvenile.
Calliostoma gloriosum Dall: 4 adolescents.
Callicstoma supragranosum Carpenter: 1.
Pteropurpura carpenter’ (Dall): 1 adult, 2
juveniles. It appears not impossible that the
oldest name for this species is Murex macropteron
Deshayes (1839:360; 1841:pl. 38; 1843:606).
This was originally described without citation
of locality. Its subsequent history has been a
checkered one. Poirier (1883:93) attributed it
to Japan, but I have found no confirmation of an
Oriental habitat in the writings of any recent
worker in that field. Dall (1889:201) thus identi-
fied two specimens dredged off Cape Hatteras,
N. C. This western Atlantic species has since
quadragenarium
been separately recognized as M. (P.) bequaerti
Clench and Farfante (1945:40). Unhappily I
have only once seen the original figure of M. ma-
cropteron, and the holotype has never been re-
figured unless, perchance, it be the shell figured
under this name by Reeve (1845: Murex pl. 27,
sp. 123) and Sowerby (1880: Murex pl. 11, fig.
111). These figures, both drawn by Sowerby, are
so nearly alike as almost certainly to have been
made from the same shell, that in Reeve being
by all odds the better executed and more de-
tailed. That these are excellent representations
of the Californian shell subsequently named
carpentert by Dall is at once apparent when shell
and drawing are placed side by side. Should they
then have been correctly affiliated by the icon-
ographers with Deshayes’ species, there would
seem little doubt where that century-old enigma
will finally come to rest. As I intend dealing with
this situation much more fully in a forthcoming
contribution, no further elaboration of the case
history seems necessary here.
May 1956 BERRY:
Station H51-243 (pipe dredge), 43 to 45 fathoms,
lat. 34°02’37” N., long. 119°41’, 35 to 05” W,.
northeast of Pelican Bay, Santa Cruz Island;
mud bottom; June 29, 1951.
Nucula (Nucula) tenuis (Montagu): 23, nearly
all mature.
Nucula (Acila) castrensis Hinds: 114 of various
ages, and 2 valves.
Nuculana taphria (Dall): 1 valve.
Nemocardium centifilosum (Carpenter): 5 im-
mature.
Compsomyax subdiaphana (Carpenter): 319.
Tellina (Mcerella) carpentert Dall: 1.
Dentalium nechexagonum Pilsbry and Sharp: 2.
Turritella orthosymmetra Berry: 1 (plus a frag-
ment).
Bittium sp. (nov. ?): 1. This can be referred to
no described species known to me, but in so
difficult a genus as Bittiwm a new species should
be distinct indeed to justify its foundation upon a
single specimen.
Crepidula adunca (Sowerby): 1 bleached shell.
Megasurcula carpenteriana (Gabb): 1 juvenile.
Probably referable to the form tryoniana (Gabb).
Turbonilla (Mormula) regina Dall and Bartsch:
2. These can presently be identified in no other
way, although the larger has three brown bands
on the body whorl not specified in the original
description or in Bartsch’s key.
Acteocina intermedia Willett: 2. This and
eximia (Baird) seem not too happy in Acteocina.
I fail to see why either of them ever need be con-
fused in any way with A. culcitella (Gould).
Station H51-251 (pipe dredge), 162-150 feet (26-27
fathoms), lat.34°00’38” to 20” N., long. 119 °30’35-—
13” W., Anacapa Passage; gravel bottom, with
some stones; July 2, 1951. Vegetation: Callo-
phyllis, Drouetia, Reticulobotrys, Lithotham-
nia, predominant.
Pecten (Pecten) dicgensis Dall: 2 not quite
mature. Both carried Capulus, q.v. infra.
Oldroydia percrassa (Dall): 1 juvenile.
Dendrochiton (2) sp.: 1 juvenile.
Capulus californicus Dall: 3 immature. Two
of these in situ on Pecten diegensis, the third
loose in jar.
Trivia (Pusula) ritteri Raymond: 1. Surface of
shell somewhat altered by preservative used.
Bursa californica (Hinds): 3. Very small for
the species, but of mature aspect.
Odostomia (Evalea) santarosana Dall and
Bartsch: 1. The specimen seems best referable to
this little-known species. The color, however, is
MOLLUSCA DREDGED BY THE ORCA
151
much paler than would be inferred from its
original description as “light olive.”
Station H51-252 (pipe dredge), 174-19) feet (29-
31.5 fathoms), lat. 34°00’10” N., long. 119 °27’35—
05” W., Anacapa Passage; gravel bottom, with
stones; July 2, 1951. Vegetation: Drouetia,
Reticulobotrys, Lithothamnia, etc.
Terebratulina unguicula (Carpenter): 11. The
specimens were taken adhering to a small piece
of coral. Not a mollusk, but included for the
sake of the record.
Chlamys hastatus (Sowerby): 1.
Diplodonta cf. subquadrata Carpenter: 2 adoles-
cents. Californian shells are more acutely beaked
and possess a much more strongly developed
dentition than any of the west Mexican mainland
specimens examined by me. The question of their
identity might well be reinvestigated by someone
having access to more complete series than I
have seen.
Semele aff. imcongrua Sowerby: 1, probably
immature.
Acmaea funiculata Carpenter: 1 juvenile shell,
remarkable in that a sharply ribbed initial stage
is abruptly succeeded by a stage in which the
ribs become in large degree obsolescent. For a
finely detailed discussion of this still somewhat
enigmatic species see Hanna and Smith, 1931:21.
Astraea (Pachypoma) inaequalis rutila (C. B.
Adams): 2. The specimens are small for the
species. I am unable to detect any material
difference between this form and A. 7. mon-
tereyensis Oldroyd. Carpenter’s suggestion that
rutila belongs under A. undosa (Wood) I believe
to be erroneous.
Calliostoma annulatum (Martyn): 2 juveniles.
Those who reject Martyn’s names can save this
one by quoting it as of Humphrey (1786:101).
Vermicularia fewkesw (Yates): 1.
Trivia (Pusula) ritteri Raymond: 1. A perfect
example of this lovely chaste species.
Nassarius insculptus (Carpenter): 1.
Fusinus sp.: 1 adolescent.
Pseudomelatoma sticta, n.sp.: 1 adult; 1 imma-
ture. Described in the concluding portion of
this paper (p. 156).
Conus califernicus Hinds: 7 immature.
Station H51-254, 46-58 fathoms, lat. 34°03'C5” to
45” N., long. 119°26'02” to 25’28” W., ca. 215
miles N. of W. end of Anacapa Island; July 2,
1951.
This was the richest in Mollusca of any haul
152 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, NO. 5
Figs. 1-6.—1, Epitoniwm cf. lowet (Dall), mature shell taken in 46-58 fathoms, north of west end of
Anacapa Island, Calif., X 2.6; 2, Admete seftoni, n.sp., holotype, taken in 46-58 fathoms, north of west
end of Anacapa Island, Calif., X 4.25; 3, Pseudomelatoma sticta, n.sp., ventral aspect of holotype, taken
in 26-27 fathoms, Anacapa Passage, Calif., X 3.5; 4, P. sticta, n.sp., lateral aspect of holotype, same
scale; 5, P. sticta, n.sp., ventral aspect of theimmature paratype, X 3.5; 6, P. sticta, n.sp., lateral aspect
of same specimen; same scale.
May 1956 BERRY:
made, both as to species and as to number of
individuals.
Nucula (Acila) castrensis Hinds: 1051s.
Nuculana hamata (Carpenter): 11.
Modiolus pallidulus (Dall): 1.
Cardita (Cyclocardia) longini Baily: 131. For
this name and the reasons impelling rejection of
two prior names for the species see Baily, 1945.
Pseudechama granti Strong: 1 juvenile valve.
The specimen shows the larval shell with excep-
tional distinctness.
Nemocardium centifiloswm
juveniles and adolescents.
Tellina (Moerella) carpentert Dall: 6.
Spisula cf. planulata (Conrad): 1 right valve.
Hiatella arctica (Linné): 2 juveniles.
Cuspidaria (Cardiomya) californica Dall: 1.
Leptcchiton oldroydi (Dall): 1. A distinctive
species, although one of the smallest of west
American chitons.
Puncturella coopert Carpenter: 1. This example
clearly displays the curious punctations which
characterize the shells of a number of species in
this genus.
Margarites (Lirularia)
penter): 2 shells.
Margarites (Lirularia) pedroanus (Arnold): 3.
The Californian species of Lirularia are exceed-
ingly difficult of satisfactory disposition. The
determinations here suggested are believed to be
about as close as is possible in the absence of a
thoroughgoing revision.
Solariella peramalilis (Carpenter): 4, plus 3
empty shells.
Cidarina cidaris (Carpenter): 1 half-grown
shell.
Calliostoma annulatum (Martyn): 1 juvenile
bleached shell.
Calliostoma turbinum Dall: 1.
Lictia farallonensis A. G. Smith: 1. This rare
species has hitherto been known only from the
vicinity of the Farallon Islands (see Smith,
1952:385). A fine mature example now provides
an important extension of range.
Homalopoma sp.: 1. A thoroughly puzzling
specimen, the closer determination of which is
postponed pending the aquisition of additional
material.
Turritella coopert Carpenter: 10 shells, repre-
senting a form in which the spiral keels are quite
strongly developed.
Turritella orthosymmetra Berry: 6 shells. These
(Carpenter): 14
(Car-
acuticostatus
MOLLUSCA DREDGED BY THE ORCA
153
are badly bleached but are apparently referable
here.
Bittium sp. indet.: 7 (plus 15 shells). This is a
form rather close to B. subplanatum but with
flatter whorls and more regular tuberculation.
It is possibly undescribed, but for the time being
I refrain from adding another name to this genus
of many and difficult species.
Bitttum sp. indet.: 1 bleached shell. Similar
to the preceding but much more sparsely and
coarsely tuberculate.
Bitteum ct. rugatum Carpenter: 5 bleached
shells.
Seila montereyensis Bartsch: 1. Altitude of
shell exclusive of missing apex, 14.2 mm.
Epitonium (Nitidiscala) indianerum
penter): 1.
Epitonium (A speriscala) ef. lewei Dall (Fig. 1):
1. This superb example is remarkable for its
very numerous and crowded, strongly reflexed,
coronate costae, a few of which become much
thickened and with their exaggerated reflexed
portions also much wider than the ordinary
costae, thus taking on the character of true
varices and to this extent casting doubt on current
interpretations of simple repetitive costae as
varices. The costae number 30-31 on each of the
last two whorls and 28-29 on whorls higher up
the spire. The inadequately known FE. lowei is
stated to have 26-27 costae, none of which is
described as varically thickened, but the re-
corded specimens are much smaller with an alti-
tude of only 7 mm. (see Dall, 1906:44; 1921:214,
pl. 6, fig. 11), and Iam unable to find any really
trenchant characters whereby they might be
distinguished from the apical whorls of this
shell. The Orca specimen measures: altitude
21.6; maximum diameter 10.6; altitude of aper-
ture 6.4 mm.; extreme apex decollated.
Balcis (Balcis) micans (Carpenter): 1.
Balcis (Vitreolina) titubans, n.sp.: 1. Described
in the concluding section of this paper (p. 154).
Calyptraea contorta (Carpenter): 1 juvenile
shell.
Crepidula cf. onyx Sowerby: 1 bleached shell.
An example of a small narrow form such as one
sometimes sees on a T'urritella or Olivella shell.
Natica (?) sp. indet.: 3 small shells. These have
much the aspect of Cryptonatica, but as there is
at least one species in the area with a tight um-
bilical callus of this type, yet having a horny
operculum, they must for the time being be left
unplaced.
(Car-
154
Polinices (Euspira) draconis Dall: 1.
Trivia (Pusula) ritteri Raymond: 1 immature.
Neosimnia catalinensis (Berry): 1. A perfect
although not quite typical adult example of this
rarely taken species.
Ocenebra clathrata (Dall): 5 shells.
Ocenebra (?) sp.: 1 shell.
Boreotrophon triangulatus (Carpenter): 1 shell.
Boreotrephon aff. bentleyi Dall: 2 (plus 1 shell).
These seem quite similar to B. bentleyz and may
represent a form of it, but the shell is smaller,
more compact, and obscurely spirally striate.
Mitrella tuberosa (Carpenter): 5 shells.
Amphissa reticulata Dall: 2 shells.
Amphissa undata Carpenter: 198 (plus 70
shells). By far the most abundant species in the
haul.
Nassarius aft. perpinguis (Hinds): 1 shell.
A puzzling shell, similar in general aspect to
N. perpinguis, but much higher and with a
different and peculiar sculpture, especially on
the spire. More material will be needed for its
satisfactory disposition.
Nassarius insculptus
6 shells).
Olivella baetica Carpenter: 1 bleached shell.
Mitra (Atrimitra) idae Melville: 1 shell. A
hermit-crab shell of fair size.
Admete cf. gracilior Carpenter: 2. These
represent a form close to typical gracilior, differ-
ing chiefly in the more acute shoulder tubercula-
tion and in the possession of but 8 axial ribs on
the body whorl. It may eventually prove name-
able as a further-evolved living race of the earlier
species.
Admete, n.sp.?: 2. These appear quite close to
a fossil form which the author has in MS.
Admete seftoni, n.sp.: 2. Described in the con-
cluding section of this report (p. 155).
Elaeocyma empyrosia (Dall): 4 (plus 1 doubt-
ful bleached shell).
Antiplanes perversus (Gabb): 5. These are of
medium size only.
Antiplanes (Rectiplanes) sp.: 2. Surface corro-
sion is here too great to permit certain determina-
tion without additional material.
Lioglyphostoma crystallina (Gabb): 1 (plus 3
shells): Although there are obvious discrepancies
with Dall’s figure (1921:214, pl. 6, fig. 4), there
is reasonable agreement with the original de-
scription of Gabb. Relative age may conceivably
explain the differences.
Mangelia (Kurtzia) ropert Dall: 1 shell.
Turbonilla (Pyrgolampres) sp. indet.: 1. A
(Carpenter): 2 (plus
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 5
Jong slender species which can not at present be
affliated with any of the described forms.
Turbonilla (Mormula) regina Dall and Bartsch:
5. Of various ages and sizes, several showing
spiral bands on the body whorl. Altitude of
largest shell, 21.0 mm.
Acteocina intermedia Willett: 1 (plus 7 shells).
“Retusa” harpa (Dall): 1.
Cylichna diegensis Dall: 2.
Station H51-260 (pipe dredge), 86-94 feet (ca. 14—
16 fathoms), west of Ford Point, Santa Rosa
Island. Vegetation: abundant red and brown
algae; July, 4, 1951.
Glycimeris corteziana Dall: 1.
Cardita (Cyclocardia) lengini Baily: 133.
Chama pellucida Conrad: 1 damaged imma-
ture.
Dentalium sp.: 1.
Callicstoma splendens Carpenter: 3.
Bittium attenuatum Carpenter: 1.
Balcis (Vitreolina) thersites (Carpenter): 1 im-
mature.
Ocenebra clathrata (Dall): 1.
Ocenebra (?) ef. munda Carpenter: 1 imperfect
shell.
Mitrella carinata (Hinds): 98. Small for the
species, but nearly all mature.
Nassarius cocpert (Forbes): 4 shells.
Conus californicus Hinds: 7, mostly immature.
DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES
Balcis (Vitreolina) titubans, n. sp.
Figs. 7, 8
Shell of fair size for a Californian member of
the genus, solid, smooth, polished, basally ro-
bust, with an acute, rapidly tapering, doubly
flexed spire; apex moderately tipped dorsad,
with the body of the shell strongly diverted to
the right. Whorls 10 to 11, the first translucent,
the second less so, and those succeeding opaque
milky white, very slightly swollen above the
tightly appressed and barely indented suture;
Jast whorl rounding smoothly into the full and
moderately produced base. Sculpture wanting
except for the distinct varical grooves, which,
beginning dorsally on the sixth whorl, descend
the shell in narrowly stepped obliquely protrac-
tive alignment, each groove producing an angular
downward dip in the suture as it leaves it, the
series terminating Just back of the lip; final
whorl without a varix and without a sutural
indentation. Aperture a trifle over one-quarter
the altitude of the shell, narrowly pyriform, its
posterior angle acute, rounded and slightly pro-
May 1956 BERRY:
duced in front; parietal wall barely convex, form-
ing a widely obtuse angle where it adjoins the
nearly straight, narrow, and somewhat oblique
columella, the whole covered by a moderately
thick, sharply bounded callus which is slightly
expanded in front and appressed against the
base of the shell; output lip entire, gently sinuate
below the suture, thence rather weakly produced
peripherally; from the periphery the lip rounds
smoothly back and inward to its narrow expan-
sion into the columellar thickening.
4mm,
Fie. 7.—Balcis (Vitreolina) titwbans, n. sp.,
camera-lucida outline of holotype; much enlarged.
Measurements (of holotype): Altitude 7.4;
maximum diameter (est.) 2.7; altitude of aper-
ture (to suture) 1.87; diameter of aperture
(edge of columellar lip to outer lip) 0.9 mm.
Holotype: Berry Collection no. 23624.
Type locality: 46-58 fathoms, ca. 219 miles
north of Anacapa Island, Calif.; one example,
Orca, July 2, 1951.
Commentary: The distortion of symmetry in
B. titubans is one of the most extreme seen in
any of our species. It is much larger than the
more or less similar B. grippi (Bartsch) of the
same region, and it is both more robust and more
eccentric in form than either that species or the
more northern and likewise similar B. colwmbiana
(Bartsch).
The specific name is the present participle of
the Latin titubo, I stagger.
Admete seftoni, n. sp.
Figs. 2, 9
Shell small, robust, with 5 to 544 whorls; spire
short, acutely conic, with sunken channeled
sutures; nuclear whorls rounded, more or less
MOLLUSCA DREDGED BY
THE ORCA 155
corroded in examples studied, but apparently
smooth, subcarinate above, and at the beginning
partially immersed; subsequent whorls strongly
convex, slopingly subtabulate above, with 8 to
9 strong, moderately retractive, axial ribs, and
with a strong spiral cord on the angle as well as
another below it a little more than halfway to
the suture; between these two primary spirals a
third cord shortly arises, followed sometimes on
the penultimate whorl by a fourth more slender
cord below these and a fifth above the shoulder
cord; body whorl more narrowly and less dis-
tinctly tabulate than the preceding whorls,
bearing about 9 axial ribs, the last of which back
of the aperture is somewhat obsolescent, and the
above-mentioned 4 or 5 spiral cords, the most
emphatic of these being the strong cord on the
periphery separated by quite a wide space from
a similar cord farther down the whorl, while
below on the base are 4 lesser spirals of diminish-
ing strength, the subperipheral and two posterior
basal threads penetrating the aperture parietally;
entire surface including the cords delicately
spirally striate and more crudely axially threaded ;
axial ribs subtuberculate where crossed by the
spiral cords, the nodules being best developed on
the earlier whorls Aperture ovate, rounded pos-
teriorly, more pointed, though very obtusely so,
in front; outer lip thin, smooth within, although
the external cords shine through to give some-
what the effect of a liration; lip margin ascend-
ing a little from the suture, then roundly de-
scending into the very short, widely open canal;
inner lip covered by a wash of callus which is
thin, well expanded, and closely applied parie-
Fre. 8—Balcis (Vitreolina) ttubans, n. sp.,
camera-lucida outline of holotype as seen from
right side; same seale as Fig. 7.
156
tally, but heavier and lip-like at the columella
where it becomes appressed over the very narrow
and impermeable umbilical chink; columella
sloping very slightly inward and furnished with
two fairly strong oblique plications.
Measurements (of holotype): Altitude 9.4;
maximum diameter 5.8; altitude of aperture
5.4; maximum diameter of aperture (edge of
columellar flare to margin of outer lip) 3.5 mm.
Holotype: Berry Collection no. 23679. Para-
type: Berry Collection no. 23629.
Type locality: 46-58 fathoms, ca. 214 miles
North of Anacapa Island, Calif.; 2 examples,
Orca, July 2, 1951.
Commentary: This very attractive little species
is closely similar to no described form known to
me. Its large body whorl, low-conic spire, deep
suture, and strong axial plication afford a com-
bination of characters which sets it well apart. In
general form it somewhat resembles the con-
siderably larger Alaskan species which currently
passes for A. couthouyi (Jay), but it differs
sharply in nearly every detail.
The species is dedicated to Joseph W. Sefton,
of San Diego, master of the Orca.
Pseudomelatoma sticta, n. sp.
Figs. 3-6
Shell of moderate size, elongate-fusiform, with
tall, sharply conic spire; whorls 9+, slightly
constricted in front of the suture, the anteriorly
thrust periphery smoothly convex; suture sharply
defined; first nepionic whorl and a quarter
smooth, mammillate; succeeding whorl rather
abruptly showing about 6 fairly sharp spiral
grooves and about 10 strong protractive axial
ribs which do not cross the fasciole; although
remaining strong for yet another whorl or so,
all this sculpture gradually tends thereafter to
obsolescence except at the periphery where the
ribs persist as low rounded knobs, the number of
which to a whorl remains about the same until
the body whorl is reached, when the entire later
portion becomes practically smooth; spiral
grooving particularly strong on the base of
adolescent shells, but even in this region repre-
sented only by traces on such a fully mature
shell as the holotype. Aperture elongate-pyri-
form, about 38 percent of the height of the shell,
widest posteriorly, its posterior angle acute;
outer lip moderately thick, sharp-edged, un-
armored, produced anteriorly into the short,
open, very slightly recurved canal; inner lip and
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 46, No. 5
columella smooth, weakly sigmoid, covered by a
rather thick callus the outer boundary of which
is a rather sharp groove in the adolescent shell
and a low ridge in the adult. Anal notch distinct,
shallow, subjoiing the suture; fasciole rather
wide, marked principally by the inbowed lines
of growth. Color generally a light golden brown,
everywhere speckled with small, rounded, dis-
crete, dark brown spots, in some areas showing a
tendency to a certain regularity of arrangement;
the holotype also shows a large, conspicuous,
blackish brown spot over and immediately in
front of the inner lip and there is considerable
dark staining or a suggestion of banding in the
outer wall of the chamber.
Fic. 9.—Admete seftoni, n. sp., camera-lucida
sketch of apex of paratype; greatly enlarged.
Measurements: Holotype—altitude 29.5; maxi-
mum diameter 9.2; altitude of aperture 11.2;
diameter of aperture 4.4 mm. Paratype—altitude
17.3; maximum diameter 6.5; altitude of aperture
7.3, diameter of aperture 2.8 mm.
Holotype: Berry Collection no. 23785. Para-
type: Berry Collection no. 23584.
Type locality: 26-27 fathoms, Anacapa Passage,
Calif.; 2 specimens, Orca, July 2, 1951.
Commentary: Even amid the graceful family
of the turrids this is a trimly elegant species,
characterized by the down-sagging (or anteriorly
thrust) noded convexity of the whorls comprising
the spire, by the eventual obsolescence of the
originally sharp axial and spiral sculpture, and
by the neatly speckled color pattern. These
features separate it from all other members of
the genus Pseudomelatoma, with which its present
affiliation can be only tentative in the absence of
any knowledge of the animal and particularly of
its radula. The shells of both holotype and para-
type were almost completely covered by a heavy
whitish bloom, apparently limy and perhaps algal,
May 1956 BERRY:
which proved exceedingly difficult of even in-
complete removal.
The specific name is the Latin stictus, dotted,
and has reference to the speckled color pattern
of the shell.
REFERENCES
Batty, J. L., Jr. Cardita (Cyclocardia) longini,
new name for Venericardia (Cyclocardia)
nodulosa Dall, 1919. Nautilus 58 (4): 118-120.
Apr. (June 20) 1945.
Ciencu, W. J., and Farrants, I. P. The genus
Murex in the western Atlantic. Johnsonia 1
(17): 1-58, ‘“‘pls.”’ 1-29. May 29, 1945.
Dati, W. H. Reports on the results of dredging,
... by the U. S. Coast Survey Steamer Blake,
etc. XX IX —Report on the Mollusca. Part. IT.
—Gastropoda and Scaphopoda. Bull. Mus.
Comp. Zool. 18: 1-492, pls. 10-40. June 1889.
. A new Scala from California. Nautilus
20(4): 44. Aug. 1906.
Summary of the marine shellbearing mol-
lusks of the northwest coast of America....
U.S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 112: (iv), 1-217, pls.
1-22. 1921.
MOLLUSCA DREDGED BY THE ORCA
157
DersHayeEs, G. P. Rev. Zool. Soc. Cuvierienne
1839: 360. 1839.
Mag. Zool. ser. 2, 3: pl. 38. 1841.
In Lamarck, J.B.P.A.—Histoire natu-
relle des animaux sans vertébres, etc., 2d ed.,
9: 1-728. Paris, 1848.
Hanna, G. D., and Smitru, A. G. Notes on Acmaea
funiculata (Carpenter). Nautilus 45 (1): 21-25,
pl. 2. July 1981.
[HumpHrey, G.] Anon. A catalogue of the Port-
land Museum, lately the property of the Duchess
Dowager of Portland, deceased: etc.: p. i-viii,
3-194. London, 1786.
Porrter, J. Revision des Murex du Muséum.
Nouv. Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris], ser. 2,
5: 13-128, pls. 4-6. 1883.
Reeve, L. Monograph of the genus Murex. Con-
chologia Iconica 3 (Murex): pls. 1-386. Apr.
1845-Apr. 1846.
SmitH, A. G. Shells from the bird guano of south-
east Farallon Island, California, with descrip-
tion of a new species of Liotia. Proc. California
Acad. Sci., ser. 4, 27 (13) : 383-887, 396, pl. 20,
figs. 2-4. July 11, 1952.
Sowersy, G. B., Jr. Murex. Jn Thesaurus Con-
chyliorum, pls. 380-403 [1-24]. 1880.
SE
LOW-TEMPERATURE ALIGNMENT OF RADIOACTIVE NUCLEI PROVIDES
DATA ON NUCLEAR DISINTEGRATION
Low-temperature research at the National Bu-
reau of Standards has succeeded in aligning the
nuclei of three radioactive elements—cerium-139,
cerium-141, and neodymium-147. These results
were achieved by cooling samples of the three
materials to within a few thousandths of a degree
of absolute zero. At such temperatures the effects
of thermal agitation become so small that atomic
nuclei can line up in a given direction within the
crystal lattice. A corresponding directional effect
can then be observed in the emitted radiation.
The nuclear alignment experiments! were car-
ried out by Drs. E. Ambler and R. P. Hudson, of
the Bureau staff, in cooperation with Dr. G. M.
Temmer, of the Carnegie Institution of Washing-
ton. Initial phases of the work were sponsored by
the Office of Naval Research.
Low-temperature alignment of nuclei promises
to provide a new tool for studying the processes
of nuclear disintegration. The nucleus may be
regarded as a magnetic top spinning about an
1 For further details, see Alignment of ceriwm-
141 and neodymium-147 nuclei, by i. AMBLER, R.
P. Hupson, and G. M. Tremmmr, Phys. Rev. 97:
1212. 1955; and Alignment of three odd-A rare earth
nuclei, by the same authors, ibid. 101: 1096. 1956.
axis. If this spinning magnet is radioactive, the
orientation of the spin axis will determine the
directions in which the nucleus emits radiation.
Normally, when nuclei are randomly oriented,
a radioactive specimen emits gamma rays with
equal intensity in all directions. However, when
the nuclei are aligned, the intensity of gamma
radiation varies with angle of emission. By meas-
uring the degree of this directional effect, valu-
able information can be obtained concerning the
decay scheme of the nuclei, and an insight can
be gained into the mechanisms controlling such
processes. For example, the magnetic moment of
the nucleus can be determined as well as the
changes in angular momentum accompanying the
emission.
In the Bureau’s experiments, radioactive nuclei
were incorporated into certain organic crystals
formed by the elements studied, which were then
cooled to temperatures as low as 0.003°K. Nuclear
alignment was observed by measuring the angu-
lar distribution of the intensity of the gamma
radiation emitted by the crystals.
Inasmuch as the crystals used were paramag-
netic, the necessary low temperatures could be
conveniently produced by the method of adia-
158
batic demagnetization. In this method a para-
magnetic crystal is first magnetized by a power-
ful magnet. The resultant heat of magnetization
produced in the crystal is removed from the sys-
tem. Then when the magnetic field is turned off,
the reverse effect occurs, and the temperature of
the crystal falls to a very low value. The specimen
soon begins to reheat, of course, but if due care
has been taken to reduce heat leaks, the rate of
heating is sufficiently slow to allow enough time
for measurements.
In the Bureau’s experiments a magnetic field
of about 23,000 oersteds was used. A radioactive
crystal containing the element under study was
mounted on a thermally insulating support within
a glass tube containing a small amount of ‘“‘ex-
change gas” (helium at low pressure). The ex-
change gas provided thermal contact between the
crystal and a surrounding bath of liquid helium
boiling at about 1°K under reduced pressure. The
liquid helium bath was protected against heat in-
fluxes by a Dewar vessel, which was in turn sur-
rounded by liquid nitrogen.
When the magnet was switched on, the heat of
magnetization was conducted from the crystal
through the exchange gas to the liquid helium.
This kept the temperature of the crystal from
rising. The crystal was then isolated thermally by
pumping the exchange gas away. Thus, when the
magnet was turned off, the temperature of the
crystal fell appreciably.
To observe nuclear alignment, the apparatus
was then quickly moved into position between
two scintillation counters, and the intensity of
gamma radiation was measured along two differ-
ent directions. As the crystal warmed up, a grad-
ual decrease in the degree of alignment was ob-
served. Finally, when the temperature reached
1°K, the nuclei were again found to be randomly
oriented. This process was repeated a number
of times in order to provide sufficient data to
reduce the effects of random variation. From the
data, basic information was obtained on the
nucleus and its radioactive decay.
During each run the temperature of the crystal
was monitored. This was done by measuring its
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 5
magnetic susceptibility, which had previously
been determined as a function of temperature
by other investigators.?
The physical processes which give rise to
nuclear alignment may be described as follows.
Interaction with the electric fields within the
crystal causes the electronic magnetic moment
of certain atoms to line up either parallel or anti-
parallel to a certain crystallographic direction.
Then at very low temperatures, where thermal
agitation is much less, the coupling between the
atomic magnetic moment and the nuclear mag-
netic moment is strong enough to allow the
nuclei also to be pulled into alignment. This
coupling cannot begin to overcome the forces
due to thermal motion, however, until the tem-
perature falls well below 1°K.
The anisotropic angular distribution of gamma
rays from the aligned nuclei can be explained
by considering angular momenta. Since the
angular momenta of the parent and daughter
nuclei as well as that carried away by the gamma
ray are fixed by nature, it follows from the
principle of conservation of angular momentum
and from radiation theory that definite restric-
tions are placed upon the pattern of gamma-ray
emission. The phenomenon is analogous to the
radiation from a radio antenna, where aniso-
tropic emission patterns are also observed. This
close relationship between gamma radiation and
angular momentum makes it possible to utilize
gamma-ray intensity data as a basis for deduc-
tions concerning the angular momentum of the
parent nucleus and the changes occurring during
radioactive decay.
Work in this general field is continuing at the
Bureau. Attention is now being directed to low-
temperature methods of polarizing, rather than
aligning, nuclei. Stable nuclei can be employed
in experiments of this kind, and a larger number
of different nuclei can be studied. The Bureau
hopes to obtain additional data of value both to
cryogenics and nuclear physics.
2 Dantes, J. M., and Ropinson, F. N. H.
Phil. Mag. 44: 630, 1953.
The man who makes no mistakes does not usually make anything.
—Epwarp J. PHELPS
May 1956
DEXTER: NEW FAIRY SHRIMP
159
ZOOLOGY.—A new fairy shrimp from western United States, with notes on other
North American species. RALPH W
. Dexter, Kent State University, Kent,
Ohio. (Communicated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.).
Recent studies on the fairy shrimps
(Crustacea; Anostraca) of North America
have brought to light some new and in-
teresting records worthy of publication.
One new species collected from Nevada,
Washington, and California is described.
The known geographic range of nine species
is extended considerably by the acquisition
of some new locality records. Additional
records of two species of fairy shrimps living
in the same pond are given and the seasonal
occurrences of Hubranchipus serratus and
E. vernalis in certain ponds studied in east
central Illinois during the spring seasons of
1951-1955 inclusive are outlined in detail.
This report continues the studies published
in an earlier paper (Dexter, 1953).
Specimens of Anostraca collected by Rob-
ert S. Bray which are mentioned in this
paper were sent to the writer by Dr. Folke
Linder of Sweden. Specimens sent from the
U. 8. National Museum were obtained
through the courtesy of Dr. Fenner A.
Chace, Jr., curator of the Division of Mar-
ine Invertebrates. To these men and to the
others named below who contributed speci-
mens for this work my heartiest thanks are
given.
Family BRANCHINECTIDAE
Branchinecta mackini, n. sp.
Maun (Figs. 1-4): Total body length, includ-
ing cercopods, 16-25 mm. First antennae 4.5 mm.
Second antennae 8.0 mm, consisting of two
articles of equal length. Proximal article con-
tains at its base a spur 0.4 mm long with minute
spinules on it. Near the lower end of the same
article are 3 or 4 inconspicuous spines well spaced
along the lower medial surface. The distal article
is gently curved, somewhat flattened, and the
end is not recurved. There is no antennal append-
age and no frontal appendage. Eye stalk 0.8 mm
in total length. Penes 1.0 mm in length with a
process 0.2 mm long and two swollen, spinous
areas near the tip. There are seven postgenital
segments. Cercopods are 2.0 mm in total length,
gradually taper to a sharp point, and are fringed
with setae 0.2-0.4 mm long. Swimming append-
ages are 2.5-4.0 mm long, with one proepipodite
and one epipodite.
FrmMate (Figs. 5, 6): Total length, including
cercopods, 16-25 mm. First antennae 3.2 mm.
Second antennae 1.3 mm in length, swollen with
a short, sharp point at the end. Eye stalk 0.8 mm
in total length. Ovisac 6.5 mm in total length;
1.8 mm in greatest diameter. There are seven
postgenital segments. Cercopods and thoracic
swimming appendages are like the male.
This species resembles most closely Branchi-
necta shantzt Mackin, 1952. However, B. mackini
has a pointed spur at the base of the second
antennae of the male instead of a rounded knob,
the spines along the medial margin are not con-
centrated and are not on a swollen prominence,
and the tips of the male antennae are not re-
curved as they are in B. shantzv.
Specimens were collected by Dr. Iva La Rivers
from a playa pond 15 miles north of Reno in
Washoe County, Nev., on February 16 and
June 9, 1940 (eight males and two females, seven
males and one female, respectively), and again
from a playa pond south-southeast of East
MeNett Place, Fish Lake Valley in Esmeralda
County, Nev., on March 26, 1951. Seven males
and 14 females were collected at that time from
which the holotype and allotype have been
selected. Dr. R. H. Whittaker and his student
C. W. Fairbanks collected many specimens
from a large shallow pond some 40-50 hectares
in area at Alkali Lake, Grand Coulee, Wash.,
on May 15, 1949. Dr. Arthur 8. Lockley collected
some from Bicycle Dry Lake near Barstow,
Calif., in November 1955.
This new species has been named for Dr. J. G.
Mackin, who first called its attention to the
writer and who has made the most thorough
study and revision of the genus Branchinecta
in North America. The male holotype and the
female allotype have been deposited in the U.S.
National Museum (nos. 99216 and 99217). Para-
types have been divided among that institution
(no. 99218), Dr. J. G. Mackin, Dr. Tra La Rivers,
Dr. N. T. Mattox, Dr. R. H. Whittaker, and
the writer.
160
NEW RECORDS OF GEOGRAPHICAL
DISTRIBUTION OF ANOSTRACA
Since the publication of my previous paper
outlining the known geographical distribution
of certain species of fairy shrimps in North
America, some new field records have come to
hand which extend the known range of nine
species and give additional locality data on some
uncommon species.
The distribution of Polyartemiella hazeni
(Murdock) has usually been given in the litera-
ture in very general terms as ‘“‘the coastal plains
of Alaska and Yukon Territory.”’ Few specific
records on those plains have ever been published.
For that reason two which have come to hand
recently are given here. Dr. N. T. Mattox sent
some specimens of this species that had been
collected by Roy Robinson near the Meade
River at Point Barrow, Alaska, on August 15,
1952. Lawrence C. Bliss collected for the writer
about 50 specimens of this species from depressed
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 5
polygons on the coastal plain of Alaska at lat.
70° 25’N., long. 150° 40”W., on August 6, 1953.
This locality is about 18 miles south of the Arctic
Ocean and about one-quarter of a mile east of the
Colville River. The polygons, formed by ice action,
were about 2-4 feet deep, for the most part, and
had an average diameter of 10-20 feet. Specimens
were collected from six of them, and many of
the animals observed were in copulation at the
time. The polygons do not dry out as do tem-
porary ponds in the temperate belt, but they do
freeze to the bottom. Thus, the eggs of fairy
shrimps are just as effectively removed from
free water, a condition which usually seems to
be necessary before they will hatch in any
quaptity. The name ot this species was misspelled
as P. hanseni by Daday, in 1910, and copied by
most North American writers ever since. The
correct spelling is P. hazent.
Recently, specimens of another arctic species
seldom collected have come to hand. Ten speci-
mens of Artemiopsis stefanssont Johansen were
Fies. 1-§6.—Branchinecta mackini, n.sp.: 1, Head of male; 2, swimming appendage of male; 3, cerco-
pods of male; 4, penis; 5, head of female; 6, egg sac.
May 1956
collected from a lake 3 miles north of Mound
Bay Weather Station, Prince Patrick Island, in
Northwest Territory, Canada.
Thamnocephalus platyurus Packard is now
known from Utah, Nebraska, and Missouri.
Specimens of the former two were sent from the
U. 8. National Museum. Two males and four
females were collected from an impoundment of
fresh-water at Monument Valley, Utah, by
Marvin Walter on August 10, 1952. A single
female specimen was collected by Dr. H. W.
Manter from the western part of Nebraska. Date
and locality were not recorded. Also, from the
National Museum were sent specimens which
are the second State record from Nevada, the
first having been published in my previous
paper. Two females were collected from near
Dry Lake, 6 miles west of Boulder City, on
October 29, 1952, by Mrs. V. B. Vehling. One
specimen measured 28 mm in total length. Dr.
Tra La Rivers sent another lot of two females
collected from the same region. One of his stu-
dents, E. A. Carl, found them at “Dry Lake,
4 miles south of the railroad pass between Las
Vegas and Boulder City, Clark County, on
September 17, 1953.” The first records from
Missouri were sent by Dr. Peter W. Frank, of
the University of Missouri. He and one of his
students, Robert W. Kelly, collected 7. platyurus
in July 1954 and from June to September 1955.
They were collected from more than 15 temporary
pools on the north bank of the Missouri River
flood plain between Jefferson City and Boone-
ville, and they were much more abundant during
the latter year.
Hubranchipus vernalis (Verrill) has been found
in Delaware, Maryland, and Virginia for the
first time. R. 8. Bray collected this species in
Newcastle County, Del., on December 29, 1940.
He also found it in a barnyard at Yellow Springs,
Md., on December 14, 1940, and in Loudoun
County, Va., on March 2, 1942. The occurrence
of this species from Kentucky, inadvertently
omitted from my earlier report, seems to rest
solely upon an early record (1874) from near
Covington. Additional records have recently
come to the attention of the writer. Dr. Gerald
A. Cole, of the University of Kentucky, collected
HE. vernalis between 1950 and 1954 from seven
temporary pools and one permanent pond, which
has dry margins annually, in various parts of
Jefferson County. For the most part these pools
were formed by flood waters of the Ohio River.
DEXTER: NEW FAIRY SHRIMP
161
In 1955 the water level was so high that these
pools were washed over by the flood waters of
the river, which carried away any pond fauna
that had developed by early spring.
Eubranchipus neglectus Garman was described
from Kentucky. The U. 8. National Museum
has eight specimens of H. neglectus collected
from a clay pit near New Philadelphia, Ohio,
by Dr. Victor Sterki. No date was recorded.
Identification was made by Dr. E. P. Creaser
and Dr. Folke Linder. This record extends the
known range to eastern Ohio.
Eubranchipus serratus Forbes is now reported
from Virginia and Maryland for the first time,
and the second record from Indiana and Montana
are listed. R. 8. Bray collected this species on
December 15, 1940, at Daday’s Pond in Loudoun
County, Va. A second lot was collected on
April 5, 1941, from a cornfield pond near Seneca,
Md. Dr. R. B. Brunson obtained the second
record of this species from Montana with speci-
mens he collected from Union Creek on April 17,
1951, and from a pond near Kicking Horse
Reservoir on April 23, 1951. Identifications were
made by Dr. N. T. Mattox, who sent the records
to the writer. The first record from Indiana was
recently published (Dexter, 1953). The second
one from this State was made by Dr. Clarence
Goodnight, who found this species in a gravel pit
near West Lafayette in April 1953. Although
most of the specimens received from him were
mature, they were smaller than usual in size,
averaging only 12 mm in total length. Dr. Mattox
noted that the specimens from Montana were
also smaller than average. It has been the ex-
perience of the writer to find that fairy shrimps
vary greatly in size, not only in different geo-
graphic localities and during different years, but
also in the same general locality at the same time.
Eubranchipus holmant (Ryder) has been col-
lected in Maryland for the first time by R. 8.
Bray. Two males and two females were found at
Martinsburg on April 16, 1940. A single male
was taken from a barnyard pond at Yellow
Springs on December 14, the same year, and two
males and four females were collected in the
Sunday Swamps at Bear Island on March 22,
28, and May 14, 1941. In my previous paper I
overlooked an old published record of this species
from Pennsylvania and from Minnesota. These
States should now be added to the list.
Artemia salina (Linnaeus) is usually found in
saline lakes and evaporating basins. Only rarely
162
is it found in temporary pools. However, Ernest
J. Roscoe collected specimens from a temporary
pool northwest of Granite Mountain in Tooele
County, Utah, on October 6, 1953. Recently this
species was reported from Saskatchewan for the
first time (Moore, J. E. 1952). It was found in
abundance in Little Manitou, a saline lake.
Branchinecta shantzi Mackin is now reported
for the first time from Nevada. Dr. Iva La Rivers
collected 10 females and 8 males from railroad
playa northwest of White Mountain in Washoe
County on May 16, 1940.
Branchinecta colcradensis Packard, formerly
known quite generally as B. lindahli until the
genus was revised by Mackin (1952), is now
known from Washington, California, and Utah.
Dr. R. M. Bond obtained a large number of
specimens, not quite mature, from a pool on the
east side of the Columbia River, 249 miles
northeast of Vantage Bridge in Washington, on
March 26, 1937. Dr. Ira La Rivers collected
B. coloradnsis on July 23, 1953, at upper Convict
Creek basin in Mono Co., Calif., some 35 miles
north of Bishop. Abundant specimens were found
in several temporary meadow pools, formed from
melting snow. The water temperature at the
time of collecting, however, was 24°C. These
pools are on the eastern slope drainage near the
crest of the southern Sierras at an elevation of
10,300 feet. By August 13 all but the largest one
had dried out. Records of this species collected
by Dr. La Rivers and T. J. Trelease from Marble
Butte in Nevada published in my previous paper
did not include the dates. The dates of collecting
were March 31 and April 23, 1949. The first
Utah collection of B. colcradensis was made by
Nyvin Marchette on April 19, 1954, from a
temporary pond in Government Creek Valley,
Tooele County. These were sent to me through
the courtesy of Ernest J. Roscoe. Dr. Elizabeth
McClintock obtained the second record of this
species from Arizona by collecting specimens
from temporary pools in red sandstone rocks in
Toroweap Valley of Mohave County about
1 mile from the rim of the Grand Canyon, on
May 6, 1952.
Two errors that have appeared in recent litera-
ture concerning Branchinecta lindahli should be
corrected. First, W. G. Moore (1950) published
a record of B. coloradensis from Texas that
should have been designated as B. lindahli
through an error on the part of the writer.
Specimens sent by Dr. Moore were identified
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, NO. 5
before the revision of the genus by Mackin
(1952), and a misinterpretation led to an incor-
rect diagnosis. Secondly, in Mackin’s revision
(ibid.) of Branchinecta, the species B. lindahli
Daday, 1910, is cited as a synonym of B. lindahli
Packard 1883, whereas it should be listed in the
“non” group. It is unfortunate that so much
confusion has developed in the published litera-
ture on this genus in North America to con-
tinually plague students of the group since the
genus was first found here.
Streptccephalus texanus Packard is now re-
ported from Montana and Missouri. It was col-
lected for the first time in Montana by H. E.
Nelson, who found specimens at Glasgow in
May 1952. This represents the most northerly
locality from which the species has been recorded
to date. This record, and the one of S. seali from
Montana mentioned below, were brought to my
attention by Dr. Mattox, who had _ received
specimens for study from Dr. R. B. Brunson.
Dr. Peter Frank and his student Robert Kelly
have collected iS. teranus from temporary pools
along the north bank of the Missouri River near
Booneville, Mo., in recent years. Specimens
without field data were examined by the writer.
Streptocephalus seali Ryder is now recorded
from North Carolina, Maryland, Missouri,
Montana, and California for the first time. The
U. S. National Museum contains specimens of
S. seali collected by 8. F. Hildebrand on June 3,
1926, from Thomas Pond No. 3 at Beaufort,
N. C. R. 8. Bray collected specimens from Bear
Island, Md., on November 16, 21, and 28, and
December 5, 1937, and again on August 6 and
September 2, 1938. Dr. James Kezer, formerly
at the University of Missouri, sent numerous
mature specimens, 28-30 mm in length, which
he collected in the fall of 1952 from a mud hole
not far from the Missouri River near Booneville,
Mo. They were still living in the pool on Novem-
ber 10. The water was clouded with mud and as
a consequence the fairy shrimps were colorless.
This relationship has been observed by the
writer for several species of Anostraca. Late in
October 1953 and in the latter part of March
1954, Dr. Kezer again found S. seali in the same
mud hole. Dr. Peter Frank and Robert Kelly
subsequently found the same species in many
ponds of various types in the area. Dr. N. T.
Mattox sent a record of S. seali collected from
Glasgow, Mont., in May 1952 by H. E. Nelson.
In the collections of the U. 8. National Museum
May 1956 DEXTER:
there are specimens of this species collected in
September 1930 from a pond in the Sierra Ne-
vada at an elevation of about 9,000 feet. The
locality was in Tuolumne County, Calif., and
the collector was R. Innis Bromley. Dr. Mattox
has sent a record of S. sealt collected by Dr.
R. E. Smith from Eldorado County, Calif., on
July 11, 1936. Dr. Douglas M. Whitaker has
collected this species from the same county. On
September 4, 1952, he found many specimens
in a temporary pool filled from melted snow at
an elevation of 6,600 feet in the Sierra Nevada of
Eldorado County. The pond is located approxi-
mately half a mile east of Fallen Leaf Lake and
about 4 miles south of the southeastern end of
Lake Tahoe. Usually this pond dries out late in
summer or early in fall, but heavy snows of the
preceding winter caused it to persist through the
season of 1952. Four male specimens ranged in
size from 30 to 36 mm, with an average of 34 mm.
In my previous paper I overlooked an early
published record of this species from the State of
New York, which should now be added to the
list of known State records.
ADDITIONAL RECORDS OF COLLECTING TWO
SPECIES OF ANOSTRACA TOGETHER
More records of finding two species of fairy
shrimps in the same pond have come to hand.
The 12 specimens of Hubranchipus vernalis and
the single one of H. holmani collected at Yellow
Springs, Md., as mentioned earlier in this paper,
were found together. The specimens of Strepteo-
cephalus seali and S. texranus mentioned earlier
from Glasgow, Mont., were together in the same
vial and had a common label so that presumably
they were found together. Likewise, specimens of
these same two species reported above from
Booneville, Mo., have been collected together.
The writer collected Hubranchipus vernalis and
Chirocephalopsis bundyi together in another
locality of northeastern Ohio. They were found
in a button-bush swamp pond near Mogadore in
Portage County on April 27, 1952. The following
year this pond did not fill with water, but in
1954 enough water accumulated to hatch out a
few of each species. In the spring of 1955 there
was an abundance of both species living together.
The ratio, as determined by a count of 251
males, was 1 H#. vernalis:1.5 C. bundyt. In a
collection of fairy shrimps made by Walter
Hintz near Pokagon State Park some 5 miles
from Angola, Ind., there were 23 males of EH. ver-
NEW
FAIRY SHRIMP 165
nalis and 8 males of C. bundyi. They were found
together on April 16, 1954, in a pasture pond.
On March 17, 1952, a single specimen of HL’. serra-
tus, 26 mm_ in length, was collected by the writer
with 11 specimens of H#. vernalis in a pool on the
flood plain of the Salt Fork River near Homer,
Ill. EH. vernalis is the only species previously
collected in this pond and in two others nearby,
but all other ponds sampled in this section of
Illinois have contained EF. serratus as the common
species (Dexter, 1953). Lawrence C. Bliss col-
lected Branchinecta shantzi and Chirocephalopsis
bundyt together from a small morainal pond at
an elevation of 9,900 feet in the Medicine Bow
Mountains of Wyoming on June 23, 1955. These
species were found separately in three other
ponds in this area (two with the former and one
with the latter). Dr. Peter Frank and his asso-
ciates have collected S. seali and Thamnocephalus
platyurus together in pools near Booneville, Mo.
Dr. A. 8. Lockley at the Los Angeles State Col-
lege collected 7. platyurus along with specimens
that proved to be the new species Branchinecta
mackina described in this paper. They were taken
from Bicycle Dry Lake, near Barstow, Calif.,
in November 1955.
FAIRY-SHRIMP POPULATIONS STUDIED
IN ILLINOIS, 1951-1955
After my previous report on observations of
fairy-shrimp populations in east-central Illinois
was published, this field study was limited to six
of the ponds which had been studied earlier.
One new station was added in 1953. Table 1
gives a résumé of observations made in the third
week of March for the years 1951-55, inclusive.
No visits were made in 1954, but residents in the
area reported a very dry spring during which
time the temporary pools contained no water.
It can be assumed that fairy shrimps did not
hatch in these stations during 1954 for lack of
water. The following year conditions for fairy
shrimps were only slightly better.
In addition to the five temporary pools and
one permanent pond (no. 8, near Urbana)
sampled in 1951, Miss Sarah A. Joyner found
three ponds 6 miles northeast of Urbana which
were inhabited that spring by fairy shrimps. One
was a permanent woodland pond in Trelease
Woods, another
pond, and the third a temporary pool, the latter
two situated in nearby Trelease Grassland. The
two permanent ponds have a dry margin during
was a permanent grassland
164
the summer season, which is always found in
such bodies of water which contain fairy shrimps.
Samples of fairy shrimps were collected by Miss
Joyner in all three during the spring of 1951. She
collected mature specimens of Hubranchipus
serratus, identified by the writer, on March 8,
1951, from the permanent grassland pond.
In 1951 the collections were made on March 21
from five selected stations chosen from those
formerly studied. Specimens were obtained from
under a cover of ice. Two days later another
collection was made after the ponds had thawed.
The populations sampled that year were small.
However, during the next two years they in-
creased in number each year for the most part.
Those records showing a wide range of sizes un-
doubtedly represent more than one hatching
brood as the result of rising water levels with
each new rain. The collections of 1952 were
taken from under a skim of ice which coated most
of the ponds. That year, one pool on the flood
plain of the Salt Fork River near Homer yielded
one specimen of H. serratus as well as its usual
population of H. vernalis.
In spite of the fact that pond no. 8 near Urbana
was bulldozed to a depth of 11 feet during the
summer of 1951, fairy shrimps hatched in
abundance the followimg spring. Apparently
many eggs were left still exposed at the surface
although great quantities of eggs must have been
buried deeply by the earth-moving operations.
By the next year, however, game fish had been
introduced into this pond, and fairy shrimps were
not found there again.
The season of 1953 was a favorable one for
fairy shrimps. A new pond adjacent to the one at
Oakwood was sampled for the first time. In the
spring of 1954 water was not known to collect
in any of the temporary pools under observation
because of a severe drought in the area. (The
same situation was reported by Dr. James Kezer
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES VoL. 46, No. 5
for the region of Columbia, Mo. Ralph W. Stark
found a similar situation in Boone County, Ind.,
until March 19, when rain broke the drought.
On March 28 a heavy rainstorm there filled the
pools bringing out a hatch of EH. vernaiis. In
Portage County, Ohio, the writer was not able
to collect fairy shrimps in some of the stations
under observation until the middle of April,
when rain filled many of the depressions for the
first time that year. Studies on fairy shrimps in
Ohio will be reported in a separate paper.)
In 1955 dry conditions still prevailed in Illinois.
One pool (no. 2 near Oakwood) had 4 inches of
water when examined, but no metanauplii were
found in the plankton sample taken. Pond 7
near Urbana, however, had sufficient water to
bring out a good-sized population of H. serratus.
In 1951 the sex ratio of H. serratus determined
by a sample of 204 individuals was 1 male:1.2
females. The following year a reverse ratio of
1 male:0.6 female was found in a sample of 162
individuals. Dexter and Kuehnle (1951) found
males of H. vernalis to predominate (1:0.8) in
two of the counties in Ohio sampled, while
females predominated in two other counties
(1:1.5). Coopey (1950) found the sex ratio of
E. oregonus to change markedly during the
season as the males died off at a much greater
rate. W. G. Moore (1955), on the other hand,
found a balanced ratio of approximately 1:1
throughout the season in populations of Strep-
tacephalus seali he studied in Louisiana.
SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
1. Branchinecta mackini, n.sp., is described
from specimens collected in Nevada, Washington,
and California.
2. The known geographic range of the follow-
ing species is extended by recent collections:
Thamnocephalus platyurus, Hubranchipus verna-
lis, FE. neglectus, E. serratus, E. holmani, Branchi-
TaBLE 1.—Co.uEectTInGa Recorps or ANOSTRACA IN EAST-CENTRAL ILLINOIS
Location of ponds Pond No. | 1951 1952 1953 1955
Near Oakwood-Field ditch....................... 1 8, 9-30.5 C, 13-23 A, 2-20 Dry
Near Oakwood-Field ditch...................... 2 — — N, 13-22 0, nearly dry
Near Homer-Flood plain pool.................... 2 S*, 9-24.5 R, 26; S#, 22-27 Nx, 4.5-9.5 Dry
Near Homer-Flood plain pool.................... 3 0 0 0 Dry
Near Urbana-Pasture pool. ......... 7 S, 5-16.5 C, 9-29.5 N, 9-21 N, 8.5-12
Near Urbana-Pasture pool........................ 8 N, 16-30 A, 17-27 0 (fish intro.) =
Near, Urbana-Pasture)pool-n)....--.06 eens 9 S, 4.5-23 Destroyed — =
Relative abundance is indicated as follows: A—abundant; C—common; N—numerous; S—searce; R—rare; *—Eubranchipus
vernalis. All other records are for HZ. serratus. Beside the symbol for abundance is given the range in size expressed in millimeters
on date of collection.
May 1956
necta shantzi, B. coloradensis, Streptocephalus
texanus, S. sealt.
3. New localities with notes on habitats are
given for Polyartemiella hazeni, Artemiopsis
stefanssoni, Artemia salina.
4+. New records are cited for finding the follow-
Ing species living together in the same pond:
Hubranchipus vernalis with E. holmani; Strepto-
cephalus seali with S. texanus; EH. vernalis with
Chirccephalopsis bundyi; E. vernalis with E. serra-
tus; Branchinecta shantzi with C. bundyi; S. seali
with Thamnocephalus platyurus; T. platyurus
with B. mackint.
5. Fairy-shrimp populations studied in seven
pools in east-central Illinois during March 1951-
55 are reviewed. Two species were collected:
E. serratus which was common in most cases and
E. vernalis which was uncommon and found in a
single pool. Insufficient rainfall in the spring of
1954 prevented a hatch that season, and in the
following spring only one pool had enough water
to support a population. The years 1952 and 1953
were favorable ones for the fairy shrimps. Sex
NOTES AND NEWS
165
ratio of H. serratus was 1 male:1.2 females in
1951 and 1 male:0.6 female in 1952.
LITERATURE CITED
Coorry, R.W. The life history of the fairy shrimp
Eubranchipus oregonus. Trans. Amer. Micr.
Soc. 69: 125-132. 1950.
Dexter, R. W. Studies on North American fairy
shrimps with the description of two new species.
Amer. Midl. Nat. 49(3): 751-771. 1953.
——— and Kueunuz, C. H. Further studies on
the fairy shrimp populations of northeastern
Ohio. Ohio Journ. Sei. 51(2) : 73-86. 1951.
Mackin, J. G. On the correct specific names of
several North American species of the phyllopod
genus Branchinecta Verrill. Amer. Midl. Nat.
47: 61-65. 1952.
Moors, J. E. The Entomostraca of southern Sas-
katchewan. Can. Journ. Zool. 30: 410-450. 1952.
Moors, W. G. A new locality record for Branch-
inecta coloradensis, with habitat notes on two
species of farcry shrimp in central Texas. Ecology
31 (4) : 655-657. 1950.
The life history of the spiny-tailed fairy
shrimp in Louisiana. Ecology 36(2): 176-184.
1955.
———————S
NOTES AND NEWS
A SONIC TECHNIQUE FOR TESTING
LEATHER
A nondestructive method for testing leather,
based on the transmission of sound waves, has
recently been developed by the National Bureau
of Standards. The chief instrument employed is
a pulse propagation meter which measures and
records the speed of a generated sound pulse
through the leather. As a result, the specimen
under test is left unharmed, in contrast to the
tearing or other destructive effects of existing
test procedures.
The experiments! carried out at the Bureau
have shown that the velocity of sound transmis-
sion in leather varies substantially with changes
in chemical and physical structure and, particu-
larly, mm fiber orientation. Velocity measurements,
accordingly, are indicative of modifications of the
fibrous order produced by strain, aging, and im-
pregnating material. The study that supports
these conclusions was sponsored by the Office of
the Quartermaster General, Department of the
‘For further technical details see Studies on
leather by means of a sonic technique, by J. R.
Kanaay and M. Rosinson, Journ. Amer. Leather
Chem. Assoc. (in press).
Army, and was conducted by Joseph R. Kanagy
and Myron Robinson, of the NBS staff.
In recent years the use of sonic techniques to
determine certain mechanical properties of high
polymers has become widespread. Such methods
have employed frequencies ranging from less than
1 cps up to several megacycles. The use of a single
frequency throughout a series of tests readily per-
mits mathematical analysis of the data and de-
termination of the physical constants character-
istic of the viscoelastic behavior of the material.
Besides furnishing a means for securing funda-
mental information, sonic methods have been
successfully utilized in nondestructive testing.
These applications relate mainly to the location
of flaws in a variety of manufactured products.
The investigations of the NBS leather labo-
ratory are part of a larger program of fundamen-
tal and applied research on natural and synthetic
polymers—rubber, plastics, textiles, leathers, and
papers. This program seeks not only to improve
present basic knowledge of high polymers but
also to make possible their more effective utiliza-
tion in commercial products. The present study
of the potentialities of sound-transmission meas-
urements is expected to provide the basis for im-
166
proved methods of testing finished products like
military footwear as well as the unworked hide.
The Bureau’s sonic experiments were based on
the relationship between sound velocity and the
elasticity of the medium as given by Young’s
modulus. If a sound wave is propagated along a
medium whose transverse dimensions are small
compared to the wavelengths utilized, then the
following well-known relation holds:
EH = vp (1)
where v is the velocity of sound, p is the density
of the medium, and # is Young’s modulus, the
latter being defined as the force per unit cross-
section area required to produce unit elastic
strain. However, if the material produces appre-
ciable acoustic attenuation, as shown by a nota-
ble decrease in the amplitude of the sound wave
as it travels through the medium, the single rela-
tion given above no longer suffices for an accu-
rate determination of the modulus. An additional
factor based on a viscosity coefficient must then
be applied to the right-hand side of the equation.
In the current investigation, estimates of sound
attenuation in leather were obtained by observing
on an oscilloscope the decreasing amplitude of a
particular section of a 3,000-cps wave train as the
transmitter and receiver crystals of the propaga-
tion meter were separated. On the basis of these
rough measurements, the attenuation for shoe-
upper leather was estimated at 0.1 to 0.2 nepers
per cm. For purposes of comparison, the attenua-
tion constants were also obtained, under the same
conditions of frequency and temperature, for
other polymeric materials, with these results:
polyethylener cease eee 0.012 nepers per cm
nylon (undrawn filament)... 0.003
neoprene GN at 6 percent
ENCED U dae incerta mms iy he ear a ote
It may be seen that the acoustic attenuation in
leather lies midway between that of materials
with highly crystalline fibers and that of rubber-
like materials.
In developing leather test methods, attenua-
tion and frequency are of secondary importance
since only relative velocity measurements are re-
quired to establish the deviation of a sample from
its control. The data of this investigation were
therefore studied in terms of the more directly
measurable quantity, velocity. Now, the defining
equation,
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF
SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 5
stress load
K= _ = :
strain elongation’
makes clear the direct relation holding between
E and the resistance to elongation. In the light of
this relation, equation (1) may be interpreted as
saying that the speed of sound through a medium
such as leather is greatest in the direction that
offers the greatest resistance to elongation—that
is, along the individual fibers.
In experiments with leather from cattlehide,
the speed of propagation of sound varied with the
lateral dimension of the specimen, increasing with
width up to a certain maximum dependent on the
wavelength of the sound. In cattlehide the fibers
are oriented at random; consequently, there is no
sound path directly along the specimen. That the
speed of sound through a material like leather is
related to fiber orientation was shown with vege-
table-tanned sharkskin. In sharkskin the fibers
occur naturally in a highly oriented basket-weave
pattern, the two fiber axes being mutually per-
pendicular in the plane of the hide. Specimens
were cut so that sound could be transmitted ei-
ther in the direction of a fiber axis or at a 45°
angle with the axes. The specimens cut at an
angle of 45° with the fiber axes should have sound
paths roughly comparable with those existing in
cattlehide, and a similar velocity-width relation
would be expected. On the other hand, specimens
with one set of fibers oriented in the direction of
sound propagation should show no velocity de-
crease when width is decreased, since there is a
sound path that goes directly through the speci-
men. For both types of specimen, experiment con-
formed to expectation. The 45° cuts showed the
same sort of velocity-width relation as did leather,
and in parallel cuts the velocity was independent
of the width within experimental error. The veloc-
ity of parallel propagation was also observed to
be greater than the maximum velocity in the
oblique direction.
Additional evidence that sound propagation
follows fiber orientation was obtained from experi-
ments with kangaroo tail tendons. These tendons
are composed of collagen fibers highly oriented
along a single direction. The speed of propagation
through the tendons was approximately 2,000
meters per second, or about three times greater
than the speed in cattlehide.
Another study showed that the speed of sound
through leather increases with period of aging at
May 1956
100°C until it reaches a maximum. Therefore, an
indication of the quality of a sample of leather
may be obtained by comparing the speed of sound
through the sample with the maximum speed in a
control specimen that has been subjected to
aging.
It is thus possible, without harming the speci-
men, to detect changes in fiber orientation caused
by strain, aging, and filling by comparing sound-
velocity measurements. Moreover, there is good
correlation between sonic measurements and the
results of tensile and breaking elongation tests.
The effects of tannage, grease, and moisture can
also be demonstrated. Finally, for an inhomoge-
neous material such as leather, the sonic tech-
nique has the distinct advantage of providing a
means of following the effects of aging, chemical
treatments, and the like on a single specimen.
ARCTIC MARINE INVERTEBRATES STUDIED
Abundant and often fantastic are the animals
of the shallow Arctic sea bottom. All are inverte-
brates—worms, sea anemones, and a host of
others—many of which spend their lives buried
in the bottom mud. They are described in a
report recently published by the Smithsonian
Institution by Prof. G. E. MacGinitie on his
collections while principal investigator at the
Navy’s Arctic Research Laboratory at Point
Barrow, Alaska.
Some of the creatures and their curious ways
of life, as related in the report, follow.
A delicately peach-colored sea anemone, a
bottom-dwelling animal remotely related to the
coral polyps, which displayed what Professor
MacGinitie calls an ‘amazing phenomenon.”
“When it was subjected to unfavorable condi-
tions, such as overcrowding in a pan or jar of
sea water,” he says, “it cast out through the
mouth a translucent white inner lining, with
translucent, stubby tentacles. This offspring
was somewhat suggestive of a pickled onion. If
conditions remained adverse more offspring were
cast off, each one becoming smaller than its
predecessor.”’ In other words, when in trouble
the animal spits out babies—presumably an
emergency measure for preservation of the
species. Apparently the same thing happens in
the sea. Partly grown specimens of these off-
spring dredged from the bottom at first were
mistaken for a new species. Some quite colorful
types of these animals were found—one purplish-
NOTES AND NEWS
167
red, one lavender, one lemon-yellow, and one
with translucent, peach-colored tentacles.
Among the more abundant animals found on
the shallow bottom were nemerteans, or ribbon-
worms, notable for their ability to stretch the
body to twice or more its normal length. Two
specimens of one species that washed ashore had,
as a means of self preservation, Professor Mac-
Ginitie says, “literally tied themselves in knots,
curled up into balls, and then secreted bags of
mucous around themselves.”’
Very abundant mud-dwelling animals off the
Arctic coast are the echiuroids, otherwise known
as “‘spoonworms,” or “‘sausage-worms.” They
burrow very deeply in the mud and are seldom
seen unless washed ashore in storms. One species
was bright green in color and about 3 inches
long; these worms, Professor MacGinitie found,
were eaten raw by Eskimos.
Among the most abundant animals in the sea
are the small, transparent Sagitta, or arrow-
worms. Thousands were obtained in tows for
plankton. One species, about half an inch long,
apparently is among the kangaroos of the in-
vertebrate world. ‘Two specimens,” the report
says, ‘were carrying young in a marsupium
(pouch) formed by folding the posterior lateral
fins together. In the laboratory some of the
young about 3 millimeters long began escaping
from this marsupium.”’
An extremely important part of the bottom
fauna at Point Barrow, Professor MacGinitie
found, were the bryozoans. They are colonial
animals, somewhat like corals but of a higher
order, which cover stones with growths that
sometimes look like patches of moss, sometimes
like weavings of delicate lace. Hardly a stone
was found which did not have at least one ‘“‘moss
patch.’ Sometimes the entire surface would be
covered. These miniature moss forests provide
refuge for numerous other minute animals. Some
of the lacelike colonies are quite beautiful. Some
form peach-colored, some deep red, and some
yellow lacework.
Marine annelid worms, or polychaetes, com-
prise an important group in the Point Darrow
fauna. Among them was one species, of the
type known as syllids—a_ flesh-colored worm
with brownish-red eyes which emitted a bluish-
white light. It lived ordinarily hidden among
the bryozoan growth on stones, but its lumi-
nescence betrayed it.
168
Numerically the most abundant animals are
amphipods, members of the sand-flea family,
which form an important food source for fishes
and seals. Great numbers live on the underside
of ice cakes from which the bearded seal can
sweep them with its whiskers. If seals can live on
them, why not men? “It would seem,” says
Professor MacGinitie, “that they should form a
source of food for military personnel forced to
abandon ship or make a forced landing. A pherusa
glacialis (the species found in such numbers on
the bottoms of ice cakes) could be gathered with
nets from the swarms that dart away when an
ice cake is disturbed.” This species is circum-
polar in distribution.
€. C. Crittenden
Dr. Eugene Casson Crittenden, 75, interna-
tionally known scientist and expert on standards
of physical measurement, died of cancer on
Wednesday, March 28, 1956, at Garfield Hos-
pital, Washington, D. C., after an illness of
several months. He had retired as associate
director of the National Bureau of Standards in
December 1950 but had continued to serve the
Bureau as a consultant to the director up to the
time of his illness.
Dr. Crittenden is perhaps best known for his
achievements in the development and adoption
of electrical and photometric standards. As vice
president of the International Commission on
Illumination, from 1939 to 1948, and president of
its U.S. National Committee from 1928 to 1935,
he played a major role in the establishment. of
modern photometric units, standards, and meth-
ods of measurement which culminated in the
international adoption of the “candela” in 1948.
As the United States representative on the Inter-
national Committee on Weights and Measures
from 1946 to 1954, its vice chairman from 1950
to 1954, and as chief of the Bureau’s Electrical
Division for many years, he was a leading scien-
tific figure in replacing the obsolescent interna-
tional system of electrical units by the so-called
absolute electrical units. These new units provide
a basis for all electrical measurements now made
in this country and throughout the world; they
were given legal substance by Public Law 617
passed by the 81st Congress.
Crittenden was born at Oswayo, Pa., on De-
cember 19, 1880. He attended Cornell University
and received his B.A. degree in 1905. He re-
mained there as an instructor and graduate stu-
dent until he came to the National Bureau of
Standards as an assistant physicist in July 1909.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 46, No. 5
He was first assigned to the Photometric Labora-
tory, where he subsequently made so many im-
portant contributions. He was named chief of the
Bureau’s Electrical Division in 1921 and con-
tinued in this position until 1946. Under his
leadership, the program of the Division ex-
panded substantially, keeping pace with the
rapid developments in radio and _ electronics.
Major organizational units of the Bureau came
from nuclei assembled under his leadership.
These include the former Ordnance Development
Division, now the Diamond Ordnance Fuze
Laboratories of the Department of the Army,
and the Bureau’s Central Radio Propagation
Laboratories at Boulder, Colo.
In 1933 Dr. Crittenden was made assistant
director of the Bureau and placed in charge of the
over-all research and testing activities of the
organization. In 1946 the title was changed to
associate director, and he assumed the responsi-
bilities of this office on a full-time basis and con-
tinued in this role until his retirement. He was
awarded the Department of Commerce Gold
Medal for Exceptional Service in 1949, the first
year in which these awards were established. In
1946 he was honored with the Gold Medal of the
Illuminating Engineering Society for “meritori-
ous achievement conspicuously furthering the
profession, art, or knowledge of illuminating engi-
neering.” Also in 1946 the Case Institute of Tech-
nology awarded him an honorary D.Se. as ‘“‘a de-
voted servant of the public, exponent of precise
measurement, and international authority on the
standards of science and industry.”’
He was extremely active in many scientific
and professional organizations. He served on the
Standards Council of the American Standards
Association from 1925 to 1948 and as its chairman
from 1945 to 1948. He was president of the II-
luminating Engineering Society in 1925; president
of the U.S. National Committee of the Interna-
tional Electrochemical Commission from 1939
to 1946; president of the Optical Society of
America, 1932 to 1933; associate editor of the
Review of Scientific Instruments, 1934 to 1936;
and chairman of the Interdepartmental Screw
Thread Committee in 1952. He also participated
in the work of the American Society for Testing
Materials, the American Institute of Electrical
Engineers, the American Institute of Physics, the
National Research Council, the International
Organization for Standardization, and the Inter-
national Committee on Legal Metrology. Locally,
he was president of the Philosophical Society of
Washington in 1922, of the Washington Academy
of Sciences in 1940, and of the Cosmos Club in
1946.
Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences
PROTA ONG © Bi RES ORO eee OE R. E. Gipson, Applied Physics Laboratory
PERE SEOCME-ELECE SIN to oy aime oe erste ot aS ha Wiuiram W. Rusey, Geological Survey
SERA 3 pS OR Ger DE Raa CS ne Ene OnE err: Heinz Sprecut, National Institutes of Health
ee +46 Bee eee Howarp 8. Rappueye, Coast and Geodetic Survey (Retired)
ACTER IA slot: C1 PCN ee RSI ue Reece Cieieh Ten ahem rete
Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications
Haraup A. Renper, U. 8. National Museum
Elected Members of the Board of Managers:
Tho diame BY ieee omnis imc nmeir es amen re rthe aes A. T. McPuerson, A. B. GURNEY
Roast ye LOSS eee oe pen teenies eee eae ice W. W. Rosny, J. R. SWALLEN
PROM IAMUAT 959) Yh 6 oe eceao sale eee salon sieve a Francois N. FRENKIEL, F. L. CAMPBELL
LO OHORO /MIVLANIGGETS). Wai teris co sass Secon eee All the above officers plus the Editor
[SERGD? aE Cuester H. Pacer, National Bureau of Standards (EM 2-4040)
Associate Hditors....... RONALD BamForp, Howarp W. Bonp, ImManuEL EsTERMANN
IE CELULTVEY COMMIULEE: «0255 sobs cae aes ees R. E. Gipson (chairman), W. W. Rusey,
Heinz Specut, H. S. Rappieye, A. B. GuRNEY
Committee on Membership.......... Louis R. Maxwetu (chairman), Naval Ordnance
Laboratory (HE 4-7100), Grorar Anastos, W. H. Avery, Roger W. Curtis,
CHURCHILL EISENHART, GEOFFREY Epsatu, J. H. McMILLen
Committee on Meetings.......... A.M. Stone (chairman), Applied Physics Laboratory
(JU 9-7700), Partie H. ABrELsoN, Kennertu 8. Cots, Leon F. Curtis, J. WALLACE
Joyce, THomas J. Krii1an, Constantin C. Nixirororr, T. D. Stewart
Committee on Monographs:
pRopsanuany L951 5 cm vi. olgusiedie sss eae Haraup A. Reaper, Witt1am A. Dayton
Monamuarys T9G8. «cect test neecede sees Dean B. Cows, Josepu P. H. Morrison
ita diammnancse TRG Bee pe aoe eb Pree i cin een Te eee
Committee on Awards of Scientific Achievement
Tru C. ScHooNOVER (general chairman), National Bureau of Standards (EM 2-4040)
For Biological Sciences...... MicHaru J. PELCZAR (chairman), University of Mary-
land (WA 7-3800), James M. HunpiEey, WILLIE W. Surtn, JoEL WARREN,
R. B. Wrrnrow
For Engineering Sciences...... ARNOLD Scorr (chairman), National Bureau of
Standards (EM 2-4040), Frank A. Brsperstern, J. M. Catpweii, Micwarn
GoupBeEre, T. J. Hickury, Pauu A. Surra
For Physical Sciences...... C. R. Narser (chairman), George Washington Univer-
sity (ST 3-0250), Howarp W. Bonn, IMMANUEL EstERMANN, Peter Kina,
JU, Ie Marton, Extiorr MonTrRo.t, "E. H. Vestine
For Teaching of Science...... B. D. Van Evera (chairman), George Washington
University (ST 3-0250), RonaLp BamrorpD, HERMAN BRANSON, KertH JOHNSON,
Howarp OWENS, MARGARET PATTERSON, B. W. Srrrer.y
Committee on Grants-in-Aid for Research
W.J. Hamer (chairman), National Bureau of Standards (HM 2-4040), W. R. WepDEL,
H. W. WELts
Commiitee on policy and Planning
Frank M. Serzuer (chairman), v S. National Museum (NA 8-1810)
"ADC LEDS ETT UC 1597 AAR a ee Joun E. Grar, RayMonp J. SEEGER
MRNowamuanyyO58). fabio. 56 dercoeiew sees Francis M. DEFANDORF, F. M. Serzter
ANG) darian ay OS ec glee Sec OO eee MARGARET PITTMAN, Watvo L. Scamrrr
Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent
ARCHIBALD T. McPHERSON (chairman), National Bureau of Standards (EM 2-4040)
PRO MN VINT DTV LOS he Pere es: oasis Wee s tise arte als Tra B. Hansen, Witiram J. YOUDEN
MorsvanianyelO58) acu) ee sees see ARCHIBALD T. McPuHeErson, W. T. Reap
ROR AUUATM ISO cee er cry Meet Mc acc Mon at Pau R. Mriuer, Leo ScHuUBERT
Committee on Science Education (Academy representation on Joint Board for Improve-
ment of Science Education)...... Raymonp J. SEEGER (chairman), National Science
Foundation (ST 3-2140), ArNotp H. Scort, Kerra Jonnson, WapE H. MarsHatu,
JouHNn K. Taytor
NUETESENLALIVCHONNOCOUNCUNOLAvALPA aS santa aac cee ene A. NELSON SAYRE
Committee of Auditors...... Epwarp WICHERS chet) National Bureau of Stand-
ards (EM 2-4040), M. C. Henprrson, P. H. Hernzp
CORTOEIEO Of WEGICTS god acc. coce Geritcs Ian enna cn nen te one
Committee on Ways and Means...... Francois N. FRENKIEL (chairman), peplied Physics
Laboratory (JU 9-7100),S. F. BEE, Paar A. Oxruser, W. T. Reap, B. F. ScriBpNER
Committee on Public Relations......! _ 1. Mawnan (chairman), Applied Phy sies Labora-
tory (JU 9-7700), Ht. Sprcut, Howarp Bonp
CONTENTS
Page
CHEMICAL ENGINEERING.—Joule-Thomson coefficients for Freon-12.
RicHARD A. ScHMIDTKE:.. 5. ..2.0.+0.6 sce e056 eee 137
Entomo.tocy.—Three new Neotropical flea beetles. Doris H. Buaxe. 142
ENntTomMoLocy.—Two new species of Rhyopsocus (Psocoptera) from the
U. S. A., with notes on the bionomics of one household species.
KATHRYN M.SOMMERMAN/...: 2... 65 .55.-02. 0002-5 00 ore 145
Matacotocy.—Mollusca dredged by the Orca off the Santa Barbara,
Islands, California, in 1951. S. StinLMAN Berry...... ES. 150
Zootocy.—A new fairy shrimp from western United States, with notes
on other North American species. RALPH W. DEXTER.......... 159
Notes and New8? $56 6.0 0bsdeltis wis oiecne Boe ole ees rr 157, 165
i ee =f)
S * {/ xs
~ C/o.
\
=
— i
Ake, 9
’ D pp A/ ie =)
VOLUME 46 June 1956 NUMBER 6
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
} Published Monthly by the
meASHINGTON AUGEAGD AD Mey 20 F S°C TEN © Bes
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: Cuester H. Paau, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RoNALD BAaMForD, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL EsTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and afhliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3314 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the ProcrEpineGs should be sent to Haratp A. Rexpur, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per Year...............000cee ccs eeees $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ — _—
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)........ 8.00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JouURNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 45, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $378.50.
MonoaraPu No.1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
INDEX to JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PRocCEEDINGS......................+--- $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete............................. $25.00
Single: volumes;junbound’- 230. onsen ae ee ee ene ee ELE 2.00
Simple mumbersi ces eats ete ce ee temics ea eee ae oun eee siete crete eA eae Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’’ and
address to the Treasurer, H. 8S. Raprpieye, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
D.C.
Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md. ‘
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925.
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 46
June 1956
No. 6
GENERAL SCIENCE.— Man and science’. Raymond J. SEEGER, National Science
Foundation.
(Received May 7, 1956)
One of the great issues today is the rela-
tion of man to science. I have deliberately
used the phrase man and science, rather
than science and man, to suggest that man
himself is the key to the problem. I shall
stress only the scientific aspect of this rela-
tionship today although I am quite sensi-
tive to the human significance.
One phase of the issue may be stated
thus: Is science inherently individualistic?
If so, personal freedom is a primary requi-
site for each scientist. Or, is science essen-
tially social? Then government planning is
a fundamental necessity for all science.
The present emphasis all over the world
seems to be on the social importance of
science, arising probably from the promi-
nent place it occupies in the economic struc-
ture of modern society (cf. the medieval
social interest in astrology and alchemy).
First of all, man is searching intensively for
all kinds of materials and for cheap sources
of energy, owing partly to catastrophic
World War II losses, partly to normal
population growth, and partly to an ever
increasing demand for commodities. Sec-
ondly, the dramatic use of atomic energy
within six years after its identification has
encouraged a belief that the usual time lag
between discovery and application can be
greatly decreased by a sufficient expenditure
of simultaneous efforts. (A more recent, but
less well-known example from solid-state
science is the invention of the transistor.)
It is conceivable that the mastery of nature
' Vice-Presidential Address for Section L, ‘‘His-
tory and Philosophy of Science, 1956 Atlanta
Meeting of the AAAS. Based upon talks given at
Purdue University, the Virginia Theological Semi-
nary, Industrial College of the Armed Forces, and
the State Department Foreign Service Institute.
through science will make possible the mas-
tery of the world. The uppermost question,
therefore, in everyone’s mind is this: if
science is to rule the world, who is to rule
science? Accordingly, we find governments
generally sensitive to the basic research
studies of technology. Sometimes, indeed,
there is a deliberate attempt to make basic
research captive, often indirectly through
the support of education. For example, in
recent years more than 60 per cent of educa-
tion in Great Britain has been supported
by the national government; in Germany
about 90 per cent of all research at educa-
tional institutions has government funds for
its source; in Russia technological develop-
ment is being exploited in an all-out effort.
Even in the United States it is estimated
that the Federal Government supports
about 70 per cent of the research performed
at educational institutions. Hence it is not
surprising to find President J. D. Millet, of
the University of Miami, chairman of the
Commission on Financing Higher Educa-
tion of the Association of American Univer-
sities, saying, ‘“Many of America’s greatest
universities are on the verge of becoming
purely scientific, if not technological insti-
tutions.” In any case the spectrum of the
distribution of national funds for the sup-
port of science is anxiously watched as an
index to technological progress.
Let us, therefore, consider in more detail
the question: is science essentially social?
Some years ago Julian Huxley concluded
his book Science and social needs with the
statement: “Science is not the disembodied
sort of activity that some would make out,
engaged in the abstract task of pursuing
universal truth, but a social funetion, inti-
169
GL 3 0 tang
170
mately linked with human history and hu-
man destiny.” In the same spirit Hyman
Levy in The universe of science has em-
phasized that science creates social needs,
whereas Lancelot Hogben has boasted con-
tinually that science fulfills social needs.
The Union of Soviet Socialist Republics
notes in the Soviet encyclopedia that
“The ultimate aim of all science is the satis-
fying of the needs of society.’’ The Soviet
Union itself is a good example of this thesis.
In the official Marxist doctrine of 1930 we
are informed that science is identical with
technology; that science advances practical
needs; that science, therefore, must be or-
ganized for practical needs; and that central
direction is necessarily part of economic
planning. A dramatic illustration of this
doctrine in practice was the recent develop-
ment of biological science in the Soviet
Union. In 1948 Lysenko expressed opposi-
tion to genetics because of its hereditary
emphasis in contrast to the envoronmental
factor, proper for Soviet thought. He was
opposed also to Darwinian theories with
their emphasis upon individual species com-
batting one another in contrast to the
Lamarckian influence of environment.
Within two years Michurin of Russia an-
nounced that through Lysenko’s methods
actual changes had been effected in plants,
such as the transformations of wheat into
rye, of elm into hazelwood, of pine into fir,
et al. Two years later an announcement
foretold animal changes soon to come (to
date, the speaker has no knowledge of the
fulfillment of this prophecy).
In practice the Soviet doctrine resulted
early in a nationalization of science quite
contrary to the international character that
has been generally accepted in western cul-
ture. For example, in 1935 Soviet scientists
were not permitted to publish in scientific
journals outside Russia; later the Soviet
journals themselves were published only in
the Russian language; still later, references
were confined mostly to Russian literature.
To say the least, history may become
greatly distorted through such a procedure.
(The new look of the USSR is quite encour-
aging for an international outlook in the
area of scientific publication (e. g., permis-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, NO. 6
sion for external publication, and English
abstracts of internal journals).)
If we would see ourselves as others see us,
we might well read the somewhat preju-
diced book of S. F. Mason, Main currents
of scientific thought (1953). He argues that
in the nineteenth century the main current
of Soviet thought was essentially of a
theoretical nature (cf. Lobachewsky’s non-
Euclidean geometry, Mendeléef’s periodic ta-
ble, Pavlov’s conditioned reflexes), whereas
in the United States it had more of a
technological character (e.g., anaesthetics,
the telephone, the airplane, et al., culminat-
ing in the twentieth century production of
the atomic bomb). Perhaps, we should look
critically in our own historical mirror. We
see Benjamin Franklin promoting in 1773
the founding of the American Philosophical
Society ‘“‘For Promoting Useful Knowledge.”
In 1836 Joseph Henry, before his appoint-
ment as first Secretary of the Smithsonian
Institution, said, ‘“Though many excel in
the application of science to practical arts
of life, few devote themselves to the con-
tinued labor and patient discovery and de-
velopment of new truths.’”’ With respect to
Thomas Edison, Henry Ford remarked,
“Today we think of scientific discoveries
in connection with their possible or future
application to the needs of man.” In his
Science, the endless frontier Vannevar Bush
warned in 1945, ‘“‘Our national preeminence
in the fields of applied research and devel-
opment should not blind us to the truth
that with respect to pure research—the dis-
covery of fundamental new knowledge and
basic scientific principles—America has oc-
cupied a second place.”’ Thus, we see from
the beginning of American history to mod-
ern times a utilitarian tradition.
Nowadays there appears to be a world-
wide phenomenon of such technological
emphasis. On the one hand, those countries
without industries are urgently striving to
encourage industrial research; while, on the
other hand, those countries with well-
developed industries are busily engaged in
fostering military research. In Great Brit-
ain, for example, during the period 1936-37
to 1950-51 the government support of basic
research in the universities increased only
sixfold, while government expenditures in-
JUNE 1956 SEEGER: MAN
creased 8 times in agricultural research, 9
times in medical research, 10 times in indus-
trial research, and 67 times in military re-
search and development.
In all this social emphasis upon science,
to be sure, there always lurks the potential
danger of undesirable control. Physicists
are ever mindful of the meeting of the
British Association for the Advancement of
Science in 1847 at which James Joule’s ex-
perimental conclusion of the conservation
of energy would have been dismissed ex
cathedra by the chairman, had it not been
for the alert and sensitive intervention of a
young man by the name of William Thom-
son, later Lord Kelvin. A tragic series of
events took place in Germany partly be-
cause of Hermann von Helmholtz’s failure
to recognize the theoretical work of Robert
Mayer on the mechanical equivalent of heat
in 1842, even though he admitted its value
at the Innsbruck meeting in 1869. We are
all aware of the German decision not to
develop atomic energy during World War
II. An ‘‘expert”’ here once informed a class
that supersonic flight of aircraft would
never be a possibility—at the very time that
the Germans had privately completed their
basic aerodynamic research for the V-2. I
myself still recall certain individuals who
advised against sponsoring basic research
on the long-range application of interferom-
etry to jets because of a supposed urgency
of a short-range duration. Then, too, I
recollect the scoffiing attitude of some per-
sons who questioned certain theoretical
work in favor of practical improvements
amounting, say, to an increased efficiency
of a tenth of one per cent. It turned out
later, however, that the theoretical ideas
became embodied in the air-burst principle
used in the bombing of Hiroshima and
Nagasaki with its untold percentage in-
crease in effectiveness. Men of affairs un-
fortunately are not alone in being adept in
making wrong choices. In his outstanding
work on Hydrodynamics (6th edition) the
scholar Horace Lamb mentions the basic
Rankine-Hugoniot law of shock waves only
vasually (in a footnote), viz, ‘““No evidence
has yet been adduced in support of this
law.” Yet since that year of 1933 shock
waves have assumed a major role of practi-
AND SCIENCE 171
cal importance and of theoretical signifi-
cance. It is evident that the high stakes
involved in wrong choices make the man-
agement problem of judging social signifi-
cance a matter of utmost importance. Even
though control of science by scientists 1s
not without serious problems and handi-
caps, there would appear to be an even
greater danger if the development of science
should be controlled by nonscientists—for
motives other than scientific progress.
What is more, there is always also a lim-
iting manpower problem in any social en-
deavor. Some time ago a representative of a
foreign oil company pointed out from an
analysis he had made, that research output
has apparently doubled every seven years
in recent times. He estimates that just one
more effective doubling is possible owing to
the limitation of sufficiently intelligent per-
sons available for guiding basic research in
a balanced economy. Regardless of the
correctness of the prophecy, evidently the
availability of scientific personnel at any
particular place and time does impose an
upper limit so that efficient utilization of
people may be of primary significance. In
our own country we note the rapid deplet-
ing of scientific personnel in colleges and
universities owing to the increasing compe-
tition among industries for technical talent
at the very time when schools are beginning
to bulge. It may well be that in this process
we are all robbing the academic goose who
lays the intellectual eggs. France long ago
pointed to a more likely road to scientific
achievement in the establishment of the
Ecole Polytechnique with its utilization of
research-minded individuals as teachers.
Is science, perhaps, inherently individ-
ualistic? There is no doubt that much sci-
entific growth has psychological and socio-
logical roots in more or practical
requirements. It must always be borne in
mind, however, that intellectual curiosity
per se also is often a primary incentive.
The element of wonder and astonishment
is always a pertinent motivating factor.
Newton himself, when asked about his own
discoveries, stated that he had made them
“by always thinking aside about them.”
In more recent times, X-rays were dis-
covered as a_ serendipity biological by-
less
172
product of a physics investigation. In the
scientific laboratory, as well as in kinder-
garten, the intellectual activity must be
fun. Perhaps, here is a clue to the scientific
productivity of young people—their atti-
tude toward real problems, rather than the
condition of their environment. Strangely
enough, Einstein as a young man made his
brilliant discoveries about special relativity,
the Brownian movements, and the photo-
electric effect not in a university, not even
in a laboratory, but in a government patent
office. Not only must we bear in mind so-
cially that scientists are people, but indi-
vidually that each scientist is a person—a
person that sees visions and later dreams
dreams. He is not so much a doer—or even
a knower—he is truly a seer. Poincaré once
noted, “It is not science that is useful be-
cause its discoveries make technical prog-
ress possible but technical progress is useful
because it enables mankind by relieving it
of material cares to give more time to
science and to art.”
Science, indeed, is fundamentally not so
much a common-sense residue from the
past, but rather a challenge to the common
sense of the present. Perhaps, a familiar
illustration may be useful. Here is a trailer
with a candle in the center. When the
candle is lighted, will the rays of light reach
the front end or the back end of the trailer
first? It is obvious that both will take place
at the same time. I forgot to mention, how-
ever, that the trailer is moving (unknown
and unknowable to the occupants)—or is it
the earth that is moving? To persons on the
outside it is equally obvious that light will
reach the back end of the trailer before light
arrives at the forward end, which appears
to be moving away from the initial position.
In other words, to these observers, the
events are not simultaneous. The only
knowledge used in making these two con-
trary deductions is the experimental fact
that the velocity of light is the same for all
observers regardless of their own state of
motion. Thus the common-sense concept of
simultaneity, which seems generally intelli-
gible and self-evident to us, is challenged
by science. It should be emphasized, how-
ever, that the real contribution of Eimstein
in this instance was to call attention not to
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, NO. 6
the doubtful conclusions relative to differ-
ent observers, but rather to the certainty
resulting from that which is invariant with
respect to all observers.
Another challenge to common sense is
seen in the very nature of energy. Here we
find that by exercising discipline with re-
gard to logical consistency we arrive again
at greater freedom of thought. Let us take
another familiar example, say, a space ship
having two radio emitters inside, one at
each end. The first station emits a radio
beam consisting of electromagnetic radia-
tion. It is known that such waves have
momentum given by H/c, where FE is the
energy of the radiation and ¢ its velocity.
The action on this emitted radiation is
associated with a reaction on the space
ship, which obtains an opposite momentum
given by Mv, where M is the mass of the
space ship and vy its resultant velocity. Dur-
ing the time t that the radiation travels the
distance | from the first station to the sec-
ond one, where it is received, the ship will
have moved a distance x, given by vf. There
iS no apparent reason why the two radio
stations cannot then be interchanged (in
principle), and the whole process repeated
over and over again. In this event the space
ship would move on indefinitely in the same
direction—a violation, of course, of the con-
servation of energy. In what respect, then,
have we been theoretically inconsistent? We
have not associated any mass with the radi-
ation. Accordingly, in interchanging the
stations we have failed to preserve the
location of the center of mass of the whole
system. In other words, Ja must equal ml,
where m is the mass of the emitted radia-
tion. From these few relations we find read-
ily that the unknown mass m of the radiation
is equal to '/c?. In this simple way we have
obtained an expression for the mass equiva-
lent of radiation energy; and so we are
compelled to think of atomic (mass) energy,
in addition to mechanical energy, electrical
energy, thermal energy, et al.
Perhaps, the greatest danger, however,
that exists for the individual scientist who
hopes to be free to see such visions, is the
polluted atmosphere of materialism. To
many people science has become socially
just a magic phrase for nature like ‘open
JUNE 1956 SEEGER: MAN
sesame,’’ which will reveal money for many
things close to the heart’s desire. As a grad-
uate student, I heard a college preacher
remind the students upon the occasion of a
great monetary gift for buildings that uni-
versities consist not of things, but, in the
main, of ideas. How sad it is to see inside
many large edifices with magnificient equip-
ment the obvious imprint “No men—at
work.”’ A more dangerous personal influence
is the subtle, often subconscious lure of
higher salaries, extra privileges, more power,
which might even be called professional pa-
tronage in the vulgar sense. We are ever
reminded that ‘‘man does not live by bread
alone,”’ that
The world is too much with us, late and soon,
Getting and spending, we lay waste our powers,
Little we see in Nature that is ours.
Einstein remarked in his introduction to the
1931 reprint of Newton’s Optics, ‘‘Fortu-
nate Newton, happy childhood of science,
he who has time and tranquillity can by
reading this book, live again the wonderful
advantages which the great Newton ex-
perienced in his young day.” Time and
tranquillity, rather than material benefits,
these are the prerequisites for the individual
scientist who wishes to understand the
world about us!
Thus I find myself concluding that sci-
ence is inherently individualistic in its
origin, but essentially social in its develop-
ment. Basically, it is man made and hence
anthropomorphic. Let us consider, there-
fore, what science is.
Science, I should say, is strictly the result
of the use of the scientific method and the
scientific method is simply the instrument
used by the scientist. The answer to the
question, what is science, is given basically
in terms of the scientist. A related question,
of course, which we shall not be discussing
today, is this one, ‘‘Who is man?”
In science we begin existentially with
sense impressions, which change with our
own impressionistic outlooks and which in
their totality constitute observed facts. To
many non-scientists science 1s nothing more
than a collection of such observed facts—or
at most combined with some inductive in-
ferences, as in the early positivism of August
AND SCIENCE 173
Comte. It was recognized later, however,
that a scientist just doesn’t collect facts at
random in the tradition of Francis Bacon.
Who, for example, would note all the mo-
tional aspects of fluttering leaves in order
to ascertain the general laws of motion? On
the contrary, one carefully selects facts to-
gether with their relations, which constitute
the later positivism of Ernst Mach. It has
become evident that the more popular or
general a language the more even simple
interpretations of facts require some kind
of semantics, or operational rules, as advo-
cated by modern logical positivists. For ex-
ample, what do we mean scientifically by
the length of a body? No more than the
answer we get in making a measurement,
either thoughtfully or experimentally, in a
certain prescribed manner regardless of any
preconceived categories of knowledge! We
note that in each case it is the scientist who
collects, the scientist who selects, the scien-
tist who operates.
Any person having objects of different
sizes, shapes and colors will attempt to
separate out those that are alike and, if
possible, to relate those that are different
into a single pattern. So, too, the scientist
looks for related factors amid his collection
of observed facts. In this respect, he may
be guided by the cogency of logical con-
sistency, or by the urgency of simplicity for
economic or some other purposeful con-
venience. For example, it is well known
that a descriptive characteristic of a ma-
terial is its specific gravity, that is, the
weight of a given sample relative to the
weight of an equal volume of water. It is
equally true, however, that the square of
the specific gravity is also uniquely charac-
teristic—not to mention the cube, ete. We
prefer to utilize specific gravity because of
the simplicity of its form. Here again it is
the scientist who chooses the relations.
To the traveler who has gone along vari-
ous roads and who has seen many places, it
is always refreshing to go up on a mountain
top from which he can see at a glance the
whole surrounding region with its network
of roads. So, too, the scientist is not content
with the observed facts, or even with the
related factors. He looks for an overall view,
what the Greeks called a theory (from the
174
same root word as theater); such a theory
is necessarily factitious in that it 1s inspired
in the scientist by compelling beauty or by
ingrained truth (based on analogies with
common sense), or merely by the heuristic
value of pragmatism. Not everyone could or
would or should be an Einstein, a Bohr, et
all. Max Born concludes his ‘‘Natural Phi-
losophy of Cause and Chance”? with the
remark “Faith, imagination, intuition are
decisive factors in the progress of science as
in any other activity.” The scientist is truly
a maker, or to use the Greek word, a poet.
In a strict sense the scientist strives to
achieve a poetical view; his formal relations
are freely creative, as Poincaré has empha-
sized. Hence the scientist himself plays a
major role in the development of theory.
He can never be completely eliminated. The
studied attempt to eliminate the subject for
greater objectivity finally becomes only in-
creasingly more subjective.
Every scientist has a question in mind as
he looks out upon the world about him. The
observed facts are its answers. From them
he obtains related factors. From both he
makes a factitious theory, which enables
him to see farther and wider so that new
questions arise in his mind as he again looks
out upon the world about him. The new
answers are In the form of additional ob-
served facts. The cycle will be continually
repeated, although its completeness will
ever depend upon the controllability of the
material. For example, observed facts may
be difficult to isolate as in self-involving
social phenomena; or a factitious theory
may be difficult to achieve as in the omni-
present observational earth sciences. In any
case the cycle represents a single instru-
ment in the hands of an instrument maker.
In the use of the scientific method, how-
ever, there are two necesary conditions. The
first one is conformity to nature. which is
based upon the assumption of the uniform-
ity of nature. In other words, at all times
predicted conclusions must check with ob-
served data.
The second condition is acceptability by
society, which is based upon the assumption
of human comprehensibility of nature. Ein-
stein once said that to him the most incom-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 6
prehensible feature of nature is its compre-
hensibility. The scientist’s understanding,
his reasons for accepting certain general
principles, depends on his own personality
as well as the social class, the political
group, the religious faith, et al., to which
he adheres. In a strict sense such factors are
included in the sociology of science. In the
celebrated case of Galileo, we note, the
Roman Catholic Church opposed philosophi-
cally the favored position of the sun. (One
wonders what influence this social problem
may have had later in the eighteenth cen-
tury, which saw science in a dormant state
both for the Catholic Italy of Galileo and
for the Protestant Germany of Kepler, which
was undoubtedly influenced by the anti-
rational attitude of Luther.) In our own day
we found Nazi leaders, with the physicist
Johannes Stark as their spokesman, voicing
similar opposition to the lack of favored
observers from the relativistic point of
view. They were opposed also to the con-
cept of materialistic clocks for time deter-
mination, which seemed irreconcilable with
their own idealistic position. On the other
hand, in the USSR also there has been offi-
cial opposition to the relativity theory, but
in this instance because of a supposedly
idealistic view of material mass as energy.
(Can it be altogether accidental that the
use of atomic energy was first developed in
English-speaking countries?) The social ac-
ceptability of science is intrinsically in-
volved in the philosophy of science, again
impressing us with the fact that in all
science there is indelibly imprinted some-
thing of the scientist himself.
As we look about us, we are aware of
phenomena, appearances that play lke
Plato’s shadows in his underground den. It
is upon the foundation of the totality of
these sense impressions, of course, that one
constructs the world of science. Here, how-
ever, 1S always an element of surprise—the
theories are never merely descriptive of
what is known; in addition, they are pre-
dictive of what is unknown—probably due
to the fact that a thing itself is always
greater than any experiential impressions
and, even more so, than any symbolic ex-
pressions of it. That there is a world of
nature beyond sense impressions gains cre-
JUNE 1956 SEEGER: MAN
dence as a philosophy of nature extrascien-
tifie (metaphysical) in character. Thus we
find Max Planck insisting upon the exist-
ence of three worlds: the world of sense
impressions, the world of science, and the
real world, as he calls it. He says ‘‘Physical
science demands that we admit the exist-
ence of a real world independent from us”
—actually, an assumption. As far as I can
see, the data of sense impressions form a
contact surface of phenomena, in which I
am existentially involved, between two pos-
sible worlds, the world of nature and the
world of science. What relationship, if any,
exists between these two worlds? Is nature
possibly non-existent? Is science, perhaps,
purely fictional? Is science merely the im-
perfect reflection, or imperfect image of
nature made in the rational image of man?
Are these two worlds possibly identical? Is
science a re-construction of the world of
nature? There are various views as to how
the world of science may be related to the
world of nature. P. Duhem urged ‘‘To the
extent that physical theory makes progress,
it becomes more and more similar to a natu-
ral classification which is its ideal end.”
Einsten stated, ‘‘Our experience up to date
justifies us in feeling sure that in Nature is
actualized the ideal of mathematical sim-
plicity.”” A. A. Michelson once suggested
that ‘What can surpass in beauty the
wonderful adaptation of Nature’s means to
her ends, and the never-failing rule of law
and order which governs even the most
apparently irregular and complicated of her
manifestations? These laws it is the object
of the scientific investigator to discover and
apply. In such successful investigation con-
sists at once his keenest delight as well as
his highest reward.”’ We are reminded here of
Keat’s creed that “Truthis beauty.” P. Bridg-
man, however, cautions us that ‘The known
laws of nature are simple if we consider only
a limited range of facts.’’ Hence we must al-
ways be aware of limitations of scientific
data, which are necessarily incomplete and
imperfectly described by man. We must be
conscious also that the world of science, in
turn, is necessarily incomplete as a descrip-
tion even of the sense impressions, not to
mention as a description of their matrix; at
best it represents only an incomplete and
AND SCIENCE 175
imperfect theoretical outlook. Uniqueness,
of course, is always wanting. It would seem
unlikely, therefore, that a one-to-one corre-
spondence would exist at any time between
the world of nature, involving the sense-
data plane, and the world of science, involv-
ing the same plane. One would hardly be
justified, I believe, in any extrapolation like
that of P. Jordan in his Science and_ the
course of history, viz., ‘“The discovery of new
laws of atomic physics has shown the old
materialistic view to be untenable even in
the field of physics.’’ The necessary condi-
tions of conformity to nature and of accepta-
bility by man, moreover, may be related to
the philosophy of nature as a guiding faith.
To me the cumulative and integrative de-
velopment of scientific theories, leading to
more inclusive description and ever sur-
prising prediction, points more and more to a
probable world of nature, which may be
susceptible of metaphysical interpretations,
such as the theological premise ‘In the
beginning God”! We should never dogmat-
ically exclude Einstein’s ‘Faith in the possi-
bility that the regulations valid for the
world of existence are rational.”
Unfortunately there is a widening gap
between any philosophy of science ap-
proached from the standpoint of science, and
any philosophy of nature, approached from
the standpoint of philosophy per se. Yet
there can be no sharp line of demarcation;
for the scientist himself is the link. As man
looks at the environment about him from
the different points of view of physical, bio-
logical, psychological, and sociological sci-
ences, it is always he himself who is viewing.
Invariably, from any viewpoint he ponders
three questions: what is true? what is real?
what is value? The attempt to obtain an-
swers to these questions in any discipline
may properly be called the philosophy of
that discipline. To seek common answers to
these common questions is general pbiloso-
phy. The attitude may be that of an ag-
nostic, or of a skeptic, or of a man of faith.
No compelling evidence will be agreed upon
by all viewers. Because of inevitable incom-
pleteness the same set of observed facts
may be seen in different ways—as a cube
may be visualized on a flat surface, or as a
limited outlook of white clouds in a blue sky
176
may be interpreted as white caps on a
blue sea. As far as I can see, there is no way
of demonstrating just what is precisely true
and just what is precisely false; for there
are no general criteria for truth. The choice
for each of us may be determined by uncon-
ditional imperatives like loyalty to a human
cause, like love to a human partner, like
obedience to a divine Will, et al., or merely
by unconditional recognition of other people
as individual persons. What must be ad-
mitted by all is that civilization is the
product not of the pessimism of agnostics
and of skeptics, but of the optimism of men
of faith. Enthusiastic men have varied as
to what they have believed, but they have
all believed either in some thing, or in some
one, or in Some One. Some have believed
that answers to the three questions can be
obtained from one’s environment (material-
ism); others, from men (humanism); still
others, from God (theism). Unfortunately,
while a man considers leisurely how to make
up his mind, he may already be virtually
making up his life. Three practical decisions
are open to every man. He may refuse to
consider the matter and thereby fix his
ignorance; or he may purge his beliefs and
thus leave a vacuum for chance filling in; or
he may clarify all aspects and then make an
intelligent (from the Latin words inter legere
meaning to choose among) choice. We note
that detachment is itself a choice.
What then shall we do about the original
question, is science inherently individualis-
tic, or essentially social? Dr. Conant, I
believe, gives us a clue when he says “‘Science
should be relevant to man.” In other words,
as men, we can not have science for the sake
of science any more than we can have art for
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, NO. 6
the sake of art. We must have science and
art for the sake of man—man individually
or socially. Science is both an end for man
and a means for society. The best results
will be obtained, of course, if their interrela-
tions are understood. Freedom for the indi-
vidual, I would urge, should be listed first.
Man is truly a social being; but first of all, a
man is actually a man.
When I think of man and science, I find a
parable in the apotheosis of Faust, as set
forth in that poetical, philosophical autobi-
ography of Goethe. The theme there seems
to be that he who strives, strays, yet in that
straying finds his salvation. At the beginning
Faust flouts science. He tries vainly to make
man master of his environment. Mephis-
topheles taunts Faust with his demand for
everything, his satisfaction with nothing.
He wagers that Faust will one day demand
nothing, but will be satisfied with whatever
chance throws his way. In the last scene we
watch expectantly the 100-year old Faust
looking upon the sand dunes along a shore
marked with engineering feats of dykes and
canals—a political enterprise in which people
strive daily to make buttresses against the
ever-surging sea. Faust muses on future
generations living and laboring in this
wholesome danger. He mutters, ‘‘Verweile
doch, du bist so schén” (Stay, thou art so
fair)—almost the very words of the original
wager. Yet even here Faust is maintaining
his enthusiasm for a difficult, but endless
life:
The noble spirit now is free
And saved from evil scheming!
Whoever aspires unweariedly
Is not beyond redeeming.
JUNE 1956
DEMPSEY: STONE “‘MEDICINE WHEELS”
177
ETHNOLOGY .=Stone “Medicine Wheels’—memorials to Blackfoot war chiefs.
Hueu A. Dempsey, Calgary, Alberta. (Communicated by John C. Ewers.)
b)
Two stone ‘medicine wheels,’ which are
still in existence on the Blood Indian Re-
serve in southern Alberta, Canada, offer
excellent examples that the line between
archeological and ethnological work is some-
times a fine one. For these two ‘medicine
wheels” —and a third recently inundated by
backwaters of St. Mary Dam—are not
ancient markers whose significance is lost
in antiquity. Rather, they have been con-
structed within this century, and a sum-
mer’s field work has revealed the date and
ownership of the rings, the reason for their
existence, and has enabled interviews to be
made with individuals who actually partici-
pated in or witnessed their creation.
The Blackfoot ‘medicine wheel’’ consists
of a circle of stones, or “tipi ring,” with
concentric lines of stones of varying lengths
extending away from it in the four cardinal
directions. This pattern is similar to those
described by Kehoe’s informants (1954, pp.
133-34), although it differs from his Lowry,
Mont., site which has ten such lines.
The tipi ring itself is common in Black-
foot country and has been used within the
past two decades by at least two tribes of
this nation (Blood and North Peigan) where
the owner wished to follow early customs.
The tipi rings were aptly described in
1955 by One Gun, an elderly North Black-
foot informant: “The circles of stones were
normally used to hold down the edges of
the lodges. The old tipis were made of buf-
falo skins and were much heavier than the
canvas ones. They could not be blown away
as easily, so stones were able to hold them
in place. But when we started to use can-
vas, we had to use pegs or our tipis would
be blown over. Stones were also used be-
tween the pegs.”
Although many of these tipi rings have
been destroyed in cultivated areas, some
are still known to exist on the North Black-
foot Reserve in Canada, the Blackfoot Res-
ervation in Montana, and on the Blood
Reserve, where the writer has observed well
over two dozen in casual traveling.
The Blackfoot term for the ‘medicine
wheel” is atsot-akeeh’ tuksin. The literal
translation is: “from all sides’ (atsot), ‘“a
small marker of stones” (akeeh’), ‘for pos-
terity”’ (tuksin). It will be noted that the
word merely designates the radiating lines
and makes no reference to the tipi ring it-
self. This conforms with Blackfoot tradition
that the lines were merely appendages to
existing tipi rings, rather than the whole
marker being constructed at one time.
According to informants, ‘medicine
wheels’? were used to mark the residence
or grave of a warrior chief. There were ap-
parently three such allied uses: for a tipi
in which a warrior chief died and was
buried; one in which he had been residing
at the time of his death but which was not
his burial place; and one which was used
during his lifetime but not related to his
death. Each may be a variation, or they
may reveal a change in the use of these
markers over the years.
The earliest reference to a Blackfoot
“medicine wheel”? known to informants is
credited to Bull Back Fat, a Blood chief
who died in 1842. But, according to Jack
Low Horn, a reliable Blood informant who
supplied this data, the marker did not origi-
nate with this chief but “was started in
the days when our people used dogs instead
of horses.’’ The informant told the follow-
ing story:
“The use of this sign saved the life of the first
Bull Back Fat.! The Bloods had been on a raiding
party to the south and were returning home. In
each camp, Bull Back Fat used these signs around
his lodge. A party of enemy Crows discovered
one of these camps and saw his marks. They had
never seen them before and wondered what they
meant, so they began to follow the trail of the
Bloods. They found two deserted camps and
arrived at the third shortly after the Bloods had
left. Bull Back Fat and his wife were a few miles
from this camp when they discovered that a colt
1 There were at least five Blood chiefs named
Bull Back Fat during the period 1830-1900 and
each is remembered by some characteristic—i.e.,
the first Bull Back Fat, the short Bull Back Fat,
the Bull Back Fat who was buried by women, ete.
178 JOURNAL
had been left behind, so they returned to find
it. When they came to a point overlooking the
camp, the Crows saw the pair and waved to them.
Escape was impossible, so Bull Black Fat rode
down to meet them. Speaking in sign language,
the Crows asked about the meaning of the stones.
Bull Back Fat explained that these were used
by a great warrior chief who was leading the
party of Bloods; but he did not tell them that he
was the chief. They became anxious to visit this
man and Bull Back Fat agreed to lead them there
under a pact of peace, but asked that his people
have time to be prepared. He left the Crows and
found the new camp where his lodge was placed
in readiness for the visitors. When the party
arrived, they were shown to Bull Back Fat’s tipi.
When they entered, they were surprised to meet
the same man whom they had seen earlier. It
was then they learned who he was and realized
they had missed the opportunity of killing a great
chief... .”
OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 6°
According to the informant, other tribes
soon learned the meaning of the “medicine
wheel” and it served a practical purpose,
for the enemy was always hesitant about
pursuing a camp which was led by a noted
warrior. “‘Anyone passing one of these
markers would know that a great warrior
chief had camped there,’ he commented.
If this at one period was the common
Blackfoot use of the ‘‘medicine wheel,’’ it
evidently underwent a change in the late
nomadic period, for most modern inform-
ants consider these to be solely memorials
or death markers. One Gun stated that
“when a chief died, he was left in his tipi.
After it had fallen down and rotted, any-
one travelling past would know that a chief
died there because of the radiating lines.”
Alternately, Rides at the Door, a Blood in-
formant, said that “any stranger passing
such a place would recognize that a chief
°
o
N
(9°)
fo}
an
°
[e)
oO
°
o
90000 2° 200,
0? 05
oO %
oe co}
° °
9 °
9 °
9 °
° °
yh C20 © OO OO Oo 6a p= O60 OO OO &.o © 000
«—— 30’ 8 (o) — 30’ —___>
; :
% ©
% °
%, °° Larger stones flank
20 90° 3foot entrancew.
°0009000°° 1) yy
°
fe}
c-}
°
(e}
0’ o
°
5 to is 20
_ a ——— rel °o
Feet
°
°o
oe
°o
Fra. 1.—The ‘‘medicine wheel’’ of Steel, a noted Blood warrior, is located on the Blood
Indian Reserve, southern Alberta, about 3 miles north of Spring Coulee. It is 27 feet in diameter at
the circle with four 30-foot radiating lines. There were 77 stones used in the circle portion, and
14 each in the 3-foot fireplaces. This ‘‘medicine wheel’? was constructed in April 1940, following
the death of Steel.
JUNE 1956
ie is
DEMPSEY: STONE “MEDICINE WHEELS”
Es
Fic. 2.—The Eagle Child ‘‘medicine wheel,’’ looking northeast.
had died there, but the body would not be
left there.”
It is possible that these two distinct lines
of thought are the result of Blackfoot mor-
tuary customs. At times, particularly dur-
ing plagues or when moving camp, a dead
person was left in his sewn-up lodge. On
other occasions, he was buried in the trees
or on a scaffolding on a high hill. This vari-
ation possibly affected the use of the ‘“‘med-
icine wheel,” with the radiating lines being
left at the death lodge if it was used, or at
the tipi ring if the chief was buried else-
where.
The Bloods and North Blackfoot know
of several ‘‘medicine wheels” which were
erected for warrior chiefs. Some of these
markers are still in existence, but most have
been destroyed by the inroads of civiliza-
tion. One Gun knew of two wheels which
he claimed were intact on the North Black-
foot Reserve, east of Calgary. He said that
“at Blackfoot Crossing there is one for
Little Medicine Pipe, a Blackfoot who died
in the smallpox epidemic of 1869-70, and
on Arrowwood Creek is one for Bad Head,
a Blood chief.’ Another informant said that
Many Spotted Horses, a noted Blood war
chief who died in 1884, had a ‘‘medicine
wheel” on the Blood Reserve near Whoop-
Up. A search revealed only this chief’s tipi
ring, but the stones of his ‘‘medicine wheel,”’
which were at an inaccessible point on
Weasel Fat’s Bottom, had reportedly been
scattered. Local Indians had replaced the
stones as much as possible, but it was felt
that this interference limited the usefulness
of this wheel for comparative study.
However, two existing ‘‘medicine wheels”
belonging to other Blood warriors were
closely examined, and data was obtained
on a third ring which in 1950 was sub-
merged by the backwaters of an irrigation
dam project.
The two inspected were the ‘‘medicine
wheels” of Steel (Ski-mdtszs, literally Fire
Steel) and Eagle Child (Péla-poka), while
the third belonged to Red Crow (A/éhav-
sto). All these wheels were constructed dur-
ing the present century and are likely the
only ones made by the Blood tribe during
that period. A similar ‘“‘medicine wheel” has
been credited to Running Wolf, a Blood
chief who died in 1921, but conflicting
stories tend to dispute the authenticity of
the claim.
Of the three markers, Red Crow’s is the
earliest. It was made immediately following
his death on August 28, 1900. Red Crow
was head chief of the tribe from 1870 until
180
his death and was one of the most influen-
tial men in the nation. An elderly inform-
ant, Mrs. Bruised Head, who was present
at the event, provided the following de-
scription of the making of his “medicine
wheel”’:
“T was staying at Red Crow’s tipi at the time.
He went across the river to round up his horses
and, when he didn’t return, his wife, Long Time
Singer, went to look for him. She found him lay-
ing on the gravel at the edge of the river. I saw
her crying and we knew what had happened.
We all went across with the Red Crow’s wagon
and brought his body over. Both religious de-
nominations were at the funeral, together with
many white people. When it was finished, we
started to move camp. But before we left, we
placed the markers on the four sides of his tipi
ring. Red Crow had used pegs on his tipi, but
also had stones between them. When the lodge
was removed, the circle of stones was incomplete,
so we took rocks from other tipi rings and com-
pleted it. Then we placed the four radiating lines.
There was no ceremony; several of us in the
family did it because it was the custom as far
back as the days when we used dogs; they were
just the marks of a warrior chief.
““After this, we left the camp site. That night,
Bull Horn, a minor chief, camped in the next
bottom. He had not heard about Red Crow’s
death. Next morning he went to the camp site
and when he saw the marks around Red Crow’s
tipi ring he began crying, for he knew that Red
Crow was dead.”
The second example is the Eagle Child
wheel which was constructed in 1931 after
this man’s death. It is located about 150
feet west of his house on the Blood Reserve,
and 14% miles south-west of St. Paul’s
Anglican School. The tipi ring portion is 12
feet in diameter and contains 54 field stones
ranging from four to 12 inches in diameter.
There are no hearth stones. When examined
in the summer of 1955, the north and south
lines contained six stones, the east line
seven stones and the west line four stones.
All extended in lines four to six feet in
length and, by the spaces, would appear to
have been disturbed by cattle or horses.
According to available information, Eagle
Child had lived in his house, but moved to
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, NO. 6 '
his tipi shortly before his death in 1931. The
radiating lines were set in place by Francis
Eagle Child following his father’s death.
The most interesting ‘medicine wheel,”
from all aspects, is the memorial to Steel,
a great Blood warrior. It is of the most
classic design and the fact that it was con-
structed in 1940, probably makes it the
most recent and last such stone marker.
Born in about 1850, Steel was an out-
standing fighter against the Crow and As-
sinboin and, although he never gained
official chieftain status, he was held in this
regard by his people. For his exploits, he
became the owner of a 30-buffalo tipi and
was permitted to have two fireplaces. Be-
cause these two points are reflected in his
“medicine wheel” they should be_ briefly
explained.
The average Blackfoot tipi contained 12
to 14 skins (Ewers, 1955, p. 131), but war-
riors who performed certain brave deeds
were permitted to have tipis made of 30
buffalo skins. Because of its size and weight,
such a lodge was said by informants to have
been divided in half for moving, and was
carried on two travois. Therefore, besides
fulfilling the warrior requirements, the owner
of such a tipi had to be fairly wealthy in
horses. Some Bloods who owned these tipis
were Seen From Afar, brothers Hind Bull
and Fish Child, Packs His Tail, and Holy
Sleeps. Naturally, a 30 buffalo tipi was far
larger at the base than the average tipis,
and this size is immediately evident when
inspecting certain tipi rings or “medicine
wheels.”
If a Blackfoot owner of a 30 buffalo tipi
carried his bravery and heroism to an even
greater degree, he might become one of the
select few to possess twin fireplaces. To
gain this envied prize, a warrior had to
perform some outstanding cowp of a double
nature. For example, an early Blood chief,
Big White Child, knocked two enemy from
the same horse—one from each side. Steel,
according to an informant, gained twin fire-
places when he killed two Crow Indians in
a singularly brave action.
The fireplace nearest the doorway was
apparently used for everyday purposes,
while the one to the west was reserved for
JUNE 1956
burning incense associated with a medicine
pipe held by twin fireplace owners.
Informants knew of only five Bloods who
had possessed both 30 buffalo tipis and
twin fireplaces. These were the first Bull
Back Fat, Tail Feathers Coming Over the
Hill, Big White Child, Many Spotted
Horses, and Steel. Even Seen From Afar,
remembered by the Bloods as their greatest
chief, had not performed the “dual” exploits
necessary to gain this honor.
Therefore, Steel’s final memorial—a 30
buffalo tipi ring, with twin fireplaces, and
flanked with four radiating lines—would
appear to be the greatest tribute that could
be paid a Blackfoot warrior chief.
In his later life, Steel was a progressive
Indian who lived in a log cabin, built cor-
rals, and owned cattle and horses. Karly in
1940, shortly before his death, he pitched
his large canvas tipi (of 30 buffalo size) a
short distance south of his home, in prepa-
ration for a meeting of the Horn Society—a
secret organization which guides the reli-
gious life of the reserve. Although he used
pegs, he also obtained stones to hold the
canvas in place. Following the meeting,
Steel showed his son, Bob, how to lay out
the four directional lines.
Steel died at Standoff on April 7, 1940,
and was buried on a hill near the Belly
Buttes. His son, assisted by his sister, Mrs.
Laurie Plume, then completed the ‘medi-
cine wheel” in accordance with his father’s
last wishes.
“The lines signify that he was a brave
man, a leader who had been to war,” stated
his daughter. “It was Steel’s wish to have
this done as a proper tribute to a warrior
chief.”” She added that, if he had not been
entitled to it, the elders of the tribe would
have quickly ordered the stones removed,
as they were jealous of undeserved honors.
The Steel ‘“‘medicine wheel” is located on
the Laurie Plume farm, three miles north
of Spring Coulee and about three-quarters
of a mile from St. Mary River.
The tipi ring portion is 27 feet in diam-
eter (compared to Eagle Child’s 12-foot
ring) and contains 77 field stones. There is
a three-foot entrance to the east which is
flanked by two larger stones. The concentric
lines are all 30 feet in length, with the stones
DEMPSEY: STONE ‘‘MEDICINE WHEELS” 181
evenly spaced. The north and west lines
contain 10 stones while the south and east
lines contain 12 each.
The double fireplaces are both three feet
in diameter and each contains 14 stones.
The everyday fireplace is nine feet from the
east entrance, while the ceremonial fire-
place is six feet in either direction from the
west edge of the ring and from the other
fireplace.
There is no doubt that this ‘‘medicine
wheel” was carefully prepared and, when it
was visited in 1955, it was overgrown with
grass but was reverently treasured by Mr.
and Mrs. Plume. Because the tall grass
could not be cleared away, it was impossible
to properly photograph the entire ring.
Evidence that Steel did not vary the
general size of the circle, fireplaces or en-
trance, was obtained when two informants
stated that the first twin fireplace tipi ring
constructed by Steel was still in existence
in the Standoff area. By checking winter
counts, the date of this ring was set at 1885.
When found after considerable searching,
this tipi ring was seen to be almost identical
with the ‘‘medicine wheel,’’ with the excep-
tion that it did not have the radiating lines.
It had the same diameter, the entranceway
was the same size, and there was only slight
variation in the size of one fireplace. The
only major difference was that the fire-
places appeared to be closer to the east
entrance by some 3 feet. There was no
doubt that this ring was older than the
“medicine wheel” as all stones were deeply
imbedded in the soil, some being level with
the surface.
There was one point about ‘‘medicine
wheels” upon which all informants were in
unanimous agreement: the radiating lines
had no religious or symbolical significance.
The number “four” is a sacred one among
the Blackfoot and often occurs in religious
ceremonies and traditional tales. But all
agreed that no such symbolism applied
here or, if it ever had, all knowledge of it
is forgotten. The reply of formant Rides
at the Door is typical: ‘There is no sym-
bolical meaning to the four lines; they just
denote his status as a warrior chiet.”’
Upon existing evidence, it would appear
that the use of Blackfoot “medicine wheels”
182 JOURNAL OF THE
are relatively recent. Informants knew of
only two such markers which they could
not immediately identify. One was near
Red Crow’s wheel and was thought to have
been much older, while the other was on
Sun Dial Hill (Kehoe, 1954, p. 134) and is
recorded only through the Geological Sur-
vey of 1882-83-84. However, the title,
Onoka-katzi used by surveyor G. M. Daw-
son to describe the site, likely means “Elk
Shirt” (Ponoka-sokaxsin), which was_ be-
lieved by informants to have been the name
of a mid-nineteenth century chief of the
North Blackfoot.
Because it has been possible only to study
“medicine wheels” located on the Blood
Xeserve and interview informants from the
Blackfoot nation, no attempt has been
made to carry this study beyond the region
of the stated territory. ‘“Medicine wheels,”
of a type, have been mentioned at Lowry,
Mont., by Kehoe, and in the Big Horn
WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 6
Mountains east of Lovell, Wyo., by Mulloy,
(1954, pp. 54-55), but further research
would be necessary to ascertain if there is
any relationship between these, and the
relatively recent markers of the Blackfoot.
Also field work among the Crow, Assini-
boin, Gros Ventre, or other Northern Plains
Indians might determine if this custom was
familar to tribes other than the Blackfoot.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Ewers, Joun C. The horse in Blackfoot Indian
culture, with comparative material from other
western tribes. Bur. Amer. Ethnol. Bull. 159.
1955.
Kernor, THoomas F. Stone ‘‘medicine wheels’ in
southern Alberta and the adjacent portion of
Montana: Were they designed as grave markers?
Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 44 (5): 133-137.
1954.
Muuuoy, WriuraAM. Archaeological investigations
in the Shoshone Basin of Wyoming. Univ.
Wyoming Publ. 18 (1): 1954.
i
LARGE TERMITE COLLECTION GOES TO SMITHSONIAN
A collection of 230,000 specimens of termites,
including 1,286 distinct species of the approx-
imately 2,000 known in the world, has been pre-
sented to the Smithsonian Institution by the
U. 8. Department of Agriculture Forest Insect
Research.
Probably the second most valuable of its kind
in the world, this collection represents the work
of more than 46 years during which Dr. Thomas
E. Snyder, retired Department of Agriculture
entomologist, collected termites in the
Western Hemisphere and has also obtained many
Old World species by exchange and gift. In-
cluded in the collection are 948 type specimens.
When Dr. Snyder started his collection in 1915
there were only 12 identified species of termites
in the Smithsonian collections.
Termites are found over most of the world
except the Arctic and Antarctic, Dr. Snyder
explains, and probably many kinds still remain
unknown. Only those that do damage to human
structures have been intensively studied, and
extermination of these is now a multimillion-
dollar busmess in the United States. There is
always the danger, he says, that some foreign
has
species may invade the country at any time,
and therefore means of immediate identification,
such as is provided by the Smithsonian collection,
may prove invaluable.
Although termites are customarily referred to
as ‘“‘white ants,’’ Dr. Snyder says, there is little,
if any, relationship between ants and termites.
These two kinds of insects have developed only
roughly similar body forms and ways of life by
quite independent routes. Termites, he explains,
are more nearly related to the roaches, which were
among the earliest forms to appear on earth ap-
proximately 250,000,000 years ago. The termites,
as indicated in fossil deposits, made their first
appearance not much more than 50,000,000
years ago and represent a long road from the
primitive roaches. They have Neen termed “social
cockroaches.” The first ants did not make their
appearance until about 30,000,000 years ago.
They took on the environment and habits of the
termites and, being more advanced organisms,
soon drove the older creatures to a wholly sub-
terranean habitat. The ant is much _ better
equipped as a predatory animal.
JUNE 1956
LLANO: NEW UMBILICARIACEAE
183
BOTANY =WNew Umobilicariaceae from the Western Hemisphere, with a key to gen-
era. GEORGE A. LLANO, Research Studies Institute, Air University, Maxwell
Air Force Base, Ala.
The taxonomic portion of this paper is
the second concerning the Arctic lichen
flora (6) and follows the systematic classifi-
cation first proposed by Scholander (8) for
the Umbilicariaceae, later revised by Llano
(5) with the addition of a new genus. Scho-
lander’s system, based primarily upon the
structure of the apothecia, allows a natural
phylogenetic arrangement of species into
four well defined genera. A secondary dis-
tinction, the presence or absence of a pustu-
late thallus, serves to distinguish Lasallia
from Agyrophora, as indicated in the follow-
ing key:
Apothecial disk plane, the whole surface smooth
and with a continuous proper margin.
Mhallusspustulate.-..-.55....-- Lasallia Mérat
Thallus not pustulate.........Agyrophora Nyl.
Apothecial disk plane or convex, surface with a
central button and/or fissures, or furrows.
Apothecial disk plane with sterile central but-
ton, or fissure, and/or secondary fissures
Omphalodiscus Schol.
Apothecial disk convex, furrowed, with or with-
out a margin.
Furrows of concentric gyri contained within
a continuous proper margin.
Umbilicaria Hoffm.
Furrows of radial gyri without any margin.
Actinogyra Schol.
1. Agyrophora scholanderii Llano, sp. nov.
Thallus parvus, 1-2 em in diam., crassus, mono-
polyphyllus, marginibus tenuibus infrequentibus
laceratis, umbonis eminente, leniter pruimosus
in rugis rotundis, supra laevis, mollis, papillis
minutissimis, leniter reticulatus-venosus, mar-
ginibus integris aut subperforatis, marginibus
bruneis obscuris vel atris, subtus niger ebeninus,
verrucosus, irregulariter rhizinis longis, rotundis
vel planis, irregulariter ramosis, attenuatis,
superficies scabra; apothecia pauca vel numerosa,
adnata, atra 0.5-1 mm in diam.,
marginibus irregularibus, persistentibus;
40-45 x 17-24 p, octospori; paraphyses simplices,
apicibus, incrassatis obscurioribus et usque
1.5-2.5 pw inflatis; sporae hyalinae, ellipsoideae,
11-14 x 5-7.7 wp.
ALASKA: lat. 69° N., long. 145° W., Shubelik
Mountains, on rocks about 1,300 m alt., near
Lake Peters, July-August 1948, P. F. Scholander.
leiodiscis,
ascl
Holotype (in author’s herbarium). Mount Me-
Kinley National Park, on a large erratic in thinly
wooded muskeg off road from McKinley Park
Station, about 700 m alt., September 1952, G. A.
Llano. WasHineton Sratr: Mason County,
summit of Mount Ellinor about 2,000 m alt.,
July 29, 1912, A. S. Foster no. 2120, ex herb.
G. K. Merrill, Farlow Herbarium. The taxon is
named in honor of Dr. Peter F. Scholander,
professor of zoophysiology, Oslo University,
Norway, who, through his studies and field col-
lections, bas contributed greatly to our under-
standing of the lichen family Umbilicariaceae.
The range of A. scholanderti suggests that. it
is, with U. angulata Tuck., a species of the western
mountains of North America. However, the
former appears to be a plant of the higher in-
terior mountains and of a more arctic distribu-
tion; while the latter is typically oceanic and
occurs on the Pacific coast from southern Cali-
fornia north to the Kenai Peninsula and west
to Adak Island. These species, which overlap in
the Olympic Mountains in Washington, are the
only two Umbilicariaceae endemic to North
America.
2. Umbilicaria aprina Nyl., in Syn. Lich. 2: 12. 1863.
var. halei Llano, var. nov.
Thallus minor magnitudine, 1.3 cm in diam.,
rhizinis minus manifestis vel absentibus.
Canapa: N.W.T., Baffin Island, head of
Clyde Fiord, on exposed gneiss boulders, August
26, 1950, M. E. Hale, Jr., no. 450. Holotype (in
author’s herbarium).
Hale’s no. 450 (3), was tentatively referred to
U. aprina Nyl. (7), an Abyssinian species later
reported from the Ruwenzori Mountains by
Frey (2). Hasselrot’s report (4) gave one Nor-
wegian and two Swedish localities, the first re-
corded occurrences of the species outside of
Africa. Comparison of the Scandinavian material
with the holotype (Nyl. no. 31742) reveals that
Hasselrot’s specimens are less densely hirsute
then the holotype. Nevertheless, the over all
morphological characteristics, especially the con-
forming shape and color of the rhizinae, sub-
stantiates Hasselrot’s decision. Hale’s specimens
are homogeneous and differ in the following de-
tails from the African and European material:
184 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No.6 ©
et
a
as
=
cd
2a
4 ~
Mae
be)
ps)
Bod
as
Divi
i€
Fies. 1-12.—1-8, Agyrophora scholanderti Llano, sp. nov., upper (1) and two lower (2, 3) sur-
faces of holotype; 4-6, A. sholanderii, upper (4) and two lower (5, 6) surfaces of Mount McKinley
sample; 7-10, Umbilicaria aprina Nyl., var. halei Llano, var. nov., upper (7) and three lower (8-10)
surfaces of holotype; 11, 12, Ophalodiscus decussatus (Vill.) Schol. var. tortuwosus Llano, var. nov.,
upper (11) and lower (12) surfaces of holotype. (Photo by R. K. Stockard).
JUNE 1956
They are dimunitive, spherical, and slate to gray
black; one-third to three-fourths of the inner
lower surface is covered by a circular, sooty,
rarely mottled patch terminating in black flecks,
and contrast sharply with the fuscous, pruina-
tinged outer lower rim. Rhizinae are sparse to
absent, and are confined to the fuscous zone.
Otherwise, they are typical. Strap-shaped, bi-
fureate rhizinae extend outward, mainly from
the thallus periphery, as tongue-like extensions.
Lacking more definitive or fertile material, the
original determination for Hale’s no. 450 is main-
tained. However, the singular features cited
justify a variety designation. The name honors
the collector, Dr. Mason Hale, Jr., for the first
record of U. aprina Nyl., from the Arctic and
New World.
3. Omphalodiscus decussatus (Vill.) Schol.,in Nyt
Mag. Naturvid. 75: 23. 1934. var. tortuosus
Llano, var. nov.
Thallus 2-5 cm in diam., irregularis, rigidus,
mono-polyphyllus, densus, umbo obscurus, crasse
verrucosus, superficies superior subverrucosa vel
laevis, rugi absentes vel molles, marginibus
laciniatis; subtus laevis, ater, raro bruneus, raro
lacunis. Apothecia non visa.
Antarctica: MacRobertson Land, A.N.A.R.E.
Base Mawson (lat. 67° 36’ 21” 8., long. 62° 52’
48” E.). “Uncommon and occurring as a large
patch coverig an area 100 x 200 yards on a
northwest facing slope.” Leg. R. O. Summers,
January 1955.
Through the courtesy of the director of the
Antarctic Division, Department of External
Affairs, Melbourne, Australia, exsiccatae ma-
terial was obtained of four Antarctic Umbili-
cariaceae. The collections made by two members
LLANO: NEW UMBILICARIACEAE
185
of the 1954-1955 A.N.A.R. Expedition, David
P. Sweetensen and Dr. R. O. Summers, included
the following species: Omphalodiscus spongiosus
(Dodge & Baker) Llano, O. decussatus (Vill.)
Schol., and O. decussatus (Vill.) Schol. var. cerebri-
formis (Dodge & Baker) (1) Llano, and a homo-
geneous number of O. decussatus var. tortuosus
Llano.
The writer gratefully acknowledges the as-
sistance of Mrs. Kenneth R. Whiting with the
Latin diagnosis; and of Dr. EK. H. Walker, of the
Smithsonian Institution, whose valuable criti-
cisms in the preparation of this paper are much
appreciated. M/Set. J. L. Pearce, NCOIC, and
M/Set. R. K. Stockard, special photographer,
Maxwell Air Force Base, Alabama, provided
the illustrations.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
(1) Dover, C. W., and Baker, G. E. Lichens and
lichen parasites. In, ‘‘The Second Byrd
Antarctic Expedition—Botany.”’ Ann. Mis-
souri Bot. Garden 25 (2): 515-718, 1938.
(2) Frey, E., and Moryxka, J. Les lichens des
hautes altitudes au Ruwenzori. Mém. Inst.
Royal Colonial Belge 5: 19-20. 1936.
(8) Hate, M. E., Jr. Lichens from Baffin Island.
Amer. Midl. Nat. 51 (1): 232-264. 1954.
(4) Hassetrot, T. E. Lavar frdné Hlsingland
och Harjedalen, samlade av M. Ostman. Arkiv
Bot. 30 (4): 1-80, 1943.
(5) Luano, G. A. A monograph of the lichen
family Umbilicariaceae in the Western
Hemisphere. Navexos P-831, 281 pp. 1950.
A contribution to the lichen flora of
Alaska. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 41
(6) : 196-200. 1951.
(7) NyLANDER, Wm. Synopsis lichenum 2: 12.
1863.
(8) ScHotanpER, P. F. On the apothecia in the
lichen family Umbilicariaceae. Nyt. Mag.
Naturvid. 75: 1-31. 1934.
(6)
I often say that cf you can measure that of which you speak, and can express
it by a number, you know something of your subject; but zf you cannot measure
at, your knowledge ts meagre and unsatisfactory. —LoRD KELVIN.
186
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, NO. 6
ENTOMOLOGY .—Redescriptions of four species of neotropical Culicoides of the
debilipalpis group (Diptera: Heleidae). WituIs W. Wrrrn! and FRANKLIN S.
Bianton.2 (Communicated by Alan Stone.)
In the course of our taxonomic study of
the Panama Culicoides of the very difficult
debilipalpis group, we have restudied type
material of several non-Panamanian species
for purposes of comparison. We feel that
the study of certain characters which were
not utilized when these species were de-
seribed a number of years ago is essential
for recognition of species in this group.
We therefore take this opportunity to
offer redescriptions and figures of four of
these species.
We are deeply grateful to Paul Freeman
and the trustees of the British Museum
(Natural History) for the opportunity to
study type material (see discussion under
germanus) of dasyophrus Macfie and germa-
nus Macfie from British Guiana. To Irving
Fox of the University of Puerto Rico we
are equally appreciative of his kindness
in lending us the holotypes of trilineatus
Fox and hoffmani Fox from the West Indies.
There are several terms the exact defi-
nitions of which are essential to the de-
seriptions. Wing length is measured from
the basal arculus to the wing tip; we use the
Tillyard modification of the Comstock-
Needham terminology of wing veins, thus
the two discal forks emit the branches M,
and M, on the anterior fork and Ms,4
and Cu; on the posterior fork. The antennal
ratio is the value obtained by dividing the
combined lengths of the last five segments
by the combined lengths of the preceding
eight. The measurement of the length of
the spermatheca includes the sclerotized
portion of the duct. Our measurements are
of single specimens unless followed by values
in parentheses in which case the values are
“mean (minimum-maximum, n = number
of measurements).’
1 Entomologist, Entomology Research Branch,
Agricultural Research Service, U. 8. Department
of Agriculture, Washington, D. C.
2 Lieutenant Colonel, MSC, Department of
Entomology, Walter Reed Army Institute of Re-
search, Washington, D. C.
Culicoides dasyophrus Macfie
Fig. 1
Culicoides dasyophrus Macfie, 1940, Ent. Monthly
Mag. 76: 27 (male, female; British Guiana);
Ortiz, 1952, Acta Cient. Venezolana 8: 126
(Amazonas Terr., Venezuela; female rede-
scribed; fig. antenna, spermatheca).
Characters of female——Length of wing 0.74
(0.69—-0.76, n = 4) mm.
Head: Eyes narrowly separated above, with
long interfacetal hairs. Antenna with flagellar
segments in proportion of 15:10:10:10:10:10:
10:10:15:18:19:20:33, antennal ratio 1.23; dis-
tal sensory tufts present on segments IIT, VII-X.
Palpal segments in proportion of 5:14:14:6:7,
third segment swollen, 1.65 times as long as
greatest breadth, with a broad, shallow, sensory
pit. Mandible with 14 teeth.
Thorax: Mesonotum dark brown with a pair
of large, elongated submedian yellowish spots
and a pair of obscure, dark-brown vittae laterad
of these; scutellum brown in middle, paler on
sides. Legs dark brown, fore and mid femur with
subapical, all tibiae with subbasal and hind tibia
with apical, narrow pale rings; hind tibial comb
with 4 spines, the one next to the spur longest.
Wing: Pattern as figured, pale spots rather
small and not very distinct; poststigmatic pale
spots in cell R; more or less fused, the posterior
one located slightly proximad of the anterior
one; distal pale spot in cell R; small, only one
small pale spot in distal part of anal cell and one
pale spot in distal part of cell M»; indistinct pale
spot in front of mediocubital fork; macrotrichia
sparse on distal third of wing; costa extending
to 0.61 of distance to wing tip. Halter whitish.
Abdomen: Dark brown, cerci yellowish;
spermatheca one, pyriform, measuring 0.044 by
0.033 mm, the duct narrow and sclerotized for a
considerable distance.
Male genitalia.— Ninth sternum without caudo-
median excavation, the posterior membrane not
spiculate; ninth tergum long and tapering, the
apicolateral processes short and blunt. Basistyle
with ventral root foot-shaped, the caudal heel
not long, dorsal root longer and slender; dististyle
JUNE 1956 WIRTH AND BLANTON: NEOTROPICAL CULICOIDES 187
Mkt hii,
EMeiegage
|. DASYOPHRUS
"Np
~~
KH > a
Hinton
Meunns
4. HOFFMANI
Fies. 1-4.—1, Culicoides dasyophrus (paratype from New River, British Guiana); 2, Culicoides ger-
manus (presumed tvpe, New River, British Guiana); 3, Culicoides trilineatus (from St. Croix, Virgin
Islands) ; 4, Culicoides hoffmant (Puerto Rico; from Carolina, @ from Guyanilla). (a, female wing;
b, female palpus; c, apex of hind tibia show ing spur and comb of tibial spines, female; d, female sperma-
thecae; e, male penitalins parameres omitted; f, male parameres; g, thoracic color pattern, female.
Drawings by Thomas M. Evans.)
188
nearly straight, with slender apex. Aedeagus
very short and broad, basal arch more than half
as high as total length of aedeagus, the trans-
verse anteromesal sclerotized membrane rounded,
apex with a short blunt inner sclerotized point
enclosed by a short, bluntly conical, hyaline
lobe. Parameres each with knobbed base, slender,
sinuate stem without apparent ventral lobe and
slender, tapering tip with 4 or 5 subapical,
lateral barbs.
Distribution.—British Guiana, Venezuela.
Specimens examined.—As follows:
British Guiana: New River, 750 feet, March
20, 1938, C. A. Hudson, 1 male, 7 females (para-
types of dasyophrus).
VENEZUELA: Amazonas Territory, 1951, P.
Anduze, 7 females.
Discussion.—The redescription and _ illustra-
tion of the paratypes from British Guiana are
made possible by the generous cooperation of
Paul Freeman and the trustees of the British
Museum (Natural History), who kindly lent us
the material for study. We are also indebted to
I. Ortiz for the gift of Venezuela specimens from
the same collection upon which he reported in
1952. We are thus able to confirm Ortiz’s deter-
mination of this species by direct comparison
with type material. Barbosa’s record (1947, An.
Soc. Biol. Pernambuco 7: 14) and figure of the
male genitalia of dasyophrus from Panama, how-
ever, are erroneous, and specimens from Barro
Colorado Island in the U. 8. National Museum
labeled dasyophrus by Barbosa are actually
castillae Fox.
The long distal five antennal segments, the
presence of sensoria on segments IIT, VII-X, the
short, broad, third palpal segment, the prominent
mesonotal pattern, the obscure wing pattern
with only one distal spot each in anal cell and
cell Ms, and the pale apex of the hind tibia will
serve to characterize dasyophrus.
Culicoides germanus Macfie
Fig. 2
Culicoides germanus Macfie, 1940, Ent. Monthly
Mag. 76: 27 (female; British Guiana).
Characters of female-—Length of wing 0.79 mm.
The head was not dissected from the body and
can be seen only in side view. Eye apparently
hairy above, bare on lower portion. Antenna
with flagellar segments in proportion of 18:15;
15:19:19:19:19:19:19:19:20:19:41, antennal
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 6
ratio 0.80, distal sensory tufts present on seg-
ments III, VII-X. Palpal segments in proportion
of 6:18:20:6:7, third segment distinctly swollen,
about twice as long as greatest breadth, with a
broad, shallow sensory pit. Mandible in wrong
position to count teeth. Mesonotum dark brown,
without apparent pattern (but may be due to
being a slide mount); scutellum, postscutellum,
and pleuron uniformly dark brown. Legs dark
brown, femora entirely dark, tibiae with sub-
basal pale rings, hind tibia with apex broadly
pale, comb with four spines, the second from the
spur longest.
Wing with pattern as figured, second radial
cell rather long and narrow, costa extending to
0.60 of distance to wing tip. The three pale
spots in cell R; arranged in a triangle, the two
poststigmatic pale spots in cell R; small and well
separated, the posterior one located far proximad
of the anterior one, distal spot in cell R; rounded
except on distal side. Two pale spots in cell M,,
only one pale spot each in apices of anal cell and
cell Ms, no pale spot present anterior to medio-
cubital fork but an indistinct pale spot present
behind base of medial fork. Macrotrichia sparse,
in rows, in apices of cells, Rs, Mi, and Mb,
Halter pressed against thorax, not visible in
profile, its color undetermined.
Abdomen dark brown, cerci pale; spermathecae
two, slightly unequal, collapsed and impossible
to measure, apparently pyriform, with the ducts
sclerotized a considerable distance.
Specimens examined.—Macfie (1940, Ent.
Monthly Mag. 76: 27-28) described this species
and debilipalpis var. glabrior each from a single
female from New River, British Guiana, col-
lected in February and March 1938 by C. A.
Hudson. In response to our inquiry regarding the
types of germanus and glabrior Paul Freeman of
the British Museum (Natural History) stated
that the only material of these species which he
could find in the Macfie collection in the Museum
was one slide on which were mounted two fe-
males, without locality data, but bearing only
the label in Macfie’s handwriting, “Culicoides/
debilipalpis Lz./v. glabrior / 2 (large speci-
men) /C. germanus / 2”. After careful study
we can only conclude that these specimens are
in fact the types of glabrior and germanus, and
the smaller specimen is here redescribed as the
presumed type of germanus. The larger specimen
will be redescribed elsewhere as the presumed
JUNE 1956 WIRTH AND BLANTON:
type of glabrior. To our knowledge germanus
is still known only from the type specimen.
Discussion.—Culicoides germanus is very
closely related to debilipalpis Lutz and hoffmani
Fox but can be distinguished by the very hairy
eyes, the presence of sensoria on the seventh
antennal segment, the entirely dark femora, and
the greater separation of the two proximal pale
spots in cell Rs.
The description and figures given under the
name of germanus by Wirth (1955, Proc. Ent.
Soc. Washington 57: 111) from Guatemala speci-
mens are based on misidentifications of gabaldoni
Ortiz. Culicoides insinuatus Ortiz and Leon,
1955, from Ecuador is very similar to germanus,
with similar wing pattern and femora without
subapical pale rings, but insinuatus differs in
having a very deep sensory pit with a small pore
on the third palpal segment.
Culicoides trilineatus Fox
Fig. 3
Culicoides trilineatus Fox, 1946, Ann. Ent. Soc.
Amer. 39: 250 (female; St. Thomas, Virgin Is-
lands; biting man; fig. mesonotum, wing); Fox,
1949, Bull. Brooklyn Ent. Soc. 44: 30 (male,
female; Puerto Rico; reared, tree hole; fig. pal-
pus, spermathecae, male aedeagus, parameres).
Characters of female—Length of wing 0.97
(0.92-1.02, n = 7) mm.
Head: Eyes broadly separated, bare. Antenna
with flagellar segments in proportion of 19:15:
15:17:17:15:15:15:17:18:19:20:33, antennal
ratio 0.86 (0.82-0.94, n = 3); distal sensory
tufts present on segments III, sometimes on V,
always on VI-X. Palpal segments in proportion
of 13:24:30:10:12, third segment slightly
swollen toward extreme tip, 2.6 (2.3-3.0, n = 7)
times as long as greatest breadth, with a shallow,
small, sensory pit. Mandible with 18 (17-18,
n = 7) teeth.
Thorax: Mesonotum grayish brown, with a
prominent dark-brown pattern consisting of three
longitudinal lines connected posteriorly by a
transverse line just in front of prescutellar de-
pression, the two lateral lines continued caudad
along sides of this depression and extending from
humeral pits to sides of scutellum; lateral margins
dark brown with mesal extensions anteriorly to
humeral pits and posteriorly along mesonotal
suture. Scutellum dark brown, ends. slightly
paler; postscutellum and pleuron dark brown.
Legs brown, fore and mid knees dark, with
NEOTROPICAL CULICOIDES
189
narrow pale rings on each side of joint, hind
tibia with pale band at base and apex; hind
tibial comb with 4 (n = 7) spines, the second
from the spur longest.
Wing: Pattern as figured, a double poststig-
matic pale spot in cell Rs, the posterior portion
extending slightly proximad of the anterior part;
distal pale spot in cell R; small, transverse;
proximal spot in cell M; very small, one small
pale spot in apex of anal cell, no pale spot in
front of mediocubital fork but a pale line con-
necting pale spot behind medial fork to a dis-
tinct subapical, second spot in distal portion of
cell Mo. Macrotrichia very long and abundant,
extending to base of wing in anal and medial
cells; costa extending to 0.57 of distance to wing
tip. Halter brownish, the flat end paler.
Abdomen: Dark brown; spermathecae two,
pyriform, subequal, measuring 0.056 by
0.039 mm, the bases of the ducts sclerotized a
short distance.
Distribution —St. Thomas (type
Puerto Rico, Barbados, St. Croix.
Specimens examined.—60 females from:
Barpapos: 1, no. 861, A. J. Jennings.
VirciIn Is~taNnps: St. Croix—38, Diamond
School, September 1938; 1, Fountain, valley of
jungle and stream 1 mile from seacoast, May
1935; 15, Salt River, September 1938; 11, Tagus
Pond, May 1936; all collected by H. A. Beatty.
St. Thomas—Red Hook, September 11, 1987,
biting in the afternoon (holotype of trilineatus
lent from Univ. Puerto Rico collection through
the courtesy of Irving Fox).
Discussion.—This species is obviously closely
related to debilipalpis Lutz but can be readily
separated by its prominent mesonotal pattern,
its hairier wings, with reduced pale spot at base
of cell My, no pale spot before mediocubital
fork, the third palpal segment shaped differently,
and the greater number of proximal antennal
segments with sensoria.
locality) ;
Culicoides hoffmani Fox
Fig. 4
Culicoides hoffmani Fox, 1946, Ann. nt. Soe.
Amer. 39: 251 (female; Cumuto Village, Trini-
dad; biting; fig. mesonotum, wing); Fox, 1949,
Bull. Brooklyn Ent. Soc. 44: 29 (male, female;
Puerto Rico; reared, tree hole; fig. palpus,
spermathecae, male aedeagus, parameres).
Characters of female——Length of wing 0.76
(0.73-0.86, n = 9) mm.
190
Head: Eyes separated, the line of separation
broad above but narrowed below, eye with short
interfacetal hairs. Antenna with flagellar seg-
ments in proportion of 14:11:13:15:15:14:14:
15:14:14:15:15:25, antennal ratio 0.79 (0.75-
0.84, n = 3); distal sensory tufts present on seg-
ments III, VIII-X. Palpal segments in propor-
tion of 6:11:19:6:7, third segment very short
and swollen, 1.6 (1.5-1.7,n = 9) times as long
as greatest breadth, with a moderately large and
deep sensory pit. Mandible with 14 (13-15, n = 5)
teeth.
Thorax: Mesonotum pruinose brown with
pattern as figured, consisting essentially of a
sublateral pair of darker brown patches, widest
at midlength; scutellum, postscutellum and
pleuron dark brown. Legs dark brown; fore and
mid femora with subapical, all tibiae with sub-
basal and hind tibia with apical, narrow pale
rings; hind tibial comb with 4 (n= 9) spines,
the one nearest the spur longest.
Wing: Pattern as figured; two slightly sepa-
rated, poststigmatic pale spots in cell R;, the
posterior one lying only slightly proximad of
the anterior one; distal pale spot in cell R;
moderately large, rounded; two pale spots in
cell M,; one pale spot each in apices of cells
M., M, and anal cell, the one in anal cell failing
by its own diameter to meet wing margin; a pale
spot lying in front of mediocubital fork and
another pale spot lying behind medial fork;
macrotrichia sparse on distal third of wing, none
in anal cell, cell M, or base of cell M.; costa
extending to 0.59 (0.57 — 0.62, n = 9) of dis-
tance to wing tip. Second radial cell well de-
veloped. Halter brown, the flat end of knob
whitish.
Abdomen: blackish, cerei pale; spermathecae
two, pyriform, slightly unequal, measuring 0.048
by 0.034 and 0.043 by 0.031 mm.
Male genitalia—Ninth sternum with very
broad and shallow caudomedian excavation, the
posterior membrane bare; ninth tergum long
with large, triangular, apicolateral processes.
Basistyle with ventral root large and foot-shaped,
dorsal root slender; dististyle slender and nearly
straight with hooked apex. Aedeagus with basal
arch rounded caudad, extending to slightly more
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 46, No. 6
than half of total length, basal arms slender and
curved; distal apex broadly expanded with three
pointed lobes of subequal lengths. Parameres
each with knobbed base, stem abruptly bent
near base, very slender, mid-portion sinuate, no
trace of ventral lobe, apex pointed with lateral
fringe of fine hairs.
Distribution.—Trinidad, Puerto Rico.
Specimens examined.—As follows:
Trinipap: Cumuto Village, June 11, 1941,
biting, 1 female (holotype from University of
Puerto Rico collection). Cumaca, June 16, 1954,
Aitken and Downs, biting man, 2 females.
Macqueripe, October 20, 1955, T. Aitken, light
trap, 1 female. Melajo Forest, Sangre Grande,
October 19, 1955, T. Aitken, biting man, 1 fe-
male. Port of Spain, June 1953, U. 8S. Army,
25 Med. Det.; light trap, 2 males, 3 females.
St. Pats, Arima, December 31, 1954. W. G.
Downs, | female; December 10, 1954, T. Aitken,
4 females.
Purrto Rico: Carolina, September 20, 1949,
I. Fox, reared from tree hole, 3 males. Guyanilla,
March 1949, I. Fox, reared from tree hole,
2 females. Mamayes, November 5, 1948, I. Fox,
treehole, 1 male, 1 female.
VirGin Isnuanps: St. Croix,
H. A. Beatty, 6 females.
Discussion.—Culicoides debilipalpis Lutz,
which is also common in Trinidad and the An-
tilles, can be distinguished by its slightly larger
size (wing 0.80 mm long), longer, more slender
palpus, the third segment 2.2 times as long as
broad, with a small, deep pit, the second segment
subequal in length to the third; wing hairier,
macrotrichia extending in two lines to base of
cell M, and numerous in anal cell, and the two
post-stigmatic spots in cell R; more closely
approximated and the posterior one located more
distinctly proximad of the anterior one.
Culicoides equatoriensis Barbosa from Kcuador
resembles hoffmani in wing markings, in restric-
tion of the macrotrichia to the distal half of the
wing, and in the possession of a broad shallow
palpal pit but, according to the original descrip-
tion, differs in having the third palpal segment
slightly longer, the eyes bare and contiguous, and
subapical pale rings on all three pairs of femora.
August 1935,
JUNE 1956 PROCEEDINGS:
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
191
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
1403p MEETING, JANUARY 14, 1955
The retiring president’s address on Solar
influences on cosmic-ray variation was delivered
by Scorr E. Forsusu.
For almost 22 years, or two full sunspot cycles,
the Carnegie Institution has carried on a program
of continuous measurement and recording of
total cosmic-ray ionization on a world-wide basis
and the accumulated results of this program and
their extensive statistical analysis was presented.
The instruments used are ponderously shielded
but delicate and highly sensitive, high-pressure
ionization chambers, of 20 liters volume and
filled with argon at 50 atmospheres. The measur-
ing device is a Lindemann electrometer, photo-
graphically recorded, and so connected that most
of the ionization current is balanced out against
the current produced in a subsidiary chamber by
a constant uranium source. These instruments
have been installed in, among other places,
Cheltenham, Md.; Godhavn, Greenland; Teo-
loyucan, Mexico; Christ Church, New Zealand;
and Huancayo, Peru. This wide geographic
distribution serves to cover as many geomagnetic
latitudes as possible. An extensive series of slides
illustrating the changes in ionization current and
its correlation geographically and with solar
phenomena was presented.
There seem to be at least four types of varia-
tion detected in the ionization currents: (1)
Sudden, rare, but quite large, increases, associ-
ated probably with low energy heavy particles
from the sun; (2) world-wide decreases associated
with magnetic storms; (3) a quasiperiodic varia-
tion of 27-day period—the period of rotation of
the sun—that lasts only for a few periods and
disappears, like the sun-spots themselves; and
(4) an 11-year variation correlated with the sun-
spot numbers. The four variations are all clearly
associated with solar phenomena, and the con-
clusion reached is that the sun is responsible,
directly or indirectly, for them all.
Custer H. Pacn, National Bureau of Stand-
ards, contributed an informal communication on
a widely known puzzle: the so-called “Odd Ball
Problem.” “Given 13 coins, or other objects,
either identical or with just one of them either
light or heavy, how decide with only three weigh-
ings on a balance, which one, if any, is bad and
in which sense?”
It will be noted that each weighing provides
one of three possible answers: Pan A heavy,
balanced, Pan A light. What is needed is a weigh-
ing schedule showing which coins go in which
pans at each weighing. To get it, assign the num-
ber 1 to “Pan A heavy,” 0 to a “balance,” and
—1 to “Pan A light.”” We also assign each coin a
number, including zero: the zeroth coin is 000,
the first coin is 001, etc. on the base of enumera-
tion 3, with the added proviso that we use the
digits 1, 0 and —1. Thus the second coin is (3-1),
or numerically 011, the third 010, the fifth 111,
etc. These numbers are now to be written in a
column, omitting zero and 13, and the column of
first digits is the required weighing schedule,
with 1 meaning the coin goes in Pan A, | in pan
B, 0 in neither. To get four coins in each pan,
however, evidently the signs of four coins have
to be changed, in such fashion that each column
shall contain as many plus 1’s as minus 1’s. This
change can be made in any of seven ways, and
when carried out, the three columns of digits give
the three weighing schedules. The result of each
then gives a number, and the three weighings
together give the three digit number of the coin
that is heavy, or if it comes out negative, light.
If all weighings balance, 000, all coins are good.
To weigh 13 coins the fulerum of the balance
must be shifted so that the arms are in the ratio
5:4, and the thirteenth coin put always in the
short arm with four others. The same schedule
applies as before, and the behaviour of the bal-
ance gives the answer, in the same numerical
code. (Secretary’s abstract.)
1404TH MEBTING, JANUARY 28, 1955
Mark Kac of Cornell University, spoke on
The emergence of statistical thought.
There have been two approaches to statistical
methods in the past: as a necessary evil on the
one hand and as a logical and scientific necessity
on the other. The discovery of the Mendelian laws
represent one of the rare successes of the first
approach; in the other branches of the exact
sciences a hypothesized model acts as a guide to
the data to be taken.
A series of horrible examples will show the
dangers of applying statistical methods without
192
due care. Consider the mania for “objective
tests.”” Suppose a man answers 60 out of 100
yes-or-no questions correctly. Is the result mean-
ingfule A monkey and a coin have a 34-percent
chance of doing as well. Consider the apparent
cycles in the population of rabbits, or lemmings
or other animals. A plot shows that the average
time between peaks of population is 315 years,
with a 20-percent reliability. But a plot of ac-
knowledgedly random numbers also shows a
figure of 3.1 years with a 20-percent reliability.
(One trouble here is admittedly psychological and
semantic: the work random connotes to the
statistically untrained a phenomenon of no ob-
servable regularity.) The work of Udne Yule
showed that the use of a moving average on the
“business cycle” curve introduces spurious peri-
odic behavior, just as a band pass filter does to a
noise spectrum.
Intuition is not a safe guide. For example, in
the heads-or-tails game, if one throw is made
every second, and the game is played for a year,
it is not “incredible” that one player was behind
all but 1314 hours, but merely a 5 percent chance.
The chance of being behind all but 32 minutes is
one percent. Again, a false estimate of the effects
of a particular procedure may be disastrous, as
is the ‘‘optional stopping” used in the ESP
experiments at Duke. Dropping out “those who
cease to do well’? may change the probabilities,
not by a few percent, but by a factor of four or
five.
The logical difficulties inherent in Quantum
Mechanics were, and are, of no mean order. For
a most uncomfortably long time logic showed
that the theory was untenable, but its agreement
with experiment was unshakable. The Ehrenfest
model of 2R balls in two boxes, properly handled,
resolves the Poincare paradox and others, by
showing that although the probability of recur-
rence of the initial configuration after an infinite
time is unity, the probable time taken to achieve
this recurrence is in fact so nearly infinite that
the recurrence is practically impossible. Mathe-
matically, if P(s) is the probability that after s
steps we return to the initial configuration with
all the balls in one box, then )>¥ P(s) = 1,
but SE sP(s) = 28,
Finally, can the statistical approach be of use
in pure mathematics? A consideration of the
Descartes “Rule of Signs” for determining the
number of positive roots of an equation of nth
degree shows that it can. Statistically the number
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, NO. 6
of positive roots should be about (1/7) log n.,
a smaller quantity in general than the number of
sign changes. Multiplying the entire polynomial
by (1+t+0+--- +t") reduces the sign
changes tox/n which is much nearer the expected
value. ‘We ask a little less, we get a little more.”
“To use statistics best, immerse the problem
at hand in an ensemble of statistical data and
deal with it rigorously.’ Three great discoveries
of basic importance to science are Logic by the
Greeks, the Experimental Method by Post-
Renaissance Western Europe, and Statistical
Thought by the Twentiety Century. (Secretary’s
abstract.)
1405TH MEETING, FEBRUARY 11, 1955
The 1405th meeting of the Society was called
to order at 8:15 p.m., by the Recording Secretary
in the absence of all officers senior to him in
authority. It was reported by the Chairman of
the Communications Committee that the Speaker
was snowed in somewhere along Route 1.
After announcement of the next speaker, there
was a call for informal communications, and the
Society took a recess for 15 minutes to await a
larger audience.
The Society reconvened at 8:30, Mr. Tucker-
man spoke briefly on Hexaflexagons, and Mr.
Montroll gave a short talk on Cayley trees and
their applications (when generalized to include
closed figures) to governmental and other execu-
tive organizations.
Methods for the calculation of the number of
trees of a given type, for selection of the type of
tree (i.e., organizations best suited to a given
job) and for their applications were all indicated.
For example, a group doing operations analysis
should have many cross-connections, a dictator-
ship is a ‘‘classic” branching tree, a system of
checks and balances is a triangle.
Further discussion of “Tuckerman trees” by
their author, a reference to a system of shorthand
for use in organic chemistry by the Recording
Secretary, and a note on Quaternions from the
floor ended proceedings.
1406TH MEETING, FEBRUARY 25, 1955
Rosert G. BRECKENRIDGE, of the National
Bureau of Standards, spoke on Gray tin. There
are many substances that exist in two or more
allotropic forms (familiar examples are carbon,
sulfur, and phosphorus), but tin seems to be the
JUNE 1956
most puzzling and romantic of them all. All gray
tin, of which a specimen was shown, quite possi-
bly originates from one original crystallization,
a seed from which seems to be needed to initiate
the spontaneous change from the ordinary metal
that may occur at temperatures below 13.2° C.
Gray tin is the so-called alpha phase of tin, with
a cubic lattice, of the diamond type, lattice con-
stant 6.4912 A, and density of 5.763. The ordi-
nary metal, the beta phase, stable above 13.2° C,
has a density of 7.281. Gray tin is a semiconduc-
tor, a gray amorphous powder of very little
strength, and bearing no resemblance to the
white metallic phase. It is no wonder that the
term tin disease, or tin plague, has been applied
to the transformation.
The conditions for transformation are not well
understood. Temperatures below 13.2° are neces-
sary but not sufficient. After much fruitless work,
it was necessary to procure a seed crystal from
Cornell, which laboratory had obtained theirs
from the Dutch worker Ernest Cohen, who had
had some from an 1868 chance crystallization of a
shipment in St. Petersburg Harbor. The retransi-
tion back to metallic tin takes place easily above
the transition temperature, but is apparently not
complete until the metal is actually melted. Some
specimens have evidently retained their seeding
power for many decades. The low-temperature
transition is accelerated by Al and Meg ions,
among others, but is inhibited by Bi, and to some
extent by Pb. Contact with electrolytes has no
influence on the transformation at the National
Bureau of Standards, but is frequently reported
to have some elsewhere! Germanium is contradic-
torily reported sometimes as favoring the change,
sometimes as of no effect. Work using gray and
white tin as electrodes in the electrochemical cell
lead to anomalous results. Instead of the 14
millivolt at zero degrees predicted from specific
heat measurement, falling to zero linearly as the
temperatures rises to the transition point, the
EMF is approximately constant at 10 millivolts
(for divalent ions in solution) falling abruptly to
zero at the transition point. This result has thus
far remained unpublished, being not understood.
Independent measurements of the heat capacity,
however, yield a normal value.
Measurements of energy change based on a
first order reaction equation yield a AH of 180
calories in the white to gray direction, but 2,300
calories in the reverse. Particle size appears to
have an important effect here. On successively
PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
193
transforming and retransforming many times, the
gray form reduces to a micro-fine powder, on
which consistent values, less than 2,300, but
still much higher than 180 calories are obtained.
Determined effects to produce gray tin in a
form suitable for electrical measurements finally
succeeded, using a technique of depositing an
electroplated film on a suitable substrate, trans-
forming the film to the alpha modification and
then removing the substrate. Another technique,
transforming thin single crystals was also success-
ful. Measurements of the Hall effect and of
conductivity with these specimens show an ab-
normally high mobility: about 28,000 while the
best Ge is only 3,000-4,000. The material shows
photoconductivity well into the infra red. The
Hall coefficient is a function of the magnetic field,
unlike Ge and other well-behaved materials, and
the T3/2 power law does not hold. Other workers
have found it to be obeyed. This difficult material
is indeed a semi-conductor, but all its properties
are very unusual and le in a range where they
are most difficult to measure and where the usual
approximations and assumptions do not hold.
(Secretary’s abstract.)
1407TH MEETING, MARCH 11, 1955
James D. Harpy, of the Naval Air Develop-
ment Center, Johnsville, Pa., spoke on Pain and
tissue damage. Concerning the phenomenon of
pain as a whole there is little agreement among
either philosophers or laity. There are moral as-
pects, psychological aspects, physical aspects and
sociological aspects. In order to isolate an objec-
tive element of the problem, the studies presented
were strictly limited to the sensation or the
“experience” of pain. Some authorities state that
even this cannot be done and that meaningful
results can be obtained only by treating pain
“holistically.”
The technique employs a projection light as a
source of heat, with a shutter to regulate the time
of exposure, shining onto the blackened skin of
the subject. The intensity of the light is increased
during three second exposures until the threshold
of pain is reached: this threshold being judged
by the subject. It turns out that this technique
is quite a satisfactory one: all subjects of all ages
and both sexes responding to the same threshold
with only a 4 percent standard deviation. “Every-
body is equally sensitive to pain’ is the conclu-
sion for this limited type of stimulus. Even though
limited, it is a conclusion quite contrary to the
194
usual doctor’s belief. However, the ordinary
physician is not measuring a pain threshold, but
observing a human being as a whole in a far more
complex situation
“Are two pains worse than one?” Plotting log
of the exposed area against intensity of stimulus
it is found that the threshold of feeling falls as the
area increases, but the threshold of pain does not.
Pain does not exhibit “area summation.’”’ That
is a unique phenomenon in sensory psychology.
The threshold can be raised by 10 to 50% by
reading, hypnosis, distractions like loud bell-
ringing, but nothing lowers it.
Extensive data show that pain occurs when
the skin temperature reaches 45° C through a
wide range of initial conditions. The input re-
quired to produce pain is greater when the skin
is cold initially, but the criterion for pain remains
45°. Other materials beside the cooperative hu-
man subject were employed as well, among them
a paraplegic case, bats’ tails, guinea pigs’ skin,
and non-English-speaking Eskimos. The data were
satisfactorily consistent.
There are three different sensations here: cold,
warmth, and pain, but only one set of nerve end-
ings. This is a morphological puzzle for which
there seems to be no current explanation.
Data taken by Henriquez and Morris were
quoted to show that tissue damage was dependent
upon the product of time and temperature. In
contrast, Dr. Hary’s results show that pain is
an indication of the rate of damage. It is well
known there is no one-to-one relation between
pain and integrated tissue damage, as is shown
by severely wounded cases during the last war.
The scale of pain, measured in ‘‘dols’’ was
explained. There seem to be subjectively 22
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, NO. 6
perceptible steps from initiation to saturation of
the sensation. Two parts are called a dol, and
there are thus 11 dols in the scale. The dols go up
with the skin temperature.
When there has been previous tissue damage,
even though fairly mild, as in a case of sunburn,
the threshold for pain may be lowered quite
markedly, even down to 35°. In the normal skin
the rate of tissue repair can keep pace with the
damage up to 45°, but if there is previous un-
repaired damage, as in the sunburn, then the
repair mechanisms are overloaded and _ pain
results. 45° is the temperature at which human
proteins are inactivated. Some animals, e.g.,
birds, have higher body temperatures, and it
would be interesting to determine if their thresh-
old is higher too.
A wide-ranging discussion elicited some further
points of interest. For example, cold blooded
animals suffer irreversible changes at 35° or less,
it takes approximately 100,000 calories per mol
to inactivate a protein, a sustained pain of
neurologic origin is not shut off by cutting the
nerves to the part in which the pain is felt.
Laboratory pain is different from pain in the
sickroom and caution should be used in applying
the results of this study, but in general pain and
rate of tissue damage are strongly correlated.
(Secretary’s abstract.)
1408TH MEETING, MARCH 25, 1955
This meeting of the Society was the occasion
of the twenty-fourth Joseph Henry Lecture on
Tritium vn nature, by Wittarp F. Lipsy, of
the U.S. Atomic Energy Commission. The lec-
ture has been published in this Journau 45:
301-314. 1955.
SU aeEEEEREEETee cae
NOTES AND NEWS
THE SCIENCE TEACHER
PROJECT
On March 15 and 16, 1956, the Joint Board
for Science Education of the Washington Acad-
emy of Sciences and the D. C. Council of Engi-
neering and Architectural Societies sponsored an
unusual teacher replacement program in the
junior and senior high schools in the Greater
Washington area to free teachers to attend meet-
ings of the National Science Teachers Association
in Washington and to visit local laboratories.
On these days scientists and engineers took over
REPLACEMENT
classes in the schools so that students, scientists,
and teachers would learn something of one
another’s interests and problems. In all, 100
schools and 320 teachers from the District of
Columbia, Prince Georges and Montgomery
Counties in Maryland, and Arlington and Fairfax
Counties and Alexandria and Falls Church in
Virginia took an active part; and 1,350 scientists
volunteered to serve as substitute teachers and
many more expressed a willingness to serve if
needed.
The plans for this program were initiated by
JUNE 1956
the Joint Board early in October, when the
superintendents of various schools in this area
were contacted to establish their willingness to
participate in such a program. The schools co-
operated directly by supplying the names of
teachers desirmg replacements along with their
subjects and class schedules. The detailed plans
for the recruiting of scientists and engineers were
carried out primarily by a lhaison committee
composed of scientists in the Washington area.
These plans started with a meeting on December
19, at which chairmen were chosen for the various
scientific fields such as biology, chemistry,
physics, and general science. It was the task of
each of these chairmen to choose representatives
in each of the universities, and in government
and industrial laboratories in his particular field,
who would be responsible for enlisting individual
scientists and engineers in his laboratory to serve
as teacher replacements. The directors of these
organizations and laboratories and the presidents
of various technical societies were also approached
for their cooperation in this project. Many techni-
cal societies appointed individual members who
were active in publicity and enlisting scientists
and engineers from their respective societies.
The office of the science supervisor of the
D. C. Public Schools at Woodrow Wilson High
School served as headquarters for the liaison
committee during this period. One full-time
secretary and another part-time secretary were
provided for this office by Science Service. These
secretaries did large amounts of the typing,
answered the telephones, and participated in all
phases of the work. After February 1, scientists,
school supervisors, and teachers converged on
the office of the science supervisor to help with
the assignment task. The actual assignment task
was one of primarily matching scientist cards
with teacher cards so that the indicated times at
which scientists were available fitted with the
subjects and periods of the teacher’s classes.
Insofar as possible attempts were made to place
scientists in or nearby their indicated schools of
preference. Throughout all these proceedings
the advice of the science supervisor with regard
to schools, teachers, and related subjects was
freely drawn upon.
When once the assignments were completed,
large amounts of correspondence became neces-
sary. This was handled by secretaries and teachers
in the office of the science supervisor, outside
laboratories, schools, the Joint Board, and else-
NOTES AND NEWS
195
where. Because of the large number of applica-
tions by scientists it was possible to make teach-
ing assignments to only 730. Many thank-you
letters therefore had to be written and were late
in arriving because of the large task of completing
the assignments. The liaison committee knows
that many very able scientists and engineers
were not utilized, for there was not sufficient
time to place the best qualified person in each
teaching assignment.
After all the initial assignments were made
and the associated correspondence taken care of,
the primary concern became one of supplying
replacements for scientists who later found they
could not take part. About a hundred cards of
unassigned scientists were catalogued with re-
spect to possible teaching areas, and each of
these groups of cards was placed in the hands of
the area chairmen of the Secondary Schools
Contact Committee of the Joint Board for Science
Education. These scientists had been asked pre-
viously by letter to remain in a standby status.
If for some reason a scientist or engineer could
not meet his scheduled class, the school contact
committeeman reported his particular need to
his area chairman, who supplied an immediate
replacement. Many last-minute assignments, sub-
stitutions, and changes were also made by tele-
phone in the office of the science supervisor.
From the reports received to date, the effort
contributed by the scientists and engineers in
this Special Substitute Teacher Program was
both interesting and worthwhile. One scientist,
who was forewarned of a possible discipline
problem, found quite unexpected and_ spon-
taneous interest in his lecture. Another found
that his second scheduled class of some 30 stu-
dents was, at the principal’s request, extended
to include the complete school of 600 students.
Still other scientists have taken the time to sum-
marize their experiences and impressions. One
of these indicated that it was possible to interest
only certain students, and he concluded his re-
marks with the observation that superior stu-
dents are the ones who should receive more at-
tention. Since the advent of these lectures, there
have been reports of students asking their
teachers and principals about more advanced
courses in science. ‘The suggestion has been made
by several that these lectures be repeated as an
annual project. A survey at one of the scientific
institutions indicated that all the scientists who
participated im this project would be glad to do
196
so again on the same basis. Other cities have also
expressed an interest in this project and are
making inquiries about it. Any real measure of
success must, however, await future evaluation.
It is hoped that those who participated and
others who offered their services which were not
utilized will again be generous in helping science
education when called upon in the future.
ZINC OXIDE-EUGENOL DENTAL FILLINGS
Deep dental cavities have long been treated
with a mixture of zinc oxide and eugenol. This
white, puttylike material relieves toothache and
acts against bacteria in a tooth cavity. However,
quality control of such fillmgs has been largely
a matter of experience gathered in practice over
the years. Little has been known about the actual
reaction taking place between the zinc oxide and
eugenol—whether it is, for example, a true chem-
ical reaction or a physical process like hydration.
Since scientists did not know the precise nature
of the reaction, it has been difficult to predict,
much less accurately control, such things as set-
ting time, hardness, and strength of the hardened
product.
The National Bureau of Standards’ dental
research laboratory therefore began an investiga-
tion of zine oxide and eugenol mixtures. The
study, sponsored by the armed services’ dental
corps and the American Dental Association, has
shown that a chelate compound is formed by
these materials.1 The compound produced, zine
eugenolate, absorbs any unreacted materials to
form a hardened mass of remarkable stability.
The investigations were made by Maj. H. I.
Copeland, Air Force guest worker at the Bureau,
Dr. G. M. Brauer and W. T. Sweeney of the
Bureau staff, and Dr. A. F. Forziati, research
associate, American Dental Association.
Chelate compounds are cyclic compounds
formed by a coordination process, in this case
with a zine atom. Most chelates are remarkably
stable. In the case of zine oxide and eugenol,
long, thin crystals are formed. The crystals act
as a matrix for the set mass and absorb any un-
reacted material. The reaction is thus both a
chemical and a physical process.
The Bureau made use of several modern tech-
niques in its study of zine eugenolate. Chemical
1 For further technical details, see Setting reac-
tion of zinc oxide and eugenol, by H. I. CopEnanp,
G. M. Braver, W. T. Sweeney, and A. F. For-
zratr. Journ. Res. NBS 55: 133. 1955.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 6
procedures coupled with X-ray diffraction
measurements were employed. The infrared ab-
sorption spectra of zinc eugenolate were com-
pared to those of another chelate compound,
zinc quinolate, since information with respect
to the latter’s structure was available from recent
studies elsewhere.2, For further comparison,
guaiacol and the zine oxide-guaiacol reaction
product were employed. Elementary analysis and
molecular weight determinations established the
empirical formula of zinc eugenolate as being
(Cio 1102) oZn.
With the information that a chelate com-
pound is formed by zine oxide and eugenol, it
is possible to predict other materials that will
form like compounds for dental use. The Bureau
has produced similar chelate compounds for
study using guaiacol and methyl guaiacol as
chelating agents. Such agents must have a re-
placeable hydrogen and a near-by donor group.
Mixtures of zinc oxide and liquids such as phenol
or veratrole cannot harden (form chelate com-
pounds) because they do not have the required
molecular structure.
Having described the reaction, the Bureau
plans to compile further data on various chelate
compounds and their ingredients so that the
mixtures used in dental fillings may be directly
controlled. Present studies in this area include
determinations of the required amount of surface
activity of the zine oxide employed, optimum
amount of water, mixing temperatures, and kind
and amount of fillers.
CONSTANT-TEMPERATURE OVEN FOR QUARTZ
CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR
The National Bureau of Standards has de-
veloped a simple, compact oven that stabilizes
the temperature of a quartz crystal for precise
oscillator frequency control. This oven utilizes
the heat of fusion of an extremely pure organic
compound—p-dibromobenzene—to hold the oven
temperature within 0.01° of 87.31°C. Power re-
quirements are low: 10 watts for normal opera-
tion and 20 watts during the brief warmup
period. The instrument was developed for the
Army Signal Corps by R. Alvarez and C. P.
Saylor of the Bureau’s pure substances labora-
tory.
Quartz crystals are widely used as frequency
standards, as filters in receiver circuits, and as
2Merrit, lL. Journ. Anal. Chem. 25: 718. 1953.
JUNE 1956
frequency stabilizing elements in oscillator cir-
cuits. Since a temperature change in a crystal
will produce a change in its frequency, common
practice has been to control the temperature
of the crystal in precise frequency applications.
Such close temperature control is usually achieved
only by relatively large and complex systems. The
Bureau’s special-purpose oven eliminates the
need for much of the complex and bulky equip-
ment ordinarily used.
Although the Bureau’s instrument was de-
signed specifically as a quartz crystal oscillator
oven, it can be applied wherever a simple, com-
pact thermostat for close temperature control
is required. It can, for example, provide a con-
stant temperature for a reference thermojunction
for extended temperature measurement and
control. The oven uses p-dibromobenzene in its
particular application, but other substances
with different melting points provide other oper-
ating temperatures. Phenoxybenzene, for instance
has been employed in maintaining quartz crystals
at a constant temperature of 26.88°C. where the
ambient temperature is low.
When a substance is partially molten, its
latent heat of fusion provides thermal ballasting;
that is, a heat loss causes crystallization of the
material with evolution of the latent heat of
fusion. A heat gain, on the other hand, results
in absorption of heat as the solid phase melts.
The melting temperature at the solid-liquid inter-
face remains unchanged, provided that the ma-
terial is pure and that the pressure is constant.
A substance used for temperature control in this
way must possess (1) a melting temperature
within the desired operating limits, (2) extreme
chemical stability when in contact with the oven
components, (8) a high heat of fusion, and (4)
a high velocity of crystallization. p-Dibromo-
benzene meets these requirements.
The oven is contained in a cylinder 32 inches
high and 2114 inches in diameter, mounted on
an octal base. Inside the oven is a vacuum-tight
container into which a quantity of paradibromo-
benzene has been sealed. During operation of
the oven, the material is about half liquid and
half solid, and completely fills the container.
At the top of the container is a metal bellows
that is linked to a spring-loaded miniature switch.
The volume changes occurring during phase
transformations are transmitted to the bellows,
which turns a heater on or off to keep the chem-
ical partially molten. Spring-loading the switch
NOTES AND NEWS
197
provides a pressure relief system in case a greater
proportion of liquid is formed during the warmup
period than would be present at the normal
operating point. A second heater provides rapid
warmup. It is controlled by a bimetallic element
that cuts off the power when the substance is
about 7° below the melting point. A copper vane
system distributes the heat rapidly throughout
the container and reduces any temperature
gradients that might exist if solid and liquid be-
come separated during operation. The crystal
and its holder fit into a well within the container.
Temperature stability data on the instrument
were obtained by fastening a calibrated ther-
mistor to a dummy crystal inside the crystal
holder. The total temperature variation during
a six-day period of continuous operation did not
exceed 0.007°C.
NEW CHIEF OF NBS METALLURGY DIVISION
Dr. James I. Hoffman has been selected to
head the Bureau of Standard’s Metallurgy Divi-
sion. He succeeds Dr. John G. Thompson, who
recently retired.
An outstanding analytical chemist who de-
veloped one of the first methods for purifying
uranium, Dr. Hoffman had been serving as as-
sistant chief of the Bureau’s Chemistry Division
and Chief of the Surface Chemistry Section.
The Department of Commerce recently honored
his work by awarding him the Gold Medal for
Exceptional Service. In his new capacity he will
direct the Bureau’s diversified program in metal-
lurgical research and development. Author of
numerous publications in his field, he is well
known for his work on the chemistry of the rarer
elements and the chemical analysis of iron, steel,
refractories, and various minerals, such as phos-
phate rock, bauxite, and fluorspar. He has
taught analytical and physical chemistry at
George Washington University, American Uni-
versity, the Department of Agriculture, and in
graduate courses given at the National Bureau of
Standards.
In 1946 Dr. Hoffman was awarded the Hille-
brand Prize for significant contributions to chem-
ical science. His specific achievements were listed
as the determination of the atomic weights of
aluminum and gallium, the construction of a
pilot plant for the production of alumina from
clay, and the development of an ether extraction
process for the purification of uranium onide.
The purification of uranium oxide by this method
198 JOURNAL OF THE
removed the greater part of the difficulties en-
countered by the Manhattan District in securing
pure materials for the production of uranium
metal. The process perfected by Dr. Hoffman
for obtaining alumina from clay was the result
of an effort to utilize domestic sources of alumina
at a time when submarine warfare was seriously
interfering with shipments of bauxite to this
country.
ROCKEFELLER PUBLIC SERVICE
DR. FANO
AWARD TO
Dr. Ugo Fano, chief of the Nuclear Physics
Section of the National Bureau of Standards, has
been granted a Rockefeller Public Service Award,
which will allow him to complete a book on
quantum physics for nonphysicists. Dr. Fano
is internationally known for his theoretical work
in various branches of physics and in related
sciences. An authority on the penetration and
diffusion of radiation through matter, his theories
are widely used in connection with nuclear re-
actor shieldmg problems. An important part
of his work at NBS is consultation with experi-
mental scientists on the theoretical aspects of
their work.
In this work Dr. Fano has shown a unique
ability to explain the fundamental concepts of
classical and modern physics in terms and anal-
ogies that scientists working in other fields such
as biology and medicine can readily understand.
Since the number of scientists who have need
for this type of information is steadily increasing,
Dr. Fano’s book would be an important con-
tribution to the literature.
The award will also give Dr. Fano the op-
portunity to accept an invitation to spend the
1956 academic year teaching at the University
of Rome. He has been invited to lecture on sub-
jects of his own choice, working in line with the
University’s program for developing peaceful
applications of atomic energy.
Born in Torino, Italy, in 1912, he received
his D.S. degree from the University of Torino
in 1934. After his graduation he worked in Rome
under the direction of Prof. Enrico Fermi, serving
as an instructor. During this period he held also
a fellowship at the University of Leipzig, under
Prof. Werner Heisenberg. He came to the United
States in 1939, serving first as a research asso-
ciate at the Washington Biophysical Institute.
From 1940 to 1946 he worked with Dr. Millislav
Demeree in genetics and radiobiology at the
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF
SCIENCES vou. 46, No. 6
Carnegie Insitution of Washington, joining the
NBS staff in the latter year.
A RAPID QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS
OF COLLAGEN
A method for measuring the amino-acid con-
tent of collagen in a relatively short time and
using simple apparatus has been developed by
the National Bureau of Standards leather labora-
tory.! The procedure, an application of 2-dimen-
sional paper chromatography, was worked out
by James M. Cassel by modifying and adapting
a recently published qualitative method.? The
quantitative technique can be applied not only
to collagen, the parent substance of leather, but
also to the derivatives and degradation products
of collagen. In contrast to other methods cur-
rently employed, it enables the analyst to follow
with a high degree of detail the reactions and
changes in which collagen may be involved. It is
therefore expected to provide a useful tool in
understanding the structure of collagen and the
properties of leather.
Improvements in technique during the past
few decades have made chromatography one of
the more important methods available to the
analytical chemist. The partition chromato-
graphic process brings about separation of com-
ponents in a mixture by distributing the solutes
between two liquid phases, one of which is mobile
and the other essentially fixed by sorption to a
support, i.e., to a column of silica gel or to a sheet
of cellulose paper. In one form of the method, a
small quantity of unknown mixture is applied
to one end of a strip of paper and that end placed
in an appropriate irrigating solution. The solu-
tion rises by capillary action and carries the
mixture with it. Mainly because of differences in
solubility, however, the various components move
up the support medium at different rates. After
a period of time, the components are spread out
into a series of separate patches.
The use of paper as the chromatographic ad-
sorbent has broadened the range of application
of the method and, at the same time, has made
1 For further technical details see A paper
chromatographic analysis for collagen and collagen
derivatives, by James M. Casset, Journ. Amer.
Leather Chemists’ Assoc. (in press).
2 Two-dimensional paper chromatographic sys-
tem with high resolving power for amino acids, by
R. Reprieip, Biochim. et Biophys. Acta 10: 344.
1953. The first description of paper chromato-
graphic methods for the analysis of protein hy-
drolysates was given in 1944 by Consden, Gordon,
and Martin.
JUNE 1956
it accessible to even the most modestly equipped
laboratories. The use of paper also facilitates
two-dimensional chromatography. If a drop of
unknown mixture is applied to a corner of a paper
square and solution is passed through the paper
parallel to one of the edges, the unknown will
spread out into a line of patches along one edge
of the square. Often, however, the separation is
not complete, some of the patches being still
made up of several components. If now another
solvent is passed through the paper perpen-
dicularly to the line of patches, each of the latter
may be split up into several patches, the final
result being a 2-dimensional pattern of patches
on the paper.
The Bureau’s method produces separation
of all eighteen of the amino acids of collagen,
with the exception that lysine and hydroxylysine
are separated as a single entity, as are also leucine
and isoleucine. The procedure is simple and re-
quires for accurate analysis as little as 150 micro-
grams of protein per chromatogram. If certain
precautions are observed, very good repro-
ducibility of data is obtained.
The first step in the procedure is to apply, by
micropipette, a small spot of the solution to be
analyzed to the corner of a sheet of Whatman
No. 1 paper, 37 cm square. The sheet is then
stapled in the form of a cylinder and placed spot
downward in a glass cylinder, 6 inches in diameter
and 12 inches high, containing the solvent mix-
ture. A crystallizing dish is inverted and sealed
to the top of the chamber with electrical tape to
serve as a tight sealing lid.
The paper is irrigated in the first direction with
a mixture of methyl alcohol, water, and pyridine.
After this, it is removed, dried, restapled, and
then irrigated in the second direction with tertiary
butanol, water, and diethylamine. Once again
the sheet is dried, and the last traces of diethyl-
amine are removed by hanging the sheet in a
steam hood at 75°C. for approximately seven
minutes. An alcohol solution of the coloring agent
ninhydrin is sprayed on the sheet, and the color
is developed under carefully chosen conditions
of temperature and humidity.
At this point the chromatographic separation
of the amino acid components, with the excep-
tions noted, is complete, each component ap-
pearing as an irregular, colored patch on the
paper. Each of the spots is now cut out and then
cut into small strips. The strips, in turn, are
placed in test tubes and washed out with fixed
NOTES AND NEWS
199
quantities of aqueous n-propanol. Optical densi-
ties are then read with a spectrophotometer set
at 570 muy for all components except proline and
hydroxyproline, which are read at 350 mu.
Finally, the amount of each amino acid present
is determined by comparing the optical densities
with calibration curves obtained from standard
solutions run in the same manner.
Amino acid values for collagen as determined
by this technique agree well with those reported
in the literature. If four to eight chromatograms
are run per sample, quantitative information
concerning all the amino acids in either collagen,
a collagen derivative, or a collagen degradation
product can be obtained in only four or five days.
If conditions are maintained constant throughout
the procedure, standards need not be run simul-
taneously with the unknowns and hence an im-
portant saving in labor and time is achieved.
The development of a rapid quantitative
analysis for collagen is part of a larger program
of research which the Bureau is conducting on
the physical constants and structure of leather.
Basic information on leather and collagen, the
principal constituent of cattle hide, is needed
to assure continued advancement in methods
of tanning and leather manufacture. Related in-
vestigations now in progress deal with the pore
structure of the leather matrix, specific heats of
collagen and leather, and the effects of high pres-
sure. The Bureau’s method for analyzing collagen
is being applied to a study of the reaction of col-
lagen with nitrous acid. It is also planned to use
the new technique to obtain information about
the layerwise distribution of amino acids in hides
and the effect on the distribution produced by
various types of degradation processes.
BISON BASIN FOSSILS
An isolated Wyoming valley has yielded a
considerable collection of fossil remains of archaic
mammals of about 60 million years ago, animals
only remotely related to those living today. The
fossils from this locality, known as the Bison
Basin, first discovered by a Geological Survey
party four years ago, have just been described
by Dr. C. Lewis Gazin, curator of vertebrate
paleontology at the Smithsonian Institution, who
had a major part in collecting them.
The creatures lived during the Tiffanian epoch,
next to the last subdivision of Paleocene geologic
time—a period that lasted approximately 20
million years but which was just the start of the
200
“Age of Mammals.”’ The Paleocene was the time
when mammals were coming up as the dominant
animals on earth and the importance of the
dinosaurs had just passed. The warm-blooded
creatures were becoming markedly diversified,
filling many of the habitats left by the disap-
pearance of the host of reptilian forms which
previously ruled the earth.
Notable in the collection are remains of plesia-
dapids. These were small, probably tree-climbing
animals belonging to the primate order, but only
remotely related to the living New or Old World
monkeys. They were most like lemurs, and are
classified in the same superfamily, but the living
lemurs may not have been derived from the
plesiadapids but from some closely related con-
temporary.
Plesiadapids were not only North American in
distribution but are known also from the Paleo-
cene of France, from beds about the same age as
our North American Tiffanian time. The Bison
Basin beds in Wyoming produced at least four
species and two genera of these creatures, repre-
sented by teeth and jaws. Among them is one
of the most primitive known of the family, a
rather minute creature known as Pronothodectes.
In the Bison Basin beds this represents a sur-
vival of the group recognized as the precursor
of true Plesiadapis. Present also is one of the
most advanced of the plesiadapid family, not in
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 6
the same beds but stratigraphically higher than
the level which produced the most primitive.
They just happened to have died in the same
general locality, Dr. Gazin says, but at different
times.
Among other creatures represented are condy-
larths—archaic, subungulate mammals that
paleontologists now generally believe gave rise
to the modern hoofed or ungulate animals. The
condylarths themselves, however, were not truly
hoofed but had toes with structures intermediate
between claws and hoofs. They show evidence
that the claws at this stage were beginning to
spread out or flatten. Some of the condylarths
were very small; the largest of those in the Bison
Basin, however, was Phenacodus, an animal
over 4 feet long and about 2 feet high. It may have
looked rather like a carnivore, but its teeth dem-
onstrated that it was an herbivorous type. At that
time the condylarths and the creodonts, the latter
including the forerunners of the true carnivores,
were not so greatly different in structure.
The Bison Basin collection also contains fossil
remains of several kinds of creodonts, including
the miacids that later gave rise to the more
modern carnivores, and such creatures as claeno-
donts, animals that probably had somewhat the
appearance of small bears but were definitely
not ancestral to them.
A pupil began to learn geometry with Euclid and asked, when he had learnt
ce
one proposition,
What advantage shall I get by learning these things?” And
Euclid called the slave and said, “Give him sixpence, since he must needs gain
by what he learns.”’—Sir T. L. Hnatu, A History of Greek Mathematics.
Vice-Presidents of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
Philosophical Society of Washington. -...............:--+-s+eens (Mr.) Bruce L. WiLson
Anthropological Society of Washington........................ (Mr.) Frank M. SErzuer
iBiologiealisociety of Washington.......-.-...+-4...0:4e+s95 (Mr.) Herpert G. DEIGNAN
Chemical Society of Washington....................2...004 (Mr.) Bourpon F. ScriBpNER
Entomological Society of Washington.................:...eeeeeeeees (Dr.) Frep W. Poos
National Geographic Society..................... See ers (Dr.) ALEXANDER WETMORE
GeologicaliSociety, of Washington..........-.....-..2.2.-..... (Mr.) Enwin T. McKnicut
Medical Society of the District of Columbia.................... (Dr.) FREDERICK O. Cor
ColumbrapHstorical Society; . 1.2. os. ce ccc re oc ce ce eels ie cevee
ovancuesociesy, Of Washington... 4.44... -soses0se oes cae dden donee (Dr.) E. H. WALKER
Washington Section, Society of American Foresters............ (Dr.) G. Furprpo Gravatr
Washington Society of Hmgineers). ........)........-.-5-.-43: (Mr.) Herpert G. Dorsry
Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers..... (Dr.) ARNOLD Scotr
Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers......
Helminthological Society of Washington....................000ceee. (Dr.) J. S. ANDREWS
Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists............ (Dr.) L. A. BurKry
Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers... (Lt. Col.) FLtoyp W. Hover
Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers.......... HDODSUGD
D. C. Section, American Society of Civil Engineers.......... (Mr.) Dovetas E. Parsons
D. C. Section, Society of Experimental Biology and Medicine..(Dr.) Grorar A. Hortite
Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals............. (Mr.) THomas G. DiacEs
Washington Section, International Association for Dental Research...
Washington Section, Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences........ (Dr.) F. N. FRENKIEL
D. C. Branch, American Meteorological Society............. (Dr.) F. W. RetcHELDERFER
CONTENTS
Page
GENERAL ScreNceE——Man and science. RAYMOND J. SEEGER.......... 169
ErHnoLtocy.—Stone “Medicine Wheels”—memorials to Blackfoot war
chiefs. Hug A. DEMPSEY... 25 n0c0-00 4 oc cen = 3 2 6 ee Lee
Botany—New Umbilicariaceae from the Western Hemisphere, with a
key to. genera. (GrorGE AU IANO! 3: .-. 4... -.--) 140 ae 183
Entomo.tocy.—Redescriptions of four species of neotropical Culicoides of
the debilipalpis group (Diptera: Heleidae). Wittis W. WirtH and
PRANKGIN S..BEANTONG sq acc. co herent 186
ProcrEDINGS: Philosophical Society of Washington................... 191
Notesand \News:.08. i) 5.0.00 v ad) aie sees Sonee iene 182,"194
VOLUME te July 1956 NUMBER 7
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
——————S
Published Monthly by the
Pesos t NG TO NA C ACD EMMY °.0 F SiG. Be NG oBnes
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: Cuuster H. Paces, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RoNALD Bamrorp, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL EstERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JoURNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3344 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges——Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the PRocEEDINGs should be sent to Haraup A. Reaper, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C
Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per Year..........,....000000e-seeeee $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl—not available*................
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).. - $10. 00 $0.7 70
Vol. 16 to vol. 29° inel. (21 numbers per vol.) . : 8.00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 45, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $378.50.
Monoearapru No.1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
INDEX to JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS.......................00. $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete........................0000- $25.00
Single’ volumess unbound? yes pecan te cratic nein ee eee an ete eee 2.00
Single mumbers's yes shee Sayer syels gy cee aaa ie staare eee nee Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’ and
padreesed to the Treasurer, H. 8. Rappers, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925.
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 46
Juny 1956
No. 7
PHYSICS—A tomicity and patterns. Sir Grorae P. THomson, Cambridge Uni-
versity, England. (Communicated by C. H. Page.)
(Received May 3, 1956)
Joseph Henry was a man of very versatile
mind, as the wide range of his work shows.
He lived, moreover, in an age in which
science was far less compartmentalized than
it is now, and I hope that you will not think
it out of place if I speak to you to-day on a
subject which covers a wide range, a subject
on which indeed I have no new discovery to
tell you, except to try to emphasize a point
of view which is perhaps somewhat neglect-
ed. In the realm of nature there is one
characteristic which appears again and
again, but which does not seem to have been
given in general a name. I mean the existence
of large numbers of individuals of a particu-
lar kind, nearly or quite indistingiushable
from one another. This characteristic ranges
through the whole scale of the material
world, from electrons to galaxies; each exists
in countless numbers. But what makes the
effect, Im my opinion, more remarkable, is
that it is not limited to dead matter. On
the contrary, the most striking manifesta-
tions of it are in biology. The individuals of
a species, whether from bacteria or human
beings, are an obvious (but not the only)
example. The same principle pervades the
whole of biology. It is the principle of cel-
lular structure, and it also applies to many
of the organs of individual creatures. The
hairs on a dog’s back, the leaves on a beech
tree, are alike, examples of the love of pro-
duction in large numbers which pervades
nature. Henry Ford may have supposed that
he was initiating something new when he
gave us mass production in its most charac-
teristic form, but he was merely a humble
imitator of nature, and though his cars were
1 The 25th Joseph Henry Lecture of the Philo-
sophical Society of Washington, delivered before
the Society on April 20, 1956.
OL
possibly more similar than the proverbial
peas, they could not rival for a moment the
identity of atoms or molecules. Nature is
the grand mass producer; for individuality
you must turn to the works of men: to art.
It will be a convenience, I think, to intro-
duce the word atomicity in a new sense, to
mean a group of individuals which closely
resemble one another. Thus the scales of all
the herrings in the sea, or the collection of
the galaxies, may alike be described as
atomicities.
It was in physics that the name ‘‘atom”’
was first applied, or rather in the natural
philosophy of the Greeks and Romans.
Starting from an almost legendary Leucip-
pus, the idea was developed by Democrates
and Epicurus, but far the best statement of
it is by the Roman Lucretius, whose work
survived the Middle Ages in a single copy
more, I suspect, because of its poetic beauty
than for its very great scientific merit.
Lucretius was a poet; I believe he took most
of the ideas from his Greek predecessors,
but they are very remarkable ideas. Not
merely is the general statement of atoms as
constituents of matter introduced and am-
plified, but one can find traces of the most
up-to-date discoveries of physics—no doubt
this is partly a case of the reader finding
what he has himself brought, but it may
possibly be a little more. Lucretius antici-
pates Prout’s hypothesis that atomic weights
are integral multiples of a unit. He does so
from an argument which does not hold
water, but at least he makes the statement.
He has, it is true, no idea of molecules, but
he anticipates in an astonishing fashion one
of the great advances of the quantum
theory—the idea of indeterminacy. His
atoms fall through empty space; for him
SEP = 1956
202
there is an absolute vertical; he has no idea
of universal gravitation; but although his
philosophy is, on the whole, deterministic, he
introduces the ‘‘clinamen,” an arbitrary
motion designed to upset the regularity of
the downward motion, and be the cause of
the collisions which he rightly regards as the
fundamental condition for happenings. Ex-
cept for these, he says, nature would create
nothing. He realizes that the arbitrary na-
ture of these assumed motions prevents a
complete causal sequence.
“Lest cause should follow cause in endless
sequence,’ he says, and ends the passage’:
“Hence is this power torn from fate, I say,
by which we walk as will points out the
way.” It is all strangely reminiscent of
Heisenberg and the uncertainty principle!
In modern physics, of course, the ideas
have been carried further, and what are still
called ‘‘atoms”’ are no longer impossible to
divide, but are made of electrons and nu-
clei. The electrons are identical, not merely
in practice but in principle, and have no
individuality. The same is true of the par-
ticles that make up the nucleus, protons and
neutrons. It is difficult to know quite what
position to assign to the mesons—the a7 me-
sons appear to be the particles responsible
for the forces between nucleons (neutrons
or protons), but they also by spontaneous
decay pass to » mesons, and these in turn to
electrons. It is perhaps possible to regard
them as in a kind of sense excited electrons,
and some of the very heavy mesons recently
discovered are apparently excited protons
or neutrons. The meaning of these mesons
is still very obscure, but at least they exist
as a series with discrete masses and do not, I
think, differ fundamentally in respect of
atomic status from electrons or protons. It is
somewhat different with quanta. Here in-
deed you have an atomicity, but with a con-
tinuous variation in a single property, what
one may describe as a partial atomicity.
Although quanta of the same frequency are
identical, those of a different frequency are
not. Yet this difference is, in a sense, artifi-
cial, since it is modified by the Doppler
effect, while the Doppler effect does not alter
the number of quanta in a given region.
Chemistry, which is in a sense the physics
2 Lucretius, De rerum naturae. II, line 257.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 7
of the parts of atoms outside the nucleus, is
in principle understood. Chemical combina-
tions can be explained in terms of wave
mechanics, and of the properties of equations
whose nature is fundamentally determined
by the number of electrons that take part.
A single atom, apart from the nucleus, is a
pattern of electrons round the nucleus. This
business of patterns is, I think, very funda-
mental. The charge and mass of the elec-
trons, and those of the nucleus do indeed
come into the calculations, but the most
important thing is the nwmber of electrons.
The atom is essentially a pattern of integers.
It seems likely that the nucleus may be very
much the same. It is true that in these two
cases we have to consider different sub-
stances, electrons in the case of the outer
part of the atom, protons and neutrons in
the case of the nucleus. But the stress on
integers is the same in both. It reminds one
of the famous saying: ‘“‘God made the whole
numbers and men made the rest.’”” The same
thing occurs when one passes to chemistry.
A chemical compound is a special pattern of
electrons, a pattern which can in fact be
plotted out by the methods of X-ray dif-
fraction. Again patterns of integers, elec-
trons, and individual nuclei form the
molecule. Bind the molecules into a crystal,
and you get a pattern on a larger scale but
with the same integral properties. It 1s pure
speculation, I admit, but I cannot help
feeling that the constituent substances that
we still have to use—electrons, protons,
neutrons, and perhaps mesons, will in the
long run themselves turn out to be patterns—
patterns of what? It will not be necessary to
answer, for where all the substances are the
same you do not need a name. They would,
so to speak, be patterns of the first order,
nuclei and the electrons around them will
be patterns of the second order, molecules
of the third, crystals of the fourth, and so on,
and the world of inanimate nature will
become reduced to a series of patterns more
or less perfect (since atoms may be ionized
and crystals have defects, while gases and
liquids lack the highest kind of order), but
all patterns and all concerned with integers.
It is strange to recall—I do not venture to
say that it is significant—that this idea goes
back to the time of Pythagoras. He stressed
the importance of integers. His discovery of
Juty 1956
numerical relations between the lengths of a
string that produced musical intervals is
possibly the oldest recorded experiment in
pure physics, and I cannot help a feeling of
satisfaction that it should be so closely in
tune with the modern ideas of quantum
numbers and Eigenwerte. The Pythagoreans
not merely regarded numbers as in some
sense divine, but paid particular attention to
the types of patterns which can be made by
integers, e.g., triangular numbers.
Let us turn from the very small to the
very large.
Though stars resemble one another con-
siderably, and especially in mass, they are
by no means identical, and there are at least
two kinds of galaxies, with again minor
variations; but there is a kind of order-of-
magnitude agreement. A galaxy contains
an order of 10" solar masses, and different
galaxies probably do not vary by more than
one or two powers of 10. It is, I think, of
interest to consider how these and other im-
perfect atomicities, as one may call them, in
fact arise, to see if one can trace any common
factor. Unfortunately the creation of stars
and galaxies is still not fully explained. It is
generally supposed to be due to an instability
occurring in a continuous amount of gravi-
tating mass if this is large enough, as was
suggested by Jeans. But I am told that
Jeans’s original theory is unsatisfactory in
certain points and has not been fully re-
placed. But at least one can see that a dis-
tribution into discrete objects will be more
stable in certain circumstances than a uni-
form distribution, and it is reasonable to
suppose that this has something to do with
the origin of these objects. There is another
class of imperfect and partial atomicity of
which much more is known. I refer to
eddies. If a liquid is streaming in a pipe with
every particle moving along the axis at more
than a certain speed, depending upon the
size of pipe and rate of flow, turbulence sets
in, as Reynolds showed many years ago.
This turbulence consists essentially of sets of
eddies. The eddies resemble quanta rather
than electrons in that there is a continuous
distribution in size. The smallest eddies are
near the wall, and they increase in size as
they go outwards. This turbulent action is
now pretty well understood, and has been
closely studied in connection with the bound-
THOMSON: ATOMICITY AND PATTERNS 203
ary layer that forms on the wings of
aeroplanes and on the hulls of ships. In this
case the simple undifferentiated motion is
unstable and breaks down into a more com-
plicated atomicity.
If we turn to biology we find at once the
cell as an atomic unit. There are many kinds
of cells and their size may vary greatly up to
the giant nerve cells of the squid which are
about 4% mm diameter and 20 cm long.
Ordinary cells are of order 20 ». But the cells
of one kind are of roughly comparable size.
Physiology is not far enough advanced to
say for certain what determines the size of a
cell; it must be some question of balance
between surface tension, electrical forces and
diffusion. However the size is arrived at, it is
possible to have not merely unicellular or-
ganisms all roughly alike, but to have a part
of an organism made up of a vast number of
closely similar cells. Cells have the power of
reproduction, and after they have divided
grow to their original size, or roughly so. In
some way the particular size characteristic
of a particular cell represents a stable value
which is rapidly reached, but never greatly
exceeded. In some way too the undifferenti-
ated material out of which the organism
grows is organized most suitably into units
of a certain size. The conditions of stability
in this case as in those of turbulence are, of
course, quite different from those of static
stability. There is no question of searching
for the position of minimum energy. In both
cases energy is available from outside, and
as in the case of some electrical systems the
tendency may be toward a state of maximum
energy subject to certain constraints.
If one takes an extended view of atomicity
it affects one’s view of the so-called cosmo-
logical principle. This principle in its most
complete form asserts that the universe
when suitably smoothed out looks the same
from all places and at all times. In a less
complete form variation with time is allowed
but not with space. This principle has been
very widely used, but there are substantial
objections to it as ordinarily stated. In the
first place it apparently not merely throws
out the baby with the bath water, but
throws out the baby (or babies) and retains
the water, and the babies are big, nothing
less than galaxies! The striking thing about
the night sky is precisely its nonuniformity,
204
the light comes from a discrete set of points
which are of varying brightness, and are not
distributed at random but grouped round
the Milky Way, which itself is a unique
feature. Clearly an observer on another star
would see a substantially different pattern.
Limiting observation to a single galaxy the
principle is certainly quite untrue; the
smoothing must proceed much further. It is
supposed to hold as between galaxies, but
even here the distribution is irregular as
many galaxies form part of clusters, others
do not. It is only on the very largest scale
that the principle is not demonstrably false.
On that very large scale it states that the
distribution of matter and of the velocities
this possesses are independent of the ob-
server. But even here there is a restriction.
At any place there is a privileged or ‘‘funda-
mental’’ observer, roughly speaking an ob-
server at rest with regard to the average of
the galaxies. We are, in fact, in such a
position, for observations in different direc-
tions in space—as far as they are possible
in view of the absorption due to clouds in
our own galaxy—show galaxies roughly uni-
formly distributed and with apparent ve-
locities which do not on balance vary with
direction. Clearly an observer moving past
the earth with a velocity say a quarter that
of light would not see this isotropy because
of the well-known relativistic effects on
angles and velocities. Indeed such effects
would exist even on a nonrelativistic view of
aberration and Doppler effect.
The need to choose these privileged ob-
servers detracts rather from the principle,
for some of the regularity observed is manu-
factured by the choice. However it appears
that observers near the center of galaxies
could be representatives of a set which
would not be so arbitrary—some theorists
specify them. Taking this set of observers it
is postulated that each would see a distribu-
tion of galaxies with density and velocity
each a function of distance only, and these
two functions would be the same for all
fundamental observers. There is here a point
which seems to me to present some difficulty.
The principle is concerned with a smoothed
out distribution for it is usually assumed
that the fundamental observers form a con-
tinuous set, yet all that can be observed at
the distances at which alone the principle
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, NO. 7
applies is the discrete set of galaxies. To
apply the theory one has to consider as
important just that aspect which the theory
neglects.
I venture to suggest that what is useful
in the principle is best expressed in terms of
atomicity. What it really says is that there
are a very large number of approximately
similar galaxies and that their distribution
in space is that of the molecules of a uni-
formly expanding gas, with the addition that
if there is an edge we are not near it. This is
all that the observations justify. The recent
work at Cambridge (England) on the so-
called radio stars allows observations deeper
into space even than the 200-inch telescope.
So far this work does not support the idea
that galaxies are uniformly distributed in
space. Assuming, as one must from the
principle of cosmogony, that the proportion
of radio stars to galaxies is constant, more
radio stars imply an increased density of
galaxies, and this is what Ryle* and his
workers find at great distance.
It is well known! that there are some con-
nections between cosmic and electronic data
which appear in the form of nondimensional
ratios leading to the same very large number
about 4 X 10%. Thus:
9
(1) é = ratio of electric to gravitational
ype — force of electron and proton =
2.28 < 10%
ost : see
>\ = ratio of characteristic size of ex-
(2) ( 2¢ :) panding universe to diameter of
Me C” electron = 6.6 X 10%?
or ratio of age of universe to
time for light to cross electron.
3713
(3) puedes number of protons in a volume
Mp characteristic of the universe =
[SiGI<a1032)2
(4) ypoT? + 1 which after reduction implies
that the gravitational P.E. of a
particle in the field of the universe
is about equal to its rest mass.
Here pp is the mean density of matter in
space; po is taken as 10~-*”: which may easily
be wrong by two powers of 10. 7 is the
reciprocal of Hubble’s constant, with a
3 Proc. Roy. Soc., A, 280: 448. 1955.
4Cf. Bonp1, Cosmology. Cambridge University
Press.
Juny 1956
probable value of about 4 X 10° years. The
other constants are accurately known (c
velocity of light, e charge of electron, m. mass
of electron, m, mass of proton, y universal
constant of gravitation). In any case one
would not expect such relations, if derived
from some yet-to-be discovered fundamental
theory, would be exact, factors of 4%, 2, 4a
would be expected to occur.
But the agreement seems better than a co-
incidence and is one of the reasons for
regarding atomicity as very fundamental in
the universe, since atomic constants are re-
lated to cosmic ones. Dirac has suggested
that these large numbers are not really con-
stant but increasing steadily with time,
and (2) can be regarded as the age of the
Universe in natural units, but if so e, y, me,
or m, must change with time. Eddington on
the other hand regarded them as fixed by
geometrical considerations and found for
the number of elementary particles in the
universe NV = 3 X 136 x 2% + 2.4 x 10”.
Some modern theories of cosmogony, those
of Bondi and Gold, and of Hoyle, require
matter to be continuously created in the
form of neutrons or hydrogen atoms, thus
again implying a connection between the
atomicity of the very small and cosmogony.
I understand from my biological friends
that there is a tendency to reinstate the
species as an important biological concep-
tion, but in any case there is no doubt that
animals and plants of one general kind con-
stitute an atomicity in our sense of the term.
Even if there is a continuous gradation, as
appears occasionally to happen in species
that are widely distributed over the earth,
so that individuals at the two ends of the
range are markedly different, it yet remains
true that there are a vast number of individ-
uals which for practical purposes are indis-
tinguishable and that is all that we need.
How far can this be explained? To some
extent the existence of species or, indeed,
larger groups, is a consequence of the sta-
bility of the germ mechanism. Mutations
indeed occur and abnormal individuals are
born, although rarely. Among the normal
individuals there is a gradation in all quali-
ties, and rearrangement of genes can bring
about changes within this range, of which
some will be favored by natural selection
THOMSON: ATOMICITY AND PATTERNS
205
and others discouraged. But the general
effect is one of stability. Most of the crea-
tures born to a particular pair are closely
alike, and this process continued for genera-
tions produces a fairly homogeneous popula-
tion. If large mutations were the rule and
not the exception this would not occur,
but since most mutations are harmful, a
creature which had too many would not
long survive. Atomicity here is the conse-
quence of a stability of organization which
itself is a prerequisite for the continued
existence of creatures of that general kind.
In all these cases it is perhaps fair to see
atomicities as arising where there are large
amounts of energy available, gravitational
in the case of the galaxies, kinetic in the
case of turbulence, and chemical or electro-
chemical in the case of living matter. In such
cases there seems to be a tendency to divide
into units and this apparently makes for
stability.
I ought perhaps to deal with one possible
objection, that some of these atomicities
may be due to the observer. We can only
have a limited number of names, and we
apply them somewhat arbitrarily to classes
which may have no sharp edge. I think this
may be true to a slight extent, but in the
cases I have collected at least, and in many
others, there is a real physical effect; that is,
there are a great many individuals greatly
alike in any particular quantity, and then a
large gap before one comes to any more.
In a sense the subject that I am discussing
is one of the oldest in philosophy, in that it
is linked with the idea of universals, that is
of names for groups of things, and of course
the controversy between those who held
that the groups had a real existence (the
realists), and those who held they were only
names (the nominalists), raged throughout
the whole Middle Ages. I am in no sense a
philosopher, and I dare not go further into
this aspect of the subject. I do not think,
though, that what I have presented to you
can be explained as merely a matter of
words. It seems to me that atomicity is as
real and as prevalent in nature as it is in the
modern factory, and for those who dislike
what they refer to as “this machine-made
age” it may be some consolation that it is, at
least, foreshadowed by nature.
206
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 7
GEOPHYSICS.—Radioactive pollution and civil defense.’ Francois N. FRENKIBL,
Applied Physics Laboratory, The Johns Hopkins University.
(Received May 31, 1956)
The present development of nuclear
sciences points to continuously increasing
possibilities of the use of nuclear tech-
nology in the civilized world. This new
source of power may serve to further ad-
vance our civilization or to destroy it. We
often describe the possible damages of a
nuclear war. We should also keep in mind
the dangers of radioactive pollution whether
produced by wartime or by peacetime ap-
plications of nuclear reactions. Radioactive
pollution control measures will be less costly
if planned while the development of nuclear
power is still in its infancy. As to civil de-
fense plans against nuclear warfare, their
effectiveness should be measured not by the
number of possible casualties but by the
number of people who can be rescued. Since
any such plan must be based on the under-
standing and active support of the popula-
tion, it is urgent to correct the widespread
impression that no effective civil defense
plan can exist. Many of the studies and
control measures referring to radioactive
pollution are similar to those which can be
used in conventional atmospheric pollution
problems. This similarity is important when
one wishes to evaluate the costs of effective
methods of protection from dangers of at-
mospheric contamination. In urban plan-
ning, for instance, many of the measures
suggested with the desire of reducing at-
mospheric pollution from combustion and
other chemical reactions will also be ap-
plicable as civil defense measures. We will
therefore refer in what follows not only to
radioactive pollution but also to some prob-
lems of conventional air pollution.
As far as human protection from air con-
tamination is concerned it is necessary to
limit the contacts of the population with
the pollutants and restrict the irradiation
doses (1). The safe limits will be based on
1 This work was supported by the Bureau of
Ordnance, Department of the Navy, under Con-
tract NOrd 7386. The paper was presented at the
Joint Meeting of the American Geophysical
Union and the American Meteorological Society.
in Washington, D. C., May 4, 1956.
“allowable threshold concentrations” for
acute short-time exposure effects and on
“allowable long-exposure concentrations.”
Consideration should also be given to the
possible dangers of polluting the world at-
mosphere to such a degree that there may
be an appreciable effect on the climate or
health of the population.
In fixing the allowable concentrations one
must take into account the fact that too
stringent limitations will impose great costs
and operating difficulties on many indis-
pensable or useful activities of the popula-
tion. On the other hand, insufficient restric-
tions may result in harmful effects on the
health of the population and damage to
property. Therefore, the costs and opera-
tional difficulties of these limitations should
be measured by their beneficial effects.
At least four general classes of methods to
limit contacts between the contamination
and the population can be considered:
(a) reducing the amount of atmospheric pol-
lutants,
(b) moving the contaminating sources away
from the population,
(c) moving the population away from the
contaminating sources,
(d) isolating the population from contact
with the contaminants.
In industrial and urban pollution we are
mainly concerned with the first two classes,
which consist of a control over the sources
of pollution. In civil defense studies we are
primarily concerned with the last two
classes involving the destination of the
pollutants and the population behavior in
avoiding dangerous contacts with them. In
all cases it will be important to evaluate the
costs and effects of various methods of pol-
lution control and of civil defense strategies.
To make such an evaluation one can use
mathematical models of atmospheric pollu-
tion, which include in their description: the
pollution sources, the nature of the pol-
lutants, their emission conditions, the
chemical reactions and other changes to
Juby 1956
which they are subjected, the pertinent
meteorological conditions, the topographical
situation of the area, etc. Using appropriate
equations one can then determine mean
concentration patterns of the pollution as a
function of the hour of the day. The relative
contributions of each of several pollution
sources to the contamination at each point
of the area can then be evaluated, as well as
the effects of changes in the operation of the
pollution sources on the expected pollution
patterns.
In the case of radioactive pollutants one
will be interested not only in the concentra-
tions of atmospheric pollutants but also in
the solid and liquid pollutants which have
accumulated on the ground. The radio-
logical hazards will be due to the added
effects of the pollutants which come into
contact with the population and _ those
which radiate from some distance whether
they are in the air or on the ground. One
must, of course, take into account the dif-
ferences between the radioactive decay
times of various contaminants when deter-
mining the pollution pattern.
As an example of the results which can be
obtained with a mathematical model of at-
mospheric pollution, we have used Los
Angeles County for which extensive data
on the meteorological conditions and the
distribution of pollution sources are avail-
able. A large part of the County is located in
a basin bordered on two sides by a mountain
chain. Temperature inversions frequently
act as a relatively impermeable lid under
which the pollutants accumulate. Los
Angeles County is therefore a good proving
ground for atmospheric pollution studies.
The pollution sources include: industry,
motor-car exhausts, oil and gas heating, and
refuse incinerators. The pollutants emitted
by those sources include nitrogen dioxide
and hydrocarbons which produce ozone as
a result of a photochemical reaction (2). We
have described elsewhere (3) how such a
mathematical model can be used to deter-
mine:
(a) temporary emergency measures to be
taken when atmospheric pollution threat-
ens to reach the allowable concentration
levels,
FRENKIEL: RADIOACTIVE POLLUTION AND CIVIL DEFENSE
207
(b) efficacity of various plans to reduce the
pollution in an urban area,
(c) effects of a new pollution source on the
mean concentration patterns,
(d) pollution patterns for a city after future
expansions,
(e) efficacity of various solutions in urban
planning on predicted pollution levels.
These results were based on average mete-
orological conditions corresponding to a
selected month of the year, and their varia-
tions as a function of the hour of the day.
On each day of the month the meteorological
conditions depart from this average. This
departure results in a deviation from the pol-
lution patterns for a particular day, from the
results obtained by this analysis. One can,
of course, use as a basis for the analysis the
meteorological conditions for each particular
day and as a result determine much more
correctly the concentration patterns. Since
the use of mathematical models of at-
mospheric pollution requires extensive nu-
merical computations, such an analysis will
be practical only if high-speed computing
techniques are used.
A method of civil defense against radio-
active pollution involving the use of high-
speed computors was suggested some years
ago (4). Similar methods show promise of
success in problems of peacetime air pollu-
tion of urban areas and can be used not only
to analyze data on atmospheric pollution
and urban planning but also on an opera-
tional basis in the control of atmospheric
pollution.
In an area to be protected from pol-
lutants we place a net of instruments
measuring the directions and the magnitudes
of the mean wind velocities, the character of
the turbulence and other meteorological in-
formation such as, for instance, the charac-
teristics of the temperature inversion. If the
expected degree of contamination is deter-
mined before dangerous concentrations are
reached, then the operational expenses of
many methods of pollution abatement as
well as the investment in special control
equipment could be greatly reduced. Evacu-
ation into the atmosphere is indeed one of
the best and most economical methods of
disposing of pollutants. If we are able to
208
determine the periods of time when such
evacuation can be made without danger,
then during those periods the use of the
special equipment or special fuel will not be
necessary. It is therefore important to deter-
mine the unfavorable conditions much more
correctly than a human forecaster is able to
do, since any action to reduce the emission
of pollutants during the unfavorable time
will be expensive. The meteorologist would
alert the computing center whenever there
seems to be a possibility of unfavorable
meteorological conditions. The computing
center would then take over the problem of
continuously following the mean wind
velocity pattern, the turbulence character-
istics and the temperature inversion in the
area. From these data the concentration of
pollutants which may be reached over the
area will be computed. At some chosen
points of the area the concentration in con-
taminants will be measured and the results
relayed to the computing center to improve
the precision of the computation. The high-
speed computation will determine what the
expected concentration distributions will be
if the operation of the sources of pollution
continues without change. If, at any point
in the protected area, the occurrence of a
dangerous concentration is predicted, action
would have to be taken to reduce the emis-
sion of pollutants. It will be possible to de-
termine which individual sources contribute
most to the dangerous concentrations, since
the computation is done by adding the ef-
fects of the various sources. One will then
find what the effects of shutting-down or
reducing the production of pollutants at
some of these individual sources will be on
the predicted concentrations. As a result it
may be sufficient to take such action at only
some of the sources of pollution and limit the
expense and inconvenience to a minimum.
The operational use of high-speed comput-
ing techniques is of particular interest in the
protection from radioactive pollution. In this
problem there is a difference between at-
mospheric pollution originating from a
nuclear reactor, an experimental device ex-
ploding at a preassigned place and the burst
of an enemy nuclear bomb. In the first two
cases the location of the pollution sources
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 7
and the general characteristics of pollutants
are known. The problem is then somewhat
similar to those considered in the study of
conventional air pollution. In problems of
civil defense the burst point of an enemy
bomb is not well known in advance. An
operational application of high-speed com-
puting may therefore be of particular im-
portance, since it makes possible rapid
computations of several probable pollution
patterns associated with various possible
burst points. There is an essential difference
between the most effective protection meth-
ods to be used after the explosion and those
which should be used before the explosion.
After a nuclear explosion the dispersion of
a nuclear cloud depends mainly on the
meteorological conditions. If the informa-
tion about the burst point, explosion char-
acteristics and the nature of the radioactive
pollutants is available to a computing
center, then the probable pollution patterns
can be predicted. Consideration may have
to be given to evacuation versus use of
shelters. The best protection methods may
vary at each section of the area surrounding
the burst point and may change at various
times following the explosion. They will de-
pend on the nature of the shelters and on
the possible evacuation procedures and they
will be influenced by the damage which the
area has already suffered from blast and
radiation effects. They will also depend on
the indoctrination and_ susceptibility to
panic of the population.
The problem of civil defense under threat,
of an immediate nuclear attack is quite dif-
ferent. Let us assume that enemy airplanes
have been detected at some distance from,
say, Washington, D. C. If the airplanes are
detected several hours before they can reach
Washington, then one cannot be certain
that Washington is indeed the target and
that the enemy is not planning to attack
Baltimore, for instance. Even if the civil
defense could suggest to the enemy where
and how he should deliver his bomb, there
is still a probability that he will not reach
his target. Any civil defense measure must
take into account the probability of having
incorrect information about the enemy’s
target, the probability of an airplane being
Juty 1956
destroyed by the military defense, the possi-
bility that such a destruction will result in a
nuclear explosion, ete. If for instance the
population were evacuated, under the as-
sumption that the enemy will attack
Washington, and then Baltimore should be-
come the target, the population may find
itself moving into an area contaminated by
radioactivity. An operational study would
thus involve not only following the motion
and the dispersion of nuclear clouds, but
also the prediction of probable burst points
using the information about the activity of
the enemy and the possibility of his inter-
ception by military defense.
Peacetime preparation of civil defense
plans should take into account this difference
between the pre-explosion and the post-ex-
plosion cases when comparing evacuation
versus shelter protection. These plans should
evaluate how proper protection methods of
both kinds will affect future civil defense
operations during wartime and consider if
and how these operations may have to be
coordinated with military defense activities.
One should also distinguish between the pre-
explosion defense plans made when a threat
of nuclear attack is imminent and dispersal
plans for the population made well before a
war Starts.
Some of the advance civil defense plans
may also have a beneficial effect on in-
dustrial pollution control. To make possible
a rapid evacuation as well as speedy relief of
a city after bombardment, improved high-
ways and city roads may be necessary. Civil
defense may also wish to consider the ef-
fectiveness of a proper subway system which
could serve for both shelter and evacuation.
Consideration must also be given to dispersal
plans in urban building to reduce the proba-
bility of large scale destruction. Each of
these solutions will reduce atmospheric pol-
lution as well as simplify traffic. In urban
planning it may therefore be desirable to
keep in mind the necessities of civil defense
together with those of urban traffic and at-
mospheric pollution abatement. Some city
planning ideas may be considered too ex-
pensive as merely insurance against nuclear
attack effects; they may, however, become
quite acceptable if atmospheric pollution and
FRENKIEL: RADIOACTIVE POLLUTION AND CIVIL DEFENSE
209
trafic problems should also be taken into
account.
Most civil defense considerations refer to
simultaneous attacks of several, say, eighty
cities. Since such an attack may indeed be
possible the civil defense problems are na-
tional in scope and any plans for individual
cities will have to be interrelated. One may
safely claim that civil defense plans made
for each single city, however good they may
be individually, will not add to the best
national plan for a simultaneous defense of
eighty cities. Nor can such a general plan be
dissected into the most effective plans for
single city attacks.
One should be cautious to avoid the
tendency to decide for the enemy what his
future strategy will be. It may be important
to assume several possible actions of the
enemy and try to determine those which are
most probable. Strategic defense plans
should not be based on a single plan for
each enemy action but involve several pos-
sible methods of defense. The selection of
the most appropriate will have to be made
at wartime and may be influenced by the
overall interest of the country. There may
be serious danger that the assumption of a
particular enemy strategy and the prepara-
tion of a single defense plan will limit the
military defense strategy or force it to ig-
nore civil defense requirements and expecta-
tions. It is also possible that a single and
rigid civil defense plan will limit dangerously
the general policies of a nation.
An essential part of any civil defense
system will be a complete communication
system. No system will operate to its full
capacity unless the information needed to
make appropriate decisions can be rapidly
collected, evaluated, and used and the
necessary instructions forwarded to the
population. Various methods of collecting
data on the point of burst, the nature of the
explosion, the motions of the nuclear cloud,
the meteorological conditions, the damages,
the traffic possibilities, ete., will be required.
These methods may include the use of
helicopters for direct observation and meas-
urements of radioactivity levels. In some
cases the best civil defense strategy may re-
quire an initial evacuation followed by
210
protection in shelters. In others it may ap-
pear desirable, but not always possible, to
change the instructions to the population
during the defensive operation according to
sudden changes of the meteorological con-
ditions.
If the operational use of high-speed com-
puting techniques is to be applied, one must
take the precaution of planning several inter-
connected computing centers, in order that
the destruction of one or more of such
centers not discontinue the civil defense
operation. It would be incorrect to conclude
that each large urban area should be pro-
vided with several computing centers. It
may be possible to spread such centers over
the whole country and plan proper com-
munication facilities to make possible the
use of any one of them to analyze the in-
formation from the attacked area. The use
of these computing centers does not have to
be limited to civil defense problems and
could be extended to other purposes as well.
If there is no exaggeration in the publicly
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, NO. 7
the number of those which could be rescued,
with a properly used defense plan, is of a
similarly large order of magnitude. An at-
tack on numerous cities would then not only
multiply the number of casualties but will
also multiply the number of those which can
be rescued. Let me repeat once more that as
far as the protection of human lives is con-
cerned, the importance of a civil defense
plan should not be measured by the number
of those which could be killed in a nuclear
attack but by the number of those which
can be saved.
REFERENCES
(1) Taytor, Laurrrson 8. The basis for stand-
ards for radiation protection. Journ. Wash-
ington Acad. Sci. 46: 69-77. 1956.
(2) Haagen-Smit, A.J. Chemistry and physiology
of Los Angeles smog. Ind. Eng. Chem. 44:
1342-1346. 1952.
(3) FRENKIEL, F. N. Frequency distributions of
velocities in turbulent flow. Journ. Meteorol-
ogy 8: 316-320. 1951 (see introduction, p.
316).
: 2 : (4) ———. Atmospheric pollution and zoning
estimated numbers of casualties per nuclear in an urban area. Sci. Monthly 82: 194-203.
bombardment, it should be expected that 1956.
EE
Whoever rejects faith in the reality of atoms and electrons, or the electro-
magnetic nature of light waves, or the identity of heat and motion, cannot
be found guilty of a logical or empirical contradiction; but, he will find it
difficult from his standpoint to advance physical knowledge —PLANcx (1913).
JuLy 1956
HOFFMAN: GENERALIZATION OF A THEOREM OF KONIG
211
MATHEMATICS.— Generalization of a theorem of Konig.! A. J. Horrman, Na-
tional Bureau of Standards.
(Received May 21, 1956)
Let R be a set with elements pi, --- ,
Pees e— St, - >>, Sm} a family of sub-
sets of R, and aa real number, 0 < a < 1.
Denote the number of elements contained
in a set T by J’, and the set of elements
common to the sets T and U by T Nf U.
In this note, we consider the question: does
there exist a set CC R such that
(1) KCRMESti— eS) | <1
0 = Il 908 5 Hor
Note that if aS; is an integer, then (1) re-
quires C MN S; = aS; . If aS; is not an in-
teger, (1) requires that CM S; be either of
the two integers closest to aS; . So our ques-
tion concerns the existence of set C which
has in common with each S; a set of ele-
ments whose number is proportional to the
number of elements in S;, the propor-
tionality factor being a.
Such a set C does not always exist; e.g.,
let R = {1, 2, 3}, Si = {1, 2}, Se = {2, 3},
S; = {3, 1}, a = \%. We prove below a
simple sufficient condition for the existence
of a solution of (1). As an application, we
derive a well-known theorem of Konig
[3]: Let R be a set with gk elements, and
two families of subsets, 7 = {71,--- , Ta}
and U = {U,,--- , U,}. Assume further
ina eOi — UU, LT; i ne = @
(the empty set) if 7 # 7, U; N U; = ¢ if
1 ~ j. (The foregoing conditions state that
the family 7’ is a “partition” of R, and so
is the family U.) Finally, assume 7; =
U , q. Then there exists
U;=ki=1,---
pseu Suhusuch) that ©. —) q, CLE, —
Cio — 7 — Ig. Mhere-are many
proofs of Konig’s theorem in the literature.
A demonstration closely related to Konig’s
original proof, yet sharing the geometric
spirit of the discussion offered below, may
be easily deduced from the lemma contained
in [2].
This work was supported (in part) by the
Office of Naval Research.
Our generalization of Konig’s theorem
requires consideration of the matrix A repre-
senting the incidence of elements of R
with sets in S. Let A = (a,;) be the inci-
dence matrix defined
(2) aii = 1 if pi € S;
it = Oif p;¢S;
iP G@ = il ooo. Wp = 088 5 he
We also require the following definition:
a (rectangular) matrix is said to have the
unimodular property if every square sub-
matrix has determinant 0, 1, or —1.
Theorem. If the matrix A has the uni-
modular property, then, for any a, 0 <
a < 1, there exists a solution to (1).
Proof: For x a real number, let [x] denote
the greatest integer not exceeding x. Con-
sider now the set of points satisfying the
linear equation and inequalities
(3) > Aig Yi = ad;
j=
forall — wer) 770
such that aS; is an integer,
IA
(4) [o8,] < > ay; = 1+ [o8;],
for allt = 1,---,m
such that aS; is not an integer,
(5) O) S eS My GS NS Se
This system is consistent, for the point
yY = (a, a, -:- , a) clearly satisfies (8), (4)
and (5). Hence the set of solutions is a non-
empty closed convex set A, which is, by
(5), clearly bounded. Therefore, A admits
vertices. Since A has the unimodular prop-
erty, it follows [/] that every vertex has
all of its coordinates integers. Let gy =
(J. , °-:: » Ya) be any vertex. By (5), ¥; =
Okonal) LeteGs— spins leh ennC)
and (4) imply (1).
212
A general theorem describing sufficient
conditions for A to have the unimodular
property is given in [/]. A special case worth
mentioning occurs when the family S can
be split into two subfamilies each of which
has the property: if two subsets in the same
family have a non-empty intersection, one
is contained in the other. For example, a
subfamily could be a partition of R. If each
subfamily is a partition, if S; = k @ =
1, --- , m), and if we set a = 1/k, then (1)
becomes K6nig’s theorem.
Remark 1. The hypothesis that A have
the unimodular property is not necesary
for the existence of a solution to (1). Let
je = Wil, Bs, 4b &, Oh Se S fl, Bh, Se S
{3, 4, 5}, S3 = {5, 6, 1}. Then the submatrix
formed by the three rows of A and the first,
third and fifth columns of A has deter-
minant 2, so A does not have the unimodular
property. On the other hand, for0 <a <
24, C = {2, 4, 6} satisfied (1), and for 24 <
a <1, C = j1, 3, 5} satisfies (1).
Remark 2. Since we know that any
bounded r-dimensional closed convex set
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 7
admits at least r + 1 vertices, we can esti-
mate a lower bound for the number of solu-
tions of (1). Since a is properly between 0
and 1, a point of any sufficiently small
sphere containing 7 satisfies (5). Clearly,
such a point also satisfies (4). If (and only
if) v is any vector orthogonal to all rows 7 of
(3), then g + ev, for e sufficiently small in
absolute value, will satisfy (3) as well as
(4) and (5). This remark tells us that the
dimension of K is n — d, where d is the di-
mension of the space spanned by all rows 7
such that aS; is an integer. Hence, the
number of solutions of (1) is at least
n—ada-+ i.
REFERENCES
(1) Horrman, A. J., and Kruskat, J. B. In-
tegral boundary points of convex polyhedra.
Annals of Mathematics Study No. 38,
“Papers on Linear Inequalities and Related
Systems,’’ edited by H. W. Kuhn and A. W.
Tucker, Princeton. (In press.)
(2) Horrman, A. J., and Wretanpt, H. W. The
variation of the spectrum of a normal matriz.
Duke Math. Journ. 20: 37-40. 1953.
(3) Konia, D. Ueber Graphen und thre Anwen-
dung. Math. Ann. 77: 453-465. 1916.
However certain the facts of any science, however just the ideas derived
from these facts, we can only communicate false or imperfect impressions
to others, if we want words by which these may be properly expressed.—A. L.
LAVOISIER.
Juny 1956
STONE AND KNIGHT: MOSQUITORS. II 213
ENTOMOLOGY .—Type specimens of mosquitoes in the United States National
Museum: IT, The genus Aedes (Diptera, Culicidae). ALAN Stonr, Entomology
Research Branch, U. 8. Department of Agriculture, and Kennet L. KNIGHT,
Bureau of Medicine and Surgery, U. 8S. Department of the Navy.!
(Received May 8, 1956)
The first part of this series dealing with the
genera Armigeres, Psorophora, and Haema-
gogus appeared in this JouURNAL 45: 282-289.
1955. The introductory remarks in that
paper and especially those on early, possibly
questionable, holotypes, apply equally well
to this one. Following our treatment of
nominal taxa requiring special attention we
present a list of those in the collection based
on unique specimens or for which holotypes
were clearly designated.
We are particularly indebted to Dr. J. B.
Schmitt and Dr. B. B. Pepper, of the De-
partment of Entomology of Rutgers Uni-
versity, for giving to the U. S. National
Museum most of the type material of mos-
quitoes from the New Jersey Agricultural
Experiment Station, consisting of syntypes
of five species described by Grossbeck and
one species described by Coquillett.
Genus Aedes Meigen
Aedes aboriginis Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 5: 99.
1917.
A male, bearing the data, ‘“Longmire Springs,
Mt. Rainier National Park, Washington, 18.
V1.17, H. G. Dyar,” was selected as lectotype by
Knight (1951, p. 96).
Culex aestivalis Dyar, Journ. New York Ent. Soc.
12: 245. 1904.
This was based upon adult specimens referred
to Culex reptans Meigen by Dyar (1904, p. 38)
and a description of the larva. No type material
was mentioned in either publication. The collec-
tion contains a male with terminalia mounted on a
slide. The pinned specimen bears the labels:
“9790 iss III.04 / H. G. Dyar Collector / See
1 Studies upon which this paper is based were
conducted under an exchange of funds from the
Office of Naval Research (Biological Science
Division) to the Smithsonian Institution. The
Opinions or assertions contained here are the
private ones of the writers and are not to be con-
strued as official or reflecting the views of the
Navy Department or the Naval service at large.
slide No. 22 / Aedes aestivalis Dyar @ type.”
The slide bears a red type label with no number
and the labels: ‘“‘22 C. repitans [sic] 279.0 Kaslo
B.C. Dyar III.04 / Culex (Culicada) aestivalis
Dyar Type & genitalia, Dec. 14, 1904.” We
select this as lectotype of the species. There are
many other specimens from Kaslo, British
Columbia, but none of these is marked as type.
Aedes stimulans albertae Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens.
8: 115. 1920.
The three syntypes from Edmonton, Alberta,
are in the collection, and we select as lectotype
the male collected May 17, 1919, which bears
Dyar’s determination and type label. The
terminalia of this specimen are mounted on
slide no. 1226.
Gymnometopa albonotata Coquillett, Proc. Ent.
Soc. Washington 7: 183. 1906.
This was originally described from five male
and three female syntypes collected by A. Busck
in the San Francisco Mountains, Santo Domingo,
West Indies, Type no. 8297, U. S. National
Museum. We select as lectotype an undissected
male bearing the labels: “141.8 / SFrnesco Mts.
St. Domingo W.I. Sept. 05 / Aug. Buseck Collec-
tor / Type No. 8297 USNM” and Coquillett’s
determination label. The associated pupal skin of
this specimen is mounted on a slide.
Aedes aldrichti Dyar and Knab, Proc. U. 8. Nat.
Mus. 35: 57. 1908.
The type locality of this species is Market
Lake, Idaho, according to the original description
and the U.S.N.M. type catalogue, and the de-
scription was based upon six females. The
collection contains two females from Market
Lake and four from Lewiston, Idaho, and it is
probable that these are the original six on which
the description was based and that Dyar did not
notice when writing the data that they were not
all from Market Lake. Dyar labeled one of the
Lewiston specimens with a type label, but we
prefer to select as lectotype one of the two from
the published type locality.
214
Aedes alleni Turner, Ins. Insc. Mens. 12: 84. 1924.
The two syntype males are in the collection,
neither bearing any collection data, but each with
an unnumbered red type label. One bears a num-
ber, 1885, which associates it with a terminalia
slide labeled: ‘‘Aedes alleni Turner. Type.
Mission, Tex. Jan. 30, 1924. 1885.’ We select
this specimen as lectotype.
Aedes allotecnon Kumm, Komp, and Ruiz, Amer.
Journ. Trop. Med. 20: 417, 1940.
This name was originally proposed in a key to
the adults of the Aedes of Costa Rica and is
validated by the comparative characters given in
the key. The formal description by Kumm and
Komp (1941, p. 18) described the female as well
as the larva and male but only three males with
associated larval skins are designated as types.
These syntypes are in the collection and we select
as lectotype specimen no. 156.
Aedes altiusculus Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 5: 101.
1917.
This was described from an unstated number
of specimens from ‘Indian Henry’s,” Mount
Rainier National Park, Washington. The collec-
tion contains a female and a male each bearing
the label ‘““Type No. 21545 U.S.N.M.” These are
labeled Longmire Springs, Wash., June 24, 1917.
Presumably they were collected as larvae on
June 13 at “Indian Henry’s” and they emerged
June 24. We select the male as the lectotype.
There are two other females, dated June 25, that
are presumably of the original series.
Stegomyia amesti Ludlow, Journ. New York Ent.
Soc. 11: 139. 1903.
This species was described from Samar, Leyte,
and Luzon in the Philippines. Only one of the
original syntypes is in the collection, and this is
the only one entered in the type catalogue. It is
rather certain that the other syntypes are lost.
This is a female bearing the type label and the
label ‘“Stegomyia amesii Ludl., Oras, Samar,
P.I., June—Dec. Type C.8.L.”” Knight and Hull
(1952, p. 158) call this a holotype, but since no
holotype was mentioned originally we here desig-
nate it as lectotype.
Aedes angustivittatus Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 15: 9. 1907.
This was described from 25 specimens from
three localities in Costa Rica and Bluefields,
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, NO. 7
Nicaragua. There are 50 specimens in the col-
lection bearing original data but only one, a
female, bears the type label. Other labels on this
specimen are: ‘Port Limon, C.R. / Fredk Knab
Collector / Aedes angustivittatus Dyar and Knab
Type.” This we consider to be the holotype.
Culex annulifera Ludlow, Journ. New York Ent.
Soc. 11: 141. 1903.
The lectotype female selected by Knight and
Hull (1951, p. 226) is in the collection.
Finlaya aranetana Banks, Philippine Journ. Sci. 1:
1001. 1906.
The lectotype male selected by Knight and
Marks (1952, p. 543) is in the collection.
Aedes argentescens Dyar and Knab, Proc. U. S.
Nat. Mus. 35: 55. 1908.
This species was described from six syntypes
from Cérdoba and Almoloya, Mexico. A male
and a female, both from Cérdoba, bear Museum
type labels. It is impossible to determine which
four of the remaining specimens bearing original
data were intended to be syntypes. The male also
bears the label “Aedes argentescens Dyar and
Knab Type” and the rearing number 441.4. This
specimen we select as lectotype. Unfortunately,
there were 18 specimens originally under number
441.4, not all in the collection now, and it is im-
possible to determine which larval and pupal skins
belong to this specimen.
Aedes argyrothorax Bonne-Wepster and Bonne,
Ins. Insc. Mens. 7: 179. 1920.
It was the intention of the authors of this
species to deposit the type specimen in the
Colonial Institute, Amsterdam, Holland, and an
additional specimen, called a cotype, was de-
posited in the U. 8. National Museum. No
holotype was designated, nor has a lectotype
since been selected. Knight and Marks (1952, p.
546) stated that the single ‘“‘cotype”’ male in the
U. 8. National Museum was the holotype, but
this is not the case. Dr. Bonne-Wepster informs
us that the original specimens of all the new
species described in the paper in which argyro-
thorax was described are in Amsterdam.
Aedes atlanticus Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 198. 1906.
This is based upon a figure of the larva in the
original publication and upon descriptions by
Juny 1956
Smith and by Felt of what they took to be
Culex serratus Theobald from the Atlantic coast
of the United States. While several of the speci-
mens in the collection may have been before
Dyar and Knab, Smith, or Felt when they de-
scribed this species, there is no certainty of this,
and so we do not feel justified in selecting a
lectotype from these specimens.
Culex atropalpus Coquillett, Can. Ent. 34: 292.
1902.
This was described from 37 female and 3 male
syntypes from Virginia, Maryland, Pennsylvania,
and New Hampshire. The males and 31 of the
females are now in the collection, none of them
marked as type. We select as lectotype a female
bearing the labels ‘“Plummer’s I., Md. 16.7.02 /
H.S. Barber Collector.”
Howardina aureostriata Grabham, Can. Ent. 38:
171. 1906.
The original description of this species does
not state the number of specimens but does state
that they were collected at Newcastle, Jamaica,
and that some came from bromeliads. In the
collection there are seven specimens, each bearing
the label ““M Grabham Collector.’ Three nave
penciled ‘‘aureostriata”” labels, one is dated
April 1906, and one is labeled “‘Mavis Bank, in
bromelias.”’ It is quite possible that some or all of
these are syntypes, but it would be difficult to
prove. They should be considered if a neotype
were desirable, but since the name is a homonym
there is little need for type designation.
Culex aurifer Coquillett, Can. Ent. 35: 255. 1903.
The three original female syntypes are in the
collection, each bearing the label ‘Type No.
12022 U.S.N.M.” We select as lectotype one of
the two collected June 25, bearing Coquillett’s
determination label.
Aedes balteatus Dyar and Knab, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 15: 9. 1907.
Of the six original females, five now stand in
the collection and one of these bears a type label.
This we consider to be the holotype. It bears the
labels “St. Domingo W.I. Aug. / Aug. Buseck
Collector / Type No. 10142 U.S.N.M. / Culex
balteatus Coq. [sic].”’ The number 10152 in the
original publication is a misprint.
STONE AND KNIGHT:
MOSQUITOES. IL 215
Aedes (Ochlerotatus) bicristatus Thurman and
Winkler, Proc. Ent. Soc. Washington 52:
239. 1950.
According to the original description, “Type
specimens have been deposited in the U. S.
National Museum. Paratypes have been de-
posited....”’ There are two specimens in the
collection bearing determination labels with a red
penciled border. These are presumably the
“types.”’ Of these two, a male and a female, we
select as lectotype the male bearing the label
“Lakeport, Lake Co. 10 March 1950. reared 39.5
& Eric C. Winkler.” The pupal skin and ter-
minalia of this specimen are on two slides.
Culex borealis Ludlow, Can. Ent. 43: 178. 1911.
This was described from an unstated number of
specimens collected in Alaska in June, July, and
August. There are five females of the syntype
series in the collection, apparently all collected
at Fort Gibbon, Alaska, in July. Each bears the
label “Type No. 27809 U.S.N.M.,” and they
appear to be conspecific. We select as lectotype
one labeled in Ludlow’s handwriting ‘Culex
borealis Ludl. Fort Gibbon Alaska July, C.S.L.
Types.” This specimen appears to have been
correctly determined as a synonym of communis
De Geer.
Culex bracteatus Coquillett, Proc. Ent. Soc.
Washington 7: 184. 1906.
The four original females are in the collection,
only one bearing a type label. This, which also
bears Coquillett’s determination label, we con-
sider to be the holotype.
Stegomyta busckii Coquillett, Can. Ent. 38: 60.
1906.
The syntypes, two males and one female, are
in the collection, each labeled “Type No. 9139
U.S.N.M.” We select as lectotype the undis-
sected male bearing Coquillett’s determination
label of, ‘““Gymnometopa busckiu Coq.” It was
collected in a cocoa plantation on Dominica, July
28, 1905, by August Busck.
Aedes cacothius Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 11: 44.
1923.
The six female syntypes are in the collection,
all bearing the identical data as published. We
designate one of these as lectotype.
216
Aedes callithotrys Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 8: 16.
1920.
Of the 816 specimens determined by Dyar as
this species, he selected and labeled a male and a
female as types. We select as lectotype the male,
bearing the labels “1159 / White Horse, Y.T.
VII.17.1919 / H. G. Dyar / Type No. 22616
U.S.N.M. / Aedes callithotrys Dyar # Type.”’
The terminalia are on slide no. 1159.
Aedes campestris Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 15: 213. 1907.
This was described from a number of syntypes
from various localities in Saskatchewan and Utah.
Fourteen of these are in the collection, one male
and one female having been labeled as type. We
select as lectotype the female which is indicated
as type and bears the labels “19.V1I.07 / Oxbow,
Sask. / Fredk Knab Collector.”
Aedes (Ochlerotatus) camposanus Dyar, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 6: 128. 1918.
This species was described from a male and a
female from Guayaquil, Ecuador, designated as
types, and 52 other specimens also from Guaya-
quil. We select as lectotype the male of the two
“types.”
Aedes centrotus Howard, Dyar, and Knab, Mos-
quitoes of North and Central America and
the West Indies 4: 747. 1917.
A female labeled ‘“‘White River, Ont. 25.VI.07
/ Fredk Knab Collector” was selected as lecto-
type by Knight (1951, p. 98).
Aedes (Stegomyia) christianus Dyar, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 9: 148. 1921.
The syntype series of this consisted of five
males and three females in the U. S. National
Museum and the private collections of C. W.
Howard and C.S. Banks. The collection contains
the two male and one female syntypes said to be
deposited in the U. 8. National Museum. We
select as lectotype the male bearing the labels
”Honam 3-4-20 / 1429 / Canton China / C. W.
Howard / Type No. 24142 U.S.N.M. / Aedes
christianus Dyar Type.” The terminalia are on
slide no. 1429.
Aedes stimulans classicus Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens.
8: 113. 1920.
The two male and one female syntypes are in
the collection. Since this subspecies was based
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, NO. 7
largely on characters of the male terminalia, we
select as lectotype the whole male mounted on a
slide.
Aedes condolescens Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 15: 11. 1907.
This was described from 24 specimens from
five localities in the Bahamas. Nineteen of these
are in the collection and one only bears a type
label. This female is labeled ‘Nassau 6-24’03
Bahama Is. / T. H. Coffin Coll. *10 / Type No.
10248 U.S.N.M. / Aedes condolescens D & K.
Type.” We consider this to be the holotype.
Aedes cuneatus Dyar and Knab, Proc. U.S. Nat.
Mus. 35: 54. 1908.
Two specimens of the original 35 are labeled
with U.S.N.M. type labels, a female and a male.
The female also bears the label ‘““Aedes cuneatus
D. & K. Type” and the rearing number 422.19.
We select this specimen as lectotype. It was col-
lected at Cérdoba, Veracruz, Mexico, January
20, 1908, pupated January 28, and emerged
January 31. There are two larval skins and a
pupal skin associated with this type specimen.
The other syntypes are not labeled as such and
cannot be distinguished from similarly unlabeled
syntypes of Aedes argentescens Dyar and Knab.
Culex curriei Coquillett, Can. Ent. 33: 259. 1901.
This was described from five females from
North Dakota, Colorado, Idaho, and California.
Of these, only two from Boise, Idaho, have been
found, one of them bearing the label ‘““Type No.
5798 U.S.N.M.” and Coquillett’s determination
label. This we consider to be the holotype since it
is the only specimen bearing the type number, it
bears Coquillett’s determination label, and Boise
is the only locality that Coquillett entered in the
Museum type catalogue. We do not feel that
Dyar and Knab (1906, p. 202) were justified in
selecting a North Dakota specimen as lectotype
or that this selection is acceptable.
Aedes cyclocerculus Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 8:
23. 1920.
The lectotype male selected by Knight (1951,
p. 93) is in the collection.
Aedes cyprius Ludlow, Ins. Insc. Mens. 7: 160.
1920.
This was described from 22 females collected
in Siberia. There are 9 specimens bearing type
JuLy 1956
labels and 11 others that are probably of the
original series. The locality of any one of the
specimens labeled as type cannot be determined
since only three of them bear any locality labels,
and each one of these is marked both Selenga and
Verkhne Udinsk with the dates July and August.
We have selected one of the better specimens as
the lectotype.
Grabhamia de Niedmannii Ludlow, Can. Ent. 36:
234. 1904.
Although this was apparently described from
several specimens, only one is in the collection.
This bears a red type label (no number) and a
label in Ludlow’s handwriting reading ‘‘Grab-
hamia de niedemanni n. sp. Ludlow, Benicia
Barracks, Cal. Type.’ We select this, a female, as
lectotype. Four specimens in the British Museum
sent to Theobald by Ludlow as this species are
actually Culiseta inornata (Williston) rather than
Aedes squamiger (Coquillett) of which G. de-
nmiedmannii is a synonym.
Aedes diantaeus Howard, Dyar, and Knab, Mos-
quitoes of North and Central America and
the West Indies 4: 768. 1917.
This was described from two males collected
in May and June at Dublin, N. H., by August
Busck. The June specimen, with terminalia on
slide no. 484, we here select as lectotype.
Culex dupreet Coquillett, Can. Ent. 36: 10. 1904.
This was based on a specimen of each sex col-
lected by J. W. Dupree at Baton Rouge, La.
These are in the collection, each bearing the label
“Type No. 7340 U.S.N.M.” The female, which
bears Coquillett’s determination label, is lost ex-
cept for the abdomen and one wing. We select as
lectotype the male, which is in good condition,
with its terminalia mounted on a slide.
Aedes epactius Dyar and Knab, Proc. U.S. Nat.
Mus. 35: 53. 1908.
This was described from 10 syntypes in the
collection from Mexico. One male and one female
bear the red labels, ““Type No. 11963 U.S.N.M.”
We select as lectotype the female, which also
bears the labels ‘416.25 / Aedes epactius D. & K.
Type.” This was reared from a pupa collected at
Cérdoba, Veracruz, February 18, 1908, by Knab.
The pupal skin of this specimen has not been
found.
STONE AND KNIGHT: MOSQUITOES. II
217
Aedes epinolus Dyar and Knab, Ins. Insc. Mens.
2: 61. 1914.
This was described from 25 females from two
localities in Peru. There are 24 of these in the col-
lection, one labeled “type,” the others “‘para-
type.” We select as lectotype the one labeled
“type” from Ventanilla, Peru, February 4, 1914.
Aedes (Ochlerotatus) eucephalaeus Dyar, Ins.
Inse. Mens. 6: 127. 1918.
The original syntype series of this consisted
of three males and two females collected by
Bonne-Wepster in Paramaribo, Surinam, and
labeled A, B, C. D, and L. These each bear the
label “Type No. 21911 U.S.N.M.” Adult A,
larval and pupal skins B, and terminalia slide 971
from specimen D, are also labeled type by Dyar.
We select as lectotype male specimen D with
terminalia and associated larval and pupal skins
on two slides.
Aedes euedes Howard, Dyar, and Knab, Mos-
quitoes of North and Central America and
the West Indies 4: 714. 1917.
The syntypes of this are a male and female
from Ottawa and a male and female from Tren-
ton, Ontario, Canada. We select as lectotype the
male from Trenton, May 24, 1900, with ter-
minalia mounted on slide no. 446.
Aedes euplocamus Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 199. 1906.
This was described from larvae collected at
Zent, near Port Limén, Costa Rica. No topotypic
material determined as this species has been
found in the collection. While it might be pos-
sible to identify certain larval and pupal skins in
the collection from the type locality as being the
species described by Dyar and Knab, no reared
adults have been found associated with these
skins, and it would not be possible to be certain
what specimens were originally studied. For this
reason we feel it best to consider that no syn-
type material is available for lectotype designa-
tion.
Aedes fishert Dyar, Ins. Inse. Mens. 5: 19. 1917.
Five of the six original female syntypes from
Lake Tahoe, Calif., June 20, 1920, are in the
collection and we select as lectotype the one
bearing Dyar’s determination label.
218
Culex fletchert Coquillett, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.
25: 84. 1902.
The two syntype females are in the collection,
and we have selected as lectotype the specimen
bearing Coquillett’s determination label.
Stegomyia gardnerii Ludlow, Can. Ent. 37: 99.
1905.
The lectotype male selected by Knight and
Hull (1952, p. 172) is in the collection.
Aedes gonimus Dyar and Knab, Ins. Insc. Mens.
5: 165. 1918.
The four syntype females are in the collection
all bearing type labels. We select as lectotype the
one with Dyar’s determination label.
Aedes grahami Ludlow, Ins. Insc. Mens. 7: 154.
1920.
This was described from a male and a female
from Siberia. We select as lectotype the male col-
lected at Mostovoi in July.
Grabhamia grisea Ludlow, Can. Ent. 39: 130.
1907.
It is not clear from the original description of
this how many specimens were involved, but
possibly there was only one. There is one female
in the collection bearing an unnumbered
U.S.N.M. type label and a label in Ludlow’s
handwriting as follows: ““Grabhamia grisea n. sp.
Ludlow type Boise Bks, Ida. July.’’ We consider
this to be the holotype.
Aedes grossbecki Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 201. 1906.
This was described in a key to larvae from
specimens determined by Coquillett as Culex
squamiger Coquillett, and by reference to a de-
scription by Smith and Grossbeck (1905, p. 13)
of Culex squamiger. There is apparently no type
material of this species.
Aedes habanicus Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 198. 1906.
This was described from larvae collected at
Havana, Cuba, October 28, 1903, by John R.
Taylor. The only material in the collection
bearing these data is a slide with the fragments
of a larval skin along with fragments of two larval
skins of the genus Psorophora, one of which con-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, NO. 7
tains a Culex larval skin. We select as lectotype
these Aedes fragments, consisting of a siphon,
anal segment, and abdomen.
Aedes hemisurus Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 190, 199. 1905.
The authors of this name called it a new species
in the center heading and a new name at the end
of the brief statement concerning it. There is no
description except for the characters given in the
key and reference to Grabham’s figure (1905, p.
405) of the larva of Culex confirmatus from
Jamaica. Although there are adults in the col-
lection determined as hemisurus these are not
associated with larval skins, and there are no
larvae from Jamaica in the collection; and so it is
probable that there are no specimens that can be
said to be of the type series.
Aedes cinereus hemiteleus Dyar, Ins. Inse. Mens.
12: 179. 1924.
The five syntypes were said to be all females,
but one of them is a male. The specimen in best
condition is a female from Lake Center Camp,
Plumas County, Calif., the type locality, June 1,
and we select this as the lectotype.
Aedes trisertatus var. hendersoni
Journ. Econ. Ent. 11: 199. 1918.
Cockerell,
This was described from two females, one of
which is in the collection and bears the labels
“Box Elder Cr. Wyo. Aug. 25, 717. Schwabe and
Henderson / Janthinosoma n. sp. / Psorophora
hendersoni Ckll typr / Aedes triseriatus Say.”
The first three labels are in Cockerell’s hand-
writing and the fourth was written by Dyar.
This is the specimen which Knight and Marks
(1952, p. 572) called a holotype. We here select
it as lectotype.
Aedes (Finlaya) heteropus Dyar, Ins. Inse. Mens.
9: 152. 1921.
The original 20 specimens, all labeled “Type
No. 24865 U.S.N.M.” are in the collection. We
select as lectotype a male dated July 1, with
terminalia on slide no. 1542.
Aedes hexodontus Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 4: 83.
1916.
The female lectotype from Fallen Leaf, Lake
Tahoe, Calif., selected by Knight (1951, p. 93) is
in the collection.
Juny 1956
Aedes terrens homoeopus Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens.
10: 92. 1922.
This was described from three males from
Costa Rica and Mexico, all of which bear type
labels. We select as lectotype the specimen col-
lected at Alajuela, Costa Rica, October 1921.
Aedes hortator Dyar and Knab, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 15: 12. 1907.
We consider as holotype of this species the
female of the two original specimens bearing the
type label.
Howardina inaequalis Grabham, Can. Ent. 39:
25. 1907.
This was described from an unstated number
of adult specimens, presumably of both sexes, and
larvae. There are eight specimens in the collection
labeled ‘‘Kingston, Jam. M. Grabham Collec-
tor.” It is not certain that all these can be con-
sidered as syntypes of inaequalis, but it is quite
probable that most of them are. There are two
males labeled inaequalis, one of the labels being on
the pinned specimen itself, the other on the slide
of the terminalia. We select as lectotype the
specimen with the determination label on the pin.
Culex inconspicuus Grossbeck, Ent. News 15: 333.
1904.
This was described from three males and one
female reared from larvae collected on Garret
Mountains, Paterson, N. J. The collection con-
tains all these, one of each sex being labeled as
type and the second male as cotype. We select as
lectotype the male type collected October 5, with
the terminalia still on the specimen.
Aedes increpitus Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 4: 87.
1916.
This was described from an unstated number of
specimens of a species that was very common in
the Yosemite Valley. There are a great many
specimens from the Yosemite Valley under this
name in the collection, but only one specimen, a
male, bears the type number. One female is also
marked type but was not given a red type label.
We select as lectotype the male, bearing the
following labels: “FB25 / Fallen Leaf, Lake
Tahoe, Cal. June 3, 1916 / Type No. 20350
US.N.M. / H. G. Dyar Coll. / Aedes increpitus
Dyar Type &.”
STONE AND KNIGHT: MOSQUITOES. II
219
Aedes indolescens Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 15: 11. 1907.
This was described from 30 specimens from
Cayamas and Havana, Cuba, and Santo Do-
mingo, West Indies. One female bears the type
label and this we consider the holotype. The other
labels on this specimen are: ‘‘Cayamas, Cuba 8.5 /
E. A. Schwartz collector / in woods / Aedes
indolescens D. & K. Type.”’
Aedes infirmatus Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 190, 197. 1906.
This was described in a larval key from speci-
mens collected by Dupree at Baton Rouge, La.
There are no reared adult specimens bearing
original data and only three slides of larval skins
of Dupree material. One slide contains two skins
and is labeled as from New Orleans, one contains
one larval skin with no locality label, and one
from Baton Rouge contains two larval skins and
fragments of pupal skins. This last slide was ap-
parently prepared from alcoholic material subse-
quent to description of the species. These are
topotypic and might be syntypic, but we prefer
to select no lectotype from this poor and un-
certain material.
Aedes innuitus Dyar and Knab, Ins. Insc. Mens.
5: 166. 1918.
The two male and two female syntypes are in
the collection, and we select as lectotype the
male bearing Dyar’s determination label, with
the terminalia mounted on slide no. 708.
Aedes intrudens Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 7: 23.
1919.
Dyar stated that he selected as types specimens
from Karner, N. Y., in the New York State Col-
lection and specimens from Ontario and Alberta
[U. S. National Museum]. We select as lectotype
the specimens bearing the labels ‘‘White River,
Ont. 25.VI.07 / Fredk Knab collector / See slide
No. 467 / Type No. 21823 U.S.N.M.” The
terminalia are on slide no. 467.
Aedes ioliota Dyar and Knab, Ins. Inse. Mens. 1:
77. 1913.
The four original females of this species, from
Trinidad, West Indies (F. W. Urich collector),
are in the collection, one labeled as type with a
determination label, the other three labeled as
O) 1)
220 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
paratypes. The one labeled as type we consider
to be the holotype.
Aedes (Taeniorhynchus) jacobinae Serafim and
Davis, Ann. Ent. Soc. Amer. 26: 14. 1933.
The original description of this species states
that the male holotype and female allotype are to
be deposited in the U. 8. National Museum. The
only specimens in the collection are a slide of the
male terminalia bearing the labels “J. H. Sch.
of Hyg. Protozoology Aedes jacobinae Davis
Jacobina, Bahia, Brazil, Dec. 1931. J. Serafim /
genitalia # holotype,” and a female, bearing the
labels: ‘“Jacobina, Bahia, Brazil Jan. 19382 /
N. GC. Davis Coll. / Slide a 29.III.49.”’ This slide
has not been found. The pin also holds the
cleared female terminalia in glycerine. It is
probable that only the terminalia of the holo-
type are in existence.
Culex knabi Coquillett, Proc. Ent. Soc. Washing-
ton 7: 183. 1906.
This was described from seven syntype
females. Six of these are in the collection but
none bears a type label. We select as lectotype
the specimen bearing the labels “No. 291la /
See F. Knab’s Entom. notes / Tehuantepec,
Oax., Mex. / Culex knabi Coq.”’ The pupal skin
of this specimen is mounted on a slide.
Culex labeculosus Coquillett, Ent. News 16: 116.
1905.
The eight syntypes are in the collection and we
select as lectotype a male bearing the labels
“Type No. 8314 U.S.N.M. / Slide 707 / Culex
labeculosus Coq. / Ent. News xvi.116, 1905 6 9
2 # 8314.” The terminalia are on slide no. 707.
Verrallina laternaria Coquillett, Proc. Ent. Soc.
Washington 7: 184. 1906.
Four of the five original males of this have
been found. Only one of these bears a type label
and this one, which is also labeled ‘“Verrallina
laternata”’ [sic], we consider to be the holotype.
Culex lativittatus Coquillett, Ent. News 17: 109.
1906.
This was described from a large series of both
sexes from Santa Clara and Alameda Counties,
Calif. There are 37 specimens in the collection
that are probably of the original series. No one
of these bears a type label. We select as lectotype
VOL. 46, NO. 7
a female bearing the labels ‘Arden 19 July 03 /
L. 8. Jr. U. Lot 45 Sub. 1 / Ochlerotatus lati-
vittatus Coq.”
Aedes leuconotips Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 8: 24.
1920.
The male selected as lectotype by Knight
(1951, p. 93) is in the collection.
Taenrorhynchus lineatopennis Ludlow, Can. Ent.
37: 133. 1905.
Knight and Hull (1953, p. 468) selected as
lectotype one of three females, each bearing the
label “Type No. 27794 U.S.N.M.” Only one of
these specimens bears any other label, and this
label reads “‘Taeniorhynchus lineatopennis Lud].
Camp Gregg, Angeles, Pampanga, P.I. Sept.
Type C.S.L.,” in Ludlow’s handwriting. This is
the specimen that was selected as lectotype. The
label is obviously erroneous, since it was Camp
Stotsenburg at Angeles. To accept this lectotype
designation we must assume that Ludlow wrote
the wrong locality for the camp rather than the
wrong camp for the locality. There seems no way
of proving that this specimen is not one of the
two original syntypes so we feel that the lecto-
type designation can stand.
Aedes lithocoetor Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 15: 201. 1907.
The five syntypes of this species are in the
collection, a male and a female being labeled as
types. We select as lectotype the female, bearing
the following labels ‘101.5 / Rio Chagres,
Panama / Collected by August Busck / Type No.
10868 U.S.N.M. / Aedes lithocoetor D. & K.
Type.” No larval or pupal skin has been found
for 101.5.
Aedes (A.) margarsen Dyar and Shannon, Ins,
Insc. Mens. 13: 80. 1925.
The male selected by Laffoon (1946, p. 237) as
lectotype is in the collection.
Grabhamia mediolineata Ludlow, Can. Ent. 39:
129. 1907.
This was apparently described from several
female specimens. There are two in the collection
that are apparently syntypes. One bears the labels
“Type No. 10282 U.S.N.M. / mediolineata Lud-
low.”” The second is labeled “Type No. ——
U.S.N.M. / Grabhamia mediolineata n. sp.
Jury 1956
Ludlow, Fort Lincoln, N. D.” We select the
second of these as lectotype since it has the
loeality label on it and it is somewhat the better
specimen.
Stegomyia mediovittata Coquillett, Can. Ent. 38:
60. 1906.
This was described from 34 specimens collected
by August Busck in Santo Domingo, West Indies.
The collection contains one male bearing the type
label and many more than 33 specimens bearing
original data. It is not possible to pick the original
syntypes from these, but we accept the specimen
marked as type as the holotype. This bears the
labels “99.4 / St. Domingo W. I. Aug. / Aug.
Busck Collector / Type No. 9138 U.S.N.M. /
Gymnometopa mediovittata Coq.” The larval
and pupal skins are mounted on a slide.
Aedes melanimon Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 12: 126.
1924.
This was described from 15 females and 2
males, and all of them are in the collection. Five
are labeled as types, including the 2 males, and
the rest as paratypes. We select as lectotype one
of the 2 males with terminalia mounted on slide
no. 1955.
Aedes mercurator Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 8: 13.
1920.
This was described from 65 specimens collected
at Dawson, Yukon Territory, July 1919. There
are 84 specimens in the collection bearing the
original data. One male and one female bear the
type label and Dyar’s determination label. We
select as lectotype the male, with terminalia on
slide no. 1165, collected July 15, 1919.
Aedes meridionalis Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 195. 1906.
This was described in the larval stage from a
specimen collected at Las Loras, near Punta-
renas, Costa Rica, which had been determined
by Coquillett as Janthinosoma musica Say. There
are 22 topotypic adult specimens and several
larval skins collected by Knab. One male bears
the labels “No. 3336 See F. Knab’s Entom.
notes / Las Loras nr. Puntarenas, C. R. / Aedes
meridionalis D. & K. Type.” Since the species
was described from the larva, we select the larval
skin associated with this adult as the lectotype.
The pupal skin and the adult are part of the same
STONE AND KNIGHT: MOSQUITOES. II
221
individual, but left undescribed in the original
publication. No specimen from the type locality
bears any determination label by Coquillett.
Catatassomyia meronephada Dyar and Shannon,
Ins. Inse. Mens. 13: 71. 1925.
This was described from 16 females from Los
Banos, Laguna, lLuzén, Philippine Islands.
Fifteen of these syntypes are in the collection
and one in the British Museum. We select as
lectotype a specimen collected May 12, 1921,
bearing the additional label ““Mt. Makiling 1500-
2000 Ft.”
Aedes metalepticus Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 8:
51. 1920.
There are seven specimens in the collection
labeled “Type No. 22714, U.S.N.M.” and ap-
parently five specimens were returned to Italy.
It is probable that Dyar intended the one male
to be the type, although it is not clear from the
original description. We select as lectotype this
male, from Scais, July 19, 1901, bearing Dyar’s
label ‘“‘Aedes metalepticus Dyar Type <7,’ with
the terminalia on slide no. 1236, also labeled
“type.”
Aedes metoecopus Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 13:
30. 1925.
The original description mentions no types,
Dyar merely stating that both sexes were before
him, and we know only that the specimens came
from Eeuador. There are nine specimens from
Ecuador in the collection, but only one of each
sex bears a Museum type label (without num-
ber). We select as lectotype a male bearing the
labels ‘2107 / 86 / Ecuador F. Campos R. /
Aedes (Finlaya) metoecopus Dyar Type.’ The
terminalia are on slide no. 2107.
Aedes (Skusea) miachaetessa Dyar and Shannon,
Ins. Insc. Mens. 13: 78. 1925.
The lectotype female selected by Knight and
Hull (1953, p. 478) is in the collection.
Aedes stimulans mississipptti Dyar, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 8: 113. 1920.
The two syntypes, male and female, are in the
collection, and we select as lectotype the male,
which bears Dyar’s determination and type label
in addition to the Museum type label. The
terminalia are mounted on slide no. 1263.
222
Culex mitchellae Dyar, Journ. New York Ent.
Soc. 13: 74. 1905.
This was described from 61 specimens, one
from Jacksonville, Fla., being selected as type
[holotype]. Only one of the specimens bears the
type label, and it also bears the labels “ |3|7 & 8 /
Miami, Fla. / H. G. Dyar Collector / Culex
mitchellae Dyar Type 8402.” The published type
number is 8407, and the slide of larval and pupal
skins bears the label ‘Culex mitchellae Dyar
Type 8407 Culex sylvestris Theobald |3|7 & 8.”
The slide also contains a larval and pupal skin of
Aedes vexans (Meigen). On going to the type
catalogue we found that the number 8407 is
assigned to Mimagyrta pulchella and that Culex
mitchellae is listed under number 8402, with
Jacksonville, Fla., as the locality. We conclude
that 8402 is the correct type number, which was
changed to 8407 in labeling the slide and in
publication by error, and that the type locality
is Jacksonville, since Miami is not even listed in
the original publication as one of the localities for
the species.
Aedes (Heteronycha) muelleri Dyar, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 8: 81. 1920.
The original description of this species states,
“Types, No. 22826, U. S. Nat. Mus; male and
female, Mexico City, Mexico (Juan Miiller).”
These two syntypes are in the collection with the
male labeled as type, the female as paratype.
We select as lectotype the male, with terminalia
mounted on slide no. 1253.
Aedes mutatus Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 7: 24. 1919.
Dyar labeled one of the numerous males from
Missoula as type and this we consider to be the
holotype. It bears the labels ‘‘Missoula, Mont.
July 6, 1917 / H. G. Dyar Coll. / Type No. 21918
U.S.N.M. / Slide 663 / Aedes mutatus Dyar
Type.” The slide is of the terminalia.
Stegomyia nigritia Ludlow, Can. Ent. 42: 194.
1910.
This was described from two females collected
at Cottabato, Mindanao, Philippine Islands, in
December. There is a single female in the collec-
tion bearing the label “Stegomyia nigritia n. sp.
Type P. I. Nov.” Since no other specimen has
been found that could be considered as the type,
we select this specimen as lectotype in spite of
the difference in date of collection.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, NO. 7, °
Grabhamia mgromaculis Ludlow, George Wash-
ington Univ. Bull. 5 (4): 83. 1906.
This was described from an unstated number
of specimens collected at Fort Keogh, Mont.,
and Fort Lincoln, N. D. The collection contains
five syntypes labeled “Type No. 10147
U.S.N.M.” Four were collected at Fort Keogh,
September 1906, and the fifth at Fort Makenzie,
Wyo., a place not mentioned in the original de-
scription. We select as lectotype the female from
Fort Keogh bearing a determination label.
Aedes niphadopsis Dyar and Knab, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 5: 166. 1918.
The three syntype females are in the collection,
and we select as lectotype the one bearing Dyar’s
determination label.
Aedes (Finlaya) niveus nipponicus LaCasse and
Yamaguti, Mosquito Fauna of Japan and
Korea, pt. 2: 79. 1948.
The original description of this species desig-
nates no types but states that it was collected in
a number of places on Kyushu and Honshu,
Japan. A male and female in the collection are
labeled as types, but since these were collected
on August 29, 1949, more than a year after the
species was published, they cannot be considered
as types. The earliest adult labeled nipponicus
was collected in May 1948, still too late for the
March 1 publication. There is a single larval slide
collected in September 1947, but it is not labeled
nipponicus and may not have been seen by
LaCasse or Yamaguti. It is probable that there
is no true type material in existence.
Culex nivitarsis Coquillett,
Washington 6: 168. 1904.
This was said to have been described from a
female and a male collected at Paterson, N. J.,
May 12, by J. B. Smith, and the specimens re-
turned to the collector. The New Jersey collec-
tion contained these two specimens, each marked
as type, but the female is dated May 17. Both
were from Garret Mountain. These are now de-
posited in the U. 8. National Museum collection,
and we select the female as lectotype, since the
male lacks the abdomen and all but one leg.
Proc. Ent. Soc.
Aedes obturbator Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 15: 9. 1907.
This was described from 22 specimens from
Tarpon Bay, Bahama Islands, only 12 of which
JubLy 1956
are now under the name in the collection. Only
one of these bears a type label, and this female
we consider to be the holotype.
Danielsia paget Ludlow, Psyche 18: 128. 1911.
The lectotype female selected by Knight and
Hull (1953, p. 463) is in the collection.
Aedes pagetonotum Dyar and Knab, Smith-
sonian Misc. Coll. 52: 253. 1909.
A note in the collection reads, ‘“Note re Aedes
pagetonotum D. & K. Jan 28, 1925. Located 8
types. The 2 gone may have been sent to Dr.
Hewitt by me not then known to be types. H. G.
Dyar.” The eight types are in the collection,
seven of them bearing type labels. We select as
lectotype the first specimen listed in the descrip-
tion, a male bearing the labels ‘'15.5.00 / Ottawa
/ Through J. Fletcher / See slide No. 343 / Type
No. 12057 U.S.N.M.” The male terminalia are
on slide no. 343.
Culex pallidohirta Grossbeck, Can. Ent. 37: 359.
1905.
There are two syntype females of this in the
collection, one labeled as cotype that has been in
the collection for a considerable time, the other
labeled female type and recently presented to the
collection by Rutgers University. We select as
lectotype this latter specimen, bearing the label
“Orange Mts., N. J. V. 26.”
Aedes palustris Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 4: 89.
1916.
This was described from an unstated number
of syntypes in the collection. Several bearing the
original data have been found and one male and
one female bear type labels. We have selected as
lectotype the male, bearing the labels “FKa /
Fallen Leaf, Lake Tahoe, Cal. June 6, 1916 /
Type No. 20351 U.S.N.M. / H. G. Dyar Coll /
Aedes palustris Dyar Type @.”
Aedes palustris var. pricet Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens.
5: 16, 1917.
The number of original specimens of this
variety was not stated, but inasmuch as there is
only one in the collection bearing the type label
“Type No. 21043 U.S.N.M.” we consider this as
the holotype. It is a female, also bearing the labels
“Wallen Leaf, Lake Tahoe, Cal. June 9, 1916 /
STONE AND KNIGHT: MOSQUITOES. II
223
H. G. Dyar Coll / Aedes palustris var pricei
Dyar. Type.”
Reedomyia pampangensis Ludlow, Can. Ent. 37:
94. 1905.
This was described from three specimens taken
in September at Angeles, Pampanga, Luzén,
Philippine Islands. No specimen bearing these
data has been found in the collection, but there
is one female bearing the labels ‘“Type No. 27795
U.'S.N.M. / Reedomyia pampangensis Ludl.
Camp Wm. McKinley, Rizal, P.I. Oct. 25, Nov.
3, 05 Type.” The last label is in Ludlow’s hand-
writing. Knight and Hull (1953, p. 454) have ac-
cepted this as the holotype, but since it was col-
lected after the publication of the name it does
not seem possible to consider this as of the type
series, and it is probable that there are no syn-
types in existence.
Aedes panayensis Ludlow, Psyche 21: 159. 1914.
The male lectotype selected by Laffoon (1946,
p. 242) is in the collection.
Aedes (Culicelsa) perichares Dyar, Ins. Insc.
Mens. 9: 36. 1921.
This was described from nine males and five
females from Ciruelas, Costa Rica. These syn-
types are all in the collection, each bearing the
label “Type No. 23972 U.S.N.M.” We have
selected as lectotype a female bearing the label
‘“‘Aedes perichares Dyar Type.”
Aedes pertinax Grabham, Can. Ent. 38: 316.
1906.
This was described from an unstated number
of specimens from Jamaica. There are three
males and two females in the collection bearing
the labels ‘‘Rec’d from Dr. Grabham 10 July
1906 / Kingston, Jam. IV.10.06 temp. pools.”
It is quite certain that these are syntypes, and
we select as lectotype a male bearing Dyar’s
label ‘‘pertinax”’ and with the terminalia mounted
on slide no. 206.
Aedes pionips Dyar, Ins. Inse. Mens. 7: 19. 1919.
Dyar labeled a male and a female as types of
this species, selected from 152 specimens. We
select as lectotype the male bearing the labels
“994 / BO / White River, Ont. June 19, 1918 /
H. G. Dyar coll. / Type No. 21922 U.S.N.M.
Aedes pionips Dyar Type.”’ The terminalia are
on slide no. 994.
224
Aedes pix Martini, Mosquitoes of Mexico: 55.
1935.
Two females were sent to the British Museum
in 1950, and these were marked as cotypes by
Mattingly (1955, p. 29). One of these was sent to
the U. S. National Museum and was labeled as
lectotype by John Lane. Through the kind offices
of Mr. Mattingly, Dr. Weyer permitted this speci-
men to be deposited in the U. 8. National
Museum. Lane and Cerqueira, in Lane (1953, p.
652), state that the lectotype is in the British
Museum, apparently forgetting that it had been
deposited in Washington. The second specimen
was in very poor condition and is probably lost.
Aedes plutocraticus Dyar and Knab. Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 15: 11. 1907.
Fifty-eight of the original 63 specimens of
this species are in the collection and a female
bears the type label. We consider this to be the
holotype. Its data are: ‘Nassau, Bahamas
6-21-03 T. H. Coffin Coll. 10.”
Aedes podographicus Dyar and Knab. Proc. Biol.
Soc. Washington 19: 165. 1906.
Two specimens in the collection, a male and a
female, bear type labels. We select as lectotype
the female, bearing the labels ‘‘No. 325). See F.
Knab’s Entom. Notes / Sonsonate, Salv. / Type
No. 10015 U.S.N.M. / Aedes podographicus
D. and K. Type.’”’ Number 325] applies to several
specimens, no larval skins of which were saved.
Culex portoricensis Ludlow, Can. Ent. 37: 386.
1905.
Syntypes of this stand under two Museum
catalogue numbers in the collection, 10007 and
27804, the specimens apparently having been re-
ceived and entered at two different times. We
have selected as lectotype a male bearing the
original data and the type no. 10007.
Culex pretans Grossbeck, Ent. News 15: 332.
1904.
This was described from 15 females collected
in four localities in New Jersey. There are 11 of
these specimens in the collection, one labeled
type and the others labeled cotype. The one
labeled type was collected at Great Piece
Meadow, N. J., May 12, and we select this as
lectotype.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, NO. 7 .
Aedes prolixus Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 10: 2. 1922.
“The three syntype males of this arein the col-
lection and we select as lectotype the one from
Anchorage, Alaska, with terminalia mounted on
slide no. 1579.
Culex pullatus Coquillett, Proc. Ent. Soe. Wash-
ington 6: 168. 1904.
The one female and ten males reared from
larvae are all labeled ‘“Type No. 8030 U.S.N.M.”
The female bears Coquillett’s determination
label, but we select as lectotype a male with
terminalia mounted on slide no. 21. It is from
Kaslo, British Columbia, and emerged June 12.
Aedes punctodes Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 10: 1.
1922.
The male lectotype selected by Knight (1951,
p. 97) is in the collection, with the terminalia
mounted on slide no. 1582.
Culex quadrivittatus Coquillett, Can. Ent. 34:
293. 1902.
Seven of the original eight females are in the
collection, and one of these bearing the type
label and Coquillett’s determination label we
consider to be the holotype.
Aedes quaylei Dyar and Knab, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 14: 191. 1906.
This name was proposed for the salt-marsh
form of Culex curriei Coquillett from the Pacific
coast as treated by Quayle (1906, p. 4), and the
only characters given are to be found in the key
to the larvae. No specimens are labeled as types
in the collection, and most of the specimens that
might have been those seen by Dyar and Knab
when they described quaylei are probably also
the syntypes of Culex lativittatus. We do not feel
that any specimens in the collection can be
certainly identified as syntypes of quaylet.
Aedes (Ecculex) rhecter Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 9:
51. 1921.
This was described from one male and five
female syntypes from Lomagundi and Lorenzo
Marquez, Portuguese East Africa. The male bears
the labels “Howard Coll. / Lomagundi Noy.
09 / Slide 709 / Type No. 23928 U.S.N.M. /
Aedes rhecter Dyar Type,” and we designate
this as the lectotype. The terminalia are mounted
on slide no. 709.
Juny 1956
Aedes riparius Dyar and Knab, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 15: 213. 1907.
Only two of the original 68 specimens, a male
and a female, are labeled as types. We select as
lectotype the female, in excellent condition, col-
lected June 21, 1907.
Stegomyia scutellaris var. samarensis Ludlow,
Journ. New York Ent. Soc. 11: 138. 1903.
This was described with no statement as to the
number of specimens, time of collection, or
locality other than Samar. The collection contains
four females and two males, each bearing the
label “Type No. 27790, U.S.N.M.,” and one of
these bears the additional label ‘“Stegomyia
samarensis Ludlow, Catabig, Samar, P.I., Type
C.8.L.” This is a female in fairly good condition,
and we here designate it as lectotype.
Aedes sansoni Dyar and Knab, Can. Ent. 41:
102. 1909.
This was described from five syntypes collected
at Banff, Alberta. Dyar (1917, p. 114) selected
specimen no. 10 as the type [lectotype].
Aedes septemstriatus Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 15: 10. 1907.
Two of the original three specimens are in the
collection, and we consider the holotype to be a
female bearing the following labels: “8 / Blue-
fields Nicar. / W. F. Thornton Collector / Type
No. 10144 U.S.N.M. / Haemagogus septemstri-
atus D. & K. Type.”
Taeniorhynchus sierrensis Ludlow, Can. Ent. 37:
231. 1905.
There are 12 syntypes of this species in the
collection, and we have selected as lectotype a
female bearing the determination label in Lud-
low’s handwriting.
Culex stphonalis Grossbeck, Can. Ent. 36: 332.
1904.
This was described from two females and five
males reared from larvae collected at Livingston
Park, N. J. All these specimens are in the collec-
tion, labeled ““N Brunswick”’ with dates of V.9,
V.10, and V.11. One female and one male are
labeled as types and the rest as cotypes. We
select as lectotype the female “‘type’”’ collected
May 10.
STONE AND KNIGHT: MOSQUITOES.
Il 225
Culex squamiger Coquillett, Proc. U. 8. Nat.
Mus. 25: 85. 1902.
The four female syntypes are in the collection,
and we select as lectotype the one from Palo
Alto (labeled “Stan U Cal.) and_ bearing
Coquillett’s determination label.
Culex sylvicola Grossbeck, Can. Ent. 38: 129.
1906.
The original series on which this name was
based consisted of 21 males and 20 females in the
New Jersey Agricultural Experiment Station
collection. A male and one female, each labeled
type, and 24 ‘“‘cotypes”’ are still in existence, and
all but 13 of the ‘“cotypes” are in the U. S.
National Museum collection. We select as lecto-
type the female “type” labeled ‘Livingston
Park, N. J. V.6.”
Aedes tahoensis Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 4: 82.
1916.
This was described from an unstated number
of specimens reared at Fallen Leaf, Lake Tahoe,
Calif., the latter part of May and first of June
1916. The collection contains one undissected
male labeled “FE14 / Fallen Leaf, Lake Tahoe,
Cal., June 5, 1916 / Type No. 20352 U.S.N.M. /
H. G. Dyar Coll. / Aedes Tahoensis Dyar Type
&.” There are a great many other specimens of
the type series, but we select as lectotype the
male mentioned above.
Aedes thibaultt Dyar and Knab, Proc. Ent. Soc.
Washington 11: 174. 1910.
This was described from a pair from Scott,
Ark., both bearing a type label. The male bears
the determination label, and the terminalia are
on slide no. 524. The female is lost from the
point except for one femur. We select the male as
lectotype.
Aedes thorntont Dyar and Knab, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 15: 10. 1907.
The seven original specimens are in the collec-
tion, and the female bearing the type number and
Dyar’s determination and type label we consider
to be the holotype.
Aedes tormentor Dyar and Knab, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 14: 191. 1906.
This species was described in a key to the
larvae from specimens collected in Baton Rouge,
226
La., by Dupree. A female in the collection bears
the labels ‘‘Baton Rouge, La. / J. H. Dupree
¥106 / Culex serratus Coq. / Aedes tormentor
D. & K. “serratus” [Dyar’s handwriting]. There
are also the fragments of a larval skin on a slide,
but the slide is not numbered and may not belong
to this specimen. Since there is no determinable
larval material from the original series, we feel
that no lectotype can be selected.
Aedes traversus Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 13: 215.
1925.
The three original syntype females, all bearing
identical original data, are in the collection. We
have labeled the best of these as lectotype.
Culex trichurus Dyar, Journ. New York Ent.
Soc. 12: 170. 1904.
The original description of this is of the egg
and four larval instars. A female collected in
British Columbia flying over a pool containing
larvae of this species produced eggs, which
hibernated over winter and produced larvae the
following spring. The only adult material was
said to be the badly rubbed original female and
a broken male reared in Massachusetts by Dim-
mock from a similar larva. Neither of these
specimens has been found in the collection. There
is one slide of fragments of three larval skins, two
of them, at least, not last stage, that are probably
of the original series, but these are so poor that
there seems no point in selecting a lectotype
from them.
Culex trivittatus Coquillett, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 10: 198. 1902.
This was described from two females collected
at Chester, N. J. Only one of these appears to be
in the collection, and this bears the type label
and Coquillett’s determination label. This we
consider to be the holotype. There is one other
specimen from Chester, but this has no type
label and bears the label “Aldrich Collection,”
which throws some doubt on its being the other
original specimen.
Aedes uncatus Grabham, Can. Ent. 39: 25. 1907.
This was described from an unstated number
of adults, presumably of both sexes, and larvae,
from Jamaica. There are two females and five
males in the collection labeled ‘““Kingston Jam. /
M. Grabham Collector.’’ We select as lectotype
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, NO. 7
a male which also bears the labels “See slide No.
210” and “uncatus,” the latter in pencil, prob-
ably by Dyar. The terminalia are mounted on
slide no. 210.
Aedes vinnipegensis Dyar, Ins. Insc. Mens. 7: 34.
1919.
Thirty-six of the original 37 females are in the
collection, but only one bears the type number.
This, which we consider to be the holotype, bears
the original data and Dyar’s handwritten label
‘““Aedes vinnipegensis Dyar Type.”
Aedes whitmoret Dunn, Proc. Ent. Soc. Washing-
ton 20: 128. 1918.
The 12 syntype females of this are in the col-
lection, all in rather poor condition. We select as
lectotype one bearing the label ‘Aedes whitmorei
Dunn. Cotype.”’
The following taxa are in the collection based
either on unique specimens or on clearly desig-
nated holotypes:
Aedes acrophilus Dyar, 1917
Aedes (A.) adustus Laffoon, 1946
Anisocheleomyia albitarsis Ludlow, 1905
Aedes aloponotum Dyar, 1917
Aedes (Finlaya) ananae Knight and Laffoon, 1946
Aedes (Stegomyia) arboricolus Knight and Roze-
boom, 1946
Aedes (Howardina) argyrites Dyar and Nunez
Tovar, 1927
Aedes (Geoskusea) baisasi Knight and Hull, 1951
Aedes (Stegomyia) bambusicolus Knight and Roze-
boom, 1946
Aedes (A.) bifoliatus King and Hoogstraal, 1947
Culex bimaculatus Coquillett, 1902
Aedes (Stegomyia) boharti Knight and Rozeboom,
1946
Aedes (Christophersitomyia) brayi Knight 1947
Aedes (A.) campylostylus Laftoon, 1946
Culex cantator Coquillett, 1903
Aedes cataphylla Dyar, 1916
Aedes (Finlaya) leucocelaenus
Carpenter, and Trapido, 1953
Aedes colonarius Dyar, 1924
Aedes (Finlaya) croceus Knight and Laffoon, 1946
Aedes (Geoskusea) daggyi Stone and Bohart, 1944
Aedes (Skusea) dasyorrhus King and Hoogstraal,
1946
Aedes decticus Howard, Dyar, and Knab, 1917
Aedes (Finlaya) dobodurus King and Hoogstraal,
1946
Aedes (Finlaya) dorseyi Knight, 1946
clarki Galindo,
JuLy 1956
Aedes (Stegomyia) downs? Bohart and Ingram, 1946
Aedes (A.) dux Dyar and Shannon, 1925
Aedes dysanor Dyar, 1921
Aedes (Ochlerotatus) edgari Stone and Rosen, 1952
Aedes (Finlaya) eucleptes Dyar, 1921
Aedes euochros Howard, Dyar, and Knab, 1917
Aedes (Mucidus) ferinus Knight, 1947
Aedes (A.) foliformis King and Hoogstraal, 1947
Aedes (Stegomyia) guamensis Farner and Bohart,
1944
Aedes (Stegomyia) gurneyt Stone and Bohart, 1944
Aedes (Stegomyia) hakanssoni Knight and Hurl-
but, 1949
Aedes (A.) hamistylus Laffoon, 1946
Aedes (Finlaya) harpert Knight, 1948
Aedes (Ochlerotatus) hastatus Dyar, 1922
Aedes (Siegomyia) hensilli Farner, 1945
Aedes (Finlaya) hollandius King and Hoogstraal,
1946
Aedes (Stegomyia) hoogstraali Knight and Roze-
boom, 1946
Verrallina insolita Coquillett, 1906
Aedes iridipennis Dyar, 1922
Aedes (A.) johnsoni Laffoon, 1946
Aedes (Finlaya) keefec King and Hoogstraal, 1946
Aedes klotst Matheson, 1933
Aedes (Finlaya) knighti Stone and Bohart, 1944
Aedes labradorensis Dyar and Shannon, 1925
Aedes (Finlaya) lacteus Knight, 1946
Aedes (Stegomyia) laffoonit Knight and Rozeboom,
1946
Aedes (Skusea) lamelliferus Bohart and Ingram,
1946
Aedes (Finlaya) laoagensis Knight, 1946
Aedes (A.) leilae King and Hoogstraal, 1947
Aedes (Finlaya) lewellent Starkey and Webb, 1946
Aedes (Finlaya) leucopleurus Rozeboom, 1946
Aedes leucotaeniatus Komp, 1938
Aedes (Pseudoskusea) lunulatus King and Hoog-
straal, 1946
Aedes (Finlaya) luzonensis Rozeboom, 1946
Aedes (A.) macrodizxoa Dyar and Shannon, 1925
Aedes (Stegomyia) marshallensis Stone and Bohart.
1944
Aedes masamae Dyar, 1920
Aedes (Ochlerotatus) mathesont Middlekauff, 1944
Aedes (Finlaya) medleri Knight and Laffoon, 1946
Aedes millert Dyar, 1922
Aedes (A.) milnensis King and Hoogstraal, 1947
Aedes mimesis Dyar, 1917
Aedes (A.) multifolium King and Hoogstraal, 1947
Aedes (A.) neomacrodixoa King and Hoogstraal,
1947
Finlaya nigra Ludlow, 1905
Pseudoskusea nigrotarsis Ludlow, 1908
Aedes (Aedimorphus) oakley Stone, 1939
Aedes (Finlaya) okinawanus Bohart, 1946
STONE AND KNIGHT: MOSQUITOES. II
227
Aedes oligopistus Dyar, 1918
Popea palawanensis Ludlow, 1914
Aedes (Ochlerotatus) fulvus pallens Ross, 1943
Taeniorhynchus palliatus Coquillett, 1906
Aedes (Stegomyia) pandani Stone, 1939
Aedes (Finlaya) paradissimilis Rozeboom, 1946
Aedes (A.) parasimilis King and Hoogstraal, 1947
Aedes (Stegomyia) paullust Stone and Farner, 1947
Aedes pearyt Dyar and Shannon, 1925
Aedes (Stegomyia) pernotatus Farner and Bohart,
1944
Aedes platylepidus Knight and Hull, 1951
Aedes (Finlaya) plumiferus King and Hoogstraal,
1946
Aedes poliochros Dyar, 1919
Aedes polyagrus Dyar, 1918
Aedes prodotes Dyar, 1917
Aedes (Ochlerotatus) pseudodiantaeus Smith, 1952
Stegomyia punctifemore Ludlow, 1921
Aedes (A.) quadrispinatus King and Hoogstraal,
1947
Stegomyia quasinigritia Ludlow, 1911
Aedes (Stegomyia) quasiscutellaris Farner and Bo-
hart, 1944
Aedes (A.) reesi King and Hoogstraal, 1947
Aedes (Stegomyta) riverst Bohart and Ingram, 1946
Aedes (Stegomyia) rotanus Bohart and Ingram,
1946
Aedes (Stegomyia) saipanensis Stone, 1945
Aedes (Finlaya) saperoi Knight, 1946
Aedes schizopinax Dyar, 1929
Aedes (Finlaya) scutellalbum Boshell-Manrique,
1939
Aedes (Stegomyta) scutoscriplus Bohart and In-
gram, 1946
Aedes (A.) sentanius King and Hoogstraal, 1947
Aedes (Aedimorphus) senyavinensis Knight and
Hurlbut, 1949
Aedes (Finlaya) sherki Knight, 1948
Aedes (A.) simplus King and Hoogstraal, 1947
Aedes (Finlaya) solomonis Stone and Bohart, 1944
Aedes (Finlaya) stone: Knight and Laffoon, 1946
Aedes (Finlaya) subalbitarsis King and Hoog-
straal, 1946
Aedes (Levua) suvae Stone and Bohart, 1944
Aedes thaxtert Dyar and Knab, 1919
Aedes (Taeniorhynchus ?) thelcter Dyar, 1918
Aedes (A.) trispinatus King and Hoogstraal, 1947
Aedes (Finlaya) tstliensis King and Hoogstraal,
1946
Aedes (Leptosomatomyia)
Hoogstraal, 1946
Culex varipalpus Coquillett, 1902
Aedes ventrovittis Dyar, 1916
Aedes tortilis virginensis Dyar, 1922
vartepictus King and
Aedes zodsophus Dyar and Knab, 1918
228
LITERATURE CITED
Dyar, H. G. Notes on the mosquitoes of British
Columbia. Proc. Ent. Soc. Washington 6:
37-41. 1904.
——. Notes on the Aedes of Montana. Ins. Insc.
Mens. 5: 104-121. 1917.
Dyar, H. G., and Knas, F. The larvae of Culi-
cidae classified as independent organisms.
Journ. New York Ent. Soc. 14: 169-230. 1906.
. On the identity of Culex pallidohirta
(Diptera, Culicidae). Proc. Ent. Soc. Washing-
ton 12: 81-82. 1910.
GrabpuaM, M. Notes on some Jamaican Culicidae.
Can. Ent. 37: 401-411. 1905.
Knieut, K. L. The Aedes (Ochlerotatus) punc-
tor subgroup in North America (Diptera,
Culicidae). Ann. Ent. Soc. Amer. 44: 87-99.
1951.
Knieut, K. L., and Hutt, W. B. The Aedes
mosquitoes of the Philippine Islands. I. Keys
to species. Subgenera Mucidus, Ochlerotatus,
and Finlaya (Diptera, Culicidae). Pacifie Sci.
5: 211-251. 1951.
—. The Aedes mosquitoes of the Philip-
pine Islands. II. Subgenera Skusea, Christo-
phersiomyia, Geoskusea, Rhinoskusea, and
Stegomyia (Diptera, Culicidae). Pacific Sci.
6: 157-189. 1952.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 7
The Aedes mosquitoes of the Philip-
pine Islands. III. Subgenera Aedimorphus,
Banksinella, Aedes, and Cancraedes (Diptera,
Culicidae). Pacific Sci. 7: 453-481. 1953.
Knrieut, K. L., and Marks, E. N. An annotated
checklist of the mosquitoes of the subgenus
Finlaya, genus Aedes. Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus.
101: 513-574. 1952.
Kumm, H. W., and Komp, W. H. W. Aedes
(Howardina) allotecnon, a new species of
Aedes from Costa Rica and a description of the
larva, adult and male terminalia of Aedes
quadrivittatus Coq. Proc. Ent. Soc. Washing-
ton 43: 17-25. 1941.
LAFFOON, JEAN. The Philippine mosquitoes of
the genus Aedes, subgenus Aedes. Journ.
Washington Acad. Sci. 36: 228-245. 1946.
Lane, JouHn. Neotropical Culicidae 2: 553-1112.
1953.
Martinety, P. F. Mosquitoes (Diptera, Culici-
dae) from the Tropical Institute of Hamburg.
Proc. Roy. Soe. Ent. Soc. London (B) 24:
1955. 27-33.
QuayLE, H. J. Notes on the egg-laying habits of
Culex curriei Cog. Ent. News 17: 4-5. 1906.
Smitu, J. B., and Grossseck, J. A. Description
of some mosquito larvae, with notes on their
habits. Psyche 12: 13-18. 1905.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
1409TH MEETING, APRIL 8, 1955
J. R. Hewxier, of the National Institutes of
Health, addressed the Society on Some observa-
tions on cancer research and control. Cancer control,
from the standpoint of the Public Health Service
is an entity that is susceptible to the same type
of attack that has proved so successful in many
other chronic diseases. The factors useful in this
control may be summarized as follows:
1. Education, for both lay and professional
people through all media.
2. Diagnosis, through the skillful application of
all known methods.
3. Epidemiology: i.e., the study of its inci-
dence, which shows very curious variation. For
example, breast cancer is very low in Japanese
women, stomach cancer very high in Japanese
men, cervical cancer very low in Jewish women and
two times higher in Negroes than in whites. Lung
cancer six times higher in men than women, and
particularly high in Austria, Scandinavia, and
England.
4. Prevention, particularly through the re-
moval of known carcinogens from the environ-
ment; e.g., beryllium, tar, sunlight.
5. Treatment: Surgery, radiation, and we hope
ultimately chemical agents. (No one has been
cured chemically yet, though some cancers re-
spond favorably.)
6. Research in causes of cancers; and note the
plural (there are probably as many kinds of cancer
as there are other diseases, so we will have cures).
Specific areas for research are: into carcinogenesis,
into the nature and metabolism of cancers them-
selves, and into the ‘‘Host-parasite relationship.”’
Illustrative of the latter is the fact that ‘‘an iras-
cible old curmugeon hangs on a long time, while
the gentle sweet person goes fast.”’
A series of colorful slides showing the changing
and increasingly important cancer problem in the
last forty years was shown. Cancer now ranks
second in causes of death, and certain types, such
as lung cancer, have shown phenomenal increases.
This type has doubled in the past ten years and
is 26 fold up over 40 years ago.
Dr. Heller also described in details the project
in Shelby County, Tenn., where an attempt is
Jury 1956
being made to examine all women 20 years of age
and older by a technique that is equivalent to a
biopsy of the cervix. In the past two years, 165,000
—about 85 percent of the population—have been
done, a thousand were found to be suspicious, and
half of these to have an unsuspected malignancy.
The distribution of types of cancer with age
showed that the intra-epithelial type in the
20-year-olds could be expected to change to the
invasive type after an average time of 19 years.
There seems therefore to be a type of cervical
cancer that can stay safe for long enough for the
woman to bear children. The method gives
promise of completely eliminating cervical
cancer as a cause of death, though it requires
continual screening and control.
A short description of the facilities of the
National Institutes of Health and their operation
was given.
A discussion by McNish, Potter, Tuckerman,
Henderson, and others followed. The problem of
how to deal with cancer quackery produced the
greatest interest. (Secretary’s abstract.)
1410TH MEETING, APRIL 22, 1955
GrorG WeinsiuM, of The Institut fiir
Schiffbau, Hamburg, spoke on Problems in ship
theory. The art of the shipbuilder is a very old one,
but is nevertheless replete with unsolved problems
in nearly every phase, because not only are the
conditions which a ship has to meet immensely
variable, but also because the construction, the
materials, and the methods of propulsion have
all changed enormously in relatively recent times.
The discussion was deliberately simplified by
considering a ship to be a rigid body; thus avoid-
ing all problems of strength and elasticity. The
properties that define a ship are:
1. Buoyancy—i.e. water support—three types
may be noted:
(a) archimedean or displacement
(b) hydroplane using hydrodynamic forces
(ec) hydrofoil
2. Stability
3. Powering
(a) Resistance
(b) Propulsion
4. Seaworthiness:
(a) Safety and seakindliness
5. Maneuverability
6. Freedom from vibration
7. We omit strength—a study in itself
Of these properties only powering was treated
in detail. Powering, the relation between resist-
PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
229
ance and propulsion, is most complex. A slide
(originally due to von Karman) plotting speed
attained against specific power—that is horse
power per ton of the vehicle in question—was
presented showing practically all of man’s
vehicles: the pedestrian, the horse, submarine,
ship, airplane, tank, truck, auto, hydroplane and
hydroglider. The power required seems to go up
never less fast than the cube of the speed, but
may in some cases be much worse, and all vehi-
cles tend to le in a band of slope 3.
A series of technical slides showing the varia-
tions in ‘‘wave resistance” with hull form was
shown: Wave resistance per ton of displacement
plotted against Froude number (v?/lg). It was
pointed out that esthetics are a delusive guide:
an “ugly” form sometimes proving to have a
remarkably low wave resistance.
The frictional resistance problem has not been
seriously attacked as yet. Desperate measures
suggested are: Removing the boundary layer, or
substituting air for it. Success would save two
thirds of the power. River craft of small burden
have in fact been constructed to float on air
bubbles.
The only worth-while improvement in pro-
pulsion since the invention of the screw propeller
has been the addition of the nozzle. Cavitation
still sets limits to any propeller’s effectiveness.
Maneuverability and seaworthiness are also
complex problems. The latter may be divided
into “‘safety”’ and “‘seakindliness,” but a quanti-
tative theoretical approach is all but impossible.
(Secretary’s abstract.)
1411TH MEETING, MAY 6, 1955
Conyers Herrine, of the Bell Telephone
Laboratories, spoke On the surface energy of
crystals and its relation to sintering. Sintering is
the process by which small particles of metal, or
other substance, can be forced, at relatively
modest pressures and at temperatures below the
melting point, to coalesce into a mass indis-
tinguishable from the bulk material. This process
lowers the free energy by decreasing the total
surface area. Quantitatively, the free energy,
“oamma,’? of Ni, Cu, ete., is about 1,000 ergs
per cm2, and complete sintering of 10 micron
particles reduces gamma by about 1 calorie per
mol: quite a small amount as reaction energies
go, but sufficient.
230
The processes by which the material moves in
sintering are:
(1) Plastic flow, which is the principal process
with glassy materials, and is motivated by surface
tension.
(2) Evaporation and condensation, motivated
by the difference in surface tensions of convex and
concave surfaces, leading through the Gibbs-
Thomson relation to a difference in vapor pres-
sures. Smaller particles—more convex surfaces—
evaporate faster, while atoms condense more
easily on concave surfaces.
(3) Volume diffusion, the migration of atoms or
interstitial vacancies, motivated as before by the
curvature and pressure.
(4) Surface diffusion, migration in the surface
itself.
A plane surface of maximum density of atoms
is a surface of minimum gamma. If now we cut
a new plane not quite parallel to this plane we
will increase gamma by an amount which is
proportional to the angle at which we cut. A
polar plot of gamma against angle—the ‘‘gamma
plot’’—shows a cusp at zero angle, if the absolute
temperature is zero degrees. As the temperature
rises this cusp rounds off and becomes first
merely a minimum and then washes out alto-
gether. In principle there should be a cusp, at
zero degrees absolute, for all rational Miller
indices, not merely for small ones but the high
numbered cusps wash out very soon, as the
temperature rises. (Mathematically we have
here an infinitely dense set of points, with an
infinite number of discontinuities in slope!) A
polar plot of these cusps leads to the question
“What shape gives minimum gamma?’ Planes
drawn perpendicular to the radius vectors in the
polar gamma plot define a solid which will have
the shape required. The shapes that result are
spherical for liquids; ellipsoidal or lenticular for
liquid crystals, or tactoids; solids with cusps at
all rational orientations for crystals at zero; a
finite number of cusps at other temperatures for
crystals; and combinations of smooth surfaces,
curves, or angles for other substances. All these
should be found in nature, and existence depends
upon the number and location of the cusps in the
gamma plot.
This is true, of course, only for really small
crystals. Large crystals are too easily perturbed.
The same considerations also hold for small
empty spaces in sintered crystals. The spaces
(like particles) assume shapes determined by the
gamma plot.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, NO. 7
Turning to the kinetics of crystal growth and
of thermal etching, the results can be predicted
if we know the equilibrium shape. Any smooth
boundary plane will have a lower free energy
than a bumpy one, but any tangent plane that
is not a minimum gamma surface will etch and
become bumpy. Very slight differences in free
energy are very important.
Experiments to measure the surface tension
of multi-crystalline solids were described. On
certain assumptions the rate of creep can be
calculated from the self-diffusion constants and
agreement is excellent. A striking result is that
a single crystal wire showed enormously increased
resistance to stretching, as compared to a poly-
crystalline one. (Secretary’s abstract.)
14127H MEETING, MAY 20, 1955
IMMANUEL ESTERMANN, of the Office of
Naval Research, spoke on the Interaction of
molecular beams with surfaces. 1956 will be the
centenary of the kinetic theory of gases, first
proposed by Clausius and others in 1856. It is a
curious fact that the basic assumptions under-
lying it—elastic spheres, random motion, velocity
in hundreds of meters per sec, ete.—were not
given experimental proof for a most unusually
long time. They were taken on faith for nearly
fifty years. Dunoyer’s invention of the molecular
beam method was recognized by Stern as at
last providing a tool to measure the individual
velocity, mass, and elasticity separately and
directly as well as the number of molecules.
The answer to the question ‘Does molecular
reflection behave specularly, or does it obey the
cosine law?” seems to be ‘‘Neither.”’ For He
atoms impinging on LiF at low angles of inci-
dence, specular reflection is only 25 per cent, or
less. The remainder is partly diffracted, and
partly reflected according to the cosine law. The
DeBroglie theory provided a new approach
according to which the anomalous reflections of
atoms and molecules might be understood, in
terms of space lattices of atoms in the reflecting
surfaces. Even a crystal surface is “partially
rough” to an atomic beam. The molecular beam
method went beyond Davisson and Germer’s
work and showed that all particles, not merely
elementary ones, are characterized by a De
Broglie wave length. Thus the interaction be-
tween surfaces and gases is not describable in
JcuLy 1956 PROCEEDINGS:
general in terms of billiard balls, but in terms of
waves and surface periodicities.
What happens to the velocity of the particle
on reflection? Under the kinetic theory, it should
be unchanged. Actually, the accommodation
coefficient may vary all the way from zero to |:
(H on polished Pt: 0.3; CO, on Pt Black 0.98); in
the latter case the particle takes up the tempera-
ture of the surface, in the former it remains
unchanged.
We need to decide between two alternatives
here: either all the particles are reflected with
(say) a 75 percent accommodation coefficient, or
some have unity and some zero in the proportion
needed to give 75 percent. Helium on LiF turns
out to have zero! Estermann and Bennett’s work
on K atoms at 305°, and on copper at 209°, 343°,
and 401°C seems to show a coefficient of unity,
and Maxwellian distribution after reflection.
Future work on surfaces having intermediate
values was promised. (Secretary’s abstract.)
1413TH MEETING, JUNE 3, 1955
Wituiam SHockiey, of the Bell Telephone
Laboratories and the WSEG, spoke on The statis-
tics of individual variation in productivity vn
research laboratories. The talk reported the results
of an Operations Research study of the pro-
ductivity of scientists and its correlation with
salary in various institutions. As criterion of
productivity, the number of times a man’s name
appeared in Science Abstracts A over the past
five years was taken. Nobel Prize winners,
National Academy of Science members, and
typical faculty members were compared. The
Nobel winners published twice as much, and
there is a strong correlation between quantity and
quality.
By plotting the logarithm of the numbers of
papers against the number of men who publish
this number or less, the curve obtained is essen-
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
231
tially a “normal” one, i.e., linear, except for the
one or two very top men who are very productive.
This plot is true for the NBS, Brookhaven, the
Bell Laboratories (on the basis of patents taken
out) and seems to be a general phenomenon.
A proposed law for productivity of the form
P; = P, exp (—U,) would lead to such a plot.
In this formula P; is the individual productivity,
P, is the “situation” productivity, U, the ‘‘men-
tal barrier” to publication, and @ is proportional
to the reciprocal of the ‘mental temperature”
of the individual, 1.e. 1/k7'n.
Why should the variation in rate be so large,
when all are trained more or less alike? Rashev-
sky’s idea was discussed: several ideas must
inter-relate in the mind to produce an invention.
The number of ideas the mind can hold at one
time, therefore, is a very important parameter.
“The seventh idea adds seven times the area.”’
Output versus actual pay was plotted for the
NBS data. (Cautions to be observed are: Refer-
ences to faulty work, or to a compilation, are
sometimes more frequent than to good ones;
high pay people gravitate to administration with
increasing age.) The cumulative publication
figures for the four salary quartiles, plotted
against age show the same linear plot, with an
upturned tip. The first, highest, quartile publishes
much more than the fourth, though some indi-
viduals in the fourth publish much more than
some in the first. Many other criteria, of course,
enter into the estimate of the value of a man to
his organization.
It is of interest that the slope of the salary
curve is only one fifth that of the productivity
curve; that is 10 percent increase in salary is
earned by 50 per cent increase in papers pub-
lished.
In summary: the moral of the study is that
one should always get a few men of high pro-
ductivity, no matter what may be the cost.
(Secretary’s abstract.)
232
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, NO. 7
NOTES AND NEWS
PLASTIC SPRINGS
A practical procedure for mass-producing
plastic springs has been developed by the Na-
tional Bureau of Standards in work sponsored by
the Army Ordnance Corps. Springs formed in
this way! from glass fiber-reinforced resin have
desirable mechanical properties for a wide range
of applications. Until now plastic springs have
been little used because suitable techniques for
making springs of the types needed have been
lacking.
Polymeric materials, such as plastics and
rubbers, have a number of inherent advantages
for use in springs for special purposes. For exam-
ple, they are nonmagnetic and have low electrical
and thermal conductivity. They can be molded
directly to dimensions without the development
of any considerable internal stress. Their high
corrosion resistance should make them of value
for applications in chemical plants and installa-
tions subject to acid fumes or to salt air. Other
applications may benefit from the strength-to-
weight ratios of plastics, which are often higher
than those obtained with spring making metals.
Also, the broad range of transparent and colored
materials that can be used makes striking decora-
tive effects possible.
The plastic springs are molded by drawing
resin-soaked glass fibers through vinyl copolymer
tubing and wrapping the loaded tubing in a helix
around a mandrel. After curing in an air-circulat-
ing oven, the tubing is removed, leaving a solid
plastic spring reinforced with glass fibers.
The most successful procedure uses vinyl
chloride-vinyl acetate copolymer tubing having
a 14- or 34¢-inch inside diameter and a 1¢-inch
wall thickness. Lengths of glass rovings are
formed into a loose yarn, without twist, which is
then doubled back to make a U-shaped bundle.
This bundle is placed in a trough partly filled
with liquid resin and is immersed until thoroughly
soaked. A steel wire is threaded through the
tubing, attached to the bend in the U-shaped
bundle, and used to pull the bundle through the
tubing. Considerable force is applied to the wire
by means of a small windlass.
When the tubing is completely filled, the wire
1For further details, see Reinforced plastic
springs, by Frank W. Reinhart and Sanford B.
Newman, Product Engineering (in press).
is disconnected and the ends of the tubing sealed
with hose clamps. The tubing is wound on a
mandrel, and the entire assembly is placed in an
oven for curing under the conditions specified by
the resin manufacturer. After removal of the
tubing, postcuring is performed as required, and
the springs are cut and ground to the finished
length.
Of the resins studied, the most promising were
epoxides and polyesters. These resins are better
suited for spring applications on the basis of tor-
sional moduli, temperature sensitivity, and ease
of handling. In general, the polyesters are more
sensitive to elevated temperatures than the epoxy
resins, but the epoxy materials vary widely in
this respect.
Springs made from polyester resins with glass
fiber reinforcement showed good energy recovery
properties after short periods of storage at
—40°F., but these properties were adversely af-
fected by 13 days’ exposure to 135°F. while
under stress. The best results were obtained with
an epoxy resin cured with m-phenylenediamine.
Springs made of this material had torsional
moduli of rigidity of the order of 1.0 x 108 Ib/in?.
In 2-inch lengths they deflected 15 inch under a
static load of 25 lb. Three-inch springs of this
type retained 40 per cent of their original energy
when compressed to their solid length and stored
at 135°F. for 13 days.
When the glass-epoxy springs were tested for
recoverable energy a second time, higher values
were invariably obtained. This characteristic
“work tempering”’ of the epoxide resins was also
demonstrated in torsion tests on nonreinforced
plastic rods. An improvement of as much as 120
percent over the original available energy was
indicated. Preloading the epoxide spring during
storage or within 30 days before use would make
it possible to utilize this property of the material.
The mechanical and thermal properties of the
plastic springs can be varied widely by proper
choice of materials and dimensions. For example,
stiffer and probably more brittle springs result
when the glass content is increased. At the same
time a high degree of homogeneity in static prop-
erties can be achieved. Under a load of 25 pounds,
100 of the epoxy-resin springs had an average
deflection of 0.53 inch with a standard deviation
of 0.05 inch.
Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences
EPO EOE Oe IA ER et Cea Eee R. E. Gipson, Applied Physics Laboratory
PATESEACIEL<OLE CLP Nov iorekoe ots ae ee ees Witiiam W. Rusey, Geological Survey
SOMATH o 2 dso Gos PESOS Deere omiee HeEtnz Specat, National Institutes of Health
PMCHSUTET ei 52 cise ccs Howarp S. Rappueye, Coast and Geodetic Survey (Retired)
ALAA 25 66 BO OE AOR IO eee es ren OES Ore aie eae
Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications
Haratp A. Reaper, U.S. National Museum
Elected Members of the Board of Managers:
Day UCN TG EY eH ae gn ree a te Satan oars oneness A. T. McPuerson, A. B. GuRNEY
PROM ANAT Vs O56 ene rs. eV ee ane W. W. Rusey, J. R. SWALLEN
PROMIADUAT 9D: ene te eve ee ee Francois N. FRENKIEL, F. L. CAMPBELL
Board of Managers..... . All the above officers plus the Vice Presidents and the Editor
i RELOTEPE aie, Soo 31% CHESTER H. Pace, National Bureau of Standards (EM 2-4040)
Associate Hditors....... RonaLD BAMForD, Howarp W. Bonn, ImmMaNnuEL EsteERMANN
PETELILIVE COMIMILEE. 0). 6. ho oc dee ole ee eine R. E. Gipson (chairman), W. W. Rusey,
Bane Specut, H. 8S. Rappieye, A. B. GuRNEY
Committee on Membership.......... Louis R. MaxweE.u (chairman), Naval Ordnance
Laboratory (HE 4-7100), GrorGE ANASTOS, W. H. Avery, Rocer W. Curtis,
CHURCHILL EISENHART, GEOFFREY EpsALL, J. H. McMiien
Committee on Meetings.......... A. M. Stone (chairman), Applied Physics Laboratory
(JU 9-7700), Pururp H. hee KENNETH §. CoLe, LEon F. Curtis, J. WALLACE
JOYCE, Tuomas J. KILLIAN, Constantin C. Nixirororr, T. ’D. Stewart
Committee on Monographs:
PROMVAMURTY A LOD 6 ows ooine ewe ned a ena Harrap A. Reaper, Wittram A. Dayton
PUG TARTU A EVE G Ss 5 Soc renceln glee sve nieve ni seole Dean B. Cows, JoserH P. E. Morrison
At@® dininerny IOS ae cnet so aeien ren eo NA Aenea eines mere
Committee on Awards of Scientific Achievement
RL C. ScHOONOVER (general chairman), National Bureau of Standards (HM 2-4040)
For Biological Sciences...... Micuaku J. Peiczar (chairman), University of Mary-
land (WA 7-8800), Jamms M. Hunpiny, WitLin W. SmitH, JomnL WARREN,
R. B. Withrow
For Engineering Sciences...... ARNOLD Scorr (chairman), National Bureau of
Standards (EM 2-4040), Frank A. Brserstein, J. M. CaLtDWELL, MicHaEL
Goutpsere, T. J. Hickiny, Paun A. SuirH
For Physical Sctences...... C. R. NazSsER (chairman), George Washington Univer-
sity (ST 3-0250), Howarp We Bonn, IMMANUEL EsteERMANN, PETER KING,
L. Marton, Extiotr MontTRo.Lt, ’E. H. Vestine
For Teaching of Science...... B. D. Van Evera (chairman), George Washington
University (ST 3-0250), RonaLp Bamrorp, HERMAN Branson, KeitH JOHNSON,
HowarbD OWENS, MaRGaRET PATTERSON, B. W. Srrrerty
Committee on Grants-in-Aid for Research
W.J. Hamer (chairman), National Bureau of Standards (EM 2-4040), We R. WEDEL,
H. W. WELLS
Committee on Policy and Planning
Frank M. Serzier (chairman), U.S. National Museum (NA 8-1810)
PROWANUAT YHOO Te 20 Seo ces sods cad pies Joun E. Grar, RaYMOND J. SEEGER
whordanuary L958. s/s) .i os ais c serties. oe sccee tue Francis M. DEFANDORF, F. M. Setzer
phopeanuary, 1959) fs aks cece st ac ce: MarGAreT PITrMAN, Watpo L. Scumirr
Commiitee on Encouragement of Science Talent
ARCHIBALD T. McPHERSON (chairman), National Bureau of Standards (EM 2-4040)
ROMMANUAT YU O5 (ern saan ck Sevan oe eee iate Tra B. Hansen, Wittram J. YOUDEN
MRomanuary 1958. .)06 5. 6. e so Seco ens wee ARCHIBALD T. McPuerson, W. T. Reap
PROV ANU ays 1959), 3. corcyes oo Sesneus aciiiene tue OO wisi se eners Pau R. Miter, Leo ScHuBERT
Committee on Science Education (Academy representation on Joint Board for Improve-
ment of Science Education)...... Raymonp J. SEEGER (chairman), National Science
Foundation (ST 3-2140), ArNotp H. Scorr, Keita JoHNson, WaDE H. MarsHa.t,
Joun K. Taytor
IEE DLERETULALLUCLONAC OUNCTINO SAT AAS ere errr eee ence eae A. NELSON SAYRE
Committee of Auditors...... Epwarp WIicHERs (chairman), National Bureau of Stand-
ards (EM 2-4040), M. C. HenpErson, P. H. Hernzy
Committeciofulellersiren te eines so stk ae chet Oa scl eeee
Committee on Ways and Means...... Francois N. FRENKIEL (chairman), apace Physics
Laboratory (JU 9-7100),S. F. Buaxe, Paut H. Oruser, W.T. Reap, B . F, ScRIBNER
Committee on Public Relations... .! A. I. Manan (chairman), Applied Physics Labora-
tory (JU 9-7700), H. SpecHt, Howarp Bonp
CONTENTS
Page
Puysics.—Atomicity and patterns. Srr Grorce P. THoMSoN......... 201
Gropuysics—Radioactive pollution and civil defense. Francois N.
IPREN KIB. cee a Siavot te nee husk susie stints eC bie oe ee 206
Matuematics.—Generalization of a theorem of Konig. A. J. Horrman. 211
EntToMoLoGy.—Type specimens of mosquitoes in the United States Nat-
ional Museum: II, The genus Aedes (Diptera, Culicidae). Anan
STONE and KanNETH LAKINIGHT:...- 22-22 ...-5-+- «72 eee 213
PROCEEDINGS: Philosophical Society of Washington................... 228
INotes‘and News. seis os0.2 0 Sees pera eons eet = 232
5 0b.43
PN Ne
a WIV AS
VOLUME 46 August 1956 NUMBER 8
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
Published Monthly by the
feast INGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: Cuester H. Paes, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RoNALD Bamrorp, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL EstreRMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JoURNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3344 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges.—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the JouR-
NAL or the ProcEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. ReupER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per Year..................0eeeeceeeee $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ — —_
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)........ 8.00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 45, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $378.50.
Monoeraru No.1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
InDEX to JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS.............2..0000000008 $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete.......................e eee $25.00
Single: volumes, unboundiace ee Be tcic eects estan artes eee eee 2.00
Singlesnumbersinn.c Gcoece eee nn roe Fateh aleve mek eee ere Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences”? and
adored to the Treasurer, H. S. Rappers, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
D.C.
Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925.
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 46
August 1956
No. 8
Editorial
SCIENCE AND
The U.S. Department of Agriculture said
in 1898 (Farmers’ Bulletin No. 79):
“The fertilizer industry in this country has
grown to these proportions within fifty years.
It was but natural that a business growing so
rapidly and offering such opportunities and
temptations for fraud and imposition should have
early become a field for extensive operations of
unscrupulous and dishonest men. Fraud became
so prevalent as the industry developed in one
State after another that there was an urgent
demand both from the consumers of fertilizers
and from honest manufacturers and dealers in
fertilizers for laws providing for the inspection
of fertilizers with a view to the prevention or the
detection and punishment of fraud.”
* KOK OK XK
“The man who peddles a worthless ‘formula’
at an exorbitant price or exploits under a high-
sounding name a mixture which has little or no
value as a fertilizer is still abroad in the land.”’
*K KK KX
“There are two claims which generally charac-
terize the representations of the companies and
agents selling these questionable goods:
(1) The process of manufacture is a secret one,
having been ‘discovered’ by some one who is
generally unknown either to science or practice.
(2) The ‘fertilizer,’ or ‘food,’ either contains
ingredients of which the whole world, outside of a
favored few, is ignorant, or else certain ingredi-
ents are so wonderfully compounded as to produce
marvelous results.”
* KOK OK OK
A Federal Trade Commission hearing
examiner, in a 1956 decision, said:
“From the record as a whole, it appears that
we may here be confronted with a device operat-
ing upon a principle unknown to or unrecognized
by present-day science. The strongest indications
of this possibility lie in the scientific testimony
in support of the complaint, wherein the scientists
admitted that they did not understand the theory
upon which the Evis Water Conditioner purports
to operate.”
WITCHCRAFT
(a3
.. we must not take the risk of interfering
with the development of a device which may
prove to be the first practical application of a
scientific principle heretofore undiscovered.”
OK OK Ok
One of the tests of the Evis Water Condi-
tioner consisted in washing eight identical
glasses In warm soapy water. Four were
rinsed in ‘“‘treated”’ water, four in untreated
water, and allowed to dry. Two persons
examined the glasses and picked the four
dirtiest and the four cleanest. Two of the
dirtiest had been rinsed in ‘‘treated”’ water,
two were controls; and, of course, there was
the same division among the cleanest glasses.
The examiner said, “It appears that the
tests ...as to water stains prove nothing,
because the negative and positive thereof
were exactly equal.”
We wonder what would have happened
in 1898 if a “fertilizer”? manufacturer selling
sand and clay (with plant food so cleverly
compounded as to defy chemical analysis)
had submitted to a plot test and claimed that
since half of the treated plots grew better
than the control average, it proved his
product worked half the time, even if it was
not effective on all soils!
In the Scientific Monthly, May 1953, an
article on ‘The Involuntary Destruction of
Science in the USSR” states:
(73
.. When the final authorities who control
science are not scientists themselves, sooner or
later quacks will flourish and ultimately dominate
the field. Even with the very best intentions,
those who are not scientists cannot decide scien-
tific questions and cannot, in the last analysis,
even choose between scientists and charlatans. It
is only when science is free and autonomous,
when enlightened scientific opinion is the court of
last appeal, that impostors can be exposed as they
arise. Otherwise quackery will flourish, for the
plausible over-simplifications of quackery have
always had a great popular appeal.”
233
OCT 2 10mB
234
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 8
BACTERIOLOGY .—Pertussis and pertussis vaccine control.1 MARGARET PITTMAN,
National Institutes of Health.
There is a tradition, that after the presi-
dent of the Washington Academy of Sciences
has fulfilled his responsibilities and _ relin-
quished the office, he emerges from retire-
ment one month later to address the mem-
bers. The selection of a subject, that might
be of interest to the membership, which
represents so many varied fields of science,
was not easy. Recently one of the little
known activities of the government, that
function behind the scenes, was suddenly
brought to the attention of the people in con-
nection with the control of poliomyelitis vac-
cine. Because of the current concern, it was
thought that a talk about the control of
another product, pertussis vaccine, and the
apparent effect of control on the death and
case rates of pertussis, commonly known as
whooping cough, would be of some interest.
The Federal control of interstate shipment
and export and import of biologic products
began July 1, 1902, with the enactment of
Public Law 244, commonly known as the
“Biologic Law.’’ This law was consolidated
with other laws relating to the Public Health
Service in 1944, in Public Law 410, now
known as the “Public Health Service Act.”
The original law in essence provides that
certain biological products may be prepared
only by inspected and licensed laboratories
and that appropriate regulations must be
promulgated to control the safety, purity,
and poteney of such products.
© The need for the control of safety was em-
phasized in 1900 by the tragic death of a
number of children in St. Louis. The children
died from tetanus. They had been ill from
diphtheria and were treated with antidiph-
theria serum. It was shown later that the
serum had been collected from a horse in the
incubation stage of tetanus and that the
serum contained tetanus toxin.
The functions of the biologic control law
are carried out by the Division of Biologics
Standards, until recently the Laboratory of
Biologics Control, of the National Institutes
1 Address of the Retiring President of the
Washington Academy of Sciences, presented
before the Academy on February 16, 1956.
of Health under the administration of the
Secretary of the Department of Health,
Education, and Welfare through the Surgeon
General of the Public Health Service.
This evening, I shall discuss the relative
importance of pertussis as a communicable
disease of childhood and the possible influ-
ence of the establishment of a standard of
potency for pertussis vaccine, on the accel-
erated decrease in death and case rates that
has followed.
PERTUSSIS MORTALITY: COMPARISON WITH
FIVE COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
Pertussis has ranked among the topmost
highly fatal communicable diseases of child-
hood, yet it has not claimed as much atten-
tion as some of the other acute infectious
diseases. It has been lightly regarded by the
public and even by some physicians (cited by
Gordon and Hood, 1951). Perhaps it was
because people saw the relatively mild cases
in the older children of school age but seldom
the baby sick in bed. It was one of the com-
municable diseases that children were ex-
pected to contract sooner or later.
In Fig. 1 is shown the yearly death rates,
per 100,000 population, of pertussis from
1900 to 1954 inclusive, in the United States
Registration Area, in comparison with the
rates for diphtheria and measles. The statis-
tics are based on reports that vary in com-
pleteness, not only from one State to an-
other but within a State. Records from cities
as a whole have been more nearly complete
than those from rural areas. In the early part
of the century, a number of States were not
included in the Registration Area. All but
two were included by 1925. The data, how-
ever, serve as a basis for determining the
relative positions of the diseases.
There has been a marked decline in the
death rates of each of the three diseases. The
most rapid occurred with diphtheria; from
1900 to 1925 there was a significant decline
while the death rates for pertussis and mea-
sles, which were comparable, remained rela-
tively stable. After 1925 there were marked
declinations in the death rates of both per-
Aveust 1956
tussis and measles but somewhat less for
pertussis than measles until 1951 when the
death rates of pertussis fell below those of
measles. Since 1934 the death rate of per-
tussis has exceeded that of diphtheria. It
should be noted that the most rapid de-
cline in the pertussis death rate began after
1943. In the next ten years the decline
was greater than one log, more than had
occurred in the 43 years previously.
Pertussis is singular among the communi-
cable diseases in its marked predilection for
attack of infants and young children and for
a higher death rate in the first year of life.
The death rates, per 100,000 population, for
the three youngest age groups, from 1940
to 1954, inclusive, are given in Fig. 2. Rates
for the 10 to 14 age group were omitted; they
did not exceed 0.1 and have been below 0.1
since 1947. During the 15-year period, the
death rates for the under l-year age group
ran about one log above those for the 1
to 4 year group and more than two logs
above those for the 5 to 9 year group. The
steep decline in death rates for all ages since
1948, noted in Fig. 1, is also evident here for
each of the age groups, especially for the two
youngest age groups. For the under 1 year
60 :
Tae ral ieee callin greene lial al a
40 —— PERTUSSIS =
oe ——-— DIPHTHERIA
We EES MEASLES
20
PER 100,000
nm
{eel clay Ee Le ean ee eee
1900 1910 1920 1930 1940 1950
Fie. 1.—Death rate of pertussis, diphtheria, and
measles, U.S. Registration Area, 1900 to 1954.
PITTMAN: PERTUSSIS AND PERTUSSIS VACCINE CONTROL
235
aml
Sore a) ae oe ahaa ical te |
100
80 —— UNDERI YEAR —
——-— |.TO04YEARS _]
COs ee oe BN eo 5 TO 9 YEARS
40
20
7
\
10 Le Koreans
a- V7 S
6 | x
~N —
4 SS
NIE ZEON |
¥ NS 4
Ne JN
2 - ean 2 Ss 4
WW \
\
] \
8 2 Ss
6 oo \ Al
6 ay: Wal
4Ee 5 4
° F Z|
oO}
.2 a =|
32) °
a % i \.
a ep aT eT VP Tea TO LR |
1940 1942 1944 »=—- 1946 1948 = 1950 1952 1954
Fic. 2.—Death rate of pertussis by age, U.S.
Registration Area, 1940 to 1954.
of age the decline was from around 100 to 7.5
and for 1 to 4 years from around 10 to 0.7.
Since the greatest number of deaths
caused by pertussis occur in children under
one year of age, the relative importance of
pertussis as a communicable disease for this
age group can be observed only by compar-
ing the rate with those of the other diseases
for the same age group. In Fig. 3 is shown the
yearly death rates, per 100,000 population,
of six communicable diseases for the under
1-year age group for the years 1940 to 1954,
inclusive. The curve for pertussis is the same
as the one shown at the top of Fig. 2. During
the 15-year period there was a marked de-
cline in the rates for diphtheria and a lesser
decline for measles while there were no sig-
nificant over-all changes in the trends for
searlet fever and streptococcus sore throat,
pohomyelitis, and meningococcus infections.
Although there was a rapid decline, the per-
tussis rate remained above those of all of the
other five diseases until 1952 when it fell be-
low the meningococcus infection rate.
In table 1, 5-year mean death rates of the
six communicable diseases for the under
TasBLe 1.—Five-YEAR Mr&an DeEatTH RaTES PER
100,000 PopuLaTIoN FOR Six COMMUNICABLE
DISEASES FOR UNDER ONE YEAR AND ALL AGEs,
U.S. RecistratTion AREA: 1940 To 1954
|
1940 to 1944
1945 to 1948 | 1950 to 1954
Under) All Under) All
Under| All
1 yr. | ages | 1 yr. | ages | 1 yr. | ages
Pertussis....... spel eo |) 28 eB 1) TO) | eee Wee!
Measles... 16.2 1 6555) O25 e i 3392053
Scarlet fever*.......... ileal 0.3 0.6 0.1 1.0] 0.2
Diphtheria 4.4 1.0 2.2 0.7 0.4 0.2
Poliomyelitis......... 2.0] 0.7 2.0 1.1 2.3 EP
Meningococcus — infec- |
HONS! earners Ms) ro le? 8.9 0.8 9.8 0.7
Ratio of death rate of pertussis to the sum of death rates of 5
other infections
0.15
PH (Webs de? Hh) Week || Os
* Streptococcus septie sore throat is included.
l-year age group are compared with those
for all ages. The excessive death rate of per-
tussis for the young age group in each period
is clearly evident. In the first period, 1940 to
1944, the pertussis rate for under 1 year of
age was 2.6 times that of the sum of the other
five diseases; 10 years later, however, it was
only 0.7 of the sum. In the first period the
pertussis rate for all ages ranked first: From
almost twofold to more than sevenfold
greater than that of the other five diseases.
Ten years later it ranked third: Below menin-
gococcus infections and poliomyelitis death
rates and not more than twofold greater
than the rates of any of the diseases. The
ratio of the pertussis death rate for all ages
to the sum of the rates for the other five
diseases declined in the same magnitude as
for the under 1-year age group, from 0.5 to
0.15. Declination for both groups was steeper
between the periods 1945 to 1949 and 1950 to
1954 than between 1940 to 1944 and 1945 to
1949.
MORBIDITY
In 1943 Dauer summarized the reported
case and death rates of the States for 1925
through 1939 and for seven States and two
cities for 1910 through 1939. It was shown
that there was a rise in the rates of the re-
ported cases after the death rates had started
to decline. This was attributed to improved
reporting of cases rather than to an actual
increase in incidence. The number of cases
per death gradually increased from an
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 8
average of 10 cases per death in 1910 to
approximately 100 for the 5-year period
1935 to 1939. For the seven States the high-
est case rates occurred either in the 5-year
periods 1930 to 1934 or 1935 to 1939, while
the highest death rates occurred in the
periods 1910 to 1914 or 1915 to 1919. The
case and death rates for three of the States,
to which we have added the rates from 1940
to 1954, are shown graphically in Fig. 4.
There was no significant change in the
case rates until after the period 1940 to 1944,
at which time a marked decline started. At
the same time the slope of the curve of the
death rates became steeper. In Fig. 1 it was
shown that the highest death rate for any
single year from 1900 to 1954 in the total
Registration Area was in 1920, and that after
this date there was a trend downward which
was accelerated after 1943.
The data for the total Registration Area
given in Table 2 show a similar decline in
death and case rates as was demonstrated in
Fig. 4. The decline in mortality began after
1920 and was accelerated after the 3-year
ee |
6 a}
4 © PERTUSSIS
[| © MEASLES J
so) 2 SCARLET FEVER &
S STREPTOCOCCUS SORE THROAT
Oo 2 4 DIPHTHERIA
° ® POLIOMYELITIS
% 4 MENINGOCOCCUS INFECTIONS
wo Pee a
1940 1942 1944 1946 1948 1950 1952 1954
Fic. 3.—Death rates of six communicable
diseases for under 1 year of age, U.S. Registration
Area, 1940-1954.
AuvcustT 1956 PITTMAN: PERTUSSIS
period 1943 to 1945. The decline in case
rates started after 1940 and was accelerated
after the period 1943 to 1945. In the interval
between the 3-year periods 1943 to 1945 and
1953 to 1955 the case rate declined from
109.1 to 33.5, a decline of about 70 percent.
During the same period the death rates
declined from 1.7 to 0.2, a decline of about
90 percent.
Another illustration of the morbidity de-
cline is shown in Fig. 5. The actual number
of cases reported, not the rates, for the past
18 years are given. During this period the
susceptible population was almost doubled
by the increase in births during and since the
war. The reported cases of poliomyelitis are
included for comparative purposes.
No discussion about pertussis would be
complete without mentioning the sequelae,
especially in infants, that may follow recov-
ery. The most important one is neurological
damage which may be manifested by retar-
dation in learning and in behavior disorders
(Levy and Perry, 1948; Schachter, 1953;
Annell, 1953). Schachter found that two-
AND PERTUSSIS VACCINE CONTROL
TaBLE 2.—PrRTUSSIS DEATH AND Cask RaTES
PER 100,000 Poputation, U. 8. REGISTRATION
AREA
Death Case
Years f : .
Rate Reduction Rate | Reduction
Percent | Percent
1908-10 10.8 | |
1918-20 11.7 0
1928-30 5.5 53 143.7
1938-40 2.7 51 151.6 0
1943-45 hed 37 109.1 28
1948-50 Rf | 59 59.3 46
1953-55 a2 71 33.5 44
* Estimated death rate for 1955, 0.2, the same as 1954; Number
of cases in 1955 was the same as in 1954.
thirds of 200 young children following non-
complicated pertussis in infancy showed
various character disorders. Annell, in a
study of the more than seven hundred chil-
dren, found that emotional instability, delin-
quency, and other behavior disorders occur-
red more frequently in those who have had
pertussis than in those that had not had the
infection.
— CASE | DEATH—--
300 MASSACHUSETTS MICHIGAN KANSAS
200
ONS.
100 19’ *
/ . ----
80 +8 . T. N or
. ‘ Se
x . .
60-+-6 x \ SS.
2 \ \ %
2 40+4 ‘ \ Se
‘ .
2 3073 \ \, \
es ss ‘\ SS
a 20-2 ‘ AN See
‘. -~
9 \ % Ky
8 \ \ \
oO ‘ yy \
fe) | \ ‘ la \
‘ 7 = \
s 8 . . \
iv) \ ry Le \
a 6 % \ \
WwW \ \ \
‘ \
Ee 4 . \ \
< Y ‘ IP \
) \ \ iz \\
nl \
\ \
2 \ |
1
\
\
.}
\
J 4 =
08 \
Se QQ se @ @) <F @ Sp Q Gr @- Sr & TE CDT St OST
= WD SOS ty ee ew Sees
© & (Sy rg fe) So tf © © WW Ot © tf S& tw © © bo © G i) C kh ©
= aD N Mm = = XN WN ie) = = Q ~ Tt 2)
PDFHRA RH FHERKFFTAHBHKSE RFEFHR ROTH HR RF DG
Fig. 4.—Reported case and death rates in three States, 1!
ye)
10 to 1954
.
PERTUSSIS VACCINE
The pertussis bacterium, Bordetella per-
tussts, was not isolated until 1906, after
many attempts had failed. Shortly after-
ward vaccines were prepared and used both
to prevent the disease and to treat it. In the
earliest available records of federal licensed
products, January 1914, pertussis vaccine is
listed. The Council of Pharmacy and Chem-
istry of the American Medical Association
admitted pertussis vaccine to New and Non-
official Remedies in 1914. Results from the
use of vaccine, however, were so unsatis-
factory that the Council omitted pertussis
vaccine from New and Nonofficial Remedies
in 1931. In the same year a significant con-
tribution was made to the knowledge of the
organism which enabled workers to select
better strains of bacteria for the preparation
of vaccine (Leslie and Gardner, 1931). With-
in the next few years there appeared several
papers that presented convincing evidence
that pertussis vaccine could be effective in
protecting children against the disease. On
the other hand, failures to obtain signifi-
cant protection continued to appear through
1945. The vaccine was listed again in New
and Nonofficial Remedies in 1944. By this
time vaccines were being used quite exten-
sively in the United States.
During the controversial years there was
no satisfactory laboratory method to meas-
ure the protective activity of the vaccines,
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 8
hence no U.S. Standard of Potency. We had
to wait until someone discovered how to fa-
tally infect a mouse with B. pertussis. Dif-
ferent workers tried the usual test tube and
animal protection tests to measure the anti-
body response of animals. The former in-
cluded agglutination, precipitation, comple-
ment fixation and opsonocytophagic index de-
terminations. These tests showed that the ani-
mals had responded by producing antibodies
to the antigens injected but there was no defi-
nite assurance that the antibodies were pro-
tective.
The protective tests in laboratory animals
were not satisfactory because of inability to
produce a fatal infection in laboratory ani-
mals. Mice could be killed if they were in-
jected intraperitoneally with about 1,000
million organisms but death was largely
caused by toxicity and not infection. The
sight amount of protection that could be
obtained was antitoxic and not antibacterial
in nature. Since pertussis is a respiratory
disease, attempts were made to induce infec-
tion by injecting the culture intranasally.
Infections were induced but very few mice
died except when near toxic doses of bacteria
were used. A few workers reported some suc-
cess with both routes of injection but no one
was successful in standardizing the pro-
cedures with reference to potency evaluation
of vaccines.
A new method of approach to the evalua-
250,000 /—
PERTUSSIS
200,000
150,000
100,000
50,000
NUMBER OF CASES
O
POLIOMYELITIS
1938 '40
Fira. 5.—Reported cases of pertussis and poliomyelitis in the United States, 1941-1955.
1945 1950
1955 1940 1945 1950
1955
Aveust 1956
tion of pertussis vaccine was opened in 1943.
Dr. John F. Norton, of the Upjohn Company,
in some protection tests, tried infecting mice
by the intracerebral route. The results were
very encouraging. He did not publish his
findings but reported them, in 1944, to the
Laboratory of Biologics Control and Dr.
Pearl Kendrick, of the Michigan State Lab-
oratories. I had just started on the problem
of developing a U. 8. Standard of Potency.
Dr. Kendrick with Dr. Grace Eldering
had previously carried out some success-
ful field trials of pertussis vaccines. They
were at the time actively engaged in study-
ing protective test. Through close coopera-
tion rapid progress was made towards the
development of a protective test. In March
19, 1945, the National Institutes of Health
notified the manufacturers of pertussis vac-
cine of the promising results and asked them
to carry on independent investigations so that
more data could be accumulated. That fall
the majority of the manufacturers collab-
orated in a study under the direction of Dr.
Kendrick to determine if comparable re-
sults could be obtained in different labora-
tories. The manufacturers were very anxious
to have a standard potency test and through
the American Drug Manufacturers Associa-
tion were contributing toward the support of
this study.
On January 5, 1946, the National Insti-
tutes of Health issued ‘‘a tentative mouse
protection test for determining the anti-
genicity of pertussis vaccine.” This test
later became the official test. It differs from
the one used in the collaborative study in
that mice were given only one immunizing
dose of vaccine instead of two. Experience
in our laboratory had shown that reliable
results could be obtained with one dose. This
shortened the test from 33 to 28 days.
On May 27, 1948, minimum requirements
for pertussis vaccine were issued to be ef-
fective January 1, 1949. This interval per-
mitted time for the manufacturer to make
adjustments in production and control meth-
ods. Most of the manufacturers, however,
had already made such changes as had been
indicated, and were before 1948, testing each
lot for potency.
The need for potency evaluation of pertus-
sis vaccine was demonstrated in the early
PITTMAN: PERTUSSIS AND PERTUSSIS VACCINE CONTROL
239
part of our study. In 1945 and 1946 we tested
samples of vaccines from fourteen manufac-
turers in the United States. It was found
that the bacteria in lots of vaecines from
three manufacturers had no detectable po-
tency while those with demonstrable activ-
ity, from other manufacturers, showed as
much as 10 fold variation not only between
manufacturers but between lots of the same
manufacturer. The manufacturers, grateful
for the information, make quick adjustments
in production.
It may have been noted that the period
when the potency test was being developed
and vaccines were for the first time being
tested for potency, was the same period when
an increase in the decline of both death and
case rates started. The coincidence suggests
to one that general improvement in the po-
tency of vaccines was a contributory factor
to the declines. Other possible factors will be
discussed later.
The adoption of a standard of potency in
1949 did not solve all the problems. All lots
of vaccine had a certain amount of mouse
protective activity but there was consider-
able variation in the potency of the doses of
vaccine recommended for human immuniza-
tion. From the beginning of the use of all
kinds of bacterial vaccines, the human dos-
age has been measured in numbers of bac-
teria. For pertussis vaccines, containing no
mineral adjuvant such as alum, the numbers
reported, to be effective, have ranged all the
way from 22,000 million to 140,000 million.
In 1949, the recommended total human im-
munizing dose of the different licensed per-
tussis vaccine products, without adjuvant,
ranged from 60,000 million to 100,000 million
bacteria. This variation introduced about a
twofold chance for a difference in potency
but the greatest chance for variation was in
the bacteria themselves. The bacteria in
some lots were four times more potent than
in others. In the mouse test, the potency of
the bacteria was determined by comparing
the number of bacteria in the respective
doses of the vaccine under test and the ref-
erence vaccine that protected 50 percent of
the mice. Potency was satisfactory if the
number of bacteria in the EDs. of the vac-
cine did not exceed the number in the EDs
of the reference.
240 JOURNAL OF THE
Although aware of variations, we did not
know how much of the mouse measured po-
tency was required to protect children. If
fact we did not know if there was any rela-
tion between mouse protection and human
protection. Previous experiences with other
products evaluated by animal tests, however,
gave us confidence that a vaccine that had
mouse protective activity would be better
for children that one that had none. A field
trial was planned but the Korean War inter-
fered with obtaining federal support. Per-
tussis was not a war problem. In 1951 the
Medical Research Council of England pub-
lished a report of the first results obtained in
a field study that was in progress. Protec-
tion afforded children was not correlated
with the number of bacteria in the total dose
administered. Two lots given in a total dose
of 60,000 million afforded significantly bet-
ter protection than others that were given
in doses ranging from 90,000 million to
112,000 million.
With the best information available to us
in 1952, a value of 12 units was assigned to
that amount of the U.S. reference vaccine
estimated to be sufficient to afford significant
protection to a child. The number for the
unit value was arbitrarily selected because
it was divisible by 2, 3, and 4, the number of
single doses in the total doses, then being
recommended. The reference was designated
as the U. S. Standard Pertussis Vaccine. It
was freeze-dried and is used now only for
standardization of working standard lots or
for special comparative studies.
After a value was assigned to the reference
we were able to determine the extent of
potency variations that had been occurring
in the lots of vaccines submitted to the
National Institutes of Health for release.
Data on 878 lots submitted during a 27
months’ period were analyzed (Pittman,
1954). It was found that products containing
the same number of bacteria showed as much
as a fourfold difference in potency per total
human dose. Some products containing high
counts were less potent than others contain-
ing lower counts. There was an over all differ-
ence of 6.2-fold in the average value of lots
of different manufacturers’ products.
Since August 1953 it has been required
that each lot of vaccine contains 12 units per
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 46, No. 8
recommended total human immunizing dose.
This is one of the few products for which an
upper as well as a lower limit has been placed
on the amount of the protective activity per
dose. With most other products, potency
may exceed but in no case may it fall short of
the minimum required. The upper limit for
pertussis vaccine was adopted with the hopes
of reducing untoward reactions such as fever,
malaise, vomiting, local soreness, and the
rare fatal encephalopathy. It was considered
that an amount in excess of that needed to
afford protection should not be used. Since
this date, the number of complaints, received
at the Division of Biologics Standards, of
untoward reactions have been significantly
reduced. No death has been reported to us.
Eleven had been reported from 1944 through
1952, four of which occurred in 1952. No
doubt, there have been other influential
factors, one of which is that the manutac-
turer’s accompanying circular of each prod-
uct containing pertussis vaccine, now gives
contraindications for injections.
Two papers, recently published, suggest
that the mouse potency value assigned
to 12 units is near the effective dose. One
(Felton and Verwey, 1955) was the first
report of a field trial in which the laboratory
value of the vaccine was given. The two lots
employed contained approximately 15 units
per total human dose. Significant protection
against pertussis was obtained. The other
paper (Jaffe, 1955) suggests that low unit
vaccines may not be effective. Dr. Jaffe, of
the Department of Health of the District of
Columbia, observed, from February 1, 1953,
to March 15, 1954, 100 culturally proven
cases of pertussis in two child-health clinics.
Sixty-four of the cases had had completed
courses of vaccination and 16 more had had
at least one inoculation. Through the
cooperation of the manufacturers, we were
able to evaluate the potency of 90 per cent
of the containers of vaccine from which it
was estimated that these children would
have been vaccinated. Only 41 per cent of
the containers had 12 units per total dose,
34.5 per cent had values as low as 5.5 to 6.5
units, while the remaining 25 per cent had
values ranging from 7.3 to 9.6 units. The
lots had been released under the first mini-
mum requirements.
Aveust 1956
Lest one gain the impression that the
potency evaluation of pertussis vaccine is
simple, it should be mentioned that the test
as designed has a 1| in 20 probable error of
about log 0.3. If each part of the test 1s care-
fully standardized, however, reproducible
results are usually obtained. For an exact
evaluation, we find that three tests are usu-
ally adequate. For routine work we seldom
have to do more than one test to obtain satis-
factory agreement with the test submitted
by the manufacturer. Because of the prob-
able variation in the test, limits of 8 and 36
units were set for an acceptable lot. The
lower limit may be too low. If the protocol of
a lot submitted, however, gives a borderline
value, low or high, the lot is tested in our
laboratory. A lot with a true high value will
seldom pass the freedom-from-toxicity test.
Frequent check is made irrespective of the
manutfacturer’s results, so that morethan 50
percent of all lots submitted are tested. All
inspection samples are tested. An example of
the potency evaluation of two lots of vaccine
is given in Table 3.
Biologic products standards cannot be
defined or measured with the same degree of
accuracy as are physical standards. The
products are organic chemicals largely of
unknown composition. They are subject to
change by the methods of preparation, the
TABLE 3.—PotENcy EVALUATION oF Two Lots
OF PERTUSSIS VACCINE
Potency
sh Mis Dose
Waccineia Pele | (S/n EDso Multiple Units
°
ml. Standard} 49 | Total
| per ml. wal, |) Glose
1.5m.
X1 -03125 | 14/16 .00625 ml. | .79 9.9 | 14.8
-00625 | 8/16 | + log 0.125
-00125 | 2/16 | log 1.39* +
0.61
3.0 ml.
X2 -0625 15/16 -00722 ml. | 68 8.5 | 25.5
-0125 11/16 + log 0.125
0025 3/16 | log 1.53* +
0.67
Stand- | .02 15/16 -00493 ml. 12.5
ard 004 5/16 + log 0.118
0008 2/16 | log 1.64* +
0.70
* Slope of the curve.
PITTMAN: PERTUSSIS AND PERTUSSIS VACCINE CONTROL
241
preservatives, and the time of storage. Fur-
ther the measurement of activity is generally
determined by the response of a biological
system, usually animals, which may show
wide variations in response.
Besides being of value in determining the
potency of a finished pertussis vaccine, the
test has been very valuable for selecting ways
of improving the vaccine, for example: Selec-
tion of strains of bacteria with high antigenic
properties, the development of simpler or
better media, determination of the effect of
preservatives and detoxifying agents on po-
tency, and the purification of antigens.
The production of pertussis vaccine is
complicated. The organism is quite exacting
in nutritional requirements and it produces
a thermolabile toxin. It has, as do all gram
negative bacteria, an endotoxin. Very little
is known about nutritional requirements in
relation to protective antigens. One of the
biggest problems is detoxification without
affecting antigenicity. Physical or chemical
agents that hasten detoxification may injure
the protective antigen. This may be detected
at once or only after 6 months or more in
storage. An understanding of the enzyme
activity of the bacterium might be a key to
the solution of some of the problems.
In the United States, pertussis vaccine is
frequently combined with diphtheria and
tetanus toxoids and about 70 percent of all
lots released contain a mineral adjuvant.
Adjuvants are used to enhance the anti-
body response to a given amount of antigen.
Recently a problem of toxicity caused by a
mineral adjuvant was encountered. Studies
with diphtheria toxoid have indicated that
aluminum phosphate was better than alum.
When the recommended amounts of the
adjuvant were used in products containing
pertussis vaccine, a lot frequently failed to
pass the pertussis vaccine freedom-from-
toxicity test. Adjustments were made by
reducing the amount of adjuvant and no
doubt without loss of the potentiating effect
on the toxoids as pertussis vaccine itself acts
as an adjuvant.
We look forward to the day when purified
preparations of the protective antigen will be
available. Two partially purified prepara-
tions have been prepared in different lab-
oratories (Pennell and Thiele, 1951, and
242
Pillemer, et al, 1954). The antigens differ
markedly in one respect. One induces higher
agglutinin antibodies than the parent whole-
cell vaccine (Felton and Verwey, 1955). The
other one contains practically no agglutino-
gen (Evans and Perkins, 1955). Both are
capable of protecting mice against intra-
cerebral infection. The former was found to
be effective in protecting children against
pertussis. We await the results to be ob-
tained from the latter antigen which is on
field trial in England.
DISCUSSION
It was suggested earlier that the establish-
ment of the U. 8. Standard of Potency for
pertussis vaccine was an influential factor in
the reduction of both death and case rates of
pertussis. It has ever been as Magill, 1955,
recently stated that ‘the physician or the
medicine man of each age has attributed the
control and cure of each disease during his
own particular era to the therapeutic pro-
cedures in vogue’’. Today there is a tendency
for immunologists to attribute the decline of
infectious diseases to an induced immunolog-
ical state. Let us look at history.
Many infectious diseases have shown cy-
cles of high incidence followed by low inci-
dence. Between 1850 and 1860 diphtheria
became much more prevalent and malignant,
the change was so marked that the physi-
cians of the day often spoke of it as a ‘“‘new”’
disease. Mortality rose to extraordinary
heights and remained there for about 30
years, around 1885, then a consistent decline
began. This was before the introduction of
antitoxin. The rate of decline was increased
after toxoid vaccination came into general
use.
The cycles of pandemic influenza strik-
ingly illustrate changes in incidence. Fur-
ther, with this disease is illustrated the shift
from endemic to epidemic and from epidemic
to endemic periods between pandemics. It
has been shown that the antigenic pattern of
the virus may change from one epidemic to
another epidemic.
In figure 1 we observed the decline in the
death rate of measles against which an im-
munizing antigen had not been used. In the
same figure there was shown the decline in
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 8
pertussis fatality rate before pertussis vac-
cine was in general use. In 19483, Dauer sug-
gested that if the mortality continues to de-
cline at the same rate as it did from 1925 to
1940, it will be difficult to show statistically
that a prophylactic procedure has any effect
in reducing mortality from pertussis.
In the 15 years since his analysis, pertussis
vaccine has come into general use, and in the
last ten years there has been an over-all im-
provement in the potency of vaccine. During
this time there has been an accelerated de-
cline in mortality and for the first time a de-
cline in morbidity.
Although the use of improved vaccine no
doubt has had some influence on the decline,
it appears that we may have been observing
the downward trend of a cycle. In the older
writings, some dating back to Hippocrates,
there appear descriptions of some diseases
in such detail that certain of the common
communicable diseases can be readily identi-
fied. The first known written description of
whooping cough was by Ballonius in 1578.
It is difficult to understand how a disease
characterized by the paroxysmal cough that
does not occur in any other infectious disease
and with the high fatality rate observed at
the turn of the century, could have escaped
description. Could it be that pertussis was
once a mild disease and that we are ap-
proaching a period when it will be again a
mild and less frequently recognized disease?
We have observed that there was a signif-
icant decline in deaths long before there was
a decline in the number of reported cases.
This could be interpreted as a reduction in
the severity of the infection. Dr. Jaffe’s
observations of 100 bacteriologically proven
cases of pertussis is compatible with a change
in the severity of the infection. Most of her
cases were mild. None were hospitalized and
all recovered. The only significant complica-
tion was one middle ear infection. With an
apparent change in the severity of the dis-
ease, no doubt many cases are not being re-
ported. If so, this would have contributed to
the decline in reported cases. As of January
this year, pertussis has been omitted from
the weekly telegraphic reports of the States.
Whatever is the cause for the decline in
pertussis, be it a change in the antigen of the
Auvueust 1956
microorganism, a change in the immunologi-
eal condition of the host, the use of anti-
pertussisserum or antibiotics, neither of which
effect an immediate relief of symptoms but
may arrest progression and shorten the dura-
tion of the disease, or other factors, it 1s sug-
gestive that a state of equilibrium is being
established between the microbe and the
host. Nevertheless, we should not cease try-
ing to prepare the most effective prophylac-
tie vaccine free from undesirable activity or
stop fundamental research both on a bacte-
rium which has so many individual character-
istics and which induces a disease with many
anomalies (Gordon and Hood, 1951) and on
the mechanism whereby in a local disease
such marked neurological complications may
occur.
REFERENCES
ANNELL, A.-L. Pertussis in infancy as a cause of
behavior disorders in children. Acta Soc. Med.
Upsal. 58: Suppl. I: 1-222. 1953.
Bauuonius, G. EHpidémies et Ephémérides, trans-
lated by P. Yvaren. Paris, 1858.
DauvsrR, C.C. Reported whooping cough morbidity
and mortality in the United States. Publ. Health
Rep. 58: 661-676. 1943.
Evans, D. G., and Perkins, F. T. Tests for
agglutinin production by pertussis protective
PITTMAN: PERTUSSIS AND PERTUSSIS VACCINE CONTROL
243
antigen, SPA. Journ. Path. Bact. 69: 329-
331. 1955.
Fe.ton, H. M., and Verwrey,W.F. The epidemio-
logical evaluation of a non-cellular pertussis
antigen. Pediatrics 16: 637-651. 1955.
Gorpon, J. E., and Hoop, R. I. Whooping cough
and its epidemiological anomalies. Amer. Journ.
Med. Sci. 222: 333-361. 1951.
JAFFE, V. R. Incidence of pertussis in vaccinated
and unvaccinated children. Journ. Ped. 47:
716-719. 1955.
Lesuiz, P. H., and Garpner, A. D. Phases of
Haemophilus pertussis. Journ. Hyg. 31: 423-
434. 1931.
Levy, 8., and Perry, H. A. Pertussis as a cause
of mental deficiency. Amer. Journ. Mental
Deficiency 52: 217-226. 1948.
Maaitit, T. P. The wmmunologist and the evil
spirits. Journ. Immunol. 74: 1-8. 1955.
MepicaL ResearcH Covunciu. Prevention of
whooping-cough by vaccination. Brit. Med.
Journ. 1: 1463-1471. 1951.
PENNELL, R. B., and Tutetn, HE. H. Studies on
the fractionation of Hemophilus pertussis ezx-
tracts. Journ. Immunol. 66: 627-633. 1951.
PILLEMER, L., BuuMm, L., and Lerow, I. H. Pro-
tective antigen of Haemophilus pertussis.
Lancet 1: 1257-1260. 1954.
Pittman, M. Variability of the potency of pertussis
vaccine in relation to the number of bacteria.
Journ. Ped. 45: 57-69. 1954.
ScuacuTer, M. Le pronostic newropsychologique
des enfants ayant eu une coqueluche précoce non
compliquée. Praxis 42: 464-466. 1953.
In every explanation of natural phenomena, we are compelled to leave the
sphere of sense perceptions, and to pass to things which are not the objects of
sense, and are defined only by abstract conceptions. HELMHOLTZ.
244 JOURNAL OF THE
PHYSICS.—Cosmological theories
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES — VOL. 46, NO. 8
ancient and modern.. R. M. Pagan, Naval
Research Laboratory. (Communicated by C. H. Page.)
(Received May 24, 1956)
In the month of December 1955 radio
astronomers of the Naval Research Labora-
tory had their high-resolution radio telescope
focused on Cygnus A. They were construct-
ing a power spectrum across the region of the
hydrogen spectrum line at 21 em _ wave-
length. They were looking for a dip or absorp-
tion line inthe spectrum, which would occur if
the energy received were passing through or
were eclipsed from a hydrogen cloud.
Furthermore, they were looking specifically
for such an absorption line at a wavelength
longer than 21 em, which would occur if the
hydrogen cloud were associated with Cygnus
A source and therefore moving as Cygnus A
is believed to move relative to the earth. On
December 27 they found exactly what they
were looking for. And when, by careful
measurement and calculation, they derived
the apparent velocity of recession from the
earth, they found it to be 16,700 km per
second. This agrees witha similar conclusion
based on optical red-shift data to within less
than 1 percent.
Let us look for a moment at what is back
of this remarkable observation. It can hardly
be called a new scientific discovery, since it
was so confidently expected on the basis of
all our other knowledge concerning our uni-
verse. Nor can those who conducted the ex-
periment be said to be superior to other
radio astronomers because they made the
observation, since the experiment was made
possible by the fine precision instruments
made available to them. What were these
instruments, and how did they come into
being?
The instruments consisted primarily of a
large, precision-built radio antenna, an ac-
curately controlled servo-driven antenna
mount, a high-gain, highly stable, selective,
tunable, radio-frequency receiver, and a pre-
cision frequency control. These are all
products of a relatively new field of en-
deavor, radio research and engineering. A
considerable portion was built after the war,
1A lecture given before the Philosophical
Society of Washington on January 27, 1956.
based in part on the results of wartime re-
search. As a radio astronomy facility it has
been in existence less than 10 years.
May we now turn to the much larger sub-
ject, our other knowledge concerning our
universe which prompted the radio astron-
omers to look in the direction of Cygnus A,
for the hydrogen radio frequency absorption
line, at an augmented wavelength? The
hydrogen absorption line at radio frequency
was first observed in 1954 by radio as-
tronomers of the Naval Research Labora-
tory using the apparatus just mentioned. Its
existence was expected because the hydrogen
radio-frequency emission line had been ob-
served, first at Harvard University in March
1951, and subsequently in Holland and
Australia.
Now we ask the question: What led to the
hydrogen emission line observation at
Harvard in 1951? The answer is simple. The
radio astronomers there were looking spe-
cifically for that signal. They were looking
for it because they had the precision radio
astronomy instrumentation capable of de-
tecting it if it were there, and the Dutch
astronomer H. C. van de Hulst had predicted
seven years earlier, in 1944, that such line
should exist. In fact, van de Hulst was at
Harvard at the time the observation was
made, and I should not be surprised if he
actually stimulated the Harvard astronomers
to conduct the experiment, if, indeed, he
did not himself participate in it.
But now we face another question: What
led van de Hulst to make such a prediction?
A commonly accepted model of the hydrogen
atom is a proton nucleus about which orbits
one electron. Both proton and electron spin
on their own axes. The two spin axes of any
one hydrogen atom at any particular time
may be either parallel or antiparallel, 1.e.,
while the proton spins in one direction of
rotation, the electron may spin either in the
same or in the opposite direction of rotation.
Since both proton and electron are charged
particles, their spin axes are also their mag-
netic axes. When their magnetic axes are
Aveust 1956
parallel they repell each other and the
electron orbit is slightly enlarged, resulting
in a slightly increased potential energy state.
When their magnetic axes are antiparallel,
they attract each other, resulting in a slightly
decreased potential energy state. The energy
difference between these two states, when the
electron is in the base orbit, was calculated
by van de Hulst and divided by Planck’s
constant to yield the frequency value
1,420,405,000 cycles per second, or approxi-
mately 21 em wavelength. To radiate energy
at this wavelength, the hydrogen atoms
must receive energy from some external
source, in sufficiently large units to raise the
atomic potential energy from the lower to
the higher of these two levels, or, in terms of
our model, to reverse the direction of the
spin axis of the electron relative to the
proton. Then, since this is not a stable state
of affairs for the atom, the spin axis will flip
back to its normal state, and in the process,
radiate one quantum of energy at a wave-
length of 21 em. Van de Hulst then called
attention to the possibility of this mech-
anism.
To trace to their origins the concepts on
which van de Hulst made his suggestion
would be far too involved for present treat-
ment. It would lead us back through atomic
theory, electricity and magnetism, optics,
classical and statistical mechanics, mathe-
matics of almost every branch, and a large
array of scientific instruments. We. shall
simply leave it at that.
Thus far we have dealt only with one of
the three questions we raised: Why were the
radio astronomers last December looking for
a hydrogen absorption line in the region of
21 cm wavelength? Let us now turn to a
second one of the three questions: Why were
they looking for an elongated wavelength?
The answer again is simple. The visible
light we receive from distant galaxies is
similarly elongated in wavelength. Let us
explore the basis of this simple but some-
what categorical answer. We just considered
a hydrogen atom to be a proton nucleus
with an electron circling around it in one of
several possible orbits. The atoms of all the
other elements are likewise considered as
consisting of nuclei in which protons pre-
dominate, and about which a number of
PAGE: COSMOLOGICAL THEORIES
245
electrons circle in a number of possible
orbits. And as in the hydrogen atom, so in
all atoms, energy may be absorbed in mov-
ing one or more electrons from their normal
orbits to orbits of higher potential energy,
whereupon the normal state will restore
itself with the release of the absorbed
energy in the form of electromagnetic
radiation, at a frequency which is directly
proportional to the energy difference be-
tween the two levels involved. The atoms of
each element have a pattern of electron
orbits which differs from the corresponding
patterns of all other elements. When an
element is excited so as to produce these
energy transfers, the pattern of frequencies
radiated is a “‘fingerprint”’ of that element.
The pattern of frequencies is obtained by
passing light from the excited element
through a spectrometer, which separates
the incident light into its frequency com-
ponents and indicates the intensity of each
frequency present. When light from distant
nebulae is caught in an astronomical tele-
scope and focused on a spectrometer, the
spectra or ‘‘fingerprints” of known elements
are found, but the wavelengths of all the
spectrum lines from most of the nebulae are
elongated. The light, in other words, is
shifted toward the red end of the spectrum.
Scientists have taxed their imaginations to
explain this red-shift, and the only suggestion
that satisfies is that it 1s produced by the
Doppler effect of relative motion. In other
words, the galaxies are moving away from us.
Now we could probe much more deeply
into the origins of all the concepts touched
upon but lightly here, of how J. J. Thomson
discovered the electron, of how Ernest
Rutherford discovered the hydrogen nucleus
and postulated the basic structure of our
present atomic model, of how R. A. Millikan
measured the charge of the electron, of how
Max Planck developed the quantum theory
and arrived at the constant of proportion-
ality between energy and frequency, of how
Nils Bohr applied this theory to Ruthertord’s
atomic model to give us our present atomic
theory, of how the spectrometer works and
what led to its invention, and of all the
science and engineering that is associated
with the invention and operation of as-
tronomical telescopes, and of photosensitive
246 JOURNAL
emulsions, and the optics and chemistry
and mechanics of their use in both telescope
and spectrometer. Many books have been
written on these subjects, and to most of us
they have become such an ‘“‘old story” that
we tend to take them for granted and forget
the extent of our indebtedness to a long suc-
cession of technological developments in in-
strumentation for scientific observation
which provided the means for all the
scientific discoveries mentioned here, and
from which we have inherited a galaxy of
precision instruments that would completely
mystify the ancients. But in these instru-
ments, their skillful use, and the careful and
clever interpretation of the data they pro-
vide, lies the answer to the question: ‘“‘Why
were the radio astronomers looking for an
elongation of the hydrogen line wavelength
that is normally 21 em?”
We come now to the third question: Why
were they using Cygnus A as a source for
making this measurement? The answer to
this leads into cosmological theory, the
foundation for which has been partly de-
veloped in answering the other two ques-
tions. Cygnus A was unknown to astronomy
until discovered by radio in 1948. It was
then thought to be a part of our own galaxy,
although the possibility of its being extra
galactic was pointed out. When the 200-inch
optical telescope was turned in its direction
to investigate, Cygnus A was found to be
two galaxies in collision, with the red-shift
in its spectrum indicating a distance of tens
of millions of hght years. Needless to say,
this discovery created considerable excite-
ment in astronomy, particularly in the field
of radio astronomy, and it became a matter
of great interest to determine whether a fre-
quency shift in the radio frequency hydrogen
line might be found to correspond to the
optical red-shift.
We have shown how distant galaxies ap-
pear to be flying away from us as sparks
from the blacksmith’s anvil. We have stated
that more remote ones appear to be receding
faster, but we have said nothing about why
we think the greater apparent velocities are
associated with greater distances. How do
we measure these distances anyway? Let us
start with the shorter distances, say a few
tens or hundreds of light years. First, we
OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 8
must have a reference distance, or ‘‘measur-
ing stick.”’ This is the diameter of the earth’s
orbit about the sun. By recording the dif-
ference in position of a nearby star relatve
to the remote stellar background between
two measurements made six months and
some 186 million miles apart, the distance to
that star can be calculated. This method of
measurement gives good results out to
about 100 light years, less accurate but
usable results to several hundred light years,
and can reach about 5,000 stars. For greater
distances a particular type of star called a
Cepheid variable is used. A Cepheid variable
is a star that pulsates in brightness with a
period of from a few hours to many days.
The absolute brightness of such a star has
been found to be directly proportional to its
period of pulsation. The constant of propor-
tionality was determined by observing the
periods and apparent brightnesses of Cepheid
variables in our vicinity, where distances
could be determined by triangulation and
by star motions. Actually there are two types
of Cepheid variables, blue giants and red
giants. For a given period of pulsation, the
red giants are about 14% magnitudes brighter
than the blue giants. This ‘“‘double standard”
was not fully appreciated and accepted until
only two or three years ago. It was the dis-
covery that the Cepheid variables near us,
used for calibration, were all blue, while the
remote ones used for distance measurement
were red giants, making the measuring stick
in use more than twice as long as it was
thought to be, that doubled all remote
astronomical distance and time estimates
only just recently. Gamow gives the factor
as 2.8.
Cepheid variables are available for deter-
mining astronomical distances as far as
they may be resolved as individual stars and
their variations measured with telescope and
photomultipher. With the 200-inch tele-
scope, this is about 20-million light years.
Now we have one measuring technique that
takes us out to 100 light years, and another
that takes us out to 20-million light years.
Yet another is needed for the many galaxies
visible to the telescope but beyond the range
at which individual stars may be resolved.
We have in fact two such measuring tech-
niques. The first is apparent brightness.
Aveust 1956
Nearly all galaxies seem to have the same
absolute total brightness within a factor of
approximately two from the mean value. By
assuming mean absolute brightness and
measuring apparent brightness, distance
may be calculated hopefully within a factor
of two. The other technique uses the spec-
trum red-shift. Since those galaxies whose
distances may be measured by Cepheid
variables which they contain show a red-
shift proportional to their distance from us,
it is not unreasonable to assume that this
law of red-shift holds for greater distances,
at least within certain limits. Red-shifts
have been measured out to a shift of a little
over 20 percent, corresponding to a recession
velocity of 38,000 miles a second, and a
distance of about a billion hight years if the
law holds that far. For greater distances,
apparent brightness remains the only clue
to distance. On that basis the present max-
imum reach of the 200-inch telescope is
approximately 2 billion hght years. It must
be remembered, however, that at that
distance we see galaxies as they appeared 2
billion years ago—time enough for significant
changes to occur in their brightness. Also, if
the law of red-shift holds at that distance,
indicated recession velocities would be on the
order of one half the velocity of light, and
relativistic effects may be present. No one
has yet been sufficiently daring to suggest
what influence these effects might have on
apparent brightness, if, indeed the ele-
mentary spectra or “fingerprints” of the
atoms themselves may not be altered.
All this while we have been explaining why
radio astronomers made a certain observa-
tion last December. In so doing, we have
reviewed enough elementary astronomical
observations to discuss modern theories per-
taining to the nature and origin of the uni-
verse. We start with the assumption that
the laws of nature are uniform and con-
sistent throughout all space and all time. If
remote bodies are receding from us they
must at some time in the past have been
much closer to us and closer together. In
fact, if their relative velocities are propor-
tional to their relative distances, extrapola-
tion backward in time should yield a definite
time in the past when all the matter of the
universe was tightly packed in one place,
PAGE: COSMOLOGICAL THEORIES
247
from which it is exploding like one great
super atomic bomb. This extrapolation
places the time of explosion about 4 to 5
billion years ago. This view is held by a
number of scientists, one of whom, George
Gamow, has given us a fairly detailed ac-
count of how it might have happened. We
will not attempt to probe into the scientific
bases of this account, as Gamow and others
have done, but rather attempt to describe a
probable sequence of events.
In the original tightly compressed state,
which is the earliest state science can know
anything about, the temperature would be
too high for matter to exist at all, and all
the sum total of the matter and energy of
the universe would be in the form of radiant
energy. Thus the earliest phenomenon that
can be postulated with any scientific founda-
tion is a blinding flash of light intense be-
yond the capabilities of human imagination
to conceive. On expanding from its point of
origin, it would cool, at first with extreme
rapidity. Five minutes after the first genera-
tion of this energy, the temperature would
have cooled down to a billion degrees. At
this temperature, protons, neutrons, and
electrons could exist, but not atoms. In the
succeeding 25 minutes all the chemical ele-
ments would be formed, for at the end of the
first half hour the temperature would have
dropped too low for nuclear reactions to
take place. Calculations of the relative
abundance of the elements that would result
from such a process agrees remarkably well
with what is found to exist today. Also, the
state of decay of radioactive elements indi-
cates that they were originally formed about
5 billion years ago.
Today the mass density of matter in the
universe far exceeds the mass density of
radiation. If, as has been postulated, the
universe started out as all radiation, there
must have been a time when the total mass
density was equally divided between radia-
tion and matter. On this subject let me
quote from Gamow. ‘‘Computing the mass
densities of radiation and of matter at various
epochs, we can find the date of the great
event when matter took over from radiation,
i.e., surpassed it in mass density. The date
was about the year 250,000,000 A.B. (After
the Beginning). The temperature of space
248
was then about 170 degrees absolute, and
the density both of radiation and of matter
was comparable with the present density of
interstellar gas. The Universe, in short, was
dark and cool.” This statement appeared in
the March 1954 Scientific American.
The gradual transition from radiation to
matter has been likened to slow precipitation
of a solid from solution. As matter gained
the ascendency over radiation, it began to
react to the forces of turbulence and gravita-
tional attraction, and formed into great
clouds of gas. In time these clouds con-
tracted by gravitational attraction to form
the beginnings of galaxies. But turbulence,
consisting of eddies within eddies ad in-
finitum, produced many secondary and
tertiary centers of contraction, so that the
clouds of gas “coagulated” into small
‘“Jumps,”’ which in turn fell into larger ones,
until whole hierarchies of suns and planets
and satellites were formed. The pressures
created by gravitational attraction produced
local heating, the larger accumulations be-
coming quite hot. The maximum tempera-
ture thus produced in any star depends on
the mass of the star. To reach surface in-
candescence requires a mass about 2,000
times that of the earth. Some galaxies are
imbedded in gas and still growing. They are
blue in color and spiral in form. Others have
used up all their gas, and are cooling off.
They are red in color and globular in form.
We have given in brief outline one of the
two principal modern theories of cosmology.
It is based on observed physical phenom-
ena and analogous mathematical models.
Whether the present hyperbolic expansion
was matched by a corresponding hyperbolic
contraction before the point of maximum
concentration, or whether the primeval
flash of light was an original creation must
forever remain beyond the reach of science
to decide. The fact remains that this theory
provides a satisfactory scientific explanation
for an amazingly wide variety of observed
phenomena. Furthermore, it yields a value
for the age of the universe which is remark-
ably consistent with no less than 12 other
and mutually independent indications of
that age. Space does not permit exploration
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 8
of all these other methods, for we have other
theories to consider.
One of these other theories is also a
modern one, having originated only a few
years ago, before discovery of the two popu-
lations of Cepheid variables. Two objections
were raised to the ‘“‘explosive”’ theory. One
was the discrepancy in the age of the universe
dictated by the theory as it then appeared.
The other was that it tended to support the
Biblical account of creation, a situation
some found to be unpalatable. So in 1948,
Bondi and Gold, as well as Hoyle, advanced
a “steady-state” theory, in which matter is
created continuously, one proton at a time,
throughout the universe, to replenish the
fleeing supply. A mathematical model has
been constructed on this concept and made
to fit present observations. It must be
recognized, however, that the steady state
theory is pure conjecture and has not a
single experiment or physical observation to
support it that does not also support the ex-
plosion theory. Furthermore, instead of dis-
agreeing by a factor of 2 or 3 with other
methods in indicating the age of the uni-
verse, it makes the universe eternal. Since
its introduction, however, the correction to
the astronomical measuring rod has brought
the explosive theory of Eddington, Lemaitre,
Gamow, and von Weizsacker into complete
harmony with other methods of age deter-
mination. That leaves only one argument
for the continuous theory over the explosive
theory: namely, it appears to contradict the
Biblical statement of creation. Even in this
matter however, it does not fully escape
criticism. If matter has to be created out of
nothing ultimately, is it any greater miracle
to create one neutron at a time, than to do
it all at once? Certainly there is difference
in degree, or in rate of generation if you
please, but where is the difference in kind?
The whole argument reminds me of the
heart specialist who was called on to treat a
patient with a broken leg. The doctor
treated him for a weak heart because he
didn’t like to mess with broken bones. I do
not mean to ridicule any man who is honestly
searching for truth. I am only pointing out
that the temptation to interpret observa-
tions so as to make them support conclusions
Avueust 1956 PAGE:
already reached is as dangerous as it is
difficult to avoid. Let me hasten to add that
I make no pretense of immunity from the
hazard.
Now let us return to our explosive model
and speculate on still greater distances. If
the law of red-shifts does in fact arise from
the flight of the galaxies, then at the distance
of 5 billion light years the velocity of reces-
sion will equal the velocity of hight. Any
galaxies beyond this limit would have to be
fleeing from us at an even greater velocity,
and their light would never reach us at all.
Thus we have an astronomical horizon be-
yond which we can never see with any pos-
sible kind of instrument.
We have no reason to assume, however,
that the earth is located at a point of origin
of galactic motion. Were we far removed
from such a point, all galaxies would still
appear to be receding from us. Assuming
such an origin to exist, let us transfer our
velocity reference point from the earth to
the locale in space where it all started. From
that point the universe moves away in all
directions with all possible velocities. If the
highest velocity of expansion is much less
than the velocity of light, the outer boundary
of the universe at any one time would be
nebulous and diffuse. If, on the other hand,
the original energy was such as to produce
velocities greater than the velocity of hight
in the absence of relativistic effects, the
presence of those relativistic effects would
restrain the velocities to less than the speed
of light, and the momentum would be main-
tained by the corresponding relativistic in-
crease in mass. The result might be a ‘‘piling
up” of galaxies at the outer boundary of the
expanding universe, moving outward as a
spherical shell or sort of ‘shock wave” of
hight at very nearly, if not exactly, the
velocity of light. Such a shell would hardly
be visible at the point of origin, but part of
it might be visible at points far out from the
origin. If this be the case, then, if the earth
is sufficiently far removed from the primeval
origin, and if telescopes are made capable of
seeing far enough, it should be possible to
find an increasing density of galaxies in the
direction of least distance to the shell or
outer boundary. The mathematical model
COSMOLOGICAL THEORIES
249
which seems consistent with this concept is
described under the title of ‘curved space,”
in which the radius of curvature in our uni-
verse is said to be 5 billion light years.
Let us now recapitulate the model we
have been describing in terms of the origin
and evolution of the earth. We start with
the phenomenal burst of radiant energy, the
solvent for all matter, and call it the birth of
our universe. In the first 30 minutes we see
all the elementary particles formed and or-
ganized into atomic nuclei. Then nothing
but cooling and expanding as matter con-
tinues to precipitate out of radiation, until
all is dark and cold. Then, slowly at first, a
great cloud begins to form out of the tur-
bulence, and separate itself from other
similarly forming clouds as they all shrink
into more dense masses of gas. Then coagu-
lating lumps of liquids and solids begin to
form, and little lumps fall into bigger lumps,
until certain large ones begin to draw to
themselves everything near them. And
since the whole cloud was rotating as a part
of the general turbulence, all the bodies were
also rotating as they formed, the speed of
rotation of each body increasing as matter
was drawn together in smaller volumes. And
as the large bodies grew larger, pressures at
their centers increased, with corresponding
increase in temperature, until the larger
ones became incandescent, shining one by
one, all through the galactic system. One of
these stars was our sun, and when it ‘“‘lit up”
it illuminated a host of planets with their
satellites. One of these planets was the earth,
which had coagulated from a little whirlpool
of gas within the greater ‘‘whirlpool”’ of the
solar system, which in turn was part of the
turbulence of the whole galaxy. When the
earth reached its maximum temperature, it
was too hot to retain water, so all the water
of the oceans and the moisture of the soil
existed as a dense shroud of steam com-
pletely enveloping the earth and continuous
right down to the earth’s surface. And as the
earth cooled, the steam condensed into pools
of hot water on the surface. Eventually the
moisture in the air dropped below the satu-
ration point, and the fog began to rise, leay-
ing a clear separation between the water
surface and the cloud blanket overhead,
250
much as we see it occasionally now. Then
the wet land began to become dry by
evaporation, and conditions were favorable
for the appearance of vegetation. When
vegetation appeared, it sustained itself by
reproduction, according to laws of heredity
that have been the subject of much study
since Mendel’s time. The mechanism seems
to be that each kind of plant has its seed
within itself and reproduces after its kind.
As moisture continued to condense and
fall as rain to the earth, the cloud blanket
became thinner and ultimately broke up.
Then for the first time the sun, moon, and
stars were visible on the surface of the earth,
and available for telling the time of day and
the seasons of the year.
By now we should have a fairly good
bird’s-eye view of what our universe is and
how it got to be that way, according to the
most probable modern scientific speculation.
Let us turn now to some other cosmologies,
pausing first to contrast the scientific at-
mospheres of past and present. Science to us
is a partnership between philosophy and
technology. We more familiarly refer to
these two aspects today as theory and ex-
periment. This partnership was first seri-
ously joined by Sir Isaac Newton and has
been growing with accelerating fruitfulness
ever since, particularly as mathematics be-
came increasingly a major tool of both.
Before Newton’s time, fruitful interactions
between the two were rare. When we probe
farther back to the Greeks and the Egyptians,
the Hebrews and the Babylonians, it was as
if neither was aware of the existence of the
other, unless to spurn it as a degrading in-
fluence on mankind. Even had the thought
occurred to form such a partnership, the
crude technology of ancient times was a
poor match for the philosophical conviction
that all natural phenomena were direct ac-
tions by conscious gods, whose behavior
was as capricious as that of men. It is im-
portant that we recognize this when dealing
with ancient cosmologies, and maintain a
sympathetic attitude as we attempt to
place outselves in the position of ancient
philosophers.
There are many cosmologies among the
mythologies of antiquity. We can not dis-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 8
cuss them all, but we will examine two of
them. First we will review what has been
called the Babylonian Genesis, the Enwma
Elish (“When above’’):
When above the heaven had not (yet) been
named,
(And) below the earth had not (yet) been called
by a name;
(When) only Apsu privemal, their begetter,
(existed) ,
(And) mother Ti’amat, who gave birth to them
all;
(When) their waters (still) mingled together,
(And) no dry land had been formed (and) not
(even) a marsh could be seen;
When none of the gods had been brought into
being,
(When) they had not (yet) been called by
(their) names, and
(their) destinies had not (yet) been fixed;
Then were the gods created in the midst of
them.
The created gods were the sons and grand-
sons, daughters and granddaughters of Apsu
and Ti’amat. But the children always be-
came greater than their parents, and they
also became mischievous and annoying, as
younger generations sometimes do, until the
old grandparents, Apsu and Ti’amat, could
not rest. Finally Apsu decided to put an end
to the annoyance:
Apsu opened his mouth
And said to Ti’amat, the holy (?) one:
“Their way is annoying to me,
By day I cannot rest, by night I cannot sleep;
I will destroy (them) and put an end to their
way,
That silence be established, and then let us
rest!”
When Ti’amat heard this,
She was wroth and cried out to her husband;
She cried out and raged furiously, she alone.
(For) the malice (of Apsu) disturbed her heart.
“Why should we destroy that which we have
brought forth?
Their way is indeed very annoying, but let us
take it good humoredly!”’
But Apsu would not be dissuaded, and he
plotted to kill his children. But the plot
leaked out, and he himself was killed by his
own offspring. In ensuing conflicts, Ti’amat
was slain by Marduke, who drained out her
Aveust 1956
blood and let the wind carry it away. He
then split her body in two, made the vault of
heaven from one half, and from the other
half, made the earth. Gods who had sup-
ported Ti’amat were enslaved. When they
complained of their slavery, the kind-hearted
Marduke took their leader’s blood and mixed
it with clay to make man. Then he assigned
to men the task of serving the gods, and set
the captive gods free.
This whole account is recorded in cunei-
form writing on clay tablets. It consists of
seven tablets, totaling over a thousand lines
in all, of which approximately 800 or 900
have been recorded and translated. It is
representative of the general character of
most mythological cosmologies. As one
might expect, it bears no real similarity to
our own modern cosmology. Under the
circumstances, this is not surprising.
Now permit me to review just one more
ancient cosmology. This one I will give in an
unpublished translation, since the published
translations are old, words change their
meaning from generation to generation, and
recent findings of archeology and philology
have added to our concepts of what the
originals really meant. This is the cosmology
of the ancient Hebrews, and in one form or
another may have been nearly contempo-
raneous with the Babylonian. I paraphrase
freely, in the attempt to recapture the
original thought as determined by the work
of modern scholars, making liberal use of
the terminology of modern cosmology.
In beginning, Gods created the heaven and the
earth. And the earth was without form, and nebu-
lous, and darkness reigned throughout all space.
And the Spirit of God was brooding upon the face
of the waters. And God said ‘“‘Let there be light,”’
and light appeared. And God saw the light, that it
was good. And God divided time into periods of
light and darkness. And God called the time of
light Day, and the time of darkness he called
Night. And this completed the first epoch of the
creation of the earth.
And God said “‘Let there be an expanse of clear
space in the midst of the waters, and let it divide
one part from another.’”’ And God made the ex-
panse of clear space above the earth, and divided
the waters which were under the clear space from
the waters which were above the clear space. And
God called the expanse of clear space Heaven.
PAGE: COSMOLOGICAL THEORIES
251
And this ended the second epoch of the creation
of the earth.
And God said, ‘‘Let all water under the heaven
be gathered together into one bed, and let the dry
land appear.”’ And it was so. And God said, ‘‘Let
the earth bring forth grass, the herb yielding seed,
and the tree yielding fruit; whose seed was in itself,
after his kind.”’ And God saw that it was good.
And this ended the third epoch of the creation of
the earth.
And God said, ‘‘Let there be lights in the ex-
panse of heaven to divide day from night, and for
indication of the seasons, days, and years, and let
them shine in heaven to give their light on the
earth.’’ And God caused to shine on the earth two
great lights, the greater for daytime, the lesser for
night time. The stars also he made to shine on the
earth from the expanse of heaven.
There is more in this Hebrew cosmology
with which we will not concern ourselves at
this time, since it deals with a quite dif-
ferent realm of science than we are consider-
ing. I should point out, however, that the
account of the appearance of lights for
indicating times and seasons does not make
reference to original creation of the lights at
this time, but rather the making available of
the hghts to the earth, such as would occur
by a clearing away of the clouds of moisture
around the earth.
I think this very cursory review suggests a
parallelism between the Hebrew cosmogony
and our own. This parallelism is rendered
even more remarkable by its striking con-
trast to the corresponding Babylonian ver-
sion. It is true that some students of ancient
records have attempted to show an extensive
parallelism between the Babylonian and the
Hebrew cosmogonies. Close scrutiny, how-
ever, shows the points of similarity to be
purely superficial, and of far less consequence
than the overwhelming weight of the con-
trasts. On the other hand, the amazing
consistency between the concepts of Hebrew
cosmogony and our own poses a question
which science has not answered: How did
those ancient Hebrews without aid of tele-
scope, spectrometer, electronics, atomic
theory, mathematics, and all the other com-
ponents of the foundations of modern cos-
mology, come into possession of the compre-
hension of prehistoric nature exhibited in
their cosmogony?
bo
Or
Lis)
(4)
) ver Haar, D.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF
SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 8
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Box, Barr J. New science of radio astron-
omy. Sci. Monthly, June 1955: 333.
Rusk, W. Rocer, and ScHWEITZER, GEORGE
K. Modern cosmogony. Lecture given be-
fore the annual meeting of the American
Scientific Affiliation at Colorado Springs,
August 1955. Journ. Amer. Sci. Affiliation
8 (1): 2. 1956.
Hacen, J. P., Linuny, A. E., and McCuatrn,
E. F. Absorption of 21-cm radiation by
interstellar hydrogen. Astrophys. Journ.
122 (3): 361. November 1955.
McCuain, E. F. An approximate distance
determination for radio source Sagittarius
A. Astrophys. Journ. 122 (3): 376. Novem-
ber 1955.
Linury, A. E., and McCuain, E. F. The
hydrogen line red shift of radio source Cyg-
nus A. N.R.L. Rep. 4689. December 1955.
Gamow, G. Modern cosmology. Sci. Amer.,
March 1954: 55.
Hacen, J. P., and McCuain, E. F. Galactic
absorption of radio waves. Astrophys.
Journ. 120 (2): 368. September 1954.
LECorRBEILLER, PurLippE. The curvature of
space. Sci. Amer., November 1954: 80.
Hacen, J. P., McCuarn, E. F., and Hepsurn,
N. Detection of discrete sources at 21 cm.
wavelength. Proc. Inst. Radio Eng. 42
(12). December 1954.
Gray, G. W. A larger and older universe.
Sci. Amer., June 1953: 56.
PaYNE-GaposcHKIN, CrcintA H. Why do
galaxies have a spiral form? Sci. Amer.,
September 1953: 89.
The age of the universe. Sci.
Monthly, October 1953: 173.
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
) Hurtey, P. M.
TER Haar, D. The origin of stars and gal-
axies. Sci. Monthly, December 1953: 279.
Ewen, Haroup I. Radio waves from inter-
stellar hydrogen. Sci. Amer., December
1953: 42.
Derrvey, Epwarp 8. Radiocarbon dating.
Sci. Amer., February 1952: 24.
Gray, G. W. The universe from Palomar.
Sci. Amer., February 1952: 48.
Darrow, Karu K. The quantum theory.
Sei. Amer., March 1952: 47.
STEBBINS, JoEL. Measuring starlight by
photocell. Sci. Amer., March 1952: 56.
Gamow, G. Turbulence in space. Sci. Amer.,
June 1952: 26.
Urry, Harotp C. The origin of the earth.
Sci. Amer., October 1952: 53.
Radioactivity and time. Sci.
Amer., August 1949: 48.
Reser, Grote. Radio astronomy. Sci.
Amer., September 1949: 34.
Srruve, Orro. Double stars. Sci. Amer.,
October 1949: 42.
Gamow, G. Supernovae. Sci. Amer., Decem-
ber 1949: 18.
Wuippeie, Frep lL. The dust cloud hypothesis.
Sci. Amer., May 1948: 34.
Gamow, G. Galaxies in flight. Sci. Amer.,
July 1948: 20.
CHANDRASEPHAR, 8. Galactic evidences for
the time-scale of the universe. Science 99:
133. February 18, 1944.
HerpeL, ALEXANDER. The Babylonian Gene-
sis. Chicago.
The Bible. Genesis 1: 1-16.
Let us remember, please, that the search for the constitution of the world is
one of the greatest and noblest problems presented by nature-—G. GALILEI.
Aveust 1956 LEVY:
METABOLIC PATTERNS AFTER
MORPHINE 253
PHARMACOLOGY .—Some metabolic patterns observed after morphine adminis-
tration in the rabbit. Louts Levy, Georgetown Medical School.! (Communi-
cated by Theodore Koppanyi.)
Recent investigations concerning the
mechanism of action of morphine on the
enzymatic level (/, 2) arrive at the conclu-
sion that there is little correlation between
the pharmacological action of morphine and
its action on the enzyme systems studied. All
attempts to describe the action of morphine
on an enzymatic level have shown inconsis-
tent patterns of enzyme inhibition, or re-
quire concentrations of morphine much
higher than found to be effective in the
intact animal (3).
A further review of the literature revealed
that there have been very few studies re-
cently on the chemical constituents of the
blood in morphinized animals. During the
past decade many new tools for chemical
analysis of the body fluids have become
available. A great advantage of these tech-
niques and methods is their ability to iden-
tify small quantities of substances. Perhaps
one of the simplest and most sensitive meth-
ods has been paper chromatography. This
technique was used throughout this inves-
tigation for qualitative determination of
blood constituents.
METHODS
Albino rabbits weighing 2 to 3 kgm were
used throughout the experiments. All injec-
tions of morphine were given subcutaneously
as the sulfate salt. Blood was taken from the
marginal ear vein in all experiments. Before
all sugar determinations, food was withheld
for 18 hours. Preliminary experiments re-
vealed that fasting was not necessary for
reproducible results with blood amino acid
nitrogen. Blood sugar was determined by the
Somogyi-Nelson method (4), and blood
amino-acid nitrogen was determined by the
naphthoquinine method (45) after deproteini-
zation as described by Hunter (6)
Ascending paper chromatography was
1 Present address, Department of Pharma-
cology, University of Cincinnati Medical College,
Cincinnati, Ohio. The author gratefully acknowl-
edges the technical assistance given to him by
Mrs. Bennett Avery in some of the chemical de-
terminations.
used throughout the experiments. The
deproteinized samples for sugar chromatog-
raphy were dried at 50° C. and redissolved
in absolute methanol. The samples were
concentrated approximately twofold. The
solvent system used was a mixture of n-bu-
tanol, pyridine, benzene and water (5:3:1:3).
Aniline citrate was used to identify the aldo-
ses, and orcinol, the ketoses.
Amino acids were identified, using 2-di-
mensional chromatography. The samples
were deioned according to the method of
Smith and Tuller (7) and then dried in a jet
of air and concentrated tenfold. Eighty per-
cent pyridine was the solvent used in one
dimension and 70 percent ethanol in the
other. A 0.2 percent ninhydrin solution in
water—saturated butanol was used as the
spray reagent to identify the amino acids.
In identifying the individual amino acids,
maps of known mixtures were used.
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
The biochemical phase of morphine which
has received the most attention has been the
hyperglycemia observed in rats, rabbits, and
dogs as well as certain other species after the
administration of morphine. Because this
was the most apparent biochemical lesion,
and rabbits are particularly susceptible to
this change, the first phase of this study
concerned itself with the hyperglycemic
response of rabbits to morphine.
Blood sugar determinations were made on
eight fasting rabbits 144, 1, 2, and 4 hours
after morphine. The hyperglycemia ob-
served had been reported previously (8).
This hyperglycemia disappeared after a week
of daily injections, and even when the dose of
morphine was elevated again, the rise in
blood sugar was very slight.
After two weeks of daily injections of mor-
phine sulfate, two of the rabbits were given
nalorphine (10 mgm/kgm) daily instead of
morphine at the time they were usually
given the morphine. Two other rabbits were
given daily saline placebos in place of the
usual morphine. Blood sugar levels of these
254
rabbits were determined daily as before. This
treatment was kept up for one week; at the
end of this time, a single injection of mor-
phine sulfate (80 mgm/kgm) was again
given to the rabbits.
During the week of nalorphine and placebo
injections there was no significant rise in the
blood sugar in either group of animals. Emer-
son and Phatak (8) as well as Phatak and
David (9) in longer experimental periods
claimed that when morphine administration
was abruptly stopped in rabbits, there was a
rise in the blood sugar. However, examina-
tion of these data reveals that the rise was
very small. Nalorphine has been shown to
precipitate withdrawal symptoms and _ if
hyperglycemia is part of a withdrawal phe-
nomenon in rabbits, it was not observed in
this experiment. Therefore, if the return to
normoglycemic response during continued
morphine administration is indicative of ad-
diction in the rabbit, withdrawal responses
should have appeared in both the nalorphine
animals and saline controls. Thus it appears
that the tolerance to morphine hypergly-
cemia in rabbits is not synonymous with
morphine addiction and can be considered a
non-specific stress response.
Upon reinjection of morphine sulfate (30
mgm/kgm) both the nalorphine and placebo
animals had quantitatively and qualitatively
similar rises in blood sugar. The nalorphine
animals had an average fasting blood sugar
of 87 mgm/100 ec, and one hour after mor-
phine it was at a maximum of 158 mgm/100
ec, a rise of 180 percent. The saline-treated
animals had an average fasting blood sugar
of 70 mgm/100 ce, and one hour after mor-
phine it was at a maximum of 128 mgm/100
ee, a rise of 183 percent (Table 1). Thus it
did not appear that the presence of nalor-
phine for one week conditioned the animal
body to the presence of morphine with re-
gard to the hyperglycemia. In acute experi-
ments nalorphine has been shown to block
the morphine hyperglycemia (10). In the
experiments just described, the action of
nalorphine had apparently worn off and it
was no longer effective in blocking the rise in
blood sugar.
The general methods for determining
blood sugar depend on the reduction of some
metallic ion by glucose. However, glucose is
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, NO. 8
TABLE 1.—RELATIVE BLoopD SuGAR LEVELS AFTER
INJECTION OF MORPHINE, NALORPHINE,
AND SALINE
Treatment Percent qaseraboue
mem-/kem } @ine. samples)
Percent
Morphine sulfate—20, Ist day............ 130
Morphine sulfate—20, 4th day........... 14
Morphine sulfate—30, Ist day............ 35
Morphine sulfate—30, 4th day........... 17
Nalorphine—10, 1st day.................. 10
Saline placebo, 1st day.................-. 26
Nalorphine—10, 6th day...... Rs ae 4
Saline placebo, 6th day.................. 0
Morphine sulfate—30, after nalorphine... 80
Morphine sulfate—30, after saline........ 83
not the only substance in the blood which
can reduce the usual copper reagents. Karly
reports (11, 12) presented evidence of sub-
stances other than glucose present in the
blood of morphinized animals which caused
an apparent hyperglycemia.
Paper chromatograms of the samples used
in blood-sugar determination revealed only
one spot when aniline citrate was the spray
reagent. This reagent reacts with aldohexo-
ses and aldopentoses. This spot was glucose
and was obviously darker after the morphine
injection than before, indicating that glucose
was the reducing substance causing the hy-
perglycemia. Three different solvent systems
were tried and eight different spray reagents
were used and all revealed the same patterns.
The next experiment was designed to
obtain some information concerning protein
and/or amino acid metabolism. Kruger,
dddy, and Sumwalt state in their review
(13); “The evidence is sufficient to indicate
deep-seated disturbances in the nitrogen
economy of the body.”’ Although this was
written 14 years ago, a review of the litera-
ture reveals no work has been done during
the interim on the nitrogen economy of the
body after morphine administration. With
this in mind and also the possibility that
some mechanism might be revealed, a study
of the effect of morphine on the blood amino
acids was undertaken.
Blood samples were obtained before and
1 hour after subcutaneous injections of 20
mgm/kgm of morphine sulfate on a different
group of rabbits. The amino-acid nitrogen
before injection was 10.1 mgm percent and
Aveust 1956
1 hour after morphine it was 9.1 percent.
This 1 milligram difference was significant to
the 0.1 percent level using the ‘‘t’’ test.
Paper chromatograms revealed at least 20
different identifiable amino acids. After mor-
phine, these 20 amino acids were still present,
although obviously in lower concentration.
The chromatograms indicated that there was
no qualitative change in amino-acid distri-
bution after morphine.
The physiological significance and inter-
pretation of changes in blood amino acid
nitrogen is still in question, and the literature
on the subject is very limited. However, a
drop in amino-acid nitrogen has been shown
to occur when epinephrine is given to animals
(14). Since the rise in blood sugar after mor-
phine has been shown to be caused by a re-
lease of epinephrine (1/45), the fall in blood
amino acid nitrogen could also be attributed
to this epinephrine rise.
SUMMARY
Through the use of chromatography, glu-
cose was found to be the major reducing sub-
stance in the blood, causing the morphine
hyperglycemia. Previously reported with-
drawal hyperglycemia was not observed in
this short-term experiment. Hyperglycemia
was also believed to be a result of increased
secretion of epinephrine. There was a lower-
ing of blood amino acid nitrogen, which was
considered a response to elevated epineph-
rine levels in the animal. Since there was
LEVY: METABOLIC PATTERNS AFTER MORPHINE PY 55)
no qualitatively observable change in any
single amino acid as revealed by two-dimen-
sional paper chromatography, it is believed
that the fall in amino-acid nitrogen is non-
specific with regard to individual amino
acids.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1) Youne, D., VAN pEeR Puioge, R., FeatruEr-
sTONE, R. H., and Gross, E. G. Journ.
Pharm. and Exper. Therap. 114: 33. 1955.
2) Wana, R. I. H., and Barn, J. A. Jbid. 108:
349. 1953.
(3) Srevers, M. H. Fed. Proc. 13: 672. 1954.
4) Standard methods of clinical chemistry 1. New
York, 1953.
5) Hawk, P. B., Osrmr, B. L., and SumMErson,
W. H. Practical physiological chemistry,
12th ed. Philadelphia, 1947.
(6) Hunter, G. Can. Journ. Res. 27: 230. 1949.
(7) Smita, E. L., and Tuiuer, F. F. Arch.
Biochem. and Biophys. 54: 114. 1955.
Emerson, G. A., and Poatrak, N. M. Univ.
California Publ. Pharmacol. 1: 77. 1938.
(9) Puatak, N. M., and Davin, N. A. Journ.
Pharmacol. and Exper. Therap. 109: 139.
1953.
(10) Kerrn, E. F., Jr., and De Borr, B.
Proc. 13: 374. 1954.
(11) Nrwa, Y. Mitt. Med. Akad. Kioto 4: 141.
1930.
(12) Conti, F. Minerva Med. 7: 250. 1927.
(13) Krurcer, H., Eppy, N. B., and Sumwatr,
M. The pharmacology of the opium alka-
loids. Publ. Health Rep. (Suppl.) 165. 1941.
(14) Mruuer, J. W., Georasn, R., Euuior, H. W.,
Sune, C. Y., and Way, E. L. Journ.
Pharmacol. and Exper. Therap. 114: 48.
1955.
(15) Russpuyi, J. Fed. Proc. 14: 696. 1955.
ee
(8
wa
Fed.
Nature in her inscrutable wisdom has set limits which she never oversteps.—
JEAN Rey.
256
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 8
HELMINTHOLOGY.—A review of the cestode genus Echeneibothrium. R. T.
YounG, University of Maryland. (Communicated by E. W. Price.)
(Received June 14, 1956)
This paper is an attempt to clarify the
taxonomy of the cestode genus Hchenei-
bothrium (family Phyllobothriidae; type
species, minimum van Beneden, 1850). This
genus, described by van Beneden in 1850,
comprises at least 18 recognizable species
common in selachian hosts. It has been in
need of review for some time.
Van Beneden based his genus on material
from Trygon pastinaca (= Dasyatis pas-
tinaca). Prior to his account, however,
Rudolphi (1819) had described Bothrio-
cephalus tumidulus (= Tetrabothrius tumidu-
lus), now recognized as Echeneibothrium
tumidulum from the same host. He described
the genus as having four bothridia borne on
long pedicels extremely variable in form.
These have regular “‘replis’’ over the whole
extent of the organ which resemble the ‘“‘la-
melles”’ on the head of an H’cheneis whence the
generic name. In classifying the species of
Echeneibothrium these ridges, and the con-
sequent number and arrangement of loculi,
are usually considered important; but in
view of the statement of Woodland (1927, p.
520) that in #. maculatum the ridges separat-
ing the loculi are temporary, and that there-
fore the latter ‘fare often entirely absent or
at least invisible,’ some question arises
regarding the importance of this feature in
classification.
Echenerbothrium is a very variable genus,
which accounts largely for the confusion in
classification of its species. Van Beneden
(1850, p. 113) says of the bothridia that they
are “‘extraordinairement variables dans leur
forme,’ and Beauchamp (1905, p. 520) says:
“Ni le nombre des alvéoles .. ni la forme
générale de la bothridie, ni la présence ou
Vabsence de myzorhynchus ...ne sont des
characteres au dessus de tout critique. Enfin
le longueur du cou et la loi de croissance des
anneaux sont charactéres de varieté d’indi-
vidu plutot que d’espeéce. I] en résulte qu’il n’y
a peutétre pas dans le genre une seule espéce
qui puisse étre nettement distinguée des
autres.”
This statement is perhaps somewhat exag-
gerated, but it emphasizes the need for cau-
tion in defining and describing species 1n this
genus.
RELATION TO OTHER GENERA
Rudolphi (1819) described Bothrioceph-
alus tumidulus, Leuckart (1819) B. echeneis,
Diesing (1863) Tetrabothrius sphaeroceph-
alum, van Beneden (1850) Tetrabothriwm
variabile, Linton (1890) Rhinebothrium,
Shipley and Hornell (1906) Tzarobothrium,
and Baer (1948) Caulobothrium, all of which
are probably synonymous with Hchenezboth-
rium. Joyeux and Baer (1936) recognized the
synonymy of the latter with Rhinebothrium,
as did Southwell (1925), but Baer (1948)
accepted Rhinebothrium as a genus distinct
from EHcheneibothrium, splitting the latter
into three genera, viz: Echeneibothrium
proper, Rhinebothrium, and Caulobothriwm.
According to this author (l.c., p. 83) the
first of these is restricted to European forms,
while the two latter occur in Dasyatis cent-
rura from Woods Hole, Mass. In the Euro-
pean species a myzorhynchus is always
present, while in the specimens from Woods
Hole there is never the “‘moindre trace’’ of
one. Beauchamp (l.c., p. 520) says the
myzorhynchus can be “‘completement invi-
sible quand il est rétracté et ne crée pas alors
un élargissement particulier de la téte.”
And Joyeux and Baer (1.c.) speak of a “petit”
myzorhynchus in E. minimum, tumidulum,
and julievansium, while van Beneden (l.c.)
says that in the first of these it is “peu dé-
veloppé.”’ Its value therefore as a specific,
much less a generic character,is questionable.
Baer (l.c., p. 98) defines Rhinebothrium as
lacking testes between the genital atrium
and the ovary on the poral side of the pro-
glottid. But on page 94 he apparently contra-
dicts himself by stating that “les testicules
.. contrairement 4 ce que nous avons ob-
servé dans les autres espéces, occupent toute
la face dorsale de V’anneau jusqu’a |’ovaire
...en arriere de l’atrium genitale et des tes-
ticules se trouvent toujours entre celui-ci et
Auveust 1956 YOUNG:
Vovaire dans la moitié porale du seyment”’
(italics are the writer’s). In Caulobothriwm
the testes occupy this space. In Fhinebo-
thrium the longitudinal musculature is re-
duced to a single subcuticular layer, while
in Caulobothrium there is, in addition to the
subeuticular layer, a parenchymal layer out-
side of the vitellaria but within the subcu-
ticular layer. In Rhinebothrium the vitellaria
are restricted to two lateral bands, while
in Caulobothrium they encroach laterally on
the dorsal and ventral faces of the medullary
parenchyma (p. 96). In the writer’s opinion
these differences are not sufficient to divide
the genus Echeneibothrium into three genera.
Echeneibothrium approaches most nearly
to Anthobothrium, and the relationship is
strengthened by the fact that in at least one
species of the latter genus, Spongiobothrium
variable (Linton, 1889) (= Anthobothrium
variabile) the bothridia have a series of in-
complete divisions resembling the loculi of
the former.
Discobothrium fallax van Beneden, 1871,
has been referred by Monticelli (1890) to
Echeneibothrium variabile, a reference sup-
ported by Olsson (1893) but opposed by
Lonnberg (l.c.), who maintained the dis-
tinctness of the two species.! Southwell
(I.c.) regards it as an interesting link between
the Tetraphillidea and the Cyclophyllidea,
but in 1930 he considers Discobothrium and
Echeneibothrium to be distinct.
Yamaguti (1934), recognizing the genus
Discobothrium, includes in it the species
japonicum, (which he describes as new) from
Narke japonica. Braun (1894-1900) considers
D. fallax a valid species on the basis of
Lonnberg’s opinion. It is also listed as a dis-
tinct species by Joyeux and Baer (l.c.). These
authors give the absence of bothridia as one
of the characters of the Cephalobothriidae,
although they describe the ‘‘quatre petites
ventouses situées en arriére’”’ of the myzo-
rhynchus which may perhaps represent. re-
duced bothridia. Wardle and McLeod (1952,
pp. 283-4) describe “four bothridia (at the
1 This statement is based on one by Southwell
(1. ¢., p. 385). While Lonnberg lists ?Discobothrium
fallax and Echeneibothrium variabile specifically
he makes no statement as to whether these are
the same or different species and is apparently
in doubt about this.
CESTODE GENUS ECHENEIBOTHRIUM
257
base of the holdfast) borne on long stalks and
very mobile.”’ They list fallax as a distinct
species in the genus Hcheneibothrium, con-
sidering the ‘resemblance between fallax
and Hcheneibothrium variable .. . sufficiently
close to make the inclusion of fallax within
the genus imperative” (p. 240). Beauchamp
(l.c., p. 521) agrees with Loénnberg, and
Woodland (l.ec., p. 5382) considers ‘‘Hchenet-
bothrium variable .. . definitely distinguished
from Discobothrium fallax on anatomical
grounds’’, the latter being renamed FH. fallax
in which the bothridia ‘‘usually show but
few indications of loculi” (l.c., p. 523).
Though Beauchamp (l.c., p. 509) says of
the bothridium that “il ne présente aucune
espéce d’alvéoles ou de replis transversaux”’
yet it is a fact that “very distinct loculi are
often to be found.”’ (Woodland, l.c., p. 524).
Southwell (l.c., p. 336) says that while he
was unable to obtain a specimen of fallax
“there is little...doubt that the genera
Discobothrium and Echeneibothrium are
different but closely related.”
In view of these conflicting opinions the
writer considers it best to place Discoboth-
rium fallax among genera and species in-
quirendae.
LIST OF SPECIES
1. Echeneibothrium flexile (Linton, 1890)
This species was described as Rhinebothrium
flexile in Trygon centrura (= Dasyatis centrura)
from Woods Hole, Mass. There are 38-42 loculi
in the bothridia which are borne on long stalks
and characterized by a hinge in the middle, giving
the appearance of two bothridia on one stalk.
The bothridial halves face each other when con-
tracted. A myzorhynchus is apparently absent.
Testes 10 in number. Ovarial lobes very long
“extending nearly to the middle of the segment”
(Linton l.c., p. 770).
2. Echeneibothrium variabile van Beneden, 1850
This species, from Raja clavata, R batis, and R.
rubus, is characterized by a definite myzorhyn-
chus. According to van Beneden the strobile
reaches a length of 100 mm, with at least 100
segments, but Beauchamp (l.c.) the
length as only 25-80 mm with many fewer seg-
ments. Joyeux and Baer (l.c.) give the number of
2
testes as 20-27, but in figure 14, plate 3,
gives
of his
258
1850 publication van Beneden shows only 16
testes. The cirrus sack is very long (22 mm),
reaching the middle of the segment. The bothridia
are rather strongly pedunculate, with approxi-
mately 8 loculi according to Linton (l.c.), but
van Beneden’s figure 6, plate 3 (1850), shows 20
loculi. The cirrus is spined according to Linton
(1889), or ‘“couvert des mémes asperités” ac-
cording to van Beneden (1850, p. 117). Linton
considers this species synonymous with Hchenei-
bothrium sphaerocephalum of Diesing (1863).
3. Echeneibothrium tumidulum (Rudolphi, 1819)
Syn. Bothriocephalus tumidulus.
From Trygon (= Dasyatis) pastinaca.
Rudolphi’s account of Bothriocephalus tumidu-
lus is so brief as to render identification difficult.
He apparently had only segments to examine.
The bothridia have one long, and several trans-
verse septa and are swollen. According to Dujar-
din (1845, p. 620) the bothridia are sometimes
“Huisque contigues, réunies en une masse globu-
leuse, quelquefois...divisés chacun en deux
lobes petaloides, oblongues et plissés.’’ These
differences emphasize the variable form of the
worm, any given specimen reflecting the form at
the moment of fixation.
Carus (1885) identifies it with both E. variabile
and E minimum and with Bothriocephalus eche-
neis of Leuckart (1819). Southwell (1925) con-
siders it identical with HL. variabile. Wardle and
McLeod (1.c., p. 240) describe it as ‘‘an extremely
variable form... (including) all the non-
rostellate forms in which each bothridium has a
double series of loculi.”” They, however, and
Joyeux and Baer (l.c.) recognize it as a distinct
species, but Baer (l.c., p. 90) finds it ‘‘une espéce
collective qu’il est impossible de reconnaitre,
which is the view of the writer.
4. Echeneibothrium longicolle (Linton, 1890)
Syn. Rhinebothriwm longicolle.
This species, from Myliobatis freminvillei and
Dasyatis centrura, is characterized by the large
number of testes (150-180) and by the long,
well-marked neck, which Baer (le¢., p. 93)
defines as a ‘“‘pédoncule céphalique (whose)
structure histologique est bien la méme que
celle du scolex et non que celle du strobile, (and
by) une puissante musculature longitudinale . . .
interne du parenchyme corticale...in addition
to the subcuticular muscles of other species. The
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 8
cirrus pouch is very long and narrow (0.35-0.36
by 0.037—0.073 mm). In its well-defined neck it
resembles Hcheneibothrium urobatidium (Young,
1955), but as stated there it differs in many
important respects from the latter.
5. Echeneibothrium palombii (Baer, 1948)
Syn. Rhinebothrium palombit.
This species from Dasyatis violacea is char-
acterized by the single row of 20-22 loculi, by the
size of its cirrus sack (0.36 mm long) and by the
number of testes (95-100).
6. Echeneibothrium maccallumi
Syn. Rhinebothrium maccallumi.
(Linton, 1924)
This species, from Dasyatis centrura, is char-
acterized by its few testes (4 or 5), although
Southwell (1925) considers it synonymous with
E. tumidulum, which has 20-25 testes according
to Joyeux and Baer (l.c.).
7. Echeneibothrium burgeri (Baer, 1948)
Syn. Rhinebothrium burgerv.
Baer does not give the host of this species,
merely stating that it was collected at Woods
Hole. According to him it is very near EF. flezile.
The difference in number of testes (380-35 in
burgert vs. 14-18 in flezile), however, would
seem to be distinctive, unless this is a matter of
development solely.
8. Echeneibothrium shipleyi (Southwell,
Syn. Rhinebothrium shipleyt.
1912)
Southwell first reported this as a distinct
species from Trygon (= Dasyatis kuhli). Later
(1925) he relegated it to synonymy with Echenet-
bothrium minimum because of transverse septa
only in the bothridia. Yamaguti (1934, p. 63),
however, ‘“‘on the basis of material from Dasyatis
akajet which corresponds to Southwell’s original
description” held that his species was “‘unques-
tionably valid.”” There is no myzorhynchus or
neck. Southwell (1930, p. 215) states that
‘Immediately posterior to the head (there) is a
swollen bulbous portion, triangular in shape,
with the apex passing into the proglottides.”’
Since EH. shipleyi has 130 segments, whereas
E. minimum has only 15, and has over 40 testes,
while minimum has about 20 only, the writer
agrees with Yamagutt.
Auveust 1956
9. Echeneibothrium cancellatum
Syn. Rhinebothrium cancellatum.
(Linton, 1890)
This species from Rhinoptera javanica has
three rows of loculi in the bothridia which are
mounted on short pedicels, two lateral rows and
one median, producing about 21 loculi. Southwell
(1925) and Wardle and McLeod (L.c.) accept
this species as valid, but some doubt as to its
status arises from the observations of Woodland
on LHcheneibothrium maculatum. And Linton
himself says (p. 772) ‘‘I am in doubt as to whether
the number of loculi is always constant.”’ But he
goes on to say (p. 775) “‘the difference between
the bothria of R. cancellatum and E. tumidulum is
too profound to admit of reconciliation. No
median row of loculi occurs in any of the pub-
lished figures of EH. tumidulum...while in R.
cancellatum it is very evident.” The cirrus pouch
extends a little past the median line, enlarging
at its interior end where its diameter nearly
equals the segment length. The cirrus is heavily
spined, especially at the base, where some of the
spines are 0.008 mm long by 0.003 mm broad
with sharply recurved and hooked ends. In this
respect it suggests H. minimum, but the arrange-
ment of the loculi in the bothridia is apparently
very different. This and the heavily spined cirrus
appear to determine it as a valid species.
10. Echeneibothrium trifidum Shipley
and Hornell, 1906
This species, from T’rygon walga (= Dasyatis
walga.), is characterized by the Y-shaped both-
ridia with the anterior half cleft longitudinally
and divided into 9 loculi in each half, while the
basal part has 9 also or 27 in all, viz; 9 large and
18 small. The bothridia are stalked and there is
no myzorhynchus.
11. Echeneibothrium minimum van Beneden, 1850
This species from Trygon pastinaca (= Dasya-
tis pastinaca) has been given as the type of the
genus Hcheneibothrium by Southwell (1925) and
Braun (1894-1900), although, so far as the writer
can discover, van Beneden did not specify any
species as a generic type. He described it as 15-17
mm long and so “gréle” that it was with difficulty
discernible to the naked eye. It has only 15
segments. The bothridia are divided ‘‘en 8 ou 10
lames qui peuvent se séparer au milieu.’’ A char-
acteristic feature are the heavy spines on the
base of the cirrus. “Le bulbe, qui est situé au
YOUNG: CESTODE GENUS ECHENEIBOTHRIUM
259
milieu des quatre appendices, est en génerale peu
prononecé dans cette espéce. Des plis se forment
sur toute la longeuer des bothridies, et se divi-
sent parfois au milieu par un profond sillon.”
12. Echeneibothrium rankini (Baer, 1948)
Syn. Rhinebothrium rankint.
Baer does not record the host of the single
specimen on which he based his description fur-
ther than stating that it came from Woods Hole.
He says it most nearly resembles shipleyi, both
species having a single row of loculi. He con-
siders it to be distinguished ‘“‘facilement de toutes
les autres du genre’’ (l.c., p. 88), distinguishing
it mainly by the size of the cirrus pouch ‘“‘qui est
presque deux fois plus grande chez R. shipleyr
que chez R. rankini.” The proportions which he
gives in his table on p. 98 however do not bear
out his statement. In shipleyi the pouch measures
0.4/0.024 mm, while in rankini it measures
0.216/0.09. These figures indicate that in the
former the pouch was more extended, while in
the latter it was more compressed. Were the
shape of the pouch in each species similar it is
most likely that the size (i.e., volume) in each
would be similar. For this reason, and because
Baer’s description was based on a single speci-
men, the writer considers it probable that the
two species are identical.
13. Echeneibothrium julievansium
1927
Woodland,
This species, from Raja maculata, based on a
single immature specimen, was differentiated
from E. variabile by the shape of the progottids
and the presence of two pairs of excretory vessels,
which latter fact was, in Woodland’s opinion,
“sufficient to disprove the identity” of these two
species. In variabile there is, according to Wood-
land, only a single vessel, which is unusual in
cestodes, the presence of two pairs of vessels
being the usual arrangement. This suggests the
possibility of a mistake by Woodland in over-
looking the dorsal vessels in variabile, they being
small and in some cases difficult to detect.
Joyeux and Baer (l.c.) recognize E. julievanstwm
as a valid species which, according to them, is
characterized “par le fait que les quatre both-
ridies sont globuleuses.”’ (p. 87). It is also recog-
nized by Wardle and McLeod (l.c.) on the basis
of its suckerlike bothridia. Not having seen any
specimens the present writer hesitates to give it a
260
definite status, preferring to place it in the class
of species inquirendae.
14. Echeneibothrium maculatum Woodland, 1927
A prominent, permanent “‘rostellum’”’ (myzo-
rhynchus) is given by Woodland as a char-
acteristic of this species from Raja maculata. This
has, however, been described for several other
species, and, as van Beneden (1850) and Beau-
champ (l.c.) have pointed out, the variability of
this organ, and the uncertainty even as to its
presence, militate against its use as a means of
specific determination. The writer finds no char-
acter sufficiently definite to determine this as a
distinct species, and it is accordingly relegated to
the group of species inquirendae.
15. Echeneibothrium austrinum Linton, 1924
Linton gives the host of this species as a “‘large
skate (from) Mossel Bay.’ Southwell (1925)
considers it identical with #. tumidulum. Linton
describes it as having a myzorhynchus and a
subglobular scolex with the ‘‘bothria united at
base, ... nearly circular in outline and provided
with locul”’ (p. 14) indeterminate in
number. There is no neck. The cirrus is ‘“‘armed
small
with closely set spines. Vitellaria massive at side
mainly in front of the level of the cirrus pouch,
but also continuing to the end of the proglottides”’
(p. 15). The length of two strobiles was 24 and
32 mm, respectively, while two scolices measured
0.21 and 0.26 mm in diameter. In the writer’s
opinion there is nothing distinctive in Linton’s
description and he believes this form should be
placed among species inquirendae.
16. Echeneibothrium insignia (Southwell, 1911)
Syn. Rhinebothrium insignia.
In his monograph Southwell (1925) stated
that on reexamination of his material he believed
this species from Trygon (= Dasyatis) warnak
to be identical with Echeneibothrium flexile, but
Baer (l.c., p. 95, footnote 1) has pointed out
that Southwell’s figure 138 is totally different
from his figure 139 in the form of the ovary, and
especially in the number and distribution of the
testes, though both of these figures refer to EH.
flexile (= R. insignia). In the light of these un-
certainties the writer is inclined to refer insignia
to species inquirendae.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, NO. 8
17. Echeneibothrium javanicum Shipley and
Hornell, 1906
This species is described by these authors as
9-12 mm long with a neck that occupies one-
third to one-half the length of the strobile,
pedunculate bothridia divided into 29 loculi by
two long, and several transverse ridges, lacking a
myzorhynchus and with a cirrus minutely spined.
In its three rows of loculi it resembles EH. can-
cellatum, both from the same host, Rhinoptera
javanica, but the heavily spined cirrus of can-
cellatum distinguishes clearly between these two
species.
18. Echeneibothrium hornelli, new name for T.
javanicum Shipley and Hornell, 1906
Syn. Tiarabothrium javanicum.
This species is described as 11-12 mm long
with sessile bothridia divided into 12 loculi by
transverse septa only. The neck has a definite
collar and the cirrus is minutely spined. It also
is a parasite of Rhinoptera javanica. Regarding it
Southwell (1925, p. 212) says: “the species...
appears to be indistinguishable from EH. minimum
...except that in the former there is a well-
developed myzorhynchus”, apparently over-
looking the characteristic cirrus in the latter
species. The description of this species is inade-
quate for a comparison with others and the
writer accordingly refers it to the list of species
tnquirendae.
19. Echeneibothrium trigonis Shipley and
Hornell, 1906
In this species from Trygon walga (= Dasyatis
walga) the bothridia are sessile and are divided
into 7 or 8 loculi by transverse partitions only.
It varies in length from 8 to 15 mm. The “stout,
unsegmented neck is a good deal broader than
the succeeding segmented parts’ (p. 81). The
authors do not describe the cirrus or give the
testes number so that an exact comparison with
other species is impossible.
20. Echeneibothrium myzorhynchum Hart, 1936
This species, from Raja binoculata, is defined
by the author as possessing a well-developed
myzorhynchus, pedunculate bothridia with ten
transverse loculi and ten or twelve testes located
in the anterior part of the proglottid. It has a
maximum length of 15 mm, with 64 distinct
proglottids. The author states (p. 495) that it
“9s separated from all species of Echeneibothrium
Aveust 1956 YOUNG: CESTODE
excepting #. minimum ...by the fact that the
bothridia are divided only by transverse septa,”
but his figure 6 shows a longitudinal septum very
clearly, with nine pairs of loculi and two at the
ends, making 20 in all. In its large myzorhynchus
and cirrus sack it resembles H#. variabile but is
smaller (15 mm and 64 proglottids compared with
35-70 mm, according to Joyeux and Baer, and at
least 100 segments according to van Beneden in
variabile). Hart does not give the number of
specimens examined by him, so that it 1s doubt-
ful how comprehensive his data are. Another
similarity between myzorhynchum and variabile
is the spiny cirrus.
Whether the differences in size and testis
number are sufficient to separate these two species
is, in the writer’s opinion, doubtful, so that he
prefers to relegate myzorhynchuwm to species
Inquirendae.
21. Echeneibothrium dubium van Beneden, 1858
From Raja batts. Van Beneden lists the
characters separating H. dubiwm from HE. mini-
mum and EH. variabile as follows: (1) In dubiwm
the bothridia are borne on long peduncles and
have few (6-8) areolae; (2) the myzorhynchus is
more slender than in variabile; (3) the form of
the spines on the cirrus is different from that in
minimum and variabile; (4) it occurs in a different
host. In van Beneden’s figures 3 and 12 the
spines on the cirrus of EH. dubtum are shown in
comparison with those of EH. minimum. Both are
of about the same length, those of the latter
being somewhat stouter. Whether these differ-
ences are sufficient to separate the two species is,
in the opinion of the writer, doubtful, and he is
therefore in agreement with Southwell (1925)
who considers dubiwm and minimum synonymous,
in spite of the opinion of Joyeux and Baer (l.c.)
who consider dubiwm a distinct species.
22. Echeneibothrium sphaerocephalum (Deslong-
champs, 1824)
Syn. Bothriocephalus sphaerocephalus.
According to Diesing (1863) this species, from
Raja clavata, has oval, pedunculate, multiloculate
bothridia, with transverse septa and a spherical
myzorhynchus. It measures 25-50 mm. No figure
is given and, from the brief account, identifica-
tion is impossible.
23. Echeneibothrium gracile Zschokke, 1889
This species, from Dasyatis clavata, measures
GENUS ECHENEIBOTHRIUM 261
up to 12 mm in length. The bothridia are borne
on short, thick stalks and are divided into 14-18
loculi by a longitudinal and several transverse
septa. There is a short, swollen myzorhynchus.
The cirrus pouch extends to the middle of the
segments, which are 30-50 in number. The end
of the cirrus is spined. There are not over 25
large testes situated in front of the genital ducts.
In the absence of any distinguishing features the
writer regards this as one of species iInquirendae.
24. Echeneibothrium 1934
tobigei Yamaguti,
According to Baer (l.c.) this species, from
Myliobatis tobiget, is very close to, if not identical
with Rhinebothrium longicolle, the presence of a
vaginal sphincter in the latter and its absence?
in the former being apparently the only dis-
tinguishing? feature. Length of neck (86 mm in
tobigei, 7 mm in longicolle) is another difference,
but to what extent this. was determined by the
state of contraction or expansion in specimens of
the two species is uncertain. According to
Yamaguti the bothridia have transverse parti-
tions only which would seem to separate it from
longicolle, but his figure 92, page 61, shows a
double row with a median partition. The testis
number is 140-160. In the writer’s opinion the
two are synonymous.
25. Echeneibothrium ceylonicum, Shipley arid
Hornell, 1906
In this species, from Trygon walga (= Dasyatis
walga), the bothridia are mounted on_ short
stalks and have 14 loculi. It has a neck of fair
length, and the strobile is 8 to 25 mm long. The
gonopore is ‘‘median.”’ Southwell (1925) identi-
fies it with twmidulum. Since the latter is proba-
bly a complex of species it is fairly safe to iden-
tify it with any one of a number of others.
26. Echeneibothrium ceylonicum (Shipley and
Hornell, 1906)
Syn. Rhinebothrium ceylonicum.
The second of these species from Trygon
(= Dasyatis) Kuhli and T. walga is described as
having the bothridia mounted on very short stalks
‘Sf indeed they exist at all. Each bothridium is
divided by a long and several transverse parti-
tions into about 20 loculi. Southwell (1925)
places it in Phyllobothrium lactuca, the production
of apparent areolae being due to the ‘folding and
frilling of the somewhat thickened margin of the
bothridium in precisely the manner shown by van
262 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Beneden”’ in the latter species. These two species,
E. ceylonicum and R. ceylonicum, are, in the
opinion of the writer, synonyms and homonyms,
and since R. ceylonicum has priority over E.
ceylonicum, the former name must stand for
both species which, in the writer’s judgement,
lack any characteristic features and are there-
fore relegated to the status of species inquirendae
27. Echeneibothrium affine Olsson, 1867
This species from Raja radiata and R. batis is
also, in the writer’s opinion, not well enough
defined to entitle it to specific rank. It is there-
fore allocated to species inquirendae.
28. Echeneibothrium walga Shipley and Hornell,
1906
One specimen only, which was ripe, was found
by these authors in Trygon (= Dasyatis) walga.
It was 7 mm long. Each bothridium is hinged in
the middle similar to those of H. flerile, and
each is divided by a long and several transverse
partitions into about 24 loculi. While only a single
specimen was available for study the hinged
bothridia apparently make this identical with F.
flexile, which is the view of Southwell (1925,
1930).
29. Echeneibothrium myliobatis-aquilae Diesing,
1863
Neither Diesing or Wedl (1855) gives any
account of this species other than a description
of the eggs. Zschokke (1889) found fragments of a
worm in Mylibatis aquila which he thought
might belong to this species, but he could not
definitely locate it in Echenerbothrium.
30. Tritaphros retzii Lonnberg, 1889
This species, from Raja clavata, is considered
by Southwell (1925) as possibly synonymous
with EH. twmidulum, but a comparison of his
figures 132 and 133 shows at a glance the im-
probability of such a comparison. It may be
identical with T'rilocularia gracilis (Olsson 1869).
31. Echeneibothrium sp. Beauchamp, 1905
This species, from Raja punctata and R.
macrorhynchus, 1s characterized by a large, ex-
tremely variable myzorhynchus. In certain
aspects it resembles H. dubiwm of van Beneden
(1858) but differs therefrom in the number of its
loculi and segments. The bothridia are “a peu
prés semblables” to those of EF. variabile, but
2 See Shipley and Hornell (1. c., pp. 71 and 82).
VOL. 46, No. 8
when elongated their transverse folds may dis-
appear (p. 525). The loculi are 6 or 7 in number
on each side. The neck, separated from the
strobile by a slight constriction, is “‘trés gréle
ainsi que le corps.’’ No details of internal struc-
ture are given and, in the light of Beauchamp’s
uncertainty as to its classification and the lack of
more adequate data, the writer must relegate it
to the list of species inquirendae.
32. Echeneibothrium simplex Shipley and Hornell,
1906
In this species, from Trygon walga (= Dasyatis
walga), the loculi are restricted to the borders of
the bothridia. Southwell (1925) considers it
synonymous with Anthobothriwm, variabile an
opinion with which the writer concurs.
33. Echeneibothrium bifidum Yamaguti, 1952
This species is of interest as the only one re-
corded thus far in teleosts, to the writer’s knowl-
edge. He has, however, found specimens of the
genus in an Athertinops in southern California and
in toadfish (Opsanus tau) in the Gulf of Mexico
and Chesapeake Bay, the latter of which is
awaiting description. It seems remarkable that
there are not more records of the genus in teleosts,
since it occurs commonly in selachians which
prey upon the latter.
Yamaguti’s description was based on a single
specimen from Trachurus trachurus. In its 12-138
transverse, and two longitudinal septa in the
bothridia it suggests H. cancellatum, but the
bilobed bothridia set it apart from that or any
other species known to the writer with the pos-
sible exception of EH. flexile and of EH. bi-lobatum
Young, 1955.
34. Echeneibothrium multorchidum Young, 1954
This species occurs in the stingray (Urobatis
hallert) in southern California. It is characterized
by the number of testes together with the stalked
bothridia which are divided into about 38 loculi
by one long, and several transverse partitions.
There is no evident myzorhynchus. It shows
considerable resemblance to Rhinebothrium bur-
gert (Baer, 1948), but differs from the latter in size
and in number of loculi (88 vs. 48-50 in burgert).
Available specimens of EH. multorchidum were not
ripe, but it apparently is much shorter and has
fewer segments than the former.
1955
This species also occurs commonly in the
35. Echeneibothrium urobatidium Young,
Aveust 1956
stingray. It is apparently one of the complex
hitherto included in the species H. twmidulum
but differs from the published accounts of the
latter in three respects: (1) Form of strobile. In
tumidulum the anterior proglottids are con-
spicuously wider than long, while in wrobatidium
the difference is not nearly so noticeable. (2) The
number of proglottids is much smaller in the
latter than in the former (about 50 in uro-
batidium, over 200 in tumidulum). (8) The testes
are 10-12 in wrobatidium, 20 in tumidulum. In
its distinct neck it resembles Hcheneibothrium
longicolle but differs from the latter in testis
number and in other important respects.
36. Echeneibothrium bilobatum Young, 1955
This curious little species from Urobatis
halleri, a description of which was based on a
singJe immature specimen, resembles EH. flexile
and E. bifidum in the bi-lobed bothridia. The two
lobes however are different in size, which clearly
sets it off from either. It is peculiar in the small
number of testes judging from the single speci-
men available, which are arranged in a single
line. In this respect it resembles H. maccallumi
but differs from the latter in its bi-lobed bothridia
and in other ways. It is similar to H. minimum
and EH. shipleyi in having transverse septa only in
the bothridia, but is very distinct from them in
other respects. There is no evident myzorhynchus
or distinct neck. There were about 25 proglottids
in the specimen observed.
37. Echeneibothrium sp.
An Echeneibothrium occurs commonly in the
toadfish reference to which has already been
made.’ The cysts containing the scolices are
located mostly around the rectum. The bothridia
have transverse septa only dividing them into
about 22 loculi and are borne on stalks about
one-half the length of the bothridia themselves.
38. Echeneibothrium octorchis Riser, 1955
This species, from Raja montereyensis, is
characterized by its few (7-9) testes and small
strobile. It has 10 loculi in the bothridia which
are armed, as are the pedicels, with small curved
hooks. The cirrus is covered with fine hairs.
39. Echeneibothrium dolichoophorum Riser, 1955
This species, from Raja rhina, is characterized
by its large myzorhynchus and the long, narrow
ovarian wings. The bothridia are 10-loculate.
’ See p. 256.
YOUNG: CESTODE GENUS
ECHENEIBOTHRIUM 263
40. Echeneibothrium macrascum Riser, 1955
In this species from Raja montereyensis the
pedicels are attached to the posterior borders of
the bothridia. There is a massive cirrus sack and
a long, much-coiled ejaculatory duct.
SYNONYMY
The following table gives the various
synonymies found in the literature:
Echeneibothrium flexile:
Rhinebothrium flexile Linton, 1890
Rhinebothrium insignia Southwell, 1911
Echene‘bothrium walga Shipley and Hornell,
1906
Echeneibothrium tumidulum:
Bothriocephalus (Tetrabochrium) tumidulus
Rudolphi, 1819
Bothriocephalus echeneis Leuckart, 1819
Echeneibothrium variabile van Beneden, 1850
Echenetbothrium affine Olsson, 1867
Echenetbothrium gracile Zschokke, 1889
Echeneibothrium ceylonicum Shipley
Hornell, 1906
Echeneibothrium austrinum Linton, 1924
Echeneibothrium minimum van Beneden, 1850
Rhinebothrium maccallumi Linton, 1924
Rhinebothrium longicolle Linton, 1890
Tritaphros retzit Lonnberg, 1889
Petalocephalus tumidulus
and
Echeneibothrium walga:
Rhinebothrium flexile Linton, 1890
Echeneibothrium insignia:
Caulobothriwm insignia Baer, 1948
Rhinebothrium insignia Southwell, 1911
Echeneibothrium flexile
Echeneibothrium minimum:
Echeneibothrium sphaerocephalum (Deslong-
champs, 1824), Diesing, 1863
Echeneibothrium trigonis Shipley and Hornell,
1906
Tiarabothrium javanicum ibid.,
Rhinebothrium shiplyei Southwell, 1912
Rhinebothrium palombii Baer, 1948
Echeneibothriwm dubiwm Beneden, 1858
Anthobothrium ceylonicum Southwell, 1912
Echenetbothrium cancellatum:
Rhinebothrium cancellatum Linton, 1890
Echeneibothrium javanicum Shipley and Hor-
nell, 1906
Echeneibothriwm sphaerocephalun:
Bothriocephalus sphaerocephalus | Deslong-
champs, 1824
Tetrabothrius sphaerocephalum Diesing, 1863
Echenetibothrium variabile van Beneden, 1850
264
Echeneibothrium variabile:
Echeneibothrium sphaerocephalum
1863
Bothriocephalus echeneis Leuckart,
Tetrabothrium variabile (van Beneden,
Diesing, 1854
Echeneibothrium tobiger:
Rhinebothrium longicolle Linton, 1890
Diesing,
1819
1850),
Echeneibothrium simplex:
Anthobothrium variabile (Linton, 1889), South-
well, 1925
Echeneibothrium longicolle:
Rhinebothrium longicolle Linton, 1890
Caulobothrium longicolle Baer, 1948
Echeneibothrium ceylonicum:
Rhinebothrium ceylonicum Shipley and Hor-
nell, 1906; Phillobothriwm lactuca Beneden,
1850
Echeneibothrium palombi:
Rhinebothrium palombit Baer, 1948
Echenetbothrium fallax:
Discobothrium fallax Beneden, 1871
Echeneibothrium variabile (Monticelli, 1890)
Echeneibothrium maccallumi:
Rhinebothrium maccallumi Linton, 1924
Echeneibothrium tumidulum Rudolphi, 1819
Echeneibothrium burgert:
Rhinebothrium burgert Baer, 1948
Echeneibothrium shipleyi:
Rhinebothrium shipleyi Southwell,
Echeneibothrium minimum
1912
Echeneibothrium rankini:
Rhinebothrium rankini Baer, 1948
Echeneibothrium austrinum:
Echeneibothrium tumidulum.
SUMMARY
In this paper a discussion has been given
of the genus Hcheneibothrium, its relation to
other genera, and a list of species hitherto
described, 18 of which are recognized by the
writer. The following key should aid in their
identification.
Bothridiaghingedeecsesenee tee ee (1) flexile
Bothridiammotihingedteaeeer cee eee cree
Awe Bothnridiaslobedeannneiaeececoeeeee eee B
Bothridia not lobed............... ac
IBA) Wobestequalis. ise eee (2) bifidum
obestunequallen sae ae (3) bilobatum
C. Bothridia tripartite...............(4) trifidum
Bothnidrajentineseneeee eerie ee D
D. Bothridia with transverse partitions only...E
Bothridia with both transverse and long par-
CUCL OM Sis ace Seta tetas tires an ar eee ancl ner: G
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 46, No. 8
E. Base of cirrus with heavy spines, 15 segments
(5) minimum
Base of cirrus without such spines........ F
. 10 loculi,! about 40 testes......... (6) shipleyt
20-22 loculi, 495-100 testes........ MD. ele
G. My or nnXS OS large®.. SE
Myzorhynchus albert} G or 2 Saal. sta I
H. Testes more than 16.. (8) variabile
Testes less than 16, Ovary ich long wings
(9) doliochoophorum
I. Bothridia with loculi in 3 rows............ J
Bothridia with loculi in 2 rows............ K
J. Cirrus heavily spined........ (10) cancellatum
Cirrus minutely spined........ (11) javanicum
K. Testes more than 100...........(12) longicolle
MTestesiless thant 10023. Seen eee L
IG-} Mestesis0kor mores. =e oee eee M
Mestesiless) thantc0ee nee eee N
M. Bothridia with 48-50 loculi,! length 8 mm
(13) burgerz
Bothridia with 38 loculi,! smaller
(14) multorchidium
INewLestes: 20-235 .45 cee ee (15) macrascum
MesteslOHI2i sen ys eee (16) urobatidium
Testes 7-9... 02.4.0 eee (17) octorchis
Mestesi4 ore ete (18) maccallumi
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
My thanks are due the University of
Maryland for the privilege of working in its
library and laboratory while making this
study. I am also indebted to the U.S. De-
partment of Agriculture for the use of its
library at Beltsville, Md. Mr. Allen Mc-
Intosh of the Department has kindly read
the manuscript and offered many valuable
suggestions about it.
REFERENCES
Beaucuamp, P. M. Htudes sur les cestodes de
sélaciens. Arch. Parasit. 9: 463-539. 1905.
Barr, J. G. Contributions a l’étude des cestodes
de sélaciens, I-IV. Bull. Soc. Sci. Nat. Neu-
chatel, 71: 63-122. 1948.
BENEDEN, P. J., van. Recherches sur la faune
littorale de Belgique, les vers cestoides. Mém.
Acad. Roy. Sci. Belgique 15: 1-199. 1850.
. Mémoire sur les vers intestinaux. Compt.
Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris, 1858, 2 suppl.: 1-376.
———. Les poissons des cétes de Belge, leur para-
sites et leurs commensaux. Mém. Acad. Roy.
Sci. Belgique 38: 1-120. 1871.
Braun, M. Vermes, Abthl. 1b, Cestodes. Bronn’s
Klass. Ord. Theirreiches 4: 111-—vir, 927-1731.
1894-1900.
Carus, J. V. Prodromus faunae Meditteraneae
. Pt. 1, Cestodes: 113-121. Stuttgart, 1885.
“See p. 256.
®> While the variability of the myzorhynchus
militates against its use in classification, it seems
to be the best means for this purpose here.
Aveust 1956
DeEstonccHamps, E. Encyclopédie méthodique.
Histoire naturelle des zoophytes 2. 1824. (Cited
by Diesing.)
Dresinc, M. Revision der Cephalocotyleen. Para-
mecocotuleen. Sitzb. Akad. Wiss. Wien (math.-
nat. Kl.) 48 (1): 200-345. 1863.
DusarvDin, F. Histoire naturelle des helminthes
ou vers intestinaux: xv1, 654 pp. Paris, 1845.
Hart, J. F. Cestoda from fishes of Puget Sound,
III. Phyllobothroidea. Trans. Amer. Mier.
Soc. 55: 488-496. 1936.
JoyrEux, C., and Barr, J. G.
France 30: 1-613. 1936.
Leuckart, F. 8. Das Genus Bothriocephalus
Rud. Zoologische Bruchstiticke 1: 70 pp.
1819. (Cited by Southwell.)
Linton, E. Notes on Entozoa of marine fishes of
New England. U. S. Fish Comm. Rep. for
1886, pt. 14: 4538-511. 1889.
Notes on Entozoa of marine fishes of New
England with descriptions of several new spe-
cies. U. S. Fish Comm. Rep. for 1887, pt. 15:
719-899. 1890. :
Notes on cestode parasites of sharks and
skates. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. vol. 64 (21),
1-114 pp. 1924.
LOnnBERG, E. Bidrag till Kannedomen om 7
Sverige forekammande Cestoder. Bihang Sven-
ska Akad. Handl. 14: 1-69. 1889.
Monticeiit, F.S. Ebenco degli Elminti studiati a
Wimereux nella primavera del 1889. Bull. Sci.
France et Belgique 27: 417-444. 1890.
Ousson, P. Entozoa, iaktagna hos Skandinaviska
hafiscar. Plathelminthes. Acta Univ. Lund.,
math. nat. Vet., no. 3: 59 pp. 1867.
Nova genera parasitantia copepedorum
et platyhelminthium. Acta Univ. lund., math.
Nat. Vet., 6 (7) 6 pp. 1869.
. Bidrag till skandinaviens helminthfauna,
II. Kon. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Handl., N.F.,
25 (2), art. 12: 41 pp. 1893.
Riser, NatHan W. Studies on cestode parasites
of sharks and skates. Journ. Tennessee Acad.
Sei., 30(4): 265-311. 1955.
Rupotrnt, K. A. Entozoorum synopsis cut acce-
Cestodes. Faune de
YOUNG: CESTODE GENUS ECHENEIBOTHRIUM
265
dunt mantissa duplex et indices locupletissimi:
811 pp. Berlin, 1819.
SuipLtey, A. E., and Horne tn, J. Cestode and
nematode parasites from the marine fishes of
Ceylon. Herdman’s Report on Pearl Fishery
of Ceylon, pt. 5: 48-96. 1906.
SouTHWELL, T. A description of nine new species
of cestode parasites, including two new genera
from marine fishes of Ceylon. Ceylon Mar.
Biol. Lab. Rep. 1 (5): 216-225. 1911.
A description of ten new species of cestode
parasites from marine fishes of Ceylon, with
notes on other cestodes from the same region.
Ceylon Mar. Biol. Rep. 1: 259-278. 1912.
A monograph on the Tetraphillidea, with
notes on related cestodes. Liverpool School Trop.
Med. Mem. 2 (N. s.): 368 pp. 1925.
Cestoda, vol. 1. The fauna of British
India: 397 pp. London, 1930.
Warpie, R. A., and MacLeop, J. A. The zoology
of tapeworms. xxiv, 780 pp. University of
Minnesota Press, 1952.
Weput, K. Helminthologische Notizen. Sitzb.
Akad. Wiss. Wien (math.-nat. Kl.) Abth. 1,
16: 371-395. 1855.
Woopuann, W. N. F. A revised classification of
the tetraphillidean Cestoda, with descriptions of
some Phyllobothriidae from Plymouth. Proc.
Zool. Soe. London, 1927: 519-548.
Yamacuti, 8S. Studies on the helminth fauna of
Japan, pt. 4, Cestodes of fishes. Japan Journ.
Zool. 6: 1-112. 1934.
Ibid, pt. 49. Cestodes of fishes II. Acta
Med. Okayama Univ. 8: 1-109. 1952.
Youne, R. T. Cestodes of sharks and rays in
southern California. Proc. Helm. Soc. Wash-
ington 21: 106-112. 1954.
Two new species of Echeneibothrium
from the stingray, Urobatis halleri. Trans.
Amer. Micr. Soc. 74: 232-234. 1955.
ZscHoKkKE, F. Recherches sur la structure ana-
tomique et histologique des cestodes des poissons
marins. Mém. Inst. Nat. Genevois 17: 1-396.
1889.
The practical man is the man who practices the errors of his forefathers.—
HUXLEY.
266
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 8
GEOLOGY .—A hydrologic budget in relation to the climate and geology of the Beaver-
dam Creek basin, Eastern Shore of Maryland.. Gorpon E. ANDREASEN and
WiuuiaM C. Rasmussen. (Communicated by A. N. Sayre.)
(Received June 27, 1956)
The Beaverdam Creek basin on the East-
ern Shore of Maryland was selected for a de-
tailed quantitative study of the hydrologic
cycle. The object was to determine the ap-
portionment of precipitation into direct sur-
face runoff, ground-water recharge (and,
later, ground-water discharge in the form of
surface runoff), and evapotranspiration. The
land surface, the soils, and the ground-water
conditions are representative of much of the
sandy portion of the Atlantic Coastal Plain,
and the humid mesothermal climate is typi-
cal of the eastern United States.
The drainage basin, covering an area of
19.5 square miles, is relatively flat, consisting
of low marine terraces. The ground-water
reservoir that is of significance extends from
the land surface to depths of 75 to 175 feet
below the surface; it is underlain by a rela-
tively impermeable clayey silt which pre-
vents appreciable water loss through leakage
into deeper aquifers, or gain by leakage from
them.
Weekly measurements of precipitation,
total stream runoff, surface-water storage,
ground-water stage, and soil resistivity (the
latter as a guide to soil-moisture content)
were made during a 2-year period, April 1,
1950, to March 28, 1952. Instrumentation
consisted primarily of 25 driven observation
wells, 12 rain gages, a stream-gaging station,
5 staff gages on surface streams, and 3 soil-
resistivity stations.
The hydrologic measurements are sum-
marized in two budgets, a total budget and
a ground-water budget. The total budget of
the hydrologic cycle is represented by the
equation
P=R-+ ET + ASW + ASM + AGW
where P is precipitation, R is runoff in
streams, HT is evapotranspiration, ASW is
change in surface-water storage, ASM is
change in soil-moisture storage, and AGW is
1 Abstract of a paper presented on January 25,
1956, before the Geological Society of Washington.
change in ground-water storage. The last
term, AGW, is a function of ground-water
stage, or
ANGWs =e
where H is ground-water stage and Y, is the
gravity yield, or yield under transient drain-
age of the saturated sediments. The quan-
tities HT’ and Y, are unmeasured but not
entirely unknown. They are arrived at by a
method of convergent approximations, pre-
sented as one of the contributions of this
paper.
The ground-water budget is represented
by the equation
C= DAR yee eenie
in which G, is ground-water recharge, D is
ground-water runoff, AH is the change in
mean ground-water stage, Y, is gravity
yield, and #7’, is the ground-water evapo-
transpiration. The qualtities G, and D for
each were derived from the hydrograph of
the mean ground-water stage and from ex-
trapolated ground-water recession curves
and base-flow rating curves (obtamed by
plotting the mean ground-water stage against
the base flow of the stream). The weekly
difference between the mean ground-water
stage, AH, multiplied by the gravity yield,
Y,, gives the net change in ground-water
storage. The equation was then solved for
ET,. This method is presented as a second
contribution.
The total precipitation during the 2-year
period (104 weeks) was 82.83 inches, of which
29.88 inches ran off in the creek, 50.24 inches
was evaporated and transpired, and 2.71
inches went into a gain in storage. The
change in ground-water storage was 2.66
inches, that in surface-water storage, 0.04
inch, and that in soil-moisture storage, 0.01
inch.
Ground-water recharge totaled 42.63
inches disposed of as follows: ground-water
runoff into the creek, 21.46 inches; ET;
Aveust 1956
1945 imches; and AH-Y, (GW), +1.72
inches (different from figure of 2.71 given
above because based on a period of 104.4
weeks instead of exactly 104 weeks).
It is concluded that abundant rainfall and
high infiltration rates provide this portion of
the Atlantic Coastal Plain with large quan-
OBITUARY
267
tities of water, which are discharged about
equally in the form of runoff and by evapo-
transpiration. Recovery of water discharged
by nonbeneficial plants, or as unused
streamflow, would permit great expansion
of water facilities for irrigation, industry,
or municipal supply.
€. D. Merrill
Elmer Drew Merrill was for his time probably
the most widely known botanist in the world. At
the International Botanical Congress at Amster-
dam in 1935 he literally sat in the center of the
world’s leaders in plant taxonomy and, through
his directorship of important botanical institu-
tions, of persons engaged in botany generally. In
1954 he was honorary president of the Eighth
International Botanical Congress at Paris. On
the occasion of his seventieth birthday he was
called the ‘American Linnaeus’ for the breadth
and detail of his mastery of the field of plant
classification, for his originality and ability in
methodological and administrative work, and for
his ready desire to assist his fellow workers the
world over in what was then described as an
“often astonishingly effective way.”
What may be Merrill’s place in the history of
botany as written a hundred years from now?
Will it be his invention of the ‘Merrill case’
(cf. Torreya 26: 50-54. 1926), a highly useful
storage carton designed during his Manila years
for herbarium filing? Will he be remembered for
advocating the naming of periodicals with single
word titles? Though he did not originate it he
certainly traditionalized the practice in Hilgardia,
Brittonia, and Arnoldia. Or will workers using the
loose-leaf ledger form of Index Kewensis in our
larger botanical libraries recall the man who ini-
tiated this clever device? Certainly those who
use the offset reprint editions of hard-to-obtain
botanical titles, like those of Rafinesque and
Gronovius, will owe him a debt of gratitude. Tax-
onomists of the Twenty-first Century engaged in
tracing types and in writing floras of southeast
Asia and Polynesia will be using his commentaries
on the works of Blanco, Loureiro, and Rumphius,
not forgetting the bibliographies that he, some-
times in collaboration with Dr. E. H. Walker
assembled. Perhaps by that time there will be
such urgent need of these bibliographic tools,
from the increment of publication down the years,
that their now oft-times reluctant financing will
have yielded to ready support. Merrill’s Index
Rafinesquanus (1949) will have stood for a cen-
tury beside essential tools of the taxonomist, and
his labor in bringing together all the vicarious
names published by that unhappy and confound-
ing naturalist Rafinesque will be appreciated.
It will be particularly interesting to learn the
Twenty-first Century’s verdict on his most con-
troversial innovation: herbarium inserts of taxo-
nomic literature. Will its “great utility and
eminent practicability’? have been realized? Will
his insistence that to incorporate the references
into the herbarium adds a card catalog and a
library to the herbarium thus making a single
working unit for the taxonomist be gainsaid? In
1937 Merrill declared, ‘I am convinced that this
innovation is one of the most important advances
made in herbarium technique in the last few
decades.”” Or will his best known memento be
that graceful, feather-leaved, smooth-trunked
palm Adonidia merrillii named for him by
Beccari? With its spectacular bunches of bright
red fruits each resembling a plum, this palm is a
native of Palawan, P. I., and now grown on the
streets of Manila, but only as a novelty in our
southern Gulf Coast cities. Perhaps a hundred
years from now it will decorate our gardens as a
commonplace. Will ‘Merrill’s palm’ be a part of
daily speech tomorrow with as slight awareness
of its association as ‘Johnson grass’ is today?
Of the numerous tribe of Merrills of Maine,
whose roots took hold on this continent in 1635,
Elmer Drew Merrill was one of twins born on
October 15, 1876, the last of a family of five chil-
dren. The four boys milked the cows, planted,
weeded, and hoed potatoes, and dragged the fields
for rocks, rocks, and more rocks. At Maine State
268
College (later the University of Maine) he came
under the influence of Prof. F. L. Harvey. In
1898 he took his B. 8. degree and returned as an
assistant in natural sciences the next fall. In
July 1899 he accepted the position of assistant
agrostologist at Washington under F. Lamson-
Scribner. It seems from the frank autobiograph-
ical sketch that Merrill has left us (Asa Gray
Bull., n. s., 2: 335-370. 1953) that Lamson-
Scribner’s confidence in him far exceeded his own.
Though he accomplished a good deal at his
government job and might well have remained
in the service in Washington, the opening of the
Bureau of Agriculture in Manila enticed him to
take a position as botanist there. Again he was
strongly encouraged by Lamson-Scribner. He
left New York on February 22, 1902, for Manila
to remain, with few respites, for 22 years. During
those years he explored all parts of that archi-
pelago, as well as parts of Java, Borneo, the
Malay Peninsula, and southern and eastern
China. Merrill described approximately 4,000
species of plants based principally on this experi-
ence. The quintescence of these years went into
Plant life of the Pacific world (1945), a book which
Fairfield Osborn aptly described as ‘‘an extraor-
dinary accomplishment.”
Merrill was always alert to weeds. When he
arrived in Manila he found very few plant collec-
tions at hand for comparison with the specimens
he brought back to the laboratory. He set about
collecting the weeds of the Bureau of Agriculture
grounds, only to discover that in many instances
the endemic plants of southeast Asia were much
better known taxonomically than these shifting
populations of the sidewalks. Years later he
carried his study of immigrant plants much fur-
ther, checking the collections made on Cook’s
voyages in the South Pacific to determine the
date of introduction of these weeds. In large part
his quest was successful, and his last book, The
botany of Cook’s voyages (1954), musters his data
in highly readable though somewhat repetitious
chapters, and documents the proposition that
“pre-Columbian civilizations in America were
based absolutely and wholly on a strictly Ameri-
can agriculture, which in turn was based wholly
on native American plants.”’ Merrill wrote per-
suasively, and in this book as in the 23 essays
gathered by Dr. Verdoorn and published in 1946
as Merrilliana (Chronica Botanica 10: 127-394)
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 8
his skill is attested. The plant geographer and
ethnobotanist cannot afford to ignore them.
Detailed accounts of his life will appear, but
there remains a facet of Dr. Merrill’s life that
may slip away as those who knew him personally
follow him into history: the warm enthusiasm he
lived for our enticing science. This was both an
international and a personal quality, as the Dutch
botanist Dr. Lanjouw has pointed out, and en-
deared him to a wide circle of men. If he believed
a project was a worthy one, he spared no time
nor effort actively to push for its completion.
Writing hundreds of letters of recommendation
sponsoring candidates for fellowships, grants-in-
aid, and positions far and near, imaginatively ar-
ranging funds for a graduate student to make a
field trip that he appreciated so well would stim-
ulate years of productive botanical work, making
introductions for distant workers who but for his
interest would have continued to work in isola-
tion—these were some of the ways that Dr.
Merrill implemented his spirit of service in
science. However, it would not be factual to omit
he did nettle some of his associates: I remember
Professor Jepson’s wrath when, in his bumptious
enthusiasm, Merrill broke into a supper party
that Jepson had planned for a few select friends
at a small pub on Kew Green. His professional
colleagues, not a little piqued with envy at
Merrill’s tenacious work habits, gave slight sup-
port to many of his expansive plans as being un-
realistic and too meddlesome in the research pro-
grams of others. Anyway, innovators are irksome.
‘To get-the-job-done’ philosophy as often as not
forgets the cushion in the chair.
The governor-general of the Philippine Islands,
Leonard Wood, wrote a judgment of Merrill in
1924 which may well stand: “You have done first
class work in everything you have attempted
and have gained the confidence, respect and sup-
port of those with whom you have come in con-
tact.” After a full year of conferences and re-
search abroad in 1951 he slowed down appreci-
ably. He felt he “really should finish certain
projects without too much delay.” “And yet,”
he wrote, “I am not ready to agree entirely with
the last sentence of Thackeray’s Vanity Fair:
‘Come children, let us shut up the box and the
puppets, for our play is played out.’”’
JosEPpH Hwan
Vice-Presidents of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
Philosophical Society of Washington........................005- (Mr.) Brucr L. WiLson
Anthropological Society of Washington........................ (Mr.) Frank M. Setzer
Biological Society of Washington.........................6- (Mr.) Herspert G. DEIGNAN
Chemical Society of Washington....................00eeeeee (Mr.) Bourpon F. ScriBNER
Entomological Society of Washington...................--seeeeeeeee (Dr.) FrED W. Poos
NationaliGeorraphici Society, ..-..s6- s+-ssssee 0. 42+ ear ese: (Dr.) ALEXANDER WETMORE
Geological Society of Washington............................ (Mr.) Epwin T. McKnicut
Medical Society of the District of Columbia.................... (Dr.) FREDERICK O. CoE
ColumbiageistoricaluSocietiyaari-vmleciersecie cic aeleitteisielale isielele ele
Potantealusociety,of Washington. .--s-.5sq0s0 ose ce see oe ae sees (Dr.) E. H. WALKER
Washington Section, Society of American Foresters............ (Dr.) G. Fuippo GravatTtT
Washington Society of Engineers............................ (Mr.) Hersert G. Dorsry
Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers..... (Dr.) ARNoLD ScotrT
Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers......
Helminthological Society of Washington..........................4. (Dr.) J. S. ANDREWS
Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists............ (Dr.) L. A. BurKry
Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers...(Lt. Col.) FLoyp W. Hoven
Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers..................
D. C. Section, American Society of Civil Engineers.......... (Mr.) Doucuas E. Parsons
D. C. Section, Society of Experimental Biology and Medicine..(Dr.) Grorcr A; Hottie
Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals............. (Mr.) THomas G. DiccEs
Washington Section, International Association for Dental Research...
Washington Section, Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences........ (Dr.) F. N. FRENKIEL
D. C. Branch, American Meteorological Society............. (Dr.) F. W. REICHELDERFER
CONTENTS
Page
Editorial: Science; and witchcraft.)). 2.22.0... -. 5.0... oe eee 233
BacrErRIoLocy.—Pertussis and pertussis vaccine control. MARGARET
PITT NPAIN SS vlc Rotitaccg agen sade Aakers comes nares yhoo ckei nO: 234
Puysics.—Cosmological theories—ancient and modern...R. M. Pacr 244
PHARMACOLOGY.—Some metabolic patterns observed after morphine ad-
ministration im! they rabbit; Louis imyve.. 5... 2 eee 253
HELMINTHOLOGyY.—A review of the cestode genus Echeneibothrium.
RAT YOUNG Sos shrgs Sees te excess oa tie reece 2a 256
GroLtoey.—A hydrologic budget in relation to the climate and geology
of the Beaverdam Creek basin, Eastern Shore of Maryland. Gor-
DON E. ANDREASEN and WiuLiaM C. RASMUSSEN............... 266
Obituary: E; D. Mermll, Josrea HwAn..-).-.2:-..2.... .- eee 267
VOLUME _ September 1956 NUMBER 9
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
Published Monthly by the
hex SHENG TON ACADEM Y OR SCIENCES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: CugestER H. Pace, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RoNALD BamrorpD, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL EsTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
_years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JoURNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than posacus
minor errors.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3344 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The ” Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the PRocEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subscription Rates for the JoURNAL.—Per Year..................0+++000000: $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ =
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10. 00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.) . poo eked) 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 45, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $378.50.
Monoeraru No.1, ‘“The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
INDEX to JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PRoCEEDINGS.................2+000000 $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete.....................0000005 $25.00
Single’ volumes#tinbounds s..0-2ce 2 cc oak nos ie ee nee ee ee 2.00
Single mumbers)£: iso hoc shsersitaso tara ee Me te ee ee Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’’ and
adressed to the Treasurer, H. S. RappLeye, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
D.
Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925.
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 46
September 1956
No. 9
PHYSICS—/ncomplete equilibrium and temperature measurement. C. M. HERzFELD,
National Bureau of Standards.
(Received August 3, 1956)
ABSTRACT
The concept of temperature is discussed from
the points of view of classical thermodynamics
and statistical mechanics. The relation between
relaxation phenomena and temperature measure-
ment is explained, and several examples discussed
qualitatively. Some methods for the measurement
of temperature are examined in terms of the re-
lation between relaxation and temperature. The
methods considered cover several distinct types
of situations encountered at high temperatures,
and estimates are given of the reliability of the
more modern methods.
INTRODUCTION
Interest in temperature and in its meas-
urement is growing rapidly. This in large
part is because of two recent trends. First,
technology makes growing demands on
scientific technique because of the high
temperatures obtained in jet and rocket
motors, and in nuclear devices. Second,
progress in the statistical mechanics of non-
equilibrium phenomena is opening new
areas to scientific study. This article sum-
marizes some aspects of the interplay of
these trends. To do this we outline first the
thermodynamic definition of temperature.
Then we present the viewpoint of statistical
mechanics, and last we apply this to a num-
ber of recent scientific and technical prob-
lems.
The detailed statistical mechanical theory
requires considerable technical background,
but it seems possible and desirable to bring
the underlying ideas to a wide audience by
discussing a number of recent applications
of the theory to temperature measurements.
The literature on the subject is very ex-
tensive, therefore we give chiefly references
269
to review articles and symposia where the
interested reader can find more details.
TEMPERATURE IN CLASSICAL
THERMODYNAMICS
The problem of defining temperature is
old and vexing. The usual procedure [/|
starts with the notions “hotter” and
“colder,” assumes that they are given di-
rectly by experience, and does not attempt
to define them. (Every logical system has
primitive ideas which must be assumed
without full definitions.) Two bodies are
then said to be in thermal equilibrium if,
when brought into close contact, they do not
change their hotness or coldness. The so-
called zeroth law of thermodynamics asserts
that two bodies in thermal equilibrium with
a third are in thermal equilibrium with each
other. This permits one to choose a ‘‘stand-
ard body” and say that all bodies in thermal
equilibrium with the standard have a par-
ticular property in common with it, namely
the temperature. Some empirical tempera-
ture scale is then chosen, based, for example,
on the thermal expansion of a metal or of a
gas. The thermodynamic temperature scale is
usually defined using an idealized steam
engine running on a Carnot cycle. This
steam engine and its cycle are a logical de-
vice for showing that the thermodynamic
temperature is best considered the re-
ciprocal integrating factor which changes
the heat absorbed by the working gas in the
engine, 6Q (an inexact differential), into the
exact differential dS, the entropy increase:
dS = 7 dQ. (1)
AAT «+ O TES
270
This approach can be generalized to any
process and cycle, and makes possible a de-
scription of processes which does not depend
on the paths taken but only on their end
points.
The most rigorous discussion of tempera-
ture viewed as an integrating factor is due to
Caratheodory [2]. His theory sheds much
light on classical thermodynamics, but a
description of it is out of place here.
The logically rigorous arguments estab-
lishing thermodynamic temperature apply
to no realizable situations whatever because
the temperature is defined only for equi-
librium states and reversible processes. No
actual system can be in perfect equilibrium,
and every realizable process is irreversible.
Many realizable systems are so close to
equilibrium that ordinary thermodynamics
can be used to calculate their properties. To
find a justification for applying thermo-
dynamics to real processes, and at the same
time to explain why such application works
so often, the viewpoint must be changed
slightly, and in particular the notion of rates
of processes must be introduced. The notion
of rate is foreign to classical thermody-
namics, but an examination of the concept
of temperature in statistical mechanics will
indicate how to use the results of thermo-
dynamics.
TEMPERATURE
Statistical mechanics studies systems
which are composed of very many particles
and have very many degrees of freedom.
One gram of hydrogen gas at O°C. and
atmospheric pressure has approximately
18 X 10” classical degrees of freedom. If
one takes into account also the quantum
degrees of freedom of the nuclear spin the
total number is four times the above. Each
state of each molecule has a characteristic
total energy. Statistical mechanics shows
[3] that, at equilibrium, the ratio of the
average number NV; of molecules in the 7th
state, to the average number N; in the jth
state is given by
N; = INGE (2)
IN STATISTICAL MECHANICS
where |W; is the difference in the energy
of the states, / is the Boltzmann constant,
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 46, No. 9,
and 7 the absolute temperature. The factor
e "ii/*? is the Boltzmann factor, a distri-
bution function giving the relative popu-
lation of all the states of the system. This
definition of 7 is fundamentally the same
both in classical and quantum systems. In
the classical case W; can take on any value
in a continuous range of numbers, and in
the quantum case it can take only values
from a set of discrete numbers. The simple
arguments required to establish (2) apply
again only to equilibrium systems.
Systems whose distribution functions
differ from the Boltzmann type are the
subject of irreversible statistical mechanics
|4|. There it can be shown that systems
whose distribution functions differ from
the Boltzmann type change in such a way
as to approach a Boltzmann distribution,
in other words they approach equilibrium.
If the initial departure from a Boltzmann
distribution is not too great, then the
differential equations which govern the
changes in population may be fairly simple
[5]:
dN ;
oa = (NG ENE ne ++) (3)
where N; is the population of the 7th state.
The function f (N;, Nit1, ---) involves
each population only to the first power if
the system is sufficiently simple. Each N;
is multiplied by a characteristic rate con-
stant which depends on the mechanism by
which equilibrium is reached (such as col-
lisions). For very simple systems these
rate constants are related, and equation (3)
can be rewritten:
N .
ESS a, (4)
Sh]
where 7 is the so-called relaxation time, a
constant which is characteristic of the
system and gives the rate with which the
system “relaxes” to the equilibrium dis-
tribution. A large 7 means a slow approach
to equilibrium. The sets of differential
equations resulting from (4) can then be
solved and the behavior of the system fol-
lowed in time as it approaches equilibrium
[6].
SEPTEMBER 1956
These ideas can now be applied to the
study of temperatures. As an example
consider a gas of atoms in a container, the
whole immersed in a cool bath. Two rates
will be important: First, the rate at which
the gas would relax from a nonequilibrium
distribution if the container walls were
perfect insulators. The mechanism for this
is the collision of the molecules, and 7; is its
relaxation time (2 for internal). Second,
the rate at which the container wall conducts
heat away from the gas. Let this rate be
characterized by a relaxation time 7, (e for
external). The actual changes in the system
are then governed by the ratio 7;/7. as
well as by the initia! conditions. If 7;/7.
is very small, the gas loses energy slowly
through the walls but readjusts its distribu-
tion function continuously, which will then
be practically of Boltzmann type, and at
any one time the temperature of the gas will
be a quite definite quantity which changes
slowly in time because of the heat leak.
This is the type of situation required for
calorimetric work. If 7;/7. is large, however,
the heat leaks away faster than the gas can
readjust. Temperature gradients are then
set up in the gas, which start convection.
The resulting complicated changes in the
gas cannot be treated in detail by present
statistical mechanical theory. In small
portions of the gas, however, local equili-
brium will exist, so that different portions
of gas may have well-defined, though
different, temperatures.
Or consider a solid at a temperature near
O°K. This solid consists of atoms which
vibrate about their equilibrium positions
(system A) and of the nuclear spins of the
atoms (system B). Let the time for A to
come to equilibrium with itself be 7,4,
similarly for B, 7,. Let the interaction of
the systems be characterized by 742, and
let ts < Tap >> Ts. Now remove some en-
ergy from the spin system B, say by 1iso-
thermal magnetization followed by adiabatic
demagnetization. Then the spins will come
to equilibrium with each other very rapidly
and their magnetic susceptibility will indi-
cate a very low temperature. However, they
interact so poorly with the lattice (r4» 1s
large, of the order of hours) that the lattice
temperature is essentially unaffected, and
HERZFELD: TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT 271
it makes sense to speak separately of a spin
temperature 7's and a lattice temperature
T,, which are defined by equation (2) or
by an analogous one.
Another type of example is afforded by a
polyatomic gas in an ideally insulating en-
closure. The motions of each molecule can be
described to a good approximation by
treating each type of degree of freedom
separately, i.e., translation of the molecule
as a whole, vibrations of the molecule, and
its rotations. The total energy is the sum
of the translational (W,), the vibrational
(W,), and the rotational energy (W,). The
distribution functions may then be writ-
ten [7]:
INF son = Ce—wlhr
Ce Wet Wot W,\/kT (
Ce MEP) (GW alk Po) (g—W elk Pr) |
I
Our
~~
I
At equilibrium the same values of 7 will
QOGUP Ti CON UECUOP, Gus, Lh = Il, = I
It happens, however, in many _ physical
processes that one type of motion is affected
more than another. For example, an ultra-
sonic wave passing through a gas may
“heat up” the translations and rotations of
the molecules without affecting the vibra-
tions. It therefore becomes useful to inquire
about relaxation times for distributing energy
among the rotational motions, or for ex-
changing rotational and vibrational energy,
and so on.
Many temperature measurement methods
determine in effect a distribution function
for a particular type of degree of freedom.
Thus an important spectroscopic method [8]
determines the relative populations of the
different rotational states in the OH mole-
cule. Only if 7,; for this case is small will the
distribution function indicate a unique
rotational temperature 7’, , and only if the
exchange of rotational energy with the other
forms of energy is rapid will this 7’. indicate
accurately an overall temperature.
To summarize: All temperatures actually
measured are partial or effective tempera-
tures. The custom of denoting partial tem-
peratures with 7*, or “J”, or Tottective 1S
therefore really redundant. These special
notations serve, however, a very usetul
function by stressing the non-equilibrium
272
features of the system under study. Their
use is therefore a matter of emphasis and
convenience.
METHODS OF TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT
We shall now indicate how these ideas
have been applied to a variety of recent
problems. All examples are from high
temperature fields though the same funda-
mental considerations apply to all tempera-
ture regions.
1. Temperature from the population of
atomic levels. It is possible to introduce small
amounts of metal vapor into hot gases by
adding, for example, Na salts, Cu salts, or
Fe carbonyl. The metal atoms interact
with the species in the gas and may come
to thermal equilibrium with the gas. Excited
states of the metal atoms will then become
populated in accordance with the Boltzmann
factor. The atoms will return to their
ground states or other lower states by
radiation, and the relative intensities of the
lines emitted can be used to estimate the
relative populations of the levels involved,
and hence the temperature of the atoms.
If adequate equilibrium obtains, the method
can be very useful. The method requires
knowledge of the optical transition proba-
bilities of the metal atom. The detailed
conditions for a successful application of the
method are described by Sobolev [9], who
measured flame temperatures of about
3,000°K. with an estimated uncertainty of
about 1.3 per cent.
In many experimental situations it is
unlikely that adequate equilibrium is ob-
tained. In fact it may happen that this
method measures some 7* of the system
reliably because the atomic populations may
come to equilibrium with some degrees of
freedom of the system but not the others.
Gaydon [/0| mentions circumstances where
atomic excitation measures 7T;,, of some
molecular species in a flame.
The method has to be carefully checked,
before its results can be accepted, par-
ticularly when applied to systems under-
going chemical reactions. This is because
unstable chemical species which occur as
intermediates of chemical reactions often
excite some atoms with preference into
certain levels, and so produce distributions
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF
SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 9
which are far removed from equilibrium [//].
In such cases the method is not reliable at
present.
2. Temperature from Doppler line width.
The motion of a molecule along the line
of observation while it radiates shifts the
wave lengths at which the radiation is ob-
served relative to the wave lengths observed
for a stationary molecule. This effect, known
as the Doppler effect, broadens the spectral
lines which are observed, and gives the
lines a characteristic shape [/2]. This
provides a method useful in principle for
measuring the velocity distribution (hence
the translational energy distribution) of the
molecules. The method does not require any
knowledge of the molecular or atomic
structure of the species beyond knowledge
of molecular or atomic weight. With it the
translational temperature of CH in a low
pressure flame was found to be about
3,500°K + 600°K., an uncertainty of about
20 per cent [13].
The method is not accurate. The main
difficulty is that Doppler broadening is a
small effect and may be masked by other
effects such as collision broadening. To use
the method fully, equipment of the highest
resolving power should be used. When this is
done, the whole contour of the spectral line
can be determined. This allows one to infer
the actual existing velocity distribution, if
other effects on the line shape can either be
ignored or taken into account.
3. Temperature from vibrational spectra. In
systems in equilibrium the vibrational de-
grees of freedom of gas molecules are in
equilibrium with each other and with the
rest of the system. Therefore the relative
populations of the vibrational levels are
given by the Boltzmann factor, and a
measurement of relative intensities of
spectral lines associated with different
vibrational levels will allow a determination
of the temperature [7/4]. In other cases the
vibrational degrees of freedom may be in
equilibrium with each other without being
in equilibrium with the rest of the system.
In such cases a determination of relative
populations of vibrational levels allows a
determination of Ty in, .
Several types of methods are in use. In
one method the emission of radiation from a
|
|
SEPTEMBER 1956 HERZFELD:
complete unresolved vibration-rotation band
is compared with the emission from a
standard source [1/5]. The method is said to
be good to about 2.5 per cent near 2000°K.
Another method consists of measuring the
relative intensities of emission lines belong-
ing to the same rotational levels of different
vibrational levels [/6]. Experimental un-
certainties are said to be about 10 per cent
of 7,3, near 2,500°K.
Both methods require directly the quan-
tum mechanical transition probabilities.
These are difficult to calculate, though they
have been obtained for OH [17], C2 [Zé],
and a few other molecules. In general these
transition probabilities must be obtained
from experiment when the species are known
to be in equilibrium at a given temperature.
Once they are known, they can be applied
to calculations of nonequilibrium or partial
equilibrium situations.
A thorough discussion of these methods
and some variations is given by Smit [79].
4. Temperature from rotational spectra.
Several methods are currently used to
determine temperature from rotational
spectra. Most of these depend on the com-
parison of relative intensities of rotational
lines and on the relative populations in-
ferred from the intensities [8].
Thorough reviews of methods based on
rotational spectra have been given by
Dieke and coworkers [20].
The relative transition probabilities are
required for this method. They can be
calculated with good accuracy for many
diatomic molecules and can be determined
experimentally for cases where calculations
are difficult.
Several distinct ways are used to calculate
temperatures from intensities. We do not
give the details of these methods. The two
most common methods are the ‘log in-
tensity” method and the ‘“‘iso-intensity”’
method [20]. If the observed lines are
absorbed strongly the data may give ficti-
tious indications of non-equilibrium popula-
tion of levels. A recent method by Kost-
kowski and Broida [217] makes possible the
determination of reliable temperatures even
in the case of large absorption.
The experimental uncertainties in the
determined temperatures vary greatly from
TEMPERATURE
MEASUREMENT 273
one case to another. Uncertainties as small
as 1% at 3000°K have been reported, while
attempts have been made to apply the
method where uncertainties are close to
100 per cent [17].
5. Temperature from optical pyrometers.
This method consists of comparing the
brightness of the object whose temperature
is to be measured with that of a standard
whose brightness is known from calibration
as a function of temperature. Two main
variations are in use: one-color pyrometry
where brightness 1s compared at one wave-
length, and 2-color pyrometry where bright-
ness 1s compared at two wavelengths. If the
system to be studied is in internal equi-
hbrium, and if its emissivity is known at the
wavelengths of comparison, then either
method is reliable and gives good values of 7.
In practice neither of these two conditions is
likely to be fulfilled.
In flames the continuous radiation emitted
which is usually used in pyrometer methods
comes from small incandescent solid particles
of carbon. Recent studies [22] have shown
that these carbon particles are in equilibrium
with the surrounding gas. The carbon
particles, however, are so small (about one
wavelength of visible ight in diameter) that
their size strongly affects their optical
properties. To determine flame tempera-
tures accurately using this method, the
effect of particle size must be taken into
account. In some cases, temperatures ob-
tained with pyrometers from carbon parti-
cles in flames have been found to agree well
with temperatures from line reversal tech-
niques [23]. In other cases comparisons have
been worked out between such pyro-
metrically measured temperatures and black-
body temperatures [24].
Pyrometric methods are particularly use-
ful as empirical control devices when no
explicit correlation can be made between
the measurement and an equilibrium tem-
perature. If, e.g., the emissivity of the
system is unknown, or if no partial equi-
librium can be found in the system, then the
pyrometer can be used to good advantage
as a control device. In many industrial ap-
plications of pyrometry this is the exact
attitude adopted.
6. Temperatures from thermocouples. Ther-
274
mocouples measure temperature by gen-
erating an e.m.f. across their open terminals
when the measuring junction is at a different
temperature than the reference junction.
The generated e.m.f. is a function of the
temperature, therefore a calibration must be
available covering the whole temperature
range to be measured [25].
Two problems of thermocouple construc-
tion and use are of particular relevance to
our present point of view. One arises in the
measurement of the temperatures of hot
gases through a container wall, and the
problem is to have the thermocouple follow
temperature changes in the gas rapidly. For
metal walls this does not seem to be too
difficult. For plastic or refractory walls a
large time lag may be introduced by the poor
thermal conductivity of the wall material.
However, special methods of design have
been found which make possible adequate
heat contact between the thermocouple in
the wall and the gas [26].
A second application of thermocouples
where the approach to equilibrium is a
significant problem is the measurement of
temperatures of gases having large bulk
flow velocities, such as in super- and hyper-
sonic wind-tunnels, in exhausts of jets, etc.
A problem here is to devise an arrangement
of the thermocouple which measures the
stagnation temperature of the gas. This
means that a sample of the gas must be
stopped rapidly enough to be sensibly adi-
abatic, yet slowly enough for the gas to come
to internal equilibrium. The thermocouple is
then exposed to the gas sample just pre-
pared. A thorough survey of such devices is
given by Eber [26]. Well-designed thermo-
couple probes have recovery factors of
about 0.95 which are furthermore inde-
pendent of Mach number in the range of
stream velocity employed. (The recovery
factor is the fraction of the theoretical
temperature rise on stagnation, which can
be accomplished experimentally.)
With suitable construction and calibration
equilibrium temperatures can be measured.
But even in the absence of calibration, and
with poor design, thermocouple probes can
be used as empirical control devices.
7. Temperature from the velocity of sound.
The velocity of sound through any medium
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 9
is a function of temperature. Therefore the
velocity of sound may be used to measure the
temperature. The method is particularly use-
ful in gases and can be used under con-
ditions where many other methods fail or are
inconvenient [27, 28, 29]. The velocity of
sound in a gas is a function not only of the
temperature, but also of y = C,/C, and
of the molecular weight of the gas. This puts
a number of restrictions on the method. At
high frequencies of sound y appears to
change because the molecules cannot come
to equilibrium in the time of one period of
the sound wave if the frequency is too high.
Furthermore, if the gas is not in equilibrium
the value of y may depend on the details of
the processes in the system in a complicated
way. Therefore the theory of the propagation
of sound in a non-equilibrium gas is com-
plicated. The measured velocity of sound is
an average velocity averaged over all the
gas in the path of the sound wave. If strong
local temperature variations are to be
expected the method loses some of its
power. Under circumstances where the gas
is not homogeneous and is not in well-de-
fined partial equilibria with respect to some
of the important processes, the method can
at present only be used as a control device.
An alternative method involves the
measurement of the velocity of shock waves
through gases. The shock waves are gen-
erated by a spark and their velocity de-
termined by a photographic method. This
method is subject to the same types of
limitations mentioned above, except that a
photographic method may enable one to
determine local velocities instead of one
single average velocity as above.
8. Control devices and further progress.
Many systems encountered in technology
are so complex that very little can be said
about relaxation times and about partial
equilibrium. It is then difficult to define
temperature, but it is important to realize
that even in extremely complex situations
measurement gives some information. For
example, the transit time of an ultrasonic
wave in the exhaust gases of a jet engine does
give an indication of the state of the gases.
It gives, however, only one “bit of informa-
tion,’ while perhaps several hundered bits
would be required to describe the system.
SEPTEMBER 1956
Thus it is futile to hope that the one ob-
served bit will adequately specify all the
variables. The most fruitful approach would
seem to be the selection of several quite
distinct temperature measurement methods
which are reasonably easy to use under the
circumstances: say, pyrometer, spectral-line
reversal, and transit time of ultrasound,
giving three independent control parameters.
While none of these will, strictly speaking,
measure temperatures, they will specify
several different properties of the system.
In this way a fairly thorough control of the
system should be possible, and the de-
pendence of the control parameters on
experimental conditions would guide further
experimentation. At the same time _ ex-
perience is gained in the study of really
complex systems, and thus the groundwork
laid for further advances in the fundamental
understanding of nonequilibrium processes.
This in turn will make possible the further
extension of the concept of temperature.
REFERENCES
[1] Zemansx1, M. W. Heat and thermodynamics,
3d ed. New York, 1951.
[2] CHANDRASEKHAR, S. Introduction to the
study of stellar structure, chapter 1. Chicago,
1939.
Marcenau, H., and Murpuy, G. M. The
mathematics of physics and chemistry, chap-
ters 1 and 2. New York, 1943.
[3] Touman, R. C. The principles of statistical
mechanics. Oxford, 1938.
[4] Montrotu, E. W., and Green, M.S. Statis-
tical mechanics of transport and non-equi-
librium processes. Ann. Rev. Phys. Chem.
5. 1954.
[5] Herzretp, K. F. Relaxation of partial tem-
peratures. Temperature, its measurement
and control in science and industry, 2. New
York, 1955. (This volume will be referred
to hereafter as ‘“Temperature 2.’’)
[6] Rusin, R. J.. and Sauter, K. E. Journ.
Chem. Phys. 25: 59. 1956.
[7] Souter, K. E. Journ. Chem.
1466. 1950.
[8] Brotpa, H. P. Vemperature measurements in
flames and hot gases. Temperature 2.
Phys. 18:
HERZFELD: TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT
2795
[9] Sopotev, N. N. Journ. Exp. Theor. Phys.
USSR 18: 25-35. 1949.
[10] Gaypon, A. G. Energy transfer in hot gases.
NBS Circular 523. 1954.
[11] THomas, N. Section N, Physical measure-
ments in gas dynamics and combustion,
Editors: R. W. Ladenburg, B. Lewis, R. N.
Pease, H. S. Taylor. High Speed Aero-
dynamics and Jet Propulsion 9. Prince-
ton, 1954. (Hereafter called “High Speed
©)
(12) Wuitr, H. E. Introduction to atomic spectra,
chapter 21. New York, 1984.
[13] Gaypon, A. G. and WourHarp, H.G. Proce.
Roy. Soe. London 199A: 89. 1949.
[14] Herzperc, G. Spectra of Diatomic Mole-
cules, chapter 3. New York, 1950.
[15] SttverMAN,S. Third combustion symposium.
498. Baltimore, 1949.
[16] StnvermMan, 8. Energy transfer in hot gases.
NBS Circular 523. 1954.
[17] Souter, K. E. Journ. Chem. Phys. 18: 1221.
1950.
(18) McKerniuar, A. and Buscompr, W. Publ.
Domin. Astrophys. Observ. Victoria, B. C.,
7: 361. 1948.
McKeuuar, A. and Tawpr, N. R. Astro-
phys. Journ. 113: 440. 1951.
Tawpe, N. R. and PatsEt, J. M.
Journ. 112: 210, 1951.
Bates, D.R. Monthly Notices Roy. Astron.
Soc. 112: 614. 1952.
[19] Smrr, J. A. The production and measurement
of constant high temperatures, up to 7000°K.
Dissertation. Utrecht, Netherlands, 1950.
[20] Drexr, G. H. Section M, High Speed 9.
Dirks, G. H. and Crosswuire, H. M. En-
ergy transfer in hot gases. NBS Circular
523. 1954.
21] KosrKowsk1, H. J. and Brorpa, H. P.
Journ. Optical Soc. Amer. 46: 246. 1956.
22] SHuter, K. HK. Mem. Soc. Roy. Sci. Liége,
4th series 15: 360. 1954.
23) Barret, P. Publ. Sci. et Techn. Minist.
Air, no. 273: 114. 1952.
24] Narser, G. and Prpprrnorr, W.
Hisenhiittenwesen 22: 9. 1951.
Rew, W. T. Section J, High Speed 9.
[25] Baker, H. D., Ryper, KE. A. and Baker,
N.H. Temperature measurement in engi-
neering 1. New York, 1953.
[26] Eper, G. Section D, High Speed 9.
[27] Bunpy, F. P. and Srrone, H. M.
1.7, High Speed 9.
[28] Capy, W. M. Section D.8, High Speed 9.
[29] Hepricn, A. L. and Parpur, D. R. Tem-
perature 2.
Astrophys.
Arch.
Section
276
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 9
ENTOMOLOGY .—Type specimens of mosquitoes in the United States National
Museum: III, The genera Anopheles and Chagasia (Diptera, Culicidae).
ALAN STONE, Entomology Research Branch, U. 8. Department of Agriculture,
and KennetH L. Kniaut, Bureau of Medicine and Surgery, U. 8S. Depart-
ment of the Navy.’
(Received May 8, 1956)
The introductory remarks in the first
paper of this series, particularly those on
early, possibly questionable holotypes, also
apply to this one. Following our treatment
of nominal taxa requiring special attention
we present a list of those in the collection
based on unique specimens or for which
holotypes were clearly designated.
Genus Anopheles Meigen
Anopheles apicimacula Dyar and Knab, Proc.
Biol. Soc. Washington 19: 136. 1906.
Of the 26 original specimens of this species, 22
are in the collection. One female only, from
Livingston, Guatemala, May 11, bears a type
label, and this we consider the holotype. This
specimen was designated as lectotype in Russell,
Rozeboom, and Stone (1948, p. 31) although we
now feel that this lectotype designation was not
necessary, as explained in the introduction to
this series.
Anopheles atropos Dyar and Knab, Proc. Biol.
Soc. Washington 19: 160. 1906.
The syntype series of this species consisted of
seven female specimens from the Florida Keys,
collected by H. Byrd. All these are in the collec-
tion and all are labeled “Type No. 10029 U.S.
N.M.” We select as lectotype one of the best of
these specimens.
Anopheles (Kerteszia) bambusicolus Komp, Ann.
Ent. Soc. Amer. 30: 515. 1937.
The syntype series of this species consisted of
three females with associated larval skins. These
1 Harlier papers in this series are: J, The genera
Armigeres, Psorophora, and Haemagogus, Journ.
Washington Acad. Sci. 45: 282-289. 1955; IT, The
genus Aedes, ibid. 46: 213-228. 1956.
2 Studies upon which this paper is based were
conducted under an exchange of funds from the
Office of Naval Research (Biological Science
Division) to the Smithsonian Institution. The
opinions or assertions contained here are the
private ones of the writers and are not to be con-
strued as official or reflecting the views of the
Navy Department or the Naval Service at large.
specimens stand in the collection all bearing the
labels “‘La Union, Int. de Meta, Colombia, Sept.
1935. Jorg Boshell / On bamboo / Cotype No.
53075.”’ There are four larval skins on slides, but
since the pinned specimens are not numbered
these skins cannot be associated with individual
specimens. Two of the pinned specimens are
Anopheles bambusicolus Komp, and we select the
better one as lectotype. The third is a specimen
of Culex chryselatus Dyar and Knab and has been
transferred to that species in the collection.
Anopheles barberi Coquillett, Can. Ent. 35: 310.
1903.
This species was described from three females
collected on Plummers Island, Md., August 14,
1902, and August 17 and 19, 1908. Only one of
these specimens, dated August 17, is in the col-
lection, and it bears the type label and Coquil-
lett’s determination label. We consider this
specimen to be the holotype.
Anopheles bellator Dyar and Knab, Proc. Biol.
Soe. Washington 19: 160. 1906.
The original three specimens of this species
are in the collection, consisting of one male and
two females, all labeled “Type No. 10027
US.N.M.” We select as lectotype the male
labeled ‘44.1 / Trinidad, W.I. Jan. / Aug.
Busck Collector / See slide No. 314 / Slide «659
/ bellator.’’ The terminalia are on slide no. 314,
and one front tarsus is on slide no. 659. The
pupal skin from which this specimen came has
also been mounted on a slide.
Anopheles (Dendropaedium) bellator race bromeli-
cola Dyar and Knab, Ins. Inse. Mens. 13:
Hs NOP),
The two female syntypes of this, from Manoa,
Orinoca River, Venezuela, are in the collection,
each bearing only the labels ‘Manoa Woods
Jan 10 / Type No. U.S.N.M.” We select
one of these as lectotype.
SEPTEMBER 1956
Anopheles (Anopheles) chiriquiensis Komp, Proc.
Ent. Soc. Washington 38: 156. 1936.
Both sexes and the larva of this species were
originally described, but no type material was
mentioned. The collection contains one male and
one female labeled ‘‘Anopheles chiriquiensis
Komp / Volean de Chiriqui, Panamdé I1.7.35
6500 ft / Cotype No. 51882 U.S.N.M. / W.H.W.
Komp.”’ The male is labeled 1, and this has
dissected terminalia mounted on a slide. There
is a second female of the original material, not
labeled as cotype, and one larval skin, not
associated by label with any specific adult. We
select the male as lectotype.
Anopheles (Nyssorhynchus) darlingi Root, Amer.
Journ. Hyg. 6: 706. 1926.
The lectotype male of this species, selected by
Stone in Ross and Roberts (1948, p. 30), is in
the collection.
Anopheles (Nyssorhynchus) davist Paterson and
Shannon, Terc. Reun. Soc. Arg. Mosq. de
Embarcacion: 5. 1927.
This species was described from 6 larvae, 50
females, and 2 males from Trez Pozos, Embarca-
cién, Salta, Argentina. The collection contains a
larval slide and two male terminalia slides bear-
ing the original data, and four pinned females
collected at the proper time but at Bella Vista,
Embareacion, not Trez Pozos. The larva and
one of the male slides were labeled ‘“‘Type” by
Shannon, but the adults from which the male
terminalia came are not in the collection. There
is no indication in the original publication as to
where the types were to be deposited, and it is
quite possible that there are more and better
specimens of the syntype series in Argentina.
Because of this, it seems advisable to defer selec-
tion of a lectotype.
Anopheles (Nyssorhynchus) dunhami Causey,
Journ. Nat. Malaria Soc. 4: 231-234. 1945.
The original description of this species states,
“The type specimens have been forwarded to the
National Museum in Washington, D. C.” There
is no statement as to the number of specimens
involved, although the species was collected in
large numbers on animal bait in Tefé, Amazonas,
Brazil, and the female, male, egg, and larva are
described. The collection contains a male labeled
type and a female labeled paratype, both reared
from eggs laid by a female collected in Tefé,
STONE AND KNIGHT: MOSQUITOES. III
277
Amazonas, Brazil. We consider this male, with
terminalia mounted on a slide, to be the holotype.
Anopheles earlei Vargas, Bol. Ofic. Sanit. Pana-
mericana 22: 8. 1943.
The original description of this species desig-
nated a male holotype with the dissected termi-
nalia mounted on two-slides and a female allo-
type. The type locality was given as being
Jefferson County, Wis. The type was collected
July 10, the allotype July 13. These specimens are
in the collection bearing these data. For this
reason the statement in Vargas and Matheson
(1948, p. 27) that “El tipo macho fue de Cayuta
Lake, Nueva York” is erroneous.
Anopheles eisentd Coquillett, Journ. New York
Ent. Soc. 10: 192. 1902.
This species was described from one female and
two males. Two of the original specimens are in
the collection, one of the males not being found.
The female only bears a type label and it also
bears Coquillett’s determination label. This
specimen we consider to be the holotype.
Cellia flava Ludlow, Can. Ent. 40: 32. 1908.
This species was described from four specimens,
which are in the collection, bearing unnumbered
type labels. These specimens are all females, al-
though the original description includes both
sexes. We select as lectotype the specimen bear-
ing the label ‘‘Cellia flava Ludl. Type” and some
indecipherable words. There are other specimens
from Tayabas, the type locality, including males,
that might have been before Ludlow when she
described the species.
Myzomyia flavirostris Ludlow, Psyche 21: 30.
1914.
It is not clear from the original description
that this species was based on more than one
specimen, but the collection has four females
bearing unnumbered type labels. Only one has
an additional label, as follows: ‘MZ. funesta Giles
dark flavirostris. Camp Wilhelm, Tayabas, P. I.
Type. Nov.” The word ‘‘flavirostris” is written
in pencil, and the word “Type” is apparently
written with a different pen from the rest of the
label. This specimen is the best of the four and
we select it as lectotype.
Anopheles formosus Ludlow, Can. Ent. 41: 22.
1909.
278
This species was presumably described from a
single female, but it is not clearly so stated in the
original description. We consider the single
female, with the labels “Type No. 27781 U.S.
N.M. / Anopheles formosus Ludl. Type C.S.L.
Camp John Hay. Benguet, P. I. Mch 20, 1908”
as the holotype.
Anopheles (Kerteszia) homunculus Komp, Ann.
Ent. Soc. Amer. 30: 509. 1937.
The syntype series of this species consisted of
three females and one male. The collection now
has two females and one male labeled as cotypes,
associated with three numbered larval skins on
one slide and the terminalia of the male on an-
other slide. We select as lectotype the male with
the associated larval skin no. 3, collected by
Komp at Restrepo, Colombia, September 9, 1935.
Culex hyemalis Fitch, Amer. Journ. Agr. and
Sci. 5: 281. 1847.
The original description gives no indication of
any type material, stating merely that the species
is “met with in the last days of autumn and
again for a short time in the first days of spring”’
and ‘‘is a somewhat rare insect.”” The collection
contains a single female bearing the labels ‘6850
/ Type No. US.N.M. / Fitch Collection
/ Anopheles Meigen hyemalis Fitch New York.”
Not knowing whether any other Fitch specimens
of this species are in existence, we select this
specimen as lectotype.
Myzomyia rossi var. indefinita Ludlow, Can. Ent.
36: 299. 1904.
This variety was described from an indefinite
number of specimens from a variety of localities
in the Philippines, some of them not named. The
collection contains the following syntypes, or pre-
sumable syntypes: (1) Four females, each bearing
the red label “Type No. 27779 U.S.N.M.” (one
of these specimens bears the label in Ludlow’s
hand “Myzomyia indefinita Ludl. P. I. Type
C.S.L.); (2) two females labeled only ‘“M. in-
definita Ludlow Cotype’’; and (8) nine specimens
labeled only ‘‘Guimaras Isl. P. I. Dr. LeWald.”
These latter may not have been of the original
Guimaras Island material, but they probably
were. Most of the specimens are in very poor
condition, particularly those of the first series,
and except for the third series mentioned above,
none bear any label for a specific locality in the
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 9
Philippines. Since one of the best specimens, and
one that agrees well with the original description
and the current concept of the species, is one of
the two of series (2) above, we select this one as
lectotype.
Anopheles lewisi Ludlow, Psyche 27: 14. 1920.
Aitken (1945, p. 308) designated lectotypes
from the syntype series on which this name is
based. This designation is somewhat obscure,
since it appears that Aitken is referring to lewisi
in making these selections but he uses two U. S.
National Museum numbers. For the lectoholo-
type male he refers to U. S. National Museum
no. 77812, which presumably refers to U.S.N.M.
Type no. 27812, the number for the syntype
series of lewist; for the lectoallotype he says,
“A. Lewist (U.S. National Museum no. 77813)”
which he may have intended to mean U.S.N.M.
Type no. 27813, the type number for the two
syntype females of Anopheles selengensis Ludlow.
The collection contains a male and female of
lewisi, labeled by Aitken as lectoholotype and
lectoallotype respectively and a female of
selengensis labeled lectoholotype, all collected at
the same place and date. We accept the male
lectotype for lewisi, and here designate as the
lectotype of selengensis the female labeled by
Aitken.
Stethomyia lewist Shannon, Proc. Ent. Soe.
Washington 33: 154. 1931.
The male holotype, female allotype, and a
female paratype were said to have been de-
posited in the U.S. National Museum collection.
We have found no pinned specimens bearing type
data, but there are two slides of fragments of male
terminalia from the type locality, Rio Curuptre,
Bahia, Brazil. One of these slides has one com-
plete set of terminalia and a portion of another,
and the other has dissected claspettes. These
slides are not labeled as types, and it would be
impossible to tell which fragments belong to the
holotype male, if any do. We can either assume
that the type is lost or that the type is present in
part but unlabeled.
Anopheles malefactor Dyar and Knab, Journ.
New York Ent. Soc. 15: 198. 1907.
The seven specimens on which this species was
based are all in the collection and each bears the
label “Type No. 10877 U.S.N.M.” We select as
SEPTEMBER 1956
lectotype a female which also bears the labels
“136.1 / Rio Chagres, Panama / Collected by
August Buseck / Anopheles malefactor D. & K.
Type.” There is a slide of the pupal skin and a
portion of the abdomen of the larval skin. The
fifth hind tarsomere is entirely white in this speci-
men, as given in the original description. Some of
the other syntypes have a rather narrow dark
ring on this tarsomere.
Anopheles newai Howard, Dyar and Knab,
Mosquitoes of North and Central America
and the West Indies 4: 966. 1917.
Although in the original description this species
was said to have been found from Panama north-
ward to southern Mexico, and localities are given
in two places in Panama, two in Costa Rica, and
one in Mexico, there are only three specimens in
the collection under this name that can be con-
sidered to be of the original material. One of
these, a female, bears the labels ‘344.1 / Type No.
20440 U.S.N.M. / neivai!’’ The number refers to
Jennings’ collection notes which state that the
data for this number are “‘Fort San Felipe, Porto
Bello Bay [Panama], June 2, 1908.”” The pupal
skin and larval head capsule are mounted on a
slide. This specimen we select as lectotype. A
second female, from Panama, bears the label
“Paratype No. 20440 U.S.N.M.,” and a third
one, from Hstrella, Costa Rica, bears a determina-
tion label but no type label.
Anopheles occidentalis Dyar and Knab, Proc.
Biol. Soc. Washington 19: 159. 1906.
Most of the 118 original specimens of this
species are in the collection, but only one, from
Stanford University, California, May 26, 1903,
bears a type label, and so we consider this to be
the holotype. This specimen is in excellent con-
dition. Aitken (1945, p. 285) has discussed the
two species involved in the original series of this
species.
Anopheles oiketorakras Osorno-Mesa, Caldasia 4:
431-446, 1947.
This species was described from a male and a
female designated as types, and other adults
designated as paratypes. We select as lectotype
the male ‘type’ labeled “Bogota, Colombia,
S. A. Monserate, 2700-2840 m., III.13.46.”
Myzomyia parangensis Ludlow, Psyche 21: 129.
1914.
STONE AND KNIGHT: MOSQUITOES. IIL
279
This species was described from more than one
specimen, but the exact number was not stated.
There are two females in the collection, each
bearing the label “Type No. 27778 U.S.N.M.”
One is in excellent condition and bears the addi-
tional label ‘““Myzomyia parangensis Ludl. Port of
Parang, Mindanao, P. I., Oct. Nov. Types.”
The second is in poor condition and bears no
additional label. Presumably the one label was
intended for both. We select the first specimen
as lectotype.
Anopheles philippinensis Ludlow, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 10: 129. 1902.
The number of specimens on which this species
was based was not stated. Two females in the
collection each bear the label ‘Type No. 27703
U.S.N.M.” and one of them the label ‘Nysso-
rhynchus philippinensis Ludl. San Jose, Abra,
P. I. Sept. 1, 1901. Type.” Both of the specimens
are in very poor condition, with hind legs missing.
The one with palpi shows the terminal pale band
on each palpus equal in length to the preapical
dark band, and both specimens show a patch of
pale scales on the sternopleuron, in both respects
differing from the key characters used by Puri
(1949). The specimen bearing Ludlow’s original
type label is in the worse condition, but the other
is not much better. We refrain from selecting a
lectotype because the specimens are in such poor
condition that such selection would serve little
purpose. The wing pattern differs slightly be-
tween the two specimens. If a lectotype is to be
selected it should be only after a very thorough
study of the species or species complex over its
whole range.
Anopheles pseudobarbirostris Ludlow, Journ. New
York Ent. Soc. 10: 129. 1902.
The number of specimens on which this species
was based was not stated. Two females in the col-
lection each bears the label “Type No. 27782
U.S.N.M.”’ and one of them the label ‘‘MWyzo-
rhynchus pseudobarbirostris Ludl. Type, Hagonoy,
Bulacan, P. I. Oct. 2, 1901. Kellogg. Type.’ We
designate this latter specimen as lectotype of the
species.
Anopheles selengensis Ludlow, Psyche 27: 77.
1920.
See remarks under Anopheles lewtst Ludlow.
280
Anopheles (Nyssorhynchus) strodec Root, Amer.
Journ. Hyg. 6: 711, 1926.
A male and a female of this species from the
type locality are in the collection. We select as
lectotype the male bearing a square of red paper
and the labels “Agua Limpa, Braz. Mar. 27,
1925. No. 64 / Anopheles strodei Root types.”
The female bears the same data.
Myzomyia thorntonii Ludlow, Can. Ent. 36: 69
1904.
The collection contains three females of this
species marked as types. Two of these each bear
the label “Type No. 27780 U.S.N.M.” put on by
Dyar and one of these bears the additional label,
in Ludlow’s hand, ‘““Myzomyia thorntonii Ludl.
Cottabatto, Mindanao, P. I. June. Type C.8.L.”
The second specimen bears no data label, but
Dyar entered both in the type book as being
from the same locality. The third specimens bears
an unnumbered type label and the label ‘“M.
Thorntoni Ludlow cotype”’ with no further data.
Since Ludlow mentioned only two specimens,
from two different localities, it is evident that
some mislabeling has occurred. None of these
specimens are in very good condition but they
appear to be conspecific. We select as lectotype
the specimen bearing the numbered type label
and the collection data.
Anopheles vestitipennis Dyar and Knab, Proc.
Biol. Soc. Washington 19: 136. 1906.
The lectotype female designated by Stone in
Russell, Rozeboom, and Stone (1948, p. 34) is in
the collection.
The following taxa are based either on unique
specimens or on clearly designated holotypes:
Anopheles (Stethomyia) acanthotorynus Komp, 1937
Anopheles (Nyssorhynchus) anomalophyllus Komp,
1936
Anopheles (Kerteszia) anoplus Komp, 1937
Anopheles lindesayi var. benguetensis King, 1931
Anopheles crucians var. bradleyi King, 1939
Anopheles (Myzomyia) clowit Rozeboom and
Knight, 1946
Anopheles (Myzomyia) cristatus King and Baisas,
1936
Anopheles in yssorhynchus) emilianus Komp, 1941
Anopheles (A.) fluminensis Root, 1927
Anopheles ae var. georgianus King, 1939
Anopheles (Nyssorhynchus) goeldii Rozeboom and
Gabaldon, 1941
Anopheles gorgasi Dyar and Knab, 1907
Anopheles (Nyssorhynchus) guaranit Shannon, 1928
Anopheles koliensis Owen, 1945
Anopheles nimbus var. kompi Edwards, 1930
Anopheles vagus var. limosus King, 1932
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 9
Chagasia lineata Ludlow, 1908
Anopheles litoralis King, 1932
See ee Me yeoruea) lungae Belkin and Schlos-
ser, 194
Anopheles (Myzomyia) nataliae Belkin, 1945
Anopheles (Stethomyia) niveopalpis Ludlow, 1919
Stethomyia pallida Ludlow, 1905
Anopheles perplexens Ludlow, 1907
Anopheles punctimacula Dyar and Knab, 1906
Anopheles (Myzomyia) leucosphyrus var. riparis
King and Baisas, 1936
Anopheles (A.) ) samarensis Rozeboom, 1951
Anopheles (A.) saperot Bohart and Ingram, 1946
Anopheles (Nyssorhynchus) sawyeri Causey,
Deane, Deane, and Sampaio, 1943
Anopheles (A.) shannoni Davis, 1931
Anopheles (Myzomyia) solomonis Belkin, Knight,
and Rozeboom, 1945
Anopheles strigimacula Dyar and Knab, 1906
Genus Chagasia Cruz
Chagasia rozeboomi Causey, Deane and Deane,
Amer. Journ. Hyg. 39: 3. 1944; Journ. Nat.
Malaria Soc. 4: 341-350. 1945.
The first description of this species was of the
egg only and there is probably no type specimen
in existence. In 1945 the authors described the
adults, larva, and pupa, and state that “Type
specimens are deposited in the National Museum
in Washington, D. C. U.S.A.” A female in the
collection bears the labels ‘““Type specimen col-
lected in Crato, Ceara, Brazil / Type No.
58039 U.S.N.M. / Chagasia rozeboomi Causey
Deane and Deane 1944.” Since the species was
originally described from the egg alone, however,
we must consider this specimen as a pseudotype.
The following species are based on unique
holotype specimens:
Anopheles (Chagasia) bathanus Dyar, 1928
Chagasia bonneae Root, 1927
LITERATURE CITED
ArrKen, T. H. G.
plex of western America.
Publ. Ent. 7: 273-364. 1945.
Purt, I. M. Anopheles of the Oriental Region. In
Boyd, Malariology 1: 483-505. 1949.
Ross, E. 8., and Roprerts, H. R. Mosquito At-
las Part I: 1-44. American Entomological
Society, 1943.
Russet, P. F., Rozesoom, L. E., and STonz,
A. Keys to the anopheline mosquitoes of the
world: 1-152. American Entomological Society,
1943.
Varaas, L., and Maruerson, R. Estado actual del
Anopheles earlei Vargas (1943) y Anopheles
occidentalis Dyar & Knab (1906) con claves
para larvas, pupas y adultos del llamado com-
plejo maculipennis de Norteamerica. Rev. Inst.
Salub. y Enferm. Trop. 9: 27-33. 1948.
Studies on the anopheline com-
Univ. California
SEPTEMBER 1956
PETTIBONE: POLYCHAETE WORMS
281
ZOOLOGY .—Some polychaete worms of the families Hesionidae, Syllidae, and
Nereidae from the east coast of North America, West Indies, and Gulf of Mexico.
Marian H. Perrisone, University of New Hampshire. (Communicated by
Fenner A. Chace, Jr.)
(Received June 14, 1956)
In connection with a study in progress on
the polychaetes of the New England region,
a species of Hesionidae is herein revised,
resulting in a new genus and new combina-
tion; a new species of each of the Syllidae and
Nereidae are described. From the West
Indies and Gulf of Mexico region, a new
species of Nereidae is described and sup-
plementary descriptions are given for two
other nereid species. The major part of the
work was done at the United States National
Museum, where the types are deposited.
Family HEsIoNIDAE
Parahesione, n. gen.
Diagnosis—Prostomium with two lateral
antennae, two smooth, unjointed palps, two pairs
of eyes. Tentacular segments 3, somewhat fused;
tentacular cirri 6 pairs (3 pairs on each side).
Parapodia distinctly biramous; notopodia form-
ing distinct lobes below the cirrophores of the
dorsal cirri, with numerous capillary notosetae;
neuropodia with numerous compound setae with
blades long and slender. Anal cirri two, long.
Proboscis with numerous fine papillae around
the opening, without jaws.
Type.—Podarke luteola Webster, 1880 (=
Hesione agilis Webster and Benedict, 1884).
Parahesione resembles Syllidea Quatrefages,
Micropodarke Okuda, and Nereimyra Blainville
(= Castalia Savigny) in the absence of a median
antenna, the presence of 2 palps and 6 pairs of
tentacular cirri. It differs from them in that the
notopodia are well developed and distinct from
the cirrophores of the dorsal cirri, with a distinct
bundle of numerous notosetae; the palps are
smooth, not biarticulate; also the shape of the
neuropodia and probosces differ markedly.
Parahesione luteola (Webster, 1880), n. comb.
Fig. 1, a-c
Podarke luteola Webster, 1880, pp. 107-108 (figures
referred to not published); 1886, pp. 135-186,
pl. 5, figs. 19-20 (repeat of Webster, 1880, plus
figures).
1'This study was aided by a grant from the
National Science Foundation (NSF-G2012).
Hesione agilis Webster and Benedict, 1884, pp.
707-709, pl. 1, figs. 9-11.
The revision of the species is based on the fol-
lowing: (1) The description of Podarke luteola
Webster, 1880, 1886, based on a single specimen
(11 mm long, 45 segments) found on an oyster-
shell in Great Egg Harbor, N. J.; the type speci-
men is not available; (2) the description and type
specimens of Hestone agilis Webster and Benedict,
1884 (U.S.N.M. no. 480), found in sandy mud
near the high water mark in Wellfleet, Mass.; the
types include several small specimens (up to 2.5
mm long, 18 setigers); (3) several specimens col-
lected at Wellfleet Harbor, Mass., on the sandy
flats, living commensally in the burrows of
Upogebia affinis (Say); they move rapidly and
easily escape notice; they were up to 15 mm long,
4 mm wide including setae, 37 setigers.
Description.—Length up to 15 mm, width in-
cluding setae up to 4 mm, segments 18-45. Body
widest in the middle, tapering gradually anteri-
orly and posteriorly, flattened dorsoventrally.
Prostomium (Fig. 1, a) much wider than long,
with 2 pairs dark red eyes, crescentric, closely
approximated on each side; two pairs of similar
anterior appendages, both pairs delicate, subulate,
with very short basal ceratophores; of these
anterior appendages, the lateral antennae are
slightly more dorsal in position; the palps are
smooth, not biarticulate as in many hesionids;
a median antenna is lacking (for Podarke luteola,
Webster indicated it was lost). Three tentacular
segments somewhat fused dorsally, usually only
one distinct; the 8 pairs of tentacular cirri on
each side with short cylindrical basal cirrophores
emerging from a common base, lateral to and
somewhat fused with the prostomium; styles
variable in length, the upper ones longer than
the lower ones (some may reach segment 10),
readily lost and renewed.
Parapodia, dorsal cirri, and setae all very long
(Fig. 1, c). Parapodia distinctly biramous; noto-
podium a stout papilla below the base of the
dorsal cirrus; notosetae numerous, forming a
close-set bundle, long (longer than the neuro-
setae), slender, capillary, transversely striated.
282
Neuropodia stout, elongated, terminating above
in a conical acicular process, diagonally truncate
below; neurosetae form a fan-shaped group, com-
pound, stem very long with transverse markings,
appendages short and long, entire. Dorsal cirri
with short cylindrical basal cirrophores; styles
very long (longer than the setae), delicate, taper-
ing uniformly, articulate. Ventral cirri delicate,
conical, tapering to slender tips, extending
slightly beyond the tips of the neuropodial lobes.
Anal cirri long, similar to the dorsal cirri (Fig. 1,
b). Proboscis eversible, with larger basal portion
and narrower distal portion, with numerous fine
papillae around the opening, without jaws. Color:
Colorless (small specimens) to reddish yellow,
parapodia green and yellow, cirri white; greenish
(preserved).
Family SYLLIDAE
Genus Brania Quatrefages, 1866
Brania wellfleetensis, n. sp.
Fig. 2, a-c
The species is based on a single specimen col-
lected at low water, Wellfleet Harbor, on the
Cape Cod Bay side, Massachusetts, on sandy
bottom among tubes of Diopatra cuprea (Bosc),
August 25, 1953 (U.S.N.M. no. 27783); another
specimen was collected at Chappaquoit, Buzzards
Bay, Mass., in muddy sand (U.S.N.M. no.
27784).
Description —Length up to 7 mm, width up
to 0.4 mm, segments 38-39. Body tiny, slender,
threadlike, cylindrical, widest in the middle,
tapering slightly anteriorly and_ posteriorly,
colorless. Prostomium oval, wider than long,
with 2 pairs of eyes, anterior pair slightly larger
and more lateral, with little extra pigment lateral
to the posterior pair of eyes; antennae subulate,
wider basally, tapering to more slender tips;
median antenna attached posteriorly on pros-
tomium between posterior pair of eyes, about
double the length of the prostomium; lateral
antennae attached anteriorly on prostomium,
anterior to the anterior pair of eyes, extending
about as far distally as the median antenna; palps
large, prominent, fused on basal third, free dis-
tally; the palps may be elongated (Fig. 2, 6,
sketched from life) or somewhat contracted
(Fig. 2, a, preserved). Tentacular segment more
or less distinct, with 2 pairs of tentacular cirri,
subequal, similar in shape and length to the
median antenna. Uniramous parapodia with setae
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, NO. 9
all compound, except in the last 6 or so posterior
segments where there is an upper and lower simple
seta (looks like a compound seta that has lost its
appendage and become somewhat worn); setae
compound falcigerous, with blades short, finely
spinous, with tips hooked and entire (Fig. 2, c).
First pair dorsal cirri equal in length to tentacu-
lar cirri; dorsal cirri lacking on setiger 2; rest of
dorsal cirri slightly longer than setal tips. Ventral
cirri extend to about the tips of the parapodial
lobes. Anal cirri 2, about as long as last 3 seg-
ments. Pharynx long, occupying setigers 1-4,
may be somewhat coiled when body is contracted;
proventriculus occupying setigers 5 to 8.
Remarks.—Brania wellfleetensis differs from
Brania clavata (Claparéde), which includes
Grubea webstert Verrill and is known from the
New England region, in the following:
B. clavata B. wellfleetensis
Parapodialse- Two kinds: single up- Setae all compound
tae per simple one; com- (except for some
pound setae with simple setae in last
blades shorter to 6 or so posterior seg-
ments), with tips of
blades entire.
Without ocular spots.
longer, with tips
finely bidentate.
With a pair of small
ocular spots near the
lateral antennae, in
addition to the 4
larger eyes.
Dorsal cirrion Present.
setiger 2
Prostomium
Absent.
Distribution.— Massachusetts (Wellfleet Har-
bor, Chappaquoit). In low water.
Family NEREIDAE
Nereis (Nereis) grayi, n. sp.
Fig. 3, a-g
The species is based on two specimens collected
at Hadley Harbor, Uncatena Island in the Woods
Hole area, Massachusetts, August 1952
(U.S.N.M. no. 27781, 27782). They were col-
lected by Milton Gray, after whom the species is
named. They were found in the thick muddy
tubes of the large maldanid, Maldanopsis elongata
(Verrill). Whether or not they lived commensally
with the maldanid or occupied the tube second-
arily is difficult to say. An examination of numer-
ous tubes later failed to reveal any of the nereids.
Description.—Length up to 60 mm or more,
width up to 5 mm, segments up to 150 or more.
Body long, slender, tapering very gradually
posteriorly, somewhat flattened dorsoventrally,
SEPTEMBER 1956
colorless. Prostomium (Fig. 3, a) typical nereid
shape, being widest on posterior third, tapering
gradually anteriorly to a truncate tip; frontal
antennae subulate, at the corners of the truncate
tip; palps with basal part large and bulbous, with
retractile tip; 4 eyes rather small, subequal, on
posterior third of prostomium. Tentacular seg-
ment about same length as the following seg-
ments; tentacular cirri slender, tapering, the
posterior dorsal pair longest, extending to about
setiger 8. Anal segment with a pair of short anal
cirri.
Parapodia (Fig. 3, d, e) biramous, except for
the first two uniramous pairs, similar throughout
the length of the body; they are long, making up
about two-thirds the width of the body. Noto-
podium with 2 subequal, elongated, conical,
pointed ligules; neuropodium with bluntly coni-
cal setigerous lobe, with a slightly shorter, conical,
pointed lower ligule. Both dorsal and ventral
PETTIBONE: POLYCHAETE WORMS
283
cirri are shorter than the ligules. Notosetae of
anterior region homogomph spinigers, rather few
in number (about 8 in each notopodium), with
rather short blades; beginning on about setiger
27, notopodia with few (1-2), homogomph falci-
gers with oval blades (Fig. 3, g). Upper group of
neurosetae homogomph spinigers with long
slender blades and few heterogomph falcigers
(may be lacking on some parapodia) ; lower group
of neurosetae heterogomph spinigers with rather
short blades and heterogomph falcigers with
rather long blades (Fig. 3, f). Acicula dark amber-
colored. Proboscis (Fig. 8, a-c) with a pair of
brown amber-colored jaws, each with about 12
teeth, with paragnaths few in number and small
in size; on the maxillary ring: area II with 2 to 3
very small ones; area IV with triangular group of
10 to 13 slightly larger ones; on the oral ring, area
VI with 3 to 4 small ones; paragnaths lacking on
the other areas.
0.3mm.
Fre. 1.—Parahesione luteola, n. comb.: a, Dorsal view anterior end; b, dorsal view posterior end;
c, parapodium.
284
Remarks.—Nereis grayi resembles Nerevs
(Eunereis) longissima Johnston rather closely,
including the parapodia and the few paragnaths
on the proboscis; they differ in the following:
N. longissima N. grayi
Confined to
group on area VI of
Small group on areas
II and IV of maxil-
Paragnaths small
oral ring, without lary ring; small
paragnaths on max- group on area VI of
illary ring. oral ring.
Longer, longest reach
about setiger 8.
Shorter, longest reach
about setiger 3.
Tentacular
cirri
Notopodial Begin on about setiger Begin on about setiger
homo- 65. 27,
gomph
falcigers
Distribution Massachusetts Hole
region). In low water.
(Woods
Nereis egregicirrata Treadwell, 1924
Fig. 4, a; 5, a-d
Nereis (Leptonereis) egregicirrata Treadwell, 1924,
pp. 13-14, fig. 24 (part; English Harbor, An-
tigua, submarine light, July 1918).
Nereis egregicirrata Treadwell, 1939, p. 233, fig. 56
(Santa Barbara, Porto Rico).
The following description is based on 5 speci-
mens in the original type material (2 male and 3
female heteronereids, U.S.N.M. no. 20324) and a
male heteronereid collected by M. Jean Allen at
Parguera, Porto Rico, from reef in front of the
Laboratory, March 23, 1955. The atokous form
is unknown.
Description of male and female heteronereids.—
Body divided into two distinct regions: anterior
unmodified, with the usual type of setae; posterior
modified with the usual type of setae replaced by
swimming setae and the development of lamellae
instead of ligules. Prostomium (Fig. 4, a) with
anterior part bent down ventrally, thus the
frontal antennae and palps are not visible
dorsally; four eyes large, subequal, purple, with
distinct lenses, the two on each side closely ap-
pressed. Tentacular cirri 4 pairs, 3 of which are
rather short, somewhat articulated, fourth pair
longer, may extend to setiger 5, distinctly to
slightly articulated. Parapodia of anterior un-
modified region (Fig. 5, a, c) with dorsal cirri
subulate, longer than the ligules; notopodia with
upper and lower conical to rounded ligules, with
a third, shorter (supraacicular) ligule between
them, with homogomph spinigerous setae; neuro-
podia with conical setigerous lobe with anterior
and posterior lips, with lower conical ligule; upper
group of neurosetae homogomph spinigers and
heterogomph falcigers; lower group of neurosetae
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 9
heterogomph spinigers and falcigers; hetero-
gomph falcigers with short blades, similar to
Fig. 6, c; ventral cirri subulate, about same
length or slightly shorter than the neuropodial
ligule; acicula dark amber-colored. Proboscis with
amber-colored jaws each with about 12 teeth;
with conical paragnaths on both maxillary and
oral rings (exact arrangement?). Color (in
alcohol): With faint transverse brownish bands
dorsally and with darker glandular areas dorsally
at bases of parapodia. The male and female
heteronereids differ in the following:
Length
Width
Number of
setigers in
anterior
unmodified
region
Number of
setigers in
posterior
modified
region
Total number
of setigers
Posterior end
Dorsal cirri
of anterior
region
Ventral cirri
of anterior
region
Parapodia of
modified
region, with
with swim-
ming setae
Male heteronereid
Up to 13 mm.
Up to 1.5 mm in an-
terior region; up to
2.5 mm in posterior
region
18
About 67
About 85
papil-
cirri
Anal segment
lated (anal
broken off)
First 7 pairs modified
(fig. 4, a): first 5 and
seventh pairs elon-
gate, cylindrical,
with asymmetrical
tips; sixth pair enor-
mously elongate with
bulbous base and
long style (up to 4
mm long)
First 5 pairs clubbed
Fig. 5, 6.
Dorsal cirri with slight
indication of annula-
tions or crenulations
Extra lamella above
base of dorsal cirrus
Unequally bilobed
supraacicular noto-
podial lamella
Unequally bilobed
subacicular noto-
podial lamella
Large postsetal neuro-
podial lamella
Unequally bilobed
lower neuropodial
lamella
Ventral cirri with bi-
lobed lamella above
and large lamella be-
low
Female heteronereid
Up to 14 mm
Up to 1 mm in anterior
region; up to 2 mm
in posterior region
26
About 90
About 116
Pair of long articulated
anal cirri; anal seg-
ment papillated
First 7 pairs modified,
get gradually longer
anterior to posterior
Same
Fig. 5, d.
Dorsal cirri smooth,
not crenulate
Same, smaller
Single digitiform
supraacicular lamella
Single subacicular
notopodial lamella
Same, smaller
Single lower
podial lamella
neuro-
Ventral cirri with
single lamella above
and smaller lamella
below
SEPTEMBER 1956
Remarks.—The types of Nereis (Leptonereis)
egregicirrata Treadwell were collected by sub-
marine light at English Harbor, Antigua, by the
Barbados-Antigua Expedition from the Uni-
versity of Iowa. The nine specimens present in
the type materia] are a mixture of male and fe-
male heteronereids of at least two species. Since
the description is confusing, being based on more
than one species, I have selected as lectotype for
N . egregicirrata one of the two male heteronereids
with the enormously elongated dorsal cirri on
YY,
G
PETTIBONE: POLYCHAETE WORMS
285
setiger 6, as figured by Treadwell (1924, fig. 24).
The rest of the specimens were separated as
follows:
Anterior notopodia with 3 ligules (Fig. 5, a, c):
Male heteronereids: With enormously elon-
gated dorsal cirri on setiger 6 (Fig. 4, a;
fig. 24 in Treadwell, 1924); dorsal cirri of
modified region crenulate (Fig. 5, b); an-
terior unmodified region with 18 setigers.—
Lectotype and paratype of N. egregicirrata,
2 specimens.
Fic. 2.—Brania wellfleetensis, n.sp.: a, Dorsal view anterior end; b, dorsal view prostomium, sketched
C cs . “p a . ’
from life; c, compound falcigerous seta.
286
Female heteronereids: Dorsal cirri of modified
region smooth, not crenulate (Fig. 5, d);
anterior unmodified region with 26 setigers.
—Paratypes of N. egregicirrata, 3 specimens.
Anterior notopodia with 2 ligules (Fig. 6, a):
Male heteronereids: Dorsal cirri of modified
region crenulate (Fig. 6, h); anterior un-
modified region with 14 setigers.—Para-
types of N. allenae, n. sp., 3 specimens.
Female heteronereid: Dorsal cirri of modified
region smooth, not ecrenulate (Fig. 6, g);
anterior unmodified region with 26 setigers,
filled with large yolky eggs (Fig. 4, d).—
Paratype of N. allenae, n. sp., 1 specimen.
The species was originally placed in the sub-
genus Leptonerers because of the supposed absence
0.7mm.
Jp
=
=
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Se
vou. 46, No. 9
of paragnaths. Treadwell, 1939, indicated that
paragnaths were present and referred it to Nereis.
The males and females of the two species are
superficially similar and agree in the following:
They are all small, less than 15 mm long; they are
mostly faintly transversely banded with darker
glandular areas at the dorsal bases of some of the
parapodia; the anterior part of the prostomium
is bent ventrally, so that the palps and frontal
antennae are not visible dorsally; the 4 eyes are
large, purple, subequal, with prominent lenses.
Nerets egregicirrata suggests a resemblance to
Nereis articulata Ehlers, 1887, from off Sand Key,
Fla., 120 fathoms. The type of the latter in the
Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard, was
Fic. 3.—Nereis grayi n.sp.: a, Dorsal view anterior end, with proboscis partially extended; parag-
naths of area VI on oral ring are shown; b, frontal view of extended proboscis showing maxillary ring
with paragnaths on areas II (upper) and IV (lower) and jaws; c, one of the jaws showing the arrange-
ment of teeth; d, parapodium from anterior region of body; e, same, from middle region; f, a lower
neuropodial heterogomph falciger from anterior parapodium; g, a notopodial homogomph falciger from
middle parapodium.
SEPTEMBER 1956
examined for comparison; it is a single small
atokous form in very poor condition—1t is brittle,
brown, with pharynx and most of the setae miss-
ing. The species agree in that the tentacular cirri
are articulated, the parapodia seem similar; also
they have glands at the bases of the parapodia.
A similar type of elongated dorsal cirri for the
male heteronereid is reported for Nereis abnormis
Horst, 1924, p. 163, from the Netherlands East
Indies; in this case, it is the dorsal cirri of the
PETTIBONE: POLYCHAETE WORMS
287
seventh setiger that is enlarged instead of the
sixth as in N. egregicirrata.
Distribution.—West Indies: Antigua, Puerto
Rico; in surface waters (March, July).
Nereis allenae, n. sp.
Figs. 4, b-f; 6, a-h
The description is based on the following:
Type (U.S.N.M. no. 27778): A single female
heteronereid massed with unusually large eggs
0.32mm.
Fic. 4.—Nerets egregicirrata: a, Dorsal view anterior end of male heteronereid showing enormously
elongated dorsal cirri on setiger 6. Nerezs allenae, n.sp.: b, Dorsal view anterior end of atokous form;
c, dorsal view posterior end of same; d, dorsal view anterior end of female heteronereid; e, one of large
yolky eggs of same; f, dorsal view posterior end of male heteronereid.
288
from reef between the Laboratory and Caballo
Blanco Island, Parguera, Porto Rico, evening,
15 September 1955, collected by M. Jean Allen,
after whom the species is named; it is unusual in
that the eggs were laid in short alga-like strings;
paratypes (U.S.N.M. no. 27779): a single female
heteronereid (massed with large eggs) and 3 male
heteronereids removed from the type material of
Nereis egregicirrata Treadwell (see above), col-
lected at submarine light, English Harbor,
Antigua, July 1918; paratypes (U.S.N.M. no.
27780): 3 atokous specimens which were mixed
with other species, collected from Pelican Island,
Barbados, from the Barbados-Antigua Expedi-
tion, 1918.
Description of the atokous form.—Length up to
27 mm, width up to 1 mm, segments about 80.
Body long, slender, slightly flattened dorsoven-
trally, tapered gradually posteriorly. Prostomium
(Fig. 4, 6) widest basally, narrowed on anterior
half; frontal antennae slender, palps bulbous with
retractile tips, of about same length as antennae;
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL, 46, No. 9
4 eyes on posterior half of prostomium, violet,
rather large, subequal. Tentacular segment of
about same length as following segments; ten-
tacular cirri short to longer, the longest reach
setiger 4. Posterior end (Fig. 4, c) with bulbous
anal segment, with pair of long anal cirri. Para-
podia (Fig. 6, a, 6) similar throughout the length
of the body. Dorsal cirri much longer than the
ligules; notopodium with 2 rounded to conical
ligules, with small acicular lobe on upper side of
lower ligule (no distinct middle ligule), with
homogomph spinigerous setae (without homo-
gomph falcigers in middle and posterior part of
body); neuropodium with conical setigerous lobe
with anterior and posterior lips, with conical
lower ligule; upper group of neurosetae homo-
gomph spinigers and heterogomph falcigers;
lower group of neurosetae heterogomph spinigers
and falcigers; heterogomph falcigers of anterior
region with short blades (Fig. 6, c); in middle and
posterior regions, upper group of neurosetae with
homogomph spinigers and few (1-3) heterogomph
Fig. 5.—Nereis egregicirrata: a, Parapodium from anterior unmodified region of male heteronereid;
5, parapodium from posterior modified region of same; c, parapodium from anterior unmodified region
of female heteronereid; d, parapodium from posterior modified region of same. (All parapodia drawn
to same scale.)
SEPTEMBER 1956 PETTIBONE: POLYCHAETE WORMS 289
falcigers that are stouter than the others (Fig. maxillary and oral rings (exact arrangement?).
6, d); lower group of falcigers more slender with Color (in alcohol): With brownish pigment on
short blades (Fig. 6, e); acicula dark amber- anterior part of prostomium including palps,
colored. Proboscis with dark amber-colored jaws, with a wide band on the tentacular segment and
with conical amber-colored paragnaths on both narrow transverse bands both dorsally and
rt
10 ja
Fic. 6.—Nerets allenae, n.sp.: a, Parapodium from anterior region of atokous form; b, same, from
middle region of body; c, heterogomph falcigerous seta from anterior parapodium of atokous form;
d, heterogomph falcigerous seta from upper group of neurosetae from middle parapodium of atokous
form; e, same, from lower group of neurosetae; f, parapodium from anterior part of body of female
heteronereid; g, same, from posterior modified region; h, parapodium from modified region of male
heteronereid. (All parapodia drawn to same scale.)
290
ventrally on most of the segments; also brownish
glandular areas laterally within the body—at
the bases of the parapodia dorsally and ventrally,
at the bases of the dorsal and ventral cirri, and
in the ligules (Fig. 4, 6, c).
Description of male and female heteronereids.—-
Body divided into two distinct regions: anterior
unmodified, with the usual type of setae; pos-
terior modified, with the usual type of setae re-
placed by swimming setae and the development
of lamellae instead of ligules; in addition in the
male, there is a posterior “tail” region of about 12
segments which lack the modified parapodia; also
there are paired dorsal knobs on the last 19 or so
segments, giving the ‘tail’ a characteristic
aspect (Fig. 4, f). Prostomium (Fig. 4, d) with
anterior part bent down ventrally, thus the
frontal antennae and palps are not visible dor-
sally; four eyes large, bulging, subequal, purple,
with distinct lenses, the 2 on each side closely
appressed. Tentacular segment of female with
lower 2 pairs of tentacular cirri short, upper an-
terior pair extending to setiger 2, upper posterior
pair extending to setiger 7; in the males, the
tentacular cirri were broken off except for one
rather short pair. Parapodia of anterior un-
modified region (Fig. 6, f) similar to atokous
form. In the female, the body wall of the anterior
unmodified segments is very thin, transparent;
this region is massed with large yolky eggs (about
160 » in diameter); the eggs have an outer finely
granular portion and an inner denser portion with
the large nucleus and a number of large oil
globules (Fig. 4, d, e); these eggs were reported
by the collector as being laid in short alga-like
strings; the eggs made up a single row of cells,
some strings with approximately 30 eggs; within
about an hour after laying, the “jelly” holding
the eggs together had dissolved. The male and
female heteronereids differ in the following:
Male heteronereid Female heteronereid
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
Length
Width
Number of
setigers in
anterior un-
modified
region
Number of
setigers in
posterior
modified
region
Total number
of setigers
Up to 12 mm.
Up to 1.5 mm in an-
terior region; up to
2.5 mm in posterior
region
14
About 46 plus 12 in
“tail”
About 72
Up to 14 mm
Up to 1.5 mm in an-
terior region; up to 2
mm in posterior re-
gion
26
About 55
About 81
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, NO. 9
Bulbous anal segment
(anal cirri missing)
Posterior end Pair of dorsal papillae
(ventral anal cirri
missing); with a pair
of dorsal knobs on
the last 19 or so seg-
ments (Fig. 4, f)
Dorsal cirri of First 7 pairs elongated, First 5 pairs slightly
anterior clubbed, become modified, clubbed
region longer posteriorly
First 4 pairs clubbed First 5 pairs slightly
modified, clubbed
Ventral cirri
of anterior
region
Parapodia of Fig. 6, h Fig. 6, 9
modified Dorsal cirri crenulate Dorsal cirri smooth,
region with on lower margin not crenulate
swimming Extra lamella above Same
setae base of dorsal cirrus
Single supraacicular Unequally bilobed
notopodial lamella supraacicular noto-
podial lamella
Single large subacicu- Unequally bilobed
lar notopodial la- subacicular notopo-
mella dial lamella
Large rounded post- Same, smaller
setal neuropodial la-
mella
Unequally bilobed Same
lower neuropodial
lamella
Ventral cirri with bi- Same, smaller
lobed lamella above
and large lamella be-
low
Color Not banded; dark Pigmented on anterior
part of prostomium
and palps, wide band
on tentacular seg-
ment, with narrow
transverse bands on
rest of segments dor-
sally and ventrally,
with darker spots at
the bases of the para-
podia and bases of
the dorsal and ven-
tral cirri.
glands at bases of
parapodia dorsally
Distribution—West Indies: Porto Rico, An-
tigua, Barbados; heteronereids at surface
(July, September).
Nereis (Nereis) pelagica Linné, 1758
Nereis largoensis Treadwell, 1931,
Behre, 1950, p. 12.
Nereis pelagica largoensis Hartman, 1956, pp. 255,
280.
p- 3.—not
Remarks——The type of Nereis largoensis
Treadwell, 1931, from Key Largo, Florida, de-
posited in the American Museum of Natural
History, was examined. It has been referred to
Nereis pelagica largoensis by Hartman, 1956. In
comparing it with specimens of the more northern
N. pelagica, it seems to be identical; the parag-
nath arrangement falls within the variation
found in N. pelagica; the posterior notopodial
SEPTEMBER 1956
lobes are no more enlarged than is found in the
more northern forms. The record of N. largoensis
from Grand Isle, La., by Behre, 1950, was based
on specimens deposited in the United States
National Museum and identified by Treadwell;
on examination, they proved to be occidentalis
and not largoensis.
Distribution —Widely distributed in the Arctic.
Also Iceland, Norway to Mediterranean; Hudson
Bay to Long Island Sound, Florida (Key Largo) ;
Bering Sea to Panamdé; north Japan Sea to
Japan; South Atlantic (Tristan da Cunha,
Kerguelen, Magellan Straits). In low water to
609 fathoms.
Nereis (Nereis) occidentalis Hartman, 1945
Fig. 7, a-d; 8, a-g
Nereis pelagica occidentalis Hartman, 1945, p. 20,
pl. 4, figs. 1-6; 1951, p. 46.—Behre, 1950, p. 12.
Neanthes oligohalina Rioja, 1946, p. 207, pl. 1,
figs. 3-6; pl. 2, figs. 13-19.
Nereis largoensis Behre, 1950, p. 12.—Hartman,
1951, p. 45, pl. 13, fig. 5 (part; from Grand Isle,
La.); not Treadwell, 1931.
Heteronereid epitokous forms of this species
(including a single female and 7 males) were col-
lected by Joseph P. Breuer and sent into the
Museum for identification; they were collected
in Laguna Madre, 25 miles north of Port Isabel,
Tex., at night under light, April 15, 1956. The
PETTIBONE: POLYCHAETE WORMS
291
females have not been described previously and
the males only partially. They are described
herein and compared with the atokous form. The
known distribution of the species is extended
from collections in the United States National
Museum.
Description of atokous form.—Length up to 50
mm, width up to 4 mm, segments about 80.
Prostomium of the typical nereid form, with the
4 eyes rather large, subequal. Tentacular segment
with 4 pairs of tentacular cirri, the longest reach
setigers 3 to 8. Parapodia of anterior region
(Fig. 8, a) with ligules short and rounded; the
ligules become slightly more elongated and conical
in the middle and posterior regions (Fig. 8, 6, ¢).
Notopodium with 2 ligules, with a very small
supraacicular setigerous lobe between them (not
a distinct third ligule); neuropodium with a
rounded to conical setigerous lobe and a lower
ligule. Dorsal cirri longer than the ligules, ventral
cirri slightly shorter. Notosetae of anterior region
consist of homogomph spinigers; in the middle
and posterior regions, the notosetae become fewer
in number, with few (1-2) homogomph falcigers
in addition to the spinigers; homogomph falcigers
with short blades, with recurved tip and spinous
edge (spines may be worn; Fig. 7, c, d). Upper
group of neurosetae homogomph spinigers and
heterogomph falcigers; lower group of neurosetae
heterogomph spinigers and falcigers; hetero-
0.7mm.
ai
Kia. 7.—Nereis occidentalis: a, Dorsal view anterior end of female heteronereid; 6, heterogomph
falcigerous neuroseta from anterior region of atokous specimen; c, homogomph falcigerous notoseta from
posterior region of atokous specimen; d, same, from slightly different angle.
bo
Ne}
bo
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 9
Fie. 8.—Nereis occidentalis: a, Parapodium from anterior region of atokous specimen; b, same, from
middle region; c, same, from posterior region; d, parapodium from anterior region of female heteronereid;
e, same, from posterior modified region; f, parapodium from anterior region of male heteronereid; g,
same, from posterior modified region. (All parapodia drawn to same scale.)
SEPTEMBER 1956
gomph falcigers with rather short blades with
recurved tip and spinous edge (Fig. 7, 6). Acicula
black. Proboscis with dark amber-colored jaws,
each with 7-8 teeth; paragnaths conical, dark,
those of maxillary rmg smaller than those of oral
ring, arranged as follows: area I, 1-4 (8-12
small ones in var. oligohalina); area II, crescent-
shaped area of 2 rows; area III, elliptical group
of 4-5 rows; area IV, arched group of 3-4 rows;
area V, 0 (rarely 1, in var. oligohalina); area VI,
usually 4 (8-6); areas VII-VIII, continuous, 2-3
rows, subequal, do not get smaller basally. Color
(in alcohol): Dusky on prostomium, especially
on area in front of eyes, and on some of the an-
terior body segments.
Description of the male and female heteronereids.
—Body divided into two regions in the male:
anterior region with unmodified segments, pos-
terior region with modified parapodia with
swimming setae and lamellae instead of ligules;
in addition in the female, there is a short posterior
or ‘tail’ region of unmodified segments. An-
terior part of prostomium (Fig. 7, a) may or
may not be bent ventrally, thus the frontal
antennae and palps may be only partially visible
dorsally; eyes large, bulging (not as much as in
some species of nereids). Parapodia of anterior
unmodified region similar to atokous form
(Fig. 8, d, f). In life, they were described as
bright red in color and active swimmers. The
PETTIBONE: POLYCHAETE
WORMS
293
Color (in Pigmented dusky area Same on prostomium;
alcohol) on prostomium an- anterior half of an-
terior to eyes; slight terior unmodified re-
amount on anterior gion darkly pig-
segments. mented (fig. 7, a)
Parapodium _ Fig. 8, g Fig. 8, e
of modified Dorsal cirri crenulate Dorsal cirri smooth,
region with few large crenu- not crenulate.
lations.
Rounded lamella Elongated lamella
above dorsal cirrus.
Digitiform notopodial
above dorsal cirrus.
Same, shorter.
male and female heteronereids differ in the
following:
Male heteronereid Female heteronereid
Length Up to 30 mm. Up to 23 mm
Width Up to3 mm inanterior Up to2 mm in anterior
region; up to 4 mm region; up to 3 mm
in modified region. in modified region.
Number of 16 25
setigers in
anterior
unmodified
region
Number of About 75 About 50, plus 15 in
setigers in “tail”
posterior
region
Total number About 90 About 90
of setigers
Tentacular Longest reach setigers Longest reach setiger
cirri 4-6 10
Anterior dor- First 7-8 pairsclubbed. First 5 pairs clubbed.
sal cirri
Anterior ven- First 5 pairs clubbed. Same
tral cirri
Posterior end
Anal segment a papil-
lated disk, with
double row of nu-
merous papillae, with
or without pair of
long anal cirri (may
be broken off).
Anal segment bulbous,
slightly crenulate,
with anal cirri miss-
ing.
lamella below dorsal
cirrus.
Subacicular digitiform
notopodial lamella.
Large rounded _post-
setal lamella.
Elongated digitiform
lower neuropodial
lamella.
Elongated lamella
above and rounded
lamella below ven-
tral cirrus.
Same.
Same, smaller.
Same.
Same.
Biology.—Nereis occidentalis is found inter-
tidally and dredged in shallow depths. It is found
on mud flats and sandy shoals, among ascidian
and sponge masses, tube masses of maldanids, as
Petaloproctus, oyster clusters and between shells
of mussels, as Mytilus; it is found on piles,
scrapings from floating buoys, and washed from
sea weeds. The species evidently has a wide
salinity tolerance, as it has been found in estuaries
along with Nereis succinea (Frey and Leuckart).
Epitokes have been found swarming at the sur-
face in April in Texas (Corpus Christi, April 29,
1950, Hartman, 1951; Laguna Madre, April 15,
1956, collected by J. P. Breuer); early epitokes
have been found in North Carolina in June
(Beaufort, Hartman, 1945).
Records.—North Carolina (Beaufort), Florida
(Port St. Joe, Gullport), Louisiana (Grand Isle),
Texas (Corpus Christi, Laguna Madre), Mexico
(Veracruz, Tecolutla), Porto Rico (Arroyo,
Ensenada Honda, Culebra).
Distribution —West Indies (Porto Rico),
North Carolina, Gulf of Mexico (Florida to
Mexico). In low water and shallow waters; sexual
epitokes at surface.
REFERENCES
Beare, E. Annotated list of the fauna of the Grand
Isle region. Oce. Pap. Mar. Lab. Louisiana
State Univ., no. 6: 66 pp. 1950.
Enters, E. Report on the annelids of the dredging
expedition of the U.S. Coast Survey steamer
Blake. Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. 15: 335 pp.,
60 pls. 1887.
Hartman, O. The North
martne annelids of
Carolina. Bull. Duke Univ. Mar. Stat., no.
2:51 pp., 10 pls. 1945.
The littoral marine annelids of the Gulf
of Mexico. Publ. Inst. Mar. Sei. 2(1): 7-124,
27 pls. 1951.
Polychaetous annelids erected by Treadwell,
1891 to 1948, together with a brief chronology.
Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. 109(2): 243-310.
1956.
Horst, R. Polychaeta errantia of the Siboga Ex-
pedition. Pt. 3: Nereidae and Hesionidae.
Siboga-Exped. 99 (Monogr. 24, Ic): 145-198,
7 pls. 1924.
Rioga, E. Estudios Anelidologicos. XV. Nereidos
de agua salobre de los esteros del litoral del Golfo
de Mexico. Anal. Inst. Biol. México 17: 205-
214, 2 pls. 1946.
TREADWELL, A. L. Polychaetous annelids, col-
lected by the Barbados- Antigua Expedition from
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 9
the University of Iowa in 1918. Univ. Iowa
Stud. 10(4): 23 pp., 2 pls. 1924.
New species of polychaetous annelids from
California, Mexico, Porto Rico, and Jamaica.
Amer. Mus. Nov. no. 482: 7 pp., 21 figs. 1931.
Polychaetous annelids of Porto Rico and
vicinity. Sci. Surv. Porto Rico and the Virgin
Islands, New York Acad. Sci., 16(2): 151-318,
118 figs. 1989.
Wesster, H. E. The Annelida Chaetopoda of New
Jersey. Ann. Rep. New York Mus. Nat. Hist.,
no. 32: 101-128. 1880.
The Annelida Chaetopoda of New Jersey.
Ann. Rep. New York Mus. Nat. Hist., no.
39: 128-159, pls. 4-10. 1886.
Wesster, H. E., and Benepict, J. The Annelida
Chaetopoda from Provincetown and Wellfleet,
Massachusetts. Rep. Comm. Fish and Fisheries
for 1881: 699-747, 8 pls. 1884.
LOW TEMPERATURE STORAGE OF FREE RADICALS
The National Bureau of Standards has de-
veloped a technique for capturing and storing
large numbers of highly reactive molecular frag-
ments at temperatures near absolute zero. By
this method unstable atoms and free radicals,
known to exist but momentarily in flames and
hot gases, are produced in an electric discharge,
frozen into immobility, and trapped in solid form.
Because these atoms are frozen in the excited
state, they can be conveniently studied by optical
spectroscopy.
In experiments to date the Bureau has pro-
duced solids containing atomic nitrogen and
oxygen, and possibly atomic hydrogen and an
unstable hydroxy (OH) molecule. These solids
have very unusual properties, emitting bright
glows, blue ‘flames,’ and colored flashes of
light. When warmed 20° or 30°, they combine
very actively, relasing large quantities of stored
energy, principally as heat. Other possible fields of
application include solid state physics and basic
chemistry. Here the trapped atoms could be used
as powerful probes into the solids containing
them. From a study of their properties, informa-
tion could be obtained about the arrangement
of the atoms and molecules in the solid and about
the forces acting on them. Similarly the mecha-
nism of diffusion of atoms and of reactions be-
tween atoms and molecules could be studied.
These experiments were begun at NBS in
1954 by H. P. Broida and J. R. Pellam! and are
being continued by H. P. Broida, A. Bass, and
O. Lutes? of the Bureau’s temperature measure-
ments laboratory. C. M. Herzfeld of NBS is
carrying out theoretical investigations’ on the
systems. The research is supported chiefly by
the Office of Naval Research and the U. S. Air
Force through the Office of Scientific Research
of the Air Research and Development Command.
Within the last five years several methods
have been developed in other laboratories for
stabilizing free radicals at low temperatures.
However, the present technique has the ad-
vantage that the free radicals are stored in
highly excited states as a result of the electric
discharge, making it possible to study and
analyze them by spectroscopic techniques. Also,
since the radicals are collected at much lower
temperatures than in previous methods, they
can be stored longer in the uncombined form.
In this method gases containing molecules
1 Brora, H. P., and Pruuam, J. R., Phys.
Rev. 95: 845, 1954; Brorpa, H. P., and Petia,
J. R., Journ. Chem. Phys. 28: 409, 1955.
2 Bass, A. M., and Brorpa, H. P., Phys. Rev.
101: 1740, 1956; Brorpa, H. P., and Lurss, O.S.,
Journ. Chem. Phys. 24: 484, 1956.
3 Herzrevp, C. M., and Brorpa, H. P., Phys.
Rev. 101: 606, 1955.
SEPTEMBER 1956
of nitrogen, hydrogen, oxygen, or water are
first passed through a high-frequency electric
discharge, then frozen very suddenly at 4.2°K,
just a few degrees above absolute zero.
The discharge is maintained in a waveguide
resonator by a 2450-Mc power supply. From the
resonator, a glass tube leads the resulting molecu-
lar fragments into an evacuated metal vessel
containing a cold surface in contact with a liquid
helium bath. To prevent solidification of the
discharge products at temperatures above 4.2°K,
the gases are carried to the cold surface through
a passageway that is kept near room temperature
by contact with warm helium gas. When the
gases reach the cold surface, they freeze into
solid form there.
Various techniques can then be used to study
the resulting solids. Through windows in the
metal vessel, a number of spectrographs of
different types can be aimed at the cold surface,
and the light given off by the solids frozen on the
surface can be analyzed. To study the light
absorbed by the solids, the gases are condensed
on a transparent cold surface, and light is passed
through the windows of the vessel, the condensed
material, the cold surface, and finally into the
spectroscopes. To determine the heat evolved
by recombination of atoms, the gases are con-
densed into a small, simple low-temperature
calorimeter, and the heat evolved by the ma-
terial as it warms up is measured.
Because the free radicals produced by this
method can be kept unchanged for many hours,
a more detailed study of their properties has
been possible than in previous work. For example,
during the discharge through nitrogen the con-
densed solid emits a bright green glow, which
tends to become yellow at high flow rates. The
spectra obtained from this glow show that the
structure of the solid condensed from the dis-
charge differs from that of ordinary solid nitro-
gen. In fact, each atom of the condensed nitrogen
forms a very loosely bound complex with some
neighboring molecule, and this complex has
NOTES AND
NEWS 295
properties that differ from those of the separate
atom and molecule. The evidence shows that the
complex is a definite unit. By analyzing its
spectra, the forces holding it together can be
studied.
Brilhant blue flashes are also observed from
the solid surface during the nitrogen discharge.
These flashes are thought to be due to local
warming. After the flow of nitrogen is stopped,
the discharge goes out and a green afterglow
from the cold collected material persists for
several minutes, decaying with a half-life of about
15 seconds. When the green afterglow has dis-
appeared, sudden warming of the vessel walls
(to between 25° and 35°K) causes a blue “‘flame’’
which appears to “burn” through the condensed
material. The light and heat thus given off are
evidently due to recombination of the atoms into
molecules. When the light is analyzed spectro-
scopically, it gives information about the struc-
ture of the molecule just formed and about the
forces acting between two atoms. The reaction
of a nitrogen atom with an oxygen atom can also
be studied in this way.
When oxygen is passed through the discharge,
a clear, glassy deposit is obtained which has
rather complex absorption spectra. Upon warm-
ing this material to about 20°K, the original
deposit evaporates and a solid violet material
condenses on the surface. This substance has
been identified as a mixture of oxygen and ozone.
Further warming of the violet substance pro-
duces ozone in large quantities. Initiation of
chemical reactions in this way, by warming the
frozen material, indicates the possibility of open-
ing up a new field of very low’ temperature
chemistry. Because of the high chemical activity
of the free radicals, new chemical compounds
might be formed by this process.
Low-temperature condensates have also been
obtained from hydrogen and water. While the
solids formed show complex behavior similar to
that of nitrogen and oxygen, the results are still
incompletely understood.
One science only will one genius fit,
So vast vs art, so narrow human wit.
—Porr
296
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 46, No. 9 »
NEMATOLOGY.—Paratylenchus projectus, new species (Nematoda, Criconematt-
dae), with a key to the species of Paratylenchus.t W. R. JENKINS, University of
Maryland. (Communicated by R. Bamford.)
(Received July 11, 1956)
In July 1955, root and soil samples were
collected from a pasture in Prince Georges
County, Md., in an effort to determine the
cause of stunted growth and general decline
of grasses in this field. Examination re-
vealed that a new species of Paratylenchus
was present in large numbers.
To determine parasitism, specimens of
this species were transferred to pots contain-
ing plants of tall fescue, Festuca elatior var.
Kentucky 31, which were maintained under
greenhouse conditions. Since the field under
examination was used from time to time for
growing tobacco, seedlings of Nicotiana
tabacum L. were also inoculated with speci-
mens of Paratylenchus n. sp. Both tall fescue
and tobacco supported large population in-
creases under these conditions.
It is probable that decline and failure of
this pasture is due, at least in part, to
Paratylenchus n. sp. Therefore, investiga-
tions are being conducted to determine
pathogenic effects of this nematode on
grasses and tobacco.
Paratylenchus projectus, n. sp.
Fig. 1
25 females: 373.0u (289-4754); a = 18.7
(15.6-20.8); b = 4.0 (3.5-4.9); ¢ = 15.4 (11.3-
19.5); V = 84.3 per cent (82.6-86.9 per cent);
stylet = 31.84 (24.8-37.1y).
Males: Unknown.
Female.—The cuticle is marked by rather fine
transverse striae about one micron apart. The
lateral field occupies about two-fifths of the body
diameter and is marked by four evenly-spaced
incisures. The slightly-offset lip region is truncate
with a median labial extension and is marked by
three transverse striations. Neither amphids nor
cervical papillae have been observed; however,
phasmids are located in the lateral field anterior
to the anus. The conspicuous excretory pore
varies in its location from just behind the median
' Scientific Article no. A571, Contribution no.
2729, of the University of Maryland Agriculture
Experiment Station, Department of Botany.
swelling of the esophagus to the anterior end of
the basal swelling of the esophagus, always on the
ventral surface. There is an average of 50 post-
vulval annulations.
The buccal cavity is small and there is no
sclerotized cephalic framework. The spear aver-
ages 31.8 microns and has prominent knobs which
are somewhat flattened on the anterior surface.
The dorsal esophageal gland opens into the
lumen of the esophagus about one-fifth the spear-
length behind the base of the spear. There is a
typically criconematoid median bulb with a val-
vular apparatus behind which the duct of the
ventral esophageal glands opens into the lumen
of the esophagus. Posterior to the median bulb,
there is a long and narrow isthmus about which
lies the circumesophageal nerve ring. The ter-
minal swelling of the esophagus is somewhat pyri-
form in shape. There is no cardia. The intestine,
the cells of which are filled with many small, re-
fractive inclusions, ends in a short rectum and
obscure anus.
There is a single outstretched ovary which usu-
ally reaches to the anterior end of the intestine
but has been observed as far anterior as the me-
dian esophageal bulb. The cap cell gives rise to
several oogonia which are arranged in a double
line. Only one egg, averaging 57.9u by 13.2u, was
observed in the uterus at a time. The vulva is an
anteriorly sloping, transverse slit flanked by lat-
eral vulval membranes. No spermatheca or post-
vulval uterine sac has been observed. There is a
marked reduction in body diameter immediately
behind the vulva.
Larvae were observed to have a small and in-
distinct esophagus. The median swelling was
much reduced in size but did possess a large val-
vular apparatus.
The normal relaxed position was a ventral
curving in both larvae and females.
Type host.—Soil about roots of pasture grass.
Type locality —Upper Marlboro, Prince Geor-
ges County, Md.
Diagnosis —The absence of males distinguishes
P. projectus from P. goodeyi Oostenbrink, 1953,
P. hamatus Thorne and Allen, 1950, P. besoe-
kianus Bally and Reydon, 1931, P. elachistus
SEPTEMBER 1956 JENKINS: PARATYLENCHUS PROJECTUS 297
projectus can be distinguished by its slightly off-
set lip region which is truncated and bears three
striations, in its lack of a post-vulval uterine sac,
lateral vulval wings, and in the shape of the spear
Stemer, 1942, P. minutus Linford, 1949, P. macro-
phallus (de Man, 1880) Goodey, 1934, and P.
dianthus Jenkins and Taylor, 1956.
This species differs in many ways from females
of species in which no males have been reported. _ knobs.
From P. bukowinensis Micoletzky, 1922, P. P. projectus differs from both P. nanus Cobb,
Fie. 1.—Paratylenchus projectus, n. sp.: A, Anterior portion; B, mature female; C, posterior portion.
298
1923 and P. anceps Cobb, 1923 in its offset, stri-
ated lip-region, its smaller spear which bears
flattened knobs, and in its lack of a spermatheca.
It differs further from P. anceps by having four
incisures in the lateral field, while the latter has
only two incisures.
P. curvitata van der Linde, 1938, is smaller than
P. projectus (330% as opposed to 373), has a
much smaller spear (244 as opposed to 31.8y),
and does not bear a median labial extension.
Because of the frequent occurrence of Paraty-
lenchus species in soil about roots of plants, a key
is presented to aid in the identification of de-
scribed species. This key was devised from pub-
lished descriptions and illustrations, not from per-
sonal examination of specimens of each species.
It is based for the most part on female charac-
teristics, because males are frequently unknown
or exist in very small numbers.
KEY TO SPECIES OF PARATYLENCHUS
MICOLETZKY, 1922
1. Lip region a truncated cone................ 2
Lip region smooth and rounded............ 8
2. Lateral field marked by two incisures
anceps Cobb, 1923
Lateral field marked by four incisures......3
3. Postvulval uterine sac present.............. 4
Postvulval uterine sac absent.............. 5
4. Female spear about 194 long; male spear
faded and indistinct
besoekianus Bally and Reydon, 1931
Female spear about 254 long; males absent
bukowinensis Micoletzky, 1922
5. Lateral vulval membranes present.......... 6
Lateral vulval membranes absent........... 7
6. Female lip region striated; males absent
projectus, Nn. sp.
Female lip region not striated; males present
dianthus Jenkins and Taylor, 1956
7. Postvulval reduction in body diameter; males
AOAIMNGS oo os o00e curvitata van der Linde, 1938
No postvulval reduction in body diameter;
males frequent
macrophallus (deMan, 1880) Goodey, 1934
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 9 -
8. Females stout, spear 48-56u
goodeyt Oostenbrink, 1953
Females typically slender................... 9
. No marked postvulval reduction in body
diameter....hamatus Thorne and Allen, 1950
Marked postvulval reduction in body diameter
10
vo)
10. Females 360-410n long; males absent
nanus Cobb, 1923
Females 234-310u long; males frequent..... 11
il. Male with anal sheath surrounding spicula,
tail convex-conoid....minutus Linford, 1949
Male without anal sheath, tail short and sub-
ACULCR | eee crane ee elachistus Steiner, 1942
LITERATURE CITED
Batty, W., and Rreypon, G. A. De tegenwoor-
dige stand van het vraagstuk van de wortelaaltjes
in de koffiecultuur. Arch. Koffiecult. Nederl.
Indie 5: 92-94. 1931.
Coss, N. A. Notes on Paratylenchus, a genus of
nemas. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 13:
254-257. 1923. Also: Contr. Sci. Nematology
14: 367-370.
GoopeEy, T. Observations of Paratylenchus ma-
crophallus (de Man, 1800). Journ. Helm. 12:
79-88. 1934.
JenxKINS, W. R., and Tayuor, D. P. Paratylen-
chus dianthus, new species (Nematoda, Cri-
conematidae), a parasite of carnation. Proc.
Helm. Soc. Washington 23: 124-127. 1956.
Linpr, W. J. VAN DER. A contribution to the
study of nematodes. Ent. Mem. Union South
Africa 2: 25, 26, 34. 1938.
Linrorp, M. B., Ourvertra, J. M. and Mamoru,
I. Paratylenchus minutus, n. sp., a nematode
parasitic on roots. Pacifie Sei. 3: 111-119. 1949.
Micoterzky, H. Die freilebenden Erd-Nemato-
den. Arch. Naturg., Abt. A, 87: 605-607. 1922.
OosTENBRINK, I. M. A note on Paratylenchus
in the Netherlands with the description of
P. goodeyi n. sp. (Nematoda, Criconematidae).
Tijdsch. Plantenziekten 59: 207-216. 1953.
Sremner, G. Plant nematodes the grower should
know. Proc. Soil Sci. Soc. Florida 4B 37-39.
1942.
TuHorneE, G., and Auten, M. W. Paratylenchus
hamatus n. sp. and Xiphinema index n. sp.,
two nematodes associated with fig roots, with a
note on Paratylenchus anceps Cobb. Proc.
Helm. Soc. Washington 17: 27-35. 1950.
The generality of men are so accustomed to judge of things by their senses
that because air is invisible they ascribe but little to it, and think of it as but
one remove from nothing.—R. BoyLeE (1673)
SEPTEMBER 1956 INGERSOLL ET AL.:
SYMPATHETIC DENERVATION
299
PHYSIOLOGY .—Effect of sympathetic denervation of the urinary bladder in animals
and man.' E. H. INGERSOLL, L. L. Jones, and E.S. Heer, Medical College of
Virginia. (Communicated by Paul H. Oehser.)
The reaction of the urinary bladder to
denervation in the laboratory animal has
been extensively reported, especially in the
older literature, but it has been only in
recent years that careful studies have been
published in man. In fact, as Heimburger et
al. (1) have pointed out, knowledge of the
human bladder innervation has been taken
largely from comparisons with experimental
animals and from human dissections. In this
study we will review the response of the vis-
cus to division of the sympathetic outflow,
first in animals and then in man.
Effect in the cat-—There is much difference
of opinion as to the effect of section of the
sympathetic fibers to the bladder, not only
in the cat, but in other animals and in man
as well. Neither Beattie (2) nor Nawrocki
and Skabitschewsky (3) observed any change
in bladder function following section of the
hypogastric nerves in the cat. Some workers
(4, 5, 6, 7) found that division of the sympa-
thetics did not interfere with bladder empty-
ing but seemed to increase temporarily the
frequency of micturition.
Elliott (8), in addition to observing in-
creased frequency of bladder emptying,
noted that the tone of the viscus was perma-
nently increased following section of the
sympathetic outflow. He observed that this
tone was diminished only slightly by further
section of the pelvic nerves. Similarly, Lang-
worthy et al. (9, 10, 11) found an immediate
decrease in vesical volume when the post
ganglionic sympathetic fibers were cut on
one side. This defect persisted for several
weeks. Removal of the sympathetics on
both sides, according to Langworthy, pro-
duced a more marked and lasting decrease in
volume.
These findings have been difficult to cor-
relate with what has been observed following
electrical stimulation of the hypogastric
nerves in the cat. We (72, 13) have shown, as
have others, that excitation of the sympa-
1 This investigation was supported in part by
research grant B-704 from the National Institute
of Neurological Diseases and Blindness, National
Institutes of Health, Public Health Service.
thetic outflow to the bladder regularly
evoked contractions of all portions of the
detrusor muscle. True, this response was not
a sustained one, lasting only a few seconds,
and it was invariably followed by relaxation.
It may be possible, as Gillilan (74) has sug-
gested, that sympathetic fibers play a minor
role in micturition, and only come into play
in emergencies. However, the observed in-
crease in frequency of micturition, together
with the decrease in vesical size after sympa-
thetic denervation, would tend to support
the views of those who believe that the
hypogastrics are not only the “‘filling”’
nerves of the bladder but are antagonistic in
action to the parasympathic outflow (8, 14,
16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21).
Effect in the dog—Most investigators (2,
22, 23, 24, 25, 26) have found that section of
the hypogastric nerves in the dog caused no
interference with normal micturition. A few,
such as Creevy (7), and Jacobson (27), have
noted changes in vesical function after
division of sympathetic nerves to the blad-
der. Removal of the hypogastrics, according
to Creevy, produced a slight, transitory in-
crease in frequency of micturition while
Jacobson observed a prompt increase in
vesical tone and an equally prompt decrease
in bladder capacity. The vesical tone in
Jacobson’s dogs gradually decreased but
never entirely returned to normal; func-
tionally, however, he was unable to distin-
guish this type of preparation from the
normal bladder as the ability to void was in
no way impaired by the operation.
Effect in man.—Section of the hypogastric
nerves in man at first was done on the
premise (28) that the internal sphincter of
the bladder had its motor innervation
through the sympathetic nervous system,
and that it became hypertonic owing to the
imbalance caused by the removal of the
parasympathetic inhibition. One of the dif-
ficulties with this theory has been that no
conclusive evidence has ever been forthcom-
ing to prove that the internal sphincter was
innervated any differently than the re-
300
mainder of the detrusor muscle (29).
Nevertheless, support was given to the
theory of the antagonistic action of the two
systems by Learmonth’s investigations in
man. In a series of papers (20, 30, 31) he
reported that, following presacral neurec-
tomy, both the muscles of the trigone and
the internal sphincter relaxed. Learmonth
concluded from his studies that sympa-
thetic influences act as a continuous brake
on contractions of the detrusor and, that
following lesions of the sacral nerves, pre-
sacral neurectomy aided in the restoration
of the functioning automatic bladder.
Other workers (32, 33, 34, 35, 36), too,
have reported beneficial results from sympa-
thetic denervation of the bladder in cases of
neurogenic vesical dysfunction. In para-
plegic patients with cervical or upper
thoracic spinal cord injuries, anterior
rhizotomy of the lower thoracic through
the first sacral roots resulted in an increased
bladder capacity (37). Likewise, Kuhn (38)
reported that section of the same anterior
spinal nerve roots in patients with hyper-
tonic bladders reduced detrusor activity
sufficiently to reclassify the bladders to that
of the reflex type.”
Van Duzen (40), on the other hand, be-
lieved that presacral neurectomy was
definitely harmful to the patient. Within a
period of two months after the operation
evidence of urinary retention, paralysis of
the trigone muscles, and a spastic internal
sphincter appeared.
Most investigators (1, 2, 10, 14, 28, 41,
42, 438, 44, 45, 46) have concluded that
sympathetic denervation of the bladder has
no effect in man, either on micturition or on
any other bladder activity. They have dis-
carded the idea that there is an antagonistic
action between the two divisions of the
autonomic nervous system and have de-
cided that the parasympathetic components
are the only ones that have any real influence
on bladder function.
REFERENCES
(1) Hermpuresr, R. F., Freeman, L. W., and
Wiipr, N. J. Journ. Neurosurg. 5: 154.
1948.
2 The first sacral nerve contributes few, if any,
motor fibers to the urinary bladder (39).
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, NO. 9.
(2) BeartigE, J. Canad. Med. Assoc. Journ.
23: 71. 1930.
(8) Nawrocxr, F., and SkasirscHewsky, B.
Arch. Ges. Physiol. 48: 335. 1891.
(4) Barrineton, F. J. F. Quart. Journ. Exp.
Physiol. 9: 261. 1915.
Ibid. 8: 33. 1915.
Proc. Roy. Soc. Med. 25: 557. 1931.
CreEvy, C.D. Arch. Neurol. and Psychiat.
34: 777. 1935.
(8) Exurorr, T. R. Journ. Physiol. 35: 367.
1907.
(9) Lanewortuy, O. R., and Kors, L.C. Anat.
Rec. 71: 249. 1938.
(10) Laneworrny, O. R., and Murpny, E. L.
Journ. Comp. Neurol. 71: 487. 1939.
(11) Laneworruy, O. R., Reeves, D. L., and
Tauser, E.S. Brain 57: 266. 1934.
(12) Hearn, E.S8., and Incrersouit, EK. H. Journ.
Urol. 61: 1037. 1949.
(13) InerrRsout, E. H., Jonus, L. L., and Hecre,
E. 8S. Journ. Urol., 72: 178. 1954.
(14) Giuurnan, L. A. Clinical aspects of the auto-
nomic nervous system. Boston, 1954.
(15) Auprrs, B. J. Clinical neurology, 2d ed.
Philadelphia, 1950.
(16) Courrapn, D., and Guyon, J. F. Comp.
Rend. Soc. Biol. 10: 618. 1895.
. Arch. Physiol. Norm. et Path. 8:
622. 1896.
(18) Fernsipes, E. G. Brain 40: 149. 1917.
(19) Lanatry, J. N. Journ. Physiol. 27: 237.
1901.
(20) Learmontu, J. R. Brain 54: 147. 1981.
(21) Srrone, O. S., and Enwyn, A. Human
neuroanatomy, 3d ed. Baltimore, 1953.
(22) Lanauey, L. L., and WuiresipE, J. A. Fed.
Proc. 9: 74. 1950.
Journ. Neurophysiol. 14: 147. 1951.
Comp. Rend. Acad. Sci.
(5)
(6)
(7)
(17)
(23)
(24) LaANNEGRAcE, M.
114: 789. 1892.
(25) McCauauan, J. M., and Hrrsuny, J. H.
Journ. Missouri State Med. Assoc. 31:
417. 1934.
(26) Mosso, A., and Preniacant, P. Arch. Ital.
Biol. 1: 97. 1882.
(27) Jacopson, C. HE. Journ. Urol. 58: 670. 1945.
(28) Nespir, R. M., and Gorpon, W. G. Journ.
Amer. Med. Assoc. 117: 1935. 1941.
(29) McCrea, E. D., and MacDonatp, A. D.
Brit. Journ. Urol. 6: 119. 1934.
(30) Learmontu, J. R. Proc. Roy. Soc. Med.,
Pty 1) 25: 552) 19308
(31) LearmontH, J. R., and Braascu, W. F.
Surg. Gynec. and Obst. 51: 494. 1930.
(32) CurprHam, J.G. Journ. Urol. 37: 148. 1937.
(83) Davis, A. A. Brit. Med. Journ. 2: 1, 1934.
(84) Hueeins, C., Wautkmr, A. E., and Noonan,
W. T. Jour. Urol. 41: 696. 1939.
(85) Munro, D. New England Journ. Med. 233:
453. 1945.
(36) Peary, F. L., and Straus, B. Journ. Urol.
39: 645. 1938.
(87) Freeman, L. W., and Hermpuraer, R. F.
Journ. Neurosurg. 4: 435. 1947.
SEPTEMBER 1956
(38) Kuun, R.A. Journ. Neurosurg. 6: 320. 1949.
(39) INGERSOLL, E. H., Jonss, L. L., and Hearse,
E. 8S. Virginia Med. Month. 83: 23. 1956.
(40) Van Duzen, R. E. South. Med. Journ. 25:
964. 1932.
(41) DENNy-Brown, D. E. New England Journ.
Med. 215: 647. 1936.
(42) Emmett, J. L. Proc. Staff Meeting Mayo
Clin. 21: 102. 1946.
(43) Lanewortuy, O. R.,
Kors, L. C., and
NOTES AND NEWS
501
Lewis, L. G. Physiology of micturition.
Baltimore, 1940.
(44) Marsuaut, S. F., and Kennepy, R. J.
Surg. Clin. North America 25: 518. 1945.
(45) Mrrrowsky, A. M., ArNoxtp, M., SCHEIBERT,
C. D., and Hincury, T. R. Journ. Neuro-
surg. 7: 33. 1950.
(46) Vorts, H. C., and Lanpes, H. E. Arch.
Neurol. and Psychiat. 44: 118. 1940.
ACADEMY MEMBERS RECEIVE HONORS
Dr. Richard K. Cook, National Bureau of
Standards, formerly senior editor of this JoURNAL,
has been elected President of the Acoustical
Society of America for the term 1957-58. Dr.
Cook’s work in the physics of sound is nationally
known. He is currently spending a year’s leave
of absence from NBS to conduct research at the
Bell Telephone Laboratories.
* * * * *
Dr. Ladislaus L. Marton, of the National
Bureau of Standards and WAS, has been elected
to the Royal Academy of Belgium in recognition
of his contributions to science. Dr. Marton will
fill the vacancy left by the Dutch physicist, J.
Verschaffelt, who died last year. He will be the
only American physicist among the foreign
members of the Academy.
The Royal Academy of Belgium recognizes
outstanding achievement in science, literature,
the arts, and other fields. Membership is limited
to 90 regular members, 150 foreign members, and
30 correspondents. The Division of Sciences,
to which Dr. Marton was elected, has 15 regular
members, 5 correspondents, and 25 foreign
members.
Dr. Marton has received international recog-
nition for his work in electron optics, particularly
relative to the development of the electron
microscope. He is chief of the Electron Physics
Section of the Atomic and Radiation Physics
Division at the Bureau. This section does re-
search on various aspects of the physics of the
free electron. The work includes electron scatter-
ing in solids, electron interference, electron polari-
zation, electron optics, and applications of some
of these phenomena to other measuring tech-
niques.
Dr. Francis B. Silsbee, chief of the Electricity
and Electronics Division at the National Bureau
of Standards, has been awarded the Department
of Commerce Gold Medal for Exceptional Service.
The award recognizes his ‘‘outstanding contribu-
tions to the fields of electricity, electrical engineer-
ing, and electrical measurement.”
Since 1946 Dr. Silsbee has directed the Bureau
work in electricity, which concerns the develop-
ment, improvement, and dissemination of the
standards of measurement for electrical quantities
and the study of properties of materials that are
important in electricity and magnetism. In 1954
the Bureau’s basic electronic research and de-
velopment programs were placed under his
direction.
Dr. Silsbee’s work in his 45 years at NBS has
covered a wide range. In 1916, working in the
newly discovered phenomenon of superconduc-
tivity at very low temperatures, he suggested a
theoretical relationship between the values of
critical currents and magnetic fields which is
widely known today as the ‘Silsbee Hypothesis”’.
During World War I, he led NBS work on the
development of spark plugs, magnetos and other
aircraft ignition parts. In World War II, he was
in charge of the later phases of the development
of a special bomb director and guided research
on the lighting hazards to nonmetallic aircraft.
Dr. Silsbee was born in Lawrence, Mass., in
1889 and received his B.S. in Electrical Engineer-
ing from Massachusetts Institute of Technology
in 1910, and the following year he was awarded
his master’s degree there. In 1915 he received
his Ph.D. in Physics from Harvard University.
He first joined the NBS staff in 1911 and was
made Chief of the Electrical Instruments Section
in 1939. In 1946 he was named to his present
position.
302
He is a past president of Washington Academy
of Sciences and of the Philosophical Society of
Washington; a fellow of the American Physical
Society, the American Institute of Electrical
Engineers, and the American Association for the
Advancement of Science; and has written numer-
ous technical papers in his field.
* * * * *
Dr. Galen B. Schubauer, chief of the Fluid
Mechanics Section of the Mechanics Division of
the National Bureau of Standards, has been
awarded the Department of Commerce Gold
Medal for Exceptional Service. The award recog-
nizes his ‘‘outstanding contributions to basic
aerodynamics over the past 20 years.”
Dr. Schubauer is known internationally for
his contributions to the field of aerodynamics.
His work on turbulence and air flow and in the
development of instruments for measuring these
phenomena has been vital in the development of
modern high speed aircraft. Among the recent
projects of Dr. Schubauer’s section was a study
of the accuracy of the hot-wire anemometer at
speeds up to twice the speed of sound. The in-
strument has been basic in subsonic air speed
research but it was not known whether it could
be used at supersonic levels.
Born in Sparrows Point, Md., in 1904, Dr.
Schubauer received his B.A. degree from Penn-
sylvania State College in 1928, M.S. from Cali-
fornia Institute of Technology in 1930, and
Ph.D. from John Hopkins University in 1934.
He joined the NBS staff in 1929 and was made
Chief of the Aerodynamics Section in 1946. In
1953 he was appointed to his present position
when the Hydraulics and Aerodynamics Sections
were combined.
He holds Institute of Aeronautical Sciences
and Washington Academy of Science awards for
his work. In addition to being a member of these
two organizations Dr. Schubauer also belongs
to the American Physical Society, Sigma Pi
Sigma, Phi Kappa Phi, and Sigma Xi.
* * * * *
Dr. Lewis V. Judson, chief of the Length Sec-
tion of the Optics and Metrology Division of the
National Bureau of Standards, has been given
the Department of Commerce Silver Medal for
Meritorious Service. The Award recognizes Dr.
Judson’s ‘extremely competent performance for
38 years in the field of length standards and
precise length determinations.”
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, NO. 9 ,
Dr. Judson is custodian of the National
Standard of Length. In addition he is in charge
of calibrations of measuring tapes, graduation
and calibration of precision circles, research in
thermal expansion of solids and interferometry
in length measurements. The development of
sieve specifications and calibrations; testing of
haemacytometer chambers and accompanying
cover glasses and surveyor’s leveling rods: and
calibration of many other precise measuring in-
struments are also under his supervision.
Dr. Judson joined the NBS staff in 1917 and
was made Chief of the Length Section the follow-
ing year. He is the author of some 60 articles in
his field.
Born in Plainville, Conn., in 1893, Dr. Judson
graduated from Clark University in 1916 and
received a M.A. in physics there in the following
year. He was awarded his Ph.D. in physics from
Johns Hopkins University in 1925.
He is a member of the Philosophical Society
of Washington, the Washington Academy of
Sciences, the American Physical Society, the
Optical Society of America, the American Con-
gress of Surveying and Mapping, the American
Geophysical Union, the American Society for
Testing Materials, the American Association
for the Advancement of Science, and the Société
Francaise de Physique.
* * * * *
Dr. Herbert F. Schiefer, a textile physicist in
the Organic and Fibrous Materials Division of the
National Bureau of Standards, has been awarded
the Department of Commerce Gold Medal for
Exceptional Service. The award recognizes his
“outstanding contributions to textile science and
technology.”
Dr. Schiefer is an internationally known
authority in the textile field. In addition to his
contributions at NBS, he served as technical
advisor in 1950 to the Economic Cooperation
Administration in Europe and in 1955 to the
International Cooperation Administration in
Asia. He was a delegate to the 1955 International
Wool Research Conferences in Australia. In
1945 he served as scientific consultant to the
Department of the Army in the first survey of
the German textile industry after World War II.
He took leave of absence from the Bureau in
1951-52 to serve as director of research and
graduate instruction in the School of Textiles of
North Carolina State College.
SEPTEMBER 1956
Dr. Schiefer has developed and invented many
devices for testing the properties of fibers, yarns,
and fabrics and a number are widely used by
the textile industry today. He received the Harold
DeWitt Smith Memorial Medal in 1950 from
the American Society for Testing Materials for
his pioneering work in textile research. His recent
work has been concerned with new techniques
for obtaining stress-strain relationships in yarns
subjected to rapid impact loading and_ the
measurment of a new basic property of textile
fibers, the velocity. This
property is of practical importance in the design
of textiles for safety lines, parachute webbing,
limiting breaking
tire cord, and flexible body armor.
Dr. Schiefer came to the Bureau in 1929 from
Des Moines University where he was head of the
mathematics and physics department. He was
educated at the University of Michigan, re-
ceiving his degree in Civil Engineering in 1924,
his M.S. in Science in 1925, and a Ph.D. in
astrophysics in 1928. During his last four years
at Michigan he was instructor of engineering
mathematics and astronomy.
Dr. Schiefer has written some 100 scientific
papers and technical reports and holds three
patents. He is a member of Tau Beta Pi, the
Fiber Society (former president), Washington
Philosophical Society, Washington Academy of
Science, American Society for Testing Materials,
NOTES AND NEWS
305
and is a fellow of the British Textile Institute
and the American Physical Society.
* * * * *
Herbert C. Vacher, head of the metallographic
and X-ray diffraction laboratory, at the National
Bureau of Standards, has been awarded the De-
partment of Commerce Silver Medal for Meri-
torious Service for his contributions to the field
of metallurgy.
A NBS staff member for 30 years, Mr. Vacher
has conducted important research and written a
number of articles on the mechanical properties
and structures of metals and alloys. He also
acts as a consultant in the mechanical metallurgy
laboratory on projects which involve correlating
the mechanical properties with the structure of
metals. Mr. Vacher’s earlier work at NBS in-
volved the determination of gases in metals and
physical chemistry of gas-metal equilibria. Such
information is important in the manufacture of
steel.
Born in Greensberg, La., in 1901, Mr. Vacher
received his H.M. degree from the Texas School
of Mines in 1922 and a M.S. in metallurgy in
1926 from the University of Nevada where he
studied under a Challoner Fellowship.
He is a member of the American Institute of
Mining and Metallurgical Engineers, the Ameri-
can Society for Metals, American Crystallo-
graphic Association, and the Washington Acad-
emy of Sciences.
ee
ODDITIES OF NATURE
Among the most curious of insects are the
which belong to the moth family.
)
““‘bagworms,’
The bagworm is a caterpillar. The female
spends her entire life in a cocoonlike silken bag
into whose texture she interweaves bits of leaves
from the host plant. The bag grows as the worm
grows, and in local species late im summer it be-
comes as much as 2 inches long. The bags of some
tropical species are more than 7 inches long.
The female remains wingless, and the bag in
which she spends her life is attached to a twig
of the host plant. At the end of summer she lays
within the silken sack a mass of eggs which hatch
late in spring. The males metamorphose into
winged insects.
Dr. Frank Morton
Jones, of Wilmington,
Del., has just presented to the Smithsonian
Institution one of the world’s outstanding col-
lections of these insects. Sixty years were spent
in assembling this collection, which consists of
4,400 specimens. Of these 1,174 are adult, winged
males, 2,133 are bags showing the many forms
resulting from differences in food plants, and
830 are immature forms. There are also 1,000
microscope slides of important structures of
these insects.
Bagworms are nearly worldwide in distribu-
tion. In this country they are chiefly pests of
ornamental trees and shrubs, and are especially
destructive to arborvitae. They are preyed upon
by a number of other insects. The collection
includes 273 such insect-parasites.
304 JOURNAL OF THE
One of earth’s most fantastic animals—the
three-horned chameleon of East Africa—has
just been added to the reptile collections of the
Smithsonian Institution. It is sometimes de-
scribed as a replica, in miniature, of the ancient
monster dinosaur T'riceratops, which has been
extinct for about 75,000,000 years. The two,
of course, are in no direct way related. The three-
horned chameleon grows to a length exceeding
12 inches. The curious horns, an inch to an inch
and a half long, protrude from the nose and be-
tween the eyes of the males. Females are hornless.
These chameleons are extremely pugnacious
animals and sometimes use their horns in fights
to the finish. At times the contests develop into
tedious pushing matches, with the horns inter-
locked. At other times a really vigorous fighter
will dispose of a weaker adversary in a few
minutes. Males are brilliantly colored with blues,
ereens, and yellows. Uganda natives are terrified
by the demoniacal-looking animals, which
actually are harmless to man. The popular super-
stition is that if one happens to see one of these
lizards when it is enraged and hissing the person
will die in a few days. The curse of the chameleon
may be partly averted, it is believed, by capturing
and roasting it, and then wearing part of the
burned body as a talisman. Still the unfortunate
person is supposedly sure to die quite young.
The creature is most abundant in arid areas
covered with low shrubs. It is an aerial acrobat
and can leap as much as 2 feet from branch to
branch. The chameleon has a prehensile tail,
like that of various monkeys, and with the tip
of this tail alone it can hang from a branch. It
sits motionless for hours at a time and feeds
almost exclusively on flies, butterflies, beetles,
and bees which may come within reach of its
WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 46, No. 9 .
darting tongue. The creature is a consummate
bluffer. Apparently it never tries to hide or run
when confronted with an enemy. Instead it
tries to frighten the foe, including man, by in-
flating its body so that the otherwise loose skin
is drawn taut.
* * * * *
Birds that hold fencing tournaments are the
big-billed toucans of Barro Colorado Island, the
Smithsonian Institution’s tropical preserve in
Gatun Lake, Panama Canal Zone. They fence
with their formidable beaks but seem careful
not to hurt one another. One scientist who studied
Barro Colorado’s bird life described the birds
as follows:
“T saw fourteen toucans scattered about in
a big leafless tree in the center of the jungle.
Two appeared to be fencing. They stood in one
spot and fenced with their bills for a half minute
or so, rested, and were at it again. Presently
they flew off into the forest and then I noticed
two others that had now begun to fence. Then
one of these flew away, and the remaining one
picked a new opponent and fell to fencing again.
... They did not move about much while fencing,
although sometimes one climbed above the other
as though to gain an advantage. They fenced
against each other’s beaks and never seemed to
strike at the body. There was a fairly rapid give
and take... the bills clattermg loudly against
each other.”’
These fencing toucans are among the more
conspicuous birds of the island, particularly be-
cause of their call—a shrill, froglike ‘cree,’ which
is repeated over and over again and can be heard
half a mile away. The call is most frequent in the
morning and late in the afternoon, but it stops
abruptly at sunset.
Simplicity is the seal of truth. Nature 1s wonderfully simple, and the char-
acteristic mark of a childlike simplicity is stamped upon all that is true and
noble in nature.—SENDIvoGIuS (1650)
Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences
[PRORTATEES BCR CUO Ieee ss R. E. Gipson, Applied Physics Laboratory
PER ESTACTUC-CLECE ON ais oars a recetciereisicieTsnes ns sane eres ns Wiiuram W. Rusey, Geological Survey
IS ECHELUG Ue occ «winters acaie Gos e ee eatee Heinz Specut, National Institutes of Health
FATES UTE: ores ee Howarp S. RAPPLEYE, Coast and Geodetic Survey (Retired)
LNPOTHEO EE oo 8 ES SEI OOH RIG CHOLES Here OCT eee eee
Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications
Harawp A. Reuper, U.S. National Museum
Elected Members of the Board of Managers:
MoMlanwanyil Gon apa esse cy tyawo oe taeeisieiacveeere cae A. T. McPuHerson, A. B. Gurnny
MQHIAT UAT Vel QOSt ie Aare ooyc Sa sl sistie reese W. W. Rusey, J. R. SwaLien
PROM PIN ATIV A GO Os ee. eic son's, syauttens siieleiaen sie Frangois N. FRENKIEL, F. L. CamPBELL
Board of Managers...... All the above officers plus the Vice Presidents and the Editor
[OE DOT As 6 Sey 6 eee CueEsTER H. Paces, National Bureau of Standards (EM 2-4040)
Associate Editors....... RonaLp BamrorD, Howarp W. Bonn, ImmMaNnuEL HsTERMANN
RGOCUILVEN COMIMIULEE a.<.0 12 cee ei o's « w egece soa Hoven R. E. Gipson (chairman), W. W. Rusey,
Hetnz Specut, H.S. Rappieye, A. B. GuRNEY
Committee on Membership.......... Louris R. Maxwe.u (chairman), Naval Ordnance
Laboratory (HE 4-7100), Gzroraz ANnastos, W. H. Avery, Rocur W. Curtis,
CHURCHILL EISENHART, GEOFFREY Epsaut, J. H. McMILuEN
Commitiee on Meetings.......... A.M. Stonz (chairman), Applied Physics Laboratory
(JU 9-7700), Poitip H. ABetson, Kenneta S. Coxe, Leon F. Curtis, J. WALLACE
Joyce, THomas J. Kruyt1an, Constantin C. Nixrrororr, T. D. STEwarT
Committee on Monographs:
ROMMANUAT LOOT. aecidis ocayscse sig ale's soie seis s Harautp A. Renpper, WiLL1AM A. Dayton
PROMOAMUATVALIOS «cr. sche rereeiaeie lee esas Dean B. Cowizn, Josepu P,. HE. Morrison
Tha [einer on OR ae aan Norse Oe ec eo cia ace tee
Committee on Awards of Scientific Achievement
Int C. ScHOONOVER (general chairman), National Bureau of Standards (EM 2-4040)
For Biological Sciences...... Micuas. J. Petczar (chairman), University of Mary-
land (WA 7-3800), James M. Hunpiey, Wituim W. SmitH, JozrL WARREN,
R. B. Withrow
For Engineering Sciences...... ARNOLD Scorr (chairman), National Bureau of
Standards (HM 2-4040), Frank A. Biperstein, J. M. Catpweii, MicuarL
GoupseEre, T. J. Hickutny, Paut A. Smrru
For Physical Sciences...... C. R. Nauser (chairman), George Washington Univer-
sity (ST 3-0250), Howarp W. Bonp, ImManurEL EsteRMaNN, PETER Kina,
. Marton, Exxtiott Montro.u, 'E. H. Vestine
For Teaching of Sctence...... B. D. Van Evera (chairman), George Washington
University (ST 3-0250), RonaLp Bamrorp, HERMAN Branson, KEITH JOHNSON,
Howarb OWENS, MARGARET PATTERSON, B. W. SrtreRLy
Committee on Grants-in-Aid for Research
W.J. Hamer (chairman), National Bureau of Standards (EM 2-4040), W. R. WEDEL,
H. W. WELLS
Committee on Policy and Planning
Frank M. Serzuer (chairman), U. S. National Museum (NA 8-1810)
onJanuaryalO5 (ay cotiac meen cierie otec idistne trans Joun E. Grar, RaymMonp J. SEEGER
MowanuaryAlG5S. «6. .ccscee ns sce ones ances Francis M. Deranporr, F. M. SETZLER
Momanwary: 1959). «cada asa secswis ose ae MarcGaret Pittman, WALDO L. ScumitT
Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent
ArcHiIBALD T, McPHERSON (chairman), National Bureau of Standards (EM 2-4040)
Ite denoieiaie TGV iieee Solos on.deaeadsis SA cmae An Ira B. Hansen, WiLt1am J. YOUDEN
powanuaty L958 ce aveise necsh cselene faves « ArRcHIBALD T. McPuHerson, W. T. Reap
MOR AnUuaTy LISD ieee ccs soeieie ab rciieeiactn snes cies oe Pau. R. MILuer, Leo ScHUBERT
Commiitee on Science Education (Academy representation on Joint Board for Improve-
ment of Science Education)...... RayMonp J. SEEGER (chairman), National Science
Foundation (ST 3-2140), ArNoLp H. Scorr, Ke1tH JoHNSON, Wann H. MaARrsHALL,
Joun K. Taytor
MLE DUCBENLALLDeLOTCOMN CLO; MACTALHAGtS anette ieee A. Nguson SAYRE
Committee of Auditors...... Epwarp WicHrrs (chairman), National Bureau of Stand-
ards (EM 2-4040), M. C. Henprrson, P. H. Hernzp
Commutteciofeliellensian vnc spe Neniehin oot ic wi sioesieaiaiovais evad stein
Committee on Ways and Means...... Francois N. FRENKIEL Chaiman)s apeed Physics
Laboratory (JU 9-7100), S, F. Buaxe, Pauu H. Ornsmr, W. T. Reap, B. F. ScrrsNER
Committee on Public Relations da tk A. i Manan (chairman), Applied Ph sics Labora-
tory (JU 9-7700), H. PECHT, HowarD Bonp
CONTENTS
Puysics.—Incomplete equilibrium and temperature measurement. C.
M. FHERZFELD Ss 2). acti ele eis ce eon Sse eee eso eee Se cee eee 269
ENnTomMoLoGy.—Type specimens of mosquitoes in the United States
National Museum: III, The genera Anopheles and Chagasia (Dip-
tera, Culicidae). ALAN STONE and KENNETH L. KNIGHT......... 276
Zootogy.—Some polychaete worms of the families Hesionidae, Syllidae,
and Nereidae from the east coast of North America, West Indies,
and Gulf of Mexico. Marian H. PETTIBONE................... 281
NematToLocy.—Paratylenchus projectus, new species (Nematoda, Crico-
nematidae), with a key to the species of Paratylenchus. W. R.
JENKIN 05 6 foi Sots ous Prekede hls cla PERE Ne aeae ote aie 296
PuysioLocy.—Effect of sympathetic denervation of the urinary bladder
in animals and man. E. H. InGERsoiu, L. L. Jones, and E. S.
~~) ;
i i wf
VOLUME 46 ae October 1956 NUMBER 10
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
cum)
a
ll
ie
fl
feenecereeccereete
Published Monthly by the
fast tN GT ON ACADEMY OF SC) Fr BONG Bes
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: Cuzstar H. Pacn, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RoNALD Bamrorp, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL ESTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (8) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL 1s issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3344 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges——Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the ProcEEDINGS should be sent to HaraLtp A. ReHapER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subscription Rates for the JOURNAL.—Per Year............-...... ++. $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ — 1
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10. 00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.) . soo tepUI0) 0.60
Vol. 23 to current, vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JourNau (vol. 1 to vol. 45, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $378.50.
Monoararpu No.1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
INDEX to JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS.......................... $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete......................-.0000- $25.00
Single’volumes; unbound faiyxchacs so sce e ae Monte Sa eee ae eee eee 2.00
Single numbersiyiacco agen eee Mon ee Te eee Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’’ and
oe to the Treasurer, H. S. Rappers, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
D.C.
Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Sprecutr, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 46
October 1956
No. 10
PHYSICS.— Transients in signal analysis. EpiraH L. R. Coruiss, National Bureau
of Standards. (Communicated by C. H. Page.)
(Received August 21, 1956)
Every signal analyzing system has some
limiting inertia in its response; even in the
ideal limit a certain amount of inertia is
required to produce the needed degree of
frequency or power level resolution. The
error introduced may be represented by a
limiting volume in a space whose Cartesian
coordinates are frequency, time, and either
power or a function of power. The transient
error then becomes a least volume in this
space, within which no information about
the signal can be found. The experimenter
cannot eliminate the transient error, but by
choice of experimental conditions the dis-
tribution of errors can be controlled.
Regardless of whether a frequency or a
time-correlation analysis of a signal is un-
dertaken, the results are observed as output
power levels. Hence the ability to resolve a
change in power levels limits the discrimina-
tion that can be achieved for changes in
frequency or intervals of time. The quanti-
tative extent to which power level resolu-
tion affects resolution along the coordi-
nates of frequency and time can be found
from the natural properties of the analyzer.
The discussion here is based on the common
type of system whose behavior is described
by a second-degree differential equation
with constant coefficients.
In a previous paper (Corliss, 1955) we
discussed the relationship between ‘“‘figure
of merit,” Q, observation time interval, Az,
and power level discrimination, a, when the
behavior of a linear series-resonant filter was
‘This work was part of a program of basic
instrumentation research and development sup-
ported by ONR, AEC, AFOSR, and NBS.
305
adjusted to satisfy the condition that an
analyzer should be able to change its indica-
tion by a factor of at least e~* during the
time interval Ar. From these considerations
it followed that
2QrfoA
(ue AO (1)
a
on?
and AjA; > =. (2)
Qa
Given that Az is the brefest duration of
any signal component to be observed, Equa-
tion (1) shows how the Q of a filter must be
adjusted as a function of its tuning in order
to distribute the transient error uniformly
over the frequency range.
Equations (1) and (2) also provide a
measure of the largest number of band-pass
filters that can be overlapped on adjacent
channels to yield meaningful information
about a rapidly changing signal.
Over a range of frequencies Af = f. — fi
surrounding fo, the frequency to which the
filter is tuned, the change in filter response
does not exceed the smallest detectable
power level change. For a set of filters over-
lapped at these hmits of power resolution,
the limiting number of filters yielding mean-
ingful information between f; and f;, the
high- and low-frequency range limits, re-
spectively, is given by
soe Ie 9 a
< Fe : to = zt
fr — fo).
Ay aris Je ot
(Oi) =: l
(The limits yield mn, — 1 rather than n, be-
306 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
cause one-half of a filterextends beyond each
end of the frequency range as defined here.)
A common practice in using parallel
channels of band-pass filters is to overlap
adjacent filters at their half-power points, so
that their integrated response has a flat
characteristic. For this condition, Af =
fo/@Q and the number of filters becomes
fi me fo 3d 2rAr(f; = fo) P
> Ih
Ee Af a
The ratio of this number to the maximum
usable number of filters depends only on the
power level resolution, 1.e.,
cc
If we are willing to take a “‘yes-no”’ type
of analysis from the filter, then for a set of
filters overlapped at their half-power points
we can choose as a compatible condition
that a = In 2, 1e., the power declines at
least to one-half its initial value during the
observation interval At and we get as the
number of filters for this case
2nAr( fi = i)
m—-1l= -
In 2
Under these conditions n, invites compari-
son with the number of “bits” available in a
Q
SCANNING FIGURE OF
RATE MERIT FOR
SELECTIVITY
2 fo Nwe
NO SCAN) |< =—3——
UNIFORM
SCAN
df .
aie
; LOGARITHMIC
SCAN Ont
a In(f,/f att) ©
(no-1)
NUMBER OF FILTERS
OVERLAPPED AT
HALF-POWER POINTS
2 TAT) (f- fy)
a
a
2VeTatty 7%) (Vo)
VOL. 46, No. 10
given bandwidth during the time interval
Ar.
By scanning the tuning of a filter, the
spectrum of a signal can be studied by means
of a single metering channel. When one
scans by sweeping the tuning of a filter over
the frequency range to be covered, the filter
shows a rather complicated response.? One
can, however, obtain quantitative results
from simple theory by recognizing that an
additional multiplicative factor must be
used to account for the spreading of the
filter’s transient response caused by scan-
ning. The spreading occurs because the in-
coming signal beats with the ringing of the
filter. In the following discussion, the spread-
ing factor is omitted.
The functioning of a scanning filter can be
compared with a parallel channel set of band-
pass filters by calculating the effective num-
ber of band-pass filters that will provide the
same resolution as the scanning filter.
Various types of scanning functions can
be used depending upon the nature of the
selectivity characteristic desired. If one
wishes to have a constant Q (constant per-
centage bandwidth), the condition that
the transient error is to be uniform through-
out the range of frequencies swept over can
be satisfied by scanning at a rate propor-
tional to the square of the instantaneous
2 Lewis, 1932; Hok, 1948; Barber and Ursell,
1948; Marique, 1952; Herrero, 1953; Batten et al.,
1954.
K At
SCANNING OBSERVATION
PARAMETER INTERVAL
In(fy/ fy) 1)
T Vf, ‘27 In(f,/fp)
A\ | a ri
SV aCI/f,- 174)
ert ntee
Valt/fp= 17) 4) T
I/fp- 1/4,
oa yy Me
OcTOBER 1956
center tuning of the filter. When one wishes
to scan through the frequency range with a
filter whose bandwidth is a constant num-
ber of cycles per second, this implies a Q
directly proportional to the center tuning
of the filter and a uniform transient error
results from scanning at a constant rate,
independent of frequency. A commercial
scanning filter, the Panoramic Analyzer,
sweeps logarithmically over its frequency
range; when it is adjusted to uniform tran-
sient response, its instantaneous Q is pro-
portional to the square root of its imstan-
taneous tuning. This gives a range of Q
with frequency which is intermediate be-
tween constant frequency bandwidth and
constant percentage bandwidth.
The accompanying table (p. 306) summa-
rizes the results of calculations on the basis
of a uniform distribution of transient power
level discrimination error, i.e., @ = con-
stant. The table gives Q, the figure of merit,
k, the scanning rate parameter, and 1,
the equivalent number of filters overlapped
at their half-power points, in terms of the
scanning time 7, the scanning bandwidth
limits f, and f,, and the time-attenuation
parameter a. To facilitate adjustment of
the response time of an analyzer to the
least duration of any signal component to
be observed, the tabulation also includes
Ar, the observation time interval for a
single filter.
CORLISS: TRANSIENTS IN SIGNAL ANALYSIS
307
Similar considerations apply to the requi-
site integration times of correlation analyz-
ers. For a synchronous detector equipped
with an R-C integrator of time-constant 7,
the equivalent Q for a synchronous period
T is given by
=F
This result is due to Selgin (1951).
REFERENCES
BarBer, N. F., and URsELL, F. The response of a
resonant system to a gliding tone. Philos. Mag.
39: 345-361. 1948.
Barren, H. W., Jorgensen, R. A., MacNen,
A.B.,and Pererson,W.W. The response of a
Panoramic Analyzer to CW and pulse signals.
Proc. Inst. Radio Eng. 42: 948-956. 1954.
Coruss, Epira L. R. Limitations on rapid signal
analysis. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 45 (11):
359-360. 1955.
Herrero, M. C. Resonance phenomena in time-
varying circuits. Electronics Res. Lab. Stan-
ford Univ. Techn. Rep. no. 69. 1953.
Hox, G. Response of linear resonant systems to
excitation of a frequency varying linearly with
tame. Journ. Applied Phys. 19: 242-250. 1948.
Lewis, F. M. Vibration during acceleration
through a critical speed. Trans. Amer. Soc.
Mech. Eng. 54: 253-261. 1932.
MariquE, J. The response of RLC resonant
circuits to EMF of sawtooth varying frequency.
Proc. Inst. Radio Eng. 40: 945-961. 1952.
Sexier, Paun. Harmonic output of the synchro-
nous rectifier. Journ. Res. Nat. Bur. Standards
47: 427-432. 1951.
ee
NEWS OF MEMBERS
Dr. G. Arthur Cooper has been appointed head
curator of the Department of Geology of the U.S.
National Museum, Smithsonian Institution,
succeeding the late Dr. William F. Foshag. Dr.
Cooper will continue to serve as curator of in-
vertebrate paleontology and paleobotany. He is a
former senior editor of this JouRNAL.
Dr. Ferdinand G. Brickwedde, former secre-
tary of the WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES,
chief of the Heat and Power Division of the Na-
tional Bureau of Standards, is the new dean of the
College of Chemistry and Physics at Pennsyl-
vania State University.
308
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
PALEONTOLOGY .—An acanthodian fish from the lower Permian of Texas.
Davin H. Dunx ie, U.S. National Museum, and Smeraius H. Mamay, U. S.
Geological Survey.
(Received August 16, 1956)
While engaged in U. 8. Geological Survey
field work during the Spring of 1955 Mamay,
accompanied by E. L. Yochelson, collected
the complete remains of a small acanthodian
fish. The specimen and the details of its
occurrence seem of sufficient interest to
warrant a published account, particularly
since, insofar as we are aware, no other
complete specimens have yet been recorded
from the Permian of the Western Hemi-
sphere.
The fossil was found in an outcrop on the
Emily Irish land grant, approximately 18
miles south-southeast of Seymour, in Baylor
County, Tex. According to the revised
geologic map of Baylor County, published
in 1937 by the Texas Bureau of Economic
Geology, this outcrop lies within the bounda-
ries of the Belle Plains formation of the
lower Permian Wichita group. The exact
position of the fossiliferous horizon within
the Belle Plains formation is uncertain.
However, it is mapped as lying beneath an
unnamed limestone member which itself is
overlain by the Beaverburk limestone mem-
ber of Garrett, Lloyd, and Laskey (19380)
of the Belle Plains formation. From these
facts, the bed is presumed to be a correlative
of the Valera shale member, which occupies
a position at about the middle of the Belle
Plains formation in Coleman County, Tex.,
120 miles to the south.
On a cosmopolitan basis, fossil remains
referred to the Acanthodii present a maxi-
mum stratigraphic range of from upper
Silurian to lower Permian. Nielsen (1932)
has reported fragmentary acanthodian fos-
sils from the lower Permian of East Green-
land. However, the youngest previous record
of this group of fishes in the United States
known to us is from the Middle Pennsyl-
vanian: Acanthodes (Acanthoessus) marshi
Eastman (1902) and A. beecheri Eastman
1 Published with the permission of the Secre-
tary, Smithsonian Institution, and the Director,
U.S. Geological Survey.
(loc. cit.). The newly reported discovery
thus provides definite evidence that the dis-
tribution of this group of placodermatous
fishes is much the same in the Western
Hemisphere as in the Eastern.
The fish (U.S.N.M. no. 21318) is sealeless
and impressed as little more than a rusty
carbonaceous film on a dark grey and very
fine-grained shale. Recovered in part and
counterpart, the body outline and fin posi-
tions are clearly discernible, nonetheless,
and the gross characteristics of the form
can be determined.
As preserved, probably lacking some
small portion of the epichordal lobe of the
caudal fin, the specimen possesses an axial
length of about 37 mm and a maximum body
depth of 4.5 mm. A very slenderly fusiform
body habit is thus displayed. Reflecting the
general body shape, the head is also slender
and long; its length from snout to origin of
the pectoral spine apparently contained 414
times in the overall axial length of the
specimen. The position of the orbits are
exhibited and a trace of either the pre-
opercular or opercular sensory canal is pre-
served. Unfortunately, no other structures of
the skull or branchial apparatus can be
determined.
Fin positions are denoted by the impres-
sion of delicate spines which are extremely
narrow relative to their lengths. No tissue
of this armament remains but the impres-
sions show each to have been marked by one
longitudinal groove along the side. Dorsal
and anal fin spines are single, situated very
far posteriorly with the larger anal one
slightly in advance. The heterocercal caudal
fin is indicated to be moderately clefted and
with the hypochordal lobe appreciably
shorter than the dorsal body extension.
Neither pectoral nor pelvic spines are pre-
served in their entirety. The pectoral one,
however, is noticeably more robust and
presumably longer than the pelvic. The
latter is inserted nearer the pectoral ap-
pendage than to the anal.
VOL. 46, No. 10 -
OcTOBER 1956
DUNKLE AND
&
fn ee x
Fie. 1. Acanthodes sp. (
MAMAY:
U.S.N.M. no. 21318):
ACANTHODIAN FISH 309
ue
Photograph of specimen
as exposed in lateral view. X 4.
This combination of characteristics is that
of the genotypic material of Acanthodes
from the Rotliegende of Lebach, Germany.
While probably distinct from the Middle
Pennsylvanian forms from Illinois mentioned
above (Eastman, 1902, and Gregory, 1951),
no species assignment 1s made for this speci-
men from Texas. Woodward (1891) cus-
tomarily grouped all of the Acanthodes from
Lebach under A. bronni Agassiz. Watson
(1937) called attention to the wide dif-
ferences between the numerous series of
Lebach specimens. The variants, however,
were left unnamed because of either the
difficulty or impossibility of locating the
Agassiz types. Therefore there seems to be
no adequate basis, as yet, of evaluating
material falling within such a range of
variation, or for making a specific identifica-
tion of the presently discussed specimen.
The specimen was found in association
with an extremely rich and diverse terres-
trial floral assemblage, description of which
is currently being prepared for publication
by Mamay. The flora is dominated in large
part by pecopterid ferns of the type that
was prevalent in Late Pennsylvanian coal
swamps. However, various callipterids,
sphenopterids, T7ingia-like foliage and Gigan-
topteris americana White also constitute
conspicuous elements in the flora, with
lycopsids and sphenopsids showing only a
minor representation.
Although this shale bed contains a great
profusion of plant remains, animal fossils
are by contrast extremely rare. The most
common of these are estherid remains, which
occasionally occur in fairly rich local con-
centrations. However, the fish specimen
under discussion represents the only verte-
brate fossil found by the collectors although
perhaps as much as three cubic yards of
matrix was split and carefully examined;
furthermore, a large collection made in 1940
by Charles B. Read of the U. S. Geological
Survey at the same locality is completely
lacking in vertebrate remains.
Both the abundance and condition of the
plant material suggest deposition of the
enclosing sediments in relatively quiet, un-
disturbed, fresh or possibly brackish water.
Although the matrix is very friable and
must be handled carefully, it has been pos-
sible to expose many large and unbroken leaf
specimens. The state of preservation of this
delicate foliage discourages the possibility
that it could have been subjected to trans-
portation over considerable distances from
its original habitat, or to much agitation in
the waters in which it was deposited. It is
310
quite likely, then, that the fossiliferous bed
represents the bottom of a quiet pool or an
extremely sluggish stream.
REFERENCES
Some Carboniferous cestraciont
sharks. Bull. Mus. Comp.
Eastman, C. R.
and acanthodian
Zool. 39(3). 1902.
Garrett, M. M., Luoyp, A. M., and Laskey,
G. E. Texas Bureau of Economic Geology,
Map of Baylor County. 1930.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, NO. 10,
Greeory, J. T. A new specimen of Acanthodes
marshi. Bull. Southern California Acad. Sci.
50(1). 1951.
Nrevsen, E. Permo-Carboniferous fishes from
East Greenland. Medd. Grénland 86(3). 1932.
Watson, D. M.S. The acanthodian fishes. Philos.
Trans. Roy. Soe. London, ser. B., 228(549).
1937.
Woopwarp, A. 8S. Catalogue of fossil fishes in the
British Museum, pt. 2. 1891.
SEE
MAUNA LOA OBSERVATORY
A unique high-altitude observatory on the
slope of the Hawaiian volcano, Mauna Loa, was
dedicated on June 28 for joint use by the National
Bureau of Standards and the U. 8. Weather
Bureau. Located at a height of 11,134 feet in the
Tropics, where the upper atmosphere is very
clear and usually of low moisture content, the
new observatory offers special advantages for
many types of astronomical and upper-air
studies. It will make possible continuous observa-
tion of atmospheric phenomena with manned
instruments in place of the unmanned meteoro-
logical balloons that have been used for the most
part in high-altitude work.
The dedication ceremonies were arranged by
R. L. Fox of the Weather Bureau, and J. B. Cox,
president of the Geophysical Society of Hawaii,
acted as master of ceremonies. After introductory
remarks by Governor 8. W. King of Hawaii, J.
W. Steiner of the Weather Bureau gave some
highlights on the new facility. Ralph Stair and
C. C. Kiess of NBS then spoke on research po-
tentials of the observatory and its use in studying
the planet Mars. Prof. W. B. Steiger of the Uni-
versity of Hawaii commented on the importance
of the observatory to geophysics, and Mr. Fox
discussed the past, present, and future of the
observatory.
The new observatory is expected to provide
valuable data in a variety of fields. Its advantages
as a high-altitude observatory are due largely to
the fact that it is situated well above the bulk of
the dust and moisture contained in the earth’s
atmosphere. At the latitude of Hawaii a ‘‘trade
wind inversion layer” usually traps the dust and
moisture below about 8,000 feet. Other important
advantages are its ready accessibility and rela-
tively warm climate. Most of the other com-
parable observatory sites are buried in snow
during winter and part of the summer. Also, the
Mauna Loa observatory has the required alti-
tude without the ruggedness that imparts turbu-
lence to the surrounding air, and it is situated at
a key point for studying the huge air masses of the
tropics. The chief research results to be expected
are improved long-range weather forecasting and
greater knowledge of solar and atmospheric
radiation. Because the air masses of the Pacific
are responsible for much of the weather that
occurs in other parts of the world, data on these
air masses may make it possible to forecast con-
ditions in distant places.
There is some evidence that the ozone content
of the lower atmosphere in the Tropics is associ-
ated with the formation of the large low-pressure
areas that produce typhoons. Continuous meas-
urement of atmospheric ozone may thus be of
assistance in forecasting typhoons in advance.
The observatory also offers possibilities for
study of cosmic rays, total solar radiation, snow
crystals, air glows, and possibly radioactive
fallout. In July, C. C. Kiess and C. H. Corliss
of NBS began a study of the moisture content of
the planet Mars under the auspices of the Na-
tional Geographic Society. They used spectro-
scopic techniques to investigate the light re-
flected to the earth from Mars. The advantageous
location of the Mauna Loa observatory made it
possible to reduce the effect of the earth’s atmos-
phere on the planet’s spectrum. During the
coming year Ralph Stair of NBS expects to begin
a study at Mauna Loa on the distribution of the
spectral energy from the sun. Such information
will be of value in determining the effect of the
sun’s rays in connection with high-altitude
equipment, space flights, and man-made satel-
lites. This work will also furnish data on the solar
constant and information on solar intensities
which may be useful in many fields.
The observatory is a concrete-block structure
costing $25,000, and is situated about 2,500 feet
below the summit of the mountain. The building
contains five rooms in addition to a tower and a
broad open platform for observational use.
Present accommodations permit the use of the
buildings by a maximum of six observers at any
one time. A smaller structure was built at the
summit in 1951-52, but the limited observations
that were taken there were discontinued in 1954
OcToBER 1956
SOHNS: THE GENUS
HILARIA 311
BOTANY—The genus Hilaria (Gramineae). ERNEST R. Souns, U. S. National
Museum. (Communicated by Agnes Chase.)
(Received July 16, 1956)
Hilaria, named in honor of Auguste St.
Hilaire, was described by Humboldt, Bon-
pland, and Kunth (1816) with one species
(H. cenchroides) from Mexico. ‘‘Crescit in
planitie montana regni Mexicana, inter
Zelaya et Guanaxuato, locis subfrigidis, alt.
980 hexap. [Perennial] Floret Septembri.”’
According to the authors Hilaria_ re-
sembled Anthephora, after which it was
placed in taxonomic sequence. In the follow-
ing 50 years at least three new generic names
entered the literature, and all are considered
synonyms of Hilaria. Among these is the
genus Pleuraphis, established by Torrey
(1824), with one species (P. jameszz) in honor
of Dr. E. James. Some contemporary agros-
tologists recognize this genus as distinct
from Hilaria. Presl (1830) described the
genus Hevarrhena, with a single species (H.
cenchroides), which he placed in the tribe
Saccharinae, subtribe Hordeaceae. From his
description and plate 45, there is no doubt
that the species is H. cenchroides of Hum-
boldt, Bonpland and Kunth. In_ 1866,
Buckley described a new genus from Texas
(Schleropelta) with one species S. stolonifera.
The description applies to H. belangeri
(Anthephora belangert Steud.). By 1891, five
species and two varieties of Hilarza had been
described.
Taxonomists have differed in the assign-
ment of the genus to tribes and subtribes.
Steudel (1854) and Fournier (1886) put
Hilaria in the tribe Phalarideae. Bentham
(1881) divided the tribe Zoysieae into two
subtribes (Anthephoreae and Euzoysieae)
and placed the genus in the former. Bentham
and Hooker (1883) and Hackel (1887)
treated the genus as a member of the
Zoysieae. Beal (1896), Bews (1929), Conzatti
(1946), Hitchcock (1936) and Roshevits
(1937) regarded this genus as belonging to
the Zoysieae. Pilger (1954) placed Hilarza in
the subfamily Eragrostoideae, subtribe Lap-
pagineae Link. He also recognized Plewraphis
as a distinct genus.
I believe the genus is a very old and highly
specialized one and that it does not belong
in the tribe Zoysieae. It has no close generic
relationship with any known North or South
American genus. Cytogenetic techniques
may help indicate evolutionary tendencies
within the genus. For the present it is better
to keep the genus in the Zoysieae than to
erect a new tribe or subtribe. The accumula-
tion of cytogenetic data, together with de-
tailed taxonomic, morphological and ana-
tomical studies in our known genera will
enable us, eventually, to assign the genus
Hilaria to its proper tribe.
The species of Hilaria are vegetatively
remarkably uniform for both subgenera of
the genus. They are mostly low, stoloniferous
or nonstoloniferous plants with pistillate
central spikelets or tall, rhizomatous bunch
grasses with perfect central spikelets. The
nine species and one variety at present known
are endemics restricted to the mountains,
dry plains and plateaus of the southwestern
United States, Mexico and Guatemala. One
species, H. belanger?, has been reported from
Venezuela (cultivated in experiment plots).
The inflorescence is spicate and composed of
two to many fascicles. Each fascicle contains
three spikelets, one central and two lateral
spikelets. The central spikelet is 1-flowered
and perfect in H. jamesii, H. mutica and
H. rigida. One-flowered, pistillate central
spikelets are characteristic of the other
species. The lateral spikelets, appearing
somewhat pedicellate, are all staminate and
may have from one to five florets. Any one,
or all of the lateral florets, may be sterile.
The glumes in those species with perfect
central spikelets may be papyraceous and
scarcely fused at the base, or, in those species
with pistillate central spikelets, the glumes
are rigid, indurated and fused at the base.
The fascicle pattern is the same for all
species of the genus. Diagrammatic sketches
of various fascicle patterns are presented in
fig. 1.
Brown (1950) and Brown and Coe (1951)
have been the pioneers in cytogenetic in-
vestigations in this genus. H. belangert (col-
lection no. 3394+) was reported to have a
312
chromosome number of 86, and H. mutica
(collection no. 3279) a diploid number of 36
(n = 18). H. belangeri (Ozona Clone) has 36
chromosomes (n = 9), while H. belangeri
(Eden no. + and Eden no. 6) has 72 chromo-
somes (n = 9). The phenomenon of ovule
abortion in H. belangert, H. jamesii and
H. mutica is discussed also.
Fie. 1.—Fascicle diagrams in Hilaria: a-c,
Fascicle types encountered in the subgenus Pleura-
pheae: central spikelets 1-flowered and perfect,
lateral spikelets 2-3-flowered, all staminate or the
lower sometimes sterile. d—f, fascicle types en-
countered in the subgenus Eu-Hilarieae: central
spikelets 1-flowered and pistillate, lateral spikelets
1-5-flowered, all staminate or staminate and sterile
intermixed. Only one glume of each lateral spikelet
is represented.
The species of Hilarza are among the im-
portant forage grasses of the ranges in the
southwestern United States and Mexico.
The rapid spread of the stoloniferous species
also makes them important soil binders. In
the genus Hilaria, H. belangeri is probably
the most important range species. H. jamesii
and H. mutica are regarded as having
medium grazing value and low to very low
palatability. Hilarta jamesii is often the
dominant grass in many parts of northern
Arizona and New Mexico and in southern
Colorado and Utah. When this species is
young it is good forage for sheep. H. mutica
is characteristic of level upland and desert
valleys in which there are no really perma-
nent streams, but these areas are occa-
sionally overflowed during heavy storms.
According to Goodding (mss.) the in-
florescences are often infected with ergot.
Hilaria rigida occupies the driest parts of
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 10
the desert areas, particularly the Mojave
Desert. It is encountered on sand dunes and
rocky slopes. This species forms isolated
clumps and is therefore an excellent grass
for controllmg blowing sand. It is a highly
prized grass in southern Nevada and in the
region of Kingman, Arizona.
This paper is part of a continuing series
contributing toward a _ revision of the
Grasses of Mexico; therefore, only Mexican
specimens are cited, except where the type
was collected in the United States. All
figures, unless otherwise indicated, were
drawn by the author.
KEY TO SPECIES OF HILARIA
A. Fascicles with thin, papyraceous glumes, these
not conspicuously fused and indurated at the
base; the central spikelet 1-flowered and
perfect [subgenus Pleurapheae].
B. Culms felty-pubescent; glumes of the central
spikelet narrow, plumose, deeply cleft into
few to several acuminate, ciliate lobes and
slender awns; glumes of the lateral spikelets
thin, long-ciliate, 2-4-lobed at the summit
3. H. rigida
BB. Culms not felty-pubescent.
C. Glumes of the lateral spikelets acute,
usually with a single awn. ...1. H. jamesii
CC. Glumes of the lateral spikelets thin,
broadened upwards, the tips finely lacini-
Ate. 23 8asdlo. Lee 2. H. mutica
AA. Fascicle with thickened asymmetric glumes,
conspicuously fused and indurated at the
base; the central spikelets 1-flowered and
pistillate [subgenus Eu-Hilarieae].
D. Spikes pale and usually slender (if
thick, then the glumes papillose-pilose
between the nerves); sometimes viola-
ceous from the accumulation of antho-
eyanin pigmentation; scabrous black
glands may be present, but usually not
abundant.
E. Plants stoloniferous, blades mostly
basal.
F. Glumes scabrous; awns short,
slightly divergent, thick, con-
spicuously ciliate on the margins,
the cilia often retrorse
6. H. ciliata
FF. Glumes variously textured;
awns not ciliate on the margins.
G. Fascicles 5-6 mm long.
H. Glumes usually with one,
rarely more, awns, margins
conspicuously hyaline; plants
wiry, densely tufted
4. H. belangeri
HH. First glume of the central
spikelet thick, terminating
OcToBER 1956
in 2-5 awns, margins not
hyaline; glumes of the cen-
tral spikelet thick, terminat-
ing in 2-4 awns; plants not
wiry or densely tufted
7. H. hintoni
GG. Fascicles 8-10 mm long;
glumes conspicuously papil-
lose-pilose between the nerves,
the lemmas sparingly pilose on
the back toward the tip
8. H. sempler
EE. Plants apparently non-stolo-
niferous; blades long, flat; ligule
2.5-3 mm long; spikes scarcely ex-
ceeding the blades
4a. H. belangeri var. longifolia
DD. Spikes mostly gray to black;
coloration resulting either from nu-
merous scabrous black glands or the
accumulation of anthocyanin pigmen-
tation, or both.
I. Spikes slender; fascicles
6.5-8 mm long; glumes nar-
row at the base, as long as
the florets, dark gray to
almost black, the margins
hyaline and conspicuously
lighter in color; lateral
spikelets 2-flowered
9. H. swallenir
II. Spikes usually thick; fas-
cicles 4-7.5 mm _ long;
glumes broader at the base,
shorter than the florets,
the margins not conspicu-
ously lighter in color nor
hyaline; lateral spikelets
2-4-flowered (rarely 5-flow-
ered)....5. H. cenchroides
1. Hilaria jamesii (Torr.) Benth., Journ. Linn.
Soc., Bot. 19: 62. 1881.
Pleuraphis jamesii Torr.,
York 1: 148. pl. 10. 1824.
Ann. Lye. New
Perennial, tufted, rhizomatous; culms erect,
20-65 cm tall, nodes pubescent; sheaths glabrous
or slightly scabrous, sparsely villous near the
collar and behind the ligule; igule 2-3 mm long,
membranaceous, often laciniate; blades 2-20 cm
long, 2-4 mm wide, involute when dry, scaber-
ulous on the lower surface, scabrous on the upper
between the nerves; spike thick, 2-6 cm long,
rachis joints up to 6 mm long, angular, finely
pubescent; fascicles 6-8 mm long, long-villous
at the base; lateral spikelets 3-flowered, stam-
inate; stamens 3, anthers of the first floret about
5 mm long; lodicules 2, 0.1—0.2 mm long; central
spikelet 1-flowered, perfect; lodicules 2, about
0.2 mm long.
SOHNS: THE GENUS HILARIA
313
Distribution: Arizona, California, Colorado,
Nevada, Texas, Utah, and Wyoming.
2. Hilaria mutica (Buckl.) Benth., Journ. Linn.
Soc., Bot. 19: 62. 1881.
Pleuraphis mutica Buckl., Proc. Acad. Nat.
Sei. Philadelphia 1862: 95. 1862.
Perennial, tufted, rhizomatous; culms erect,
30-50 cm tall, nodes pubescent; sheaths striate,
firm, scabrid, the lower overlapping the upper,
shorter than the nodes, scabrous and sometimes
sparsely papillose-pilose along the margins; ligule
about 1 mm long, lacerate; blades up to 10 cm
long, 2-4 mm wide, harshly short-scabrous on
both surfaces, sometimes sparsely papillose-
pilose on both surfaces; spike 4-8 cm long, joints
of the spike slender, fascicles crowded; lateral
spikelets 1 or 2-flowered (sometimes 3- or 4-
flowered), staminate; lodicules 2, 0.1-0.2 mm
long; glumes thin and broadened upward, the
tips finely laciniate; central spikelet 1-flowered,
perfect; lodicules 2, 0.1-0.2 mm long; glumes
with one or more divergent awns from the back,
the tips of the glumes lobed and finely laciniate.
Distribution: Arizona, Oklahoma, New Mexico,
Texas, and northern Mexico.
MEXICO: Cutnuanua: 10 km E. of Jiménez,
Harvey 1348; Rancho Carretas, Chihuahua-
Sonora Border, Harvey 1534; Meoqui, LeSeur
040; south of Chihuahua, LeSeur 0132; plains
near Chihuahua, Pringle 485; 19 mi. northwest
of Naica, Shreve 8080; 31 miles northeast. of
Camargo, Shreve 8895; Sta. Eulalia Plains,
Wilkinson 55. Coanurta: Road to Don Martin
Dam, Harvey 926; El Berrendo, near Muzquiz,
Harvey 1175; 100 km west of Cuatro Ciénegas,
Harvey 1254; Johnson, September 12, 1906;
Musquiz-Santa Anna, Marsh 497; Del Carmen
Mountains, Marsh 853; Torreon, Palmer 506;
... between Hacienda La Rosa and Hacienda
Lechuguilla, Wynd and Mueller 61; eastern slope
of the Sierra de San Manuel, Wynd and Mueller
481. Duranco: 3 miles northeast of Bermejillo,
Johnston 7788; 49 miles north of Bermejillo,
Morley 618; 3 miles Northeast of Bermejillo,
Shreve 8816. SONORA: 3 miles east of Agua Prieta,
5
Santos 1751: 5 miles north of Fronteras, Santos
dedied
Gon
3. Hilaria rigida (Thurb.) Bentham, ex Seribn.,
Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 9: 86. 1882.
Pleuraphis rigida Thurber, in 8. Wats.,
California 2: 293.8 180.
Bot.
Perennial; culms decumbent or rhizomatous
opt LILA
2 HI
Figs. 2-11.—Hilaria mutica: 2, Inflorescence and base of plant, X1 (drawn by M. W. Gill from Tou-
mey specimen); 3, spikelet (Wright 760-2108, type); 4, floret of central spikelet, ovary and stamen (Le
Seur 0132). Hilaria rigida: 5, Inflorescence and vegetative portion of plant, X1 (drawn by M. W. Gill
from Palmer (no. 494) specimen); 6, glume of central spikelet (Cooper 2230, type); 7, floret of central
spikelet and essential organs (Cooper 2230, type); 8, florets of lateral spikelets (Keck 4232). Hilaria
belangeri: 9, fascicle; 10, central spikelet and floret (both drawn by A. Chase from Hitchcock specimen) ;
11, florets of lateral spikelet and one stamen (Nealley 600). All figures, unless otherwise indicated, X8.
314
OcroBerR 1956
at base, up to 2.5 m tall, woody felty-pubescent,
upper nodes often pubescent; sheaths over-
lapping, glabrous or scabrous, a woolly line across
the back at the collar; ligule about 1 mm long,
woolly; blades 2-5 cm long or longer, 2-4 mm
wide, slightly involute, glabrous or scabrous on
the nerves on both surfaces, lower sheaths and
blades sometimes tomentose-pubescent; spike
4-7 cm long, fascicles 6-12 mm long, densely
bearded at the base; lateral spikelets 2 to 4-
flowered, staminate (if 3 or 4-flowered, upper-
most usually sterile); lodicules 2, 0.1-0.2 mm
long; glumes of the lateral spikelets thin, long-
ciliate, about 7-nerved, usually 2—4-lobed at the
_ broad summit and with 1-3 nerves excurrent into
slender awns, nerves sometimes obscure and
—searcely excurrent (variable in the same in-
florescence); central spikelet 1-flowered, perfect,
distinctly pedicellate, equaling or exceeding the
lateral spikelets, its narrow glumes deeply cleft
into few to several acuminate ciliate lobes and
slender awns; lemma often exceeding the glumes,
thin, ciliate, 2-lobed, the midnerve excurrent as
a short awn; stamens 3, anthers 4-4.5 mm long;
stigmas 2, plumose, terminally exserted; lodicules
2, 0.1 mm long.
According to Watson (1880) this species was
eaten avidly by pack animals.
Distribution: Arizona, California, Nevada,
Utah, Lower California, and Sonora.
UNITED STATES: Catutrornia: Fort
Mojave, Cooper 2230 (Type).
MEXICO: Basa Catirornia: Canon Can-
tillas, Orcutt 1145. CuHinvanua: Colonia Diaz,
Mearns 406. Sonora: 50 miles south of Sonoyta
on road to San Luis, Keck 4232.
4. Hilaria belangeri (Steud.) Amer.
Fl. 17: 135. 1912.
Anthephora belangeri Steud., Syn. Pl. Glum.
1: 111. 1854.
Nash, N.
Perennial, tufted, stoloniferous; culms 10 to
30 cm tall, erect, nodes villous; sheaths striate,
glabrous, overlapping, upper sheaths shorter
than the internodes; ligule 1.5 mm long, membra-
naceous; blades 3 to 10 cm long, flat or involute
when dry, sparsely papillose-pilose on the margins
and on the upper surface, tip involute; spike
2-4 cm long, fascicles 5-6 mm long; glumes firm,
united below, scabrous, usually pale or sometimes
violaceous, but not dark gray or black from
glandular spots, rounded or pointed upwards,
SOHNS: THE GENUS HILARIA
old
terminating in one or more antrorsely scabrous
awns as long as or longer than the fascicle; lateral
spikelets 2-flowered (rarely 3-flowered), stam-
inate or sometimes one floret neuter; stamens 3,
anthers of the lower floret 3-3.5 mm long; anthers
of the upper floret 3.2-3.7 mm long; central
spikelet 1-flowered, pistillate, as long or longer
than the lateral spikelet.
Distribution: Arizona, California, New Mexico,
Texas, and Mexico.
MEXICO: AcuascalipnteEs: Aguascalientes,
Hitchcock 7477. Basa Catirornia: La Cham-
pagna, Sierra de las Palmas, Gentry and Fox
11787. CurmuaHua: Rancho Carretos, Harvey
1621. GuprrERO: Coyuca, Hinton 6707. Mr1-
cHOACAN: Apatzingan, Leavenworth 1521. Mixico
Temascaltepec, Hinton 4733. Morn tos: Lava
fields near Yautepec, Pringle 11225; between
Xoxocotla and Alpuyec, Sharp 441358. Sonora:
near Imuris, Pennell 20278; Hacienda de San
Rafael, Santos 1782; 20 miles west of La An-
gostura, Santos 1802; Colonia Morelos, Santos
2032 [Sept. 15-Oct. 4, 1941]. TamautLrpas:
Chamal, Swallen 1680, 1698.
4a. Hilaria belangeri var. longifolia (Vasey)
Hitche., Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington 41:
162. 1928.
Hilaria cenchroides var. longifolia Vasey,
Proc. Amer. Acad. Sci. 24: 80. 1889; Beal,
Grasses North America 2: 69. 1896.
Perennial, tufted, apparently non-stoloniferous;
culms erect, 830 cm or more tall, nodes villous;
sheaths striate, scabrous, basal sheaths over-
lapping, upper sheaths shorter than the inter-
nodes; ligule 2.56-8 mm long, membranaceous;
blades 3-15 cm long, up to 3.5 mm wide, flat,
scabrous on both surfaces, sparsely papillose-
pilose on the margins and upper surface, tip
involute; spike 2-4 em long, joints of the axis
3-5 mm long, flat, margins antrorsely short-
pilose; fascicles 5-8 mm long, 5-12 per inflores-
cence; first glume of lateral spikelet with one
long awn, the others half as long, free or fused;
lateral spikelets 2-flowered, lower floret usually
neuter, upper floret staminate; stamens 3,
anthers about 3 mm long; central spikelet 1-
flowered, pistillate.
Distribution: Arizona, Texas, and north-
western Mexico.
MEXICO: Sonora: Guaymas, Palmer 347
3558; Colonia
(type); Guaymas, /Hitcheock
Morelos, Santos 2032 [15 Sept. 1947).
316
JOURNAL
OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 10
Fras. 12-25.—(See opposite page for legend).
€Qe+ ere,
|
(
f
|
i
|
|
OcToBER 1956
5. Hilaria cenchroides H. B. K., Nov. Gen. &
Sp. 1: 117. pl. 37. 1816.
Perennial, tufted, stoloniferous; culms erect,
5-60 cm tall, nodes pilose; sheaths striate, over-
lapping, margins hyaline, the lower from sparsely
to densely papillose-pilose, the upper glabrous
and shorter than the internodes; ligule 1.5-2 mm
long, laciniate; blades up to 10 cm long, to 4 mm
wide, flat, involute on drying, slightly scabrous
on the lower surface, very scabrous on the upper
surface, sometimes also sparsely papillose-pilose,
margins antrorsely scabrous; spikes 2-6 cm long,
dark brown to purple in color; rachis joints
scabrous-pubescent on the margins; fascicles
4—7.5 mm long; glumes usually shorter than the
spikes, indurated and fused at the base; lateral
spikelets 2—4-flowered (rarely 5 florets), stam-
inate or some of them sterile; stamens 3, anthers
3-3.5 mm long, yellow; central spikelet 1-
flowered, pistillate.
Distribution: Mexico to Guatemala.
MEXICO: Basa Catirornia: 19 miles north-
east of Comondu, Shreve 7120. Distrito FEDERAL:
Mixcoac, Arséne 8281; Camino de Toluca, Balls
5587; Mexico City, Fisher 70; San Angel, Fisher
113; Xochimileo, Hitchcock 5889; Pedregal,
Hitchcock 5950; Olivar, Orcutt 3591. DuRANGo:
Durango, Hitchcock 7580; Palmer 379, 541.
GuanasuaTo: The Alameda, Dugis, July 1899;
Acambaro, Hitchcock 6939; Irapuato, Hitchcock
7430; 6 kms east of Guanajuato, Sohns 318.
GUERRERO: Santa Fé, Hitchcock 6687. Hipauco:
Jacala, V. H. Chase 7110, 7230; Pachuca, Hitch-
cock 6718 14; Guadalupe, Juzepczuk 114; Puerto
de la Zorra, Moore and Wood 3776. Jauisco:
La Punta, Hitchcock 7000; San Nicolds, Hitch-
cock 7188; Guadalajara, Hitchcock 7268; Rio
Blanco, Palmer 197; Huejuquilla, Rose 2542; La
Punta, Shreve 9289. M&éxico: Toluca, Hitchcock
6905; Molino de la Flor, Matuda 18932; Zum-
pango, Matuda 19723; San Gerénimo, Matuda
29247; Atizapan, St. Prerre 205; Tlalpan, St.
Pierre 818; Mixcoac, St. Pierre 833, 881; San
Angel, St. Pierre 851; San Juan de Teotihuacan,
Santos 2197; San Andreas, Sohns 190. Mr-
SOHNS: THE GENUS HILARIA
317
cHoacAN: Morelia, Arséne 5587; Zitdcuaro,
Hinton 13113. Moreuos: Cuernavaca, Hitchcock
6861; Ross, June 1953. Oaxaca: Cerro del
Fortin, Conzattt 3588; Oaxaca, Hitchcock 6096;
Valle de Oaxaca, Liebmann 571; Tehuantepec,
Matuda 311; Valle de Oaxaca, Nelson 1576;
Valley of Cuicatlan, Nelson 1906; El Cerro de
San Felipe del Agua, Santos 3208. Puppia: Fort
de Loreto, Arséne 35; vicinity of Puebla, Arséne
284, 1019; Atlixco, Nelson 25/7/1893; San Fran-
cisco, Nicolas 15/8/1909; Cholula, Nicolas
14/7/1909. QupRHrARO: Querétaro, Arséne 10274,
Querétaro, Hitchcock 5865, 5870; Semple, No-
vember 1955. San Luis Porosi: Cardenas,
Hitchcock 5713; Alvarez, Palmer 165. TAMAULI-
PAS: Buena Vista Hacienda, Wooton 21/6/1919. °
TLAXcALA: San Cristébal to Calpulalpan, Sohns
573. Veracruz: Santa Ana Chiautempan, Arséne
11/10/1908; Orizaba, Hitchcock 6353; Mohr;
Mueller 2079; Schaffner 199. Zacatecas: Zacate-
cas, Hitchcock 7537.
GUATEMALA: Guatemala City, Hitchcock
9084; de Koninck 142; Popenoe 667; La Aurora,
Morales R. 726.
6. Hilaria ciliata (Scribn.) Sohns, comb. nov.
Hilaria cenchroides var. ciliata Scribn., Proc.
Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 1891: 293.
Perennial, tufted, sometimes stoloniferous;
culms up to 45 cm tall, erect, sometimes finely
pubescent below the lower nodes, otherwise
glabrous; nodes pilose; sheaths striate, glabrous,
the lower sometimes sparsely papillose-pilose,
usually shorter than the internodes; ligule about
2.5 mm long, membranaceous; blades 1.5-15 cm
long, up to 4 mm wide, scabrous on both sur-
faces and margins, occasionally sparsely papillose-
pilose on both surfaces, sparsely papillose-pilose
at the collar and behind the ligule; spike 3-5 em
long, joints of axis 2.5-3.5 mm long, finely ciliate
on the margins, sometimes sparsely pilose;
fascicles mostly less than 4 mm long (rarely to
5 mm); glumes fused at base, papillate-scabrous;
the awns of the glumes of the central spikelets
1 or 2, these usually not exceeding the lobes,
Fias. 12-25.—Hilaria cenchroides: 12, Abaxial view of fascicle; 13, adaxial view of fascicle (both drawn
from Galeotti 5689); 14, glume of central spikelet (Hinton 13118); 15, first and second glumes of lateral
spikelet (Hinton 13113); 16, three florets from lateral spikelet (Hinton 13113) ; 17, two florets from lateral
spikelet (Palmer 379). Hilaria ciliata: 18, Abaxial view of fascicle; 19, adaxial view of fascicle; 20, floret
of central spikelet and first and second florets of lateral spikelets with stamens (all from Pringle 3128).
Hilaria belangert var. longifolia: 21, three florets of a lateral spikelet; 22, central spikelet; 23, lateral
spikelet; 24, caryopsis; 25, rachis joint. All from Palmer 347. All figures X8.
318
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 10
ov
er xh * @O Pp
+ mutica
. rigida
- belangeri
- belangeri var. longifolia
- cenchrotdes
- Ciliata
- hintonii
H. semplei
- Swallenii
ses LOE
Figs. 26-35.—(See opposite page for legend).
OcToBER 1956
sometimes reflexed at maturity, short-ciliate
on the margins, the cilia often retrorse; awns of
the lateral spikelets inconspicuous; lateral
spikelets 2-flowered, staminate; stamens 3,
anthers of the upper floret 2.8-3 mm long; central
spikelet 1-flowered, pistillate.
Distribution: Known only from Mexico.
MEXICO: Cotmma: Alzada, Hitchcock 7077;
Armeria, Hitchcock 7022; Manzanillo, Hitchcock
833; Palmer 197, 1267. GuERRERO: Mina, Hinton
9310. Jauisco: Zapotlan, Hitchcock 7125; Guada-
lajara, Hitchcock 7370; Valley of the Rio Grande
de Santiago at Atequiza, Palmer 3128 (Type).
Mricuoachn: Aguililla, Hinton 12093, 15213;
Apatzingan, Hinton 12029; Leavenworth 1521,
1590; near Nueva Italia, Sohns 847. Nayarit:
Vicinity of Jalisco, Ferris 5818; Tepic, Palmer
1918; Acaponeta, Rose, Standley and Russell
14304. San Luis Porosi: Valley of the Rio
Tampaon, V. H. Chase 7530; Cardenas, Hitch-
cock 5774. Sonora: Palmer, s. n.
7. Hilaria hintonii Sohns, sp. nov.
Gramen perenne, stoloniferum; culmi 5-20 cm
alti, nodi pubescenti; vaginae glabrae vel leviter
pilosae; ligula 0.5-1 mm longa, membranacea;
laminae 2-6 cm longae, usque ad 4 mm latae,
planae, supra papilloso-pilosae, subtus glabrae
vel interdum leviter papilloso-pilosae, margines
scabrae; spicae 2-4 longae, articuli rachi plani,
1-4.5 mm longi; fasciculi 4-6.5 mm_ longi,
glumae induratae, scaberulae; spiculae laterales
bi- vel triflores, masculae; spicula intermedia
uniflora, feminea.
Perennial, tufted, stoloniferous; culms 5-20
cm tall, erect; nodes pubescent; sheaths glabrous
or sparingly pilose near the collar; ligule 0.5-1
mm long, membranaceous; blades 2-6 cm long,
up to 4 mm wide, flat, thin, papillose-pilose on
the upper surface, scabrous on the lower or some-
times sparsely papillose-pilose, margins scabrous,
the tip acuminate; spikes 2-4 cm long, joints of
the axis flat, 1-4.5 mm long, margins short ciliate;
fascicles 4-6.5 mm long, the glumes indurated
and fused at the base, scaberulous to sparsely
glandular-spotted; first glumes of the lateral
SOHNS: THE GENUS HILARIA
319
spikelets indurated at the base, the tips terminat-
ing in 3 or 4 awns, one of which is as long as the
spikelets; second glumes of the lateral spikelets
broad, indurated, terminating in 2 to 4 awns of
approximately equal length; lateral spikelets 2-3-
flowered, staminate, or the lower sometimes
sterile, stamens 3, anthers 2.8-3 mm long; glumes
of the central spikelet with more or less truncated
tips and 2 or 3 prominent awns; central spikelet
1-flowered, pistillate.
This species is named in honor of the late Mr.
G. B. Hinton, exceptional collector of Mexican
grasses.
Type: Temascaltepec, Mexico; Luvianos, llano,
9/8/1933; Hinton 4502 (U.S.N.H. no. 1840874).
Distribution: Central Mexico.
MEXICO: Guerrero: Coyuca, Hinton 6437.
México: Temascaltepec, Hinton 4502. QuERE-
TARO: South of San Juan del Rio, Semple, No-
vember 1955.
8. Hilaria semplei Sohns, sp. nov.
Gramen perenne, stoloniferum; culmi erecti,
20-35 cm alti, glabri; nodi papilloso-pilosi;
vaginae striatae, internodiis breviores, inferiores
papilloso-pilosae, superiores glabrae; ligula mem-
branacea, 0.5-1 mm longa; laminae 2.5-15 cm
longae, usque ad 2.5 mm latae, plana vel V-forma,
utrinque papilloso-pilosae, margines scabrae;
spicae 2-4 cm longae, articuli rachi 2.5-4.5 mm
longi, plani, margines ciliati; fasciculi 8-10 mm
longi; glumae induratae, valde nervosae, inter-
nerviis papilloso-pilosae, aristae scabrae; spiculae
laterales biflores, masculae; lemmata membra-
nacea, summa tenuiter pilosi, leviter 3 vel 4-
nervils; spicula intermedia uniflora, feminea;
lemma membranaceum, leviter 3-nerviis, 8-10
mm longum.
Perennial, tufted, stoloniferous; culms 20-35
cm tall, erect, glabrous; nodes papillose-pilose;
sheaths striate, shorter than the internodes, the
lower papillose-pilose, the upper glabrous; ligule
0.5-1 mm long, membranaceous; blades 2.5-15
cm long, up to 2.5 mm wide, slightly V-shaped in
cross-section or flat, papillose-pilose on both
surfaces, margins antrorsely scabrous, the tip
Fias. 26-35.—Hilaria swallenii: 26, Abaxial view of fascicle; 27, adaxial view of fascicle (drawn by A.
Chase from Young (No. 46) specimen); 28, lemma, glume of central spikelet, first and second glumes of
lateral spikelet; 29, two florets of a lateral spikelet (both from Sperry T778). Hilarta hintonit: 30, glume
of central spikelet; 31, two pistillate florets from central spikelet; 32, first glume of lateral spikelet; 33,
three florets and a stamen from a lateral spikelet; 34, second glume of lateral spikelet and habit sketch
of plant (X14). All drawn from Hinton 4502. All figures X8. 35: Map of Mexico showing distribution of
species of Hilaria.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 10
320
la
Fras. 36-50.—(See opposite page for legend).
OctToBER 1956
involute; spike 2-4 cm long, joints of the axis
2.5-4.5 mm long, flat, the margins finely ciliate,
rachis flaps prominent, tips finely ciliate; fascicles
8-10 mm long; glumes fused at base, strongly
nerved, papillose-pilose between the nerves,
awns prominent, antrorsely scabrous; lateral
spikelets 2-flowered, the florets staminate,
lemmas membranaceous, faintly 3- or 4-nerved,
the tips sparingly pilose, paleas membranaceous,
as long as the lemmas, 2-nerved; central spikelet
1-flowered, pistillate; lemma membranaceous,
faintly 3-nerved, 8-10 mm long.
This species is named in honor of Dr. A. T.
Semple, Food and Agricultural Organization of
the United Nations.
Type: Dense heavy stands on very heavy clay
soil; dominant grass over many areas; Llanos
de Antufiez, about 12 miles east of Apatzingan,
Michoacan, alt. 1,000 feet; November 1955,
A. T. Semple (U.S.N.H. no. 2183565). Dry grass-
lands between Nueva Italia and Apatzingan, alt.
430 m., dominant grass; November 14, 1955;
Moore, Herndndez X. and Porras H. 5753.
9. Hilaria swallenii Cory, Wrightia 1: 215. 1948.
Perennial, tufted, stoloniferous; culms erect,
10 to 30 em tall, nodes villous; sheaths shorter
than the internodes, slightly scabrous; ligule
2-2.2 mm long, membranaceous; blades mostly
short, basal, up to 8 cm long, 1-2 mm wide, flat
or involute when dry, scabrous on both surfaces;
spike 1-4 cm long, gray to dark-brown in color,
sparsely to densely provided with glands; rachis
jomts 4-6 mm long, sparsely short-scabrous on
the margins and over the back; fascicles 6.5-8
mm long, 2 to 8 per spike, narrow, appressed,
not conspicuously flabellate at maturity; glumes
connate at base, margins usually hyaline and
light gray to whitish; lateral spikelets 2-flowered,
the lower floret usually sterile, the upper stam-
inate, stamens 3, anthers 3-3.5 mm long; central
spikelet 1-flowered, pistillate, the base of the
lemma usually elliptic.
Distribution: Davis Mountains area of Texas
and Mexico.
UNITED STATES: Texas: Musquiz Canyon,
Sperry T778 (Type).
SOHNS: THE GENUS HILARIA
321
MEXICO: Curauanua: 19 km North of Rio
San Pedro on Parral-Chihuahua Road, Harvey
1432; 2 km west of Carretas, Harvey 1568; near
Chihuahua, Pringle 493. Coanurta: 3 miles
southeast of Saltillo, Johnston 7251; 2 miles
southeast of Saltillo, Shreve 8509. DurRanco:
516 miles south of Ignacio Allende, Gentry 6915;
near Torreén de las Canas, Gentry 8639. Nurvo
Lon: Galena, V. H. Chase 7763. San Luts
Potosi: Chareas, Lundell 5515; Charcas, Whiting
508, 528. ZacaTEAS: Among cerros 6 miles south-
east of Carboneras, Gentry 8504.
LITERATURE CITED
Brau, W.J. Grasses of North America 2: 65. 1896.
Bentuam, G. Notes on Gramineae. Journ. Linn.
Soc. Bot. 19: 61-63. 1881.
Benruam, G., and Hooxkrer, J. D. Genera plan-
tarum 3: 1121. 1883.
Brews, J. W. The world’s grasses: 69, 121, 214.
London, 1929.
Brown, W. V. A cytological study of some Texas
Gramineae. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 77: 63-76.
1950.
Brown, W. V. and Cor, G. HE. A study of sterility
in Hilaria belangeri (Steud.) Nash and Hilaria
mutica (Buckl.) Benth. Amer. Journ. Bot. 38:
823-830. 1951.
Buckiey, 8. B. Description of new Texas grasses
—Schleropelta n. genus. Prel. Rep. Geol. &
Agr. Surv. Texas. App. 1: 1. 1866.
Conzatti, C. Flora taxonomica Mexicana 1: 172,
176-177. 1946.
Fournier, E. Mexicanas plantas. Pars secunda:
70, 72-73. Paris, 1886.
Hacket, E. Gramineae (echte Grdser). Die
natiirlichlen Pflanzenfamilien 22: 30. 1887.
Hitcucockx, A. 8. The genera of the grasses of the
United States. U. S. Dept. Agr. Techn. Bull.
772: 172-174. 1936.
Humpotpt, A., Bonpuanp, A., and Kuntu, C. S.
Nova genera et species plantarum 1: 116-118.
pl. 37. 1815.
PiuerR, R. Das System der Gramineae.
Jahrb. 76: 348. 1954.
Presu, J. 8. Reliquiae Haenkeanae 1: 326. pl. 46.
Prague, 1830.
Rosuevits, R. Yu.
cow, 1937.
STruDEL, H. G. Synopsis plantarum glwmacea-
rum, pt. 1: 12. 1854.
Torrery, JoHN. Description of some new grasses
collected by Dr. E. James, in the expedition
of Major Long to the Rocky Mountains, in
1819-1820. Ann. Lyc. New York 1: 148-150.
pl. 10. 1824.
Bot.
Grasses: 168, 522, 530. Mos-
Figs. 36-50.—Hilaria semplei Sohns, sp. nov.: 36, Habit sketch of plant, X14; 87, basal sheath and
blade; 38, node; 39, junction of blade and sheath; 40, margin of blade; 41, fascicle; 42, glume of central
spikelet; 43, floret of central spikelet; 44, palea and caryopsis; 4546, first and second glumes of lateral
spikelets; 47-48, lemma. and palea of first floret; 49-50, palea and lemma of second floret. All figures XS
and drawn from the type specimen.
322
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
voL. 46, No. 10
ENTOMOLOGY .—New Neotropical genera and species of apterous aradids (Hemip-
tera). Cart J. DRAK®#, Iowa State College.
(Received August 15, 1956)
The present paper contains the descrip-
tions of one new genus, one subgenus, and
five species of apterous aradids from the
Americas. The types have been deposited as
stated in the descriptions. In the structural
measurements, 80 units equal 1 mm.
Emydocoris montanus, n. sp.
Very broad, rather thick, obovate, narrowest
across front margin of pronotum, above with a
complicated pattern of high elevations and deep
cavities, without lateral lobes or projections, dark
ferrugineous without color markings, without
vestiture. Head broad, subquadrate, width
across eyes and median length subequal (2.25
mm). The lateral edges nearly parallel; lateral
shelves very wide, long, depressed, with bases
almost in contact with front margin of pronotum;
eyes moderately large, subovate, about two-
thirds as broad as long, each placed at middle
of lateral side of lateral shelf, slightly inserted,
about three-fifths of its width extending outward
beyond the lateral side, the shelf behind the eyes
broad; antenniferous tubercles stout, tapering
anteriorly, slightly divergent; median longitudinal
part of head elevated above lateral shelves, about
one-third as wide as interocular space, strongly
rugose above, projecting about one-third of its
length beyond base of antennae; tylus moderately
wide with superior surface smooth and _ longi-
tudinally convex; juga surpassing tylus, dilated
apically, meeting at midline in front of tylus.
Labial sulcus deep, narrow, extending to collar;
labium short, brownish, nearly attaining end of
sulcus. Neck very short, constricted, rounded.
Antennae and head subequal in length; antennal
segment I quite stout, bent outward opposite
apex of antenniferous tubercle; II shortest,
slenderest; III slowly enlarged apically; IV
subclavate; measurements—I, 45; II, 30; III,
54: IV, 50.
Pronotum a little narrower than mesonotum,
narrower in front than behind, sloping obliquely
downward anteriorly, approximately 214 times
as wide at base as median length (210:80), with
outer sides of dorsal surface very strongly widely
and rugosely elevated, strongly depressed between
lateral elevations, with the large median plate
divided at middle by a deep longitudinal furrow,
separated behind from mesonotum by a trans-
verse suture, the collar short, depressed, strongly
constricted, with a small knob on each side.
Mesonotum separated from metanotum by a
strongly sinuate suture, narrower than pronotum,
longest at middle, four times as wide at base as
median length (longest at middle), with a very
wide, convex and smooth median ridge, with
lateral elevation not quite as large as on pronotum,
with a deep transverse cavity on each side be-
tween median ridge and large lateral elevation.
Metanotum not attaining outer margin of body,
fused with abdominal tergites I-VI (inclusive)
into a solid plate, the plate wider at base than
behind, width at base (metanotum) and median
length subequal, with transverse suture between
tergites II and III faintly indicated, with median
ridge widened and elevated posteriorly, abruptly
widened on tergites II and III, thence posteriorly
gently sloping downward, with glandular eleva-
tion at centre of widened hind part plainly
visible, with dorsal surface of median ridges
and elevations smooth and without complex
sculpturing, narrowly depressed on each side of
the highly elevated area between the longitu-
dinal suture separating tergites from connexival
segments, with a deep cavity on each side of
median ridge just back of metanotum, with three
knoblike structures in cavity just behind meta-
notum and five transverse ridges in narrowly
depressed strip adjacent to each connexivum.
Connexiva slowly narrowed anteriorly, with
segments I and II fused, other segments sepa-
rated from one another by transverse sutures.
Spiracles II to VII (inclusive) ventral, remotely
removed from outer edge of their respective
segments, spiracle VIII (genital segment) placed
on apical end of a short, posteriorly-directed
tubercle. Body beneath moderately convex;
prosternum with a median longitudinal carina,
separated from mesosternum by a_ transverse
suture; mesosternum also with a visible suture
behind it (probably not functional); metasternum
fused with abdominal ventrites I-III (inclusive),
other ventrites separated from one another by
OcToBER 1956
deep suture. Legs short, dark brownish ferru-
gineous with pale tarsi, the femora of all legs
slightly flattened beneath and beset with two
longitudinal rows (one row near anterior edge
and other near posterior) of short, stout, tubercle-
like teeth or pegs with rounded tops. Ostiolar
canal tubular, extending obliquely upward
posteriorly, with an ovate opening slightly above
middle of pleura, not visible from dorsal aspect.
Scutellum entirely absent, without trace of wings
or wing pads.
Length, 8.75-9.20 mm; width, 4.75 mm.
Holotype (male) and allotype (female), Brasil,
November 29, 1890, collected by Dr. Warburg,
in collection of Zoologisches Museum, Zoolo-
gisches Staatsinstitut, Hamburg, Germany.
Paratype: 1 specimen, same locality as type.
Separated from Emydocoris testidinatus Usinger
(1941) by its larger size, antennal segments,
short legs with all femora armed beneath, high
elevations and deep cavities of dorsal surface
(especially abdomen) and the large tubular
ostiolar canal projecting obliquely upward with
an ovate opening on outer side.
Reeceicus, n. gen.
Broadly ovate, unusually thick, beneath
transversely convex, dorsally strongly longi-
tudinally convex, rugged, humpbacked, adorned
on median part of thorax and basal half of
abdomen with large craggy protuberances and
depressions, with thorax sloping downward
anteriorly and abdomen downward posteriorly.
Head very wide, subquadrate, not narrowed
behind eyes; lateral shelves very wide, thin,
with dorsal surfaces on much lower level than
that of median longitudinal part of head, tilted
upward laterally, with eyes rather small, longer
than wide and placed near middle of outer edge
of each shelf; tylus fairly wide, rugged; juga
narrower, not exceeding tylus in front; neck
short. Labial sulcus deep, rather narrow, not
extending to neck; labium short, not attaining
apex of sulcus. Antennae short, subequal to
head in length; segment I short, moderately
swollen, bent, not surpassing apices of tylus and
juga; other segments also short, with IV a little
swollen. Legs rather short, slender.
Pronotum much wider than head, about four
times as wide as long, rugged, not excavated in
front for reception of collar; collar short, con-
stricted; mesonotum short, rugged, with trans-
verse furrow separating it from pronotum and
DRAKE: APTEROUS ARADIDS
320
also from mesonotum (sutures seem to be fused) ;
metanotum partly concealed by raised and over-
lapping base of abdomen. Thoracic divisions and
abdominal tergites I to VI (inclusive) apparently
conjointly fused but with a narrow, deep furrow
between II and III. Abdomen distinctly broadly
cordate, with apex narrow and rounded, with
wide basal part a little raised and fused upon base
of metanotum, thus together with craggy eleva-
tions giving body a distinctly hunchbacked ap-
pearance; connexival segments strongly curving
inward at base, apparently with segment I
represented (seven segments).
Spiracle II ventral, remotely removed from
outer margin; III to VII (inclusive) lateral,
plainly visible from above; VIII (genital seg-
ment) posterolateral, placed at apical end of
rounded projection, visible from dorsal aspect.
Type species, Reeceicus saileri, n. gen. and n. sp.
This very curious genus differs greatly in a few
respects from all other genera of apterous
aradids. The body is very thick, broadly ovate,
strongly longitudinally convex and distinctly
hunchbacked in appearance; lateral sides deeply
furrowed for the reception of legs; abdomen
above broadly heart-shaped, narrowly rounded
behind, with base wide, slightly elevated; con-
nexival segments at base strongly curved inward
and fused upon the basal part of metanotum.
Connexival segment I appears to be represented
as seven segments are visible. Spiracle II is
ventral and remotely removed from lateral
margin; III to VII (inclusive) placed on low
half of the longitudinally divided (by narrow
furrow) outer edge of connexiva. The head is
rather similar in shape and appearance to
Emydocoris Usinger (1944), but the smaller
eyes, shape of body, location of spiracles and
other striking differences separate at once the
two genera. This genus and species are named in
honor of Dr. Reece I. Sailer, who is in charge
of the Hemiptera, U. 8. National Museum.
Reeceicus saileri, n. sp.
Fig. 1
Moderately large, very thick, extremely
longitudinally convex above, strongly rugged,
with a distinctly humped back. Head
quadrate, with posteriorly,
slightly angulately produced at latero-posterior
corner, wider at base (100) than either across
(70) or tips of
tubercules, each lateral shelf occupying one-
sub-
sides widening
eyes between antenniferous
324
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 46, No. 10
Fic. 1.—Reeceicus saileri, n. gen. and sp. Dorsal aspect of abdomen (X 32).
third of space between eyes; juga not surpassing
tylus. Antennae short, measurements—I, 20;
II, 16; III, 18; IV, 20. Labium short, brownish.
Sides of thorax with an oblique, upright channel
for reception of anterior femora; with an in-
verted V-shaped channel for reception of middle
femora and tibiae, and the thorax and base of
abdomen also with an inverted V-shaped channel
for reception of hind femora and tibiae.
Pronotum almost twice as wide as base of
head (185:100), nearly four times as wide at base
as median length (200:50), not excavated in
front for insertion of collar, with a subquadrate
protubance at middle; mesonotum not longer
than pronotum, with the protuberance of meso-
metanotum higher and more deeply furrowed at
middle than similar structure on pronotum.
Abdomen broadly heart-shaped, widest
base, roundly narrowed posteriorly, rounded and
narrowest behind, subtruncate at middle of front
margin, tilted upward anteriorly, with base
fused up on posterior part of metanotum, with
connexiva curving inward and extending along
anterior part of base of abdomen, with basal
near
platelike protuberance large, trapezoidal (basal
and apical margins parallel and long; sides
obliquely widened apically), divided into four
equal parts by three longitudinal furrows
(median furrow and one on each side of it); tumid
area behind furrow between tergites II and III
quite large. Connexiva composed of seven seg-
ments (I present), curving strongly inward at
base so as to occupy two-sevenths of basal
margin on each side, thus leaving only three-
sevenths of base at middle). Exterior margin of
abdomen rather thick, with edge divided by a
narrow longitudinal furrow, with stigmata III to
VII (inclusive) placed on lower half of lateral
edge, all spiracles (save II) visible from dorsal
view.
Length, 4.50 mm; width, 2.90 mm.
Holotype (female), Yurimaguas, Peru, Drake
Collection.
Glyptocoris verus, n. sp.
Large, broadly ovate, widest across middle
of abdomen, narrowest across front margin of
pronotum and there very little wider than head
OcToBER 1956
across eyes, reddish ferrugineous with abdomen
darker and a small marginal spot on each side
at base of all thoracic divisions and of all con-
nexival segments pale or whitish flavous. Head
quadrate, as wide across eyes as median length
(86:88), strongly rugose above; lateral shelves
thick, with dorsal surface on a slightly lower
level than that of median longitudinal part of
head, extending posteriorly behind eyes nearly
the length of an eye before narrowing to neck,
with an angulate lateral projection or tubercle
behind each eye at postero-lateral end; median
longitudinal part of head a little narrower than a
lateral shelf, with a small tubercle on each side
just in front of neck; tylus moderately stout,
rugose, sloping downward at apex; juga surpassing
tylus about as far as the distance between their
apices. Labial sulcus short, wide, fairly deep, with
edges and lateral sides closely coarsely granulate;
labium barely attaiming end of sulcus. Antennae
longer than head, granulate; segment I stout, a
little bent outward; IV subclavate, with short
pale hairs on tip; measurements—I, 52, II, 32;
III, 42; IV, 34. Legs slender, finely granulate.
Pronotum strongly narrowed anteriorly, much
wider behind than in front, closely granulate on
lateral sides, deeply rectangularly excavated on
margin for reception of collar, with margin on
each side projected anteriorly as far as anterior
face of collar, deeply widely furrowed on median
longitudinal line behind the middle, with a
transverse furrow separating pronotum and
mesonotum, twice as wide in front as median
length, three times as wide at base as median
length (160:50); mesonotum wider and shorter
than pronotum, with a shallow furrow separating
it from metanotum; metanotum longer than
pronotum, with its hind margin elevated al-
though fused with first two abdominal tergites;
pro-, meso- and metanotum and abdominal
tergites I and II conjointly fused, with a wide,
median, longitudinal ridge extending uninter-
ruptedly from base of pronotum to end of
tergite II, with short lateral ridges on each side of
median line of large median ridge. Abdomen
above with tergites III to VI (inclusive) con-
jointly fused, sculptured on each side of low,
wide, pale, median, longitudinal ridge; con-
nexival segments I to III fused together, the
others distinctly sutured from one another.
Body beneath with sternal segments and first
three abdominal ventrites conjoined together,
other abdominal ventrites separated by sutures.
DRAKE: APTEROUS ARADIDS
325
Spiracles V, VI and VII lateral; VIII (genital)
placed on end of posteriorly directed tubercle;
and II, III and IV ventral, the latter subventral,
III considerably removed from outer edge and II
remotely removed, all three not visible from
dorsal aspect. Male unknown.
Length, 6.20 mm; width, 3.10 mm.
Holotype (female) and 1 paratype (female),
Guadeloupe Island, West Indies. Drake Collec-
tion.
Although somewhat atypical, this species fits
better in the genus Glyptocoris than other genera
of American apterous aradids. The thoracic
divisions are distinguishable from one another,
though fused together and also conjoined with
first two abdominal tergites.
Aglaocoris comes, n. sp.
Small, rectangular in outline, reddish fuscous
or reddish ferrugineous, without lateral lobes,
coarsely granulate on lateral margins of thorax
and abdomen. Head subtriangular, rapidly
narrowed behind eyes, with a short neck, width
across eyes and median longitudinal length sub-
equal; eyes small, reddish, placed up on the outer
end of a very short, slightly tilted-up pedicel;
juga surpassing tylus, with tips blunt and feebly
divergent, with dorsal surface on a much lower
level than that of tylus; tylus rugose, fairly thick;
lateral shelves and median part of head rather
strongly rugulose, with dorsal surfaces on almost
same horizontal level, the shelves thick and each
about as wide as median part of head, with a
small protuberance back of each eye; antennif-
ferous tubercles stout, divergent, each terminat-
ing in a small fingerlike projection. Labial
sulcus moderately wide, not extending to neck;
labium not as long as sulcus. Antennae granulate,
longer than head, with first segment slightly bent
outward, measurements—I, 36; II, 30; III, 24;
IV, 24. Legs moderately long, granulate.
Body nearly as wide in front as behind (72:75),
slightly wider at middle (90), with median length
nearly one and one-half times as long as median
with (130:90). Pronotum more than four times as
wide at base as median length, scarcely excavated
in front for reception of collar, suleate on median
longutidinal line; collar smooth, short and with
an encircling median ridge, marked off from
mesonotum by a transverse furrow, fused with
mesonotum. Pro-, meso-, and metanotum and
abdominal tergites I and IT conjointly fused,
with a large median longitudinal ridge extending
326
from base of pronotum almost to posterior margin
of tergite II, the ridge strongly rugose, wider and
higher on basal half. Abdomen with tergites III
to VI (inclusive) fused together, with a tumid
glandular elevation near the middle of the low,
median, longitudinal ridge, with an intricate
pattern of sculpturing on each side of median
ridge; VII distinctly defined; connexival seg-
ments I, II and III grown together, without
separating sutures, other segments sutured from
one another and from abdominal tergites. Abdo-
men beneath with sternal division and ventrites
I-III (inclusive) conjointly fused, other segments
sutured from one another. Spiracles II to IV
(inclusive), ventral, submarginal, each pro-
gressively anteriorly slightly farther removed
from outer edge; V sublateral (ventral) and VI
and VII lateral and VIII postero-lateral on end
of a short rounded process, all four of which are
visible from dorsal aspect. Abdominal ventrite
VII beneath (one on each side) with a large
ovately rounded, smooth, constricted at neck
(distinctly bottle-shaped), ventrally-directed pro-
tuberance (male structre; not found in female).
Holotype (male) and 1 paratype (male), Three
Rivers, Guadeloupe. West Indies, in Drake
Collection.
Separated from A. natalii Drake and Mal-
donado by its smaller size, shorter eye-stalks,
median longitudinal ridge on pronotum and the
much larger and very differently shaped (flask-
like) protuberance projected downward on the
underside of ventrite VII (one on each side) in the
male.
Asterocoris (Peggicoris) zeteki, n. subg. and n. sp.
Small, oblong (male) or obovate (female),
dark reddish fuscous or ferrugineous. Head
subtriangular, width across eyes and median
longitudinal length subequal, sharply narrowed
behind eyes, with the small elevation back of each
eye beset with setalike, whitish hairs; tylus
moderately stout, feebly narrowed anteriorly,
with dorsal surface on a higher level than that of
juga; juga scarcely exceeding tylus, each Jugum
with one or two, long, stiff, setalike hairs pro-
jecting anteriorly from its apex (sometimes hairs
are rubbed off); median longitudinal part of head
narrower than each lateral shelf, smooth, with
a moderately large rounded elevation on median
line between bases of lateral shelves; neck short,
with a small tubercle on each side; eyes small,
reddish, pedicellate, with short stalk slightly
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 46, No. 10
tilted upward; antenniferous tubercles short,
stout, rounded apically. Labial sulcus very wide,
short, shallow, not reaching to neck; labium
brownish, not reaching to end of sulcus. Antennae
long, reaching beyond pronotum; segment I very
long, extending three-fourths of its length beyond
apices of juga, rather densely clothed with stiff,
setalike, whitish hairs which are as long as width
of segment at their respective points or origin;
other segments with shorter hairs; measure-
ments—I, 74; IJ, 26: III, 34; IV, 30.
Pro-, meso-, and metanotum and abdominal
tergites I and II fused together; median lon-
gitudinal ridge large and smooth, without trans-
verse sutures, tapering a little anteriorly, ex-
tending from base of tergite II anteriorly to
collar, with the thoracic divisions on each side of
median ridge indicated by transverse furrows.
Abdominal tergites III to VI (inclusive) con-
jointly fused, with a large, median longitudinal
ridge, the sculptured areas on each side of ridge
rather shallow; connexival segments (except I
and IT fused) separated from one another and
from abdominal tergites by sutures. Body be-
neath with the three sternal divisions and first
three abdominal segments conjointly fused, the
other ventrites separated from one another by
sutures. Ostiolar channel not extending upward to
dorsal surface, thus not visible from above.
Lateral margins of body with several small tufts
of short, setalike, whitish hairs. Legs fairly long,
slender, sparsely clothed with short, coarse,
whitish hairs.
Spiracles placed up on top of small elevations,
the elevations slightly higher in male than in
female; spiracles II, III and IV ventral, not
visible from dorsal aspect; V sublateral (ventral)
and VI, VII and VIII (genital segment) lateral
and all visible from above.
Length, 3.90-4.40 mm; width, 1.74-2.10 mm.
Holotype (male) and allotype (female), Barro
Colorado, Canal Zone, Panama, 1948, take by
means of Berlese funnel from forest litter, by
James Zetek, in U. 8. National Museum. Par-
atypes: 5 specimens, same labels as type. Named
in honor of Mr. Zetek, who has collected so
many rare and interesting insects in Panama.
The new subgenus Peggicoris differs from
Asterocoris, s. str., by the lack of long lateral
lobes on body, position of spiracles, short juga,
fusion of thoracic divisions and location of
ostiolar channel.
OcTOBER 1956
Aglaocoris cubanus, n. sp.
Small, oblong (male) or obovate (female),
without lateral lobes, depressed above, finely
shallowly sculptured. Head subtriangular, width
across eyes and median length subequal (82:85);
tylus moderately wide, rugose, with dorsal sur-
face on a higher level than that of juga; juga thin,
feebly surpassing tylus; lateral shelves nearly as
wide as and with dorsal surface on same level as
that of median longitudinal part of head; eyes
small, pedicellate, with short stalk nearly hori-
zontal; antenniferous tubercles moderately large,
tapering anteriorly, with apices blunt; neck short,
constricted, with a small tubercle on each side of
outer edge of dorsal surface. Labial sulcus short,
very wide, moderately deep, not extending to
neck; labium scarcely attaining apex of sulcus.
Antennae granulate, longer than head, with
segment I extending three-fourths of its length
beyond apices of juga, measurements—I, 40;
II, 26; III, 30; IV, 24.
Pronotum strongly narrowed anteriorly, wider
in front than width across eyes, deeply widely
triangularly excavated in front for reception of
large collar, with front margin beyond collar
extending anteriorly as far as anterior margin of
collar, with a small tubercle (one on each side) on
antero-inner margin of front projection extending
inward to collar; collar large, smooth, with a
DRAKE: APTEROUS ARADIDS
327
deep, median, encircling sulcus; mesonotum
wider than and practically same length as
pronotum, separated by furrows from both pro-
and metanotum. Three thoracic divisions and
abdominal tergites I and II bused together, with
a very low, wide, median ridge extending from
basal part of pronotum to apex of tergite II, with
dorsal surface pretty much covered with many
small, longitudinal ridges. Abdomen with ter-
gites IIT to VI (inclusive) fused, shallowly sculp-
tured, with a small discal elevation on low median
ridge; connexival segments (save I and II fused)
sutured from one another and also from tergites.
Spiracles II, III and IV ventral, not visible from
above; V subventral, scarcely visible from above;
VI, Vil and VIII (genital segment) all lateral and
plainly visible from dorsal aspect. VII ventrite
(male) with a small, rounded, bottle-shaped pro-
jection (one on each side; directed downward),
with constricted neck.
Length, 4.75 mm (male) and 5.50 mm (fe-
male); width 2.20 mm (male) and 2.75 mm
(female).
Holotype (male) and allotype (female), Cay-
amas, Cuba, in Drake Collection.
Distinguished from its congeners by shape of
body, deeply broadly excised anterior margin of
pronotum for reception of collar and by shape of
male protuberances on underside of abdominal
ventrite VIT.
SESE EE
“PINE CONE” FISHES
There are fishes in the sea that when alive
look like swimming pine cones. When dead and
dried they actually could be mistaken at first
sight for pine cones. They belong to quite a
distinctive genus, Monocentris, which has an
isolated niche in ocean life. They do not seem
related to anything else.
A unique specimen taken off the Robinson
Crusoe island, Juan Fernandez, off the coast of
Chile, by Dr. Edwyn P. Reed, chief of the bio-
logical service of the Chilean Fish and Game De-
partment, has just been identified at the U. 8S.
National Museum, Smithsonian Institution, by
Dr. Leonard P. Schultz, curator of fishes, who has
described it as a hitherto unknown species, the
first of the entire family known in the American
Pacific.
The ‘“‘pine cones” are small fishes, the largest
slightly more than 3 inches long. They are rare
anywhere. The habitat with which they were
associated was the tropical western and central
Pacific until they were found at considerable
depths in the eastern Pacific. One genus ‘‘carries
lanterns,’ that is, luminous organs, on each side
of the mouth, as do other
fishes.
many oceanic
328
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 46, No. 10
HERPETOLOGY .—Hyla cinerea in Maryland, Delaware, and Virginia, with
notes on the taxonomic status of Hyla cinerea evittata.! Ctypr F. Rep, Balti-
more, Md. (Communicated by Doris M. Cochran.)
(Received August 13, 1956)
The latest checklist of North American
amphibians and reptiles, by Karl P. Schmidt
(pp. 69-70, 1953), is quite inaccurate in its
distribution of Hyla cinerea (Schneider).
It states that Hyla cinerea cinerea ranges in
the “lowlands of the Atlantic and Gulf
States from Virginia to Texas; north in the
Mississippi Basin to southern Illinois.’’ The
range for Hyla cinerea evittata Miller is
given as ‘“The Delmarva Peninsula, eastern
Maryland and adjacent Virginia.” From
these two statements one would conclude
that evittata was a distinct northern sub-
species with geographic limitations. Schmidt
has indicated such to be the case by calling
evittata the northern green tree frog.
The purpose of this paper is to show that
the taxon evittata should be reduced to the
synonymy of Hyla cinerea (Schneider),
since none of the characters upon which
evittata was originally based hold up as dis-
tinguishing it as a biological entity from
other populations of Hyla cinerea.
The problem developed from the instiga-
tion of the new taxon Hyla evittata by G.S.
Miller, who separated evzttata from cinerea
on the basis of the absence of the lateral
bright stripe in the former, as the name
evittata implies, together with the charac-
ters a broader head and a higher snout.
Hyla evittata Miller, Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington
13: 76. Sept. 28, 1899. Type adult male (in
aleohol) U. 8. Nat. Mus., Washington no. 26,
291, collected at “Four Mile Run, Alexandria
County, Virginia,” July 15, 1898, by Gerrit 8.
Miller, Jr., and Edward A. Preble.
There are several matters concerning the type
that are misleading. First, the type label reads
“Four Mile Run, D. C.”’ The type specimen is
accessioned as “Four Mile Run, Virginia.”
Four Mile Run is near the city of Alexandria,
but I have been unable to find an Alexandria
County, even in 1899. There was an Arlington
County, in which Alexandria was a city. At the
1 Contribution to the Herpetology of Maryland
and Delmarva, no. 4.
present Alexandria is an independent city (no
county).
Second, the date on the type specimen is July
15, 1899, not July 15, 1898, as quoted in Miller’s
original publication, and by Wright and Wright
(Handbook of frogs and toads, p. 310), which is a
quotation of the original description. The type
specimen is also accessioned as being collected
July 15, 1899.
Third, the pagination for the description of the
type of Hyla evittata is page 76, not page 75 as
cited in Schmidt’s checklist (p. 70), who gives
the location of Four Mile Run as Fairfax County,
Va. There is nothing to indicate the name of the
new species on page 75. Besides, the description
is really on page 76.
Fourth, the date of publication is September
28, 1899, not August 1899, as indicated on the
type label.
Fifth, concerning the paratypes, at least those
specimens designated as paratypes: There are
four specimens in the U.S. National Museum
which are designated as paratypes, collected at
Four Mile Run, Va., July 15, 1898. U.S.N.M.
nos. 66207, 66209, and 66210 have no stripes,
while no. 66208 has a long stripe. These four
specimens are referred to only by inference in
the original article by Miller, and the museum
numbers are not cited. However, Miller probably
did have these specimens before him while
describing the new species, and in the broadest
sense of the term could be considered paratypes.
However, from the measurements given below
he did not include theirs with that of the type.
When their measurements are included, the
range is well within that of typical Hyla cinerea.
Three other specimens are also designated as
paratypes, collected at Four Mile Run, Va.,
July 4, 1901. Since these could not have been
seen at the time the new species was described
(1899), they are topotypes and not paratypes,
U.S.N.M. nos. 29652-29654. Two of these have
no stripes, while the third has a white upper lip
back to the axial of the jaw.
Sixth, Miller states concerning the general
characteristics, “Like Hyla cinerea (Daudin), but
with broader, deeper muzzle and normally un-
OcTOBER 1956 REED:
striped body and legs.”’ Hyla cinerea was originally
described by Schneider, Hist. Amph. 1: 174. 1799,
as Calamita cinereus. Daudin described Hyla
lateralis, in Sonnini and Latreille, Hist. Nat.
Rep. 2: 180. 1802, from Charleston, 8. C. This
is considered a synonym of Hyla cinerea
(Schneider).
Because of the confusion and uncertainity
which accrues when these criteria are used in
identifying specimens from Maryland, Delaware,
and the main estuaries of the Chesapeake Bay,
as the Potomac, Patuxent, Gunpowder (including
Bird River and Dundee Creek), Elk, Sassafras,
Choptank, Nanticoke, Pocomoke, York, and
James Rivers, reviews of these criteria were made
by Noble and Hassler (Copeia 1936(1): 63) for
southern Maryland species and by Dunn (Proc.
Biol. Soe. Washington 50: 9-10. 1937) upon the
stratus of H. evittata, based on 126 specimens
from Virginia and Maryland.
In deseribing Hyla evittata, Miller (1899) had
noted that the lateral strips may be reduced in
length in some specimens of Hyla cinerea. This
phenomenon was considered a rare variation by
him. However, the short stripe occurs in nearly
all the populations in our region, a situation
which has lead to the belief that we are dealing
with intermediates or hybrids. These concepts
will be discussed later. There is a tendency for
the more northern populations of H. cinerea to
have some individuals with shorter or even no
stripes. According to Miller it was head shape
and not the body stripe which distinguished
evittata from the typical form.
Noble and Hassler (Copeia 1936(1): 63)
studied a population of Hyla cinerea (32 speci-
mens from Cove Point, Calvert County, Md.) in
which some lacked the light stripes along the
sides of the body; some had only a tinge of white
on the posterior part of the upper jaw; some had
stripes which extended beyond the tympanum
and faded out on the sides of the body. Specimens
from Wilmington, North Carolina, reported by
Myers (Copeia 1924, no. 131: 60) and restudied
in the American Museum by Noble and Hassler
2
showed a similar situation (14 adults studied
without stripes, 4 with partial stripes, 8 with full
stripes).
Seven statements in the original description
of Hyla evittata lead one to think that Miller
was not too sure that his was a new species.
For example, “Hyla evittata is at once dis-
tinguishable from H. cinerea by the absence of
HYLA CINEREA
329
the stripes on sides and legs, so conspicuous in
the latter’. Yet he cites specimens from Mis-
sissippi and Louisiana that have no stripes.
“Except for the difference in the shape of the
head, the two animals (the type and H. cinerea
from Bay St. Louis, Mississippi) agree perfectly
in form and dimensions.” Dunn has discounted
the value of the head measurements in separating
two populations as subspecies. ‘‘Hyla evittata
probably averages slightly larger than 4H.
cinerea.’ All that are mentioned in the paper are
the measurements of the type and the H. cinerea
specimen from Mississippi. Head and body
lengths are the same—48 mm; hind leg—69 and
68; femur same—20; tibia same—21; tarsus
same—l1; hind foot—17 and 15; humerus—8
and 9; forearm—S8 and 9; front foot same—10;
greatest width of head—14 and 13. Concerning
the eye to nostral measurements the type is
3.5 and H. cinerea 4; and the distance between
the nostrils is 3.5 and 2.5. These figures would
indicate the distance from the eye to the nostril
was shorter in H. evittata than in H. cinerea, and
that the distance between the nostrils was wider.
However, if we include the same measurements
of the seven specimens designated as the “‘para-
types” of H. evittata, we get a different ratio.
Eye to nostril Nostril to
nostril
U.S.N.M. no. 66207 4.5 4.0
66208 4.0 3.0
66209 4.0 3.5
66210 4.0 Bi)
29652 4.0 3.0
29653 4.0 3.5
29654 4.0 4.0
These figures indicate that the eye to nostril
distance is 4.0 mm, which is the same as that for
the Hyla cinerea compared with the type by
Miller. The nostril-to-nostril measurement aver-
ages 3.5 mm. However, the nostril-to-nostril
measurements on 20 specimens collected by
Reed or Daffin in Maryland, Virginia, and
Delaware average 3.5 mm also. So this variation
is within the normal deviation of a population
within the species.
“The granulation of the skin of belly and hind
legs is identical in the two animals.”’
Noble and Hassler, as well as Dunn, concluded
from their studies that evittata and cinerea could
not be separated by the head width or slope to
the snout. The former say that the series of
evittata in the American Museum ditfer from the
Cove Point specimens of cirerea in having a more
vertical, less sloping profile to the snout. Con-
330 JOURNAL OF THE
cerning the width of the head, which is said
to be broader in evittata, they state that their
series of cinerea exhibited a great variation in
width and no constant difference could be found.
Dunn agreed with this conclusion and added that
the type and topotypes of H. evittata could not be
separated from Carolina cinerea with any degree
of certainty. Dunn also noted that in many
species of Hylidae the male has a sloping snout
and the female a blunt one: this may be the case
in cinerea and evittata. So far as is known to
the present author, no one has sexed the museum
specimens of evittata and cinerea now available
for study, nor has anyone determined whether
the sexes are morphologically dimorphic.
Having discounted the characteristics of the
head as distinguishing evittata from cvnerea. Dunn
rested the status of evittata upon the lateral
stripes. From his study of 126 specimens from
Virginia and Maryland he reported 81 percent
of the upper tidewater Potomac populations with
no stripes or short ones; 41 percent of the other
Maryland and Virginia specimens with no
stripes or short ones; 25 per cent of the North
Carolina specimens with no stripes or short ones;
and all the Gulf coast specimens with long
stripes. This population study would indicate
that northern colonies have a tendency to de-
crease the length of the lateral stripes to the
point of obliteration. That this factor alone con-
stitutes the basis of a new species or even a new
subspecies is not substantiated by the study of
the specimens at hand.
Miller stated that unstriped specimens from
Bay St. Louis, Miss., and from New Orleans, La.,
had been seen by him. Thus, all (as stated by
Dunn) of the Gulf coast populations do not have
long stripes. Also, specimens with no stripes have
been reported from North Carolina (stated
above, 25 per cent) and from Maryland and
Virginia other than from the type locality of H.
evittata. Thus, throughout most of the range of
Hyla cinerea specimens with no stripes or with
partial stripes have been found, with a tendency
for those populations northward to exhibit a
greater percentage of the population to have
shortened or obliterated stripes.
Contradictory to Schmidt’s distribution, Dunn
concluded from his study of evittata and cinerea
that ‘“H. cinerea evittata is unknown from Dela-
ware and from the eastern side of the Delmarva
Peninsula.’’ Dunn’s evittata had no stripes, and
WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 10,
on this basis his statement is likewise untenable
in the light of collections by the author and
Ralph Daffin. Daffin has collected H. cinerea
with long and short stripes (in a proportion of
50-50) at Ocean Downs just west of Ocean City,
which is very near the Atlantic Ocean on the
eastern side of the Delmarva Peninsula, and the
author has collected specimens with no stripes
in Accomac County, Va., on the eastern side
of the Delmarva Peninsula also. Selbyville,
Sussex County, Del., is near the eastern coast.
Because of the occasional short stripe and long
stripe in the same population, Conant (Publ.
Soc., Nat. Hist. Delaware 1945: 4) concluded
that the populations of Hyla cinerea inhabiting
the Delmarva Peninsula were intermediate be-
tween the two subspecies. Some herpetologists
have gone so far as to assume that there are two
subspecies or species in our region and to call
these populations hybrids, designating them as
Hyla cinerea cinerea X evittata. Such conclusions
have been based upon phenotypic characteristics
and to the best of my knowledge have not been
substantiated by experimentation nor even ob-
servation.
Beside the specimens in the United States
National Museum which were carefully studied,
including the type and topotypes of Hyla evittata,
the author has collected and studied specimens
from several new localities in Maryland, Dela-
ware, and Virginia. The type locality for H.
evittata, Four Mile Run, in Fairfax County, Va.,
was visited by the author on July 17, 1956.
None of the frogs were heard calling at that time.
The material collected or studied by the
author from Worcester and Wicomico Counties,
Md., and from Accomac County, Va., indicates
that all three striped types may be found in pure
or mixed populations on the Delmarva Peninsula.
The specimens from the Accomac County locality
have no stripes; those from Ocean’ Downs have
about 50-50 short and long stripes; and those
from the Nanticoke River at Vienna (Wicomico-
Dorchester County) have long stripes.
Representative specimens from localities in
Maryland, Delaware, and the vicinity of the
District of Columbia, including the type locality
of H. evittata in Virginia, have been studied and
are listed below. The most northern locality on
the Delmarva Peninsula for Hyla cinerea is the
Chesapeake and Delaware Canal which connects
the Delaware River with the Elk River, which in
OcToBER 1956
turn leads to the Cheaspeake Bay. West of the
Chesapeake Bay the most northern locality is in
Baltimore County along the Chesapeake Bay
along two estuaries of the Gunpowder River,
Dundee Creek and Bird River, just north and
east of Chase (Daffin 506-507 and Reed 1191).
Maryann: St. Marys County: Hay’s Beach
near Ridge (Cooper, l.c., 1953); Charles. County:
Nanjemoy Swamp near Riverside, July 1935,
Reed. Calvert County: Abundant between Cove
Point and Solomons Island (Noble and Hassler,
l.c., 1936, 32 specimens typical cinerea, Amer.
Mus.); Cove Point (Putens, Bull. Nat. Hist.
Maryland 6(9): 57. 1936). Anne Arundel County:
Ritchie Highway between Magothy and Severn
Rivers, July 1956, Robert Simmons. Baltimore
County: Dundee Creek and Bird River, near Chase
along Grace’s Quarters Road, June 25-26, 1956,
Ralph Daffin 506-507, Reed 1191, Donald Lindsey
1-4. Cecil County: West end of Chesapeake-Dela-
ware Canal, M. Joseph Cadbury (see Dunn, Proc.
Biol. Soc. Washington 50: 10. 1937). Cecil-Kent
County: Georgetown, on Sassafras River, July 20,
1915, Paul Lorrilliere (as H. evittata) (see Fowler,
Copeia 1915, no. 22: 38). (note: Georgetown is in
Kent County, which lies to the south of the
Sassafras River, but the record states the specimen
is from Cecil County). Queen Annes County: Near
Centerville, June 23, 1938, R. H. McCauley
(U.S.N.M. nos. 104446-50), and July 15, 1938,
R. H. McCauley (U.S.N.M. nos. 104457). Talbot
County: Easton, H. L. Clark, September 8, 1903
(U.S.N.M. no. 32106). Dorchester County: Cam-
bridge, June 1928 (U.S.N.M. nos. 75287-8) ; Lloyds,
W. P. Hay, June 1906 (U.S.N.M. nos. 36673-82),
July 9, 1906 (U.S.N.M. nos. 100840-6), July 1907
(U.S.N.M. nos. 37833-7); Cambridge, September
1933, R. W. Jackson (U.S.N.M. no. 92598); Black-
water Refuge, 10 miles south of Cambridge. July
25, 19388, R. H. McCauley (U.S.N.M. nos. 104463-
77). Dorchester-Wicomico County: Along Nanticoke
River on both sides of the river, several large
colonies, July 9, 1956, Reed 1150-51. Worcester
County: Cedar Hall, June 27, 1938, R. H. McCauley
(U.S.N.M. nos. 104451-6); pond 5 miles west of
Ocean City at Ocean Downs, June 15, 1956, Ralph
Daffin 458 and 545-554; swamp south of Pocomoke
City, July 9, 1956, Reed; meadow, Girdletree,
July 10, 1956, Reed.
VIRGINIA—EASTERN SHORE: Accomac County: 2
miles south of Oak Hall, July 9, 1956, Reed 1107.
Accomac-Northampton County: Exmore, June 1938,
M. K. Brady (USNM nos. 75277-86).
VireintA—along Poromac River: fairfax
County: Four Mile Run (type Locauitry for Hyla
evittata), July 15, 1899 (not 1898, as stated by
Wright and Wright in Handbook of frogs and toads,
p. 310. Also there is no Alexandria County in
Virginia), Gerrit S. Miller, Jr., and Edward A.
Preble (U.S.N.M. no. 26291); paratypes, same
locality, July 15, 1898 (U.S.N.M. nos. 66207-10),
KE. A. Preble, July 1898 (U.S.N.M. no. 45967);
REED: HYLA CINEREA
331
G. S. Miller, July 4, 1901 (U.S.N.M. nos. 29652-
54); P. Bartsch, 1985 (U.S.N.M. no. 101170); Dyke,
below Alexandria, September 17, 1898, G.S. Miller.
(U.S.N.M. no. 66211); Alexandria, July 3, 1912,
J. Hunter (U.S.N.M. nos. 58085-6); New Alex-
andria, E. T. Wherry, September 1923 (U.S.N.M.
no. 66327); Dogue Creek, near Fort Belvoir, June
4, 1939, H. J. Cole (U.S.N.M. nos. 127467-85);
Little Hunting Creek, May 28, 1911, W. D. Appel
(U.S.N.M. nos. 55443-4); 1923, M. K. Brady
(U.S.N.M. nos 66474-75); Mount Vernon, W. P.
Hay, October 15, 1892 (U.S.N.M. nos. 39911-12);
June 1893 (U.S.N.M. nos. 20891-33); E. A. Preble,
October 28, 1900 (U.S.N.M. nos. 27742). Prince
William County: Quantico, October 13, 1901,
G.S. Miller (U.S.N.M. nos. 29620-21).
Disrricr or CotumBia: Washington, July 1,
1933, I. E. Gray (U.S.N.M. no. 91745, as cinerea);
Oxon Run Marsh, August 1935, Perrygo & East
(U.S.N.M. nos. 101159-69, as evittata); Oxon Run,
July 18, 1936, C. S. East (U.S.N.M. nos. 107690-9,
as evittata); August 19385 (U.S.N.M. nos. 101434;
101159-69) (Oxon Run borders Prince Georges
County to the south side of the District of Co-
lumbia).
DELAWARE: Sussex County:
Selbyville, July 10-11, 1956, Reed.
Meadow near
MARYLAND
rg
| DELAWARE
VIRGINIA
(
Fie. 1—Distribution of Hyla etnerea (Schneider)
in Maryland, Delaware, and Virginia.
332 JOURNAL OF
For the Delmarva Peninsula, Roger Conant
(Publ. Soc. Nat. Hist. Delaware 1945: 4) listed
Cecil, Dorchester, Kent (Md.), Northampton,
Sussex, Talbot, and Worcester Counties, without
giving any specific records.
Hyla cinerea (Schneider), Garman, Bull. Illinois
State Lab. Nat. Hist. 3: 189. 1891, based on
Calamita cinereus Schneider, Hist. Amph.
1: 174. 1799. Syn.: Hyla cinerea cinerea
Stejneger and Barbour, Checklist, ed. 2:
30. 1923; Hyla bilineata Shaw, Gen. Zool. 3:
136. 1802; Hyla lateralis Daudin, in Sonnini
and Latreille, Hist. Nat. Rept. 2: 180. 1802;
Hyla semifasciata Hallowell, Proc. Acad. Nat.
Sci. Philadelphia 8: 307. 1856; Hyla evittata
Miller, Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington 13: 76.
1899; Hyla cinerea evittata Stejneger & Bar-
bour, Checklist, ed. 2: 30. 1928.
Range: Delaware (Sussex County) and Mary-
land (Baltimore County & Cecil County) south-
ward along the Potomac River and south to
Florida, westward in the Gulf States to Texas;
and north in the Mississippi Basin to southern
Illinois.
Concerning the range of Hyla cinerea in Vir-
ginia, there seems to be a gap on the peninsula
between the Potomac River and the Rappa-
hannock River (Northern Neck) and the penin-
sula between the Rappahannock River and the
York River. However, at the mouth of the York
River, southward around on the James River and
up to Surry County, Va., Hyla cinerea and
specimens designated as H. cinerea X evittata
have been collected. Also, across the mouth of
the Chesapeake Bay in Princess Anne County,
Hyla cinerea and the putative hybrids have been
collected.
The author has collected four years on North-
ern Neck and has been unable to find Hyla
cinerea. Several plants and animals are found
on the southern side of the Potomac River but
THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
not on the northern side; as Hwmeces inexpectatus,
and the plants Galax aphylla, Asarum virginicum,
and Oxydendrum arboreum. Several plants are
known which range from the York—James
Peninsula and Princess Anne County region to
the eastern shore of Virginia, most notable being
Trillium pusillum var. virginianum, Xanthoxylum
clava-herculis, and Baptisia alba. Hyla cinerea
also seems to follow this pattern of distribution,
with the exception that it has migrated further
northward and westward. Cypress went up the
inner side of the Delmarva Peninsula into
Pungoteague and up the Pocomoke River, as well
as up the western shore of the Chesapeake Bay,
especially up the Patuxent River. Specimens of
Hyla cinerea from the two remaining peninsulas of
Virginia are highly desirable to complete our
picture for the distribution of Hyla cinerea in the
Maryland—Virginia—Delware region.
The specimens studied from the lower Chesa-
peake Bay region of Virginia are listed below.
Virainia: York County: Yorktown, June 22,
1948, R. L. Hoffman (U.S.N.M. nos. 131634-6),
near mouth of York River. Elizabeth City County:
Hampton, May 1903, G. 8. Miller (U.S.N.M. nos.
31662-5); same, but grouped as H. cinerea X
evittata, May 1903, G. S. Miller (U.S.N.M. nos.
31659-61). Warwick County: Menchville, August 2,
1949, R. L. Hoffman (U.S.N.M. nos. 131940-2).
Surry County: A. H. Jennings, May 1917 (U.S.N.M.
no. 59879), as H. cinerea X evittata. Princess Anne
County: Virginia Beach, July 13, 1928, H. E. Ewing
& C. S. East (U.S.N.M. nos. 75377-81); Sand
Bridge, August 6, 1946, Hoffman & Kleinpeter
(U.S.N.M. no. 133696); between Pungo and Sigma,
August 1, 1946, Hoffman & Kleinpeter (U.S.N.M.
no. 124860), as H. cinerea X evittata.
In conclusion, it is fairly well established that
there exists no definite set of factors which would
distinguish two distinct species or subspecies of
Hyla cinerea. Therefore, taxonomically all speci-
mens heretofore designated as Hyla cinerea
evittata or Hyla evittata should be designated as
Hyla cinerea.
The substitution of analogy for fact vs the bane of chemical philosophy; the
legitimate use of analogy is to connect facts together and to guide to new experi-
ments. —H. Davy
VOL. 46, No. 10 |
OcTOBER 1956
TRESSLER: OSTRACODA FROM BROMELIADS
ZOOLOGY —Ostracoda from bromeliads in Jamaica and Florida. Wiis L. TREsS-
LER,! U.S. Navy Hydrographic Office.
The presence of a distinct fauna existing
in the water entrapped in the leaf cups of
bromeliads has been known for many years.
Miiller (1880) first reported upon this unique
fauna from observations made in southern
Brazil. An elaborate study of the bromeliad
leaf-cup fauna was later made by Picado
(1913), and since then reports have been
made on the fauna of isolated regions. The
present author (Tressler, 1941) summarized
the findings of previous writers and reported
on two ostracods which were found in leaf
cups of bromeliads from Puerto Rico. Of
these, one was a species of the little-known
genus Metacypris, which was described as a
new species (Metacypris maracaoensis); the
other, Candonopsis kingsleyw, while known
from several areas, was reported for the first
time from bromeliads. Other ostracods previ-
ously reported from bromeliads include
Metacypris bromeliarum (Miller, 1881) and
two species imperfectly described by Picado
(1913) from Costa Rica. The present paper
adds two more species of Ostracoda to the
bromeliad fauna and reports on new loca-
tions for two species already described from
this habitat; Candonopsis anisitsi described
from Paraguay by Daday (1905), previously
has not been known from bromeliads, while
a new species of Metacypris, MW. laesslei is
described for the first time. New locations
are given for Metacypris bromeliarum and
M. maracaoensis.
The present report is based upon an ex-
tensive collection made from bromeliad leaf
cups by Dr. Albert M. Laessle of the De-
partment of Biology, University of Florida,
during the summer of 1952. Careful sam-
plings were made of the outer and inner leaf
cups of the same plant and from different
plants in a number of widely separated
areas on the island of Jamaica and from
three areas in southern Florida. Nearly 100
samples were found to contain ostracods. In
many instances a chemical analysis was
made of the entrapped water.
The slides of the dissected specimens have
1 The opinions expressed in this report are the
author’s own and do not reflect those of the Hydro-
graphic Office or the U. 8. Navy.
been deposited in the U. 8. National
Museum as type specimens.
DISTRIBUTION AND ECOLOGY
Collections on the island of Jamaica were
made from coastal areas of little or no ele-
vation and from five regions located in the
main central mountain chain extending east
and west along the axis of the island. Here,
elevations of 2,000 feet to 4,500 feet are
found. Coastal areas include, from east to
west, Ecclestown (800 feet) and Portland
Parish (less than 1,000 feet), at the southern
tip of the island; Union Hill (500 feet) in the
north central portion; Hermitage Dam
(1,500 feet) just north of Kingston; Lucca
(slight elevation) and Negril (shght eleva-
tion) at the extreme western tip of the
island. The mountainous areas, from east to
west include Hardware Gap (4,500 feet),
other areas in the Blue Mountains (eleva-
tions from 3,200 to 4,000 feet); Juan de
Bolas (2,500 feet); Christiana (3,000 feet);
and Mocho (2,000 feet).
The distribution of ostracod species identi-
fied appears to be irregular and conforms to
no pattern of altitude or nature of the soil.
Ecclestown, Union Hill, Christiana, Mocho,
Lucca, and Negril are in limestone regions,
while the others, namely, Portland Parish,
the Blue Mountains, Hermitage Dam, and
Juan de Bolas are in noncalcareous areas.
The single new species described, Metacypris
laesslet, appears to be restricted to elevations
of 2,000 feet and over, being found only at
Mocho, Christiana, Hardware Gap, and in
St. Andrews Parish at Silver Hill Gap in the
Blue Mountains.
A detailed report on the analysis of water
samples taken from leaf cup reservoirs will
be given in a final report on these collections
by Dr. Laessle. It is sufficient for the pur-
pose of the present taxonomic report to
state that the ostracods were collected from
water samples displaying a wide range of
environmental conditions. Dissolved oxygen
readings ranged from practically zero to 8
p.p.m.; carbon dioxide varied from 5 p.p.m.
to 40 p.p.m., while pH readings ranged from
pH 4.0 to 7.0 and averaged pH 5.0. Most
334
species of ostracods are very tolerant of wide
fluctuations in environmental factors and
will exist under conditions of oxygen deple-
tion, pollution, and other unfavorable en-
vironmental conditions after other forms
have perished. Some species are known to
creep along the under surface of the surface
film, apparently to secure oxygen. It is not
surprising therefore that such a wide range
of environmental factors was found through-
out the collection of water samples and that
ostracods were almost universally present in
the collections.
Suborder Popocopa
Family Cypriparn: Subfamily CyPrinar
Genus Candonopsis Vavra, 1891
Thin shelled forms, laterally compressed.
Anterior antennae slender; posterior antennae,
with penultimate segment subdivided, poorly
developed natatory setae. Terminal segment of
mandibular palp greatly produced. Maxillipeds
with vibratory plate bearing three, thick, plumose
setae; palp in male transformed into a prehensile
organ for copulation. Dorsal margin of furca
without setae. This genus contains only six
species, all but one of which have been reported
only from the Southern Hemisphere.
Candonopsis anisitsi Daday
Fig. 6
Candonopsis anisitst Daday, Zool. 44: 256, pl. 16,
figs. 16-19, 20-26. 1905.
Specific characters.—Female: From the side
elongated, height equal to about half the length;
highest about three-fourths of the length from the
anterior end. Dorsal margin gently rounded and
sloping anteriorly; ventral margin indented.
Anterior extremity somewhat less broadly
rounded than posterior. From above, narrowly
compressed. Terminal setae of third thoracic leg
of equal length. Furca sixteen times longer than
narrowest width; terminal and dorsal setae
absent. Length 0.97-1.08 mm, height 0.48-0.53
mm. Color of preserved specimen, light.
Male: Similar to female in shape and structure
of appendages. Height of shell somewhat greater
in relation to length than female. Length 1.00-
1.20 mm.
Remarks.—This species may easily be taken
for C. kingsleyi on superficial examination but
may be distinguished by the equal length of the
terminal setae of the third thoracic leg.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
|
vou. 46, No. 10.
Occurrence—Males and females were found |
in all but four of the eleven widely separated |
areas which were sampled on the island of |
Jamaica. These areas were as follows: Portland |
Parish at an altitude of less than 1,000 feet, |
largely noncalcareous region on July 18 to July |
24, 1952; the Wagwater River, just above Her-
mitage Dam, St. Andrews, at an elevation of
1,500 feet, noncalcareous region on July 31, 1952;
Juan de Bolas, elevation 2,500 feet, noncalcareous
region on August 1 to 7, 1952; near Christiana
in Manchester Parish, elevations 3,000 feet,
limestone region, on August 9 to 11 and August
27 to 29, 1952, and September 3, 1952; near
Lucca, in the northwest portion of the island, in
Westmoorland Parish, at a slight elevation, cal-
careous region, on September 1, 1952, near Mocho
in the west central portion of the island, lime-
stone region, elevation 2,000 feet, on August 15
and 18, 1952; and at the base of the John Crow
Mountains near Eccelstown in the northwest
corner of the island at 800 feet elevation, a cal-
careous region, on September 8, 1952. The species
is evidently widely distributed over most of the
island. It was not found at the higher elevations
in the Blue Mountains nor in the north central
portion.
Distribution—The species was previously
known only from Paraguay, where they were
collected from pools formed by inundations of
rivers.
Family CyTHERIDAE
Genus Metacypris Brady and Robertson, 1870
Shells very broad and short; seen from the
dorsal view, width about three-fourths the length.
First antennae with five or six segments; second
antennae 4-segmented; exopodite jointed. Mandi-
bles with obscurely segmented palp. Mazxilla
with three masticatory processes and a short
palp; branchial plate without aberrant or orally
directed setae. Furca of female with three setae.
Metacypris bromeliarum (F. Miller)
Fig. 8
Elpidium bromeliarum F. Miller,
Nac. Rio de Janeiro 4: 27. 1881.
Metacypris bromeliarum G. W. Miiller, Das Tier-
reich 31, Ostracoda: 316. 1912.
Specific characters—Female: Seen from the
side, ovoid, height five-eighths length, highest in
middle; anterior extremity considerably less
broadly rounded than posterior; dorsal margin
arched, sloping steeply to anterior end; ventral
Arch. Mus.
OcToBER 1956 TRESSLER: OSTRACODA FROM BROMELIADS 335
margin almost straight. Seen from above, very
tumid, width four-fifths length; anterior end
slightly more pointed than posterior. Surface of
valves smooth with no pits and few hairs. Color
brown. First antenna with five segments; dorsal
border of first segment terminates in a thickly
haired wart; spine on second segment reaches
to middle of fourth segment. Second antenna
with exopodite reaching to tips of terminal claws.
Mandibular teeth, seven, not split. Length 0.84
mm, height 0.52 mm, width 0.74 mm.
Male: Unknown.
5
Fras. 1-5.—Metacypris laesslet, n. sp.: 1, Dorsal view, female; 2, outline of left valve, female; 3,
mandibular teeth, female; 4, second antenna, female; 5, first antenna, female. Fira. 6.—Candonopsis
anisitst Daday. Fra. 7.—Metacypris maracaoensis Tressler. Fia. 8.—Metacypris bromeliarum (F.
Miiller).
336
Occurrence.—Females were widely distributed
over the island being found in all but two of the
eleven areas sampled. These locations were as
follows: Portland Parish at an elevation of less
than 1,000 feet, a largely noncalcareous region
on July 18 to 24, 1952; Wagwater River, just
above Hermitage Dam, St. Andrews, elevation
1,500 feet, noncalcareous region on August 1 to
7, 1952; near Christiana in Manchester Parish,
elevation 3,000 feet, limestone region on August
9 to 11, 1952, and August 27 to 29, 1952; near
Lucca in the northwest portion of the island in
Westmoorland Parish, at a slight elevation, cal-
careous region, on September 1, 1952; near Nigril
in the extreme western portion of the island at a
slight elevation, calcareous region on September
2, 1952; and at the base of the John Crow Moun-
tains near Ecclestown in the northeast corner
of the island, elevation 800 feet, calcareous region
on September 8, 1952.
Distribution —This species has previously been
reported only from leaf cups of bromeliads in
southern Brazil.
Metacypris maracaoensis Tressler
Fig. 7
Metacypris maracaoensis Tressler, Journ. Washing-
ton Acad. Sci. 31 (6): 268. 1941.
Specific characters—Female: Seen from the
side, oval in shape with greatest height about
one-half the length and highest in the middle.
Dorsal margin arched; ventral margin straight.
Posterior extremity more broadly rounded than
anterior. From above, very broadly rounded
posterior extremity and pointed anterior end.
Large eyes, fused. Surface of valves smooth with
a few scattered hairs. Color gray with a much
darker area in the anterior half of the valve. A
mass of polygonal areas in vicinity of the eyes.
First antenna with five segments, the spine on
the second segment reaching to middle of the
fourth segment. Second antenna with exopodite
reaching to tips of terminal claws. Mandible
with eight teeth which are split. Length 0.72 mm,
height 0.37 mm, width 0.65 mm.
Male: Unknown.
Remarks.—This species is similar to MW. cordata
but is larger, the valves are without pits, and the
mandibular teeth are different, numbering only
four or five in M. cordata.
Occurrence.—Numerous females were collected
from bromeliad leaf cups near Immokalee, Collier
County, Fla., in July 1953.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 46, No. 10°.
Distribution —This species is known only from
a similar habitat in the Maracao National Forest,
Puerto Rico, where it was collected at an eleva-
tion of between 2,800 and 3,000 feet in January
and December.
Metacypris laesslei, n. sp.
Figs. 1-5
Specific characters —Female: Seen from the
side, oval in outline, height equal to about five-
eighths length, highest in middle. Dorsal margin
arched, ventral margin straight. Anterior ex-
tremity less broadly rounded than posterior.
From above, width equal to six-sevenths length,
anterior end somewhat pointed, posterior end
broadly rounded. Surface of valves covered with
small pits and a few hairs. Color brown with
darker brown spots. First antenna with five
segments; spine on second segment reaches to
terminal fourth of fourth segment. Second an-
tenna with exopodite barely reaching to tips of
terminal claws. Mandibular teeth split and
seven in number. Length 0.78 mm, height 0.49
mm, width 0.66 mm.
Male: Unknown.
Remarks.—This species is similar in size and
shape to M. maracaoensis but differs in the pres-
ence of pits on the valves and in the number of
mandibular teeth.
Occurrence—Numerous females were found
in three locations on the island of Jamaica,
namely, in the Blue Mountains in St. Andrews
Parish at an elevation of 3,200 to 4,000 feet,
noncalcareous region, on July 3 to 9, 1952; near
Mocho, west-central portion of the island, in a
limestone region at an elevation of 2,000 feeton
August 15 to 18, 1952; and near Christiana,
Manchester Parish, elevation 3,000 feet, lime-
stone region, on August 27 to 29, 1952. Female
holotype, U. 8. N. M. no. 99387. Type locality,
Blue Mountains, St. Andrews Parish, Jamaica.
LITERATURE CITED
Dapay, E. von. Untersuchungen tiber die Stiss-
wasser - Mikrofauna Paraguays. Zoologica
(Stuttgart) 44: 1-374. 1905.
Miiier, F. Wassertiere in Baumwipfeln. Kos-
mos 6: 386-888. 1880.
Descripsao do Elpidium bromeliarum.
Arch. Mus. Nac. Rio de Janeiro 4: 27-34. 1881.
Picapo, M. C. Les bromeliaces epiphytes consi-
derees comme milieu biologique. Bull. Se.
France Belgique (7) 47: 215-360. 1913.
TRESSLER, W. L. Ostracoda from Puerto Rican
bromeliads. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 31
(6): 264-269. 1941.
Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences
DEST O rote See Cee ne ee ees R. E. Gipson, Applied Physics Laboratory
PP ESECENE-CLECLS «0c 2a 2 iciciis yetee tsa ais eo eee Wiutir1am W. Rugey, Geological Survey
SAS TALLIS o5 a Oe Eee He1nz SpEcHT, National Institutes of Health
HI COSUTET o.oo 2-22 5 =) 2154- Howarp 8. Rappieye, Coast and Geodetic Survey (Retired)
LAL REI VITO? » 60 GO che ORE ICR OE ORME yt OS IPE TP a
Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications
Haratp A, Reaper, U.S. National Museum
Elected Members of the Board of Managers:
POM ANUATVRLOD (ee emis eeepc ne ated A. T. McPuerson, A. B, GuRNEY
FROMM T yl GOS erecta os eccves. cms coer oecioteeeiousaectueeacleyr fois W. W. Rusey, "J. R. SWALLEN
ROMA D UAT yas LODO Bees saacies ccs ae eevee Francois N. FRENKIEL, F. L. CAMPBELL
Board of Managers...... All the above officers plus the Vice Presidents and the Editor
SO RUTRS 5 aC CRE Ee CuesTER H. Pages, National Bureau of Standards (EM 2-4040)
Associate Editors....... RonaLp Bamrorp, Howarp W. Bonn, ImMaNuEL ESTERMANN
Haecutive Commitiec...............3.-.08e eee R. E. Gipson (chairman), W. W. Rusey,
Hernz Specut, H. S. Rappieye, A. B. GurNEY
Commitiee on Membership.......... Louis R. MaxweE.u (chairman), Naval Ordnance
Laboratory (HE 4-7100), Gzorcz Anastos, W. H. Avzry, Rocer W. CuRTIS,
CAURCHIUL EISENHART, GEOFFREY EDSALL, J. H. McMrieNn
Committee on Meetings.......... A. M. SToNE (chairman), qapelicd Physics Laboratory
(JU 9-7700), Partie H. ABELSON, KENNETH S. Cote, Lron F. Curtis, J. WALLACE
Joyce, Tuomas J. KILuiaN, Constantin C. Nrxirororr, T. D. StEwarr
Commitiee on Monographs:
PORNSTAR GST jess there vic bs icles sete eles Harautp A. Reupsr, Witiram A. Dayton
Mopanuary L958... 8) oc end ae ees Dean B. CowlE, Josep P. E. Morrison
MN MEN RIND IAL GOO orc eee os oie cts oie esate fete ante Seay
Committee on Awards of Scientific Achievement
Int C. ScHOONOVER (general chairman), National Bureau of Standards (HM 2-4040)
For Biological Sciences...... Micwarn J. PELCZAR (chairman), University of Mary-
land (WA 7-3800), James M. Hunpiey, Witire W. SmirH, JonL WARREN,
R. B. Wrrarow
For Engineering Sciences...... ArNnotpD Scotr (chairman), National Bureau of
Standards (EM 2-4040), Frank A. Breerstern, J. M. CaLupWwELL, MicHAEL
GoupBeEreG, T. J. Hickitny, Paut A. SmitH
For Physical Sciences...... C. R. Nauser (chairman), George Washington Univer-
sity (ST 3-0250), Howarp W. Bonp, IMmManurL EsteRMANN, PETER KING,
L. L. Marton, Extiorr Montrott, E. H. Vestine
For Teaching of Science...... B. D. Van Evera (chairman), George Washington
University (ST 3-0250), RonaLp BamrorpD, Herman BRANSON, KuITH JOHNSON,
Howarp Owens, Marcaret Patterson, B. W. SirteRLY
Committee on Grants-in-Aid for Research
W.J. Hamer (chairman), National Bureau of Standards (EM 2-4040), W. R. WepzE.L,
H. W. Weis
Committee on Policy and Planning
Frank M. Serzurr (chairman), U. S. National Museum (NA 8-1810)
PROMI AMUAT YAO Gare oles care sore. sayel leveraiecuecsle sven aa ans JouHn HE. Grar, Raymond J. SEEGER
Ito. demiiinnydOG is oe aeocee omic cen e eieameete Francis M. DEFANDORF, F. M. Serzter
Pow pranys LOSQ se cise lacs suches creer sus eis MARGARET PITTMAN, Watpo L. Scumrrr
Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent
ARcHIBALD T. McPHERSON (chairman), National Bureau of Standards (EM 2-4040)
POR aAnU satya GOW tea se eran: erty aces aoe Ira B. Hansen, W1Lt1aM J. YOUDEN
plopanuarygl 9582-2 deo cesar ene ered ARCHIBALD T. McPHeErson, W. T. Reap
ROR ANUAT VI OO eee crs orc te ies eeu ceomuteen cue a Paut R. Mituer, Leo ScHuBERT
Committee on Science Education (Academy representation on Joint Board for Improve-
ment of Science Education)...... Raymonp J. SEEGER (chairman), National Science
Foundation (ST 3-2140), ArNoxp H. Scorr, KrrtH Jonnson, Wapr H. MarsHatu,
JoHn K. TayLor
RURAL Co Como Of Bhs Alo Alo Sonoscocce sougosoodovodounuv0E A. NELSON SAYRE
Committee of Auditors...... Epwarp WicHmrs (chairman), National Bureau of Stand-
ards (HM 2-4040), M. C. Henprrson, P. H. Heinze
OOTUIMULLECROTMINCLUCTS erp cyeteiay Sevee vee er Meh ee Ge ah ese sns auciele ieee
Committee on Ways and Means...... Francois N. FRENKIEL (chairman), Applied Physics
Laboratory (JU 9-7100),S. F. Buaxr, Pauu H. Oruser, W. T. Reap, B. F. ScrrpNER
Commitiee on Public Relations...... A. I, Manan (chairman), Applied Physics Labora-
tory (JU 9-7700), H. Specnt, Howarp Bono
CONTENTS
Page
Puysics—Transients in signal analysis. Epira L. R. Coruiss........ 305
PsLEONTOLOGY.—An acanthodian fish from the lower Permian of Texas.
DAvip H. DuUNKLE and Sercius H. MAmAY...............52 5008 308
Botany.—The genus Hilaria (Gramineae). Ernest R. SouNns........ 311
EntomMoLtocy.—New Neotropical genera and species of apterous aradids
(Hemiptera), Cari Jd: DRAKE: ..........°.-.....7) eee 322
HeErPeToLtocy.—Hyla cinerea in Maryland, Delaware, and Virginia,
with notes on the taxonomic status of Hyla cinerea evittata. CLYDE
BOR BED. scp eae rns eee cua echice celeron Get 328
ZooLtocy.—Ostracoda from bromeliads in Jamaica and Florida. Wuttuis
LYTRESSEBRY. . ook bei hols Bee eee 333
Notes: andvNews's *ic eck ees uo ee ara ee 307, 310, 327
VOLUME 46. November 1956 NUMBER 11
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
TEE
=a Saat
Published Monthly by the
Bea S HINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: CHESTER H. Paces, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RonaLD Bamrorp, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL EsTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JoURNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouURNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 33144 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges——Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. el these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the PRocEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. 8. National Museum, Washington 25, D.C.
Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per Year.................0----seeeees $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per N Vumber
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10. oo $0.7 70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22° incl. (21 numbers per vol.) . ss. 8:00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 a 90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JourRNat (vol. 1 to vol. 45, incl.) available F
for sale to libraries at $378.50. ;
MonoerarH No. 1, “The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’? by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
INDEX to JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS..............0...eeeeeee: $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete....................02eeeeeee $25.00
Single volumes, unbound tnble ere eacuhele a aeale sees a sities erage eae aioe eae Oooo 2.00
Singlesnumbers isa e eakertynces uk: ore ene ee ie ee Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘“‘Washington Academy of Sciences’’ and
addressed to the Treasurer, H. S. RapPLere, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
D.C.
Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Specut, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 19265.
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 46
NoveMBER 1956
No. 11
MATHEMATICS.—Unimodular matrices of order 2 that commute Karu GouLp-
BERG, National Bureau of Standards. (Communicated by C. H. Page.)
(Received September 12, 1956)
We shall prove the following:
Theorem: Let A and B be rational integral
unimodular matrices of order 2. Then A and
B commute if and only if they are, within
sign, powers of the same rational integral
unimodular matrix.
A consequence of this theorem is: Hvery
abelian subgroup of the modular group 1s
cyclic.
The sufficiency is clear.
For the necessity it will be sufficient to
find any matrix K such that A e,k™
and B = e.K” with m and n rational in-
tegers and e; = +1 for7 = 1,2. Let(m,n) =
i aie) So — 1 Sram Kigy—) Kes hen
there exist rational integers a and b such
that am + bn s so that
Ko = Ks Kanrbn = e2e 2 A*B?
is a rational integral unimodular matrix
with the property that
A => @1Kiy”® and B = C.K o"°.
If A is scalar then A = +8B°, which satis-
fies the theorem trivially. In what follows
we shall assume that A is nonscalar.
Since A is of order two and not scalar. it
is non-derogatory. Thus AB = BA implies,
see [1], that B is a polynomial in A, or that
there exists numbers o and p such that B =
oA + pl, where J is the identity matrix of
order 2. If A is diagonal then B is diagonal
and the fact that it is unimodular and not
scalar implies o +1 and p Q), Jat Al iis
not diagonal then we can compare off di-
agonal elements, to show that co, and there-
1 This work was supported in part by the Office
of Naval Research.
fore p, must be rational, see [2]. It follows
that there must be integers x, y and z rela-
tively prime in pairs with vz # O such that
(1)
If we denote the characteristic roots of
A by a; and a: and those of B by B; and
GBs we have
( ) 28; =
From this equation we see that if the
characteristic roots of A are irrational they
lie in the same quadratic field as those of B.
We shall treat this case first.
Since the characteristic roots of A are
irrational they are distinct. Therefore there
exists a non-singular matrix U such that
Since A is unimodular a; is a unit in a
quadratic field and so is, within sign, a
power of » the fundamental unit of that
field if it is real or the primitive root of unity
of highest period if it is complex. That is,
for some rational integers m and e, +1
we have
Bley = Gas == ill,
2 COU ate The Re
0
a2
TWANG ge eee
UAL e
ay ey” and ay = ey”
where u denotes the conjugate of u.
We can rewrite this in matrix form by
letting
— ey ~Am or
uw O
0
A
m
UAU
A = e(UAU)™.
to obtain
DEC 2 1 1956
398
Now if UAU™ is diagonal so is UBU™
as can be seen from equation (1). And be-
cause the characteristic roots of B are units
in the same quadratic field as those of A
there must be rational integers n and e: =
+1 such that UBU+ = eA” or
B= e(U7AU)™,
which completes the proof for the case of
irrational characteristic roots.
If the characteristic roots of A are ra-
tional we have either
ay = —a = +1 or a=—a=ea =.
In the case of distinct rational roots,
equation (2) and the fact that B is unimodu-
lar yields x? = 22 = landy = OorA = +B
which satisfies the theorem trivially.
In the case of equal roots there exists a
non-singular matrix U such that
WA! = & G i pene
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 11 °
From equations (1) and (2) it is clear that
A op
UBU™ = e fe ) @= +t1Lr= cere
Let
aa | a U
0: ye
Then
and
B = Co KK 61°27
Since z and eyeov are rational integers,
this completes our proof.
REFERENCES
(1) Mac Durrep, C. C. The theory of matrices: 93-
94. New York, 1946.
(2) Taussky-Topp, O. On matrix classes corre-
sponding to an ideal and its inverse Lemma
1. To appear in Illinois Journ. Math.
oS ee
SURGE VOLTAGE BREAKDOWN IN A NONUNIFORM FIELD
A knowledge of high-voltage discharge phe-
nomena is of primary importance in the design
of electrical equipment. For example, an under-
standing of electrical breakdown in air makes
possible accurate determination of safe and
economic insulation requirements for high-voltage
transformers and other apparatus. Information
on discharge mechanisms is also of considerable
value in electrical surge measurements carried
out to provide data for the design of power
systems.
Although several acceptable theories of break-
down in a uniform field have been developed,!
the much more common problem of nonuniform
field breakdown has been relatively unexplored.
To provide data on this process, an investigation
was recently conducted by J. H. Park and H. N.
Cones, of the National Bureau of Standards.”
1 Basic process of gaseous electronics, by L. B.
Logs, chapters 8 and 9 (Univ. of California Press,
1955); Theory of gaseous conduction and elec-
tronics, by F. A. Maxrietp and R. R. BENEpicr7,
page 270 (McGraw-Hill, 1941); and The mecha-
nism of the electric spark, by L. B. Lorn and J.
M. Meerx (Stanford University Press, 1941).
2For further technical details, see Surge
voltage breakdown of air in a nonuniform field, by
Their results verify a difference, suggested by the
data of earlier experimenters, between break-
down mechanisms in uniform and nonuniform
fields.
Cathode-ray oscilloscope records and photo-
graphs of the discharges obtained by the Bureau
reveal that in a nonuniform field discharge
streamers (corona) are initiated by a sudden
current rise (the first discharge pip). This current
quickly decreases, remaining near zero unless
complete breakdown is to occur. For gap lengths
sufficiently short or for voltages sufficiently
high, the first discharge pip is followed by a
second rise in current which increases until
breakdown occurs. Polarity also affects the gap
spacing at which breakdown or discharge
streamers occur and the speed of formation of
these streamers.
The tests were conducted under usual labora-
tory conditions of pressure and humidity, and
the nonuniform field was obtained by using
electrodes of dissimilar geometry. The high-
voltage electrode consisted of a circular plane,
Uy H. Park and H. N. Consgs, Journ. Res. NBS
56: 201. April 1956.
NOVEMBER 1956
84 cm in diameter, made of an aluminum alloy.
Tt was placed 86.4 cm above and parallel to the
faboratory floor, which had a grounded metal
grid imbedded in its surface and was used as a
ground plane. The ground electrode was a
sphere, 1.6 cm in diameter, mounted at the end
of a conductor and located an adjustable distance
beneath the center of the high-voltage plane
electrode. The conductor, centered in a grounded
tube, was connected to a coaxial cable, which
terminated at a cathode ray oscillograph. This
arrangement permitted an accurate measurement
of prebreakdown current and computation of the
initial electrical field.
Discharge phenomena were studied by holding
the peak voltage of the applied surge at 145 kv
and changing the gap spacing. Data were obtained
under four conditions of applied voltage: a steeply
rising surge with the sphere positive, a slowly
rising surge with the sphere positive, a steeply
rising surge with the sphere negative, a slowly
rising surge with the sphere negative. For gap
spacings less than 28 em when the sphere is
positive or 15 cm when the sphere is negative,
complete breakdown between sphere and plane
usually takes place.
The first discharge pip appeared at gap spac-
ings up to 56 cm for a positive sphere and 46 cm
for a negative sphere, but at these large spacings
time delays were erratic. At gap spacings less
than 46 cm with the sphere positive and 30 cm
with the sphere negative a discharge generally
appeared with little time lag—less than 0.1 usec
for a steeply rising surge and less than 1 usec
for a slowly rising surge.
In a case where breakdown would ordinarily
occur, chopping the voltage after the first dis-
charge rise prevented breakdown. The initial
streamer patterns that formed when the voltage
was chopped were similar in appearance to those
obtained when there was no second discharge
rise. In calculating the propagation velocity of
the streamers, their length was determined from
photographs, and their time of formation was
taken as the interval between the start of the
first discharge pip and the chopping. The mean
streamer propagation velocity is 500 cm/sec
for sphere negative and 800 cm/sec for sphere
positive.
An analysis of streamer formation and channel
development provides a more complete explana-
tion of the mechanism leading to breakdown.
Streamer photographs show where regions of
SURGE VOLTAGE BREAKDOWN
339
high charge density have travelled from the
sphere to the plane along the lines of force of the
applied field. When the sphere is positive, a
negative ion situated in the high-field region near
the sphere can supply a free electron, which in
ionizing neutral molecules forms an electron
avalanche. The ionization or recombination
process furnishes photons which liberate elec-
trons in the nearby field. These electrons are
attracted to the sphere, leaving regions of high
positive space charge density near the surface of
the sphere. The photo electrons liberated in the
volume immediately ahead of the charged region
are attracted to it so that. the positive region
moves from the sphere to the plate, creating a
positive streamer.
If the initial streamer pattern produces a
sufficiently high gradient, a channel starts to
develop at the rate of 3 em/ysec. As this channel
forms, it serves as a good conductor from its
origin at the sphere to its leading end. Break-
down takes place along a zigzag channel that
has completely spanned the gap.
When the sphere is negative, the electron
avalanches formed in the region near the sphere
travel towards the plate, where they initiate
positive streamers from the plate to the sphere.
Electrons are then released from the sphere by
high-energy photons impinging on it, positive
ion bombardment, or field emission. Negative
streamers are formed in much the same way as
the positive ones, but in this case electrons
repelled from the sphere cause a negative region
to move toward the plate. A streamer formed
when the sphere is positive has a higher velocity
of propagation than a negative streamer because
electrons move in the direction of the increasing
gradient so that the electron avalanches develop
faster. The positive streamer can be initiated
ever a longer gap than the negative streamer
because avalanches can form positive streamers
for lower applied gradients near the sphere when
the sphere is positive.
For the negative sphere, a conducting channel
starts out perpendicular to the plane but after a
short distance changes its course and makes a
zigzag path to the sphere. These channels either
contact the sphere or connect with a channel
development from the sphere. For shorter gap
spacing or considerable overvoltage, breakdown
occurs when an initial streamer develops into a
conducting channel. The breakdown path is
then less zigzag, seeming to follow a line of force.
340
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 11
PALEONTOLOGY —Chiloguembelina, a new Tertiary genus of the Heterohelicidae
(Foraminifera). ALFRED R. LoEBiicH, Jr., and HeLen Tappan, U. 8S. Na-
tional Museum.
(Received October 1, 1956)
Recent studies of planktonic Foraminifera
by the writers have shown that some early
Tertiary species previously referred to
Guembelina Egger have characters not in
keeping with that genus. As these species
have both morphological distinctions and a
differmg geologic range, they are here
considered to be distinctive and made the
basis of a new generic name, Chiloguembelina.
Family HETEROHELICIDAE Cushman, 1927
Chiloguembelina Loeblich and Tappan, n. gen.
Type species—Guembelina midwayensis Cush-
man, 1940.
Derivation.—Chilo, from cheilos Gr. n. lip,
rim + Guembelina, genus of Foraminifera.
Gender feminine.
Test free, flaring; inflated chambers biserially
arranged, with a tendency to become somewhat
twisted; sutures distinct, depressed; wall cal-
careous, finely perforate, radial in structure,
surface smooth to hispid; aperture a broad low
arch bordered with a produced necklike extension
of the chamber, commonly this forms a more
strongly developed flap at one side, so that the
aperture appears to be directed toward one of the
flat sides of the test.
Remarks.—Chiloguembelina differs from Guem-
belina Egger in the presence of the apertural
necklike extension from the final chamber, in the
tendency to develop a twisted test and an asym-
metrical aperture, directed toward the flat side
instead of the edge of the test. Unlike true
Guembelina, it does not have an early coiled
portion in the microspheric generation, all
specimens being wholly biserial throughout.
Chiloguembelina is found only in post-Creta-
ceous strata,in the Paleocene and Eocene. In ad-
dition to the type species, Guembelina crinita
Glaessner, G. cubensis var. heterostoma Bermudez,
G. mauriciana Howe and Roberts, G. trinitatensis
Cushman and Renz, G. venezuelana Nuttall, and
G. goodwint Cushman also should be placed in
Chiloguembelina.
Chiloguembelina midwayensis (Cushman)
Gtimbelina midwayensis Cushman, Contr. Cush-
man Lab. Foram. Res. 16: p. 65, pl. 11, fig. 15.
1940.
Giimbelina morsei Kline, Mississippi Geol. Survey
Bull. 53, p. 44, pl. 7, fig. 12. 1943.
Test free, small, flaring; the 4 to 6 pairs of in-
flated to subglobular and rapidly enlarging
chambers biserially arranged but shghtly twisted;
sutures distinct, depressed, nearly straight and
slightly oblique; wall calcareous, finely perforate,
surface smooth to finely spinose especially in the
terminal portion of the test; aperture a broad low
arch with a bordering necklike extension of the
chamber, commonly forming a more strongly de-
veloped flap at one side, so that the aperture
appears to be directed toward one of the flat sides
of the test instead of toward its edge.
Remarks——This species shows considerable
variation in the degree of flaring of the test and
in the development of the apertural lip. Some
specimens may show a nearly symmetrical lip,
others show a less well preserved lip so that it
appears to consist of lateral flanges and in some
slightly twisted tests the aperture may appear
to be directed to one side, with a stronger de-
velopment of the lip at one side than on the other.
All gradations may be found, proving these to be
merely individual variations.
Types and occurrence-—Holotype (Cushman
Coll. no. 35715) from the Midway group, on
U.S. Highway 80, south of Sucarnochee Creek,
14 mile southwest of Livingston, Sumter County,
Ala. The writers have also observed this species
in Midway strata of Texas and Alabama, the
Brightseat formation of Maryland, and in the
Hornerstown formation of New Jersey.
NOVEMBER 1956
ELLIOTT: CALCAREOUS ALGAE
d41
PALEONTOLOGY .—Galaxaura (calcareous algae) and similar fossil genera.
GraHaM F. Exxiort, Iraq Petroleum Co., Ltd. (Communicated by Alfred R.
Loeblich, Jr.).
(Received August 22, 1956)
In northern Iraq parts of the Lower Cre-
taceous succession are characterized by the
occurrence of frequent but fragmentary
caleareous algae (Elhott, 1955b). At a
level dated as Barremian-Aptian the forami-
nifer Orbitolina is accompanied by Munieria
baconica Deecke and a second fragmentary
alga which during routine studies was known
by a code number, for while it was recog-
nizable, a reconstruction was not possible.
Exceptional material later revealed that
these fragments are of a species surprisingly
similar to forms from the Permian of the
same area and elsewhere. This new species
is now described and its significance dis-
cussed. I am indebted to the Iraq Petroleum
Co., Ltd., London, for permission to publish
this note.
Genus Permocalculus Elliott, 1955
Permocalculus inopinatus, n. sp.
Description.—Thallus fingerlike, somewhat ir-
regular, circular in cross section, up to 5 mm long
and 1.75 mm in transverse diameter; calcification
varying between different individuals from a thin
irregular peripheral development to a nearly solid
thallus; sporangia ill-defined, subcortical in
position; pores with diameter of 0.020 mm at the
outer edge of the calcification where they are
clearly visible, only occasionally seen extending
inwards, when they are fine and twisted, widening
at the surface.
Syntypes.—The specimens illustrated in Figs.
1A, B, from the Aptian limestone of Ru Kuchuk,
Chama, Mosul Liwa, N. Iraq, Geol. Coll. Iraq
Petroleum Co., Ltd., London, reg. nos. DM.
1286, 1284.
Other material—Numerous random sections,
mostly fragmentary, from the Barremian-Aptian
limestones of Ru Kuchuk and Jabal Gara, Mosul
Liwa; Sarmord, Sulemania Liwa; Koi Sanjak,
Erbil Liwa; all in northern Iraq. Also from a
similar horizon at Wady Hajar, Hadhramaut,
southern Arabia.
This species bears a surprising resemblance to
species of Permocalculus from the Permian of the
same area (Elliott, 1955a) and elsewhere, notably
P. solidus (Pia) and P. digitatus Elliott. It is
evidently the calcified thallus of a very similar
plant, though it can readily be distinguished by
the very different associated algal and other
species.
The Permian Gymnocodiwm, after several
changes in classification, was compared by Pia to
the Recent Galaxaura and placed with it in the
Chaetangiaceae. The writer (Elliott, 1955a)
confirmed this resemblance after an examination
of the calcareous micro-structure of the Recent
Galaxaura fastigiata Decaisne and the Permian
Gymnocodium bellerophontis (Rothpletz), in
which the calcification is subdermal only, and
separated off various Permian species, differing
in form and calcification, as Permocalculus. A
similar comparison could have been made be-
tween the Recent Galaxaura glabriuscula Kjell-
mann and Permocalculus solidus (Pia): in the
Recent species there is marked calcification,
particularly of the stem, which is not well dif-
ferentiated from the other portions of the thallus.
In view of the close general similarities between
Galaxaura and the fossil forms the additional
evidence available from the former should be
considered in classifying the latter; the recent
study of Svedelius (1953) is of particular interest
since this writer, unlike many botanists, attaches
some degree of taxonomic importance to calci-
fication. Galaxaura is represented by sexual and
nonsexual generations; the plants of the two are
different, and the former is itself represented by
male and female plants, with differently sized
cavities for reproductive structures. In spite of
the frequent association of plants of two gen-
erations, and close examination for structural
peculiarities held in common, however, Svedelius
concludes that only by experimental spore-
culture can the plants be conclusively paired as
representing different generations of the same
species.
If this difficulty arises with living plants, it
seems impossible with the fossils, where the ecal-
cification alone remains, to classify them on
other than a strictly morphological basis, as was
done by the writer in separating Permocaleulus
from Gymnocodium, together in the
Gymnocodiaceae as a comparable family to the
placed
342
Chaetangiaceae. So long as the former was
represented by Permian species only, the dis-
tinction was clear-cut and suggested that similar
algae had twice independently achieved cal-
cification. The known Cretaceous forms are there-
fore of especial interest.
Corallinites galaxaura Massalongo, from the
Italian Lower Cretaceous, is known only from this
writer’s early account and figures (1856) which
show a small segmented alga, and while possibly
a Galaxaura (see also Massalongo, 1859) nothing
more can be said of it.
Permocalculus inopinatus, described above
from the Lower Cretaceous of the Middle East, is
extremely similar to certain Permian species.
Gymnocodium nummuliticum Pfender was
described from the Egyptian Eocene and re-
corded also from the Upper Cretaceous of France
and Spain (Pfender, 1940). This alga was de-
scribed as very similar to the Permian G. bellero-
phontis (Rothpletz): the figures of Cuvilher
(1930) quoted by Pfender are too small to be
useful for a detailed study, and the present
writer (1955a), without actual specimens for
examination, did not consider them further.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 46, No. 11
In material from Wady Hajar, Hadhramaut,
southern Arabia, however, in a Lower Cretaceous
Orbitolina-limestone of probable Barremian age,
abundant debris of Permocalculus inopinatus
was accompanied by at least one section similar
to the Permian Gymnocodium bellerophontis,
just as described by Pfender.
It would seem, therefore, that algae ancestral
to the present-day Chaetangiaceae have existed
since the Permian, though represented in varying
abundance at different horizons. Their classi-
fication, in view of the difficulties attaching to
that of the living plants, is best made, in the
present state of knowledge, on a strictly mor-
phological basis.
REFERENCES
Cuviturer, J. Revision du Nummulitique Egypt-
ien. Mém. Inst. Egypt. 16: ref. pl. 8. 1930.
Exuuiorr, G. F. The Permian calcareous alga
Gymnocodium. Micropaleontology 1 (1):
83-90. 1955a.
. Fossil calcareous algae from the Middle
East. Micropaleontology 1 (2): 125-131. 1955b.
Massatoneo, A. Studii paleontologict: ref. p. 42.
Verona, 1856.
ee
Fie. 1.—Permocalculus inopinatus, n sp.: A, Longitudinal section; B, transverse section X 30:
syntypes. Lower Cretaceous (Aptian); Ru Kuchuk, Chama, Mosul Liwa, Iraq.
NOVEMBER 1956 H. M.
Massatoneo, A., and ScaRABELLI, G. Studii sulla
flera fossile e geologia stratigraphica del Sent-
galliese: ref. p. 92 (footnote). Imola, 1859.
PFENDER, J. Les algues du nummulitique Egyptien
ei des terrains Cretacés-Rocénes de quelques
345
régiones mésogéenes. Bull. Inst. Egypt. 22:
225-250. 1940.
Svepeuius, N. Critical studies on some species of
Galaxaura from Hawaii. Nov. Act. R. Soc. Sci.
Upsala (4) 15 (9): 1-92. 1953.
SE
Jel. IML, So. “SIUC”
The imsigne of England’s Tudor and Stuart
kings, the crowned rose, has provided a clue that
enabled a Smithsonian historian to reconstruct
a two-century-old tragedy of the Spanish Main—
the shipwreck of a British man-of-war and the
desperate plight of 280 sailors on a desert island
beset by hostile savages.
Off the central Florida keys, about 35 miles
southwest of the town of Marathon, is a sub-
merged reef—marked ‘‘Looe reef”? on maritime
charts. Near it the sea bottom is strewn with
metal objects, long since covered with a sand
crust that makes them the same color as the
bottom and nearly indistinguishable. They obvi-
ously are the remains of some shipwreck. The
wreck was first explored by a party consisting of
Bill Thompson, of Marathon, Fla.; Dr. and Mrs.
George Crile, Jr., of Cleveland, Ohio; Mr. and
Mrs. E. A. Link, of Binghamton, N. Y.; Mr. and
Mrs. James Rand, of Cleveland, Ohio; Mr. and
Mrs. John Shaheen, of New York City; and
Arthur McKee, of Homestead, Fla. The party
was accompanied by Mendel L. Peterson, Smith-
sonian Institution curator of naval history.
Largely through Mr. Peterson’s researches the
ship now has been identified and its complete
story recovered. It was H. M.S. Loo, a frigate
of 40 to 44 guns, under Capt. Ashby Utting, lost
off the keys after running aground in the mid-
winter of 1744.
The metal objects recovered went part of the
way in reconstructing the story. They were can-
nonballs, nails, fragments of rum and brandy
bottles, the knob of a walking stick, some frag-
ments of table plates decorated with a blue flower
design, a 2,000-pound cannon barrel, and various
18th-century European coins. Cast into the
barrel was the “crowned rose.” It was an insigne
used by both the Stuart and Tudor kings. As its
use was discontinued after Queen Anne, the
date of the shipwreck must have been before, or
shortly after, her death. The normal life of an
iron barrel on shipboard, it was ascertained, was
probably not more than 40 years. If it is assumed
that the cannon had been put in service in the
last year of Anne’s reign, 1714, the wreck could
not have been later than 1754. Other evidence
indicated that it could not have been earlier than
the start of her reign.
Thus Peterson got the clue by which he was
able to search records of the British Admiralty
over a specific period, and bit by bit—from orders,
letters, payrolls, and other papers—emerged the
story of the wreck of the Loo. Looe is a town
in Cornwall from which the ship took its name.
How the Florida reef happened to have that name
nobody knew. Here in brief is the story of the
frigate as traced from the clue of the crowned rose,
which has recently been published by the Smith-
sonian Institution where many of the articles re-
covered from the wreck now are being studied:
The Loo had sailed from Cuba with a small
prize ship. During the night she ran close to the
reef, while off her assumed course, and ‘‘three or
four severe seas crushed the ship against the reef
and she began sinking rapidly. The reef was then
above water, a small desert island. Captain
Utting, however, was able to land safely all his
own crew and that of the captured prize ship.
“The desperate situation of the group was evi-
dent to all. “Here were 280 men stranded on a
small sandy islet just off a hostile coast swarming
with the savage Caloosa Indians who murdered
Englishmen on sight. To add to the insecurity
was the evident fact that in a blow of any force
the whole islet would be swept by waves. At
night Utting posted watches, each consisting of
25 marines and 25 sailors at the water’s edge as
‘centenells’ to prevent a surprise night attack.
Meanwhile the men, frightened and confused,
became very rebellious and mutinous, dividing
into parties and claiming that the officers no
longer had any authority over them. They clam-
ored to leave the island immediately. Utting took
no notice of them, but, with the few men who
would work, continued efforts to recover water
and other provisions from the wreck.”
Two days later the captain was able to get off
all the men in small boats and eventually steered
northward toward the harbor of Port Royal,
8S. C. This was a direction in which he did not
want to go but proceeded ‘rather than all be
drowned.” But everybody came through alive.
Once his crew were safe Utting’s first chore was
to find a colonial justice of the peace and make
depositions in connection with a court martial
for loss of his ship, which he knew was inevitable.
From the Admiralty records Peterson obtained
a full account of this court martial, at which the
captain was acquitted of all charges.
344 JOURNAL OF THE
WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 11
BACTERIOLOGY —Quantitative studies of differential staining reactions, IIT:
A quantitative acid-fast stain’. A. F. Woopuour, Catholic University of Amer-
ica. (Communicated by E. R. Kennedy).
Bacteria in the genus Mycobacterium are
resistant to staining with basic dyes, but
once stained the cells are resistant to de-
colorization with acid-alecohol. This pro-
cedure is known as the acid-fast reaction,
and possession of the acid-fast property 1s
the chief characteristic that differentiates
this genus from other Schizomycetes.
Attempts have been made to associate the
virulence of mycobacteria with some con-
sistent aspect of the organisms. Middle-
brooke, Dubos, and Pierce (1947) found that
virulent tubercle bacilli form microscopically
demonstrable serpentine cords which enable
the organisms to spread more readily on the
surface of liquid and solid media. Avirulent
forms do not form such cords. These investi-
gators also reported that the virulent bacilli
are strongly acid-fast, whereas the avirulent
forms are much less acid-fast. It should be
possible, in the light of this information, to
associate virulence with a quantitative de-
termination of acid-fastness.
Until the present time no quantitative
method has been described to estimate the
degree of acid-fastness among species or
strains of Mycobacterium. Wennedy and
Barbaro (1953) reported an accurate quanti-
tative method for determining the adsorp-
tion of crystal violet by bacteria based on
micro-Kjeldahl analyses of bacterial cells
and stain reagents. The present report
describes a modification of this procedure
as applied to the acid-fast reaction and
presents evidence for the existence of degrees
of acid-fastness among the mycobacteria.
MATERIALS AND METHODS
The crystal violet used throughout the
investigation has been described previously
(Kennedy and Barbaro, 1953).
Basic fuchsin was obtained from the
National Aniline & Chemical Co., Inc., New
1This work was supported in part by funds
received from the American Association for the
Advancement of Science on the recommendation
of the Washington Academy of Sciences.
York, N. Y. (total dye content, 95 percent,
Certification no. NF 57,°@) inom 6nn).
Modified Ziehl-Neelsen carbol fuchsin was
prepared by dissolving 3.15 g of basic fuchsin
in 10 ml of 95 percent ethy! alcohol; a solu-
tion composed of 2 ¢ of phenol in 95 ml of
deionized water was added to the alcoholic
dye solution.
The crystal violet solution, decolorizing
agent (3 percent hydrochloric acid-alcohol)
and M/15 phosphate buffer were stored at
5 C and maintained as close as possible to
that temperature throughout the procedure.
The modified Ziehl-Neelsen carbo! fuchsin
was stored at room temperature to avoid
excessive precipitation of carbolie acid.
The organisms were obtained from cul-
tures maintained in this laboratory and the
American Type Culture Collection and
maintained at room temperature. The acid-
fast organisms used in the study were:
Strain
No.
Mycobacterium tuberculosis var. hominis
ATCC no. 9360 H387Rv
Mycobacterium tuberculosis var. hominis
ATCC no. 9431 H37Ra
Mycobacterium tuberculosis var. bovis
ATCC no. 9834 549
The non-acid-fast organism was:
Corynebacterium xerose 513
The tubercle bacilli were cultivated at
37 C for 3 weeks on Dubos broth base to
which ‘‘Dubos medium albumin” and 1.2
percent agar had been added. All other or-
ganisms were cultivated at 37 C for 24 to 72
hours on a modified tryptose agar medium.
The preparation of cell suspensions and
micro-Kjeldahl procedure have been de-
scribed previously (Kennedy and Barbaro,
1953).
EXPERIMENTAL PROCEDURE AND RESULTS
The procedure for a typical quantitative
acid-fast reaction was as follows: Organisms
NOVEMBER 1956 WOODHOUR:
DIFFERENTIAL
STAINING REACTIONS 345
TaBLe 1.—QvuaANTITATIVE AcrD-FAST REACTION AS DETERMINED BY Micro-KJELDAHL ANALYSES OF
CrystaL VIOLET AND BACTERIA
ANALYSES ON SUPERNATANTS ANALYSES ON BACTERIA PER MG BACTERIAL N
? s: Dye N
SPECIES *) G
Onizinal after Dye n_ | Acid-fast | Unstained) p.. DOIN DEIN
| dye N | staining | adsorbed | sttined | Pacterial | serained | adsorbed | retained
sorbed)
| mg Mg mg mg mg mg Mg mg
Myco. tuberculosis var. hominis |
IBIS RN.-c o.c's. nie ene eee eee 0.40 | 0.22 0.18 0.73 0.69 0.04 0.26 0.06
Mvyco. tuberculosis var. honunis
TEIBVIREY ooo 0 Scohs aie ee Ieee ae eee 0.40 0.10 0.30 lel 1.10 0.02 0.27 0.02
Myco. tuberculosis var. bovis....| 0.87 0.03 0.34 1.46 1.39 0.07 0.25 0.05
WHAQEDs. HUGE 2 < Sd pO ee 0.42 0.04 0.38 173 1.69 0.04 0.23 0.03
Co BOTOSC bcc 6 Gio eee 0.41 0.06 0.35 PPM 22 0.00 0.11 0.00
to be tested were harvested in 0.85 percent
saline solution, heat-killed at 99 C for 380
minutes, and washed until the supernatant
fluid was nitrogen free as determined by
micro-Kjeldahl analyses. The washed cell
suspension was diluted to contain the de-
sired concentration of bacteria per milli-
liter. One ml of the uniformly mixed bacterial
suspension was added in triplicate to thick-
walled centrifuge tubes and centrifuged in
the cold (0-5 C) at approximately 8,000 rpm
(ref 6,000) for 30 minutes. The supernatant
fluid was discarded, and 2 ml of suitably
diluted crystal violet stock solution were
added to the packed cells. After thorough
mixing, the tubes were stoppered and kept
at room temperature overnight (approxi-
mately 18 hours). The next day the stoppers
were removed and the tubes centrifuged in
the cold for 30 minutes. The supernatant
crystal violet solution was transferred to a
Kjeldahl flask, and the packed cells were
washed with 2 ml of buffer solution at pH
7.1 and centrifuged again in the cold. The
buffer washings were transferred to the
Kjeldahl flask and one ml of 3 percent hydro-
chloric acid-alcohol was added to the packed
cells. The cells were mixed thoroughly and
immediately centrifuged in the cold for 5
minutes. The supernatant acid-alecohol and
subsequent buffer wash were placed in a
second Kjeldahl flask for analysis. The
packed cells were suspended in buffer solu-
tion and transferred quantitatively to a
third Kjeldahl flask for analysis.
Unstained bacterial suspensions and dye
solutions were added directly to Kjeldahl
flasks in triplicate and analyzed. These
values were used as control determinations.
Table 1 contains representative data ob-
tained when this procedure was applied to
acid-fast and non-acid-fast organisms. In
all cases each figure indicates the average of
triplicate determinations. The method is
such that each of the triplicates agrees within
0.02 mg of nitrogen. To simplify the com-
parison of results, the values in the last two
columns have been calculated on the basis
of one mg of bacterial nitrogen. The term
adsorption is used to describe the dye origi-
nally taken up by the bacterial cells; the
term retention means the amount of dye
which remains in the cells after decoloriza-
tion. The adsorption values are similar
among all acid-fast organisms tested but the
retention values differ. The difference in
retention indicates degrees of acid-fastness.
One ml of modified Ziehl-Neelsen carbol
fuchsin was employed in place of crystal
violet in the above procedure under the same
conditions. Table 2 contains representative
data obtained with this procedure. One of
the most significant differences between
this modification and the crystal violet pro-
cedure is the generally higher adsorption
values obtaied with carbol fuchsin, though
the retention values are similar. The indi-
vidual retention values are significant: the
two supposedly most acid-fast organisms of
the group retain the most dye while the least
acid-fast organisms retain appreciably
less dye.
346
DISCUSSION
The application of a quantitative tech-
nique to the acid-fast reaction is dependent
to a great extent on the preparation of
homogeneous bacterial suspensions and
adequate control of the decolorization
procedure. The difficulty of preparing
homogeneous suspensions of mycobacteria
can be overcome by the use of Tween 80-
albumin medium which has been recom-
mended for the cultivation of tubercle
bacilli. The formation of cords in virulent
species is inhibited on this medium (Middle-
brooke, Dubos, Pierce, 1947). Numerous
thorough mixings and centrifugations of the
cells with subsequent double filtration
through cotton results in homogeneous sus-
pensions. This is substantiated by analyses of
triplicate samples of unstained organisms.
The results agree within the limits of error
of the micro-Kjeldahl method +0.02 mg
nitrogen. The utilization of low temperature
centrifugation during the decolorization
process is believed to slow the decolorization
process sufficiently to allow complete re-
moval of measureable dye from non-acid-
fast organisms without over decolorization
of the weakly acid-fast Myco. phlei.
The use of crystal violet in the procedure
described here is supported by the work of
Benians (1912-1913) who found that, when
crystal violet was employed without a
mordant in the acid-fast reaction, acid-fast
organisms retain dye after acid-alcohol
decolorization while non-acid-fast organisms
are completely decolorized. In the course of
the present work, crystal violet was found
much easier to use than carbol fuchsin.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 11
When triplicate samples of the respective
dyes were subjected to analyses, crystal
violet samples always agreed within the
limits of error of the procedure while carbol
fuchsin replicates showed marked dis-
crepancies on many occasions. In addition,
carbol fuchsin takes much longer to digest
in Kjeldahl analysis than does crystal violet
and therefore lengthens the complete pro-
cedure. The results in the tables, however,
represent experiments in which triplicate
dye samples agreed within the limits of error
of the method.
There appear to be many variables that
influence the values obtained, such as com-
position of media, dye concentration, stain-
ing time, temperature of staimmg and
decolorizing procedures. These factors un-
doubtedly influence the acid-fast reaction
when performed on glass slides. The values
found (tables 1 and 2) are relative rather
than absolute but it should be remembered
that they are the result of triplicate analyses
and agree within 0.02 mg nitrogen. The re-
liability of these values is further empha-
sized by the fact that analyses were made
of the supernatant fluids as well as stained
cells and it is possible to account for all
dye, adsorbed and unadsorbed, used through-
out the procedure.
In the interpretation of quantitative acid-
fast values consideration must be given to
the physiological condition of the cells used.
Dubos and Davis (1946) pointed out the
heterogeneity of fully grown cultures of
tubercle bacilli. The cells in a given culture
vary greatly in age and therefore, physi-
ological state. In addition, when organisms
TaBLE 2.—QUANTITATIVE AcID-FAST REACTION AS DETERMINED BY Micro-KjJELDAHL ANALYSES OF
CarBoL FucHsIN AND BACTERIA
| ANALYSES ON SUPERNATANTS ANALYSES ON BACTERIA PER MG BACTERIAL N
x Dye N
SPECIES . .
Original after Dre Acid-fast | Unstained Dye N Dye N Dye N
eg e NG Guede maeeibed Stained, pacteniall reteined Adenbed retained
sorbed)
mg mg mg mg mg mg mg mg
Myco. tuberculosis var. hominis
ELS ARVN oe eo ea ee: 0.58 0.24 0.34 1.04 0.97 0.07 0.35 0.07
Myco. tuberculosis var. hominis
SBE Ge Ne aels cob trot meee aoa 0.61 0.27 0.34 0.91 0.90 0.01 0.37 0.01
Myco. tuberculosis var. bovis....| 0.60 0.18 0.47 1.50 1.43 0.07 0.33 0.05
WACO. FAW Bocscccedocccedoeessc 0.61 0.18 0.43 Ne 1.69 0.03 0.25 0.02
NOVEMBER 1956
grow in clumps the environmental conditions
of cells at the periphery are different from
those of cells at the center. These conditions
might well reflect differences in structure and
metabolism. Since conditions of cultivation
are kept constant for all organisms it seems
justifiable to assume that these values are
correct when applied to a culture as a whole.
Possibly the values would be higher if only
young organisms were used or considerably
lower if only old organisms were used. Since,
however, a mixture of both were employed
the values indicate an average acid-fast
value. The conditions are the same for all
species to which the procedure has been
applied.
With the classic acid-fast test performed
on glass slides, visual observation does not
necessitate the presence of abundant
amounts of dye within the cells. The quan-
titative procedure, however, demands the
presence of significant amounts of dye. The
micro-Kjeldahl method measures 0.02 mg
of nitrogen but when small amounts of or-
ganisms were used, even though the cells
were visibly stained, the retained dye nitro-
gen could not be measured. This can be
overcome by increasing the number of or-
ganisms so more adsorbed dye can be meas-
ured and decreasing the decolorization time
to the extent that non-acid-fast organisms
give no retention values, though they are
visibly staimed. This procedure indicated
the minute quantity of dye retained by acid-
fast organisms when stained by the classic
method on glass slides.
The amount of dye retained per mg of
bacterial nitrogen is significantly different
among species of mycobacteria. The conclu-
sion that degrees of acid-fastness exist
among the mycobacteria agrees with reports
of other investigators (Lamanna and
WOODHOUR: DIFFERENTIAL STAINING REACTIONS
347
Mallette, 1953; Bergey et al., 1948). These
workers based their conclusions on qualita-
tive interpretations utilizing the classic
Ziehl-Neelsen technique of staining. The
data presented in this report indicate the
existence of quantitative degrees of acid-
fastness among mycobacteria whether
stained with carbol fuchsin or crystal violet
when the results are calculated as retained
dye per unit of bacterial nitrogen.
The method which has been reported offers
the first quantitative experimental approach
to basic studies on the mechanism of the
acid-fast reaction and to studies of the
effects of environment, staining time, tem-
perature of staining, dye concentration, and
decolorizing agents.
SUMMARY
A quantitative acid-fast reaction based on
micro-Kjeldahl analyses of reagents and of
cells decolorized at low temperature is
described.
Quantitative evidence is presented to show
that degrees of acid-fastness exist among
mycobacteria.
REFERENCES
Bentans, T. H. C. Observations on the gram positive
and acid-fast properties of bacteria. Journ. Path.
Bact. 17: 199-211. 1912.
Bereey, D. H., et al. Manual of determinative bac-
tertology., 6th ed. Baltimore, 1948.
Dusos, R. J., and Davis, B. D. Factors affecting
the growth of tubercle bacilli in liquid media.
Journ. Exp. Med. 83: 409-423, 1946.
Kennepy, E. R., and Barparo, J. F. Quantitative
adsorption of crystal violet. Journ. Bacteriol.
65: 678-680. 1953.
Lamanna, C., and Mauierrr, M. F. Basic bac-
teriology. Baltimore, 1953.
MippieBrooken, G., Dusos, R. J., and Pierce,
Cryntuia. Virulence and morphological charac-
teristics of mammalian tubercle bacilli. Journ.
Exp. Med. 86: 175-184. 1947.
Though the mills of God grind slowly, yet they grind exceedingly small.—
LONGFELLOW.
348
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 46, No. 11
ZOOLOGY .—North American harpacticoid copepods: 3, Paracamptus reductus,
n. sp., from Alaska. MitprED Stratron Wixson, Arctic Health Research
Center, U. S. Public Health Service, Anchorage, Alaska.
(Received July 30, 1956)
The genus Paracamptus is among the
few genera of fresh-water Canthocamptidae
occurring in Europe and Asia that has not
been reported from North America. It is of
interest therefore to record its occurrence
on this continent, as represented by a new
species found in Alaskan collections. The
harpacticoid copepods listed as occurring
with the new Paracamptus also represent
new records for North America. Reference
has been made (M. S. Wilson, 1956) to
their discovery in Alaska, but these are the
first locality records to be published. The
genus Maraenobiotus is likewise a Eurasian
genus of the Canthocamptidae not before
known from North America.
IT am indebted to O. A. Mathisen, Fish-
eries Research Institute, University of
Washington, and to Kenneth Andress,
Spenard, Alaska, for the collections con-
taining this new species.
Paracamptus reductus, n. sp.
Figs. 1-16
Specimens examined.—Type lot: 9 2 (2 oviger-
ous), 4 #. Margin of Lake Tikchik, Bristol Bay
area of southwestern Alaska (about lat. 60°N.,
long. 159°W.); August 19, 1954; O. A. Mathisen.
Oceurring with Moraria duthiei T. and A. Scott
and Maraenobiotus insignipes (Lilljeborg). Holo-
type 2, U. §8. National Museum no. 99416;
allotype @, no. 99417.
1 @ (ovigerous). Margin of Paxson Lake,
Richardson Highway, Alaska, (about lat. 63°N.,
long. 145°W.); June 28, 1951; K. Andress. Occur-
ring with Moraria duthiei and M. mrazeki
T. Scott.
Diagnosis —Caudal rami of female, length
more than twice width; shorter in male; both
sexes with curved crest of spimules near base of
inner dorsal side and longitudinal crest of
spinules posterior to insertion of dorsal seta.
Leg 1 with three setae on endopod segment 2,
both apical setae much longer than endopod and
modified like those of exopod. Endopods lacking
on legs 2-4 of female and on legs 2 and 4 of male;
that of leg 3 normally developed in male, with
two apical setae. Leg 5, segment 2 of both sexes,
middle seta of similar stoutness and armature
to other setae.
Description.—Length, dorsal midline, @ Tik-
chik Lake, 0.55-0.6 mm, Paxson Lake, 0.7 mm;
o, 0.465-0.47 mm.
Frmate: Posterior edge of all body segments,
except the last, coarsely serrate on dorsal side
(Fig. 2); surface covered by broken rows of
minute spinules (partially indicated in Fig. 2).
Ventrally, urosome segments not serrate but
each with single unbroken row of spines (Fig. 1).
Last segment with a few spines ventrally at bases
of rami and a lateral group. Margin of anal
operculum wavy or minutely spinulose.
Caudal ramus (Figs. 2, 3) constricted distally,
length more than twice its greatest width (2.3-
2.45 times); longer than outer margin of last
body segment (about 1.4 times). Lateral setae
placed as usual, the proximal on outer margin
near base and accompanied by shorter seta;
distal seta placed a little distad on ventral
surface. Dorsal seta on a twice segmented base,
placed just distad to middle of ramus. Entire
outer margin including that above proximal seta,
armed with row of slender spinules. Are of some-
what larger, graduated spinules forming trans-
verse crest on inner proximal portion of dorsal
surface. Longitudinal row of very short spinules
ranging from behind point of insertion of dorsal
seta to apex of ramus. Inner margin with medial
group of fine hairs and distal group of minute
spinules. Caudal setae (Fig. 1) as usual for
Paracamptus, outer and inner setae of subequal
size, length less than that of ramus; middle seta
well developed, base enlarged, unjointed; length
less than that of urosome (equaling a little more
than segments 4 and 5 plus ramus) and from 2.2
to 2.9 times length of ramus.
Antennule (Fig. 7) 8-segmented; without
plumose setae; aesthete of segment 4 reaching to
end of antennule; outer setae of two apical seg-
ments on segmented bases. Exopod of antenna
(Fig. 10) 2-segmented; first segment with plumose
NOVEMBER 1956 WILSON: HARPACTICOID COPEPODS 349
Wrenner
vreeer
YY VV VYVy
VY VV VV yyyYY
Yyvy
IS)
Fries. 1-16.—Paracamptus reductus, n. sp.: 1, Female, urosome ventral; 2, female, detail distal seg-
ments of urosome and caudal ramus, dorsal; 3, female, caudal ramus, ventral; 4, male, detail distal
segment of urosome and caudal ramus, dorsal; 5, female, mandible palp; 6, male, antennule; 7, female,
antennule and rostrum; 8, female, leg 4, with detail inner distal edge of basipod 2; 9, female, leg 1:
10, female, exopod of antenna; 11, female, leg 5; 12, male, legs 5 and 6; 18, female, detail of genital area:
14, female, leg 2, exopod segment 3; 15, male, leg 4; 16, male, leg 3.
300
seta; second with subapical plumose seta and
very stout, unornamented apical spine. Mandible
palp (Fig. 5) 1-segmented, with one subapical
and three apical setae.
Leg 1 (Fig. 9) with 3-segmented exopod and
2-segmented endopod; exopod shorter than
endopod, reaching to about proximal third of
apical endopod segment. Endopod segment 1
wider and a little longer than segment 2, with
short inner seta. Segment 2 narrowed, with short
inner seta distally and two long, curved apical
setae of the modified type found on apical exopod
segment; inner seta longer than outer and both
longer than endopod; relative length of outer
seta, inner seta and endopod, 22:30:17.
Legs 2-4 with 3-segmented exopods. Exopod
segment 2 always with inner seta. Exopod seg-
ment 3 with two outer and two terminal spines
of which the inner is the longer; inner spiniform
seta on legs 2 and 3 (Fig. 14), absent on leg 4.
Endopods lacking, though usually minute setae
present in usual position of endopod (Fig. 8).
Leg 5 (Fig. 11). Distal segment 2, length about
2 times its width; all five setae similar to one
another, sparsely plumose; seta 4 the longest,
seta 5 the shortest; relative length of setae to
one another (from outer edge), 19:21:22:25:16.
Basal segment, outer portion of inner expansion
bearing the first two setae produced beyond the
rest of segment, reaching to about middle of
segment 2; relative length of setae to one another,
19:27:15:13:10.
Mate: Habitus as in female. Caudal ramus
(Fig. 4) differmg from female in being shorter
than outer margin of last body segment (about
14:20). Armature similar; spinal are on proximal
dorsal face accompanied by distinct ridgelike
sclerotization. Dorsal seta placed at about distal
third; distad to it a short, longitudinal row of
3-4 spines.
Antennule (Fig. 6) 8-segmented, third and
fourth segments imperfectly separated into addi-
tional segments. Fourth segment dilated and
bearing short, stout setae. Three segments beyond
geniculation, apical segment shorter than two
preceding segments, apex constricted and pro-
duced beyond insertion of terminal setae; proxi-
mal, lateral setae with segmented bases as in
female.
Leg 1 as in female. Legs 2 and 4 lacking endo-
pods (no minute setae found as in female). Leg 3
(Fig. 16) with 3-segmented endopod reaching to
end of exopod 2; its basal segment without inner
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
voL. 46, No. 11 ©
seta; apophysis well developed, reaching to end
of exopod, its total length greater than that
of endopod; third segment with two subequal,
apical setae also reaching to near end of exopod,
their length subequal to that of endopod.
Leg 4 (Fig. 15), exopod with same setation as in
female but somewhat modified. Outer distal
corner of segment 2 more enlarged and outer
spine much more recurved than in female. Exo-
pod segment 8 reduced in size, its length subequal
to that of exopod 2 rather than longer as in
female.
Leg 5 (Fig. 12). Distal segment 2 small, length
about 1.5 times the width, with five setae; four
outer setae of different lengths but of similar
stoutness, all plumose; innermost seta reduced,
shorter than segment; relative length of setae
to one another (from outer to inner), 5:7:11:
16:4. Inner basal portions of leg not divided,
with two spiniform setae borne on slight produc-
tion of segment, inner seta subequal in length to
longest (fourth) seta of segment 2, and a little
more than twice length of outer (17:7). Leg 6
(Fig. 12) with three setae, the mnermost stout
and spiniform, subequal to slender outer seta;
both outer and innermost setae a little longer
than longest seta (second basal) of leg 5.
Discussion.—Only two species of Paracamptus
are known: P. schmeili (Mrazek) from Europe
and P. baikalensis Borutzky from Lake Baikal
in Asia. Several varieties have been named for
schmeili but Lang (1948), on the basis of the
extreme variability found in specimens he studied
from Sweden, considers that none can be recog-
nized as subspecies.
P. baikalensis, known only from the female, is
separable from schmeili on the basis of the much
shorter caudal ramus (wider than long) and the
lack of reduction and modification of the middle
seta of the second segment of the fifth leg. The
setae of the fifth leg of schmeili are reportedly
variable, but according to Lang, the third or
middle seta of the second segment is always finer
than the others, nonplumose, usually shorter
than the outer setae, and always shorter than the
inner setae. This seta in the new Alaskan species
reductus is not modified or reduced, being plumose
and of similar stoutness to the other setae in
both sexes. The occurrence of this character in 2
species so distinct as reductus gives strength to its
importance as a specific differentiation between
baikalensis and schmeili, a point which Lang
questioned.
NOVEMBER 1956
In comparing reductus with the other two
known species, the most obvious difference is
the lack of the endopods of legs 2-4, an unusual
character in free-living copepods and not pre-
viously known in the Canthocamptidae. Such a
lack has been recorded in the Harpacticoida for
two other genera, Paranannopus (family Cleto-
didae) and Leptopsyllus (family Parameso-
chridae). The endopods of these legs in
Paracamptus are reduced in segmentation, size
and armature, but the forms that have been
described have shown no indication of inter-
mediate conditions leading to the complete loss
of the endopod. If one were dealing with only a
single specimen, a single sex, or a collection from
a single lake, it might be suspected that an
anomalous condition exists. But all the specimens
examined lack the endopods, and the species is
known from two widely separated lakes of
different drainage systems. Possibly the strongest
reason for not regarding this condition as anom-
alous is the fact that the endopods are lacking
not only in the female, but also on legs 2 and 4
of the male, although the modified copulatory
endopod of the third leg is normally and strongly
developed. Additional evidence that the complete
loss of the endopod is normal for this species, is
found in the second basal segment, which is
likewise reduced. This is shown clearly in figure 8.
The inner portion of the basal segment is slanted
abruptly upwards just beyond the spinous point
which is present between the exopod and endopod
in all Paracamptus. That the minute setae present
in the female may be regarded as remnants of
the endopod is suggested by their position just
WILSON: HARPACTICOID COPEPODS
dol
beyond this spinous point where the endopod
would normally be attached.
Even if the endopods were normally developed,
P. reductus has other characters which would
separate it from batkalensis or from any of the
forms of schmeili. The caudal ramus is shaped
much like that of typical schmeili, but the arma-
ture apparently differs in part. In reductus, there
is a basal crest of strong spines instead of hairs.
The longitudinal row of spmules running from
the base of the dorsal seta to the apex of the
ramus in both sexes of reductus has not been
shown in any figures of schmeili. The great
length of the outer apical seta of the endopod of
the first leg may be peculiar to reductus; the
reduced inner seta present in reductus is usually
absent in schmeili. The fifth legs of both sexes
differ from schmeili in that the third seta of the
second segment is similar to the other setae. The
basal portion of this leg in the female of reductus
differs from both schmeili and baikalensis in the
prominent production of the outer portion
bearing the first two setae. The endopod of leg 3
of the male has a single apical seta in schmetli
and the presence of two apical setae in reductus
appears to constitute a further distinction of the
new species.
LITERATURE CITED
Lane, Karu. Monographie der Harpacticiden, 2
vols.: 1683 pp. Stockholm, 1948.
Wiuson, Mitprep Srrarron. North American
harpacticoid copepods 1. Comments on_ the
known fresh-water species of the Canthocampti-
dae. Trans. Amer. Micr. Soc. 75(3): 290-307,
illus. 1956.
SE
GRANTS-IN-AID
The Committee on Grants-in-Aid for Research wishes to remind Academy members that
the Academy has a few hundred dollars available to aid those engaged in research. The sum
is not large but is adequate to supply special equipment or supplies needed in research. The
funds are advanced to the Academy by the AAAS and are available to high-school students,
college students at the undergraduate or graduate level, and to instructors. Requests should
be addressed to either Dr. H. Specht, of the National Institutes of Health, or to the under-
signed.
Water J. HAMER
Chairman, Committee on
Grants-in-Aid for Research
352 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, NO. in
MAMMALOGY —Litile-known reference to name of a harbor seal. Victor B.
Scuerrer, U. 8. Fish and Wildlife Service. (Communicated by Herbert |
Friedmann.)
(Received September 12, 1956)
About 1950, we received from its author correctly elsewhere in the paper] var.
a reprint of an article in Japanese, as follows:
InuKAl, Trersuo. Hair seals (azarashi) in
our northern waters [i.e., Japanese waters].
Shokubutsu oyobi Dobutsu [Botany and
Zoology|, Yokando, Tokyo, 10 (10): 927—
932, text figs. 1-5 [fig. 1 in 2 parts], 1 Octo-
ber; no. 11, p. 1025-1030, text figs. 6-7,
1 November. 1942. [In the reprint, no. 10,
is part 1, p. 37-42; no. 11 is part 2, p. 41-46.]
Among materials brought back by Ford
Wilke, U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, from
the National Resources Section, General
Headquarters, Supreme Commander for
Allied Powers, Tokyo, about 1950, is a
translation of Inukai’s article, translator’s
name not shown. We quote excerpts, as
follows:
“T think these four species [ribbon seal,
bearded seal, rmged seal, and harbor seal|
are enough for the hair seal classification
[to date]...In addition I tell you that
another species ‘zenigata-azarashi’ is recog-
nizable besides the above four”’ (p. 928).
“This species appears black as a whole
and people call it ‘Kuro’—black. It has spots
all over the body, white ones about 3 em.
long and 1 cm. wide which have coin-shaped
black spots inside them. These coin-shaped
spots look like the spots of the ‘fuiri-aza-
rashi’ [quite certainly the ringed seal,
Phoca hispida}, clear on the back and dim
on the belly (fig. 4). The body size is almost
the same as ‘gomafu-azarashi’ [quite cer-
tainly the harbor seal, Phoca vitulina]
but many of them are rather small. They
live mostly in the southern Kuriles and their
distribution is limited to a small area on the
Pacific coast. Their western limit is Erimo
Zaki [southeastern Hokkaido], the eastern
limit is northern Kuriles. Their skulls resem-
ble ‘gomafu’ and they live with them except
during the breeding season. I think they
are a variation of the ‘gomafu’. Their actions
are faster than ‘gomafu’; their legs are
larger; they run away very quickly. I suggest
Phoca uochotensis {read ochotensis; certainly
a typesetter’s error, since the name is spelled
kurilensis for this species. Occasionally,
skins that appear intermediate between
those are found in the southern Kuriles
(fig. 5). (This paragraph, including figs.
4 and 5, on p. 930.)
Fig. 4 represents the flat skin of a male,
locality not specified. In our opinion, the
pattern is that of a dark harbor seal, P.
vitulina. Fig. 5 represents the flat skin of a
male, apparently a medium-dark harbor
seal. No measurements of body or skull for
“zenigata’’ are given. No specimens were
reported saved.
Farther along in his paper (pp. 930-1026)
Inukai gives certain biological data for
“zenigata.’’ In a commercial catch of seals
from the southern Kuriles from early July
to early September, there were 139 harbor
seals, 42 ringed seals, and 21 ‘‘zenigata’’.
The copulating season for “zenigata”’ is said
to be in mid-June, a little later than for the
habor seals. This information, if true, would
be extremely difficult to obtain. It indicates,
however, that ‘“‘zenigata” are adults and
that the name is not a collective one for
subadults. Pups are born with yellowish-
white, long, downy hair—characteristic
both of ringed and harbor seals. Mother
seals carrying young on their backs are seen
around Erimo Zaki in May—an observation
which might be made both of rimged and
harbor seals. “ ‘Zenigata’...seems to have
the same food habits as ‘gomafw’ ” . We take
this to mean that “zenigata’’ feeds, like the
harbor seal, on fish, squid, octopus, and
larger shellfish, rather than like the rmged
seal on macroplankton.
We call attention to the name P. kurilensis
since it does not appear in the Zoological
Record or in Ellerman and Morrison-Scott’s
“Check List of Palaearctic and Indian
Mammals 1758 to 1946.’ Pending further
study, we suggest that P. kurilensis be
regarded as one of the approximately ten
synonyms of Phoca vitulina largha Pallsa,
1811.
NOVEMBER 1956
MOCKFORD AND GURNEY: REVIEW OF PSOCIDS 353
ENTOMOLOGY.—A review of the psocids, or book-lice and bark-lice, of Texas
(Psocoptera).! Epwarp L. Mocxrorp, University of Illinois, and AsHiny B.
Gurney, U.S. Department of Agriculture.
(Received August 8, 1956)
The psocids (Psocoptera) are one of the
minor orders of insects, with only about
145 species recorded from the United States.
Their obscure habits, small size, and limited
importance are probably responsible for
their nearly complete neglect by all but a
very few entomologists, and it is probable
that intensive study will double the number
of known Nearctic species. This paper is
designed to lay a foundation for future
work on the psocids of Texas.
The principal specimens on which this
report is based were secured by the junior
author in 1951, when he visited Texas in
company with O. L. Cartwright and,
between September 18 and October 8,
collected insects at about 55 localities in
the eastern, central, and southern parts of
the State. In addition to reporting on this
collection, we have included information
on other available Texas material, and pre-
vious records in the literature are also
summarized.
It should be realized that the 1951 trip
was only a beginning of a survey of the
psocid fauna of the State as a whole, since
it covered less than a third of Texas in a
very hurried manner at one season of the
year, and the beating of foliage was the
chief collecting method utilized. The biotic
provinces and physiographic regions of
Texas are quite varied, and future collecting
probably will disclose many additional
species. Several publications on ‘Texas
natural areas may be helpful to future stu-
dents. Blair (1950) described six principal
biotic provinces, these representing some
modifications of Dice’s (1943) results and a
considerable advance over Bailey’s (1905)
grouping, which consisted of traditional
life zones based largely on temperature.
Taylor (1945) and Russell (1945) have con-
tributed other general works dealing with
1 Field work by the junior author was sup-
ported in part by a grant from the Penrose Fund
of the American Philosophical Society.
factors that influence the distribution of
animals of Texas.
The largest number of specimens taken
in 1951 were beaten from folage into a
black umbrella, picked from the umbrella
with a camel-hair brush dipped in alcohol,
and placed in 70-percent alcohol. Others
were found under bark, and a few were
attracted to lights at night. Sifting ground
litter and examining the outer surface of
tree trunks were methods little utilized,
though usually these are helpful and should
be used in future psocid collecting. In
general, psocids did not appear abundant
until the Rio Grande Valley from Mission
eastward was reached, and the very dry
conditions over most of the State in 1951
may have been partly responsible for their
scarcity. From Mission to Brownsville
and along the east coast, palm trees, espe-
cially Washingtonia filifera Wendl. (intro-
duced, probably from California), harbored
many psocids. The dead fronds of un-
trimmed Washingtonia trees were excellent
psocid habitats, especially the lower sur-
faces of the more apical portions.
Special mention should be made of the
stands of the sabal or palmetto, Sabal
tecana Becc., near Brownsville. Originally
there were extensive groves of the sabal
on the delta about the mouth of the Rio
Grande. Now, except for scattered remnants
throughout the delta and extending as far
north of Brownsville as Olmito, and about
80 miles west from the Gulf, native stands
are largely restricted to the Southmost and
Rabb “bends” of the Rio Grande, located
about 6 to 12 miles southeast of downtown
Brownsville. Several very profitable visits
were made in 1951 to that portion of the
Rabb Grove, which is owned by Mlrs.
R. M. McCormick, about 7 mules east-
southeast of Brownsville. A full account of
the sabal, with special reference to the
eroves at Southmost, isthat of Davis (1942);
an earlier review is by Small (1927), and
304
Bailey (1944) has revised the group. This
area south and southeast of Brownsville
is the most nearly tropical portion of
Texas, though there is a fairly severe
frost about every 6 to 10 years, and light
frosts are not rare. Although several plants
and animals of the area are essentially
tropical species, the area can not be con-
sidered part of the true Tropical Zone. A
valuable summary of the plants and zonal
affinities is by Clover (1937). The commer-
cial growing of bananas and other tropical
fruits is impossible in view of the occasional
killing frosts. One of the most severe
freezes, with temperatures below 19° F.,
occurred in early 1951, and is reviewed by
Gunter and Hildebrand (1951). Goldman
(1951, pp. 259-267) described Matamoros
and nearby areas of northern Tamaulipas
as Lower Austral, though invaded by some
Arid Upper Tropical Subzone elements.
Students of broad distributional problems
may be assisted by Galtsoff, et al. (1954).
The pioneer worker on Texas psocids
was Frank Aaron (1862-1947), of Phila-
delphia, Pa., whose life was reviewed by
Calvert (1947). Aaron made a hunting trip
on the plains of southwestern Texas when
16 years old. He collected Texas insects
extensively in 1884, and it was probably
then that he collected the five psocids he
described in 1886. He discussed (1884)
collecting insects, evidently mostly Lepi-
doptera, in the vicinity of Corpus Christi,
visiting “heavy bottom lands,” the coastal
area, and “many broad pastures.’’? He also
made a wagon trip, for collecting purposes,
of over 100 miles along the coast north of
Corpus Christi. While we have not seen
all the type series of his species, which are
preserved in the Academy of Natural
Sciences of Philadelphia, several specimens
have been examined and found to bear no
collecting data except a simple label, ‘““Tex.”’
Many natural habitats visited by Aaron
probably have been greatly altered by agri-
cultural and industrial developments; Cook
(1908) has dealt with such changes in
Texas.
Nathan Banks (1868-1953), for many
years the only American student of psocids,
described five psocids from Texas, and
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
others described by him doubtless will be
found in the State eventually, in addition
to some here recorded for the first time.
P. J. Chapman (1930), in what was the first _
thoroughly modern important systematic
work on Nearctic psocids, contributed very
few Texas records additional to citing the
Aaron and Banks types. Neither Chapman
himself, nor C. R. Crosby and §S. C. Bishop,
who elsewhere in the United States were
extensive collectors of material studied by
Chapman, are mentioned as the collectors
of any Texas psocids.
The beginning student of psocids is ad-
vised to consult such general works as
Badonnel (1943, 1951) and Borrow and
DeLong (1954). For identification of mate-
rial Chapman’s paper (1930) is quite basic
for the genera he treated, and there is a
growing list of recent revisionary works.
The classification of families and higher
groups in this paper follows that used by
Badonnel (1951).
Faunal affinities: Of the 47 species men-
tioned in this paper, 15 are generally dis-
tributed throughout the eastern half of the
United States. These are as follows: Echmep-
teryx hageni, Trogium pulsatorium, Psyllipso-
cus ramburi, Lachesilla forcepeta, L. major,
L. nubilis, L. pedicularia, Ectopsocopsis
pumilis, Pertpsocus madidus, Psocus pollu-
tus, P. bisignatus, Trichadenotecnum unum,
Cerastipsocus venosus, Metylophorus purus,
and Blaste quieta. Of these, three are com-
monly spread by commerce and are found
on both sides of the Atlantic. Trogium pul-
satorrum was with little doubt introduced
into Texas by commerce since it is exclu-
sively domestic in North America. Lache-
silla pedicularia may be native to both
Europe and North America, since it occurs
commonly in both domestic and outdoor
habitats in both continents. Psyllipsocus
ramburu was probably introduced from
Europe into domestic situations in North
America, but it may be native to caves in
Texas. It has not been recorded from as
far south as Texas in dwellings, and the
Texas specimens differ slightly in appearance
from northern domestic material. Badonnel
(1955) has recorded it from a cave in Angola.
Two species were probably introduced
into Texas by commerce but are scarce in
VOL. 46, No. 11.
NOVEMBER 1956
North America generally. These are Ectopso-
cus richards: and Lepinotus reticulatus. E.
richardsi is not recorded in the North
American literature; both the Texas speci-
mens and material taken in Florida by the
senior author were from domestic habitats.
It has also been found in large numbers in a
Boston (Mass.) warehouse. L. reticulatus
has been recorded from only two other
North American localities (Gurney, 1949).
Cerobasis guestfalica, taken at one Texas
locality, is probably native to North Amer-
ica as well as Europe. It is generally dis-
tributed throughout the western States
(Colorado, Utah, California, Washington,
Arizona) and has been found at one Florida
locality (unpublished records of senior
author).
Twelve Texas species show a definite
tropical affinity. These include the species
of Rhyopsocus, Tapinella, and Archipsocus,
Pseudocaecilius citricola, Pseudoseopsis hell-
mani Pesocathropos sp., and Psyllipsocus
oculatus. The first five genera of this list
are largely tropical and reach their northern
limit around the Gulf of Mexico and up the
southeastern Atlantic Coast. Tapinella has
not previously been recorded in the North
American literature. Psyllipsocus oculatus
was previously of uncertain locality as the
holotype was found on plants from Mexico
at a quarantine station at Laredo, Tex.
The family Amphientomidae, represented
in Texas by Pseudoseopsis hellmant, n. sp.,
has not previously been recorded from the
United States. It is well represented in
tropical South America, Africa, and India.
The genus Pseudoseopsis contains only one
other species, P. vilhenat Badonnel from
Angola. The generic assignment of the
Texas species is tentative, and collection of
additional material may show that a new
genus is desirable for it.
Acknowledgments: The 1951 trip of the
junior author was greatly aided by a grant
from the Penrose Fund of the American
Philosophical Society. He is also grateful
for cooperation and courtesies receirved
_ during the trip from the following ento-
mologists at the places mentioned: O. P.
Breland (Austin); L. J. Bottimer, C. L.
Smith (Kerrville); J. B. R. Leary (Laredo);
MOCKFORD AND GURNEY: REVIEW OF PSOCIDS
309
Paul C. Avery (Mission); F. A. Allen, R. A.
Alexander, O. D. Deputy, R. B. Lattimore,
C. H. Wallis, A. L. Wiliamson (Browns-
ville). Laboratory facilities and/or assist-
ance in reaching collecting localities at
Kerrville, Laredo, Mission, and Browns-
ville were generously provided by workers
of the U. 8. Department of Agriculture.
Dr. B. C. Tharp, of the University of Texas,
and Mrs. L. Irby Davis, of Harlingen, Tex.,
have since been of much assistance concern-
ing the distribution of Sabal texana.
Suborder TrocromorPuHa Roesler
Group ATROPETAE Pearman
Family Leprpopsocipar Enderlein
Echmepteryx hageni (Packard)
Amphientomum hagent Packard, 1870, p. 405;
Echmepteryx agilis Aaron, 1886, p. 17; Kch-
mepteryx hagent (Parkard) Enderlein, 1906, p.
320; id., Mockford 1955, p. 438.
Bil Ten miles west of Orange, Oct. 8, 1951, beating
oaks, 1 9, A. B. Gurney.
Family Troaimpar Enderlein
Lepinotus reticulatus Enderlein
Lepinotus reticulatus HWnderlein, 1905, p. 31; 7d.,
Gurney, 1949, p. 63.
Kerrville, Sept. 21, 1951, in floor litter of
chicken house, 1 @, A. B. Gurney.
Trogium pulsatorium (Linnaeus)
Termes pulsatorius Linnaeus, 1758, p.
Synonymy discussed by Gurney, 1939.
610.
Corpus Christi, Aug. 1945, from house, 9 ¢,
4 nymphs, F. R. DuChanois.
Cerobasis guestfalica (Kolbe)
Hyperetes guestfalicus Kolbe, 1880, p. 132 (original
description examined).
The spelling of guestfalica agrees with the femi-
nine gender of Cerobasis, unlike lapidarius as
given by Badonnel (1955, p. 32). The combina-
tion C. muraria used by Kolbe (1882, p. 212) also
agrees. Cerobasis 1s comparable in gender to
Goniobasis (shown as feminine by Brown, 1954,
p. 124). Generic synonymy has been discussed by
Gurney (1949) and given earlier by Roesler
(1944, p. 131).
Kerrville State Park, Sept. 20, 1951, 7 ¢, 3
nN
nymphs; Kerrville: U. S. Dept. of Agriculture
306 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 11
Rhyopsocus squamosus
Pseudoseopsis’ hellmani
Fias. 1-4.—Rhyopsocus squamosus, n. sp., male: 1, Front wing; 2, hind wing; 3, tip of lacinia; 4,
parameres. Fras. 5-18.—Pseudoseopsis hellmani, nu. sp., female: 5, Front wing; 6, hind wing; 7, front
wing, showing pattern of scales; 8, 9, scales of wing membrane; 10, scale from margin of wing; 11, la-
cinia; 12, maxillary palpus; 13, spines of row on front femur; 14, tarsal claw; 15, subgenital plate; 16,
gonapophyses; 17, plate of opening of spermathecal duct; 18, sclerotization beside spermatheca.
NOVEMBER 1956
Laboratory, Sept. 21, 1951, beating cedars, 5 2,
3 nymphs. Both collections by A. B. Gurney.
Family PsoquiLuipAE Pearman
Rhyopsocus bentonae Sommerman
Rhyopsocus bentonae Sommerman, 1956, p. 146.
Corpus Christi, Oct. 6, 1951, beating palms,
1 o,1 9, A.B. Gurney.
Rhyopsocus phillipsae Sommerman
Rhyopsocus phillipsae Sommerman, 1956, p. 146.
Ten miles west of Orange, Oct. 8, 1951, beating
oaks, 1 @, A. B. Gurney.
Rhyopsocus squamosus, n. sp.
Figs. 1-4
Diagnosis.—Differs from R. speciophilus dis-
partlis (Pearman), and presumably R. s. specio-
philus (Enderlein), in smaller size (body length
of that species 1.4 mm) and relatively shorter
wings. Differs from R. afer (Badonnel) in paler
color of head and thorax, relatively shorter wings,
and in details of male genitalia. Differs from R.
bentonae Sommerman in microptery and in de-
tails of male genitalia. Differs from R. phillipsae
Sommerman in lack of abdominal tergal lobes of
male, genitalic details, and shorter wings.
Holotype o&.—Measurements: Total body
length 1.17 mm; forewing length 0.37 mm; hind
tibia length 0.20 mm; hind tarsus: T; 0.13 mm,
T, 0.04 mm, T3 0.04 mm.
Morphology.—Brachypterous; forewings ex-
tending to about half length of abdomen and
showing very faint venation (Fig. 1). Hindwings
(Fig. 2) slightly longer than metathorax. [O/D =
1.62; PO/D? = 0.50. Anteroposterior diameter of
eye 0.173 mm. Epicranial and frontal sutures
present. Ocelli absent. Lacinia (Fig. 3) of usual
type for the genus. Terminal segment of maxillary
palpus clavate. Thoracic nota of the short-winged
type with no prominent lobes. All tibiae with
2 It is not clear from Badonnel’s explanation
of PO (Badonnel, 1955, p. 18) exactly what is
meant. As stated, it is a simple linear measure-
ment which should be expressed in units and
which would not show the prominence of the eye.
In the text of Badonnel’s paper, no units accom-
pany the figures. Figures of comparable size, and
which do express the prominence of the eye fairly
satisfactorily are obtained by dividing the trans-
verse diameter by the anteroposterior diameter
(both measurements taken in dorsal view of the
need) Our figures for PO/D were obtained in
this manner.
MOCKFORD AND GURNEY: REVIEW OF PSOCIDS
307
three terminal spurs. Hypandrium unmodified.
Parameres (Fig. 4) long, slender, diverging ante-
riorly. Sclerites of the penis canal complex, lack-
ing denticles. Paraprocts each with a strong spine
near inner margin and several cilia apparently
lacking basal rosettes.
Color (from paratype in alcohol).—Eyes black;
three brown pigment spots in ocellar positions; a
few other tiny brown spots in front, otherwise
head, body, and appendages pale straw-colored.
Type locality—Texas, Olmito Resaca, near
Brownsville, holotype &, 1 paratype, <@, 1
nymph, Oct. 4, 1951, on vegetation, A. B. Gurney.
Types in U.S. National Museum, no. 62261.
Discussion.—This species is considered a bra-
chypterous Rhyopsocus because its hind wings and
lack of ocelli exclude it from the genera Hosilla
Rib. and Hmpheriella Enderlein, and its Rhyop-
socus-type lacinia exclude it from Balliella Badon-
nel. We consider Detpnopsocus Enderlein and
Rhyopsocopsis Pearman (new synonymy) syno-
nyms of Rhyopsocus Hagen. Deipnopsocus has
already been placed in synonymy by Badonnel
(1949, p. 29).
Rhyopsocus texanus (Banks)
Deipnopsocus tecanus Banks, 1930, p. 223.
Type locality, Brownsville. This species can-
not be recognized from the original description.
It is discussed by Sommerman (1956). The type
is in the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cam-
bridge, Mass.
Group PsocaTROPETAE Pearman
Family Psyiurpsocrpar Enderlein
Psyllipsocus ramburii Selys-Longchamps
Psyllipsocus ramburit Selys-Longchamps, 1872, p
146. Synonymy listed by Gurney, 1943.
Sonora, Wyatt Cave, July 28, 1926, 1 9;
Hayes County: San Marcos, Sept. 15, 1953, under
rocks in entrance to Ezel’s Cave, 5 @, 2 nymphs,
E. L. Mockford.
Psyllipsocus oculatus Gurney
Figs. 52-53
Psyllipsocus oculatus Gurney 1948, p. 214.
The female of this species, previously unde-
scribed, is similar to the male in size and color.
The gonapophyses (Fig. 53) differ from those of
the other
mentary internal valve.
American species in possessing a rudi-
308
Mission, Sept. 30, 1951, beating palms, 1 o,
1 9, A. B. Gurney.
Psocathropos sp.
This species was discussed by Gurney (1949)
as P. lachlant Ribaga, but until more information
is available it may be best to avoid applying
that specific name to our United States popula-
tion. We are using Ribaga’s original spelling of
the generic name.
Houston, in house, July 26, 1941, M. Cockrell,
8 %,2 2,2 nymphs; Brownsville, on loose paper
in laboratory, Oct. 3, 1951, A. B. Gurney, 1 9;
Brownsville, in house, Oct. 31, 1951, F. A. Allen,
3 4,1 2, 2 nymphs.
Suborder TrocromoreHa Roesler
Group AMPHIENTOMETAE Pearman
Family AMPHIENTOMIDAE Enderlein
Pseudoseopsis hellmani, n. sp.
Figs. 5-18
Diagnosis.—Differs from the African species
P. vilhenat Badonnel in presence of ocelli and in
shape of the gonapophyses of segment 9.
Holotype @.—Measurements: Total body
length 2.83 mm; forewing length 2.73 mm; hind-
wing length 2.23 mm; hind tibia length 1.07 mm;
hind tarsus: T, 0.67 mm, T, 0.107 mm, T; 0.107
mm.
Morphology (from holotype and paratypes).—
Eyes bare, their posterior margins coinciding with
the straight posterior margin of the vertex viewed
from above. Three distinct ocelli located far apart,
the laterals immediately beyond and below ends
of frontal sutures and near compound eyes. An-
tennae of 12 segments, the basal flagellar seg-
ments quite long. Numerous indistinct striae on
all flagellar segments, very close together toward
the tip. Maxillary palpi covered with tiny hairs,
interspersed with larger hairs arranged roughly in
rows encircling the segments. Second segment
showing three papillae (sensillae?) on one palpus
of a paratype, only one on the other palpus; third
segment somewhat shorter than second and
fourth. Lacinia as in Fig. 11, slightly curved near
tip. Forewing (Fig. 5) with a slightly extended
apex, the extended portion actually rounded.
Distal portion of Sc distinct. Scales of membrane
mostly short and wide with the apex truncate
(Fig. 8), but some quite slender (Fig. 9). Marginal
scales slender; some extremely slender with the
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
voL. 46, No. IL
apex slightly emarginate (Fig. 10). Hind wing
with acute apex; vein R,; nearly reaching wing
margin; vein Ax strongly curved. Scales mostly
slender; some marginal scales extremely long and
slender with emarginate apices.
Anterior femur with a row of 25 spines (Fig. 18)
with wide bases, not articulated. Other spination
of legs summarized in Table 1. Twenty-two cte-
nidiobothria on T, of hind leg. A small comb run-
ning to the claw at apex of T; of each leg. Claw
with single preapical tooth and a row of tiny hairs
ventrally (Fig. 14).
Gemtalia and terminalia.—Subgenital plate
(Fig. 15) with a sclerotized process. Gonapophy-
ses (Fig. 16): ventral valve long, slender, acumi-
nate apically with a sclerotized inner edge; dorsal
valve acuminate apically; lobes of external valve
rounded apically. Sclerite of spermathecal open-
ing (Fig. 17) and sclerite beside spermatheca
(Fig. 18) as illustrated. Epiproct and paraprocts
covered with long, slender hairs; paraprocts each
with a field of hairs with basal rosettes.
Scale color pattern (from dry specimens).—
Head except eyes covered with slender, curved
pale-gray scales. Mesonotum covered with short,
wide white scales. Femora covered with dirty-
gray and brown scales; fore and middle tibiae
TABLE 1.—SPINATION OF LEGS IN PSEUDOSEOPSIS
HELLMANI
Number of spines on—
Resion
"<8 |Prothoracic eee Metathoracic leg
Femur None 1 lateral 1 lateral
apex 1 curved, | 1 curved, external
external
Body of None 1,14 dis- | External—1, 4 from base
tibia tance 1, 28 from base
from 2, 34 from base
base 2, 48 from base
1 near Lateral 1, &8 from base
apex Internal 1, % from base
2, 68 from base
2, 4% from base
Tibia apex | 1 5 6
First tarsal) 3 near 3 near 3 near apex, ventral
segment apex, apex, 2 apical, ventral
ventral ventral
2 apical, 2 apical,
ventral ventral
Second 1 apical, 2 apical, 1 apical, ventral
tarsal ventral ventral
segment
Third None None None
tarsal
segment
NOvEMBER 1956 MOCKFORD AND GURNEY: REVIEW OF PSOCIDS 359
20
2i Tapinella maculata
a 7 |
a Wl ce
Caecilius palmarum
Caecilius caloclypeus
5. 19-24.—Tapinella maculata, n. sp., female; 25-26, same, male: 19, Front wing; 20, hind wing;
Fries 19 24 5 I ) ? >] ) d ? =)
21, tips of laciniae; 22, gonapophyses; 23, subgenital plate; 24, epiproct and paraproct; 20,
; sterior margin o h abdominal tergite. Fras. 27-32.—Caectlius palmarum, D. sp.
hallic frame; 26, post f 9th abd 1 tergite. Fras. 27-382.—C l pal p.,
ale: wing; 28, hind wing; tip of mandible; 30, tip of lacinia; 31, gonapophyses; 32.
female: 27, Front ; 28, hind g; 29, tip of lible; 30, tip of 1 31, s pophy 2
subgenital plate. Fras. 33-38.—Caecilius caloclypeus, n. sp., female: 33, Front wing; 34, hind wing;
35, tip of lacinia; 36, tip of mandible; 37, gonapophyses; 38, subgenital plate.
360
covered with brown scales except for an apical
band of white scales on each. Hind tibia with a
basal, medial, and apical band of white scales,
the remainder covered with brown scales. Tarsi:
each T; with an apical band of dirty white scales,
the remainders covered with brown scales. Fore-
wings marked with a complex pattern of gray
and white scales (Fig. 7); in areas of white scales
adjacent to the wing margin, the long marginal
scales are white. Hind wings not visible on the
dry specimens. Scales very sparse on abdomen.
Type locality —Texas, Ezel’s Cave (near San
Marcos, Hayes County), holotype 2,4 @ para-
types and 2 nymphs, Sept. 15, 1953, on limestone
outcrop at mouth of cave, R. E. Hellman and
E. L. Mockford.
Holotype and one paratype in U.S. National
Museum, no. 63276; remaining paratypes in E.
L. Mockford Collection.
Discussion.—We have chosen the following
characters as important for generic diagnosis in
the Amphientomidae: (1) Shape of forewing apex,
(2) nature of spines in row on femur I (they may
be numerous, wide, and unarticulated, or few,
slender, and articulated), (3) number of preapical
teeth on tarsal claws, (4) curvature of lacinia, (5)
shape of scale apices and pattern of striation on
scales, and (6) presence or absence, and size and
number of sensory cones on second segment of
maxillary palpi. The Texas species agrees with
the genotype of Pseudoseopsis in four of these
characters, whereas it agrees with no other closely
related genus in more than three. It is also very
similar to P. vilhenai in general shape of the
wings.
This species is named for Robert E. Hellman,
of New York City, a herpetologist and former
classmate of the senior author at the University
of Florida. His companionship and aid on many
field trips, including the one on which the type
series of this species was taken, are gratefully
acknowledged.
Group NaNnopsoceTAr Pearman
Family LiposceLrpar Enderlein
Genus Liposcelis Motschulsky
Dr. Kathryn M. Sommerman has very kindly
examined our material in this genus and informs
us (in litt.) that it contains five species, three of
which are described as new in a paper which she
has in press.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 46, No. 11
Family Pacuytrroctipar Enderlein
Tapinella maculata, n. sp.
Figs. 19-24
Diagnosis.—Ditiers from T. formosana Ender-
lein and Psylloneura williamsi Banks (probably a
Tapinella) in color, these species being pale yel-
low-brown, unmarked. Differs from 7. castanea
Pearman, 7’. africana Badonnel, 7. squamosa
Badonnel, and 7’. curvata Badonnel also in color,
these species being largely dark brown.
Holotype °.—Macropterous. Measurements:
Total body length 1.60 mm; forewing length
1.40 mm; hindwing length 1.07 mm; hind tibia
length 0.53 mm; hind tarsus: T, 0.24 mm, T»
0.05 mm, T; 0.07 mm.
Morphology.—Compound eyes not exceeding
posterior margin of head. Epicranial and frontal
sutures distinct. Ocellar triangle slightly nearer
clypeus than posterior margin of head. Suture
between clypeus and front straight when viewed
from above. Mouthparts of usual type for the
group. Lacinia slender, tridentate at apex (Fig.
21). Maxillary palpi lacking specialized sensory
spines. Antennae of 15 segments which are sec-
ondarily ringed from the distal half of F; outward
to the tip. Wings unmarked. Venation of usual
form for the genus; closed cell absent in hind
wing. Abdomen completely membranous, includ-
ing genitalia. Gonapophyses as in Fig. 22, closely
associated with an appendage from the paraproct,
shown under the external valve in the figure. Sub-
genital plate bearing T-shaped sclerite with arms
long and curved.
Color (in aleohol).— Ground color cream, eyes
black. A pale red-brown band from each com-
pound eye through base of antenna to about mid-
point of clypeus, the two bands meeting there.
An irregular dark red-brown band on each side
of thorax just above coxal insertions. Abdomen
marked with six series of red-brown spots from
segments | through 8 (one spot in each series per
segment): two dorsal series of rather pale spots
wider than long, a paired dorso-lateral series of
dark U-shaped spots with open ends of U-s di-
rected posteriorly, and a paired ventro-lateral
series of spots longer than wide.
Allotype #.—Apterous. Measurements: Total
body length, 1.13 mm; hind tibia length 0.40 mm;
hind tarsus: T, 0.13 mm, T, 0.05 mm, T3 0.07 mm.
Differs from holotype in smaller size, aptery and
associated characters of absence of ocelli and flat
notal lobes, and absence of frontal sutures. Geni-
talia as in Fig. 25.
NOVEMBER 1956
Variation Some female paratypes are apter-
ous, lack ocelli, and lack all trace of subdivisions
of the pterothoracic tergites (in macropterous
forms each pterothoracic tergite is composed of a
trilobed scutum and separate scutellum); these
have only a trace of frontal sutures. Among alate
females much variation exists in details of vena-
tion; it is seldom bilaterally symmetrical. Varia-
tions observed are: (1) A closed cell in hind wing
at point of first branching of the main vein, (2)
radial branch in hindwing disconnected from
main vein, (3) a closed cell in forewing formed by
presence of two R-M crossveins, (4) Rs in fore-
wing 3-branched, (5) Cus in forewing set at angle
of Cu stem, (6) R + M in forewing joined at a
point.
Type locality —Texas, Mission, holotype 9°,
allotype #, 2 paratypes, 7 alate 2 paratypes,
20 apterous © paratypes, and 5 nymphs, Sept.
30, 1951, on palm leaves, A. B. Gurney. Other
paratypes—Texas, Palm Grove near Brownsville,
5 apterous 2, 1 nymph (not paratype), Oct. 2
and 3, 1951, beating palm leaves; Olmito Resaca,
1 apterous 2, 1 nymph (not paratype), Oct. 4,
1951, beating vegetation; all collected by A. B.
Gurney.
Types in U.S. National Museum, no. 62264.
Tapinella sp.
A single female taken at Weslaco on dead palm
leaves, Oct. 1, 1951, differs from 7’. maculata in
its uniform straw-brown color (slightly darker on
head and terminal abdominal segments). It is
probably a new species since the arms of the T-
shaped sclerite are longer than in 7’. maculata.
Suborder PsocomorpHa Weber
Group CaEcrILipTtar Pearman
Family Carcriiupar Enderlein
Caecilius palmarum, n. sp.
Figs. 27-32
Diagnosis—A pale yellow species, differing
from the other North American species with that
coloration (C. aurantiacus (Hagen), C. manteri
Sommerman, C. sommermanae Mockford) in be-
ing marked with a brown band longitudinally
through the vertex, front, and clypeus. Head and
wings narrower than in these other species.
Holotype @.—Measurements: Total body
length 2.67 mm; forewing length 2.57 mm; hind-
wing length 1.87 mm; hind tibia length 0.90 mm;
hind tarsus: T; 0.267 mm, T, 0.107 mm.
MOCKFORD AND GURNEY:
REVIEW OF PSOCIDS 361
Morphology —I0/D = 1.28. Lacinia with a
slender, blunt tip (Fig. 30). Tip of mandible bear-
ing a hooked tooth. Wing venation and ciliation
normal fer the genus. A long fusion of Rs and M
in both fore and hind wings. Gonapophyses
(Fig. 31) straight with slender tips. Subgenital
plate (Fig. 32) with sclerotized area in the form
of a pair of slender, converging bands visible
after staining.
Color (in alcohol).—Eyes black. Antennae,
anal veins, and veins of apical one-third of fore-
wing straw colored. Rest of body pale yellow
except for a pale brown band from immediately
anterior to occiput on vertex to lower border of
clypeus, and pale brown lateral areas on thoracic
tergal lobes.
Type locality —Texas, Olmito Resaca, 9 miles
north of Brownsville, holotype @°, 50 @ para-
types, and 57 nymphs, Oct. 4, 1951, beating
palms and palmettoes, A. B. Gurney. Other para-
types (not including nymphs), Palm Grove near
Brownsville, 14 2, numerous nymphs, October 1
and 3, 1951, beating dead leaves, Gurney &
Allen; western outskirts of Corpus Christi, 70 2,
24 nymphs, Oct. 6, 1951, beating palm leaves,
A. B. Gurney.
Types in U. 8. National Museum, no. 63237.
Caecilius calocylpeus, n. sp.
Figs. 33-38
Diagnosis.—A_ pale-yellow species, differing
from the other North American species with that
coloration in that the only conspicuous body
marks are several pairs of clypeal striations.
Holotype @.—Measurements: Total body
length 2.93 mm; forewing length 2.87 mm, hind-
wing length 2,13 mm; hind tibia length 1.07 mm;
hind tarsus: T, 0.267 mm; T, 0.107 mm.
Morphology —lO/D = 1.57. Lacinia rounded
at tip. Tip of mandible bearing a straight tooth.
Wing venation and ciliation normal for the genus.
A short fusion of both Rs and M in both fore and
hind wings. Gonapophyses (Fig. 37) a pair of
curved blades; valve of 9th bearing a stout basal
seta. Subgenital plate (Fig. 38) with sclerotized
area as a pair of converging bands, wider than in
C. palmarum, visible after staming.
Color (in alcohol).
fore tibiae and tarsi, and veins in apical half of
Eyes black. Antennae,
forewing straw colored. Rest of body pale yellow
except for seven pairs of purplish brown striae on
clypeus and a faint purplish brown band on each
362 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 11
42
Ectopsocus dimorphus
52
Psyllipsocus oculatus
Lachesilla kathrynae
a ee Se SS
EE =
t ii ae .
je Ss
pe ? N
\y 1
48
Lachesilla bottimeri
Fies. 39-40.—EKctopsocus dimorphus, n. sp., male; 41-48, same, female: 39, Apex of phallic frame
(somewhat distorted) and penis sclerotizations; 40, ninth abdominal tergite with comb; 41, paraproct;
42, gonapophyses; 43, subgenital plate. Fras. 44-45.—Lachesilla kathrynae, n. sp., female; 46-47, same,
male: 44, Subgenital plate; 45, gonapophysis; 46, epiproct; 47, hypandrium and parameres. Fries. 48-
49.—Lachesilla bottimeri, n. sp., female; 50-51, same, male: 48, Subgenital plate; 49, gonapophysis;
50, epiproct and paraproct; 51, hypandrium and parameres. Fras. 52-53.—Psyllipsocus oculatus Gurney,
female: 52, paraproct and epiproct; 53, gonapophyses. (All drawings by the senior author.)
NOVEMBER 1956
side running the length of the lateral prothoracic
sclerites.
Type locality—Texas, Palm Grove near
Brownsville, holotype @ and 2 nymphs, Oct. 1,
1951, beating palms. Paratypes—Mission, 1 9,
Sept. 30, 1951, beating palmate palms; Olmito
Resaca near Brownsville, 1 ¢, Oct. 4, 1951,
beating palms and palmettoes. All collected by
A. B. Gurney.
Types in U.S. National Museum, no. 63238.
Group HomiLopsocipEA Pearman
Family Pprrpsocipar Pearman
Peripsocus madidus (Hagen)
Psocus madidus Hagen, 1861, p. 12. Synonymy
presented by Chapman, 1930.
Bexar County, May 5, 1938, swept from peach,
4 9,14 9, 1 nymph.
Ectopsocus richardsi (Pearman)
Chaetopsocus richardsi Pearman, 1929, p.
Ectopsocus richardsi Pearman, 1942, p. 290.
105;
Houston, April 15, 1948, in stored rice, 3 &,
2 9, R. T. Cotton; Beaumont, July 18, 1936,
cracks in floor in rice mill, 1 #,1 9, A. L. Balzer.
Ectopsocus dimorphus, n. sp.
Figs. 39-43
Diagnosis.—Very similar to EH. pearmani Ball
of Belgian Congo, differing chiefly in shape of
subgenital plate, the apical lobes being further
apart in the present species; also differing slightly
in several measurements. Males micropterous
(nearly apterous) ; females dimorphic: macropter-
ous and micropterous. -
Holotype @.—Macropterous. Measurements:
Total body length 1.43 mm; forewing length 1.40
mm; hindwing length 1.17 mm; hind tibia length
0.50 mm; hind tarsus: T, 0.187 mm, T, 0.080 mm.
Morphology.—Epicranial and frontal sutures
distinct. Eyes small but prominent. IO/D = 2.9;
PO/D = 0.65; anteroposterior diameter of eye
0.133 mm. Vertex, front, and postclypeus covered
with curved setae. Antenna somewhat shorter
than forewing. Ratio of f; to Se-+P = 1.8; ratio of
f; to fo +f; = 0.76. Eight ctenidiobothria on first
segment of hind tarsus; none on that of middle
tarsus. Stigma sack of normal length, rounded
apically. In forewing R, meets M for a short dis-
tance, or the two are connected by a short cross-
vein. Hairs on wings restricted to stem of R, stem
MOCKFORD AND GURNEY:
REVIEW OF PSOCIDS 363
of M + Cu, and Ax in forewing; these hairs few
and short. Gonapophyses (Fig. 42): internal valve
very minute; ventral valve with spinulose apex;
external valve a thumblike flap, mostly sclero-
tized, bearing 10 setae distally. Subgenital plate
(Fig. 43) bilobed apically, each lobe with several
marginal setae. Paraprocts (Fig. 41) bearing four
trichobothria and a median row of five setae;
duplex spine of inner margin very minute.
Color (in alcohol).—Eyes black. Body and ap-
pendages generally tawny brown. Membranous
portion of abdomen pale, ringed with brown (sub-
cuticular pigment). Wings unmarked, slightly
tawny.
Allotype o&.—Micropterous. Measurements:
Total body length 1.27 mm; hind tibia length
0.467 mm; hind tarsus: T; 0.147 mm, T. 0.080
mm. Differs from holotype in much smaller size
and microptery; wings represented by two pairs
of small fleshy lobes, each bearing a few bristles.
IO/D = 2.2. PO/D = 0.6, anteroposterior diame-
ter of eye 0.133 mm. Ocelli absent. Thoracic ter-
gites of micropterous type, with large prothoracic
tergite and pterothoracic tergites not divided into
lobes. Similar in color to holotype, but abdominal
rings more distinct. Hach abdominal tergite
bearing a distinct row of bristles. Tergite 9
adorned with a comb of teeth (Fig. 40). Penis and
parameres (Fig. 39) with external parameres
rather far apart so that aedeagal arch is wide.
Sclerotizations of penis consisting of a pair of rods
spinose apically, a hook on each side externally
(not symmetrical), and other small sclerites of
the canal.
Variation—Micropterous females occur with
wing pads not reaching the abdomen. These have
typical undivided thoracic tergites of the short-
winged type, and ocelli represented by three small
subcuticular pigment spots. Setae of the vertex,
front, and postclypeus are somewhat shorter
than in the macropterous forms.
Type locality—Texas, Brownwood (Brown
County), holotype @ and a large number of
macropterous paratype ° 9 May 14, 1939, from
peach, L. 8. Jones. Allotype &, Texas, Tyler,
Nov. 24, 19389, on cover crop in peach orchard,
associated with 4 micropterous @ paratypes and
2 nymphs, L. D. Christensen. Other paratypes
Texas, Brownwood (Brown County), 1 macrop-
terous ¢, March 26-27, 1939, from peach, L. 8.
Jones; Bangs (Brown County), + macropterous
9, June 8, 1938, sweeping peach and cover crops,
O64
Christensen et al.; Brown County, | micropterous
9, 2 macropterous ¢?, July 14, 1937, peach
orchard, Turner & Anderson; Bexar County, 11
macropterous 2, May 5, 1938, on peach, W. R.
Turner; same locality, | macropterous @, 6 mi-
cropterous @, Nov. 23, 1938, on soil under grass
and leaves in peach orchard, W. F. Turner; Dal-
las, 1 macropterous 2°, May 25, 1939, on cane,
W.G. Bruce; El Paso County, 7 micropterous @,
July 22, 1937, on soil in peach orchard, Turner &
Anderson. New Mexico, Albuquerque, 8 microp-
terous 2, 1 @, 1 nymph, March 3, 1938, from
soil, L. D. Christensen; same locality, 2 microp-
terous @, December 9, 1939, from soil, L. D.
Christensen. California, Cherry Valley, 3 ma-
cropterous 2°, May 7, 1937, on peach and in soil,
Christensen & Jones; Hemet, 1 &, 1 micropter-
ous 2, Jan. 13, 1938, in soil, Christensen et al.;
Los Angeles County, Ranger Station at west fork
of San Gabriel River near Mount Wilson, eleva-
tion 3,200 feet, 1 #, 1 micropterous 2, Sept. 9,
1953, in ground litter under California Live Oak,
E. L. Mockford: Georgia, Decatur County,
Woodruff Dam site near Florida line, 1 @, 1
micropterous 2, June 2, 1953, in ground litter
on hillside in newly cleared field, E. L. Mockford.
Holotype, allotype, and most of paratypes in
U.S. National Museum, no. 63239.
Ectopsocopsis pumilis (Banks)
Peripsocus pumilis Banks, 1920, p. 313; Ectopsocus
pumilis (Banks), Chapman, 1930, p. 380.
Beaumont, Oct. 8, 1951, beating palms, and in
rice straw near rice experiment station, 4 7,9 9;
western outskirts of Corpus Christi, Oct. 6, 1951,
beating palms, 3 2, 1 nymph; 9 miles north of
Brownsville, Oct. 4, 1951, beating palms and
palmettoes, 1 9, 2 nymphs. All collected by A.
B. Gurney.
The genus Ectopsocopsis has recently been de-
scribed by Badonnel (1955, pp. 185, 193).
Family PspupocarcrLiipaAE Pearman
Pseudocaecilius citricola (Ashmead), n. comb.
Psocus citricola Ashmead, 1879, p. 228; Caecilius
pretiosus Banks, 1920, p. 311 (new synonymy);
Pseudocaecilius wolcotti Banks, 1924, p. 423 (new
synonymy); Pseudocaecilius pretiosus (Banks),
Chapman, 1930, p. 332.
San Antonio, 3 @ (holotype and paratypes of
C. pretiosus Banks).
Four specimens on paper points were found in
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vot. 46, No. 11
the U.S. National Museum which apparently are
cotypes of Psocus citricola Ashmead. Each bears
a printed label “Jacksonville, Fla.” and a hand-
written label ‘“‘“Psocus citricola Ashm.” The writ-
ing on the latter labels has been identified as that
of Ashmead by A. B. Gahan, long a Hymenoptera
specialist at the National Museum. Ashmead
lived in Jacksonville when he published the de-
scription of this species, and most of his collecting
was done locally. From the dry specimens it can
be seen that all are the same species, a Pseudo-
caecilius. One, here selected as lectotype (U.S.-
N.M. type no. 63247), has been soaked from its
point in KOH solution and mounted on a slide
for critical comparison with paratypes of pre-
tiosus and wolcotti borrowed from the M.C.Z.
Since no differences of specific magnitude have
been noted in wing markings, venation, ciliation,
measurements of head, wings, and hind legs, and
number of ctenidiobothria on posterior T; (geni-
talia can not be compared as none of the citricola
specimens have abdomens), we regard the latter
two forms as synonyms of citricola.
Family LacuEstuuipaAE Badonnel
Lachesilla forcepeta Chapman
Lachesilla forcepeta Chapman, 1930, p. 348.
Kerrville State Park, Sept. 20, 1951, beaten
from cedar, 1 @, 2 nymphs, A. B. Gurney.
Lachesilla major Chapman
Lachesilla forcepeta var. major Chapman, 1930, p.
349; Lachesilla major Chapman, Sommerman,
1946, p. 645.
Ten miles west of Orange, Oct. 8, 1951, beating
live oak and other oaks, A. B. Gurney.
Lachesilla nubilis (Aaron)
Caecilius nubilis Aaron, 1886, p. 13; Lachesilla
nubilis (Aaron), Chapman, 1930, p. 351.
Kerrville, Sept. 21, 1951, at light in laboratory,
1 @, A. B. Gurney; Dilly, Frio State Park, Sept.
24, 1951, 1 o&, A. B. Gurney; Dallas, Apr. 5,
1905, in dry cotton bolls, 2 #7, 3 2, 9 nymphs.
Type locality “Southern Texas” (Aaron). See
records in Sommerman, 1946, p. 648.
Lachesilla pedicularia (Linnaeus)
Hemerobius pedicularia Linnaeus, 1758, p. 551.
Synonymy presented by Enderlein, 1919, p. 16.
Dallas, April 15, 1908, 1 #, 1 @. F. CG.
Bishopp.
NOVEMBER 1956 MOCKFORD AND
Lachesilla penta Sommerman
Lachesilla penta Sommerman, 1946, p. 652.
Corpus Christi State Park, Oct. 6, 1951, beat-
ing mesquite and other vegetation, 2 9, 2
nymphs. Type locality, Brownsville, May 2, 1904,
cote OreEh s. Barber.
Lachesilla rena Sommerman
Lachesilla rena Sommerman, 1946, p. 653.
A male paratype was recorded from Brown-
wood, Tex., by Sommerman.
Lachesilla kathrynae, n. sp.
Figs. 44-47
Diagnosis.—A member of the species group in-
including Z. anna Sommerman, L. chapmani
Sommerman, L. forcepeta Chapman, L. contra-
forcepeta Chapman, and L. major Chapman. Very
sunilar to L. chapmani, differing in details of the
genitalia in both sexes.
Holotype o&—Measurements: Total body
length 1.33 mm; forewing length 1.53 mm; hind-
wing length 1.17 mm; hind tibia length 0.63 mm;
hind tarsus: T,; 0.267 mm, T, 0.080 mm.
Morphology.—Genitalia (Figs. 46, 47) with
several characters typical of the species group—
hypandrium of a large basal and small apical
sclerite, the apical sclerite with a deep v-shaped
cleft in its posterior margin. Parameres fused
basally into a rod, but this rod curved rather than
straight as in closely related species; parameres
diverging apically, the two arms joined to the hy-
pandrium along its cleft. Claspers curved out,
stouter than in L. chapmani, and bulging near
their apices. Paraprocts each with a ridge arising
near sense tubercles and running to inner margins.
Epiproct bearing a conspicuous apical tubercle as
in L. chapmani.
Color (in alcohol).—Eyes black; antennae,
wing veins, and dotted areas on vertex straw-
colored. Body colorless except for red brown pig-
ment distributed as follows: on cervical sclerites,
on mesepimeral sutures, inner surfaces of coxae;
two rows on each side of abdominal tergites 2
through 5, the dorsal rows continuing as weak
spots to tergite 7.
Allotype 9 .—Measurements: Total body length
1.70 mm; forewing length 1.98 mm; hindwing
length 1.87 mm; hind tibia length 0.73 mm; hind
tarsus: T; 0.280 mm, T, 0.093 mm.
GURNEY:
REVIEW OF PSOCIDS 365
Morphology.—Gonapophyses (Fig. 45) a sim-
ple pair of flaps, narrowed near baseand expanded
preapically. Subgenital plate (Fig. 44) with an
extended apical region; a more heavily sclerotized
area (detectable by staining with acid fuchsin)
outlined in dashed lines on the figure. Lacking a
colored ventral interior plate.
Color (in alcohol).—Similar to holotype but
abdominal red-brown spots present only on
tergites 2 through 4.
Variation Some & paratypes show the red-
brown abdominal marks only on tergites 2
through 4, while some @ paratypes show them
only on tergites 2 and 3.
Type locality—Texas, Palm Grove near
Brownsville, holotype &, allotype 9,5 @, and
17 2 paratypes, Oct. 3, 1951, beating dead palm
leaves. Other paratypes: type locality, 5 7,1 2,
Oct. 1, 1951, beating palms; Mission, 2 7,3 9,
1 nymph (not paratype), Sept. 30, 1951, beating
palm leaves; Olmito Resaca near Brownsville,
1 9, Oct. 4, 1951, beating palms and palmettoes.
All collected by A. B. Gurney.
Types in U. 8. National Museum, no. 63240.
We are glad to dedicate this species to Dr.
Kathryn M. Sommerman, in recognition of her
many scholarly and highly basic studies of Ne-
arctic psocids.
Lachesilla bottimeri, n. sp.
Figs. 48-51
Diagnosis—A member of the same species
group as L. kathrynae, differing from all other
members in possession of very long, incurved
claspers in the male (Fig. 51) and in other geni-
talic details in both sexes.
Holotype Measurements: Total body
length 1.40 mm, forewing length 1.67 mm;
hindwing length 1.27 mm; hind tibia length 0.70
mm; hind tarsus: T, 0.218 mm, T. 0.093 mm.
Morphology.— Genitalia with usual characters
typical of the species group. Cleft im apical sclerite
of hypandrium U-shaped. Rod formed by fused
parameres straight; parameres diverging apically
and joined to hypandrium along U-shaped cleft.
Claspers long (exceeding tip of abdomen) and
slender, curving in at their tips; tips sharply
pointed.
Color (in aleohol).—LEyes black; antennae and
thorax above tan; dotted areas of vertex, thorax
below, legs, and genitalia pale straw-colored.
Wing membranes clear, the veins brown. Remain-
366
der of head and abdomen unpigmented except for
dark red-brown marks (also on thorax) distrib-
uted as follows: a line over each antennal inser-
tion, the two joined by a pale brown line across
front; the two lines above antennae each joined
to a band starting posterior to antenna and con-
tinuing to abdominal segment 7, widest on abdo-
men.
Allotype 2.—Measurements: Total body length
1.67 mm; forewing length 1.73 mm; hindwing
length 1.33 mm; hind tibia length 0.73 mm; hind
tarsus: T, 0.200 mm; T, 0.080 mm.
Morphology.—Gonapophyses (Fig. 49) a pair
of rather elongate flaps, narrow at base and di-
rected mesally near base. Subgenital plate (Fig.
48) with a very weakly delineated extended apical
region; a more heavily sclerotized area (detect-
able by staining with acid fuchsin) outlined proxi-
mally in dashed lines and extending distally to
the apex. A colored ventral interior plate absent.
Color same as in holotype.
¢ Variation.—On one paratype 92 the red-brown
lateral bands do not extend beyond the 4th ab-
dominal segment.
Type locality—Texas, Palm Grove near
Brownsville, holotype @, allotype 2,8 @ para-
types and 6 nymphs, Oct. 1, 1951, beating palms.
Other paratypes (not including nymphs)—type
locality, 14 #, 30 ¢, 26 nymphs, Oct. 2 and 38,
1951, beating dead palm leaves; near Browns-
ville, 1 9, Oct. 4, 1951. All collected by A. B.
Gurney.
Types in U. 8. National Museum, no. 63241.
It is a pleasure to name this species in honor of
L. J. Bottimer, of Kerrville, Tex., a devoted col-
lector and a specialist in the Bruchidae, who as-
sisted the junior author In many ways while at
Kerrville and during a week-end trip to Uvalde
and Garner State Park.
Family ArcHIPsocIDAE Pearman
Archipsocus floridanus Mockford
Archipsocus floridanus Mockford, 1953, p. 116.
Palm Grove near Brownsville, Oct. 3, 1951,
2 #, 12 macropterous 2, 9 micropterous ¢, 16
nymphs, from webs on tree, A. B. Gurney.
Archipsocus nomas Gurney
Archipsocus nomas Gurney, 1939, p. 502.
Palm Grove near Brownsville, Oct. 2 and 38,
1951, webs on tree, 2 &%, 3 macropterous @, 8
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 46, No. 11
micropterous 92, 6 nymphs, A. B. Gurney;
Brownsville, Apr. 20, 1953, webs on ebony limb,
32 brachypterous ¢, 5 nymphs (some macrop-
terous).
Group PsoceTar Pearman
Family Myopsocipar Enderlein
Lichenomima sp.
Brownsville, Feb. 29, 1952, 1 9, D. L. Bauer.
Famity Psocidae Stephens
Dr. Sommerman is currently preparing a revi-
sion of this family for North America and will
include distribution records from Texas in her
paper. The following species have been recorded
from Texas: Psocus pollutus Walsh, P. bisignatus
Banks, P. campestris Aaron, P. persimilis Banks,
P. submarginatus Aaron, P. tecanus Aaron, Tri-
chadenotecnum unum Sommerman, Cerastipsocus
venosus (Burmeister), Metylophorus purus
(Walsh), and Blaste quieta (Hagen).
Map 1.—Outline map of Texas, showing loca-
tion of localities mentioned. Squares represent
definite localities, triangles county records only.
ALPHABETICAL LIST OF COUNTIES IN
WHICH LOCALITIES MENTIONED
IN THIS PAPER ARE LOCATED
Numbers on map correspond to those of
the list.
1. Bexar—County record only.
2. Bexar—San Antonio.
3. Brown—Bangs; Brownwood (about 8 miles
east of Bangs).
NOVEMBER 1956
4. Cameron—Brownsville.
5. Cameron—Olmito Resaca.
6. Cameron—Palm grove.
7. Dallas—Dallas.
8. El] Paso—County record only.
9. Frio—Dilly (Frio State Park).
10. Harris—Houston.
11. Hayes—San Marcos (Ezel’s Cave).
12. Hidalgo—Mission.
13. Hidalgo—Weslaco.
14. Jefferson—Beaumont.
15. Kerr—Kerrville; Kerrville State Park.
16. Nueces—Corpus Christi.
17. Nueces—Corpus Christi State Park.
18. Orange—10 miles west of Orange.
19. Smith—Tyler.
20. Sutton—Sonora (Wyatt Cave).
REFERENCES
AARON, S. FranK. Collecting on the Gulf coast of
Southern Texas. Papilio 4: 159-161. 1884.
. On some new Psocidae. Proc. Acad. Nat.
Sci. Philadelphia 1886: 13-18, pl. 1.
AsuMEap, W.H. Ona new Psocus. Can. Ent. 11:
228-229. 1879.
BaDONNEL, ANDRE. Psocopteres. Faune de France
42: 1-164, figs. 1-375. 1943.
Psocoptéres de la Céte d’Ivoire. Rev. Fr.
Ent. 16: 20-46, figs. 1-61. 1949.
Ordre des Psocoptéres: 1301-1340, figs.
1135-1170, In Traité de Zoologie 10, fase. 2.
Ed. by P. Grassé. Paris, 1951.
Psocopteres de l’ Angola. Compahia Dia-
mantes Angola Pub. Cult. 26: 1-267, 625 figs.,
pls. 1-4. 1955.
Battey, L. H. Revision of the palmettoes. Gentes
Herb. 6, fase. 7: 367-459, figs. 186-251. 1944.
Battny, VERNON. Biological survey of Texas.
North Amer. Fauna no. 25: 1-222, illus. 1905.
Banks, Natuan. New Neotropical insecis. Bull.
Mus. Comp. Zool. 64: 299-362, pls. 1-7. 1920.
. Descriptions of new neuropteroid insects.
Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 65: 421-455, pls. 1-4.
1924.
. New neuropteroid insects from the United
States. Psyche 37: 223-233, 1 pl. 19380.
Buarr, W. Frank. The biotic provinces of Texas.
Texas Journ. Sci. 2: 93-117, fig. 1 (map). 1950.
Borror, Donatp J., and DreLone, Dwicut M.
An introduction to the study of insects: 1-1030,
illus. (Psocoptera, pp. 169-179). New York,
1954.
Brown, R. W. Composition of scientific words:
1-882. Washington, D. C., 1954.
CatvertT, Paine P. Samuel Francis Aaron.
Ent. News 58: 137-140. 1947.
CuHapMAN, Paut J. Corrodentia of the United
States of America: I. Suborder Isotecnomera.
Journ. New York Ent. Soc. 38: 219-290, 319-
402, pls. 12-21. 1930.
Chover, Euizapa U. Vegetational survey of the
lower Rio Grande Valley, Texas. Madrono 4:
41-66, 77-100, illus. 1937.
MOCKFORD AND GURNEY:
97
REVIEW OF PSOCIDS 367
Coox, O. F. Change of vegetation on the south
Texas prairies. U. S. Bur. Plant Indus. Circe.
14: 1-7. 1908.
Davis, ANNA M. T. A study of Boscaje de la
Palma in Cameron County, Texas, and_ of
Sabal texana. Unpublished thesis for M. S.,
University of Texas (1942): 111 typed pp.,
40 pls. of photographs, maps, etc.
Diczr, Lez R. The biotic provinces of North
America: 1-78, 1 map. Ann Arbor, 1943.
ENDERLEIN, GUNTHER. Morphologie, Systematik
und Biologie der Atropiden und T'roctiden.
Results Swed. Exped. Egypt. White Nile,
1901, 18: 1-58, 11 text-figs, 4 pls. 1905.
Einige notizen zur Kenntnis der Copeog-
nathen Nordamerikas. Stett. Ent. Zeit. 67:
317-320. 1906.
Copeognatha, In Collections Zoologiques
du Baron Edm. de Selys Longchamps, fasc. 3,
pt. 2: 1-55, 10 text-figs., 5 pls. 1919. (Copies
bear the printer’s date of 1915, also a printed
notation on the inside title page that distribu-
tion date was March 1, 1919. The Smithsonian
copy is stamped as received Sept. 138, 1919.
Listed as 1915 in the 1918 Zool. Record, which,
however, was not published until October
1920.)
Gautsorr, Paut S., et al. Gulf of Mexico, its
origin, waters, and marine life. Fish and
Wildl. Serv. Fishery Bull. 55: 604 pp., 74 figs.
1954.
GoLpMAN, Epwarp AtrHonso. Briological in-
vestigations in Mexico. Smithsonian Misc. Coll.
115: 1-476, 70 pls. 1951.
GunTER, Gorpon, and HinpEBRAND, H. H. De-
struction of fishes and other organisms of the
south Texas coast by the cold wave of January
28-February 3, 1951. Ecology 32: 731-736, illus.
1951.
Gurney, AsHtEY B. Nomenclatorial notes on
Corrodentia, with descriptions of two new
species of Archipsocus. Journ. Washington
Acad. Sci. 29: 501-515, figs. 1-15. 1939.
A synopsis of the psocids of the tribe
Psyllipsocini, including the description of an
unusual new genus from Arizona. Ann. Ent.
Soc. Amer. 36: 195-220, 6 pls. 1948.
Distributional and synonymic notes on
psocids common to Europe and North America,
with remarks on the distribution of Holarctic
insects. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 39:
56-65. 1949.
Hacen, H. A. Synopsis of the Neuroptera of
North America: With a list of South American
species. Smithsonian Mise. Coll. 4: 1-847. 1861.
Kousr, H. Monographie der deutschen Psociden
mit besonderer Berticksichtigung der Fauna
Westfalens. Ber. Westfalischen Provinzial-
Vereins fiir Wissens. Kunst. 8: 73-142, 4 pls.
1880.
Neue Psociden der paldarktischen Region.
Ent. Nachrichten 8: 207-212. 1882.
Linnagus, C. Systema naturae, ed. 10: 823 pp.
Stoekholm, 1758.
368
Mocxkrorp,E.L. Threenew species of Archipsocus
from Florida. Florida Ent. 36: 113-124, 30 figs.
1953.
Notes on some eastern North American
psocids with descriptions of two new species.
Amer. Midl. Nat. 53: 436-441, 2 pls. 1955.
Packarp, A. S., Jr. New or rare American
Neuroptera, Thysanura, and Myriapoda. Proc.
Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. 18: 405-411. 1870.
PeaRMAN, J. V. New species of Psocoptera from
warehouses. Ent. Monthly Mag. 65: 104-109,
figs. 1-3. 1929.
PEARMAN, J. V. Third note on Psocoptera from
warehouses. Ent. Monthly Mag. 78: 289-292,
figs. 1-3. 1942.
RoesteR, Rupoir. Die Gatlungen der Copeo-
gnathen. Stett. Ent. Zeit. 105: 117-166. 1944.
RusseEwu, R. J. Climates of Texas. Ann. Assoc.
Amer. Geogr. 35 (2): 37-52. 1945.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 11
SpeLtys-Lonecuamps, E. pre. Notes on two new
genera of Psocidae. Ent. Monthly Mag. 9:
145-146, 2 figs. 1872.
Smautu, J. K. The palmetto-palm, Sabal texana.
Journ. New York Bot. Gard. 28: 132-143. 1927.
SoMMERMAN, KaruHryn M. A revision of the genus
Lachesilla north of Mexico. Ann. Ent. Soc.
Amer. 39: 627-661, 4 pls. 1946.
Two new Nearctic psocids of the genus
Trichadenotecnum with a nomenclatural note
on a third species. Proc. Ent. Soc. Washington
50: 165-173, figs. 1-19. 1948.
Two new species of Rhyopsocus (Psocoptera)
from the U.S.A., with notes on the bionomics of
one household species. Journ. Washington
Acad. Sci. 46: 145-149, figs. 1-17. 1956.
Taytor, W. P. Geographic distribution of Texas
wildlife. Texas Geogr. Mag. 9(1): 1-12. 1945.
BARRO COLORADO BIRDDOM
On Barro Colorado Island, the Smithsonian
Institution’s tropical preserve in Gatun Lake,
Panama Canal Zone, there is a “bird that roars
like a lion.”’ The roar, sometimes mistaken for the
call of a howler monkey, is the male courtship
song of the turkeylike curassow. The female
usually is silent.
Weirdest of the feathered creatures of the pre-
serve is the fruit-eating hawk known as ‘‘burja,”
the witch—a bird about the size of a raven. It has
a coal-black back, a white belly, red feet, and a
greenish-yellow bill which sometimes is slightly
blue at the tip. The name, however, is due less
to its weird appearance than to the almost con-
tinual ‘‘scolding” at other birds or at any in-
truder into its retreat.
What may appear like fashions in birddom is
illustrated by the curious behavior of another
Barro Colorado denizen, the motmot, a lovely
grayish-green bird with a chestnut-colored head
and neck. These have tails that look like tennis
rackets. They are fashioned by the birds them-
selves which pluck off about an inch of the feather
vane below the ends of the two outermost
feathers. The bird swings this tail from side to
side like a pendulum.
A fierce little fighter is the violet-throated
hummingbird, one of the most colorful feathered
creatures found on the island. This bird, Anthra-
cothorax violaceicollis, sometimes builds its solitary
nest in the most exposed part of a tree, with no
leaf within 25 feet or more. Then it demands
dominion over the whole treeand does not hesitate
to attack other birds many times its size. It
attacks fearlessly, for example, the giant oriole, or
oropendula, which is the size of a North American
crow. The oriole is described as ‘helpless as a
dirigible before a pursuit plane.’”’? When not
fighting, the mother hummingbird sits on the nest
nearly all the time, protecting eggs and young
from sun and rain. The male seldom is seen.
There is some reason to believe that his mate
drives him away as soon as the eggs are laid.
Although generally resentful of the large orioles
in the same tree, sometimes it cooperates with
them. A species of cowbird has a habit of laying
its eggs in the oropendula nests. The humming-
bird does not hesitate to drive it away, although
its own nest is entirely safe.
NOVEMBER 1956
PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 369
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
14147TH MEETING, OCTOBER 7, 1955
THeopore Lirovirz, of the Catholic Uni-
versity of America, spoke on Ultrasonics and the
liquid state. By ultrasonics is meant mechanical
vibrations at frequencies from 20 kilocycles up to
the present practical limit of 500 megacycles per
second or more. These vibrations can cause
changes of three kinds in the matter through
which they pass: a volume change caused by
pressure, a temperature change caused by
adiabatic compression, and a change in shape
caused by shear forces. In some or all of these the
strain may lag the stress, with a relaxation time
characteristic of the particular mechanism in-
volved. The velocity of propagation and the ab-
sorption are both functions of the frequency that
differ from those calculated from classical laws.
As the frequency increases, the shear viscosity,
for example, may “relax out” and the absorption
due to it disappear. In shear the stress from the
ultrasonic vibration biases the lattice, and the
molecules jump to a new position, at a rate
measured by the diffusion time. At high fre-
quencies there is not time for them to jump and
the lattice appears rigid.
At low frequencies, and in all liquids except
the monatomic ones, the effective viscosity is
higher than the classical amount. In explan-
ation, a volume viscosity is postulated which
relaxes as the frequency rises. For non-associated
liquids, a thermal relaxation is postulated, but
it does not do for associated liquids with high
dipole moments. In them the volume viscosity
has the same temperature dependence as does the
shear viscosity.
In water the extra energy loss is not caused by
thermal relaxation, because it has been shown
that in water at 4° (where there is no adiabatic
heating on compression because dv/dt = 0) the
absorption is the same as at 20°, where dv/dt is
not zero. The phenomenon seems to be a ‘‘struc-
tural relaxation,” i.e., when the water is com-
pressed, flow occurs in the direction of closer
packing, and the loss comes directly from the
Jagging volume change, not from a temperature
change. If there is a lag in the flow, there is ab-
sorption.
In both shear and volume viscosity in water,
bonds are broken with the same activation
energy. Hall showed that water is a mixture of
two packings: “ice” and “close.’’ Compression
upsets the equilibrium between them and one
can then calculate the compressional viscosity on
this assumption, and the temperature dependence
agrees well with calculation.
Comparing dielectric relaxation with ultra-
sonic, we find there is also relaxation and ab-
sorption in dielectrics, but it is traceable here to a
rotation as compared to translation under
ultrasonic stress. The dielectric relaxation time
has the same temperature dependence as the
compressional viscosity, hence they have the
same activation energy. But the actual times
may not be the same. In glycerol, however, the
acoustic and dielectric relaxation times are in
fact the same, while in nearly all other liquids the
rotational jump can take 1,000 times longer than
the displacement.
The velocity in fluid is, of course, related to the
adiabatic compressibility. The compression of a
liquid is in two parts: (1) Change the lattice
spacing, (2) change in the arrangement. Liquids
are more compressible than solids because their
structure can change. At high frequencies, there-
fore, one might expect a liquid to become solid-
like. 25% of the total 8 (compressibility) in
liquids comes from the change in structure, and
the velocity increases as the frequency rises
above the relaxation time of the structural
change.
On cooling arachlor, this viscous liquid be-
haves more and more like a solid as its viscosity
rises, but the temperature dependence is still
almost big as a liquid. Such behavior is ap-
propriate to a glass. In a liquid the number of
holes decreases with the temperature, which is
not true for crystallme solid. Arachlor and
glycerol show a low temperature dependence
after they become glassy. 8) approaches Bx as
T goes down. The liquid thus becomes a solid
without crystallization.
My. Shapiro gave, as an informal communi-
sation, a report on the Cosmic Ray Conference at
Guanajuato in Mexico, at which for the first
time im many years Soviet members were in
attendance.
370
The tribute was paid at that conference to our
past president Mr. Forbush for his extensive
and valuable work.
Mr. Potter gave an informal communication
calling attention to certain heresies in genetics,
to the latest biological theories of Mr. Gamow,
and to the ‘hope that springs eternal in the
mechanistic breast.’ (Secretary’s abstract.)
1415TH MEETING, OCTOBER 21, 1955
Rogpert J. Maurer, of the University of
Illinois, spoke on Photoeffects and excitons in
alkali halides. The ‘‘exciton” is a lonely concept,
or particle if you prefer, in solid state physics; a
rare and little understood thing that deserves to
be more widely used. Consider the excited atom:
after 10-8 seconds, or eight seconds, or even hours,
it may descend to the ground state, but if it
meantime suffers a collision it can pass on its
energy to whatever it strikes. In a condensed
system—a solid—this passing on occurs very
rapidly and continues until the energy reaches
some impurity, or imperfection, or the surface,
where it may produce a photoelectron, or release
radiation. In the Bloch approximation the
energy levels are reduced to a single system, and
an electron moves in the total potential field, but
this approximation is defective because it pro-
vides no excited states. The concept of excitons
does so. In diamond, for example, electrons in
the valence band are lifted to the conduction
band by absorbing a quantum, and the electron
and the hole from whence it came then migrate
freely—eftectively an infinite distance apart.
Now, just at the absorption edge we should have
an optical absorption band structure, correspond-
ing to electrons lifted up to the conduction band
but not fully away from the neighborhood of the
hole from whence they came. The hole and the
electron then move together through the solid as
a neutral particle, possessing energy. One should
thus have ‘‘exciton bands,’”’ just below the con-
duction band in energy and just below the ab-
sorption edge in frequency.
Of the possible ways to demonstrate this
mechanism, only the photoelectric effect and
photoconduction are thus far amenable to
experiment, and substances that will be suitable
are hard to find. In AgCl for example the exciton
bands lie so close to the ionization levels that
even the thermal energy kT pushes the excitons
on up into full ionization.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 11
The speaker discussed Apker and Taft’s
photoelectric experiments in some detail: ex-
periments with alkah halides containing a
goodly number (101°/cc) of F centers, 1.e., either
extra alkali atoms, or missing halogens whose
places are filled by electrons. A pure crystal does
not show photo current. The yield curves show a
plateau (plotting current against electron volts)
from 2 to 5 volts and strong peak at 5.6, which
comes from the fundamental absorption spec-
trum. Apker and Taft suggest that the absorbed
quantum becomes an exciton and moves about
until it meets an F center from which it expels an
electron.
In Maurer’s work crystals with known con-
centrations of F centers were exposed to quanta
in the tail of the absorption spectrum and the
photoconductive current was measured. A
difficult experiment, since the currents are down
in the ratio of the mean free path in the gas to the
distance apart of the atoms in the solid. One can
determine the lifetime of the exciton as a function
of the F center concentration, since the mfp
is inversely proportional to the F center con-
centration and the velocity of the exciton is
about 107 cm/sec. Below 10!° centers per cc
impurities compete too heavily, and the current
is small because few excitors are produced and
the interfering effects are many. Above 2 x 10”
the currents fall again because the F’ centers
destroy the excitons before they can go very far.
The lifetime turns out to be of the order of
10~° seconds.
Curves of current against energy, and against
concentration were displayed, and a number of
yet little understood points were discussed. These
experiments are considered, however, to be a
direct approach to the problem of the existence
of the exciton, and the results are interpreted in
terms of them. (Secretary’s abstract.)
1416TH MEETING, NOVEMBER 4, 1955
Rospertr Jastrow, of the Naval Research
Laboratory, spoke on The structure of the atomic
nucleus. That the nucleus has a structure has
been known for fully 25 years, but only in the
last 5-8 years have we accumulated enough facts
to develop an acceptable theory of its behavior.
We are not yet in the state where our knowledge
of the internucleon forces is such that a complete
structural theory is merely an exercise in mathe-
matics, but are rapidly approaching the reverse
NoveMBER 1956
state, where we should soon be able to calculate
the forces from the facts.
A nucleus consists of neutrons and protons,
with an excess of neutrons, packed into an ap-
proximate sphere at a uniform density of 10%
nucleons per cc, or 400,000 tons per cubic milli-
meter. The average inter-nucleon distance is
2 Xx 10-¥ em, and attractive forces bind them
into a potential well about 40 Mev deep, with
kinetic energies up to 30 Mev.
Two different models suggest themselves.
First, the classical liquid drop, with long range
attraction and short range repulsion, and a mean
free path of the order of the “‘cell-width.” The
mean spacing is about equal to the range of the
repulsive force. Second, the electrostatic action
between particles; weak compared to the central
force.
Which fits the nucleus? To find out, the
nucleus has been probed with beams of particles
of various energies, and the scattering laws have
been investigated, remembering that the de
Broglie wave length for 350 Mev particles is of
the same order as the size of the nucleus and that
quantum, not classical, laws apply. At lower
energies the cross-section increases rapidly, as
1/E, and the mean free path of the entering
particle is much less than 7, the nuclear radius.
Consequently the nucleus is opaque, and it
displays a cross section of 2a7?. (The 2 comes
half from absorption, half from shadow scatter-
ing). The approximate expression for the cross-
section becomes: ¢ =f(A, H) where R varies as
A and as 1/H#/2. The variation of o with A and #
should therefore be uniform, monotonic, and
slow: in a word, ‘“dull’’. Experimentally, though,
there are hills and valleys in a three dimensional
plot of sigma against A and H: The most con-
spicuous example of which is “Mount Barschall”,
appearing at high energies in the intermediate
masses. To account for this we must postulate a
transparent nucleus, showing diffraction effects
and phase changes in the particle wave-functions
as they pass through it. If the phase change is
180° the scattering is a maximum. ‘Monte
Carlo” Calculations, using this postulate, yield
sigma-surfaces that agree reasonably well with
experiment.
On the other hand, the existence of a shell
structure can be demonstrated by showing how
the nuclear quadrupole moments vary with A,
the atomic weight. Repeated large changes in
PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
all
the sign and magnitude of the nuclear quad-
rupole moment occur at the so-called ‘‘magic
numbers”: 2, 8, 28, 50, 82, 126. The largest
nuclear quadrupole moment known is shown by
Lutecium 128, corresponding to an elliptical
eccentricity of 25 per cent. One consequence of a
quadrupole moment was shown by comparing the
scattering of protons from gold with that from
tantalum. Gold has zero moment and shows
strong diffraction maxima and minima in a plot
of scattering against angle. Tantalum has a large
moment and shows only small inflections. In
tantalum the random orientation of the ellip-
ticity smears out the diffraction structure.
The nucleus remains something of a paradox:
having a long mean free path for particles en-
tering it, but acting on them with very strong
forces. (Secretary’s abstract.)
1417TH MEETING, NOVEMBER 18, 1955
Wituarp H. Benner, of the Naval Research
Laboratory, spoke on Solar protons and aurorae.
The talk outlined recent results in formulating
the theory of aurorae, or “northern lights.” Two
forms have been observed: the “‘quiet arc,” seen
as a general glow, and the other more spectacular
form seen as rays and brightly colored draperies.
The earliest attempt at a rational theory was
Birkeland’s in 1896, who postulated that the sun
projected particles that were deflected by the
earth’s magnetic field as they entered it. On this
basis Carl Stérmer calculated the orbits of the
beam. The theory was not generally accepted
because it was believed that the charged particles
of which the beam was composed would repel
each other and not remain concentrated in the
narrow beams needed to produce the sharply
localized effects. More recently Martyn theo-
rized that the protons and electrons are projected
from Sun’s surface simultaneously in the form of
jets and streams which sweep across the earth’s
atmosphere. The electrons are deflected while the
protons reach the earth. A particle of 1 BEV
may penetrate to 19 kilometers from the surface,
while a 100 KEV particle may reach only 100
Km. The difference between the northern and the
southern auroral zones is accounted for by the
fact that the earth’s magnetic axis does not pass
through the center of the earth. The change in
the relative of the axis with the
seasons accounts for the seasonal nature of the
inclination
phenomenon.
A gas tube, called the ‘“Stérmertron,” has
been devised to simulate the aurorae in the
laboratory. A stream of electrons from a gun
passes through mercury vapor at a very low
pressure in a glass envelope. In the center of the
tube is a simulated earth, containing a small
magnet. The direction of the beam and the
orientation of the ‘earth’ are continuously
variable, and the luminous beam twists and turns
through fantastic convolutions as the initial
direction is swung back and forth across the
earth. Fluorescent material on the earth shows
by bright patches whenever the beam actually
strikes it. The phenomena were most strikingly
shown by motion pictures of the tube in oper-
ation. Sometimes the beams are actually twisted
in a tight helix in a captive orbit and produce a
bright halo around the earth, which simulates the
general glow. The path sometimes takes the form
of a series of rose-petal curves stripmg northern
and southern hemispheres alternately. This be-
havior accounts for aurorae observed in Fair-
banks Alaska (for example) followed minutes
later by a similar display off South Africa, and
still later by one in Norway. In the actual
aurorae, the 244 Mev protons produce elec-
trons of 10 to 15 volts, which luminesce upon
returning to the ground state.
In discussion, McNish emphasized the dif-
ficulties encountered in formulating an adequate
theory and in convincing the skeptics. An-
swering Mr. Mohler, the speaker confirmed the
observation of maximal phenomena at about 9
p.m. local time. (Secretary’s abstract.)
14187H 1955
Maurice M. SxHaprro, of the Naval Research
Laboratory, gave a paper on Megalomorphs, a
term invented by J. R. Oppenheimer to describe
the larger cosmic ray fragments known variously
as Heavy Mesons, Hyperons, and Heavy Frag-
ments.
The lighter particles found in cosmic rays and
produced by the Bevatron were first described
and listed, with slides showing their weights, half
lives, charges, and relevant genetic relationships.
Among them are m™, 7°, 7; wt, w, and the k
mesons that seem to be the source of inter-
nucleon forces. There are also the 7, 0, and k
MEETING, DECEMBER ap
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 46, No. 11
mesons with lives of the order of 107® seconds,
which though short, are much too long to be
understood on any simple theoretical basis. As
an example of the complexity of the phenomena,
a complete event was shown on a slide, consisting
of five generations of particles forming an
“energetic star’. The steps in the sequence are:
primary particle, a burst of 8 to 10 protons, a tau
meson, 3 pi mesons, mu mesons, and finally some
common or garden-variety electrons. The pi
mesons can produce “neutron stars,’’ and one in
three do so.
The speaker then turned to particles heavier
than protons or neutrons; the Y, K, and L
classes of Hyperons. Given as examples of these
were A®, 2+, 3~, and & particles. These are all
“excited nucleons’, and the emission of pi mesons
by them is quite analogous to the emission of
light by excited atoms. As a specific example, the
A° particle weighs 2181 electron masses, has a
mean life of 3.7 x 10~” sees, and breaks up into a
proton and a pl minus meson with a reaction
energy, Q, of 36.9 Mev. The 2 and © are similar.
The Hyperfragment is another class of particle
with various weights and energies. A tritium
fragment, for example, in the right state of ex-
citation will break up into a »He® atom and a pi
minus meson. In other words, the fragment had
part of its structure replaced by a hyperon. These
reactions have definite components, products, re-
action energies and half lives.
The beginning of an understanding of this
maze of reactions involving these transient en-
tities is coming about through the introduction of
a sort of quantum number with unique selection
rules. This number is called the “strangeness’’,
and is as characteristic of any given particle—at
least as presently conceived—as is its charge or
half life. “Strangeness” must be conserved in a
“strong interaction’; spontaneous decay is a
“weak reaction”, and the decay of many of these
particles is much slower than would be expected
because there is a change in ‘“‘strangeness’’ be-
tween components and products.
After a discussion, in which Messrs Wood,
Page, Maxwell, Tuckerman, Mohler and others
took part, the speaker was asked to report on the
recent discovery of the ‘‘anti-proton” at Berkley,
where he had been visiting. (Secretary’s Abstract.)
waa —__
Facts are the body of science, and the idea of those facts 7s its spirit.—S. Brown.
Vice-Presidents of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
Philosophical Society of Washington.......................0008. (Mr.) Bruce L. WILson
Anthropological Society of Washington........................ (Mr.) Frank M. Serzter
Biological Society of Washington.....................0.005 (Mr.) Hersert G. DrIcnan
Chemical Society of Washington....................0.000085 (Mr.) Bourpon F. ScriBNER
Entomological Society of Washington....................0.ceeeeeeee (Dr.) FRED W. Poos
National Geographic Society..........5.0006..0c20.s8osceeaees (Dr.) ALEXANDER WETMORE
Geological Society of Washington......................00.05 (Mr.) Epwin T. McKnicut
Medical Society of the District of Columbia.................... (Dr.) FREDERICK O. Coz
GolumbialHistorical Society®: oc .cccc0cscecc deve ccccees oceienls
Botanical Society of Washington.........................-.++++++,-(Dr.) E. H. WALKER
Washington Section, Society of American Foresters............ (Dr.) G. Furppo Gravatt
Washington Society of Engineers....................0.-.0005 (Mr.) Hersert G. Dorsey
Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers.....(Dr.) ARNoLD Scotr
Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers......
Helminthological Society of Washington...................00ee cease (Dr.) J. S. ANDREWS
Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists............ (Dr.) L. A. BuRKEY
Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers...(Lt. Col.) Fuoyp W. Houcu
Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers..................
D. C. Section, American Society of Civil Engineers.......... (Mr.) Doveuas E. Parsons
D. C. Section, Society of Experimental Biology and Medicine..(Dr.) Grorer A, Hottie
Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals............. (Mr.) Taomas G. Diaaus
Washington Section, International Association for Dental Research...
Washington Section, Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences........ (Dr.) F. N. FRENKIEL
D. C. Branch, American Meteorological Society............. (Dr.) F. W. REIcHELDERFER
CONTENTS
MaTHEMATICS.—Unimodular matrices of order 2 that commute. Karu
GOEDBERG 2 66). book ook bee ee ae a ee 337
PALEONTOLOGY.—Chiloguembelina, a new Tertiary genus of the Hetero-
helicidae (Foraminifera). ALFRED R. LoEBLicH, JR., and HELEN
PALEONTOLOGY.—Galazaura (calcareous algae) and similar fossil genera.
GRAHAM FO BELIOTT.... 25.5... Bac ost bes eo se 341
BacTERIOLOGY.—Quantitative studies of differential staining reaction,
III: A quantitative acid-fast stain. A. F.WoopHour............ 344
ZooLocy.—North American harpacticoid copepods: 3, Paracampius re-
ductus, n. sp., from Alaska. MILpRED STRATTON WILSON........ 348
MamMMALoGy.—Little-known reference to name of harbor seal. Victor
IB. SGRBPFER! boo. iisern nercietutin ocean eee 352
EntomoLoay.—A review of the psocids, or book-lice and bark-lice, of
Texas (Psocoptera). Epwarp L. Mocxrorp and ASHLEY B. GuRNEY 353
Procrepines: Philosophical Society of Washington.................. 369
Notes. and: INewsic!:)..00 (i werwebaecpaein cee ce eee 338, 343, 351, 368.
VOLUME 46 December 1956 NUMBER 12
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
_—_——
_—————=
Published Monthly by the
WASHINGTON@ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: CoEsTER H. Paasu, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RoNaLD BaMrorp, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL ESTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors. E
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3344 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges.—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the PRocEEDINGS should be sent to Harautp A. ReHDER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per Year...................-.-.+++0-- $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10) incl:—not available*.~.-...:........ —
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10. 00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22° incl. (21 numbers per vol.). ae (8200 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JourRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 46, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $386.00.
Monoerapu No.1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
INDEX to JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS................020+e0000: ~ $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete.....................2.00000 $25.00
Single’ volumes; unboundeetaseenteoc eee en cree CUR eee 2.00
Single;num bers: San protec ree ee are Oe NR a eee Ee Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’”’ and
addressed to the Treasurer, H. S. Rappers, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
D.
Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Sprcut, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 46
DECEMBER 1956
No. 12
MATHEMATICS.—Commuting bilinear transformations and matrices... OLGA
Taussky and Joun Topp, National Bureau of Standards.
(Received October 29, 1956)
We present in paragraphs 1-4 an al-
ternative approach to a theorem of K.
Goldberg [/] and in paragraphs 5 and 6 a
generalization of that theorem. The two
sections of this paper are essentially in-
dependent.
1. Denote by IT the group of bilinear
transformations of the form
az + b
cz +d’
(1)
where a, b, c, d are rational integers and
ad be
We shall establish:
Theorem 1. A_ necessary and sufficient
condition for two transformations of T to com-
mute is that each is an iterate of the same trans-
formation of T.
Only the necessity of the conditions re-
quires detailed proof.
2. We begin with the following well-
known result, of which we sketch a proof
(see, e.g., Forsyth [2, p. 719]):
Lemma 1. In order that two transformations
of T should commute, it is necessary and
sufficient that their fixed points should
coincide.
Proof. Let
Az+B
2 W: W = — —
@) Ne Cz -- D
be another transformation of IT. In order
that w(W) = W(w) we must have
Aa+ Be = aA + 0C
Ab + Bd = aB + bD
(3) Cb + Dd = bC + dD
Ca + De = cA + dC
and conversely. These relations are equiv-
alent to the fact that the following equations,
which give the fixed points of the trans-
formations w, W,
(4)
(5)
have the same roots. To see this observe
that the upper pair of (3) gives bC = Be
and the lower pair gives b(A — D) = B(a— d)
and c(A — D) = Cf@ — d), and so, in gen-
eral,
0
0,
cz? + d — az — b
C2 + (D — A)ze — B
Cc
C
_ dG _
ID =A IB
Exceptional cases, when b, c, B, C vanish
or a = d, A = D can be discussed easily.
It is easy to see that the condition presented
in the lemma can be expressed in matrix
language as follows: The corresponding
matrices S Oy (e iB) should have common
Ohi? NG ID
characteristic vectors.
3. We require the following classical
result about the units of quadratic fields:
Lemma 2. All units in a real quadratic
field are of the form + e™ where m is an
integer (positive or negative or zero) and
e (+ +1) zs the fundamental unit. All units
in complex quadratic fields are roots of unity:
+1 in general, + 1, + t inthe field R(./— 1)
and + 1, +3 (1 + V— 8) in the case of
R(V— 3).
Proofs of this are available, e.g., in Hecke
[3] or in Reid [4, chapter 13]. The problem
‘The preparation of this paper was supported
in part by the Office of Naval Research.
BEB 19 1957
3o7v4
of determining the unit in R(/n), where
n > 0, is essentially that of solving a Pell’s
equation.
4. Proof of Theorem 1. We use the can-
onical forms for transformations with fixed
points a, B (see, e.g., Forsyth [2, p. 620]).
If a, 6 are finite and distinct, then
> (a4
=
w—a
= k
w— Bp
(6)
R | a
where the ‘‘multiplier” k is given by
_at+td— V{(a = d)? + 4be}
k
atd+vVJ/{\(a + dy? + 4bc}
and
w—a jee
a — {6 2/6)
ee D /{(A = D)? + 4BC}
A+D+W/{(4 + D)? + 4BC}
It is clear that two transformations of
type (6) are compounded by multiplying
the multiphers. What we have to show,
therefore, is that k, K are integral powers
of the same «x and that the transformation
with multipher « belongs to I.
Consider the quadratic field f generated
by the characteristic roots \, mw of the
ab
ay
modular these roots are units, and therefore
of the form +e", where n is an integer and
eis the fundamental unit in case f is real, or
the primitive root of unity in f, if f is com-
plex. Hence
matrix Since the matrix is uni-
and is therefore an integral power of e,
with positive sign.
Exactly the same holds for K in F, the
field generated by the characteristic roots
- Bh However, in view of the equiv-
alence of (4) and (5), the fields f, F are the
same.
Hence we have k = x™, K = x™ for
certain integers m, MW. Let d be the greatest
common divisor of m, M. Consider the
transformation
of
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 12
Ch > C2
€ °
B A — 9
It is clear that wand W are iterates of Z,
in fact
(10) Z:
Z
Zinta), W = Zmi 4d)
To show that Z e T we use the fact that there
are integers mm, ,, such that
mm + M M, = d,
and this implies that w"W"! = Z and, T
being a group, we have ZeT.
If @ is finite, 8 infinite the corresponding
forms are
Y=
w-—a = k(z-a),
ie = ol Gh, a = b/d — a),
W-a = K(z—a),
IK = ID Al, a = B/(D — A),
and the discussion is similar.
In the case when a = £6 the canonical
forms for the transformation are
(w— a)! = (g —a)!+ 6,
(W—a) = ¢@-—a)14+C,
and c, C being integers, the necessity of the
condition of Theorem 1 is almost obvious.
5. Let A and B be 2 X 2 matrices whose
elements are integers in a complex quadratic
field F and whose determinants are units
in F.
Theorem 2. Assume
(1) that neither A nor B is similar to a
matrix of the form ( ; i
) where ¢ zs a root
of unity in F and
(2) that the characteristic roots of A and
B do not lie in the field of the 8th or 12th
root of unity.
Under these assumptions A and B com-
mute if and only if (apart from a unit in F)
they are powers of the same matrix in F.
Proof. Only the necessity needs to be
proved. It is sufficient to show that a matrix
K exists such that A = eK”, B = eK”,
where ¢;, €: are units in F and m, n are
rational integers. It then follows as in [1]
that AK can be chosen in F. The following
two cases are possible:
(1) A has its characteristic roots not in F,
(II) A has its characteristic roots in F.
In case (I) the characteristic polynomial
DECEMBER 1956
of A is irreducible with respect to F. Hence
a nonsingular matrix U exists such that
ay
0 (ed)
The numbers q, a» lie in a field & which
is relatively quadratic with respect to F
and ay, a are relative conjugate. The field
® being complex with all its conjugates and
biquadratic has one fundamental unit
e (see [3]). Hence, unless © is the field of the
8th or 12th root of unity, every unit in &
is a power of e, multiplied by a root of unity
in F. If we then assume that @ is not one
of these cyclotomic fields we have
U4 Gi =
m
Ch = Gi G5 A. = ee”
where e, is a root of unity in F and é is the
relatively conjugate number of e, hence é
is in ®. Hence the coefficients of the matrix
U can be chosen in ®. Since U~! BU com-
mutes with UAU it must be diagonal too.
Hence the characteristic roots of B lie in ®
too and are of the form
Ai =
é. a root of unity in F. Hence
Co €”, Bo = €2€",
€ 0 m
UtAU =e 3
O €
€ (0) n
UBU = e .
O €
and
€ (0) m
Aver) Ui Ui lee
0 €
€ 0) m
B=e}|U OF
Ome
Put ulG ee = K and case (I) is com-
pleted.
(II) We may assume the characteristic
roots to be different. Let ¢ be the root of
unity of highest period in F. Then A or 6
must both be similar to matrices of the form
I. 0
UAU = ¢%
0 Ce
0
UBU =
TAUSSKY AND TODD: BILINEAR TRANSFORMATIONS
375
Hence K can be taken as G 2.
6. The exceptional cases (1) and (2)
in Theorem 2 are genuine.
(1) Any two matrices of the form
CaeeGs)
commute when a,8 are any integers in F.
However, a, 8 are in general, not com-
mensurable.
(2) In the case of the field of the eighth
roots of unity we observe that the matrices
es) te ce)
é@ Oy? 1b g ioe
commute. The first has eighth roots of unity
as characteristic roots and generates a
cyclic group of order 8, while the second has
as characteristic roots the units 1 + 1/2
and generates an infinite cyclic group. It
follows that there is no matrix of which these
are integral powers. Moreover, it can be
shown that any pair of commuting matrices
in this case is similar to products of powers of
these two.
Similar results hold in the case of the
twelfth root of unity. Corresponding ex-
amples are
O i dog 9D
(, = 3)? yes gy
They commute and have as characteristic
roots twelfth roots of unity, and the units
2+ V3.
7. Generalizations. There are several pos-
sible directions in which the results of this
paper can be generalized; some of these
have been investigated by E. C. Dade [5].
REFERENCES
[1] GotpBerG, K. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci.
46: 1956.
[2] Forsyru, A. R. Theory of functions of a complex
variable, 3d ed. Cambridge, England, 1918.
The relevant material is also available in
more recent books, e.g., C. CARATHEODORY,
Conformal Representations. Cambridge, Eng-
land, 1982; G. Junia, Exercises d’analyse,
II. Paris, 1988; and G. Jura, Princtpes
géométriques d’analyse, I. Paris, 1930.
[3] Hecke, E. Vorlesungen tiber die Theorte der
algebraischen Zahlen. 2. Aufl. Leipzig, 1954.
[4] Reip, L. W. The elements of the theory of alge-
braic numbers. New York, 1910.
[5] Dann, E. C. Abelian groups of unimodular
matrices. MS.
316
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 12 -
BOTANY —New grasses from Mexico. ERNEST R. Souns, U.S. National Museum.
(Communicated by Agnes Chase.)
(Received July 27, 1956)
In the course of routine identification of
miscellaneous collections of grasses from
Mexico, six new taxa were discovered and
the original descriptions of two species re-
quired emendation. The new entities and
emendations are presented in this paper.
Panicum clivum Sohns, sp. nov.
Figs. 1-8
Gramen perenne; culmi 20-50 cm alti, decum-
bentes, graciles; vaginae internodiis breviores,
inferiores striatae, papilloso-pilosae, superiores
marginibus papilloso-pilosis; ligula circiter 1 mm
longa; laminae 2-8.5 cm longae, 3-12 mm latae,
omnes pubescentes, margines papilloso-pilosis;
panicula 5-8 em longa, 2-8 cm lata, ramis
brevibus, inferiores 4.5 em longi; spiculae 2.3-
2.7 mm longae; gluma prima 0.5-0.9 mm longa,
lata, rotundata, enervis; gluma secunda et lemma
sterile subaequans; lemma fertile circiter 2-
2.2 mm longum, 7-nervis; lemma sterile vacuum;
lemma fertile 2.1-2.4 mm longum, 1.0-1.1 mm
latum, glabrum, 5-nervis; palea lemma sterile
aequans; staminia 3, antherae 0.4 mm longae;
lodiculae 2, membranaceae, 0.2 mm_ longae;
caryopsis circiter 1.5 mm longa, 1 mm lata.
Perennial; culms decumbent at first and/or
second nodes, but not rooting, 20-50 cm tall,
glabrous; sheaths shorter than the internodes,
the lower loose, striate, papillose-pilose, upper
sheaths papillose-pilose on the margin and
sparingly pilose between the nerves, a dense ring
of hairs on the collar across the back; ligule a
fringe of hairs about 1 mm long; blades to 8.5 cm
long, 3 to 12 mm or more wide, sometimes
cordate-clasping, pubescent on both surfaces,
papillose-pilose on the margins, especially near
the base; inflorescence a narrow exserted panicle,
5-8 cm long, 2-8 em wide, panicle branches
mostly short, the lower sometimes 4.5 cm long,
the axes and branches glabrous; spikelets 2.3-
2.7 mm long, averaging 2.47 mm (measurements
on 60 spikelets); first glume 0.5-0.9 mm long,
broad, rounded, clasping base of spikelet, nerve-
less or sometimes with a faint median nerve;
second glume and sterile lemma about 0.1 mm
shorter than the fertile lemma; both 7-nerved,
very sparingly short-pilose with scattered hairs;
sterile lemma with a membranous palea about
1 mm long; fertile lemma 2.1-2.4 mm long,
about 1-1.1 mm wide, smooth and. shining,
5-nerved, the nerves visible as faint white lines;
palea as long as the lemma; stamens 3, anthers
0.4 mm long; lodicules 2, membranous, spatulate,
0.2 mm long; caryopsis about 1.5 mm long and
1 mm wide.
Type in the U. S. National Herbarium,
no. 2041588, collected ‘fon mossy limestone
boulder; ravine slopes above Tepeoco, 3.5 miles
from Zacualtipan on road to Tianguistengo,”
State of Hidalgo, altitude 2,100 meters, March 20,
1947, by H. E. Moore, Jr. (no. 2371). Additional
specimens examined: Hipatco: Palo Hueco,
Moore 2694. México: Cafiado de Nanchititla,
Matuda 30818.
This species belongs in the subgenus Dichan-
thelium, section Commutata, and is related to
P. albomaculatum, P. hintonii, and P. joori.
A key to the species of this section follows the
discussion of P. albomaculatum. The distribution
of the species in this section is shown in Fig. 9.
In the course of examining collections of
P. albomaculatum Seribn. (U. S. Dept. Agr.
Div. Agrost. Cire. 19: 2. 1900) in the U. S.
National Herbarium, including the type and the
original description, it became apparent that the
original description required emendation.
In his description Scribner stated that the
spikelets are “2.56 mm long;...” Spikelets on
the type specimen measured 2.5 to 3.0 mm in
length (the average of 25 spikelets: 2.7 mm).
No measurements were given for the length of
the panicle which is found to vary from 12 to
18 cm. The branches of the panicle are relatively
stiff and somewhat ascending. The blades are
described as “scabrous on the nerves below,
glabrous above, . . .”’ Seven collections of P. albo-
maculatum have sheaths and blades which are
papillose-pilose in varying degrees of density.
The spikelets of these pubescent specimens are
in the same size range as the sparingly pubescent
spikelets of the type. The average length of 100
spikelets is 2.66 mm.
The new species may be separated from other
species in this section by the following key.
DECEMBER 1956 SOHNS: NEW GRASSES FROM MEXICO BO
ay
Sonns
Fries. 1-8.—Panicum clivum Sohns, sp. nov.: 1, Plant, X 19; 2, spikelet; 3, sterile lemma; 4, fertile
lemma (palea visible); 5, stamen; 6, ovary; 7, junction of blade and sheath; 8, view of ligule. Figs.
2-6 and 8, X 8; fig. 7, X 16. Drawn from the type specimen.
Blades asymmetrical and faleate; culms decum-
bent; first glume about one-third as long as the
Spikeletc., Seger suet a Garner: P. joorti
Blades symmetrical, nearly linear.
Spikelets glabrous, 2.2-2.4mm. long. . P. hintonii
Spikelets pubescent.
Spikelets 2.5-3 mm long (averaging 2.7 mm);
plants erect; panicles open, many-flowered,
Zito Sicmulon gear P. albomaculatum
Spikelets 2.3-2.7 mm long (averaging 2.4 mm);
plants decumbent-straggling; panicles small,
SOS Gane s5hocodnoensedeause P. chivum
Panicum crateriferum Sohns, sp. nov.
Figs. 10-22
Gramen perenne; culmi basi repentes, e nodis
radicantes, dein erecti, usque ad 35 cm alti,
graciles, nodi pubescenti; vaginae internodiis
breviores, striatae, ad os dense pubescentis;
ligula circiter 0.5 mm longa; laminae lanceolatae,
2-5 em longae, 5-12 mm latae, subtus glabrae,
supra sparsim hirsutis tuberculatis adspersae;
racemi 6, usque ad 2 cm longi; spiculae geminae,
inferiores plerumque reductae, superiores 2.3-
3 mm longae. Spicula superna: gluma prima
1.7 mm longa, valide 3-nervis, versus summam
papilloso-pilosa, margine hyalina; gluma secunda
2.5 mm longa, 5-nervis, papilloso-pilosa; lemma
sterile (interdum cum flore masculo) 2.7 mm
longum, parce papillose-pilosum, margines dense
papilloso-pilosis, cum glandulis duobus; palea
membranacea; lemma fertile oblongo-ovatum,
circiter 1.6 mm longum, glabrum; staminia 3,
antherae 0.9 mm longae.
Perennial, with wiry, creeping culms producing
upright culms at the nodes; culms slender, up to
35 cm tall, nodes pubescent, internodes glabrous
or sparingly pubescent near the summit; sheaths
shorter than the internodes, striate, glandular-
spotted, densely pubescent at the summit across
the back; ligule a ciliate rim about 0.5 mm long;
blades lanceolate, 2 to 5 cm long, 5 to 12 mm
wide, asymmetrical at base, junction of blade
and sheath scarcely petiolate, lower surface of
blade glandular spotted, glabrous, upper surface
sparsely papillose-hirsute, midrib prominent;
inflorescence usually consisting of six racemes,
averaging 2 cm in length, each bearing 4 to
10 paired spikelets, the lower spikelet usually
reduced, a few papillose hairs at the base of the
raceme, the axis papillose-pilose; rachis term-
inated by a single spikelet; upper spikelet of the
paired spikelets from 2.3 to 3 mm long (average
length of 46 spikelets: 2.68 mm). Reduced lower
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 12
spikelet of pair: first glume with a pronounced,
clasping hyaline margin, 3-nerved, papillose-
hirsute over the back; second glume 5-nerved,
papillose-hirsute over the back; upper spikelet
of the pair (averaging 2.6 mm in length): first
glume 1.7 mm long, strongly 3-nerved, papillose-
pilose on the back near the tip, margins hyaline:
second glume 2.5 mm long, 5-nerved, papillose-
pilose over the back; sterile lemma 2.7 mm,
5-nerved (often a faint vascular bundle may be
seen on the margin on each side of the lemma),
sparingly papillose-pilose over the back, but
more densely so along the margins, with two
gland-like structures, one on each side of the
keel about 1 mm from the tip; palea very thin,
enclosing three rudimentary stamens; fertile
lemma oblong-oval, about 1.6 mm long, smooth;
stamens 3, anthers about 0.9 mm long.
OP. albomaculatum
@P. clivum
®P, hintonii
@P. joorii
Fic. 9.—Map of portion of Mexico showing
distribution of species of Panicum in the section
Commutata, subgenus Dichanthelium.
Type in the U. 8S. National Herbarium,
no. 1983658, on “‘steep grassy slopes and narrow
ravine with open pine woods and scattered oaks
on granitic soil at km 339-40 between Acahinzotla
and Agua de Obispo, on highway to Acapulco,
alt. ca. 3000’ State of Guerrero, October 1,
1949, by H. E. Moore, Jr. (no. 5148). Other
specimens examined: GUERRERO: Montes de
Oca, Hinton 10801; Galeana, Hinton 14646,
14725.
This species belongs in the section Stolonifera,
subgenus Hu-Panicum and is related to P. 6i-
glandulare and P. pulchellum.
Panicum biglandulare Scribner and
Smith, emended
Figs. 24-31
Perennial, culms prostrate or ascending, pro-
ducing branches from the nodes, 40 em to more
DECEMBER 1956 SOHNS: NEW GRASSES FROM MEXICO 379
Fries. 10-22.—Panicum crateriferwm Sohns, sp. nov.: 10, plant X '9; 11, node; 12, paired spikelets;
13, sterile lemma and fertile lemma; 14, palea of sterile lemma; 15, first glume of lower spikelet; 16,
second glume of lower spikelet; 17, sterile lemma of lower spikelet; 18, fertile lemma of lower spikelet;
19, sterile lemma of upper spikelet; 20, fertile lemma of upper spikelet; 21, pistil and 22, anther. Figs.
11-14, X 8; all others X 16.
380
than 1 meter tall; nodes swollen and glabrous;
sheaths shorter than the internodes, striate,
sparingly pilose, the overlapping half of the
sheath densely papillose-pilose, the pilose margins
alternating with each node from base to tip;
ligule a membranous rim, finely ciliate at the
summit, usually less than 0.5 mm long; blades
with a petiole about 1 mm long, a line of hairs
across the back at the collar, lanceolate, acumi-
nate, 3 to 9 cm long, 0.9 to 22 mm wide, the
base asymmetrical, from sparingly to densely
papillose-pilose on both surfaces, margins
antrorsely scabrous; inflorescence exserted, com-
posed of usually six to ten somewhat distant
racemes, 0.6—-2.5 cm long; spikelets borne on one
side of the rachis, usually paired, the lower
sometimes undeveloped, 2.5 to 4 mm _ long
(average length of 147 spikelets: 3.33 mm); first
glume 1.3-1.8 mm, 3-nerved, ovate, papillose-
pilose over the back and near the tip; second
glume 1.38-3.2 mm long, 5-nerved, sparingly
papillose-pilose over the back and on the margins;
sterile lemma 2.5 to 4 mm long, 7-nerved (mar-
ginal nerves sometimes scarcely visible), minutely
scaberulous and sparsely papillose-pilose over
the back and on the margins, provided with two
raised, gland-like structures about 1 mm from
the tip, one on each side of the median nerve;
fertile lemma smooth, shining, 2—2.5 mm long:
anthers 3, well developed, 1-1.3 mm long.
According to Seribner and Smith’s original
description the margins of the sheaths ‘‘are
clothed with glands bearing branching hairs;
...”’ The margins of the sheaths are only papil-
lose-pilose. The spikelets are also described as
P. crateriferum
®
QP. vigtandulare
O
P, pulchellum
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 46, No. 12
“almost sessile, 2 lines long [4 mm];...” The
average length of the spikelet in the type speci-
men is 3.70 mm (measurements on 24 spikelets).
The spikelets varied in length from 3 to 4 mm.
The specimen collected by Santos (No. 34387)
in Oaxaca has smaller spikelets, on the average,
than those specimens collected in Chiapas and
Guatemala. The spikelets of this collection range
in size from 2.5 to 3 mm, the average length of
21 spikelets, 2.6 mm. The specimen is referred
to P. biglandulare; its small stature and small
spikelets are probably responses to edaphic
conditions.
The distribution of P. pulchellum, P. bi-
glandulare and P. crateriferum is shown on the
map (Fig. 23).
Specimens examined: Mpxico: CHIAPAS: near
Pinabete, Nelson 3781 (type); Mount Pasitar,
Matuda 316; Montecristo, Matuda 2006; Monte
Bello, Carlson 2330. Oaxaca: Santa Maria de
Lovani, San Juan de Petlapa, Santos 3437.
GUATEMALA: Coban, von Tiirckheim 1342, 1956;
hills between Cobdin and Tres Cruces, Standley
90263.
Species of the section Stolonifera, subgenus
Eu-Panicum may be separated by the following
key:
Nodes glabrous; blades sparingly to densely long
papillose-pilose on both surfaces; spikelets
Sh semen, MOVs cocovocedbocdso P. biglandulare
Nodes pubescent
Spikelets not over 2 mm long; blades short,
ovate-lanceolate, usually not over 4 cm long
P. pulchellum
Spikelets 2.3-3.0 mm long; blades lanceolate,
pale green, sparsely pilose on both surfaces
P. crateriferum
Fie. 23.—Map showing distribution of species of Panicum in the section Stolonifera, subgenus
Eu-Panicum.
DECEMBER 1956 SOHNS: NEW GRASSES FROM MEXICO 381
Fres. 24-31.—Panicum biglandulare: 24, Plant, X 4; 25, junction of blade and sheath; 26, short
raceme of spikelets with portion of rachis; 27, pair of spikelets; 28, first glume; 29, second glume; 30,
sterile lemma; 31, fertile lemma. All figs. X 8, except 28 and 31, X 16. Drawn from Tiirekheim 1342.
382
Muhlenbergia matudae Sohns, sp. nov.
Figs. 32-38
Gramen perenne; culmi erecti, 20-50 cm alti,
graciles, ad nodos hispidis, vaginae inferiores
papyraceae, superiores internodiis — breviores,
glabrae; ligula truncata, circiter 1 mm longa;
laminae 4-10 cm longae, 0.8-1.5 mm latae,
utrinque scabrae, margine scabrae; panicula
exserta, patula, pauciflora; usque ad 15 cm
longa; spiculae 3.5-6.3 mm longae; gluma prima
1.5-2.1 mm longa, I-nervis, carina scaberula,
arista circiter 0.5 mm longa; lemma 2.6-3.8 mm
longum, 3-nervis, callo pilis brevis, ad margines
parce pilis, carinis parce scabris versus summam,
arista 0.9-2.6 mm longa, scabra; palea lemma
aequans, bicarina, glabra; stamimia 3, antherae
1.5 mm longae; lodiculae 0.
Perennial; loosely tufted, culms 20-50 cm tall,
slender, erect, hispid below the nodes; sheaths
of basal blades papery and _ straw-colored,
glabrous, upper sheaths shorter than the inter-
nodes, glabrous; ligule a truncate membranous
rim about 1 mm long; blades mostly basal,
4-10 cm long, 0.8 to 1.5 mm wide, scabrous on
both surfaces and on the margins, loosely involute
when dry, tips slightly flexuous; inflorescence
an exserted, loose, open, few-flowered panicle,
up to 15 cm long, the spikelets borne singly at
the ends of the slender branches; spikelets
3.5-6.3 mm long (including the awn), the lower-
most spikelets about 3.5-3.8 mm _ long, the
terminal spikelet of each first-order branch
largest, from 3.9-6.3 mm (average length 4.9 mm)
long; first glume 1.5-2.1 mm long, 1I-nerved,
slightly scaberulous on the keel toward the awn-
pointed tip; second glume 1.9-2.8 mm long,
1-nerved, scaberulous on the keel toward the
abruptly awn-pointed tip, the awn about 0.5 mm
long; lemma 2.6-3.8 mm long, 3-nerved, the
lateral nerves sometimes obscure, a few short
hairs on the callus and on the margins, sparingly
scabrous on the keel toward the tip, awn 0.9—
2.6 mm long, antrorsely scabrous; floret readily
deciduous, leaving the glumes at the end of the
branchlet; palea as long as the lemma, 2-keeled,
glabrous; stamens 3, anthers 1.5 mm long; styles
2, free to top of ovary; stigmata plumose;
lodicules 0.
Type in the U. S. National Herbarium,
no. 2079186, collected ‘‘en ladera hiimeda, orilla
de bosque mixto de pinos y oyamel, Lago de
Zempoala, Edo. de Morelos” altitude 3,000
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 12
meters, October 7, 1951, by Dr. E. Matuda
(no. 25601).
This species is named in honor of Dr. Eizi
Matuda, good friend and excellent collector of
Mexican plants.
This species is related to M. arizonica and
M. arenicola. It may be separated from these
species by the following key:
Blades flat or only loosely involute, ligules 1-2 mm
long.
Glumes subequal, the first 1.5-2.1 mm, the
second 1.9-2.8 mm long, awn-pointed, the
second glume with an awn about 0.5 mm long;
panicle branches long, few-flowered
M. matudae
Glumes equal, about 1 mm long; panicle branches
short, many-flowered............ M. arizonica
Blades involute; ligule 2.5-3 mm long, firm;
glumes 2.3-2.5 mm long; lemma about 3 mm
long, scaberulous at tip; panicle branches short,
many-flowered....................M. arenicola
Calamagrostis mcvaughei Sohns, sp. nov.
Figs. 39-46
Gramen perenne; rhizomate; culmi 50-100 em
alti, graciles, glabri; vaginae internodiis longiores,
arctae, scaberulae, ad os parce pilosis; ligula
rotundata, membranacea, 1-1.2 mm_ longa;
laminae 10-30 cm longae, subtus scabrae, supra
valide nervis prominulis percursae, in collo parce
strigosis; panicula densiflora, laxa, pyramidata,
ramis gracilibus, verticillatis, flexuosis: spiculae
4-5 mm longae; gluma prima 3.4-4.2 mm longa,
I-nervis, carina scaberula ad summam; gluma
secunda 4-5 mm longa, ceteroqui primam similis;
lemma 3.4—4.1 mm longum, 5-nervis, scaberulum,
2- (interdum 4-) denticulata, dorso medium
aristatum, 6-8 mm longa, geniculata; callo pilis
copiosis, lemmam dimidio breviore: palea mem-
branacea, lemmam subaequans; staminia 3,
antherae circiter 2 mm longae; lodiculae 2;
rachilla producta.
Perennial, rhizomatous, tufted; culms 50-
100 cm tall, slender, erect, glabrous; sheaths
overlapping at base, straw-colored, scaberulous
and slightly pilose, especially toward the collar;
ligule a rounded membranous rim 1.0-1.2 mm
long; blades 10 to 30 cm or more long, convolute
when dry, scabrous on the lower surface, strongly
ribbed on the upper surface and pilose on the
nerves; collar sparsely strigose on the margins
at the junction of the blade and sheath; panicle
many-flowered, open, pyramidal, the branches
slender, flexuous, verticillate, the lower branches
oO
OO
DECEMBER 1956 SOHNS: NEW
writes
mS)
Se ae,
2
em SS Ve ee
ee ee
GRASSES FROM MEXICO
Panicle, natural size; 88, panicle branches;
Frias. 32-38.—Muhlenbergia matudae Sohns, sp. nov.: 82,
34, spikelet; 35, lemma; 36, palea; 37, essential organs; 88, ligule. All figures, except 32, X 16. Drawn
from type specimen.
384 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 12 -
‘\ VW 4-5
Fries. 39-46.—Calamagrostis mevaughei Sohns, sp. nov.: 39, Plant, X 14; 40, spikelet; 41, floret; 42,
anther; 43, lodicule; 44, cross section of blade; 45, external view of collar at junction of sheath and
blade; 46, inside view of ligule, one-half of blade, sheath and ligule removed. Figs. 42 and 44, x 16,
all others, X 8. Drawn from the type specimen.
DECEMBER 1956
bearing spikelets at the tips, the branches an-
trorsely scaberulous, glabrous in the axils; spike-
lets spreading in anthesis, pale-green to reddish-
purple, 4-5 mm long (average length of 15
spikelets: 4.4 mm); first glume 3.4-4.2 mm long,
1-nerved, scaberulous on the keel toward the tip;
second glume 4—5 mm long, 1-nerved, scaberulous
on the keel toward the tip; lemma with an awn
6-8 mm long, inserted about the middle, one
(or indistinctly twice) geniculate, exserted,
antrorsely scaberulous, the lemma 3.4-5.1 mm
long, 5-nerved, scaberulous on the back and
scabrous on the keel toward the tip, apex with 2
(sometimes 5) setaceous teeth, callus hairs abun-
dant, about half as long as the lemma; palea
membranous, thin, about as long as the lemma;
stamens 3, anthers about 2 mm long; lodicules 2,
slightly swollen at the base, terminal half thin
and flattened; rachilla prolonged, pilose, the
hairs extending to the tip of the second glume.
Type in the U. 8S. National Herbarium,
no. 2118496, collected in ‘Sierra de Manantlan
(15-20 miles southeast of Autlan), near Aserra-
dero E] Cuartén, elevation 2500 m; steep slopes
near summits, in pine-oak-fir forests,” in the
State of Jalisco, November 2, 1952, by Rogers
MecVaugh (No. 13853). Additional specimen
examined: JALisco: northeastern slopes of the
Nevado de Colima, below Cafioa de Leoncito,
McVaugh 13468.
This taxon is related to C. tolucensis and is
named in honor of Dr. Rogers McVaugh, of the
University of Michigan.
Calamagrostis valida Sohns, sp. nov.
Figs. 47-55
Gramen perenne; caespitose, culmi usque ad
65 cm alti; vaginae inferiores efoliatae, superiores
internodiis longiores, scaberulis; ligula membra-
nacea, 2.5-3 mm longa; laminae 8-20 cm longae,
usque ad 8 mm latae, supra pilosis, subtus gla-
berrimis; panicula densiflora, 15-25 cm longa,
ramis verticillatis; spiculae 5-6 mm longae, in
callo pilis copiosis, usque ad 4 mm longis; gluma
prima circiter 4 mm longa, 1I-nervis,
scaberula, ceteroqui glaberrima; gluma secunda
usque ad 5.5 mm longa, 3-nervis, glaberrima;
lemma circiter 4.5 mm longum, 5-nervis, 2-denti-
culata, arista usque ad 6 mm longa, dorso
medium aristatum, columna laxe torta, exserta,
leviter geniculata; palea 3.8-5 mm longa, bica-
rinata, bifida, membranacea; staminia 8, antherae
carina
SOHNS: NEW GRASSES FROM MEXICO
385
3.5-4 mm longae; lodiculae 2, 0.5-0.8 mm longae;
rachilla producta, 1.8-2 mm longa, longe-pilosi.
Perennial; caespitose, culms up to 65 cm tall;
basal sheaths bladeless, glabrous, upper sheaths
scaberulous, longer than the internodes, pale
pinkish-purple, hirtellous across the back at the
collar; ligule firm, membranaceous, 2.5-3 mm
long, blades 8-20 cm long, up to 8 mm wide, the
margins slightly convolute when dry, upper
surface pilose, lower surface glabrous, the tip
long-attenuate; terminal blades sometimes over-
topping the inflorescence; inflorescence 15-25 cm
long, dense, branches fascicled, 1.5-2 cm distant
in the center of the inflorescence, alternately
arranged, branches probably spreading in anthe-
sis, slightly purplish, included at the base;
spikelets 5-6 mm long; callus hairs copious, up
to 2.4 mm long; first glume about 4 mm long,
l-nerved, scaberulous on the keel, otherwise
glabrous; second glume up to 5.5 mm long,
3-nerved, glabrous; lemma about 4.5 mm long,
5-nerved, with 2 setaceous teeth, awned from
the back, the awn up to 6 mm long, loosely
twisted, exserted, slightly geniculate; palea
3.8 mm long, 2-keeled, membranaceous; stamens
3, anthers 3.8-4 mm long; lodicules 2, 0.5-0.8 mm
long; rachilla joint 1.8-2 mm long, long-pilose.
Type in the U. S. National Herbarium,
no. 2118491, collected on the northeastern slopes
of the Nevado de Colima, below Canoa de
Leoncito; steep cut-over mountainsides in fir
zone at head of Barranca de la Rosa, elevation
ca. 2800 m, October 10, 1952, by Rogers
McVaugh (no. 13410).
Sporobolus viscidus Sohns, sp. nov.
Figs. 56-61
Gramen annuum; culmi usque ad 50 em alti,
graciles, infra nodos_ crateriformi-tuberculati;
vaginae internodiis breviores, glabrae, carinis
tuberculatae, nervi culmorum sparse tubercu-
latae; ligula ciliolata, 0.5 mm longa; laminae
4-20 em longae, usque ad 6 mm lata, tenuis,
plana, supra glabra, subtus scaberula, margines
tuberculatis et scaberrimis; panicula 15 em vel
tuberculata,
ramis brevibus, rigidis, sparse ramosis, viscidis;
spiculae 3.5-4+ mm pallido-purpurea ;
eluma prima 1.9-8 mm longa, enerve; gluma
longior, rachis glabra, viscida;
longae,
secunda 2.5-4+ mm longa, l-nervis; lemma usque
ad 4 mm longum, l-nerve; palea lemma aequans
»
vel longior, valide biearina; staminia 3, antherae
386 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 12
Fies. 47-55.—Calamagrostis valida Sohns, sp. nov.: 47, Plant, X 14; 48, spikelet; 49, floret;
50, anther; 51, lodicule; 52, node on the axis of the raceme; 53, ligule, median adaxial view; 54, collar
at junction of the blade and sheath; 55, cross-section of blade. Figs. 48-50, 52-55, X 8; 51, X 20. Drawn
from the type specimen.
DECEMBER 1956 SOHNS: NEW GRASSES FROM MEXICO 387
Fras. 56-61.—Sporobolus viscidus Sohns, sp. nov.: 56, Plant, X '9; 57, margin of blade; 58, spikelet;
59, stamens; 60, ovary; 61, caryopsis (pericarp free at tip and base). All figures, except 56, X 8. Drawn
from the type specimen.
388
1.8-2.2 mm longae; lodiculae 2, 0.2 mm longae;
caryopsis circiter 3 mm longa, 1 mm lata.
Annual; culms up to 50 em tall, slender, tuber-
culate-crateriform below the nodes; sheaths
shorter than the internodes, glabrous, a line of
glands on the keel, sparsely glandular on the
lateral nerves; ligule a fringe of hairs, 0.6 mm
long; blades 4-20 cm long, up to 6 mm wide,
thin, flat, glabrous above, scaberulous below,
margins near the base glandular, otherwise short-
ciliate, the margins of the tip slightly inrolled;
panicle 15 cm or more long, rachis tuberculate-
glandular, the branches short, stiff, viscid; spike-
lets 3.5-4 mm long, pale-purplish; first glume
1.9-3 mm long, nerveless; second glume 2.5—4 mm
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 12:
long, 1-nerved; lemma up to 4 mm long, 1-nerved;
palea firm, as long as or longer than the lemma,
strongly 2-keeled, splitting when mature; stamens.
3, anthers 1.8—-2.2 mm long; lodicules 2, 0.2 mm
long; caryopsis about 3 mm long and 1 mm wide.
Type in the U. S. National Herbarium,.
no. 2181966, collected “en matorral seco, 550 m.
de altitud, La Junta, cerca de Tingambato,
Diciembre 20, 1953,” Estado de Mexico, by
Dr. E. Matuda (no. 29813).
This taxon is related to S. hintonii Hartley,
but it may be distinguished from that species.
by the narrow, short-branched, viscid panicle
and the larger spikelets.
SO
LEATHER RESEARCH AT NBS
In many respects leather is a unique material,
possessing a number of desirable physical prop-
erties, such as tearing strength, flexibility, and
porosity, that make it particularly well suited to
use in shoes, gloves, and other articles of clothing.
For specific applications, these properties can be
controlled to a considerable extent by proper
selection of skins, tanning agents, and finishing
processes. A knowledge of the structure of colla-
gen, the basic leather forming protein of hides, as
well as an understanding of the mechanism of
tanning, is thus of direct importance to tanners,
shoe manufacturers, and other industrial users
of leather.
To provide basic information of this kind for
Government and industry, the National Bureau
of Standards has, over the past 40 years, carried
on an extensive program of research and develop-
ment in the field of leather.1 This program, now
under the direction of Dr. J. R. Kanagy, has in-
cluded fundamental studies of collagen, develop-
ment of concepts for the mechanism of tanning,
and measurement of the physical and chemical
properties of collagen and leather. Much of the
information thus obtained has been applied to
the improvement of leather products and the
development of standard methods for their
evaluation.
1 For further details and a bibliography of NBS
publications in the leather field see, Leather re-
search and technology at the National Bureau of
Standards, by Everett L. Wallace, NBS Circ. 560.
1955. Available from the Superintendent of Docu-
ments, U.S. Government Printing Office, 15 cents.
FUNDAMENTAL PHYSICOCHEMICAL STUDIES
Because of the complex nature ot collagen, a
large proportion of the Bureau’s leather investi-
gations have combined both physical and chemi-
cal studies. An example is a series of investiga-
tions of the interactions of leather and collagen
with water in various forms. Leather excels in its
ability to transfer water vapor from a region of
high humidity to one of lower humidity. Because
of the relation of this property to shoe comfort
and the removal of perspiration from shoes,
water-vapor transfer through leather has been
extensively studied at NBS.2 The strong adsorp-
tive capacity of leather and collagen for water
and water vapor also has an important effect on
the properties of leather. This has led to a series
of studies on water adsorption and its variation
with temperature, tannage, and other factors.
These studies are being extended to include heats
of wetting of leather and other fibrous polymers.
The physical constants of leather fibers are
perhaps of less immediate practical importance.
Nevertheless, they are of great value in under-
standing the complex nature of collagen and the
processes involved in converting collagen to
leather. In general, studies of fiber constants are
made under varying conditions of tannage, mois-
ture content, temperature, composition, and
other factors, so that extensive data result.
2 Water vapor permeability of leather, NBS Tech-
nical News Bull. 34: 163. Nov. 1950.
DECEMBER 1956
To learn more about the thermodynamic prop-
erties of leather, data have been obtained on its
density, compressibility, expansivity, and specific
heat. In the course of this work, investigators en-
countered interesting phenomena which are being
explored further. For example, the expansivity
measurements led to studies of shrinkage rates,
with resulting data on heats and entropies of
activation. Likewise, compressibility measure-
ments at the high pressures required for solid
materials led to similar studies on synthetic
polymers. Data on specific heats are now being
accumulated in connection with basic studies on
interactions of moisture and leather.
BASIC CHEMISTRY OF COLLAGEN
Skin collagen, being a natural fibrous protein,
is a highly complex polymer that occludes extra-
neous materials, such as fats, salts, and other
proteins. Thus, fundamental chemical studies of
collagen first required investigation of methods
for removing extraneous materials so that a chem-
ically reproducible purified collagen might be
prepared.
The chemistry of the purified collagen that was
finally obtained has been intensively studied,
providing data that should be of great value in
determining its structure and the mechanism of
tanning. Besides studying relatively simple
chemical reactions, such as esterification, deam1-
nation, and various tanning procedures, the
Bureau has determined the combining weights
and the reactive basic groups. It has also studied
the amino acid structure and the amide nitrogen
content of collagen.
Recently, a rapid chromatographic method
was developed for determining the amino acid
content of collagen.? This quantitative technique
can be applied not only to collagen itself but also
to its derivatives and degradation products. In
contrast to other methods currently employed, it
enables the analyst to follow with a high degree
of detail the reactions and changes in which col-
lagen may be involved. It is thus expected to
provide a useful tool that will aid in further
understanding the structure of collagen and the
properties of leather.
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
The behavior of leather in service is largely de-
3A rapid quantitative analysis of collagen, NBS
Technical News Bull. 40: 65. May 1956.
LEATHER RESEARCH AT NBS
389
termined by the physical properties of the leather
matrix. Mechanical properties that have been
investigated extensively include tensile strength,
stretch, tearing strength, stiffness, bursting
strength, rigidity, and flexural resistance. Inves-
tigations of thermal properties have involved
shrinkage temperature, area stability, and ther-
mal conductivity. Other studies have dealt with
electrical resistance, dielectric constant, and
structural properties such as pore-size distribu-
tion in the fibers and leather.
Recently, fundamental information regarding
the structure of leather and collagen fibers was
obtained from studies of pores in leather.* Pres-
sure porosimeter and electron microscope studies
revealed the presence of large numbers of ex-
tremely small pores—less than a millionth of an
inch in radius—in both leather and collagen.
Quantitative information was obtained on pore-
size distribution within the individual collagen
fibrils. These data should aid the leather tech-
nologist in understanding the swelling and
shrinkage accompanying water-leather interac-
tions. They are also expected to shed additional
light on the ability of leather to transmit or ab-
sorb water vapor, tannins, or impregnants. The
permeability of leather to water vapor, which
makes it so well suited to use in footwear, is un-
doubtedly related to the presence of pores.
LEATHER TECHNOLOGY
In 1924, a survey by the U. 8. Department of
Commerce stated that 40 percent of the vegetable
tanning materials consumed in the United States
in 1922 were imported. It also pointed out that
99 percent of the chrome ore used in the United
States at that time came from abroad. In view of
the obvious importance of a substitute tanning
material to the national economy, the Bureau
initiated research on synthetic tanning agents.
Representative syntans of various types were
prepared and were evaluated by tanning tests.
The published results helped lay the foundation
for the development of present-day satisfactory
syntans by industry. An investigation of the
tanning properties of sulfite cellulose, a by-
product of the paper industry, demonstrated that
this material could be used in conjunction with
vegetable tanning extracts. Later, during World
1 Wicropores in leather, NBS Technical News
Bull. 39: 68. May 1955.
390
War II, it was shown that iron could be substi-
tuted for chromium during an emergency.
During World War II military and civilian
shoe requirements were so great that the tanning
industry had difficulty in expanding operations
sufficiently to meet the increased demand. Of
chief concern were the acute shortages of hides
and tannins. Recognizing the need for conserva-
tion, the Army Quartermaster Corps sponsored
research at the Bureau to improve the stability
and serviceability of leather and to develop test
methods for military items. The Bureau investi-
gated several oil and wax treatments, which were
adopted by the Armed Forces to increase the
wear resistance of sole leather.
After the war, research directed toward im-
proving the serviceability of leather was con-
tinued. This work aimed not only to increase the
wear resistance of sole leather but to improve low-
grade hide areas so that more first-quality soles
might be cut from the same hide. Ultimately
both these objectives were attained by develop-
ment of a method for impregnating leather with
polymers.°
The tightly woven condition of the natural
fibers of leather tends to limit the materials with
which it may be impregnated. Thus, the Bureau’s
early attempts to use various solutions of com-
mercial polymers as impregnants were not suc-
cessful, and research was for a time directed
toward impregnating the leather with monomers
for polymerization in situ. Then, as a result of
other research on pore-size distribution in
leather and particle-size distribution in rubber
latex, it became apparent that leather could be
impregnated by soaking the crust leather (tanned,
but not finished) in solutions of specially prepared
or selected commercial polymers. On the basis of
these findings, a method of treatment was de-
veloped.
Laboratory tests have shown that the treat-
ment increases wear by about 80 percent and
reduces water absorption by about half. Since
crust sole leather containing a minimum amount
of uncombined tannins is used, considerable
saving in tanning materials is effected. Further-
more, 1mpregnation may increase the wear of
belly and shoulder leather to equal that of high-
quality sole leather.
To bridge the gap between laboratory investi-
> Improved techniques for impregnating leather,
NBS Technical News Bull. 39: 96. July 1955.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 12 .
gation and large-scale industrial application of
the process, pilot-plant studies are being con-
ducted at NBS under sponsorship of the Navy
Bureau ot Supplies and Accounts. These studies
have shown that by varying the impregnating
process, long wearing leathers can be produced
having various degrees of waterproofness, flexi-
bility, and water-vapor transmission. Methods
have also been developed for imparting a finished
appearance to the impregnated leather.
STABILITY AND SERVICEABILITY
The aging qualities of leather depend princi-
pally on its tannage, environment, and use.
However, investigations of the mechanism of
degradation have shown that highly ionizable
acids, either added during manufacture or ad-
sorbed from the atmosphere, are a major factor
n leather deterioration.
Over 20 years ago the Bureau made a thorough
study of the effect of acid on leather and pub-
lished a series of papers on the subject. Some of
the more important results of this investigation
were the development of a standard procedure
for determining acidity in leather and the
determination of the optimum pH to prevent
change in the properties of leather during pro-
longed storage. Other factors in leather deterio-
ration which the Bureau has studied include
temperature, oxygen, moisture, and the catalytic
effect of traces of copper and iron salts in the
leather.
Before World War II mildew on leather was
not considered very important and little effort
was made to prevent its growth. However, mili-
tary forces stationed in tropical areas soon found
that the growth of mildew on numerous items of
equipage was a serious problem. The Army
therefore initiated a project at the Bureau for the
development of fungicidal treatments and test
methods.°®
These studies showed that the principal effect
of mildew on leather, other than appearance, is
the removal of greases, which causes stiffness and
loss in strength. As a result of the investigation,
a specification for the fungicidal treatment of
leather was prepared and quantitative methods
were developed for the determination of fungi-
cides in leather. This work has been continued
with the development of new fungicides and
6 Prevention of mildew on leather, NBS Tech-
nical News Bull. 32: 84. July 1948.
DECEMBER 1956
establishment of procedures for reliable evalua-
tion of all fungicidal materials.
TEST METHODS
Much of the Bureau’s work on leather has been
concerned with the development of new or im-
proved methods or equipment for testing leather
and leather products. The results have been used
both in procurement specifications and in
evaluation and development work.
For many years the accurate determination of
moisture in leather was a serious problem to
analysts, as the results for all other chemical
constituents are expressed on the oven-dry basis.
In 1941 NBS research showed that control of the
atmospheric humidity in the drying oven would
permit moisture determinations to be made with
considerable precision. This method has since
been adopted as the ultimate standard in Federal
Specifications.
Because the properties of leather vary con-
siderably over the area of a hide, it is important
that a test sample represent as nearly as possible
the average for the hide. Bureau scientists devised
a sampling procedure’ for shoe upper leather that
permits selection of sampling locations so that
the fewest specimens are required to give the
desired accuracy for a particular property. The
sampling procedure is based on a mathematical
relationship involving the coefficient of correla-
tion between the value obtained for a particular
test from a specific location and the average for
that test over the corresponding side. The most
suitable sampling location on a hide for all tests
required in acceptance testing was also de-
termined.
A number of techniques and devices have been
worked out for making performance tests of
7 Sampling of wpper leather for shoes, NBS Tech-
nical News Bull. 35: 6. Jan. 1951.
LEATHER RESEARCH AT NBS
391
leather products. Much of this work has dealt
with water-vapor permeability. Other develop-
ments have been concerned with measurement
of abrasion resistance, flex life, accelerated
aging, and compressibility.
Recently, in work sponsored by the Office of
the Quartermaster General, the Bureau has
developed a nondestructive method for testing
leather, based on the transmission of sound
waves.® The chief instrument employed is a pulse
propagation meter which measures and records
the speed of a generated sound pulse through
the leather. As a result, the specimen under test
is left unharmed, in contrast to the tearing or
other destructive effects of other test procedures.
Good correlation has been found between sonic
measurements and the results of tensile and
breaking elongation tests.
FUTURE PLANS
In the near future the Bureau expects to begin
a study of leather degradation by radiation.
The newly developed technique for amino acid
determination will be used in this work. This
method of approach should show the exact point
of attack in the collagen molecule and thus give
a clearer explanation of the mechanism of
breakdown.
Recently developed methods for determining
particle size of polymers will also be utilized to
study the size of particles in tannins and leather
impregnants. Comparison of these results with
data on leather pore size should not only provide
additional information on the mechanism of
tanning but should also make possible a better
understanding of the nature of the tanned
material.
8 A sonic technique for testing leather, NBS Tech-
nical News Bull. 40: 35. March 1956.
There are agents in nature able to make the particles of bodies stick together
by very strong attractions. And it vs the business of experimental philosophy
to find them out.—NEWTON
392
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, NO. 12
BOTANY — Additional Fijian mosses, IIT. Epwin B. Bartram, Bushkill, Pa.
(Received September 25, 1956)
The mosses collected by Dr. A. C. Smith
on his latest expedition to Fiji, April to
December 1953, under the auspices of the
Smithsonian Institution and the National
Science Foundation, are represented by 136
numbers, many of which are in generous
quantity for wide distribution. For the most
part the collections duplicate previous
gatherings but are of interest from the
standpoint of local distribution. Three
new species, Syrrhopodon vitiensis, Thyri-
dium parvifolium, and Chaetomitrium smithii,
together with a new variety of Chaeto-
mitrium orthorrhynchum, a species new to
the local flora, and Thamnium ellipticum,
not previously known from Fiji, are the
outstanding features of the series. The list
of Fijian mosses now numbers about 288
species of which 75, or approximately
25 per cent, are endemic. Further explora-
tions may expand the list to some extent,
but it seems likely that the flora as now
known is reasonably complete.
A representative series from this collec-
tion is in my herbarium and a complete set
in the United States National Herbarium.
FISSIDENTACEAE
Fissidens vitiensis Dix.
Ovalau: Hills east of Lovoni Valley, alt.
300-500 m, dense forest, on rich humus, no.
7361.
Fissidens mangarevensis Mont.
Viti Levu: Namosi: Valley of Wainambua
Creek, south of Mount Naitarandamu, alt.
250-300 m, dense forest, on rocks along stream,
no. 8842. Taveuni: Summit of adjacent slopes of
Mount Manuka, east of Wairiki, alt. 700-850
m, dense forest, on caudex of tree-fern, no. 8226.
Ovalau: Summit and adjacent slopes of Mount
Korotolutolu, west of Thawathi, alt. 500-589 m,
dense forest, on caudex of tree-fern, no. 8040.
Fissidens filicinus Doz. & Molk.
Taveuni: Slopes of Mount Manuka, east of
Wairiki, alt. 300-600 m, dense forest, on rocks in
dry stream bed, no. 8346.
DICRANACEAE
Trematodon longicollis Mx.
Viti Levu: Namosi: Northern base of Korom-
basambasanga Range, in drainage of Wainavin-
drau Creek, alt. 250-400 m, dense forest, on clay
banks along stream, no. 8673b.
Campylopodium integrum (C.M.) Par.
Viti Levu: Namosi: Northern base of Korom-
basambasanga Range, in drainage of Wainavin-
drau Creek, alt. 250-400 m, dense forest, on clay
banks along stream, no. 8673a.
Campylopus samoanus Broth.
Viti Levu: Tailevu: Hills east of Wainimbuka
River, in vicinity of Ndakuivuna, alt. 100-200
m, dense forest, on wet rocks along stream,
no. 7122. Ovalu: Summit of Mount Ndelaiovalu
and adjacent ridge, alt. 575-626 m, dense bush
and thickets of crest, on wet humus-covered
rocks, no. 7573.
Leucoloma tenuifolium Mitt.
Viti Levu: Namosi: Hills north of Wainavin-
drau Creek, between Korombasambasanga Range
and Mount Naitarandamu, alt. 250-450 m, dense
forest, on tree trunks, no. 8452.
LEUCOBRYACEAE
Octoblepharum albidum Hedw.
Ngau: Hills east of Herald Bay, inland from
Sawaieke, alt. 300-450 m, dense forest, in masses
of humus on trees, no. 7842. Taveuni: Slopes of
Mount Manuka, east of Wairiki, alt. 300-400
m, dense forest, on tree trunks, no. 8204.
Leucobryum pentastichum Bry. jav.
Viti levu: Namosi: Hills bordering Waina-
vindrau Creek, in vicinity of Wainimakutu, alt.
150-250 m, dense forest, in dense mats on de-
cayed wood, no. 8857. Ngau: Hills east of Herald
Bay, inland from Sawaicke, on slopes of Mount
Vonda (Lion Peak) and toward Waikama, alt.
30-200 m, on humus at roots of trees in open
forest, no. 7994.
Leucobryum sanctum Hpe.
Viti Levu: Serua: Hills between Waininggere
and Waisese Creeks, between Negaloa and
DECEMBER 1956
Wainiyambia, alt. 50-100 m, dry forest, in dense
mats on humus-covered logs, no. 9514. Viti
Levu: Namosi: Hills north of Wainavindrau
Creek, between Korombasambasanga Range
and Mount Naitarandamu, alt. 250-450 m, dense
forest, in dense masses on humus, no. 8461.
Leucobryum scalare C. M.
Viti Levu: Tailevu: Hills east of Wainimbuka
River, in vicinity of Ndakuivuna, alt. 100-200
m, on wet banks along road, no. 7013.
Exodictyon dentatum (Mitt.) Card. ? poor condi-
tion.
Viti Levu: Tailevu: Hills east of Wainimbuka
River, in vicinity of Ndakuivuna, alt. 100-200
m, dense forest, on bark, no. 7148.
CALYMPERACEAE
Syrrhopodon mamillatus C. M.
Twelve collections from Viti Levu, Ngau, and
Ovalau showing a broad distribution in the local
area.
Syrrhopodon smithii Bartr.
Viti Levu: Serua: Hills between Waininggere
and Waisese Creeks between Ngaloa and Waini-
yambia, alt. 50-100 m, dry forest, on tree trunks,
mixed with hepatics and lichens, no. 9538.
Syrrhopodon (Calymperidium) vitiensis Bartr.,
sp. nov.
Laxe caespitosus, caespitibus fuscescenti-
viridibus, opacis. Caulis brevissimus. Folia sicca
crispatula, humida erecto-patentia, ad 12 mm
longa, e basi ovata sensim anguste lineari-
subulata; marginibus remote denticulatis, in
parte superior vaginae sat dense serrulatis; costa
valida, excurrente; cellulis laminalibus minutis,
rotundatis, diam. circa 5u, vix incrassatis, mar-
ginibus versus 2-3 seriebus bistratosis, cancel-
linis male definitis. Fructus ignotus.
Viti Levu: Tailevu: Hills east of Wainimbuka
River, in vicinity of Ndakuivuna, alt. 100-200
m, dense forest, on tree trunks, no. 7103.
This species evidently has some affinity with
S. subulatus Lac., but the much smaller lamina
cells and the leaf margins closely and sharply
serrate at the shoulders and distantly denticu-
late above are good. diagnostic characters.
Thyridium parvifolium Bartr., sp. nov.
Caespitosum, caespitibus laxis, lutescentibus.
Caulis repens, ramis vix 1 em altis. Folia sicea
BARTRAM: ADDITIONAL FIJIAN MOSSES
393
erecta, incurva, humida erecto-patentia, valde
undulata, ad 2 mm longa, e basi amplexicaule,
oblonga, obtusa, limbata. Limbus folii inferne
8-10 seriatus, fere ad apicem folii productus,
superne tenuiter denticulatus vel integrus.
Cellulis laminalibus rotundatis, diam. 8-—10u,
chlorophyllosis, papillosis, cancellina superne
rotundata; costa infra apicem folii evanida. Seta
5-6 mm. longa, tenuis, rubra; theca erecta,
oblongo-cylindrica, deoperculata 1.8 mm. longa.
Ovalau: Hills east of Lovoni Valley, alt. 100-
300 m, dense forest, on tree trunks, no. 7312.
Slightly more robust than 7. flavum (C.M.)
Fleisch. and obviously distinct in the bluntly
obtuse leaves with the hyaline border more pro-
nounced and extending nearly to the apex.
Thyridium luteum Mitt.
Five collections from Viti Levu, Ovalau, and
Taveuni. Frequent on most of the larger islands.
Calymperes serratum A. Br.
Taveuni: Slopes of Mount Manuka, east of
Wairiki, alt. 300-600 m, dense forest, on tree
trunks, no. 8198. Ovalau: Hills west of Lovoni
Valley, on ridge south of Mount Korolevu, alt.
400-500 m, dense forest on decayed wood, no.
7660.
Calymperes tahitense (Sull.) Mitt.
Viti Levu: Serua: Hills between Navua River
and Wainiyavu Creek near Namuamua, alt.
100-200 m, no. 9007. Viti Levu: Serua: Hills east
of Navua River, near Nukusere, alt. 100-200 m,
dense forest on tree trunks, no. 9142.
Calymperes tahitense var. truncatum Ther & Dix.
Viti Levu: Serua: Hills between Waininggere
and Waisese Creeks, between Ngaloa and
Wainiyambia, alt. 50-100 m, dry forest, on
boulders, no. 9390.
PoTTIACEAE
Rhamphidium veitchii Dix.
Viti Levu: Namosi: Northern base of Korom-
basambasanga Range, in drainage of Waina-
vindrau Creek, alt. 250-400 m, dense forest on
clay banks along stream, nos. S681, S673.
Barbula inflexa (Duby) C. M.
Viti Levu: Namosi: Valley of Wainambua
Creek, Mount Naitarandamu, alt.
250-350 m, dense forest on rocks along stream,
no. SS40a.
south of
394
BRYACEAE
Brachymenium indicum (D. & M.) Bry. jav.
Viti Levu: Serua: Flat coastal strip in vicinity
of Ngaloa, alt. near sea level, on humus-covered
rocks in village, no. 9502. Ngau: Hills east of
Herald Bay, inland from Sawaicke, on slopes of
Mount Vonda (Lion Peak) and toward Waikama,
in pockets of humus on bare rocks of open hill-
side, alt. 30-200 m, no. 7957.
Bryum nitens Hook.
Viti Levu: Namosi: Valley of Wainambua
Creek, south of Mount Naitarandamu, alt.
250-350 m, on rocks along stream, no. 8840.
Bryum greenwoodii Dix.
Taveuni: Slopes of Mount Manuka, east of
Wairiki, alt. 300-600 m, on humus-covered rocks
in dry stream bed, no. 8338.
RHIZOGONIACEAE
Rhizogonium spiniforme (Hedw.) Bruch forma
samoana Mitt.
Two collections. Frequent throughout the
islands.
Rhizogonium setosum Mitt.
Eight collections from Viti Levu, Ovalau, and
Ngau. A common species in the local flora.
BARTRAMIACEAE
Philonotis pilifer Dix.
Viti Levu: Namosi: Northern base of Korom-
basambasanga Range, in drainage of Wainavin-
drau Creek, alt. 250-400 m, on clay banks along
stream, no. 8680.
HyPNODENDRACEAE
Hypnodendron subspininervium (C. M.) Jaeg.
Ovalau: Summit of Mount Tana Lailai and
adjacent ridge, alt. 500-550 m, dense bush and
thickets of crest, on trees, no. 7722. Ovalau:
Summit of Mount Ndelaiovalau and adjacent
ridge, alt. 575-626 m, dense bush and thickets of
crest, on tree trunks, no. 7612. Taveuni: Hills
east of Somosomo, west of old crater occupied by
small swamp and lake, alt. 660-900 m, dense
forest, on tree trunks, no. 8382.
Hypnodendron vitiense Mitt.
Taveuni: Hills east of Somosomo, west of old
crater occupied by small swamp and lake, alt.
660-900 m, on rocks along stream, no. 8371.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 12
SPIRIDENTACEAE
Spiridens balfourianus Grev.
Ngau: Slopes of Mount Ndelaitho, on northern
spur, toward Navukailangi, alt. 350-500 m, dense
forest, on trees trunks, no. 7884.
Spiridens aristifolius Mitt.
Ovalau: Summit of Mount Tana Lailai and
adjacent ridge, alt. 500-550 m, dense bush and
thickets of crest, dependent from tree trunks and
branches, no. 7726. Ovalau: Summit of Mount
Ndelaiovalau and adjacent ridge, alt. 575-626 m,
dense bush and thickets of crest, epiphyte, no.
Gale
Spiridens flagellosus Schp.
Ovalau: Summit of Mount Tana Lailai and
adjacent ridge, alt. 500-550 m, dense bush and
thickets of crest, on tree trunks, no. 7725. Tave-
nuni: Valley between Mount Manuka and Mount
Koroturanga (Des Voeux Peak), east of Wairiki,
alt. 600-700 m, dense forest, in masses on trees,
no. 8278.
ORTHOTRICHACEAE
Macromitrium subtile Schwaegr.
Ovalau: Summit and adjacent slopes of Mount
Korotolutolu, west of Thawathi, alt. 500-589 m,
dense forest on tree trunks, no. 8052.
RHACOPILACEAE
Rhacopilum spectabile R. & H.
Viti Levu: Namosi: Valley of Wainambua
Creek, south of Mount Naitarandamu, alt.
250-350 m, on decayed wood, no. 8841.
PTEROBRYACEAE
Garovaglia smithii Bartr.
Negau: Hills east of Herald Bay, inland from
Sawaieke, alt. 300-450 m, dense forest, on tree
trunks, nos. 7742, 7827.
Endotrichella graeffeana C. M.
Viti Levu: Namosi: Hills bordering Waina-
vindrau Creek, in vicinity of Wainimakutu, alt.
150-250 m, dense forest, on tree trunks and
branches, no. 8884.
Euptchium setigerum (Sull.) Broth.
Ovalau: Summit of Mount Tana Lailai and
adjacent ridge, alt. 500-550 m, dense bush and
thickets of crest, on tree trunks, no. 7724.
DECEMBER 1956
Symphysodon vitianus (Sull.) Broth.
Five collections from Viti Levu, Ngau, and
Ovalau. A frequent species on tree trunks and
branches on the larger islands.
METEORIACEAE
Floribundaria seruginosa (Mitt.) Fleisch.
Viti Zevu: Tailevu: Hills east of Wainimbuka
River, in vicinity of Wailotua, alt. 100-150 m,
on damp rocks at mouth of cave in dense forest,
no. 7236.
NECKERACEAE
Calyptothecium urvilleanum (C. M.) Broth.
Viti Levu: Namosi: Northern slopes of
Korombasambasanga Range, in drainage of
Wainavindrau Creek, alt. 450-600 m, dense
forest, on decayed wood, no. 8740.
Himantocladium implanum (Mitt.) Fleisch.
Negau: Hills east of Herald Bay, inland from
Sawieke, alt. 300-450 m, dense forest on tree
trunks, no. 7753.
Homaliodendron flabellatum (Dicks.) Fleisch.
Taveuni: Summit and adjacent slopes of
Mount Manuka, east of Wairiki, alt. 700-830 m,
dense forest, in masses on tree trunks, no. 8233.
Thamnium ellipticum (Bry. jav.) Kindb.
Ngau: Hills east of Herald Bay, inland from
Sawaieke, alt. 300-450 m, dense forest, on wet
rocks along stream, no. 7862.
New to Fiji. Area: Sumatra, Java, Borneo,
Philippines.
HOOKERIACEAE
Distichophyllum vitianum (Sull.) Besch.
Three collections from Ovalau and Taveuni.
A frequent local species on dead wood.
Cyclodictyon blumeanum (C. M.) Broth.
Vitu Levu: Namosi: Hills bordering Wain-
avindrau Creek, in vicinity of Wainimakutu, alt.
150-250 m, dense forest, on rocky banks along
stream, no. 8889.
Callicostella vesiculata C. M.
Ovalau: Valley of Mbureta and Lovoni Rivers,
alt. 20-50 m, on roots of Inocarpus trees along
trail, no. 7673.
BARTRAM: ADDITIONAL FIJIAN MOSSES
395
Callicostella papillata (Mont.) Jaeg.
Seven collections from Viti Levu, Taveuni,
and Ovalau. A common species on decayed wood.
Callicostella papillata var. brevifolia Fleisch.
Taveuni: Valley between Mount Manuka and
Mount Koroturanga (Des Vocux Peak), east of
Wairiki, alt. 600-700 m, dense forest, on wet
rocks along stream, no. 8256a.
Chaetomitrium orthorrhynchum (D. & M.) Bry.
jav. var. vitiense Bartr., var. nov.
A typo foliorum marginibus superne minute
denticulatis differt.
Species new to Fiji. Quite distinct from the
typical form in the upper leaf margins minutely
denticulate instead of sharply serrate. Other-
wise, the agreement seems to be complete.
Ovalau: Summit and adjacent slopes of Mount
Korotolutolu, west of Thawathi, alt. 500-589 m,
dense forest, on tree trunks, no. 8048.
Chaetomitrium (Leiocarpus) smithii Bartr., sp.
nov.
Caespitosus, caespitibus laxis, depressis, viri-
dibus. Caulis procumbens, irregulariter pinnatim
ramosus, ramis late patentibus, 5-8 mm. longis,
parce ramulosis, valde complanatis. Folia ramea
patentia, ovato-lanceolata, concava, acuminata,
1.5-2 mm. longa; marginibus erectis, fere ad
basin serrulatis; costis binis, bene notatis;
cellulis anguste linearibus, laevissimis. Seta 12-15
mm. longa, inferne laevis, superne papillosa;
calyptra ubique dense hispida, ad basem longe
ciliata.
Viti Levu: Tailevu: Hills east of Wainimbuka
River, in vicinity of Ndakuivuna, alt. 100-200
m, dense forest, on bark, no. 7172.
The seta smooth below and weakly papillose
above will at once separate this species from
either C. depressum Mitt. or C. rugtfoliwm Sull.
The habit is more irregular and less dense than in
C. densum Dix., the leaves more slenderly pointed
and the leaf cells essentially smooth.
LEUCOMIACEAE
Leucomium aneurodictyon (C. M.) Jaeg.
Ovalau: Summit of Mount Ndelaiovalau and
adjacent ridge, alt. 575-626 m, dense bush and
thickets of crest, on bark, no. 7592; Hills west of
Lovoni Valley, on ridge south of Mount NKoro-
levu, alt. 400-500 m, dense forest, on decayed
wood, no. 7624.
596
THUIDIACEAE
Thuidium samoanum Mitt.
Ovalau: Summit of Mount Ndelaiovalau and
adjacent ridge, alt. 575-626 m, dense bush and
thickets of crest, on decayed wood, no. 7598.
Thuidium cymbifolium (D. & M.) Bry. jav.
Taveuni: Valley between Mount Manuka and
Mount Koroturanga (Des Vocux Peak), east of
Wairiki, alt. 600-700 m, dense forest, on wet
rocks along stream, no. 8258.
ENTODONTACEAE
Campylodontium flavescens (Hook.) Bry. jav.
Viti Levu: Namosi: Valley of Wainavindrau
Creek, in vicinity of Wainimakutu, alt. about
150 m, on tree trunks in thickets along stream,
no. 8817,
SEMATOPHYLLACEAE
Trichosteleum hamatum (D. & M.) Jaeg.
Eleven collections from Viti Levu and Ngau.
Frequent locally and widely distributed in the
southwest Pacific.
Trichosteleum boschii (D. & M.) Jaeg.
Four collections from Viti Levu. Not un-
common on decayed wood.
Trichosteleum fissum Mitt.
Taveuni: Slopes of Mount Manuka, east of
Wairiki, alt. 300-600 m, dense forest, on tree
trunks, no. 8206.
Taxithelium lindbergii (Bry. jav.) R. & C.
Viti Levu: Namosi: Hills east of Wasiniko-
roiluva River, near Namaumau, alt. 50-200 m,
dense forest, on decayed wood, no. 8913a. Ovalau:
Hills east of Lovoni Valley, alt. 100-300 m,
dense forest, on tree trunks, no. 7311.
Taxithelium kerianum (Broth.) Fleisch.
Three collections from Viti Levu, Ovalau, and
Taveuni. Rather frequent on tree trunks and
decayed wood.
HYPNACEAE
Vesicularia reticulata (D. & M.) Broth.
Viti Levu: Namosi: Hills bordering Waina-
vindrau Creek, in vicinity of Wainimakutu, alt.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 12
150-250 m, dense forest, on rocky banks along
stream, no. 8889a.
Vesicularia calodictyon (C.M.) Broth.
Ovalau: Hills east of Lovoni Valley, alt. 100—
300 m, dense forest, on wet rocks along stream,
no. 7299.
Isopterygium minutirameum (C.M.) Jaeg.
Viti Levu: Namosi: Hills east of Wainikor-
oiluva, near Namaumau, alt. 50-200 m, dense
forest, on bark, no. 9050.
Ectropothecium molle Dix.
Viti Levu: Namosi: Valley of Wainambua
Creek, south of Mount Naitarandamu, alt.
250-3850 m, dense forest, on wet stones along
stream, no. 8792.
Ectropothecium adnatum Broth.
Taveuni: Valley between Mount Manuka and
Mount Koroturanga (Des Vocux Peak), east of
Wairiki, alt. 600-700 m, dense forest, on wet
rocks along stream, no. 8256.
Ectropothecium percomplanatum Broth.
Viti Levu: Tailevu: Hills east of Wainimbuka
River, in vicinity of Wailotua, alt. 100-150 m,
on damp rocks at mouth of cave in dense forest,
no. 7237.
Ectropothecium longicaule Bartr.
Taveuni: Slopes of Mount Manuka, east of
Wairiki, alt. 300-600 m, dense forest, In masses
on tree trunks, no. 8188.
Ectropothecium cyathothecium (C.M.) Jaeg.
Viti Levu: Namosi: Northern base of Korom-
basambasanga Range, in drainage of Wainavin-
drau Creek, alt. 250-400 m, dense forest, on tree
trunks, no. 8638. Viti Levu: Serua: Hills between
Waininggere and Waisese Creeks, between
Ngaloa and Wainiyambia, alt. 50-100 m, dry
forest, on decayed wood, no. 9639. Ovalau:
Slopes of Mount Korotolutolu, west of Thawathi,
alt. 300-500 m, dense forest, on decayed wood,
no. 8006.
POLYTRICHACEAE
Pogonatum graeffeanum (C.M.) Jaeg.
Four collections from Viti Levu. A frequent
local species.
DECEMBER 1956 ROSS:
NEW SPECIES OF HELICOPSYCHE
397
ENTOMOLOGY —New species of Helicopsyche from the Western Hemisphere!
(Trichoptera, Helicopsychidae). H. H. Ross, Illinois Natural History Survey,
Urbana, Ill.
(Received September 4, 1956)
Extensive collections of material from
Mexico and smaller collections from other
parts of Central and South America have
brought to light several species of the genus
Helicopsyche which prove to be new to
science and are herein described.
The genus Helicopsyche is of unusual
interest because the larva makes a coiled
sand-grain case resembling a snail shell,
and these queer cases have aroused the
interest of many entomologists. A consider-
able number of species have been described
from various parts of the world, mcluding
the West Indies and the Americas, but a
moderate number of these descriptions are
based only on larvae or females, for which
forms we do not yet know adequate specific
characters to allow positive identification of
material.
The American species show a number of
phylogenetic trends which are well marked.
All these species have a mesobasal lobe or
shoulder on the male clasper. In one evolu-
tionary line this shoulder has become sepa-
rated from the body of the clasper by a wide,
arcuate incision (Figs. 5, 6) and has cul-
minated in the species incisa and quadrosa.
In the other well-marked evolutionary line,
the mesobasal lobe first became cushion-
like, as in Fig. 8, then developed into a
wide process appearing to arise from the
extreme base of the clasper, as in Figs. 9
and 10. Accompanying this change of the
mesobasal lobe, the apical margin of the
clasper became rounded and its posterodorsal
portion became expanded to form a curious
boomerang-shaped structure (Fig. 10). Suc-
cessive stages in this line are illustrated by
planata, borealis, and selanderi, and the
present known culminating species are
vergelana and piroa.
It is a curious fact that all the Old World
1This paper is a joint contribution from the
Section of Faunistic Surveys and Insect Identifien-
tion, Natural History Survey, and the Department
of Entomology, University of Illinois.
species also have a mesal process arising
from the basal edge of the clasper. The
initial inference suggests that these Old
World species arose from a form such as
vergelana. In the Old World species, how-
ever, the wing venation is more primitive
than in the American forms, and the shape
of the body of the claspers suggests that they
also arose from a type having claspers more
like those found in eatensa or dampfi, as
apparently the specialized American forms
did also. On this basis there seems no doubt
that the New World and Old World forms
of the genus represent two separate phylo-
genetic groups, and that the common an-
cestor of the two combined the more primi-
tive venation of the Old World forms with
a primitive clasper perhaps much like that
found in some of the New World forms.
DESCRIPTION OF NEW SPECIES
The species described below are virtually
identical in size, color, and general structure,
as follows: Length from front of head to tip
of folded wings, 6-8 mm; color various
shades of medium brown except for the
antennae and legs which are chiefly straw
colored; sixth sternite of the male bearing
a fingerlike process; third, fourth, and fifth
sternites of both males and females with a
fenestrated network of sclerotized thick-
enings.
Material treated in this paper is in the
collection of the Illmois Natural History
Survey, unless otherwise indicated.
Helicopsyche extensa, n. sp.
Male: Genitalia as in Fig. 1. Lateral aspect of
ninth segment with moderately wide ventral
edge; cercus attached just above lateral apodeme.
Tenth tergite moderately long and curved down-
ward apex. Clasper with lateral aspect elongated,
bearing a truncate dorsal projection toward the
base, and with the apical portion truneate;
ventral aspect having a wide mesobasal shoulder
at base, the mesal edge of the shoulder bearing
398
three straight spines; apical portion beyond
shoulder narrow.
Holotype male—Santa Isabel, Valley of the
Cosnipata, Department of Cusco, Peru, De-
cember 1951, Felix Woytkowski. Paratype.
Same data, 1 female.
Helicopsyche woytkowskii, n. sp.
Male: Genitalia as in Fig. 2. Ninth segment
with fairly long ventral margin; cercus attached
a short distance above lateral apodeme. Tenth
tergite moderately short, with a depression at its
base. Claspers with lateral aspect short and
regular, with relatively sharp anterodorsal and
posterodorsal angles; ventral aspect with the
fairly large mesobasal shoulder occupying nearly
half the length of the clasper and bearing an
irregular row of 5 or 6 stout setae along its mesal
edge.
Holotype male-—Santa Isabel, Valley of the
Cosnipata, Department of Cusco, Peru, January
9, 1952, Felix Woytkowski. Paratype——Same
data but December 19, 26, 1951, and January 1,
1952, 3 females.
The short, regular clasper, combined with the
simple mesobasal shoulder will differentiate this
species from other described species of the genus.
Helicopsyche dampfi, n. sp.
Male: Genitalia as in Fig. 3. Ninth segment
with fairly long ventral margin; cercus attached
slightly above lateral apodeme. Tenth tergite
long, fairly straight, and tapering to a point at
apex. Clasper with lateral aspect moderately
long and somewhat rectangular; the anterodorsal
corner is produced into a short truncate process,
the posterodorsal corner is produced into a
moderately sharp point; in ventral aspect, the
mesobasal shoulder is relatively large and wide,
with a row of stout bristles; from this view the
apical portion of the clasper is fairly long, with
the dorsal portion curved mesad.
Holotype male—Finca Germania, Chiapas,
Mexico, June 20, 1935, A. Dampf. Paratype—
Yepocapa, Mun. Yepocapa, Chimaltenango,
Guatemala, April 27, 1948. Elev. 4,800 feet.
R. L. Wenzel, 1 female (in the collection of the
Chicago Natural History Museum).
Distinctive features of this species are the
shape of the apex of the clasper and the broad
mesobasal lobe with its cushion of setae.
Helicopsyche truncata, n. sp.
Male: Genitalia as in Fig. 4. Ninth segment
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 12
with moderately long ventral margin, the cercus
inserted very close to lateral apodeme. Tenth
tergite short and blunt at apex. Lateral aspect of
clasper irregular; anterodorsal corner rounded,
posterodorsal corner almost quadrate; ventral
margin with the mesobasal lobe projecting as a
large triangular process. Ventral view of clasper
with basal process appearing narrow but sharp,
with an irregular mesal cushion of spines.
Holotype male.—Finca Vergel, Chiapas, Mexico,
May 19, 1935, A. Dampf. Paratypes.—Same data
but May 23, 1 male; same data but May 28, 1
male; Huehuetan, Chiapas, November 9, 1932, A.
Dampf, 1 male; Mexico, without definite locality,
8 males.
This species is distinguished from other mem-
bers of the genus by the triangular and shoulder-
like mesobasal lobe, as seen in lateral view.
Helicopsyche incisa, n. sp.
Male: Genitalia as in Fig. 5. Ninth segment
with moderately long ventral margin, the cercus
situated a considerable distance above the
lateral apodeme. Tenth tergite of moderate
length and sloping gradually to apex. Clasper
deeply incised toward the base in such a way
that the mesobasal lobe is a narrow mesal projec-
tion separated from the main part of the clasper
by a wide, arcuate incision; lateral aspect of
clasper narrowed above mesobasal lobe, dorsal
portion expanded, its anterodorsal corner large
and rounded, its posterodorsal corner narrow,
elongate and sharp; mesobasal lobe of clasper
with a small cushion of short teeth.
Holotype male-——Finca Esperanza, Chiapas,
Mexico, May 2, 1988, A. Dampf. Paratypes.—
Same data but April 4 and April 12, 2 males,
and May 30, 1 male; Finca Vergel, Chiapas,
May 19-81, 1935, A. Dampf, 7 males; Finca
Victoria, Chiapas, May 15, 1938, A. Dampf, 1
male; Mexico (no definite locality), 1 male.
This species forms a small complex with the
next (quadrosa), the two differing from other
members of the genus in having the arcuate
incision between the mesobasal lobe of the
clasper and the main body of the clasper. In
incisa the apical margin of the clasper has an
excavated area between the two corners, whereas
in quadrosa the apical margin is evenly rounded.
Both incisa and quadrosa are probably most
closely related to haitiensis Banks (Fig. 7), which
differs from the two Mexican species in having a
narrower but sharper incision between the meso-
basal lobe and the body of the clasper. There is
DECEMBER 1956 ROSS: NEW SPECIES OF HELICOPSYCHE 399
Z EXTENSA
WOYTKOWSKII
DAMPF!
INCISA
HAITIENSIS
CY
i SELANDERI VERGELANA
Fras. 1-10.—Male genitalia of Helicopsyche: A, Lateral aspect; B, ventral aspect of left clasper. All
but Fig. 7 drawn from the holotypes.
400
every indication that haitiensis represents a form
ancestral to the two Mexican species.
Helicopsyche quadrosa, n. sp.
Male: Genitalia as in Fig. 6. Lateral view of
ninth segment with ventral margin moderately
short, and with the cercus inserted considerably
above the lateral apodeme. Tenth tergite fairly
deep. Clasper with mesobasal process long and
narrow, separated from body of clasper by an
arcuate incision; lateral view of clasper con-
stricted above meso-basal lobe, the dorsal portion
expanding rapidly, with a rounded anterodorsal
corner, a quadrate and relatively massive
posterodorsal corner, and an even apical margin.
Holotype male—Finca Victoria, Chiapas,
Mexico, June 1, 1935, A. Dampf. Paratypes.—
Same data but June 2, 1 male; Finca Vergel,
Chiapas, May 28, 1935, A. Dampf, 1 male.
This species is most closely related to incisa,
differing in the shape of the clasper as described
under the preceding species.
Helicopsyche planata, n. sp.
Male: Genitalia as in Fig. 8. Lateral aspect of
ninth segment with fairly wide ventral margin
and with the cercus situated a short distance
above the lateral apodeme. Tenth tergite fairly
long and moderately deep. Clasper with lateral
aspect somewhat rectangular, its apical portion
moderately expanded, the anterodorsal corner
rounded, the posterodorsal corner pointed but
not greatly produced; in ventral view the meso-
basal lobe forms a rounded shoulder bearing a
cluster of spines.
Holotype male.—San_ Cristébal, Chiapas,
Mexico, July 7, 1926, A. Dampf. Paratype—
Same data, 1 male.
This species is most closely related to borealis
(Hagen) on one hand and the mexicana-arizo-
nensis-limnella complex on the other. From
borealis, planata differs in the sharp posterodorsal
corner of the clasper, the less bowed dorsal margin
of the clasper, and in the short aedeagus, which in
planata is one and a half times the length of the
tenth tergite and in borealis about twice the
length of the tenth tergite. From mexicana and
its allies planata differs in the narrower apex
and the regularly rounded anterodorsal corner
of the clasper.
Helicopsyche selanderi, n. sp.
Male: Genitalia as in Fig. 9. Lateral aspect of
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 46, No. 12 _
ninth segment with fairly wide ventral margin,
and with the cercus attached just above the
lateral apodeme. Tenth tergite elongate and
relatively shallow. Lateral aspect of main body
of clasper fairly narrow and angular at the base,
tapering toward apex, the apical portion itself
greatly enlarged and forming a large, rounded
posteroapical expansion; the anterodorsal corner
is evenly rounded; the mesobasal lobe forms a
tubular process which in ventral view is about
the same width and about half the length of
those shown in Fig. 10B, capped with the same
cluster of spines.
Holotype male.—20 miles west of Morelia,
Michoacdin, Mexico, July 19, 1955, R. B. and
J. M. Selander. Paratype-—Same data, 1 male.
This species forms an interesting annectant
step between borealis and the piroa complex.
From borealis it differs in the produced postero-
dorsal area of the clasper and in the well differ-
entiated mesobasal lobe. From the piroa complex,
selandert differs in the wider basal portion and
shorter posterodorsal area of the clasper.
Helicopsyche vergelana, n. sp.
Male: Genitalia as in Fig. 10. Lateral aspect of
ninth segment with the ventral portion unusually
narrow and small, and with the cercus attached a
short distance above the lateral apodeme. Tenth
tergite moderately long and moderately shallow.
Main body of clasper with lateral aspect small
and narrow at base, expanding toward apex into
a greatly developed posterodorsal lobe; mesobasal
lobe forming a long flat process, in ventral view
appearing to rise from the extreme mesal corner
of the base of the clasper; each lobe is capped
with a cluster of spines. In the holotype this
process is as long as in Fig. 10; in some of the
paratypes it ranges to only two-thirds this
length.
Holotype male.—Finca Vergel, Chiapas, Mexico,
May 30, 1935, A. Dampf. Paratypes.—Huehue-
tan, Chiapas, Mexico, November 9, 1932, A.
Dampf, 1 male; Chipitlan, Cuernavaca, Mexico,
May 3, 1941, A. Dampf, 1 male; Rancho Monter,
Oaxaca, Mexico, Dec. 14, 1937, A. Dampf, 1
male; Hacienda Vista Hermosa, Villa Santiago,
Nuevo Leén, Mexico, June 16, 1940, Hoogstraal
and Knight, 5 males, 3 females; Sabinas Hidalgo,
Nuevo Leén, Mexico, June 16, 1939, H. Hoog-
straal, 4 males, 2 females. Additional larvae and
pupae were collected by Harry Hoogstraal on
rocks in a spring at the last locality.
DECEMBER 1956 ROSS:
This species is most closely related to piroa
Ross, from which it differs in the typical narrow
process of the sixth sternite, the shallow tenth
tergite and the narrower and usually more
elongate mesobasal process of the clasper. In
piroa the ventral process of the sixth sternite is
wide and flat, forming a broad flap; the tenth
tergite is deep and bears a ridged hump at the
base; and the mesobasal process is only slightly
NEW SPECIES OF HELICOPSYCHE
401
longer than that in selanderi, but much wider
than in vergelana.
The above material from the vicinity of Nuevo
Leén was previously considered as belonging to
piroa and was included in the original descrip-
tion of that species. More critical examination of
differences instigated by the discovery of selan-
deri has led to a more critical diagnosis of these
forms.
pe
SMALL ARMS AND AMMUNITION
The American Revolution might have been
fought—on the side of the colonies—with bows
and arrows. They still were better weapons, in
some respects, than the available muskets of the
day—as emphasized by Benjamin Franklin in
a 1776 letter to Gen. Charles Lee, who then was
engaged in fortifying the port of New York:
These were good weapons, not lightly laid aside:
Because a man may shoot as truly with a bow as
with a common musket. He can discharge four
arrows in the time of charging and discharging one
bullet. His object is not taken from his view by
the smoke of his own side. A flight of arrows, seen
coming upon them, terrifies and disturbs the ene-
mies’ attention to their business. An arrow strik-
ing in any part of a man puts him hors-du-combat
till it is extracted. Bows and arrows are more
easily provided everywhere than muskets and
ammunition.
This is cited by Col. Berkeley R. Lewis, of the
Frankfort Arsenal, Philadelphia, in a compre-
hensive treatise! on small arms and ammunition,
especially as used in the United States military
service, which has just been published by the
Smithsonian Institution.
There was a good deal to be said for Franklin’s
position for, after more than four centuries,
firearms still were in a rather primitive stage and,
even such as they were, the colonies were poorly
equipped to produce them. Just when firearms
first were used in battle is somewhat debatable,
Colonel Lewis points out. Artillery was used first.
Some cannon were made in Italy around 1312.
They were stone-throwing mortars.
The first hand firearms were crude iron or
copper tubes, fired by applying a live coal to a
touchhole. This was a shallow cup at the top of
1Small arms and ammunition in thd United States
Service [1776-1865], by Col. BERKELEY R. Lewis,
338 pp., 52 pls. Smithsonian Institution, Washing-
ton 25, D. C. $8.00.
the breech, whence a small hole led downward
into the powder chamber. This device usually—
not always—fired the charge.
Most of the trouble with firearms during the
succeeding 500 years was due to this ignition
system. All this time at least one misfire could be
expected in ten shots.
The first pistols, known as ‘‘bombardelles,”’
appeared in Italy about the middle of the four-
teenth century. The barrels were 9 inches long. In
1544 French cavalry were armed with “pistols”
whose barrels were 25 inches long.
Hand cannon were brought to England in 1471.
This weapon, weighing between 60 and 70
pounds, was carried by two men. It was difficult
to load and uncertain in range and accuracy—
quite inferior to the crossbow or longbow then
still in use.
Early in the fifteenth century Spaniards in-
vented the arquebus with a matchlock trigger
mechanism. It was probably inferior to the
longbow in battle. About 1521 Spanish inventors
produced the “‘mousquet,” musket. It was 6 to 7
feet long, weighed 60 to 70 pounds, and was
very slow in loading. The oldest rifles date from
the end of the fifteenth century. At first they
were considered purely as sporting weapons.
When the first settlers came to North America
they brought with them the firearms then in use
in Europe. There were local gunsmiths, but most
of them were engaged in repair of arms, and
rebuilding of weapons damaged beyond repair, by
combining parts of two or more. At the start of
the Revolution the only military arms of any
consequence in the hands of the colonists were
the European weapons left over from the French
and Indian wars. During the war anything that
would shoot was pressed into service. Small loeal
manufactures were expanded, however, and new
ones started under patronage of the various
colonies.
From this point Colonel Lewis traces the
evolution of small arms through the various
American wars up through the Civil War.
402 JOURNAL OF
THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF
SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 12
MAMMALOGY .—A new species of murine opossum (genus Marmosa) from Peru.
CHARLES O. Hanpiey, Jr., U. S. National Museum.
(Received September 4, 1954)
Mammals collected by representatives of
the Pan American Sanitary Bureau during
investigations of plague in Peru and Ecuador
are being studied in the U. 8. National
Museum. Among these specimens are two
murine opossums (Marmosa) from the
western flank of the Andes in central Peru
which are strikingly different from other
named forms. They are the northernmost
representatives of a group that includes the
species elegans, janetta, marmota, and pusilla,
inhabiting parts of Chile, Argentina, Bolivia,
and Paraguay. The place of capture is almost
a thousand miles northwest of the known
range of their nearest relative.
For the opportunity to study these speci-
ments, which have been deposited in the
National Museum, I am indebted to Dr.
Fred L. Soper, Director, and Dr. E. C.
Chamberlayne, adviser, Communicable Dis-
eases Branch, Pan American Sanitary
Bureau, Washington, D. C. I am also
grateful to Dr. Philip Hershkovitz, Chicago
Natural History Museum, for the loan of
comparative material of J. janetta and
M. marmota.
This animal is named in honor of the late
George H. H. Tate, whose revision of the
genus Marmosa (Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat.
Hist. 66 (1): 1-250, 1933) went far toward
bringing order to an extremely complex
group.
Marmosa tatei, n. sp.
Holotype.—U.S.N.M. no. 302915; adult male,
skin and skull (skinned from alcohol); collected
December 1955, by José Maria de la Barrera;
Chasquitambo (710 m, lat. 10° 18’ 48” S., long.
77° 37’ 20” W.), Ancachs, Peru; original number
53/139.
Distribution.—Known
locality.
Description (of holotype; coloration possibly
slightly altered by 3 months immersion in
alcohol; capitalized color terms from Ridgway,
1912, Color standards and color nomenclature).—
Fur long (12 mm on rump, 8 mm on anterior
abdomen) but not woolly or wavy; mass effect of
only from the type
dorsum between Benzo Brown and Fuscous,
rather sharply distinguished from sides, which
are Mouse Gray, washed on mid-flanks with
Drab; dark dorsal patch extends forward as a
thin line to snout; flank color extends on dorsal
surfaces of forearms and legs to wrists and
ankles; face much paler than dorsum or flanks,
about Drab-Gray; black eye-ring prominent,
2 mm wide around eye and extending 4 mm
behind and 8 mm in front of eye; longest labial
vibrissa 33 mm; ears dark gray, long and broad;
antihelix large; spina helicis not lobed; under-
parts white, hairs gray-based toward sides;
throat gland large; feet and hands small, pure
white; claws short (2 mm); external anterior and
posterior pads of hind foot separate; pads be-
tween second and third and third and fourth
hind toes subequal, the latter slightly smaller;
tail relatively short, incrassated (about 8 mm
thick near base before skinning), basal two-thirds
sharply bicolor (Fuscous-Black above, white
below), distal third whitish, extreme tip (18 mm)
pure white; body-fur extends only 5 mm on base,
of tail; scales of tail in annular arrangement,
about 32 rows per centimeter at base.
The paratype, U.S.N.M. no. 302916, a young
adult by Tate’s scale (op. cit.), is similar to the
holotype in coloration but is slightly brighter.
Its tail is very sharply bicolor proximally, the
dorsal portion being almost black; the distal 10
mm are pure white.
Skull strong, heavily built, and relatively
angular; nasals slightly expanded anterior to
frontomaxillary suture, acute posteriorly; inter-
orbital region broad anteriorly, tapering to
narrowest point at ‘‘postorbital constriction” of
Tate (op. cit.); supraorbital ridges indistinct,
forming slight triangular postorbital prominences,
continuous with temporal ridges which converge
to form a low crest on frontals, parietals, and
interparietals, where they merge with prominent
lambdoidal crests; braincase narrow; zygomata
thick and heavy; palate in the younger specimen
exceedingly fenestrated, in the adult less so but
still with large posteroexternal vacuities; pos-
terior margin of palate produced into a thick
wall 7 mm high, recurved over palate; ‘palatal
DECEMBER 1956
bridge” (alisphenoid-ethmoid portion of basi-
cranium) long and very narrow; auditory bullae
relatively far apart, and attenuated
anterointernally into pointed processes.
large,
Canine strong (crown of upper canine measur-
ing 3.3 mm in height from alveolus); P? without
distinet cingulum; P* higher and longer than P?2;
molars relatively broad (crown of M® in trans-
verse diameter 2.4 mm.
Measurements (of holotype, in millimeters,
taken according to Tate’s directions (op. cit.)).—
Basal length 30.7, greatest length 33.4, zygomatic
breadth 17.9, palatal length 17.7, least breadth
HANDLEY: NEW SPECIES OF MURINE OPOSSUM
403
across pterygoid wings of alisphenoids 2.0,
breadth of auditory bulla 3.5, greatest breadth
across auditory bullae 10.5, greatest breadth
across styliform processes of petrosals 8.8, great-
est length from anterior wall of auditory bulla to
posterior border of petrosal 5.8, greatest breadth
of palate across outer corners of M 9.6, maxillary
tooth row (M*'*) 5.1, greatest length of nasals
14.2+, greatest breadth of single nasal 1.5,
breadth of postorbital constriction 5.0, breadth of
braincase 12.2. Head and body 123, tail vertebrae
132, hind foot 16, ear from notch 22, greatest
breadth of ear 19.
Fig. 1.—Skulls of Marmosa tatei and its relatives. Upper row, dorsal aspect; lower row, ventral as-
pect; left to right: M. elegans, Guillermo Mann 101; J/. tate?, U.S.N.M. no. 3802919; Mie:
; vr)
ane tia,
C.N.H.M. no. 50973; 7. marmota, C.N.H.M. no. 26760.
404
Comparisons.—Sharply defined dorsal and
flank colors; large ears; small hands and feet;
short, thick tail with annular arrangement of
scales; slightly expanded nasals; highly fene-
strated palate; long, narrow palatal bridge;
large auditory bullae; and large P® stamp M.
tatei as a member of the Marmosa elegans group.
Large size, narrowed postorbital region, narrow
braincase, and convergent temporal ridges relate
it to the elegans section of that group (Fig. 1).
Numerous characters distinguish M. tater from
all other members of the elegans section: Dorsal
coloration grayer, tail more extensively white
tipped, nasals more expanded anterior to fronto-
maxillary suture and more acute posteriorly,
temporal ridges converging to form a more
prominent sagittal crest, palatal bridge narrower,
canines longer, and molars relatively broader.
It most resembles M. marmota of southern
Paraguay (C.N.H.M. no. 26760) but is smaller,
and has a narrower skull, less distinct supra-
orbital ridges (thus interorbital region smoother
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 12
and less angular), a more extensive eye-ring, and
whiter underparts. M. tatez is similar in size and
proportions to M. janetta of southern Bolivia
(C.N.H.M. 29169, 29170, 50972, and 50973), but
otherwise is distinguished by having underparts
whiter, auditory bullae larger; P® larger; in-
terorbital region broader anteriorly, narrower
posteriorly, not constricted before postorbital
process, and lacking prominent supraorbital
ridges. M. tatei is more remotely related to M.
elegans of Chile (U.S.N.M. nos. 1705 and 269806),
from which it differs in having whiter underparts,
blacker, more extensive eye-ring; much more
heavily ossified skull; and interorbital region
much broader anteriorly.
Remarks.—Members of the elegans section are
widespread, seldom collected opossums. The
forms marmota, janetta, tater, and elegans are well
differentiated, but collecting in intermediate
areas might show some or all of them to be con-
specific.
Specimens examined.—Two from the type
locality.
———————
NEWS OF MEMBERS
The International Business Machines Corpora-
tion has announced plans for a new research
center, employing 1,600 persons, to consolidate
all fundamental research aimed at improving the
company’s products. The laboratory will be un-
der the direction of Dr. EMANuEL R. PIORE.
GeorGE GamMow was awarded UNESCO’s
Kalinga prize for 1956 in recognition of his out-
standing interpretation of science to the general
public. He received £1,000 sterling and an invi-
tation to spend a month visiting and lecturing in
India.
Donovan 8S. Corre has joined the staff of
the Texas Research Foundation as chief botanist
and head of the Botanical Laboratory.
SE
Man’s work must ever end in failure,
Unless it bears the stamp of mand.
The head must plan with care and thought,
Before the hand can execute.—SCHILLER
INDEX TO VOLUME 46
An asterisk (*) denotes the abstract of a paper presented before the Academy or an affiliated society.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
Philosophical Society of Washington. 23, 132, 191, 228, 369.
AUTHOR INDEX
Apvams, L. H., and Tuckerman, L. B. * History
and traditions of the Philosophical Society of
Washington. 30.
Awnastos, GrorGE. The ticks (Acarina: Ixodoidea)
of the J. Klapperich Afghanistan Expedition,
1952 and 1953. 18.
ANDERSON, Harry. An investigation of the early
bands of the Saone group of Teton Sioux. 87.
ANDREASEN, Gorpon E., and Rasmussen, WIL-
u1AM C. A hydrologic budget in relation to
the climate and geology of the Beaverdam
Creek basin, Eastern Shore of Maryland.
266.
Bartram, Epwin B. Additional Fijian mosses,
IIL. 392.
Batten, Rocer L. Some new pleurotomarian
gastropods from the Permian of west Texas
42.
Benepict, W. 8. * Line width and shape in the
infrared. 25.
BENNETT, WILLARD H.
aurorae. 371.
Berry, 8. Stinuman. Mollusca dredged by the
Orca off the Santa Barbara Islands, Cali-
fornia, in 1951. 150.
BLAKE, Dorts H. Three new Neotropical flea
beetles. 142.
BLANTON, FRANKLIN S. See WirtH, Wriiuis W.
95, 186.
Boucor, A. J. Gyrospira, a new genus of bellero-
phontid (Gastropoda) from Bolivia. 46.
BraNnscoms, Lewis. * Photo-ionization absorption
spectra of negative ions. 25.
Branson, Herman. * Information theory and the
structure of protein molecules. 27.
BRECKENRIDGE, ROBERT G. * Gray tin. 192.
BRICKWEDDE, F. G. * History and development of
the Joseph Henry and Christmas lecture com-
mittees [of the Philosophical Society of
Washington]. 31.
Brown, Rouanp W. New items in Cretaceous and
Tertiary floras of the western United States.
104.
Cockrum, E. Lenpe“ti. Two new long-tailed
pocket mice (Perognathus formosus) from
Arizona. 131.
Coruss, Epirn L. R. Transients in signal anal-
ysis. 305.
Darrow, K. K. * The Hall effect. 25.
Davis, P., and Rasinowrtz, P. Numerical ex-
periments in potential theory using ortho-
normal functions. 12.
Davisson, JAmMEs W. * Electrical breakdown in
crystals. 24.
Dempsey, Hueu A. Stone ‘‘medicine wheels’’—
memorials to Blackfoot war chiefs. 177.
Dexter, Ratepn W. A new fairy shrimp from
western United States, with notes on other
North American species. 159.
*Solar protons and
Drake, Cart J. New Neotropical genera and
species of apterous aradids (Hemiptera). 322.
DunxkiE, Davin H., and Mamay, Smrerus H. An
acanthodian fish from the lower Permian of
Texas. 308.
Eau, Paut. * The role of theories in crystal
growth. 30.
Enuiotr, Grauam F. Galazaura (calcareous
algae) and similar fossil genera. 341.
EXSTERMANN, IMMANUEL. * Interaction of molecu-
lar beams with surfaces. 230.
Ewan, Jospen. HE. D. Merrill (obituary). 267.
Foorr, Ricnarp H. Gall midges associated with
cones of western forest trees (Diptera: Itoni-
didae). 48.
Forsusu, Scotr E. * Solar influences on cosmic-
ray variation. 191.
FRENKIEL, Frangors N. * Atmospheric pollution.
135.
. Possibilities and significance of high-
speed computing in meteorology. 33.
. Radioactive pollution and civil defense.
206.
FRIEDMAN, Herrpert. * Solar X-rays, extreme
ultraviolet radiation, and the ionosphere. 28.
Gamow, GEorGE. * The arithmetic of life. 26.
GoLpBERG, Karu. Unimodular matrices of order
2 that commute. 337.
Gurney, AsutEy B. See Mockrorp, Epwarp
L. 353.
HaGen, Joun P. * Radio observations of the sun.
24.
. * Radio sources and the structure of the
galaxy. 136.
HANDLEY, Cuar.es O., Jr. A new species of murine
opossum (genus Marmosa) from Peru. 402.
Harpy, James D. * Pain and tissue damage. 198.
Heere, E. 8. See Incrrsoun, E. H. 299.
Hewtuier, J. R. *Some observations on cancer
research and control. 228.
HeErRRING, Conyrrs. * On the surface energy of
crystals and its relation to sintering. 229.
Herzretp, C. M. Incomplete equilibrium and
temperature measurement. 269.
Hess, W. C., and Suarrran, I. P. Effect of cor-
tisone acetate on production of liver and mus-
cle glycogen from C-1l4 labeled glycine and
DL-alanine. 20.
Hoses, Horron H., Jr. Anew crayfish of the genus
Procambarus from South Carolina (Decapoda:
Astacidae). 117.
Horrman, A. J. Generalization of a theorem of
Konig. 211.
Horn, F. Hussarp. * The role of dislocations in
erystal growth. 29.
Hutsurt, E. O. * Magnetic storms,
ionosphere and zodiae light. 27.
InceRsouy, BE. H., Jones, L. L., and Hears, E.
S. Effect of sympathetic denervation of the
urinary bladder in animals and man, 299.
AULTOra,
405
406
Jastrow, Rogpert. * The structure of the atomic
nucleus. 370.
JenKINS, W. R. Paratylenchus projectus, new
species (Nematoda, Criconematidae), with a
key to the species of Paratylenchus. 296.
Jones, L. L. See INGERSOLL, E. H. 299.
Jones, Merepita L. Cossura pygodactylata, a
new annelid from San Francisco Bay (Poly-
chaeta: Cirratulidae). 127.
Kac, Marx. *The emergence of statistical
thought. 191.
Karo, T., and Taussky, O. Commutators of A
and A*. 38.
Knient, J. Brookes. New families of Gastropoda.
41.
Kyreut, Kennetu L. See Stone, Anan. 213, 276.
Kovaszn ay, Lesuig S. G. * Image processing by
electro- optical techniques. 135.
Levy, Lours. Some metabolic patterns observed
after morphine administration in the rabbit.
253.
Lrrovrrz, THeopore. * Ultrasonics and the liquid
state. 369.
LuaNno, GeorGE A. New Umbilicariaceae from
the Western Hemisphere, with a key to genera.
183.
Loresiicu, ALFRED R., Jr., and Tappan, HELEN.
Chiloguembelina, a new Tertiary genus of the
Heterohelicidae (Foraminifera). 340.
MacomBer, Rospert D. An observation on puffer-
fish toxin. 85.
Mamay, Srercius H. See DUNKLE Davin H. 308.
Marton, L. * Electron interferometry. 23.
Maurer, Ropert J. * Photoeffects and excitons in
alkali halides. 370.
Mazur, P., Monrrouyi, . W., and Ports, R. B.
Effect of defects on lattice vibrations, II:
Localized vibration modes in a linear diatomic
chain. 2.
Micuets, A. *Some aspects of high-pressure
molecular physics. 29.
Mocxrorp, Epwarp L., and GurRNEy, ASHLEY B.
A review of the psocids, or book-lice and
bark-lice, of Texas (Psocoptera). 353.
Monrro.t, HE. W. * Cayley trees. 192.
See also Mazur, P. 2.
Moore, SutruEy. A solution to the ‘‘scientist
problem.”’ 40.
MuscatinE, LEONARD. A new entoniscid (Crusta-
cea: Isopoda) from the Pacific coast. 122.
Pacer, Cuester H. * The ‘“‘Odd Ball Problem.”
191.
Paag, R. M. Cosmological theories—ancient and
modern. 244.
Prrritz, RicHarp L. * Random processes and
noise in semiconductors. 24.
PErrrBoNne, Marian H. Some polychaete worms of
the families Hesionidae, Syllidae, and Nerei-
dae from the east coast of North America,
West Indies, and Gulf of Mexico. 281.
Pires, J. Murga. See Smitu, Lyman B. 86.
Pirrman, Marcaret. Pertussis and pertussis
vaccine control. 234.
Potts, R. B. See Mazur, P. 2.
RaBinowi1Tz, P. See Davis, P. 12.
RasmussENn, WILLIAM C. See ANDREASEN, GORDON
E. 266.
Reep, CuypE F. Hyla cinerea in Maryland, Dela-
ware, and Virginia, with notes on the taxo-
nomic status of Hyla cinerea evittata. 328.
———. The herpetofauna of Harford County,
Maryland. 58.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 12
Rose, ALBERT. * Quantum limitation to vision. 31.
Rosen, Mitton W. The influence of space flight
on engineering and science. 79.
Ross, H. H. New species of Helicopsyche from the
Western Hemisphere (Trichoptera, Heli-
copsychidae). 397.
Scuaar, 8. A. * Aerodynamics at very high alti-
tudes. 133.
ScHEFFER, Vicror B. Little-known reference t)
name of harbor seal. 352.
ScHMIDTKE, Ricuarp A. Joule-Thomson coeffi-
cients for Freon-12. 137.
SEEGER, RaymMonp J. Man and science. 169.
———. * On natural philosophy. 32.
SHAFFRAN, I. P. See Hess, W. C. 20.
Sapiro, Maurice M. * Megalomorphs. 372.
SHOCKLEY, WILLIAM. * The statistics of individual
variation in productivity in research labora-
tories. 231.
———. * Transistor physies. 132.
SHorm AKER, CLARENCE R. A new genus and two
new species of amphipods from Dry Torguas,
Florida. 61.
SinceER, 8. F. * The age of meteorites. 134.
SmirH, A. C. Studies of South American plants,
XVI. 118.
Suiru, Lyman B., and Pires, J. Murga. An evalu-
ation of Benjaminia Martius ex Benjamin. 86.
Souns, Ernest R. Calamochloa: A Mexican grass.
109.
. New grasses from Mexico. 376.
. The genus Hilaria (Gramineae). 311.
SoMMERMAN, Katuryn M. Two new species of
Rhyopsocus (Psocoptera) from the U.S.A.,
with notes on the bionomics of one household
species. 145.
Srenui, Francis G. A late Triassic terebratella-
cean from Peru. 101.
Stongn, Anan, and Knient, Kpnnetu L. Type
specimens of mosquitoes in the United States
National Museum: II, The genus Aedes
(Diptera, Culicidae). 213.
———. Type specimens of mosquitoes in the
marred States National Museum: III, The
genera Anopheles and Chagasia (Diptera,
Culicidae). 276.
Srronac, Jonn. * Interim report on studies of
infrared from the moon and the planets. 25.
Tappan, HELEN. See Lomsricu, ALFRED R., Jr.
340.
Taussky, OuGa. See Karo, T. 38.
—— and Topp, Joun. Commuting bilinear
transformations and matrices. 373.
Taytor, Lauriston S. The basis for standards
for radiation protection. 69.
THOMSON, Str GeorGE P. Atomicity and patterns.
201.
Topp, JoHN. See Taussky, OLGA. 373.
Tousry, Ricnarp. * Rocket spectrographs for
the sun in short ultraviolet and X-ray. 23.
TrReEssLER, Wiuiis L. Ostracoda from bromeliads
in Jamaica and Florida. 333.
TuckKERMAN, L. B. See Apams, L. H. 30.
WEINBLUM, Grora. * Problems in ship theory. 229.
Witson, Mitprep Srrarron. North American
harpacticoid copepods: 3, Paracamptus reduc-
tus, n. sp., from Alaska. 348.
WINTERS, STEVEN S. New Permian gastropod
genera from eastern Arizona. 44.
Wirrn, Wiis W., and BLantTon, FRANKLIN S.
Redescriptions of four species of Neotropical
DECEMBER 1956
Culicoides of the debilipalpis group (Diptera:
Heleidae). 186.
I 1 ama Culicoides (Diptera:
Heleidac), Ty; Ife The hylas group of the sub-
genus Hoffmania. 95.
WoLkeEn, JEROME. * Cellular growth,
and function. 26.
Woopuour, A. F. Quantitative studies of differ-
structure,
SUBJECT
Bacteriology. Pertussis and pertussis vaccine con-
trol. MarGaREeT PITTMAN. 234.
Quantitative studies of differential staining
reaction, III: A quantitative acid-fast
stain. A. F, WoopnHour. 344.
Biochemistry. An observation on pufferfish toxin.
Ropert D. MacomsBer. 85.
Effect of cortisone acetate on production of
liver and muscle glycogen from C-14 labeled
glycine and DL-alanine. W. C. Hess and
I. P. SHAFFRAN. 20.
Biophysics. *Cellular growth, structure, and func-
tion. JEROME WOLKEN. 26.
*Information theory and the structure of
protein molecules. HERMAN BRANSON. 27.
* The arithmetic of life. GEorGE Gamow. 26.
Botany. Additional Fijian mosses, III. Epwin B.
BaRTRAM. 392.
An evaluation of Benjaminia Martius ex
Benjamin. Lyman B. Smiru and J. Murga
PIRES. 86.
Calamochloa: A Mexican grass. Ernest R.
Souns. 109.
New grasses from Mexico. Ernrest R. Souns.
376.
New Umbilicariaceae from the Western Hemi-
sphere, with a key to genera. GreorGE A.
Luano. 183.
Studies of South American plants, XVI.
Smiru, A. C. 113.
The genus Hilaria (Gramineae). Ernest R.
Souns. 311.
Chemical engineering. Joule-Thomson coefficients
for Freon-12. RicHarp A. ScHMIDTKE. 137.
Chemistry. * Gray tin. Ropert G. BREcKEN-
RIDGE. 192.
Editorvals. 1, 233.
Engineering. The influence of space flight on en-
gineering and science. Mitton W. ROSEN. 79.
Entomology. A review of the psocids, or book-lice
and bark-lice, of Texas (Psocoptera).
Epwarp lL. Mockrorp and Asuuny B.
Gurney. 353.
Gall midges associated with cones of western
forest trees (Diptera: Itonididae). RicHarp
H. Foote. 48.
New Neotropical genera and species of
apterous aradids (Hemiptera). Cari J.
DRAKE. 322.
New species of Helicopsyche from the Western
Hemisphere (Trichoptera, Helicopsy-
chidae). H. H. Ross. 397.
Redescriptions of four species of Neotropical
Culicoides of the debilipalpis group (Dip-
tera: Heleidae). Winuis W. Wirrn and
FRANKLIN 8S. Buanron. 186. ’
Studies in Panama Culicoides (Diptera:
Heleidae, VI: The hylas group of the sub-
genus Hoffmania. Wiutis W. Wirtrn and
FRANKLIN S. BuantTon. 95.
INDEX
407
ential staining reaction, III: A quantitative
acid-fast stain. 344.
YOcHELSON, Enuis L. Labridens, a new Permian
gastropod. 45.
Youne, R. T. A review of the cestode genus
Echeneibothrium. 256.
Zer¥ross, SamMury. * The role of impurities in
erystal growth. 29.
INDEX
Three new Neotropical flea beetles. Doris H.
Buake. 142.
Two new species of Rhyopsocus (Psocoptera)
from the U.S.A., with notes on the bionomics
of one household species. KatHryn M.
SommMEerMAN. 145.
Type specimens of mosquitoes in the United
States National Museum: II, The genus
Aedes (Diptera, Culicidae). ALAN STONE
and Kennetu L. Kniaut. 213.
Type specimens of mosquitoes in the United
States National Museum: III, The genera
Anopheles and Chagasia (Diptera, Culi-
cidae). ALAN Svronge and Kennetu L.
Knicur. 276.
Ethnology. An investigation of the early bands of
the Saone group of Teton Sioux. Harry
ANDERSON. 87.
Stone ‘‘medicine wheels’’—memorials to
Blackfoot war chiefs. Huan A. Dempsey.
177.
General science. Man and science. RaymMonp J.
SEEGER. 169.
Geology. A hydrologic budget in relation to the
climate and geology of the Beaverdam
Creek basin, Eastern Shore of Maryland.
Gorpon EH. ANDREASEN and Wruiram C.
RASMUSSEN. 266.
Geophysics. Possibilities and significance of high-
speed computing in meteorology. FRANGOIS
N. FRENKIEL. 33.
Radioactive pollution and
Franoots N. FRENKIEL. 206.
* Atmospheric pollution. Frangors N. FREN-
KIEL. 135.
Helminthology. A review of the cestode genus
Echeneibothrium. R. T. Youne. 256.
Herpetology. Hyla cinerea in Maryland, Delaware,
and Virginia, with notes on the taxonomic
status of Hyla cinerea evittata. CuypE F.
ReEEp. 328.
The herpetofauna of Harford County, Mary-
land. Cuypr F. Reep. 58.
History of science. * History and traditions of the
Philosophical Society of Washington. L. H.
Apams, L. B. TuckerMAN, F. “G. Brick-
WEDDE, et al. 30-31.
* On natural philosophy. RayMoNpD J. SEEGER.
39.
Human engineering. * The statisties of individual
variation in productivity in researc *h labora-
tories. WILLIAM SHOCKLEY. 231.
Malacology. Mollusca dredged by the Orca off the
Santa Barbara Islands, California, in 1951.
S. StruuMan Berry. 150.
Mammalogy. A new species of murine opossum
(genus Marmosa) from Peru. CHARLES O.
HANDLEY JR. 402.
Little-know: n reference to name of harbor seal.
Viceror B. Scnuerrer. 352.
civil defense.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 46, No. 12
Two new long-tailed pocket mice (Perog-
nathus formosus) from Arizona. E. LENDELL
Cockrum. 131.
Marine architecture. * Problems in ship theory.
GrEorG WEINBLUM. 229.
Mathematics. Commutators of A and A*. T. Kato
and O. Taussky. 38.
Commuting bilinear transformations and
matrices. Ouca Taussky and JoHN Topp.
373.
Generalization of a theorem of Konig. A. J.
HorrMan. 211.
Numerical experiments in potential theory
using orthonormal functions. P. Davis and
P. RapinowitTz. 12.
*The “Odd Ball Problem.’? Curster H.
Paas, 191.
Unimodular matrices of order 2 that commute.
Karu GOLDBERG. 337.
Medicine. * Some observations on cancer research
and control. J. R. HpELumr. 228.
Mineralogy. * The age of meteorites. 8. F. SINGER.
134.
Nematology. Paratylenchus projectus, new species
(Nematoda, Criconematidae), with a key to
the species of Paratylenchus. W. R. JENKINS.
296.
Notes and news. R. B. Roberts’s 1939 paper on
splitting of uranium and thorium nuclei by
neutrons, 1; Fellows of IRE elected, 17;
New member of National Research Council
(R. P. Teele), 17; New publication on colors,
22: Foraminifera catalog reissued, 22; A
solution to the ‘‘scientist problem, ” 40;
Training program for science and mathe-
matics teachers in secondary schools, 40;
Six District area scientists receive Academy
awards, 65; New director of Naval Research
(O. T. Marzke), 66; Electron tube informa-
tion service, 66; Dr. Curtis celebrated 80th
birthday, 67; NBS-AF panoramic X-ray
machine, 77; National Academy medal
awarded to Dr. Watts, 84; New book on
aquarium fishes yields distribution data,
94; Auca Indians described, 99; Biological
studies at Point Barrow, 103; Dr. John
G. Thompson retires, 108; Roger G. Bates
receives Hillebrand award, 115; Further
notes on teacher training, 115; Low-tem-
perature alignment of radioactive nuclei
provides data on nuclear disintegration,
157; A sonic technique for testing leather, .
165; Large termite collection goes to Smith-
sonian, 182; Science teacher replacement
project, 194; Zine oxide-eugenol dental
fillings, 196; Constant-temperature oven for
quartz crystal oscillator, 196; New chief of
NBS Metallurgy Division (J. I. Hoffman),
197; Rockefeller public service award to
Dr. Fano, 198; A rapid quantitative analysis
of collagen, 198; Bison Basin fossils, 199;
Plastic springs, 232; Low temperature
storage of free radicals, 294; Academy
members receive honors, 301; Oddities of
nature, 303; News of members, 68, 307, 404;
Mauna Loa Observatory, 310; ‘‘Pine cone’’
fishes, 327; Surge voltage breakdowns in a
nonuniform field, 338; H. M. 8S. Loo, 348;
Grants-in-aid, 351; Barro Colorado Bird-
dom, 368; Leather research at NBS, 388;
Small arms and ammunition, 401.
Obituaries. EUGENE CasSsSON CRITTENDEN. 168.
Epwarp Drew MERRILL. 267.
Paleobotany. New items in Cretaceous and Ter-
tiary floras of the western United States.
Roxranp W. Brown. 104.
Paleontology. A late Triassic terebratellacean from
Peru. Francis G. Strestr. 101.
An acanthodian fish from the lower Permian
of Texas. Davin H. DuNKLE and SErGius
H. Mamay. 308.
Chiloguembelina, a new Tertiary genus of the
Heterohelicidae (Formainifera). ALFRED R.
Lorsiicu, Jr., and HELEN Tappan. 340.
Galazaura (calcareous algae) and _ similar
fossil genera. GRAHAM F. Evitiort. 341.
Gyrospira, a new genus of bellerophontid
(Gastzopeda) from Bolivia. A. J. Boucor.
4
Labridens, a new Permian gastropod. ELuts
L. YocuEtson. 45.
New families of Gastropoda. J. BRrooxkEs
Knicut. 41.
New Permian gastropod genera from eastern
Arizona. STEVEN S. WINTERS. 44.
Some new pleurotomarian gastropods from
the Permian of west Texas. Rocrr L.
Batten. 42.
Pharmacology. Some metabolic patterns observed
after morphine administration in the rabbit.
Louris Levy. 253.
Physics. * Aerodynamics at high altitudes. 8. A.
ScHaar. 133.
Atomicity and patterns. Sir GrorcEr P.
THomson. 201.
Cosmological theories—ancient and modern.
R. M. Paes. 244.
Effect of defects on lattice vibrations, II:
Localized vibration modes in a linear dia-
tomic chain. P. Mazur, E. W. MontTrRo.t,
and R. B. Ports. 2.
* Blectrical breakdown in crystals. JaMEs W.
Davisson. 24.
* Hlectron interferometry. L. Marron. 23.
* Image processing by electro-optical tech-
niques. LESLIE S. G. Kovasznay. 135.
Incomplete equilibrium and temperature
measurement. C. M. HERZFELD. 269.
Interaction of molecular beams with surfaces.
IMMANUEL ESTERMANN. 230.
* Interim report on studies of infrared radia-
tion from the moon and the planets. JoHN
SrronG. 25.
Line width and shape in the infrared. W.S.
BENEpIcT. 25.
* Magnetic storms, aurora, ionosphere and
zodiacal light. E. O. HuLBurT. 27.
* Megalomorphs. Maurice M. SuHaprro, 372.
On the surface energy of crystals and its
relation to sintering. CoNYERS HERRING.
229.
Photoeffects and excitons in alkali halides.
Ropert J. Maurer. 370.
Photo-ionization absorption spectra of
negative ions. LEwrs BRANSCOMB. 25.
Quantum limitation to vision. ALBERT
Rose. 31.
* Radio observations of the sun. Joun P.
HaGemn. 24.
* Radio sources and the structure of the
galaxy. JoHN P. HaGan. 136.
* Random processes and noise in semicon-
ductors. RicHarp L. Perritz. 24.
*%
*%
*
DECEMBER 1956
* Rocket spectrographs for the sun in short
ultraviolet and X-ray. RicHarpD TouseEy. 23.
* Solar influences on cosmic-ray variation.
Scotr E. Forsusu. 191.
* Solar protons and aurorae. WILLARD H.
BENNETT. 371.
* Solar X-rays, extreme ultraviolet radiation,
and the ionosphere. HERBERT FRIEDMAN.
28.
*Some aspects of high-pressure molecular
physies. A. MicHeE s. 29.
The basis for standards for radiation pro-
tection. Lauriston 8. Taytor. 69.
* The Hall effect. K. K. Darrow. 25.
* The role of dislocations in crystal growth.
F. Husparp Horn. 29.
* The role of impurities in crystal growth.
SAMUEL ZmERFOSS. 29.
*The role of theories in crystal growth.
Paut Hert. 30.
* The structure of the atomic nucleus. RoBERT
Jastrow. 370.
Transients in signal analysis. Epira L. R.
Cortutss. 305.
*Transistor physics. WILLIAM SHOCKLEY. 132.
* Ultrasonics and the liquid state. THEODORE
Lirovitz. 369.
Physiology. Effect of sympathetic denervation of
the urinary bladder in animals and man.
E. H. Incersouu, L. L. Jones, and E. S.
HEGRE. 299.
INDEX
409
* Pain and tissue damage. James D. Harpy.
193.
Statistics. * The emergence of statistical thought.
Mark Kac. 191.
Zoology. A new crayfish of the genus Procambarus
from South Carolina (Decapoda: Asta-
cidae). Horton H. Hosss, Jr., 117.
A new entoniscid (Crustacea: Isopoda) from
the Pacific coast. Leonarp Muscatine.
122.
A new fairy shrimp from western United
States, with notes on other North American
species. Ratepu W. Dexter. 159.
A new genus and two new species of amphipods
from Dry Tortugas, Florida. CLARENCE
R. SHOEMAKER. 61.
Cossura pygodactylata, a new annelid from
San Francisco Bay (Polychaeta: Cirra-
tulidae). Merepiru L. Jones. 127.
North American harpacticoid copepods: 3,
Paracamptus reductus, n. sp., from Alaska.
Miuprep StrRatTron WILson. 348.
Ostracoda from bromeliads in Jamaica and
Florida, Wiuiis L. TRESSLER. 333.
Some polychaete worms of the families
Hesionidae, Syllidae, and Nereidae from
the east coast of North America, West
Indies, and Gulf of Mexico. Martan H.
PETTIBONE. 281,
The ticks (Acarina: Ixodoidea) of the J. Klap-
perich Afghanistan Expedition, 1952 and
1953. Grorcr ANnastos. 18.
Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences
APE SECT LL mem Parsi vat eahesciss aya yhavererieegiee ene wee R. E. Grseson, Applied Physics Laboratory
AGE STCLCTUL-CLEC LN pyres) 4 s)osay 2) oy tered octet See ee osha ote Wituiam W. RusBeEy, Geological Survey
SAGER LATE ROT 3 Sue eas ee a er tec Hernz Specut, National Institutes of Health
ppeceuter Fis Omran Howarp S. RApPpLereE, Coast and Geodetic Survey (Retired)
ENLUULS UME Tere cic cit ccaue ae eur aN outs Med toons eins URL es
Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications
Harawp A. ReupeEr, U.S. National Museum
Elected Members of the Board of Managers:
PROM ANUAT yp LODE 2s pera a rulelaes eet ctene hese ioies ake takele A. T. McPuerson, A. B. Gurnny
Romlanuanyg G58 aoe en tye ee eee tsvekonlene ce abc tae W. W. Rusey, J. R. SwALLEN
POV S MUM ATV LIOR He an ere inet Franoors N, FRENKIEL, F. L. CAMPBELL
Board of Managers...... All the above officers plus the Vice Presidents and the Editor
[BUG o's'aua ce aera CuEstTEeR H. Pacn, National Bureau of Standards (EM 2-4040)
Associate Editors....... RONALD BAMmrorp, Howarp W. Bonn, IMmManueL EsteERMANN
PRCEGULLUCROOMMULCE. chyna eee eer R. E. Grsson (chairman), W. W. Rusey,
Heinz Specut, H. S. RAPPLEYE, A. B. Gurney
Committee on Membership.......... Louis R. MAXWELL (chairman), Naval Ordnance
Laboratory (HE 4-7100), Gzorez Anastos, W. H. Avery, Rocer W. CuRTIS,
CHURCHILL EISENHART, GEOFFREY EpDsALL, J. H. McMrtiEN
Committee on Meetings.......... A. M. SToNE (chairman), Applied Physics Laboratory
(JU 9-7700), Poitip H. ABELSON, KenneETH S. Cote, Leon F. Curtis, J. WALLACE
Joyce, THomas J. Krnu1an, CoNsTANTIN C Nixrrororr, T. "D. STEWART
Committee on M onographs:
Mowiamuany OST. =. 5.2 coc: hoe dae cohen Haraup A. Rexapar, WiLL1AM A. Dayton
MRovganuary 19587 = 55 disece nee men Dean B. Cowie, Josepu P. E. Morrrson
Morianuanye QoQ. eerie ER Tee ee eit cen ohne
Committee on Awards of Scientific Achievement
Int C. ScHooNOoVER (general chairman), National Bureau of Standards (EM 2-4040)
For Biological Sciences...... Micwaru J. PELCZAR (chairman), University of Mary-
land (WA 7- 3800), James M. Hunpuiey, WILLIE W. SurvH, JoEL WARREN,
R. B. Witnrow
For Engineering Sciences...... ARNOLD Scorr (chairman), National Bureau of
Standards (HM 2-4040), Frank A. Brperstern, J. M. Catpweii, Micnarn
GOLDBERG, GW. A HIcCKLEY, Paut A. SMrtH
For Physical Sciences...... C. R. NagsErR (chairman), George Washington Univer-
sity (ST 3-0250), Howarp W. Bonp, ImmManugeL EsteRMANN, PETER Kina,
bj, Jig Marton, Ex.riotr MontrRot.., 'E. H. Vestine
For Teaching of Science...... B. D. Van Evera (chairman), George Washington
University (ST 3-0250), RonaLp BamrorD, HERMAN BRANSON, KeI1tH JOHNSON,
Howarp OWENS, Marcarer PArTeRson, B. W. Srrreruy
Committee on Grants-in-Aid for Research
W.J. Hamer (chairman), National Bureau of Standards (EM 2-4040), W. R. WEDEL,
H. W. WELLs
Committee on Policy and Planning
Frank M. Setzuer (chairman), Us S. National Museum (NA 8-1810)
MNOMVAMUAT yg Ces ei. ieete morse see oe soni rose oHN EH. Grar, Raymonp J. SEEGER
PRoamWaTvalObS a2 = aces terse ae ss cee TENE DEFANDORF, F. M. Serzuer
Mon ATUMaT yA LOGO «6s acechs ister. alcscole a eherers MARGARET PITTMAN, Watpo L. Scumrrr
Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent
ARCHIBALD T. McPHERSON (chairman); National Bureau of Standards (EM 2-4040)
PORN ANU ATMOS Macuser aeten te eras ea avons Ira B. Hansen, WiLLIAM J. YOUDEN
PROMI AMUATV IDB i sci laneie ne weeds We det ARCHIBALD T. McPurrson, W. T. Reap
RoR VamMuaTya OOO E Metre vets cre anc ie uereiarclenss ea ga cola + Pauu R. MILuer, Leo ScHUBERT
Committee on Science Education (Academy representation on Joint Board for Improve-
ment of Science Education)...... RaymonpD J. SEEGER (chairman), National Science
Foundation (ST 3-2140), ArNoLp H. Scorr, Kerra JoHNsoN, WapDE H. MarsHatu,
Joun K. Taytor
LENTESCNIALIVCLONO OUNCLILO ACPA TT ACW S sere erie Bones A. NELSON SAYRE
Committee of Audttors...... Epwarp WicuHers (chairman), National Bureau of Stand-
ards (HM 2-4040), M. C. Henprrson, P. H. Hninze
Committcctofaliellensmrcrcarm trite haters tesclonurhe rere ore oe
Committee on Ways and Means...... Francois N. FRENKIEL (chairman), Applied Physics
Laboratory (JU 9-7100),S. F. Buaxr, Paut H. Oruser, W. ie Reap, B. F. ScRriBNER
Committee on Public Relations...... A. I. Manan (chairman), Applied Physics Labora-
tory (JU 9-7700), H. PECHT, HowarpD Bonp
CONTENTS
Page
MAatTHEMATICS.—Commuting bilinear transformations and matrices.
OncAWlAUSSKyveand JOHN MLODDAE eee an anne 373
Botany.—New grasses from Mexico. Ernest R. Souns............ 376
Botany.—Additional Fijian mosses, II]. Epwin B. BArTRAM...... 392
ENnToMoLoGcy.—New species of Helicopsyche from the Western Hemi-
sphere (Trichoptera, Helicopsychidae). H. H. Ross............ 397
MammMaLocy.—A new species of murine opossum (genus Marmosa) from
Peru. Caartes ©. HANDLEY, JR:.... 0... 080 ++ >> 0 2 Roe eee 402
INO GESTANGMING WS). = cies. 6: cic elele Saye aie csse bis. 6 2 ors, Mee eee 388, 401, 404
INDEX 'TO: VOLUME:AG: cosi0s cok oc ccs on oc eee ne eee eee 405
t i \,
aS [
can
a ; ‘ i oe a
4 ry {
: '
; =i ay
; ;
; j . int
u ‘ da
j s me ‘ i
i i TU) |
f it ie:
. ¥ f :
ver J ii)
i
i { ‘ i
+ ) i patie
: ; woe i) ; i a
{ : 2 :
5 =i y ‘
: Le
2
J t
{ VS iy
; ie
ie ;
t if
|
} ‘ 7 4 ;
, ;
i i
, ’ }
i an ; vas
Wp al i p
aH i
i A i
, ae ay
t 1 ;
a .!
y i ;
; , i
; ’ zs
; ) My :
f ee a
iT Py in
r
Ee
{ : 1
dl
yi i
i
\ NAS )
if i i =.
4 ‘s ’
Kt ‘ ,
=
( uy) i
5
{ 4
i
¥
wt we
i
At
‘ s ; V
'
:
fi}
a
,
i ss
Me vied f
—s§ Gini